specifications manual john r. park homestead heritage ... · 2020-06-01 · 1.2 intent.1 the...

Specifications Manual

John R. Park Homestead Heritage Centre 915 Essex County Road 50 Essex, ON N0R 1G0 Project No. 2020 June 1, 2020

Prepared By:

Architecttura Inc. Architects 180 Eugenie Street West Windsor, On. N8X 2X6 Ph: (519) 258-1390

Table of Contents Section 00 01 10 Page 1 of 5

John R. Park Homestead Heritage Centre Architecttura Inc. Architects 915 Essex County Road 50 Project No. 2020 Essex, ON, N0R 1G0 June 1, 2020

Pages

PROJECT FILES

NOT USED

COVER & TABLE OF CONTENTS

00 01 01 Project Title Page 1 - 1

00 01 10 Table of Contents 1 - 3

DIVISION 00 — PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

00 01 15 List of Drawing Sheets 1 - 2

00 30 00 Information Available for Review 1 - 1

00 30 00.1 ERCA.Architecturra.JPH.Welcome.T-Time 1 - 4

00 30 00.2 ERCA.Architecttura.JRP.WelcomeCentre 1 - 26

00 30 00.3 John R Park Homestead Elevation Survey - 20191204 1 - 2

00 50 00 Contracting Forms and Supplements 1 - 4

00 72 13 General Conditions 1 - 8

00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions 1 - 4

00 73 19 Health Safety Requirements 1 - 3

00 93 00 Record Clarifications and Proposals 1 - 4

DIVISION 01 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 25 00 Product Substitution Procedures 1 - 1

01 29 00 Payment Procedures 1 - 4

01 31 00 Project Managing and Coordination 1 - 6

01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 1 - 2

01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 1 - 9

01 40 00 Quality Requirements 1 - 6

01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls 1 - 5

01 73 00 Execution 1 - 5

01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management 1 - 3

01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 1 - 6

01 78 00 Closeout Submittals 1 - 7

01 78 39 Project Asbuilts Documents 1 - 4

DIVISION 02 — EXISTING CONDITIONS

NOT USED

DIVISION 03 — CONCRETE

03 00 00 Concrete 1 - 10



DIVISION 04 — MASONRY

NOT USED

DIVISION 05 — METALS

05 12 00 Metals-Structural 1 - 10

DIVISION 06 — WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

06 10 00 Rough and Finish Carpentry 1 - 5

06 12 00 Structural Insulated Panels 1 - 4

06 17 56 Plate Connected Wood Trusses 1 - 4

06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork 1 - 6

DIVISION 07 — THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07 21 00 Thermal Insulation 1 - 2

07 26 16 Underslab Vapour Retarders 1 - 3

07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles 1 - 3

07 46 23 Wood Siding 1 - 3

07 54 00 TPO Membrane Roofing 1 - 9

07 62 00 Metal Siding, Flashing and Trim 1 - 3

07 84 00 Firestopping 1 - 3

07 92 00 Sealants 1 - 4

DIVISION 08 — OPENINGS

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1 - 4

08 43 13 Aluminum Storefront and Doors 1 - 10

08 54 13 Fiber Glass Fixed Window Unit 1 - 7

08 81 00 Glass & Glazing 1 - 11

DIVISION 09 — FINISHES

09 29 00 Gypsum Board 1 - 5

09 30 00 Tiling 1 - 5

09 51 00 Tectrum 1 - 4

09 51 23 Acoustical Tile Ceilings 1 - 3

09 65 19 Resilient Tile Flooring Rubber Base 1 - 3

09 68 13 Carpet 1 - 3

09 91 00 Painting 1 - 7

DIVISION 10 — SPECIALTIES

10 11 00 Visual Display Surfaces 1 - 3

10 21 14 Metal Toilet Partitions 1 - 4

10 28 00 Misc Accessories 1 - 4



DIVISION 11 — EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 12 — FURNISHINGS

12 48 40 Entrance Mats & Grids 1 - 3

DIVISION 13 — SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

NOT USED

DIVISION 14 — CONVEYING EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 21 — FIRE SUPPRESSION

21 07 20 Firestopping 1 - 2

21 24 16 Fire Extinguishers 1 - 2

DIVISION 22 — PLUMBING

22 05 00 Common Work Results For Plumbing 1 - 4

22 05 01 Plumbing 1 - 5

22 05 15 Plumbing Specialties and Accessories 1 - 8

22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 1 - 3

22 10 00 Plumbing Piping 1 - 7

22 13 16.13 Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping - Cast Iron and Copper 1 - 3

22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim v3 1 - 8

22 47 00 Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers 1 - 3

DIVISION 23 — HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

23 00 00.1 Mechanical General Provisions 1 - 12

23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 1 - 3

23 05 01 Basic Materials and Methods 1 - 14

23 05 15 Common Installation Requirements for HVAC Pipework 1 - 8

23 05 19 Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping 1 - 7

23 05 29 Base Hangers and Supports 1 - 5

23 05 94 Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems 1 - 3

23 07 13 Duct Insulation 1 - 5

23 30 00 Air Distribution 1 - 11

23 31 13.01 Metal Ducts Low Pressure 500 PA 1 - 6

23 32 48 Acoustical Air Plenums 1 - 4

23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 1 - 4

23 33 46 Flexible Ducts 1 - 2



DIVISION 26 — ELECTRICAL

26 05 00 Common Work Results for Electrical 1 - 7

26 05 01 General Electrical Provisions 1 - 9

26 05 02 Submittals 1 - 4

26 05 03 Basic Materials and Methods 1 - 10

26 05 05.01 Wiring for Other Trades 1 - 1

26 05 20 Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000 V) 1 - 2

26 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Electrical 1 - 2

26 05 32 Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings 1 - 2

26 05 34 Conduit Fastening 1 - 4

26 12 16 Distribution Transformers (Dry Type) 1 - 2

26 24 16 Panelboards and Circuit Breakers 1 - 2

26 24 16.01 Panelboards Breaker Type 1 - 3

26 50 00 Lighting 1 - 3

26 52 13.13 Emergency Lighting 1 - 3

26 52 13.16 Exit Signs 1 - 2

DIVISION 27 — COMMUNICATIONS

27 05 28 Telephone and Data System Raceways 1 - 4

27 15 00 Data Cabling 1 - 14

DIVISION 28 — ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY

NOT USED

DIVISION 31 — EARTHWORK

31 00 00 Earthwork 1 - 4

31 23 00 Excavation Backfill and Grading 1 - 7

31 23 16.13 Trenching 1 - 2

DIVISION 32 — EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

32 13 13 Concrete Paving & Sidewalks 1 - 7

32 13 16 Asphalt Concrete Pavement for Building Sites 1 - 3

32 16 13 Concrete Curbs 1 - 3

32 90 00 Planting 1 - 5

32 91 19 Topsoil 1 - 3

32 92 19 Seeding 1 - 3

32 92 23 Sodding 1 - 3

DIVISION 33 — UTILITIES

NOT USED



DIVISION 34 — TRANSPORTATION

NOT USED

DIVISION 35 — WATERWAY AND MARINE

NOT USED

DIVISION 40 — PROCESS INTERCONNECTIONS

NOT USED

DIVISION 41 — MATERIAL PROCESSING AND HANDLING EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 42 — PROCESS HEATING, COOLING, AND DRYING EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 43 — PROCESS GAS AND LIQUID HANDLING, PURIFICATION AND STORAGE EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 44 — POLLUTION AND WASTE CONTROL EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 45 — INDUSTRY-SPECIFIC MANUFACTURING EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 46 — WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

NOT USED

DIVISION 48 — ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATION

NOT USED

List of Drawing Sheets Section 00 01 15 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Drawing Index

ARCHITECTURAL

■ A000 COVER SHEET

■ A001 GENERAL INFORMATION

■ A002 CODE COMPLIANCE

■ A101 OVERALL SITE PLAN

■ A102 ENLARGED SITE PLAN

■ A201 FLOOR PLANS

■ A202 WALL & FLOOR FINISH PLANS

■ A203 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

■ A204 INTERIOR ELEVATIONS

■ A205 ROOF PLAN

■ A301 FIRST FLOOR REFLECTED CEILING PLAN

■ A401 EXTERIOR ELEVATIONS

■ A501 BUILDING SECTIONS



■ A601 WALL SECTIONS

■ A602 WALL SECTIONS

■ A603 WALL SECTION DETAILS

■ A701 WASHROOM PLANS & ELEVATIONS

■ A901 STAIR PLAN, SECTION, AND DETAILS

■ A1201 MILLWORK

STRUCTURAL

■ S000 COVER SHEET

■ S001 GENERAL NOTES

■ S101 FOUNDATION PLAN & SAWCUT LAYOUT

■ S102 FOUNDATION SECTIONS

■ S201 ROOF & MEZZANINE FRAMING PLANS

■ S601 FRAMING SECTIONS

■ S701 FRMAING ELEVATIONS

MECHANICAL

■ M000 MECHANICAL COVER SHEET

List of Drawing Sheets Section 00 01 15 Page 2 of 2


■ M001 MECHANICAL LEGEND

■ M002 MECHANICAL GENERAL NOTES

■ M201 SANITARY & STORM

■ M202 DOMESTIC WATER

■ M303 AIR DISTRIBUTION

■ M304 AIR DISTRIBUTION

■ M305 SECTIONS

■ M400 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULE

■ M401 TYP. DETAILS

ELECTRICAL

■ E000 ELECTRICAL COVER SHEET

■ E001 GENERAL ELECTRICAL NOTES - 1

■ E002 GENERAL ELECTEICAL NOTES - 2

■ E101 SITE PLAN - PHOTOMETRIC

■ E102 SITE PLAN – POWER & LIGHTING

■ E201 LIGHTING FLOOR PLAN

■ E202 LIGHT FIXTURES & LIGHT CONTROL SCHEDULE

■ E203 LIGHTING CONTROL SCHEMATICS

■ E301 POWER & SYSTEMS FLOOR PLAN

■ E302 ELECTRICAL PANEL SCHEDULE & DETAILS

END OF SECTION 00 01 15

Instructions to Bidders Section 00 21 13Page 1 of 7

ERCA Architecttura Inc. Architects John R. Park Homestead Heritage Centre Project No: 2020

915 Essex County Road 50 June 1,2020Essex, ON N0R 1G0

PART 1 - GENERAL1.1 Invitation

.1 Bid Call .1 Offers signed under seal, executed, and dated will be received by the

Architect.

.2 Offers submitted after the above time shall be returned to the bidder unopened.

1.2 Intent.1 The intent of this bid call is to obtain an offer to perform work to complete “John R.

Park Homestead Heritage Centre located at 915 Essex County Road 50, Essex, ON N0R 1G0, Project No: 2020 for a Stipulated Price contract, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

1.3 Contract Documents Identification.1 The Contract Documents are identified as “John R. Park Homestead Heritage

Centre, Project No. 2020,” prepared by Architecttura Inc. located at 180 Eugenie Street West, Windsor, ON N8X 2X6, Ph (519) 258-1390,

.2 Contract/Bid Documents

.1 Definitions.1 Contract Documents: Defined in CCDC 2 – 2008 Edition, Definitions..2 Bid Documents: Contract Documents supplemented with Instructions

to Bidders, Bid Form, Bid Securities, Bid Supplementary Forms identified herein.

.3 Bid, Offer, or Bidder: Act of submitting an offer under seal.

.4 Bid Price: Monetary sum identified by the Bid Form..2 Queries/Addenda

.1 Direct questions as mentioned above.

.2 Addenda may be issued during the bidding period. All addenda become part of the Contract Documents and all appendixes must be submitted with tender. Include costs in the Bid Price.

.3 Verbal answers are only binding when confirmed on written addenda.

.3 Interpretation of Tender Documents.1 Note: The contractor is to review all documents provided by the

consultant with sufficient time to understand the full scope of work prior to the submission of their bid. If there is any question as to the scope required, the contractor is to submit an RFI to the consultant per the time line outlined in the tender documents. Interpretations of the document intent by the contractor will not be permitted and the contractor will be subject to an interpretation only by the prime consultant as a resolution.




.4 Product/System Options.1 Where the Bid Documents stipulate a particular product or options,

alternatives will not be allowed.

1.4 Site Assessment.1 The General Contractor shall visit and examine the site and become familiar with

all features, characteristics, conditions and suitability of the work affecting the work of the contract. No allowance will be made by the Owner for any errors, misjudgements and/or difficulties encountered by the General Contractor due to any feature or peculiarity of the site or surrounding property which exists at the time the General Contractor’s Tender is submitted.

.2 Examination of the site is mandatory on Thursday June 4th @ 11:00 a.m.

1.5 Bid Submission.1 Submissions

.1 Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed.

.2 One (1) copy of sealed tender enclosed within an envelope marked on tender envelope – “John R. Park Homestead Heritage Centre”. Note: Bid Bond must be submitted in a separate envelope.Will be received by:

Architecttura Inc. Architects180 Eugenie Street WestWindsor, ON N8X 2X6

There will be a drop off box in the Vestibule. There is plenty of parking in the parking lot. No one will enter the building but to drop off tender in the Vestibule. Please ensure your envelope is wipeable. At 2:01 p.m. the front door will be locked.We will drop off the Tender’s to ERCA where they will open via a Zoom on Tuesday, June 23, 2020 @ 2:00 p.m. All those who submitted will be invited to the public meeting.

Bid form pages 1 thru 8Up to 2:00 p.m. E.S.T., Date: Friday, June 19, 2020

.3 Direct all inquires Re:

Architectural: Architecttura Inc. at Ph (519) 258-1390, Email: [email protected]

.4 The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any and all bids, and to accept any part of any one bid.

1.6 Performance Assurance.1 Bid Bond

.1 Submit a Bid Bond from a Surety Company authorized to do business in

mailto:[email protected]




the Province of Ontario payable to the Essex Region Conservation Authority in the amount of 10%of the total bid amount. The actual amount must be specified in the Bid Bond.

.2 Submit an Agreement to Bond from a Surety Company authorized to do business in the Province of Ontario.

.3 Bid Bond and Agreement to the Bond are to be enclosed within a separate envelope.

.4 The Bid Bond and Agreement to Bond of the unsuccessful bidders will be returned upon closing of a contract by the Owner.

.5 The accepted bidder shall provide a Performance bond of 50% of the total tender price and Labour and Materials Payment bond of 50% of Total Tender Price from a licensed Canadian approved bonding company prior to commencement of work.

.6 Include cost of bonds in the Bid Price..2 Insurance

.1 See General Conditions of the CCDC 2, 2008 under part II, Insurance Bonds.

.3 Bid Form Requirements.1 All trades are to outline a time period to complete work..2 The bidder, in submitting an offer, accepts the time period stated in the

contract documents for performing the work. The completion date in the Agreement shall be this completion time added to the commencement date.

.3 The Owner requires that under the work of this contract be completed as quickly as possible and consideration will be given to time of completion when reviewing the submitted bids.

.4 Refer to Supplementary Conditions for inclusion of taxes and procedures for tax rebate claims by the Owner.

.5 Fees for Changes in the Work.1 Include in the Bid Form, the overhead and profit fees applicable for

changes in the work, whether additions to or deductions from the work on which the bid price is based.

.2 Include in the Bid Form, the fees proposed for subcontract work for changes (both additions and deductions) in the work. The Contractor shall apply fees as noted, to the subcontractor’s gross (net plus fee) costs on additional work. See 1.15 Additional Work to Contract.

.6 Appendices to the Bid Form.1 Appendix A –Stipulated Price Bid: Include a complete listing of cost

breakdowns by which the bid price was derived complete listing as schedule in the Contract Documents – Table of Contents.

.2 Appendix B – Addenda: List the number and date of all addenda issued.

.3 Appendix C – Subcontractors: Include all the names of all Subcontractors and the portion (s) of the work the Bidder will perform. Note: Listing Own Forces when it is clear that the General Contractor is not capable of performing that work will lead to disqualification of bid.




.4 Appendix D – List of Unit Prices

.5 Appendix E – List of Separate Prices

1.7 Offer Acceptance/Rejection.1 Duration of Offer

.1 Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of forty five (45) calendar days after the bid closing date. The Owner may at any time within this period accept any offer of the tenders received.

.2 Acceptance of Offer.1 The right to reject any or all tenders in whole or in part, or to accept the

tender or parts thereof judged most satisfactory is expressly reserved by the Essex Region Conservation Authority without liability on the part of the Owner.

.2 After a bid has been accepted, all rejected bids will be returned to the respective bidders with submitted bid securities and the requested enclosures.

1.8 Permits

.1 Building permit and development charges are to be deducted from provided allowance. All other required permits and connection charges are to be paid for and obtained by the respective contractors and price of all associated costs for permits are to be included in the Contractor’s stipulated price.

1.9 Separate/Alternate Prices.1 Harmonized Sales Tax (H.S.T.)

.1 The stipulated contract price submitted for this contract shall not include the Harmonized Sales Tax (H.S.T.).

.2 The Contractor WILL NOT be permitted to add any mark-up for overhead or profit to the H.S.T. amount or to claim for any time involved with processing or collecting the H.S.T. and for its remittance to Revenue Canada.

1.10 Workplace Safety and Insurance Owner Certificate of Clearance.1 Furnish a copy of Worker’s Compensation Certificate in good standing..2 Furnish a copy of a Certificate of Liability Insurance in an amount not less than

$5,000,000.00..3 The successful contractor shall provide to the Owner such Certificate before

commencing work..4 The Contractor shall conform to the regulations contained in the “Occupational

Health and Safety Act”, Revised Statutes of Ontario 1980, and relevant regulations as amended and assume full responsibility for contravention’s of the same. The Certificate shall be submitted before commencing work.

1.11 Guarantee.1 Guarantee, in writing, all material and workmanship for a period of at least one (1)

year from the date of acceptance of the work.




.2 General Contractor will be responsible for instructing and ensuring that the Mechanical and Electrical Subcontractors submit in writing, the exact same guarantee so described above in Section 1.12.1.

.3 General Contractor will be responsible for searching out each Section for warranty or guarantee requirement that is requested, then each Subcontractor will be instructed to submit such in writing to the General Contractor to be forwarded onto the Owner’s Representative.

.4 The Contractor shall forward ALL OF the required warranties or guarantees to the Owner’s Representative in order to receive final payment.

1.12 Fair Wages and Hours.1 All persons in the employment of the Contractor or any Subcontractor, or other

person doing or contracting to do the whole or any part of the work contemplated by the Contract, should be paid in accordance with the “Fair Wage Schedule” as established by the Employment Standards Branch of the Ministry of Labour and any regulations under such Act that relates to wages, hours of work, or other labour conditions, unless otherwise noted.

1.13 Construction Period .1 All work to commence as soon as Municipality approval and substantially completed by Friday December 18, 2020.

.2 The Contractor shall base his tender upon the construction period proposed. The contractor shall state his starting and finishing dates. Otherwise, the Contractor shall state the proposed starting date, the number of weeks required to complete the work after receipt of Purchase Order.

.3 During the progress of the construction stage, should the Contractor’s Schedule fall behind in regards to production activity in the event of delay of materials, strikes, walk-outs and matters beyond the reasonable control, the Contractor shall at such time notify verbally and in writing to the Owner’s Representative requesting extension to the completion deadline date. At such time, the Owner’s Representative will review the matter of the problem in question and the new proposed completion deadline date for consideration of acceptance.

.4 Upon completion of the project, the Owner’s Representative and the General Contractor will inspect all new work preparing an itemized list known as deficiencies. At such time, the Owner’s Representative will itemize each deficiency noted with a dollar amount which will be held back until all work has been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. If such deficiencies are prolonged due to lack of interest by the Contractor, the Owner will then RETENDER all the unfinished items to outside Contractor’s, whatever cost is then encountered to the Owner, that amount will then be subtracted from the stipulated contract sum or the Owner will take over in completing the unfinished items using the specified holdback dollar amount, that amount will then be subtracted from the stipulated contract amount.

.5 For failure of performance of the contract as committed, the Contractor will be considered for disqualification for tendering on any future Owner projects for a minimum period of two (2) years.

.6 The Contractor’s presence on site shall be continuous upon commencement of the project. A site supervisor representing the General Contractor will be present on each individual construction site at all times during the duration of this project unless otherwise agreed upon with the Architect and the Owner’s Representative.




1.14 Additional Work to Contract.1 The Contractor shall submit all price in writing showing a complete breakdown of

material and labour cost with a percentage covering overhead and profit as follows:

.1 Contractor’s mark-up on its own work:.1 Overhead and Profit: 10%

.2 Contractor’s mark-up on Subcontractor’s work:.1 Overhead and Profit: 10%

.3 Subcontractor’s mark-up on its own work:.1 Overhead and Profit: 10%

.4 Subcontractor’s mark-up on Subcontractor’s work:.1 Overhead and Profit: 10%.2 Acceptance of extra cost shall be authorized by the Architect in writing

by means of issuing a Change Order..3 Any work which may be in process or completed by the Contractor or

Subcontractor without written authorization from the Architect will not be given consideration for additional payment.

1.15 Construction Lien Act.1 Upon substantial completion of the project, the procedure for certification by the

payment certifier (Owner) is only mandatory upon the application of the Contractor. If the General Contractor chooses not to make an application for Certification of Substantial Performance then the lien period for the Contractor expires as stated in Section 31. of the Act.

.2 The Architect and the Owner’s Representative and the General Contractor will define a substantial completion date prior to the deficiency inspection. At such time, the Owner’s Representative will holdback the amount of ten percent (10%) of the stipulated contract sum for a period of sixty (60) days from the Substantial Completion date. The holdback will be released at the end of the specified period after a search of title of that particular project.

1.16 Cash Allowances.1 The General Contractor shall include in his Tender Price the following Provisional

Cash Allowances:.2 PROVISIONAL CONTINGENCY ALLOWANCE

.1 Include in the Tender Price a Provisional Contingency Allowance of Three Thousand Five Hundred Dollars ($3,500.00) for Material Testing such as concrete, compaction and steel testing.

.2 Include in the Tender Price a Provisional Contingency Allowance of Eleven Thousand Five Hundred Dollars ($11,000.00) for Building Permit and Development Charges. All other permit and connection fees to be carried by respective trade unless noted otherwise or accommodated in separate allowance.

.3 Include in the Tender Price a Provisional Contingency Allowance of Two Thousand and Five Hundred Dollars ($2,500.00) for Exterior Building Signage.




.4 Include in the Tender Price a Provisional Contingency Allowance of Thirty Eight Thousand Dollars ($38,000.00) for Door Hardware & Barrier Free Operators.


Information Available for Review Section 00 30 00 Page 1 of 1


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Investigation Data and Reports

.1 A copy of a detailed geotechnical investigation report is included herein, titled as Report on the Geotechnical Investigation for the Essex Region Conservation Authority, T-Time Estimation form Grain Size Analysis for Welcome Centre at John R. Park Homestead Heritage Museum, 915 Essex County Road 50, Essex , ON, dated Thursday April 23, 2020 by CT Soil & Materials Engineering Inc. (1-4 pages).

.2 A copy of a detailed geotechnical investigation report is included herein, titled as Report on the Geotechnical Investigation for the Essex Region Conservation Authority Geotechnical Investigation for the Welcome Centre at John R. Park Homestead Heritage Museum, 915 Essex County Road 50, Essex , ON, dated Thursday April 28, 2020 by CT Soil & Materials Engineering Inc. (1-26 pages).

.3 The Geotechnical Investigation report records properties of the soils and recommendations for the design of foundations, prepared primarily for the use of the Consultant. The recommendations given shall not be construed as requirement of this Contract unless contained in the Contract Documents.

.4 The Geotechnical reports, by their nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist or can occur on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from the report, changes in the design and construction of foundations will be made, with resulting credits or expenditures to the contract Price accruing to the Owner.

.5 A copy of the Elevation Survey is included with the drawings, by ERCA staff Surveyor/Technical Assistant, Sydney Clackett, dated December 4, 2019. (2 pages)

.6 Neither the Owner nor the Consultant guarantee the accuracy or completeness of these reports. The Owner and the Consultant assume no responsibility for any interpretation or deduction that the Contractor may make from these reports.


Ref.No.: 20G024 Thursday, April 23, 2020 Essex Region Conservation Authority c/o Architecturra inc. 180 Eugenie St. W. Windsor, ON N8X 2X6 Attention: Carmen Brunone, OAA, MRAIC [email protected] Re: T-Time Estimation from Grain Size Analysis for Welcome Centre at John R. Park Homestead Heritage Museum, 915 Essex County Road 50, Essex, Ontario Dear Sir:

In accordance with your request, we have completed a T-Time estimation based on samples

obtained during the field work portion of the geotechnical investigation for the new Welcome Centre, the

local water table level (perched) was measure to be within 450 mm of ground surface. This high-water

level precludes the ability to complete in situ field percolation testing, as there would be no water

exfiltration from the percolation testholes. Samples were obtained by our technical field crew on April 15,

2020 and submitted to our laboratory for review and testing. Three samples were taken from beneath the

area topsoil level within the proposed building area, as the new septic bed location has not been

determined as of the time of this report.

Laboratory grain size analyses were completed on the designated samples in order to classify

them according to the Unified Soil Classification System. The grain size distribution curve is presented

on the attached graphs.

Based solely on the results of the grain size, the following is a summary of the soil classification

and estimated T-Time.

mailto:[email protected]

Ref,No.: 20G024 Page 2 T-Time Estimation from Grain Size Analysis for

Welcome Centre at John R. Park Homestead Heritage Museum, 915 Essex County Road 50, Essex, Ontario

20G024.ERCA.Architecturra.JPH.Welcome.T-Time.docx Soil & Materials Engineering Inc.

SAMPLE NO. DEPTH OF SAMPLE (m)

CLASSIFICATION (OBC SB – 6)

ESTIMATED T-TIME (MINS/CM)

3 0.25 Silty Fine Sand (SM) – Chart 7 8 – 20

3 0.60 Fine Sandy Silt (ML) – Chart 9 20 - 50

4 0.60 Fine Sandy Silt (ML) – Chart 9 20 - 50

Therefore, we recommend the use of an estimated T-Time value of 40 mins/cm* (Drawings 1 and

2).

*The OBC Supplementary Standard SB-6 recommends to:

“Select from within this range by determining if the soil is within the low, middle or high part of the

range considering the soil identifiers and soil characteristics. Consider structure, density, colour,

prevalence of organics, the clay content and mineralogy, the plasticity index and liquid limit and

the functioning of existing systems in similar soils in the area.”

Due to the locally high-water table, we recommend a raised leaching bed in order to ensure a

sufficient oxygenated treatment zone before the effluent reaches the water table.

We trust that the above addresses your project requirements at this time. Please do not hesitate

to contact us should you have any questions.

Regards, Soil & Materials Engineering Inc.

T.O’Dwyer, P.Eng. Consulting Engineer

Enclosures

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100

3

U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHESHYDROMETER50 30 1660

GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION

PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

R B

Y W

EIG

HT

3 0.25

Specimen Identification Classification LL PL PI Cc Cu

10 68

3 0.25 0.162

GRAIN SIZE IN MILLIMETERS

fine medium coarse fine

100 20 4

3/8 3/4

0.098

U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS3 1/2 1140 40 14 6200 2 41.5

coarseCOBBLES

GRAVELSANDSILT OR CLAY

0.0 86.5

D60D100Specimen Identification %Clay%Silt%Sand%GravelD10D30

13.52.36

Silty sands, sand-silt mixturesMore than 12% finer than 0.074 mm

Plasticity Index (Ip) less than 4Plots below "A" line on plasticity chart

Chart 7 - SM

SM SM

SM

C.T. Soil & Materials Testing Inc.2000 Legacy Park DriveWindsor, ON N8W 5S6Telephone: (519) 966-8863Fax: www.ctsoil.com Drawing 1

Project: Welcome Centre at John R. Park HomesteadLocation: 915 Essex Cnty Rd. 50, Essex, ONNumber: 20G024

OB

C S

G C

HA

RT

07

20G

024.

GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T 2

0-4-

23

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

0.001 0.01 0.1 1 10 100

8

3

4

0.60

0.60

0.091

0.108

0.026

0.041

U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS3 1/2 1140 40 14 6200 2 41.5

coarseCOBBLES


fine medium coarse fine

100 20 4

3/8 3/4 3

U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHESHYDROMETER50 30 1660


PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

R B

Y W

EIG

HT

3

4

0.60

0.60

Specimen Identification Classification LL PL PI Cc Cu

10 6

GRAVELSANDSILT OR CLAY

2.0

0.0

46.7

51.2

34.7

35.9

D60D100Specimen Identification %Clay%Silt%Sand%GravelD10D30

9.5

4.75

16.6

12.9

Inorganic silts and fine sands, rockflour, silty or clayey fine sands or clayey

silts with slight plasticityLiquid Limit, Wl, less than 50

Chart 9 - ML

Silty fine sand

Clayey Silt

Clayey fine sand



OB

C S

G C

HA

RT

09

20G

024.

GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T 2

0-4-

23

Report on

Geotechnical Investigation for the

Welcome Centre at John R Park Homestead

Heritage Museum Complex, Essex, Ontario

Report Issued to

Essex Region Conservation Authority

c/o Architecturra Inc.

180 Eugenie St. W.

Windsor, ON N8X 2X6

Attention: Carmen Brunone, OAA, MRAIC [email protected]

Date of Report Job No.

April 28, 2020 20G024 Rev.: 00 Distribution of Report

1 e-copy – Architecturra Inc.

Job No. 20G024 Geotechnical Investigation for the Welcome Centre at John R Park Homestead


Soil & Materials Engineering Inc.

Page 2

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

In accordance with the request and authorization from Carmen Brunone, OAA, MRAIC of

Architecturra Inc., Soil & Materials Engineering Inc. completed a geotechnical investigation for the

proposed Single-story Welcome Centre to be built within the John R Park Homestead Heritage Museum

complex located in Essex, Ontario.

The geotechnical investigation included four augered and sampled testholes and Specialty

Marchetti-type flat plate dilatometer (DMT) probe offset 8 metres from testhole. Subsequent lab testing for

the samples obtained during the investigation was completed. Based on the results of the geotechnical

investigation, Soil & Materials Engineering Inc. offers the following conclusions regarding the geotechnical

recommendations:

• Ultimate Limit States Factored Bearing Resistance for: Isolated square footings can be

between 100 kPa at a depth up to 1.0 metres and 185 kPa up to a depth of 1.7 metres,

Continuous strip footings similarly; 90 kPa to 150 kPa.

• Serviceability Limit States Unfactored Geotechnical Resistance for: Isolated square

footings can be between 70 kPa at a depth up to 1.0 metres and 125 kPa up to a depth of

1.7 metres, Continuous strip footings similarly; 60 kPa to 100 kPa this limit ensures less

than an inch of settlement.

• Floor slab-on-grade design

• Excavation recommendations that include safe side walls from the bottom at a minimum

gradient of 2H:1V in accordance with Provincial Regulations, after dewatering.

• A class “E” classification for seismic site response.




Page 3

Table of Contents

Page Executive Summary 1.0 Introduction ................................................................................................................ 5 2.0 Investigative Program ................................................................................................. 6 3.0 Site Conditions ............................................................................................................ 8 3.1 Geological Condition ........................................................................................... 8 3.2 Soil Condition ..................................................................................................... 8 3.2.1 Fill and Topsoil ........................................................................................ 9 3.2.2 Silty Sand ................................................................................................ 9 3.2.3 Clayey Sand ............................................................................................ 9 3.2.4 Sandy Silt ................................................................................................ 9 3.2.5. Silty Clay .................................................................................................. 9 3.2.5.1 Desiccated Silty Clay .............................................................................. 9 3.2.5.2 Plastic Grey Silty Clay ........................................................................... 10 3.3 Groundwater ..................................................................................................... 10 4.0 Discussion and Recommendations ........................................................................ 11 4.1 Foundations ...................................................................................................... 11 4.1.1 Ultimate Limit States .............................................................................. 11 4.1.2 Serviceability Limit States ...................................................................... 12 4.1.3 Foundation Design (General) ................................................................. 13 4.2 Floor Slab-on-Grade ......................................................................................... 14 4.3 Excavation and Construction ............................................................................ 15 4.4 Seismic Site Conditions .................................................................................... 16 5.0 Closure ...................................................................................................................... 17




Page 4

List of Tables Table 1: U.L.S Factored Bearing Resistance Table 2: Geotechnical Resistance (Unfactored) at S.L.S




Page 5

1.0 INTRODUCTION

Architecttura Inc authorized Soil & Materials Engineering Inc. to complete a Geotechnical

Investigation for the proposed single-story Welcome Centre to be built within the John R. Park

Homestead Heritage Museum complex located at 915 Essex County Road 50, Essex, Ontario. The area

of development is a currently vacant grassland.

The scope of work is to carry out a geotechnical investigation for project design purposes and to

prepare a geotechnical report based on soil borings and laboratory testing.

This report discusses the results of our investigation with respect to the proposed development.

The results of the fieldwork and laboratory testing programs were used to determine the relevant soil and

groundwater parameters at this site. The recommendations contained in this report refer to the

geotechnical aspect of the soil conditions encountered in the exploratory holes.




Page 6

2.0 INVESTIGATIVE PROGRAM

The field work portion of the geotechnical investigation for the proposed Welcome Centre

consisted of four augered and sampled testholes (Testholes 1 and 3 through 5) with a companion

Specialty Marchetti-type flat plate dilatometer (2-DMT) probe offset 8 metres from the soil boring at the

approximate location indicated on the Site Maps (Drawing 1 and 2). The testholes were designated for

the assessment of the subsurface condition for the proposed reconstruction and was advanced to a

maximum depth of 8.4 metres below grade. The advancement of the testholes was facilitated with a

crawler-mounted power auger machine owned and operated by C.T. Soil & Materials Testing Inc. The

crawler-mounted drill unit is equipped with hollow stem augers, solid stem augers, conventional soil

sampling tools and a Marchetti-type flat plate dilatometer (DMT). The testholes were completed on April

15, 2020 and April 16, 2020 under the direction of a Geotechnical Engineer. The testhole information from

the geotechnical investigation is presented in graphical form on the Log of Testholes (Drawings 3 to 6).

Soil samples were retrieved at frequent intervals of depth using the Standard Penetration Test

Method (ASTM D1586), the results of which were recorded as N-values. The DMT was advanced using

the crawler-mounted drill rig and diaphragm inflation and deflation pressures recorded in accordance with

ASTM D6635, the results of which are superimposed on the Log of Testhole (2-DMT).The retained soil

samples were field logged, placed in suitable containers and transported to our laboratory for further

detailed examination and testing.

The testhole locations were directed by Soil and Materials Engineering where the single-story

building will be constructed. A level survey was completed in order to relate the testholes to a local

benchmark. The local benchmark used for this geotechnical investigation was the nail set in hydro pole

on NW corner of parking lot of John R. Park Homestead. The benchmark had an assigned El.176.20 m.

The depths and elevations presented in this report were derived for the sole benefit of the geotechnical

analysis and stratigraphic evaluation by the geotechnical engineer and should not be used by others, for

any other purpose.

The laboratory testing included a detailed visual and tactile examination of the retrieved samples

along with soil moisture content, and grain size distribution on selected soil samples. The results of the




Page 7

laboratory testing are presented on the testhole logs (Drawings 3 through 6). Laboratory or field pocket

penetrometer results, and in situ vane tests to assess undrained shear strength were taken on selected

samples as plotted on the enclosed logs.




Page 8

3.0 SITE AND SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS

The new One-Story Heritage Centre will be located within the John R Park Homestead Heritage

Museum complex, located off County Road 50, Kingsville, Ontario. The ground surface is relatively flat

and level. ERCA has provided a floodproofing elevation map in order for the design to accommodate the

periodic high-water levels at this site.

3.1 Geological Condition

The site is located within the western part of an extensive clay plain formation (Essex Clay Plain)

characterized by fairly uniform geologic features. Standing between the basins of Lake Erie and Lake St.

Clair, the surface is, essentially, a till plain overlying middle Devonian sedimentary rocks (limestone and

shale). Limestone underlies most of the Essex County area; shale beneath the northern and eastern

portion of Windsor. The thickness of the soil overburden in the general area is estimated to be 20 + 5

metres.

At various sites in the region, gas and/or oil pockets, and/or artesian sulphur water are

encountered near or immediately below the bedrock surface.

No major faults or dislocations due to the breaking of the Palaeozoic bedrock are reported in

South-western Ontario.

3.2 Soil Condition

The stratigraphic and interpreted boundaries in the testholes were obtained from 38 mm diameter

samples, retrieved from 165 mm diameter auger holes. The soil shear strength consistency, as provided

on the enclosed testhole logs (Drawings 3 through 6) are based on "N"-values determined from the

Standard Penetration Test Method (ASTM D1586) and pocket penetrometer tests.




Page 9

3.2.1 Fill and Topsoil

All testholes encountered topsoil. The topsoil is a moist black organic sandy mix. The topsoil

thickness varies from 0.1 m to 0.5 m. After the topsoil, Fill was encountered at testhole 5 at 0.5 m to a

depth of 0.6 m.

3.2.2 Silty Sand

The fill and topsoil are underlain by a brown moist silty sand. The silty sand extends to a depth of

0.6 m to 1.5 m below grade. The compactness of the silty sand ranges from “loose” to “compact”.

3.2.3 Clayey Sand

In Testhole 1, clayey sand with silt was encountered at a depth of 0.4 m and terminated at 0.6 m.

The clayey sand was moist, brown, with fine sands and “loose” in compactness. The clayey sand was

accompanied with brown silt and embedded gravel.

3.2.4 Sandy Silt

Sandy silt was encountered in all of the testholes at a depth of 0.6 m to 1.5 m and terminated at

depths 2.3 m to 3.05 m. The sandy silt was brown/mottled with saturated with fine sands, and some had

traces of clay. The sandy silt compactness condition ranged from “loose” to “compact” and terminated

between depths 2.3 m and 3.05 m.

3.2.5 Silty Clay

The sandy silt is underlain by a major deposit of silty clay with embedded sand and gravel and

pink pockets, having a structure indicative of a glacial-fluvial depositional environment. In general, the

silty clay layer can be zoned into two distinct sub-layers for this site: intermediate brown crust; and lower

grey plastic zone.

3.2.5.1 Desiccated Silty Clay

The brown desiccated zone of the silty clay has a “very stiff” to “stiff” undrained shear strength

consistency and is only encountered in Testholes 1 and 4. The silty clay crust commences a reduction in

undrained shear strength below a depth of 3.8 m to 4.55 meters below grade.




Page 10

3.2.5.2 Plastic Silty Clay

The silty clay is uniformly grey below a depth of 2.3 from current ground surface. Beneath the

desiccated crust, the undrained shear strength consistency reduces from “stiff” to “soft” at a depth of 3.8

metres. The “stiff” grey silty clay experiences a gradual decrease in undrained shear strength with

increasing depth.

3.3 Groundwater

The groundwater level and the depth that the testhole remained open when measured after the

completion of drilling is recorded on the enclosed Testhole Logs (Drawings 3 through 6).

Free flowing groundwater was encountered at all the testholes at the time of drilling. Upon

completion of the drilling, groundwater was encountered at 0.25 m to 0.4 m below grade.

Perched water may be encountered in the surficial topsoil and fill materials at wetter times of the

year. Perched groundwater conditions result from the fill materials or soil fissures having the capacity to

temporarily store water from rain and snow melt before it percolates to the long-term level of the

groundwater table.




Page 11

4.0 DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

The proposed single-story Welcome Centre is to be built within John R Park Homestead Heritage

Museum complex, 915 Essex County Road 50, Essex, Ontario. The proposed finished floor elevation for

the building is 176.80 metres in accordance with ERCA’s floodproofing plan. The project is at the design

stage with construction imminent. The building loads were not provided to us at the time of the completion

of the report. Soil & Materials Engineering Inc. presents the following recommendations regarding bearing

capacity, settlement, and slab on grade design for the new single-story building.

4.1 Foundations

The exploratory testholes completed at this site reveal the shallow subsurface conditions vary in

terms of soil composition and undrained shear strength consistency for foundations located at shallow

depths. Below the 0.24 m to 0.5 m of fill and topsoil non-cohesive sandy silt, silty sand, sand (of all

gradations) was encountered to a depth of 2.3 m to 3.05 m below grade.

The bearing capacity of shallow foundations was therefore calculated for this report based on the

presence of “loose” non-cohesive soil. The following subsections presents geotechnical resistance

referenced to the ultimate limit states and the serviceability limit states for conventional shallow spread

foundations at this site.

The site is underlain by non-cohesive soil of varying compactness condition. Once first-iteration

of foundation sizes and loads are determined, Soil & Materials Engineering Inc. should be retained to

review the developed foundation system.

4.1.1 Ultimate Limit States

The factored net geotechnical resistance at ultimate limit states (geotechnical resistance factor,

Φ, of 0.5) that may be used for conventional spread footing foundations are presented in the following

page.




Page 12

TABLE 2: U.L.S Factored Bearing Resistance

Depth (m)

Factored Geotechnical Resistance, ΦR, at U.L.S. (kPa)*

Isolated Square Continuous Strip

u/s fill to 1.0 100 90

1.5 to 1.7 185 150 * Some locations may require subexcavation in order to achieve the stipulated bearing capacities.

The above factored geotechnical resistance at ultimate limit states incorporates 0.50 as an

applied resistance factor, Φ, to the ultimate geotechnical resistance. These values are net of the lowest

surcharge pressure on the soil surrounding the footing.

4.1.2 Serviceability Limit States

For geotechnical calculation purposes, the gross bearing pressure at serviceability limit states

has been taken for that pressure to generate 25 mm of total settlement beneath the footing, thereby

generally assuring less than 20 mm of differential settlement between any two foundation units. The

composition of the unfactored loads to generate the calculated settlement will be dependent on the long-

term sustained loading conditions which will include 100% of the dead loads and likely only a portion of

the live loads and no component for transient loads such as wind or earthquake.

Geotechnical resistance at serviceability limit states that may be used for conventional spread

footing foundations less than 3 metres (isolated square) and 1.2 metres (continuous strip) are presented

on the following page.

TABLE 3: Geotechnical Resistance (Unfactored) at S.L.S.

Depth (m)

Geotechnical Resistance at S.L.S. (kPa)*

Isolated Square Continuous Strip

u/s fill to 1.0 70 60

1.5 to 1.7 125 100 * Some locations may require subexcavation in order to achieve the stipulated bearing capacities.




Page 13

Foundations exceeding the above design chart or maximum footing width may be feasible; however, a

detailed geo-structural interaction analysis must be completed for proper evaluation.

4.1.3 Foundation Design (General)

All the factored geotechnical resistance bearing pressures at ultimate limit states incorporate a

factor, Φ, of 0.5 against shear failure of the underlying soil strata (in accordance with the Canadian

Foundation Design Manual, 4th Edition and Ontario Building Code (2012)). The expected total and

differential settlements for footings constructed as outlined previously will be 25 mm and 20 mm,

respectively. We recommend gathering additional site data in order to better determine ultimate strength

and serviceability characteristics once project loading conditions are defined.

The settlement of such foundations is to be assessed in conjunction with the existing overburden

pressure, foundation size and construction procedure. The existing grade should not be adjusted

positively greater than 300 mm over current conditions without an impact assessment on projected

settlements.

Some continuous footings or isolated square footings may be designed to be constructed at

different elevations in the soil. In this case, dewatering to a level of 600 mm deeper than the intended

excavation will be required along with sloping the footings such that the soil slope is cut no steeper than

2H:1V with a maximum slope height of one metre. Successive sloped sections must have a crest-toe

separation of greater than 1.2 metres.

We recommend all soil bearing surfaces be inspected and approved by the Geotechnical

Consultant to confirm that the soil exposed corresponds with the testhole observations and the design

assumptions of the soil consistency. All exterior footings constructed adjacent to unheated areas must

have a minimum of 1.2 metres of soil cover, or synthetic insulation of equal thermal value for protection

against frost heave.




Page 14

The non-cohesive sandy silt, silty sand, and sand at this site is sensitive and is subject to

disturbance when exposed to construction traffic and adverse weather conditions. We therefore

recommend placing the foundation concrete on the same day the excavation is completed and the

subgrade has been inspected and approved by the Geotechnical Consultant. If this is not possible, then

following subgrade approval, a thin mat of lean concrete (mud mat) should be placed on the bearing

surface in order to preserve its integrity.

4.2 Floor Slab-on-Grade

The testholes encountered 0.1 metre to 0.6 metre of fill or organic soil. All fill and organic soil

encountered at this site is not suitable for re-use as a component for the slab-on-grade subgrade.

Immediately following excavation to final subgrade level for the proposed floor, we recommend placement

of the approved granular under floor fill in order to avoid deterioration of the soil surface caused by

construction traffic and adverse weather conditions.

The exposed subgrade should be proof-rolled in the presence of the Geotechnical Consultant.

Any "soft" areas encountered during proof-rolling and inspection must be subexcavated and replaced with

approved fill such as Granular "B Type I" (OPSS 1010) and compacted to at least 98% of its Standard

Proctor maximum dry density. Fill used to raise the grade of the floor slab should be constructed

similarly.

Presuming a service loading condition of less than 15 kPa immediately beneath the floor slab, we

recommend placing a minimum of 300 mm Granular "A" (OPSS 1010) compacted to 100% of its Standard

Proctor maximum dry density to provide uniform and adequate subgrade bearing surface. The slab

construction should incorporate a capillary break consisting of 100 mm of clearstone gravel (Granular “O”,

OPSS 1010) if the top of the floor slab will not be located above the general area grade. Heavier loaded

floor slabs should be specifically reviewed by this office.

An appropriately placed vapour retarder is recommended beneath all slabs on grade

constructions that include moisture sensitive floorings or areas requiring humidity control.




Page 15

4.3 Excavation and Construction

Excavations through the surficial fill materials and native clay or non-cohesive soil to the depth of

the prevailing groundwater table at 0.25 metre to 0.4 metres below existing grade should have side walls

safely sloped from the excavation base at a minimum gradient of 2H:1V in accordance with Ontario

Provincial Regulations, after dewatering. Side slopes cut at a steeper rate than this will require field

assessment by the Geotechnical Consultant.

If the subject excavation is not a trench and where no worker is required to be closer to the wall

than the height of the wall, it may then be possible that the side slopes can be trimmed with steeper

gradients subject to the approval and surveillance of the Geotechnical Consultant. In all cases, a

temporary slope protection with a filter blanket is required to prevent surface erosion and desiccation for

excavations open greater than two days.

If vertical walls are intended, excavations below a depth of 1.2 metre should be shored. The

temporary shoring should be reviewed by the Geotechnical Consultant.

Due to possible past developments on site, we anticipate encounters of farm related drainage

features or building foundations at various locations across the site. We recommend all foundations,

subgrades, and trench side walls to be inspected by this office at the time of excavation.

4.4 Seismic Site Classification

The Ontario Building Code allows the site to be classified on the basis of the weighted average

shear strength or standard penetration resistance profile within the upper 30 metres of the soil column.

Based on investigations at testholes for this site investigation terminating at a depth of 6.55 metres, we

recommend the site to receive a Class “E” classification for seismic site response resulting from the

weighted average shear strength and standard penetration resistance profile of the cohesive and non-

cohesive soils encountered below the testhole depths. Further investigation may suggest otherwise.

LEGEND:

1

Notes:Testhole Locations

C.T. Soil & Materials Testing Inc.

SITE MAP

DRAWING

Soil Boring

Monitoring Well

Test Well

DMT

Inclinometer

Test Pit

Project: Welcome Centre at John R. ParkHomesteadLocation: 915 Essex Cnty Rd. 50, Essex, ONNumber: 20G024

CT

SIT

E P

LAN

PO

RT

RA

IT 2

0G02

4.G

PJ

BE

TA

.TO

M.2

0190

801.

GD

T 4

/28/

20

1

3

45

2-DMT

LEGEND:

2

Notes:Testhole Locations


SITE MAP

DRAWING

Soil Boring

Monitoring Well

Test Well

DMT

Inclinometer

Test Pit

Project: Welcome Centre at John R. ParkHomesteadLocation: 915 Essex Cnty Rd. 50, Essex, ONNumber: 20G024

CT

SIT

E P

LAN

PO

RT

RA

IT 2

0G02

4.G

PJ

BE

TA

.TO

M.2

0190

801.

GD

T 4

/28/

20

1

3

45

2-DMT

0.0

2.5

5.0

7.5

10.0

11.5

12.5

14.0

15.0

16.5

20.0

21.5

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

Vn

SPT

Vn

SPT

Vn

SPT

Vn

5

5

8

10

7

4

3

2

0.10175.95

0.40175.65

0.60175.45

2.50173.55

6.70169.35

TOPSOIL - sandy fill mixblackSILTY SAND(SM) - wet, finebrown

CLAYEY SAND(SC) - with finesand, silt, and gravelbrown

looseSANDY SILT(MLS) with claytracesmottled brown

loose

browncompact

SILTY CLAY (CL-ML) -withembedded sand and graveland pink pocketsbrown

stiff

grey

soft

End of Testhole

Ground Elev: m176.05

EQUIPMENT DATA

Sheet 1 of 1

SAMPLE

C.T. SOIL & MATERIALS

(m)

SYMBOL

Wp

ctsoil.com

Machine:Method:Size:

TYPE

N-VALUE

BULK UNIT

WGHT(kN/m3)

Dwg. No.: 3

SOIL LITHOLOGY

WINDSOR ONTARIO

2000 Legacy Park DriveT. O'Dwyer, P.Eng., P.E.

Wl

DATA

EL/DPT

(m)

DEPTHDMT LAB TEST: Unc. P.P.

DYN.CONESTANDARD

DILATOMETER: Su

SHEAR STR.(kPa)

20G024

M(bars)

TESTING INC.

Soil & MaterialsEngineering Inc.

TESTHOLE No. 1JOB No:

WINDSOR, ONTARIO, N8W 5S6

W

TESTING INC.

915 Essex Cnty Rd. 50, Essex, ON

CME 55

ph. (519) 966-8863, fx. (519) 966-8870

WATER

email ctsoil @

Client:

Project:

Location:

ELEV. (m)

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

Essex Region Conservation Authority c/oArchitecttura Inc.Welcome Centre at John R. ParkHomestead

83 mm I.D. H/S Auger

165 mm O.D.

4/16/2020 4/16/2020

REVIEWING PROFESSIONAL:

REMARKS&

GRAIN SIZEDISTRIBUTION

%

WELLCONTENT

(%)

Date: TO

10 20 30

FIELD VANE: Peak Rem.

50 100 150

20 40 60

PENETR. RESISTANCE DMT Phi( )


DESCRIPTION

SAMP ID

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

No

Wel

l

GR SA SI CL

CT

ME

T

20G

024

.GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T

4/28

/20

5

5

5

10

30

25

25

30

85

25

5

5

5

10

30

25

25

30

85

25

0.0

2.0

5.0

7.5

10.0

12.5

15.0

20.0

21.5

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

Vn

4

9

9

11

8

4

4

5

0.20176.00

1.50174.70

2.30173.90

6.70169.50

TOPSOIL - moist sandy mixblackSILTY SAND(SM) - wet, finesandbrown

loose

with grey silt

mottledcompact

SANDY SILT(MLS) - wet, finesand

browncompact

SILTY CLAY(CL-ML) - withembedded sand and graveland pink pockets

stiff

grey

soft

firm

End of Testhole

(13)0

2

0

87

47

23

35

61

17

16

(13)0

2

0

87

47

23

35

61

17

16


EQUIPMENT DATA

Sheet 1 of 1

SAMPLE


(m)

SYMBOL

Wp

ctsoil.com


TYPE

N-VALUE

BULK UNIT

WGHT(kN/m3)

Dwg. No.: 4

SOIL LITHOLOGY

WINDSOR ONTARIO


Wl

DATA

EL/DPT

(m)


DYN.CONESTANDARD

DILATOMETER: Su

SHEAR STR.(kPa)

20G024

M(bars)

TESTING INC.




W

TESTING INC.


CME 55

ph. (519) 966-8863, fx. (519) 966-8870

WATER

email ctsoil @

Client:

Project:

Location:

ELEV. (m)

176

175

174

173

172

171

170



165 mm O.D.

4/15/2020 4/15/2020


REMARKS&


%

WELLCONTENT

(%)

Date: TO

10 20 30


50 100 150

20 40 60



DESCRIPTION

SAMP ID

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

No

Wel

l

GR SA SI CL

CT

ME

T

20G

024

.GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T

4/28

/20

1540

95

70

43.53741

46.35762

1540

95

70

43.53741

46.35762

0.0

2.0

5.0

7.5

10.0

11.5

12.5

14.0

15.0

20.0

21.5

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

Vn

SPT

Vn

SPT

SPT

SPT

6

6

5

15

8

5

3

4

0.50175.70

0.60175.60

2.30173.90

6.70169.50

TOPSOIL - moist sandy mix

black

FILL - moist sand and claymixbrownSANDY SILT(MLS) - saturatedlayers of silt and finesand, traces of claymottled

loose

brown

SILTY CLAY(CL-ML) - withgrey saturated sand lensesand pink pockets

brownvery stiff

- with embedded sand andgravel and pink pockets

greystiff

oxidization

firm

soft

End of Testhole

0 51 36 130 51 36 13


EQUIPMENT DATA

Sheet 1 of 1

SAMPLE


(m)

SYMBOL

Wp

ctsoil.com


TYPE

N-VALUE

BULK UNIT

WGHT(kN/m3)

Dwg. No.: 5

SOIL LITHOLOGY

WINDSOR ONTARIO


Wl

DATA

EL/DPT

(m)


DYN.CONESTANDARD

DILATOMETER: Su

SHEAR STR.(kPa)

20G024

M(bars)

TESTING INC.




W

TESTING INC.


CME 55

ph. (519) 966-8863, fx. (519) 966-8870

WATER

email ctsoil @

Client:

Project:

Location:

ELEV. (m)

176

175

174

173

172

171

170



165 mm O.D.

4/15/2020 4/15/2020


REMARKS&


%

WELLCONTENT

(%)

Date: TO

10 20 30


50 100 150

20 40 60



DESCRIPTION

SAMP ID

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

No

Wel

l

GR SA SI CL

CT

ME

T

20G

024

.GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T

4/28

/20

5

5

5

25

30

20

145

70

25 40.4814

5

5

5

25

30

20

145

70

25 40.4814

0.0

2.0

5.0

7.5

10.0

12.5

15.0

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

SPT

3

5

8

10

8

8

7

0.40175.95

1.00175.35

3.05173.30

5.00171.35

TOPSOIL - moist sandy mix

blackSILTY SAND(SM) - wet, finesandbrown

very loose

loose

SANDY SILT(MLS) -saturated, fine sand, traceof clay

mottledcompact

SILTY CLAY(CL-ML) - withembedded sand and graveland pink pockets

greystiff

End of Testhole


EQUIPMENT DATA

Sheet 1 of 1

SAMPLE


(m)

SYMBOL

Wp

ctsoil.com


TYPE

N-VALUE

BULK UNIT

WGHT(kN/m3)

Dwg. No.: 6

SOIL LITHOLOGY

WINDSOR ONTARIO


Wl

DATA

EL/DPT

(m)


DYN.CONESTANDARD

DILATOMETER: Su

SHEAR STR.(kPa)

20G024

M(bars)

TESTING INC.




W

TESTING INC.


CME 55

ph. (519) 966-8863, fx. (519) 966-8870

WATER

email ctsoil @

Client:

Project:

Location:

ELEV. (m)

176

175

174

173

172

171

170


83 mm I.D. S/S Auger

165 mm O.D.

4/15/2020 4/15/2020


REMARKS&


%

WELLCONTENT

(%)

Date: TO

10 20 30


50 100 150

20 40 60



DESCRIPTION

SAMP ID

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

No

Wel

l

GR SA SI CL

CT

ME

T

20G

024

.GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T

4/28

/20

70

70

25 40.07936

70

70

25 40.07936

SILT

SANDY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

SILTY CLAY

CLAY

MUD

CLAYEY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

SILT

SILTY CLAY

SILTY CLAY

SILTY CLAY

SILTY CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

MUD

MUD

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

MUD

MUD

CLAY

MUD

MUD

MUD

MUD

MUD

SILTY SAND

SILTY SAND

SANDY SILT

SAND

SAND

SAND

1.60174.55

2.40173.75

8.40167.75

commence Marchettiflat-plate dilatometer(DMT)

Silty Sand - loose

Sandy Silt - compact

Silty Clay - firm

Soft

End of DMT


EQUIPMENT DATA

Sheet 1 of 1

SAMPLE


(m)

SYMBOL

Wp

ctsoil.com


TYPE

N-VALUE

BULK UNIT

WGHT(kN/m3)

Dwg. No.: 7

SOIL LITHOLOGY

WINDSOR ONTARIO


Wl

DATA

EL/DPT

(m)


DYN.CONESTANDARD

DILATOMETER: Su

SHEAR STR.(kPa)

20G024

M(bars)

TESTING INC.


TESTHOLE No. 2-DMTJOB No:


W

TESTING INC.


CME 55

ph. (519) 966-8863, fx. (519) 966-8870

WATER

email ctsoil @

Client:

Project:

Location:

ELEV. (m)

176

175

174

173

172

171

170

169

168



165 mm O.D.

4/16/2020 4/16/2020


REMARKS&


%

WELLCONTENT

(%)

Date: TO

10 20 30


50 100 150

20 40 60



DESCRIPTION

SAMP ID

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.5

7.0

7.5

8.0

8.5

9.0

No

Wel

l

GR SA SI CL

CT

ME

T

20G

024

.GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T

4/28

/20

257

221

224

681

1137

478

260

226

731

311

1722

257

221

224

681

1137

478

260

226

731

311

1722

commenceMarchettiflat-platedilatometer(DMT)Silty Sand -loose

Sandy Silt -compact

Silty Clay - firm

Soft

End of DMTBoreholeTerminated at8.4 m

SILT

SANDY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

SILTY CLAY

CLAY

MUD

CLAYEY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

CLAYEY SILT

SILT

SILTY CLAY

SILTY CLAY

SILTY CLAY

SILTY CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

MUD

MUD

CLAY

CLAY

CLAY

MUD

MUD

CLAY

MUD

MUD

MUD

MUD

MUD

SILTY SAND

SILTY SAND

SANDY SILT

SAND

SAND

SAND

20G024


INTERPRETEDSOIL DESCRIPTION

ELEV.(metre)

176

174

172

170

168

DEPTH(metre)

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

MATERIALINDEX

Sheet 1 of 1

HORIZONTALSTRESS INDEX

3 6 90 12

Shear Strength(kPa)

50 100 1500 200

REVIEWED BY:

51.5.1 10

.6 1.8

CLAY SILT SAND

Id CuM Kd Phi

LOG OF 2-DMT

T. O'Dwyer, P.Eng., P.E. 4/16/2020DATE ADVANCED:PROJECT NO.:

Dwg. No.: 7A

CONSTRAINEDMODULUS

(MPa)

20 40 60 800 100

DRAINEDFRICTION

ANGLE (phi0)Baligh's Correction

30 4020 50

Welcome Centre at John R. Park Homestead915 Essex Cnty Rd. 50, Essex, ON

CT

DM

T L

OG

20G

024.

GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T

4/28

/20

12.88

18.16

25

23.53

12.63

12.01

26.72

29.52

27.35

17.73

16.12

12.13

113.7

172.2

0

5

10

15

20

25

30

35

40

45

50

55

60

65

70

75

80

85

90

95

100

0.0010.010.1110100

PI Cc Cu

%Clay%Silt%Sand%GravelD10D30

6 4 3 2 1.5 1 3/4 1/23/8

D60D100Specimen Identification

3

3

3

4

3

3

3

4

2.36

9.5

4.75

4.75

0.162

0.091

0.048

0.108

0.098

0.026

0.01

0.041

0.0

2.0

0.0

0.0

86.5

46.7

22.8

51.2

10 14

finecoarse



PE

RC

EN

T F

INE

R B

Y W

EIG

HT

16 20 30 40 50 60 100 140 2004 6 8

Specimen Identification Classification LL PL

34.7

60.9

35.9

16.6

16.3

12.9

0.25

0.60

1.50

0.60

0.25

0.60

1.50

0.60

U.S. SIEVE OPENING IN INCHES U.S. SIEVE NUMBERS HYDROMETER

13.5

3

COBBLESGRAVEL SAND

SILT OR CLAYfinemediumcoarse



CA

N_G

RA

IN_S

IZE

20G

024.

GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T 2

0-4-

23

3 0.0 23.2

3 0.3 2.36 13 1.6

3 0.6 9.5 51 20.6

3 1.5 4.75 77 25.0

3 2.3 22.8

3 3.1 37.6

3 3.8 43.5

3 4.6 46.4

3 6.1 33.8

4 0.0 24.8

4 0.5 21.9

4 0.6 4.75 49 25.8

4 1.5 26.2

4 2.3 23.2

4 3.1 39.1

4 3.8 40.5

4 4.6 28.3

4 6.1 29.2

5 0.0 24.0

5 0.4 14.9

5 0.5 22.1

5 0.6 23.3

5 1.0 23.6

5 1.5 23.1

5 3.1 22.9

5 3.8 23.1

5 4.6 40.1

Sheet 1 of 1

PlasticityIndex

MaximumSize(mm)

%<#200Sieve

Class-ification

WaterContent

(%)

Satur-ation(%)

Summary of Laboratory Results

Depth LiquidLimit

PlasticLimitBorehole Void

Ratio

DryDensity

(kN/m^3)



CA

N_L

AB

_SU

MM

AR

Y

20G

024.

GP

J B

ET

A.T

OM

.20

1908

01.

GD

T 2

0-4-

23

FFE 176.80 M

Bid Tender Form Section 00 41 13Page 1 of 8



BID TENDER FORM

PROJECT No: 2020

NAME OF BIDDER: ________________________________________________________________

ADDRESS: ________________________________________________________________

________________________________________________________________

PHONE No: ____________________________ FAX No: ____________________________

Essex Region Conservation Authority John R. Park Homestead Centre 915 Essex County Road 50Essex, ON N0R 1G0

TENDER FORM FOR: John R. Park Homestead Heritage Centre, Project No. 2020

DATE: ________________________________________________________________

1.1 Basis of Bid

.1 The contractor will be responsible for the removal of all debris and for leaving the site in a clean presentable manner.

.2 Before commencement of work the Contractor will be responsible for providing the Architect with the designated bonds as requested.

.3 Immediately before commencing any work, the successful tenderers to submit a letter from the Workers Compensation Board stating that his firm is in good standing.

.4 The tenderer must submit a list of subcontractors involved in any part of this tender.

.5 The attached Specifications, Drawings, Instructions to Bidders, Tender Forms and any Addendum shall constitute part of the tender.

.6 The Tender must bear the written signature of the tenderer.

.7 The tenderer will examine all the official tender documents issued by the Architect, including specifications and or drawings applicable.

.8 The tenderer will inspect and visit the site of the proposed work and fully familiarized themselves of the existing conditions and limitations of the work.

.9 No oral, fax, telephone or telegraphic proposals will be considered.

.10 The requirements of the Instructions to Bidders, Bid Tender Form and the General Requirements govern all phases of the work and the tender proposal stipulated sum shall include all costs which arise from compliance with such regulations.




.11 Tenderers are responsible for acquainting all subcontractors or supply bidders with the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders Bid Tender Form and the General requirements.

.12 No allowance will be made after award of contract for errors or omissions due to subcontractors or suppliers not being familiar with such requirements.

.13 The intent of the drawings is to provide a general guideline for the Contractor to complete the project in its entirety and it is his responsibility to review the site and determine the scope of work required to complete the project. No extras will be permitted for condition that can be clearly verified on site prior to close of tender.

.14 The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the drawings 72 hours prior to close of tender so that proper addendums may be issued. After this time allotment, addendums will not be issued and any clarification or interpretation of the drawings during construction will be left to the sole discretion of the Architect.

2.1 Base Bid Sum

.1 We the undersigned, propose to finish all materials, installation, labour, plant, tools and equipment necessary for the entire completion of General Contract Work for John R. Park Homestead Heritage Centre, in accordance with the requirements contained in the Contract Documents prepared by Architecttura Inc. (referred to as the Architect), Project No. 2020 as per attached Appendix ‘A’.




Appendix ‘A’ to Stipulated Price Bid

Stipulated Sum

John R. Park Homestead Heritage CentreProject No. 2020

The Stipulated Sum is as follows for the work and SUCH COPY MUST BE COMPLETED AND RETURNED WITH YOUR TENDER PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS.

A. Bid – John R. Park Homestead Heritage Centre, as per drawings and specifications (not including HST) $ ___________________

B. Material Testing Allowance $ 3,500.00

C. Building Permit/ Development Charges $ 11,000.00Allowance

D. Signage Allowance $ 2,500.00

E. Door Hardware & Barrier Free Operators $ 38,000.00

F. TOTAL ALLOWANCES $ 55,000.00

G. TOTAL BID + ALLOWANCES $ ___________________

H. TOTAL HARMONIZED SALES TAX $ ___________________

I. TOTAL STIPULATED SUM $ ___________________




Appendix ‘B’ to Stipulated Price Bid

Addenda

We acknowledge receipt of the following addenda and have included cost revisions in the Tender Price.

Addendum No. Date:

Addendum No. Date:

Addendum No. Date:

Addendum No. Date:

Addendum No. Date:




Appendix ‘C’ to Stipulated Price Bid - Sub-Contractors

Proposed Sub-Contractors

The following shall comprise of the sub-contractors and or suppliers the undersigned proposed to use in execution of the Contract under the base tender price.

It is understood by the Tenderer that the list is complete and no additions or changes will be permitted after the closing date of tenders, except as authorized by the Architect.

03 00 00 Concrete Work ________________________________________________________________

06 10 00 Rough and Finish carpentry (Wood Framing) ________________________________________

06 12 00 Structural Insulated Panels_______________________________________________________

06 17 56 Plate Connected Wood Trusses ___________________________________________________

06 40 00 Architectural Wood Work_________________________________________________________

07 31 13 Asphalt Shingles _______________________________________________________________

07 46 23 Wood Siding __________________________________________________________________

07 54 00 TPO Membrane Roofing _________________________________________________________

07 92 00 Sealants & Caulking_____________________________________________________________

08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ___________________________________________________

08 54 13 Fibreglass Fixed Window Unit ____________________________________________________

08 71 00 Door Hardware_________________________________________________________________

08 81 00 Glass & Glazing ________________________________________________________________

09 29 00 Gypsum Wall Board_____________________________________________________________

09 51 23 Acoustical Ceilings______________________________________________________________

09 30 00 / 09 65 19 Flooring______________________________________________________________

09 91 00 Painting ______________________________________________________________________

23 00 00 Mechanical____________________________________________________________________

22 00 00 Plumbing _____________________________________________________________________

26 00 00 Electrical _____________________________________________________________________

31 23 00 Excavation & Granular Backfill ____________________________________________________

32 92 00 Landscaping___________________________________________________________________




Appendix ‘D to Stipulated Price Bid

List of Unit Prices

The following are our list Unit Prices for the Units of Work listed hereunder. The Unit Prices listed apply to performing the Units of Work only during the time schedules for such work in the project schedule. CONTRACTOR MUST COMPLETE SUCH COPY AND RETURN WITH YOUR TENDER PROPOSAL DOCUMENTS.

Unit of Work Addition Deletion

A) Excavation work by machine, per cubic meter $ $

B) 25 MPa concrete set in place, per cubic meter $ $

C) Granular ‘A’ Material, compacted per cubic meter $ $

D) Granular ‘B’ Material, compacted per cubic meter $ $

E) Granular ‘B’ Recycled Material, compacted per cubic meter$ $




Appendix ‘E’ to Stipulated Price Bid

List of Separate Prices (Not included in Base Bid)

Base Bid is on all items as specified. The following items are on an add/subtract basis from the base bid amount.

The following is a list of separate prices NOT included in the base bid for the items listed below. The owner has the option of adding these items to the contract if the budget allows.

Separate Price No. 1: Provide a Separate Price to Add all associated work with adding the recessed Floor Grille in Vestibule 101.

Add $

Separate Price No. 2: Provide a Separate Price to replace asphalt shingles as specified and replace with Boral Steel Stone Coated Roofing, Cottage Shingle Series in colour Ironwood HD or Timberwood HD including all associated trim pieces as supplied by Metal Roof Outlet, Courtland, ON, 1-800-366-0620

Add $

Separate Price No. 3: Provide a Separate to delete the Canexel siding in exterior and replace with “Sagiper North America” siding type: Sagiwall in the channeled profile complete with all associated aluminum trim pieces. Colour to be selected from standard exterior finished chart.

Add/Subtract $

Separate Price No. 4: Provide a Separate to delete the Canexel siding in the interior and replace with “Sagiper North America” siding type: Sagirev in a 33% of each of the 100mm, 150mm and 200mm V-groove profile complete with all associated aluminum trim pieces. Colour to be selected from standard exterior finished chart.

Add/Subtract $




Completion of Work

We understand to commence the work as soon as Municipality approval, and to be substantially complete for occupancy by December 18, 2020.

DATE AT ______________, THIS ________________ DAY OF ______________ 2020.

We, the undersigned, understand the circumstances and requirements applicable to this contract as specified within Bid Tender Form and will complete the entire work (project) on or before the initial completion deadline date as specified above.

Signature of Bidder : NAME OF FIRM

:

ADDRESS OF FIRM

: SIGNED BY (printed)

: __________________________ SIGNED BY (written)

_____________________________SEAL:

Contracting Forms and Supplements Section 00 50 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Construction agreement

.1 A Purchase Order shall be provided by the Owner and a construction Contract shall be executed and delivered by the Owner and Contractor on the Canadian Standard Construction Document, C.C.D.C. 2, 2008 Form of Stipulated Price Contract as the same may be amended in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders, Amended General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and the other Contract Documents as defined by the Amended General Conditions.

1.2 WORKERS’ COMPENSATION

.1 Refer to Article GC 18 “Workers’ Compensation” for various stages of construction when documentation of evidence of compliance with provincial requirements if required.

1.3 APPLICATION FOR PRE-RELEASE OF SUB CONTRACT HOLDBACKS

.1 Under the construction Act. S.O. 1983, Subcontractors who have completed all their work are eligible to request a pre-release of the holdback monies on their work. This request must be submitted through the General Contractor to the Owner. The following material must be submitted with the application for pre-release of a Subcontractor’s holdback:

.1 General Contractor’s Declaration together with a true copy of the subcontractor between General Contract and Subcontractor requesting holdback release.

.2 Subcontractor’s Declaration together with a true copy of the subcontract between General Contractor and Subcontractor requesting holdback release.

.3 Subcontractor’s Agreement with Owner.

.4 Certificate from The Workers’ Compensation Board certifying that the Subcontractor has paid all sums that the Subcontractor is liable to contribute to the Accident Fund and for which the Owner is responsible pursuant to Section 115 of The Worker’s Compensation Act and that the Owner is released from all liability.

.5 Certificate of Completion of Subcontractor under Subsection 33 (1) of the Construction Lien Act, 1983.

.2 Upon successful submission of forms for pre-release of subcontract holdbacks the Architect will issue Government Form No. 7 and the Contractor shall be responsible for publication under the terms of the Construction Lien Act.

1.4 INSPECTION FOR SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE

.1 The Architect and the Owner’s Representative shall determine when the project meets the requirements of substantial performance as defined in the Construction Lien Act, and shall undertake as inspection giving written notice of the date of this to the Contractor and Owner.

.2 The inspection team shall consist of:

.1 The Contractor or his Representative(s).

.2 The Owner or his Representative(s).

.3 The Consultant’s or their Representative(s).

.4 Such Subcontractor’s or their Representatives as may be required by the Contractor.

.3 Upon completion of this inspection a list of all incomplete and unsatisfactory work shall be prepared by the Owner’s Representative and the Consultant’s and issued to those concerned, including the General Contractor and the Owner.

1.5 APPLICATION FOR CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL PERFORMANCE OF THE CONTRACT



.1 When the General Contractor has carried out the steps listed under Inspection for Substantial Performance he shall submit his application for Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Contract under Section 32 of The Construction Lien Act 1983. This application shall be accompanied by the following documentation:

.1 Contractor’s Statutory Declaration.

.2 Certificate from The Worker’s Compensation Board certifying that the Contractor has paid all sums that the Contractor is liable to contribute to the Accident Fund and for which the Owner is responsible pursuant to Section 115 of The Worker’s Compensation Act and that the Owner is released from all liability.

.3 List of Extended Warranties

.1 In addition to the standard construction warranty as listed under General Conditions GC 24, all additional written extended warranties specified shall be submitted to the Owner.

.2 All written warranties shall be dated the same date as the General Contractor’s standard one year guarantee, i.e., the date of the Certificate for Total Performance of the Contract.

.1 Roofing & Sheet Metal 2,10 & 20 years See Section 08 71 00

.2 Door Closures 10 years See Section 08 71 00

.3 Panic Bars 5 years See Section 08 71 00

.4 Metal 3 years See Section 08 11 13

.5 Emergency Lighting 10 years pro-rated See Division 26

.6 Additional requirements as specified in individual specification sections.

.4 Test Reports

.1 Inspection and testing must be executed in accordance with the specifications. The General Contractor is responsible for advising the appointed companies timely when their services are required so that all work under their control may be approved prior to being concealed.

.2 The following test reports and inspection certificates must be submitted.

.1 Plumbing Inspection Certificates (Permit) Section 22

.2 Heating Inspection Certificate (Permit) Section 23

.3 Air and hydronic balance reports Section 23

.4 Hydro Inspection Certificate Section 26

.5 Fire Alarm Inspection Certificate Section 26

.6 Additional testing requirements as specified in individual specifications sections.

.3 Copies of all tests and inspection certificates must be submitted to the Architect and Owner before payment of the final holdback monies is released.

.5 Maintenance Manuals

.1 The Contractor shall provide and turn over to the Owner’s Representative one hard copy and 1 USB of a complete operating and maintenance manual describing completely all equipment provided under this contract.



.2 Manuals shall be 8 1/2” x 11” with hard covers securely bound, provided with the following data:

.1 Table of Contents: provide title of project; names, addresses and telephone numbers of Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume.

.2 For each Product or System: list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts.

.3 Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installations; delete inapplicable information.

.4 Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.

.5 Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics and limiting conditions. Include performance curves with engineering data and tests and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

.6 Panelboard Circuit Directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls and communications.

.7 Include installed colour and wiring diagrams.

.8 Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down and emergency instructions. Include summer, winter and any special operating instructions.

.9 Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair and reassembly instructions and alignment, adjusting, balancing and checking instructions.

.10 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule and list of lubricants required.

.11 Include manufacturer’s printed operation and maintenance instructions.

.12 Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

.13 Provide original manufacturer’s part list, illustrations, assembly drawings and diagrams required for maintenance.

.14 Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

.15 Provide Contractor’s co-ordination drawings with installed colour coded piping diagrams.

.16 Provide chart of valve tag numbers with location and function of each valve keyed to flow and control diagrams.

.17 Provide list of original manufacturer’s spare parts, current prices and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

.18 Include test and balancing reports as specified in Division 23

.19 Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specification sections.

.6 Receipts for Equipment Marked “Paid In Full”

.1 The Contractor shall provide a list of “Conditional Sales Contracts” incurred by himself and all sub-trades on this project.



.2 The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner’s Representative receipts made, “Paid In Full” by the suppliers of same for articles incorporated into the building which the law does not classify as “building materials” including furnaces, boilers, air conditioning equipment and elevators.

.7 As-Built Drawings

.1 The Contractor shall turn over to the Owner’s Representative one set of complete marked prints showing alterations accepted by the Owner’s Representative for as-built drawings. Drawings to include the following information which varies from the contract documents.

.2 Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal work until required information is recorded.

.3 Mark each item to record actual construction including:

.1 Measure depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum.

.2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements.

.3 Measure Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.

.4 Field changes of dimension and detail.

.5 Changes made by change orders.

.6 Details not on original Contract Drawings.

.7 References to related shop drawings and modifications.

.8 Waiver of Lien to be executed and delivered by each Subcontractor and such Suppliers as may be designated by the Owner.

.9 Letter from The Worker’s Compensation Board certifying that the Contractor has paid all sums that the Contractor is liable to contribute to the accident fund and for which the Owner is responsible pursuant to Section 15 of the Worker’s Compensation Act and that the Owner is released from all liability.

.2 Upon the successful submission of forms for Substantial Performance of the Contract, the Architect will issue Government Form 6 and the General Contractor shall be responsible for publication under the terms of the Construction Lien Act.

.3 The Contractor shall publish a copy of the Certificate of Substantial Performance once in a national construction trade newspaper, in accordance with Construction Lien Act 1983.


General Conditions Section 00 72 13 Page 1 of 8


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Provide all materials and equipment, labour and tools, contract administration, supervision, co-ordination, inspection and every other item necessary for the proper and complete execution of the work of this Contract as shown in or described by or reasonably inferable from the Contract Documents.

.2 The responsibility as to which trade provides required labour or materials rests solely with the General Contractor. The scope of work described in any particular section of these specifications is for convenience only, and all work indicated by drawings, or properly required and customarily covered by the trade concerned must be provided by that trade unless explicitly excluded or covered by another section of these specifications. The drawings are intended to show the general arrangement, design and extent of the work and are partly diagrammatic. They are not intended to be scaled for roughing in measurements not to serve as shop drawings. Extras will not be considered based on grounds of difference in the interpretation which trade should provide certain equipment, materials or labour.

.3 Coordination of Owner directed sub-consultants such as Geotechnical etc.

.4 Cutting and patching for Mechanical, Electrical and Ventilation work, with the exception of openings in exterior walls and the roof, shall be the responsibility of each of these trades and shall be included in the Tender Price.

1.2 Project Coordination

.1 Make application for, obtain and pay for all fees in connection with all permits and licenses, also all inspections and inspection certificates to comply with all local and provincial laws, ordinances and regulations.

.2 Coordinate progress of the Work, progress schedules, and submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, construction facilities and controls.

.3 General Contractor shall familiarize himself with the specifications of all trades and acquaint himself with the coordination required for complete cooperation.

.4 If the Contractor should neglect to complete the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this contract, the Owner, after seven (7) days written notice to the contractor, may without prejudice to any other remedy have, make good any deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due to the contractor.

.5 Materials or products specified by name of manufacturer, brand, trade name or catalogue reference shall be on the basis of the bid and furnished under the contract unless changed by mutual agreement. When two or more materials are named, the choice of these shall be optional with the Contractor. Should the Contractor wish to use any materials or products other than those specified, he shall so state in writing on a separate Form naming the proposed substitutions and what differences, if any, will be made in the contract price for such substitution, should it be accepted.

1.3 Cutting and Patching

.1 Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching

.2 Approvals

.1 Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:

.1 Structural integrity of any element of Project.

.2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements,

.3 Efficiency, maintenance or safety of any operational element.



.4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.

.5 Work of Owner or separate contractor.

.2 Submit a written request including the following:

.1 Identification of Project

.2 Location and Description of affected Work

.3 Statement on the necessity for cutting or alteration

.4 Description of Proposed Work and products to be used

.5 Alternatives to cutting and patching

.6 Effect on Work of Owner or other contractors

.7 Written permission of affected other contractor

.8 Date and time work will be executed

.3 Inspection Examination

.1 Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching.

.2 After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of work.

.3 Work beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.

.4 The Contractor and all Subcontractors shall examine all drawings, specifications and site for information affecting their work. If clarification is required, Contractor and Subcontractor are to contact via a “Request for Interpretation” form.

.5 Examine location of work and become familiar with all features and characteristics affecting the work.

.6 Claims for extra payments due to difficulties encountered, which could have been foreseen during examination, will not be considered.

.7 Report any unsatisfactory conditions which may adversely affect the proper completion of the work.

.8 The Contractor and Subcontractor shall examine the site pertaining to this work and report any inconsistencies with actual conditions prior to commencing work. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of site conditions and the Contractor shall therefore be fully responsible for executing the work in accordance with the contract documents.

.4 Execution

.1 Refer to drawings for general overview of demolition work.

.2 Perform cutting, fitting, and patching including excavation and fill, to complete the work and to:

.1 Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work

.2 Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work

.3 Remove samples of installed Work for testing

.4 Remove and replace defective and non-conforming work.

.5 Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical work.



.3 Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.4 Restore Work with new products in accordance with the requirements of Contract Documents.

.5 Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids.

.6 Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit.

.7 Prepare proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing.

.8 Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces

.9 Cut rigid materials using power saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed.

.10 Fit work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetration through surfaces.

.11 At penetration of fire-rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with fire-rated fire-resistant material, specified in Section 07 84 00, full thickness of construction element.

1.4 Field Engineering

.1 Employ a registered Land Surveyor as acceptable to the Owner.

.1 Qualifications of Surveyor

.1 Qualified registered land surveyor, acceptable to Owner.

.2 Survey Requirements

.1 Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference points during construction.

.2 Establish two permanent benchmarks on site, referenced to established benchmarks by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data in Project Record Documents.

.3 Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation.

.4 Control datum for survey is that established by the Owner provided survey.

.3 Records

.1 Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

.4 Subsurface Conditions

.1 Promptly notify consultant in writing if subsurface conditions at Place of the Work differ materially from those indicated in Contract Documents, or reasonable assumption of probable conditions based thereon.

.2 After prompt investigation, should Consultant determine that conditions do differ materially; instructions will be issued for changes in the Work as provided in GC 6 - Changes in the Work.

.5 Setting Out of Work

.1 The Contractor shall provide The Consultant and Owner’s Representative with a 48 hour notice verbally and then followed up in writing upon commencement of work.

.6 Submit a copy of registered site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor that the elevations and locations of the Work are in conformance with the Contract Documents.



1.5 Submittals

.1 Project Correspondence

.2 All project correspondence, including all submittals shall be performed via the Architect’s online “Newforma Info Exchange”project site. The contractor is responsible to receive training from the Architect and incorporate this method of communication through out the duration of the project.

.3 Administrative

.1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in the Work.

.2 Work affected by submittal shall not proceed until review is complete.

.3 Review submittals prior to submission to Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinate with requirements of the Work and Contract Documents.

.4 Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work to be coordinated.

.4 Shop Drawings and Product Data

.1 Refer to GC 3.10.

.2 Refer to Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.

.3 “Shop Drawings” means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data, which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of portion of the Work.

.4 Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connection, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work.

.5 Adjustments made on shop drawings by Consultant are not intended to change Contract Price.

.6 Make changes in shop drawings as consultant may require.

.7 Submit copies as per Section 01 33 00.

.8 Approval must be obtained from the Consultant by means of stamped approval before ordering or fabrication of such materials can begin.

.9 Shop drawings must first be reviewed by the General Contractor & stamped prior to submission to Consultant. Drawings which are not reviewed will be returned to General Contractor.

.5 Samples

.1 Refer to Section 01 33 00.

.2 Submit for review, samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections.

.3 Deliver samples prepaid to Consultant’s business address.

.6 Operating Maintenance Manuals

.1 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to Consultant four (4) hard copies & 1 CD of operating and maintenance manuals.



.2 Manuals to contain operational information on equipment, cleaning and lubrication schedules, filters, overhaul and adjustment schedules and similar maintenance information.

.3 Bind contents in a three-ring-hard covered, plastic jacketed binder. Organize contents into applicable categories of work, parallel to specifications Sections.

.7 Record Drawings

.1 After award of Contract, Consultant will provide a set of drawings for purpose of maintaining record drawings. Accurately and neatly record deviations from Contract Documents caused by site conditions and changes ordered by Consultant.

.2 Record locations of concealed components of mechanical and electrical services.

.3 Identify drawings as “Project Record Copy”. Maintain in new condition and make available for inspection on site by Consultant as indicated in Section 01 78 00.

.4 On completion of Work and prior to final inspection, submit record documents to Consultant. Record drawings are to be submitted in digital Revit format. May need allowance for outsourcing drafting

.8 Miscellaneous Turnovers: To be turned over within ten (10) days of owner occupancy.

.1 Keys

.2 Mechanical Accessories

.3 Hydro Certificate

.4 Copy of Building Permit

.5 Guarantees & Warrantees

.6 Directories in electrical panels

.7 Spare material as specified

.9 Insurance’s

.1 General Liability insurance & Builders Risk Insurance.

1.6 Quality Control

.1 Inspection

.1 Owner and Consultant shall have access to the Work.

.2 Give timely notice requesting inspection if work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Consultant instructions, or laws of Place of the Work.

.3 If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work.

.2 Reports

.1 Submit one (1) digital copy of inspection and test reports promptly to Consultant.

.2 Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected/tested.

1.7 Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls

.1 Refer to 01 50 00

1.8 Material and Equipment



.1 Product and Material Quality

.1 Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as Products throughout specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specification) for purpose intended. If request, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided.

.2 Defective Products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection.

.3 Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of Products, decision rests strictly with Consultant based upon requirements of Contract Documents.

.2 Storage, Handling and Protection

.1 Handle and store Products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions when applicable.

.2 Store packaged or bundled Products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer’s seals and labels intact.

.3 Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.3 Manufacturer’s Instructions

.1 Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect Products in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with Products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers.

.2 Notify Consultant in writing of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer’s instructions, so that Consultant may establish course of action.

.3 Improper installation of erection of Products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Consultant to require removal and reinstallation at no increase in Contract Price.

.4 Workmanship

.1 Workmanship shall be best quality, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Consultant if required Work is such as take it impractical to produce required results.

.2 Do not employ an unfit person or anyone unskilled in their required duties.

.3 Decisions as to quality or fitness of workmanship in cases of dispute rest solely with Consultant, whose decision is final.

.5 Concealment

.1 In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceiling, except where indicated otherwise.

.2 Before installation, inform Consultant if there is a contradictory situation. Install as directed by Consultant.

.6 Fire Protection

.1 All necessary precautions must be taken to eliminate any possible fire hazards. Provide sufficient and adequate fire fighting equipment, in first class order, to protect against any fire emergency in area of works proceeding.

.2 Under no circumstances will the burning of materials on the site be permitted.

.3 Free access must be maintained at all times to any fire hydrants or fire equipment.



.4 Provide fire protection as required by the Insurance Authorities, Chapter 166, of the Fire Marshals Act, and Ontario Regulations 67/87, of the Ontario Fire Code, dated: February, 1987 and the National Fire Code of Canada at no extra cost to the owner.

.7 Access

.1 The Contractor shall provide convenient, safe and adequate access for materials and supplies for all trades, including for the use of ambulance service, fire department and other similar facilities.

.2 Existing exits from adjacent buildings shall be kept free from obstruction at all times. Where exits must be restricted, alternate exits shall be provided only upon approval of the Owner’s Representative.

1.9 Codes and Applicable Standards

.1 Throughout the Contract Documents, reference is made to Codes and Standards which establish qualities and types of workmanship and materials, and which establish methods for testing and reporting on the pertinent characteristics.

.2 Where material or workmanship are required by these Contract Documents to meet or exceed the specifically named Code or Standard, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to provide materials and workmanship, which meet or exceed the specifically named Code or Standard.

.3 It is also the Contractor’s responsibility, when so required by the Contract Documents or by written request from the Consultant, to deliver to the Consultant all required proof that the materials or workmanship, or both, meet or exceed the requirements of the specially named Code or Standard. Such proof shall be in the form requesting in writing by the Consultant, and generally will be required to be copies of a certified report of tests, conducted by a testing agency and approved for that purpose by the Consultant.

1.10 Quality Assurance

.1 Familiarity with Pertinent Codes and Standards

.1 In procuring all items used in this work, it is the Contractor’s responsibility to verify the detailed requirements of the specifically named Codes and Standards, and to verify that the items procured for use in this work meet or exceed the specified requirements.

.2 Rejection of Non-Complying Items

.1 The Consultant reserves the right to reject items incorporated into the work, which fail to meet the specified minimum requirements. The Consultant further reserves the right, and without prejudice to other recourse the Consultant may take, to accept non-complying items, subject to an adjustment in the Contract. Amount as approved by the Consultant and the Owner.

1.11 Work within an Occupied Building

.1 The facility will be occupied during the entire duration of this project. Public access to the library will need to be safely maintained during all opening hours and during special events. Any work within the occupied space of the library will need to be coordinated with library staff. After such work the space is to be thoroughly cleaned and readied for public occupancy

.2 Mechanical, Electrical, Life Safety systems will need to be maintained operational. Any shut-downs must be scheduled with the library in advance.

.3 Exterior and interior hoarding will need to be maintained at all times. Depending on the staging of the project, the position of such hoarding may change.



.4 Dust and fume control measures must be in place at all times to protect the hoarded and occupied areas of the library from contamination.

1.12 Project Closeout

.1 Refer to section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures

1.13 Contractor Access to Parking

.1 Designated parking will not be provided for contractor use.


Supplementary Conditions Section 00 73 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General

.1 The following clauses supplement The CCDC 2 Document, Stipulated Price Contract, 2008 and shall become part of: where in conflict take precedence over the General Conditions.

1.2 Agreement between Owner and Contractor

.1 Article GD 1.1 Documents

.1 Add the following clause:

1.1.13: The Contractor shall maintain at the site, in good condition, and apart from all others used in actual construction, one set of drawings which he shall record all changes which may be found necessary and or authorized by the Architect. After the final acceptance of work, submit this set of drawings to the architect for his permanent record.

.2 Article GC 6.5 Delays


6.5.6: No extension of time will be allowed for correction of faulty work.

.3 Article GC 8 Disputes


8.2.9: Within 5 days of receipt of notice of arbitration by the responding party under paragraph 8.2.6, the Owner and the Contractor shall give the Consultant a written notice containing:

a) a copy of the notice of arbitration;

b) a copy of the supplementary conditions 8.2.9 to 8.2.15 of the contract, and;

c) any claims or issues which the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, wishes to raise in relation to the Consultant arising out of the issues in dispute on the arbitration.

8.2.10: The Owner and the Contractor agree that the Consultant may elect, with in ten days of the receipt of the notice under paragraph 8.2.9 to become a full party to the arbitration under paragraph 8.2.6 if the Consultant:

a) has a vested or contingent financial interest in the outcome of the arbitration;

b) gives the notice of election to the Owner and the Contractor before the Arbitrator is appointed;

c) agrees to be a party in the arbitration within the meaning of the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6 and;

d) agrees to be bound by the arbitral award made in the arbitration.

8.2.11: If the Consultant is not given the written notice required under paragraph 8.1.9, both the Owner and the Contractor are stopped from pursuing an action, counter claim or other proceeding or making an application against the Consultant arising out of the issue in dispute in the arbitration between the Owner and the Contractor under paragraph 8.2.6.

8.2.12: If an election is made under paragraph 8.2.10, the Consultant may participate in the appointment of the arbitrator and notwithstanding the rules referred to in paragraph 8.2.6, the time period for reaching agreement on the appointment of the arbitrator shall begin to run from the date of the Owner receives a copy of the notice of arbitration.



8.2.13: The arbitrator in the arbitration in which the Consultant has elected under paragraph 8.2.10 to become a full party may:

a) on application of the Owner or the Contractor, determine whether the Consultant has satisfied the requirements of paragraph 8.2.10 and;

b) make any procedural order considered necessary to facilitate the addition of the Consultant as a party to the arbitration.

8.2.14: The provisions of paragraph 2.8.9 shall apply mutatis and mutandis written notice to be given by the Consultant to any Sub-consultant.

8.2.15: In the event of notice of arbitration given by a Consultant to a Sub-consultant, the Sub-consultant is not entitled to any election with respect to the preceding as outlined in 8.2.10, and is deemed to be bound by the arbitration proceeding.

.2 Change 8.1.1 to read as follows

“Differences between the parties to the Contract as to the interpretation, application or administration of this Contract or any failure to agree where agreement between the parties is called for, herein collectively called disputes, which are not resolved in the first instance by decision of the Consultant pursuant to the provisions of GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant, paragraphs 2.2.6 and 2.2.7, shall be settled in accordance with the requirements of the following.”

.3 Delete in it entirely and substitute with new paragraph 8.2.2:

“8.2.2 The claimant shall give written notice of such dispute to the other party no later than thirty (30) days after the receipt of the Consultant’s decision given under GC 2.2 Role of the Consultant, paragraph 2.2.7. Such notice shall set forth particulars of the matters in dispute, the probably extent and value of the damage and the relevant provisions of the Contract Documents. The other party shall reply to such notice no later than fourteen (14) days after he receives or is considered to have received it, setting out in such reply his grounds and other relevant provisions of the Contract Documents.”

.4 8.1.3 Alter to read as follows:

“If the matter in dispute is not resolved promptly the Consultant will give such instructions as in his opinion are necessary for the proper performance for the Work and to prevent delays pending settlement of the dispute. The parties shall act immediately according to such instructions, it being understood that by doing so neither party will jeopardize any claim they may have, if it is subsequently determined that such instructions were in error or at variance with the Contract Documents, the Owner shall pay the Contractor costs incurred by the Contractor in carrying out such instructions which the Contract or was required to do beyond what the Contract Documents correctly understood and interpreted would have required, including costs resulting from interruption of the Work.”

.5 8.1.4 Add New Paragraph

“8.1.4 it is agreed that no act by either party shall be construed renunciation or waiver of any of his rights or recourses, provided he has given the notices in accordance with paragraph 8.1.2 and has carried out the instruction as provided in paragraph 8.1.3.”

.4 By deleting paragraph 11.1.3, Aircraft and Water Craft Liability Insurance and adding the following to GC 11.1.1

.1 GC 11.1.1 General Liability Insurance

.1 The Insurance shall be in the joint names of the Contractor, The Owner, The Architect, and the Engineering Consultants for the amount of FIVE Million Dollars ($5,000,000.00).



.2 The insurance shall preclude subrogation claims by the Insurer against anyone insured thereunder.

.3 The Comprehensive General Liability Insurance shall include coverage for:

a) Premises and operations liability

b) Products or completed operations liability

c) Blanket Contractual liability

d) Cross liability

e) Elevator and hoist liability as applicable

f) Contingent Employer’s liability

g) Personal Injury liability arising out of false arrest, detention or imprisonment or malicious prosecution, libel slander of defamation of character, invasion of privacy, wrongful eviction or wrongful entry.

h) Shoring, blasting, excavation, underpinning, demolition, pile driving and caisson work, work below ground surface, tunneling and grading as applicable

i) Liability with respect to non-owned licensed vehicles

j) Contractor’s Protective Liability

.5 By deleting paragraph 1.1.1.5 Contractor’s Equipment Insurance of Section 11.1.1 and substituting the following:

.1 GC 11.1.1.5 Contractor’s Equipment Insurance

.1 Builders Risk Insurance

.1 The Contractor shall provide and maintain 100% completed Value All Risk Builders Risk Policy covering work done and material delivered to the site acceptable to the Owner, in the joint names of the Owner, the Architect and the Engineering Consultants and the Contractor payable to the Owner and the Contractor as their respective interests may appear and protecting each in such terms as will preclude subrogation claims by the Insurer against anyone insured thereunder.

.2 In the event of a loss, the Contractor shall act on behalf of the Owner, Consultant and himself for the purpose of adjusting the amount of such loss with the Insurer.

.3 On completion of such adjustment, the Contractor shall repair the damage and complete the work, and shall be entitled to receive from the Owner (in addition to any sum due under the Contract) the amount at which the Owner’s interest had been appraised in the adjustment, to be paid as the work of restoration proceeds and in accordance with the Owners certificates. Damage shall not affect the rights and obligations of either party under the Contract except as a foresaid, and except that the Contractor shall be entitled to such reasonable extension of time for completion of the work as the Owner may decide.

.4 In the event that the Owner occupies the building or any part thereof prior to the date of substantial completion as certified by the Owner, any increase in cost of insurance arising out of such occupancy shall be at the Owner’s expense

.5 Prior to commencement of any work hereunder, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with evidence of All Builders Risk Insurance and shall



promptly provide the Contractor with a certified true copy of each insurance policy. All such insurance shall be maintained continuously until a date ten (10) days after issue by the Owner of a Certificate of Total Performance, after which date, the Owner shall assume responsibility for insuring the whole work.

.6 All builders Risk Insurance policies shall contain an endorsement to provide all Named Insured’s with prior notice to changes and cancellations. Such endorsement shall be in the following form:

.7 “It is understood and agreed that the coverage provided by this policy will not be changed or amended in any way nor cancelled until 30 days after written notice of such change or cancellation shall have been given to all Named Insured’s.”

.6 GC 3.6 Construction Safety

.1 3.6.1 Add new sentence:

“The Owner’s responsibility as the constructor, as defined in Section 1 of The Occupational Health and Safety Act, RSO 93 having jurisdiction in the Place of Work, is hereby assigned to, and accepted by the Contractor. The Contractor shall undertake and execute the duties of Constructor, as outlined in Section 23 of The Occupational Health and Safety Act, RSO 93.”

.7 GC 5.1 Financing Information Required of the Owner

.1 Revise the Heading “GC 5.1 Financing Information Required of the Owner” to read “GC 5.1 Financing Information Required.”

.2 Revise line 5.1.1 “The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, prior to execution of the Agreement, and/or promptly from time to time thereafter, furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract” to read “ The Owner shall, at the request of the Contractor, on a monthly basis furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract.”

.3 5.1.1 Add new sentence:

“The Contractor shall, at the request of the Owner, on a monthly basis furnish to the Owner reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations under the Contract.”

.4 5.1.2 Delete in its entirety and substitute new paragraph 5.1.2:

“5.1.2 The Owner and Contractor shall notify each other in written format by means of legal representation, of any material change in its financial arrangements during the performance of the Contract.”

.8 GC 5.5 Payment of Holdback Upon Substantial Performance of the Work

.1 5.5.3 Delete in its entirety.

END OF SECTION 00 73 00.

Health Safety Requirements Section 00 73 19 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Instructions

.1 The contents of this Division will form as an integral part of each Division specified within the tender specification document and as well as the tender working drawings.

.2 The General Contractor will be responsible to make aware to his Subcontractors/Subtrade and suppliers (be it the wholesale distributor or the manufacturer) the contents and requirements of this Division.

1.2 Scope of Work

.1 Mention herein or indication on the drawings of articles, materials, operations or methods requires that the General Contractor provide (unless requested otherwise, by the Owner’s Representative) each item mentioned or indicated; perform each operation prescribed; and provide therefore all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to complete the work to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

.2 Each Subcontractor for the trades involved shall be held responsible to the General Contractor to create a safe work place, as well as, providing requested documentation for all work bearing upon their trade, inclusive of whatever miscellaneous materials and/or safety equipment is required to protect/or create the installations.

1.3 Requirements Included

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY MEASURES

Observe and enforce construction safety measures required by the National Building Code (1990) Part 8; the Provincial Government; Workers’ Compensation Board; and Municipal authorities.

.2 In particular, the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ont. Reg. 213/91 or latest edition), the Ontario Construction Safety Act, the regulations of the Ontario Ministry of Labour and Ontario Hydro Safety Requirements shall be strictly enforced.

.3 In particular, Health and Safety/Ministry of Labour-Labour.gov.on.ca:

Construction site health and safety during Covid-19.

https://www.ontario.ca/page/construction-site-health-and-safety-during-covid-19

.4 General Contractor shall ensure that copies of all applicable construction safety

regulations, codes and standards are available on the job-site throughout the period of construction. All workers including the Consultant and the Owner are to be informed that these documents are available for reference at any time. COVID-19 - Standardized

Protocols for All Canadian Construction Sites version 4, April 16, 2020 to be part of these standards. https://www.cca-acc.com

.5 General Contractor shall ensure that all supervisory personnel on the job-site are fully

aware of the contents of the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Ontario Regulation 213/91 - Construction Projects), as amended, and the Workers’ Compensation Act and, that they comply with all requirements and procedures prescribed therein. These documents include, but are not limited to, the following construction safety requirements: .1 General Contractor to register with the Director of the Occupational

Health and Safety Division before or within thirty (30) days of the commencement of the project, (Ont. Reg. 213/91, Sec.5).

https://www.ontario.ca/page/construction-site-health-and-safety-during-covid-19



.2 File a notice of project with a Director indicating the date of

commencement of the project, (Ont. Reg. 213/91, Sec. 6).

.3 Notification prior to trenching deeper than 1.2m, (Ont. Reg.213/91, Sec.7).

.4 Accident Notices and Reports, (Ont. Reg. 213/91, Sec. 8 through Sec.12).

.5 General Safety Requirements, (Ont. Reg. 213/91, Sec. 13 through Sec.19). .6 General Construction Requirements, eg., protective clothing, hygiene practices,

housekeeping, temporary heat, fire safety, access to the job site, machine and equipment guarding and coverings, scaffolds and platforms, electrical hazards, roofing, mental, (Ont. Reg. 213/91, Sec. 20 through Sec. 221).

.7 Establish a Joint Health and Safety Committee where more than 19 workers are

employed for more than three (3) months, (RSO, S.8). .8 Establish a Worker Trades Committee for all projects employing more than 49

workers for more than three (3) months, (RSO, S. 8a and 8b). .9 Ensure that all activities arising out of (.7) and (.8) above are recorded and that

minutes are available to an inspector of the Ontario Ministry of Labour and the Owner’s Representative.

.10 Prior to commencement of work. Submit Health & Safety program of General

Contractors including Jobsite Measures to Protect against COVID-19.

.6 In the event of a conflict between any of the provisions of the above authorities the most stringent provisions are to be applied.

.7 The General Contractor shall be considered as the “Constructor” in consideration of the rights and responsibilities for all construction safety requirements, procedures, facilities and inspection of all work performed by the General Contractor, Subcontractors/Subtrades and all other Contractors engaged on this project.

1.4 Material Safety Data Sheets

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) must be available at the job-site for any product listed on the Hazardous Ingredients List prior to being used, installed or applied inside of the building.

.2 A Material Safety Data Sheet is to be submitted to the Owner’s Representative for any product which is known to create, or suspected of creating, a health hazard or discomfort during construction or upon commissioning of the project including, but not limited to, the following:

.1 adhesives .2 solvents .3 sealants, (calking, vapour seals, etc.) .4 sprayed-on fireproofing .5 resilient flooring



.6 carpet, paint, varnish or other coatings

.7 exposed membrane waterproofing .8 special coatings, (terrazzo sealants, chafing coatings, etc.) .9 solder, brazing and welding and other filler metal .10 other products whose particles or vapours may become air borne after

installation.

NOTE: All correspondence, enquiries, instructions, etc., in connection with the project shall be made through the offices of the Consultant.


Record Clarifications and Proposals Section 00 93 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Documents

.1 Drawings, electronic data and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and other Division 0 and 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary

.1 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

.2 Related Sections include the following:

.1 Refer to 01 21 13 Allowances for procedural requirements for handling and processing allowances.

.2 Refer to the tender form for administrative requirements for using unit prices.

.3 Refer to 01 25 00 Product Substitutions Procedures for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Prepare and maintain logs of communications and changes. Update on the electronic Project Management System on a real time basis. Log number, brief description and status. Keep log current for real time access by all members of project design team. At a minimum, logs to be maintained include:

.1 Supplemental Instructions log.

.2 Requests for Interpretation log.

.3 Deviation Requests log.

.4 Contemplated Change Notice log.

.5 Change Orders log.

.6 Change Directives log.

.2 Revisions to schedules and submittals:

.1 Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Price.

.2 Promptly revise progress schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub-schedules to adjust times for other items of Work affected by the change, and resubmit.

.3 Promptly enter changes in Project record documents.

.3 Submit name of the individual authorized to receive communications and change documents, and be responsible for informing others in Contractor's employ of communications and changes to the Work.

.4 Training for electronic forms: Notify the Consultant in writing if the Contractor needs help accessing and using electronic forms.

1.4 Minor Changes In The Work (Supplemental Instructions)

.1 Consultant will issue Supplemental Instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, on Consultant's form.

1.5 Requests For Interpretation (RFI)

.1 Definition: A request for interpretation is prepared by the Contractor, and submitted to the Consultant, to request clarifications or interpretations of the intent of the Contract



Documents, or to notify the Consultant of potential conflicts in Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and field conditions.

.1 The Consultant's response is an interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents. Such request does not authorize changes in the Work that impact Contract Price or Contract Time.

.2 When possible, request such clarification either verbally or in writing at the next scheduled Project meeting. When the RFI is answered at the Project meeting, number the RFI and enter the response into the meeting minutes.

.1 When the urgency of the need, or the complexity of the item makes clarification at the next scheduled Project meeting impractical, prepare and submit a formal written RFI to the Consultant without delay.

.3 Submit RFI within a reasonable time frame so as not to impede the progress of the Work.

.1 When an answer to an RFI has an effect on cost or time, notify the Consultant in accordance with the Contract Documents. Do not perform such Work until a Change Order has been reviewed by the Consultant and approved by the Owner.

.2 When relevant, when submitting an RFI, indicate the time available for the Consultant to respond without causing an impact to the Contract Time. If no time frame for response is indicated, request will be considered non-critical.

.3 When the number and frequency of RFIs submitted becomes excessive for the Consultant to respond in a timely manner, the Consultant and Contractor shall work together to reduce the number of RFI's and to allow Consultant additional time for response where needed.

.4 When a Request for Interpretation involves clarification of coordination issues (Example: pipe and duct routing, clearances, specific locations of work shown diagrammatically), lay out Contractor's suggested solutions using scaled sketches, and submit with the request. If the request is such that a choice of several logical solutions are apparent to the Contractor, include the logical solutions on the form.

.5 RFI may be returned with a stamp or notation "Not Reviewed", if, in the opinion of the Consultant:

.1 The interpretation requested is ambiguous or unclear to the Consultant.

.2 The answer is obvious and clear by researching the Contract Documents. The Consultant will not be unreasonable in assisting the Contractor in determining where to find information in the Contract Documents.

.3 The Contractor has not reviewed the request prior to submittal to the Consultant.

.4 The Contractor has not offered potential solutions to answer coordination issues or offered logical solutions.

.6 Allow a minimum of 7 days for review and response time, after receipt by the Consultant. Consultant will use reasonable efforts to return the RFI in the 7 day time period. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to verify receipt by the Consultant. The response time may be increased if:

.1 More information is required.

.2 The RFI is submitted out of sequence.

.3 In the opinion of the Consultant, more time is needed to answer the RFI.

.7 Do not use RFI for the following purposes:

.1 To request review of submittals.



.2 To request review of substitutions.

.3 To request changes to the Contract Documents and to confirm action taken by the Contractor for requested changes or substitutions to the Contract Documents.

.8 If the Contractor believes that a clarification by the Consultant may result in a change in Contract Price, the Contractor shall not proceed with the work indicated by the request until a Change Order is reviewed by the Consultant and approved by the Owner.

.1 If the Contractor believes that a clarification by the Consultant results in additional cost, identify the basis of the Contractor's bid in the RFI.

.2 Answered RFI shall not be construed as an authorization to perform extra work.

1.6 Deviation Requests

.1 Definition: Deviation requests are prepared by the Contractor, and submitted to the Consultant, to request the Consultant's acceptance of a minor variation from the Contract Documents, which will still satisfy the intent of the Contract Documents, but will not impact the Contract Price or Contract Time.

.1 Attach completed Substitution Request form if product substitutions are required.

1.7 Allowances

.1 Refer to CCDC GC 4.1 Cash Allowances

1.8 Contemplated Change Notice

.1 Contemplated Change Notice (CCN): Consultant will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

.1 Contemplated Change Notices issued by Consultant are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

.2 Within time specified in Contemplated Change Notice after receipt of Contemplated Change Notice, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Price and to the extent possible, the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. If it is not possible to determine the impact on the schedule within the time specified in the CCN, the Contractor shall indicate on its estimate and the date such information will be provided.

.1 Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

.2 Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of Contractor discounts.

.3 Include costs of labour and supervision directly attributable to the change.

.4 To the extent possible, include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Indicate if impact on Construction Schedule can not be determined at time of submittal of CCN, and provide information as soon as practicable.

.3 If latent or unforeseen conditions or other conditions outside the control of the Contractor require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by



submitting information to the Consultant and requesting that the Consultant issue a CCN.

.1 Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Price and the Contract Time.

.2 Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

.3 Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of Contractor discounts.

.4 Include costs of labour and supervision directly attributable to the change.

.5 Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

.6 Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Substitution procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

.2 Contemplated Change Notice Form: For Contemplated Change Notice proposals use Consultant's form.

1.9 Change Order Procedures

.1 On Owner's approval of a Contemplated Change Notice, Consultant will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on Consultant's form.

1.10 Change Directive

.1 Change Directive: Consultant may issue a Change Directive on Consultant's form. Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

.1 Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Price or the Contract Time.

.2 Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Change Directive.

.1 After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate price and time adjustments to the Contract.


Product Substitution Procedures Section 01 25 00 Page 1 of 1


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Substitutions

.1 Submission of substitutions:

.1 Proposals for substitutions of Products and materials must be submitted in accordance with procedures specified in this section.

.2 Consultant may review submissions, if directed by Owner, but in any case with the understanding that the Contract Time will not be altered due to the time required by the Consultant to review the submission and by the Contractor to implement the substitution in the Work.

.2 Submission requirements:

.1 Description of proposed substitution, including detailed comparative specification of proposed substitution with the specified Product.

.2 Manufacturer’s Product data sheets for proposed Products.

.3 Respective costs of items originally specified and the proposed substitution.

.4 Confirmation of proposed substitution delivery, in writing by Product manufacturer.

.5 Compliance with the building codes and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.6 Affect concerning compatibility and interface with adjacent building materials and components.

.7 Compliance with the intent of the Contract Documents.

.8 Effect on Contract Time.

.9 Reasons for the request.

.10 Detailed availability of maintenance services and sources of replacement materials and parts, including associate costs and time frames.

.3 Substitutions submitted on shop drawings without following requirements of this section prior to submission of the affected shop drawings will cause the shop drawings to be rejected.

.4 Proposed substitutions shall include costs associated with modifications necessary to other adjacent and connecting portions of the Work.

.5 Consultant’s decision concerning acceptance or rejection of proposed substitutions is final.

.1 Should it appear to the Consultant that the value of services required to evaluate the substitution exceeds the potential reduction, the Consultant will advise the Owner that the substitution does not merit consideration before proceeding with a full evaluation. If the substitution will produce a reduction commensurate with or exceeding the value of the Consultant's services to evaluate the substitution, the Consultant will request the Owners direction to proceed with evaluation.


Payment Procedures Section 01 29 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Drawings, electronic data and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary

.1 This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


.1 Division 00 Section "Record Clarifications and Proposals" for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

.2 Division 1 Section "Project Managing and Coordination" for administrative requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule and Submittals Schedule.

1.3 Schedule Of Values

.1 Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

.1 Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

.1 Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.

.2 Submittals Schedule.

.2 Submit the Schedule of Values to Consultant within 10 days of contract execution.

.2 Format and Content: Use the Specification table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

.1 Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

.1 Project name and location.

.2 Name of Owner.

.3 Name of Consultant.

.4 Consultant's Project number.

.5 Contractor's name and address.

.6 Date of submittal.

.2 Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed:

.1 Related Specification Section or Division.

.2 Description of the Work.

.3 Name of subcontractor.

.4 Name of manufacturer or fabricator.

.5 Name of supplier.

.6 Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.



.7 Dollar value.

.1 Percentage of the Contract Price to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

.3 Provide a breakdown of the Contract Price in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Specification table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate.

.4 Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Price.

.5 Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

.1 Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. Include evidence of insurance or bonded warehousing if required.

.6 Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

.7 Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

.1 Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

.8 Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Price.

1.4 Applications For Payment

.1 Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Consultant and paid for by Owner.

.1 Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Performance of the Work, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

.2 Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction Work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

.3 Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor and submit with a Statutory Declaration sworn before a Commissioner of Oaths. Consultant will return incomplete applications without action.

.1 Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

.2 Include amounts of Change Orders and Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

.4 Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and executed original copies of each Application for Payment to Consultant by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien, WSIB Clearance Certificate and Statutory Declarations for General Contractor and Sub-Contractors similar attachments if required.

.1 Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

.5 Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following as applicable:



.1 List of Subcontractors.

.2 Schedule of Values.

.3 Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final).

.4 Products list.

.5 Schedule of unit prices (if applicable).

.6 Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).

.7 List of Contractor's staff assignments.

.8 List of Contractor's principal consultants.

.9 Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work.

.10 Initial progress report.

.11 Report of preconstruction conference.

.12 Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

.13 Performance and payment bonds.

.14 Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.

.15 Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.

.16 WSIB Clearance Certificates for Contractor and Subcontractors.

.6 Application for Payment at Substantial Performance of the Work: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Performance of the Work. On receipt of request, Consultant will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Consultant will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Consultant, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

.1 Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially performed and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Price.

.2 Upon review of the Work and the Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, the Consultant will certify Substantial Performance by signing Certificate. The Consultant will not unreasonably withhold signature on the Certificate of Substantial Performance. Contractor shall publish executed Certificate once in a construction trade newspaper in conformance with the Construction Lien Act.

.7 Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

.1 Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.

.2 Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.

.3 Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Price.

.4 Evidence that claims have been settled. Itemize any unsettled claims and except from requested payment amount.

.5 Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Performance of the Work or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

Project Managing and Coordination Section 01 31 00 Page 1 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Section Includes

.1 This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project, including but not limited to, the following:

.1 Coordination of the Work

.2 Meetings

.3 Administrative procedures

1.2 Related Sections

.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

.2 Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning and Waste Management

.3 This section describes requirements applicable to all Sections within Divisions 02 to 49

1.3 Coordination

.1 Perform coordination of progress schedules, submittals, use of site, temporary utilities, construction facilities and construction Work, with progress of Work of others.

.2 Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the specifications for efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for items installed later.

.3 Comply with Consultant's allocation of mobilization areas of site; for field offices and sheds, access, traffic, and parking facilities.

.4 During construction, coordinate use of site and facilities through Consultant's procedures for intra-project communications: Submittals, reports and records, schedules, coordination of drawings, recommendations, and resolution of ambiguities and conflicts.

.5 Responsibility for providing temporary utilities and construction facilities is identified in Section 01 50 00 – Temporary Facilities and Controls

.6 Comply with instructions from Consultant for use of temporary utilities and construction facilities.

.7 Coordinate field engineering and layout work with Consultant.

.8 Verify that utility requirements of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service of operating equipment.

.9 Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts and conduits, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with the line of the building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

.10 In finished areas, unless indicated otherwise, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring within the Work. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

.11 Coordinate completions and cleanup of Work of separate Sections in accordance with Section 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management.

.12 After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner’s activities. The Contractor shall note this may involve work after regular hours of operation or weekends as may be required by the Owner. No extra payment will be made for after hours or weekend Work required to complete deficiencies.



.13 Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid delaying the progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to the following:

.1 Preparation of Construction Schedule

.2 Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls

.3 Delivery and processing of submittals

.4 Progress Meetings

.5 Pre-installation Meetings

.6 Project closeout activities

.7 Startup and adjustment of systems

1.4 On-Site Documents

.1 Maintain at job site, one copy each of the following:

.1 Contract Drawings

.2 Specifications

.3 Addenda

.4 Reviewed shop drawings

.5 Change orders

.6 Change directives

.7 Other modifications to Contract

.8 Field test reports

.9 Copy of approved Work schedule

.10 Manufacturers' installation and application instructions

.11 Labour conditions and wage schedules

.12 Applicable current editions of municipal regulations and by-laws

.13 Current applicable codes (Building, electrical etc.), complete with addenda bulletins applicable to the Place of the Work

1.5 Schedules

.1 Schedules Required

.1 Construction Progress Schedule.

.2 Submittal Schedule for Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples.

.3 Cash Allowance Schedule for purchasing products.

.2 Format

.1 Prepare schedules in the form of a PERT or GANTT utilizing Suretrak scheduling software.

.2 Include horizontal time scale identifying the first Working Day of each week.

.3 Format for listings: The chronological order of the start of each item or part of the work.

.4 Identification of listings: By systems description.



.3 Submission

.1 Submit initial schedules within seven (7) days after award of Contract.

.2 Consultant will review schedule and return reviewed copy with ten (10) days after receipt.

.3 Resubmit finalized schedule within seven (7) days after return of reviewed copy.

.4 Construction schedule:

.1 Include the complete sequence of construction activities, including provision for climate and weather reasonably expected.

.2 Include the dates for the commencement and completion of each major element of the Work parallel to the sections of the specifications.

.3 Show projected percentage of completion for each item as of the first Working Day of each week.

.4 Submit draft schedule for review, and incorporate responses to comments identified by Consultant and/or Owner.

.5 Show dates for the commencement and completion of inspection and testing

.6 At each date of submission of schedule, indicate progress of each activity.

.1 Show changes occurring since previous submission of the construction schedule:

.1 Major changes in scope.

.2 Change Orders and if approved with time extensions.

.3 Activities modified since previous submission.

.4 Revised projections of progress and completion.

.5 Other identifiable changes.

.7 Submit revised construction schedule with each monthly progress report.

.5 Product delivery schedule:

.1 Include dates for delivery of Products, equipment, finished items, factory-finished manufactured items. Show last dates for order, shipment, and delivery in order to meet construction schedule.

.2 Owner supplied equipment.

1.6 Meetings – General

.1 The Consultant will:

.1 Schedule bi-weekly project meetings throughout progress of Work.

.2 The Contractor will:

.1 Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings.

.2 Prepare agenda for meetings.

.3 Distribute written notice of each meeting five (5) days in advance of meeting date.

.4 Preside at meetings

.5 Record minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify action by parties.



.6 Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three (3) days working after each meeting and transmit to meeting participants.

.7 Schedule and administer pre-installation meetings when specified in sections and when required to coordinate related or affected Work.

.3 Participants at meetings to be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of each party in the Contract.

1.7 Pre-Construction Meeting

.1 Within fifteen (15) working days after notice of award of Contract and prior to Contractor occupancy of the site, request a meeting of parties in Contract.

.2 Attendees: Consultant, Owner Representative, Contractor, major Subcontractors, emergency services, utility representatives, field inspectors and supervisors at a minimum.

.3 Agenda to include following:

.1 Submission of executed bonding, insurance, WSIB clearance, Occupational Health and Safety Policy and Procedures

.2 Status of the Contract documents and approvals (MOE, EICA, TSSA, ESA etc)

.3 Appointment of official representative of participants in Work

.4 Schedule of Work, key dates, progress scheduling.

.5 Distribution of Contract Documents

.6 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips as specified in Section 01 33 00

.7 Submission of list of subcontractors and list of products

.8 Requirements for temporary facilities, controls, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences, erosion and sediment control etc as specified in Section 01 50 00

.9 Delivery schedule of specified equipment.

.10 Requirements for start-up of equipment

.11 Site security as specified in Section 01 50 00

.12 Procedures and processing of proposed changes, field decisions, site instructions, requests for interpretation, submittals, substitutions, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, and administrative requirements

.13 Owner-furnished products

.14 Procedures for maintaining record drawings as specified in Section 01 78 39

.15 Maintenance material and data as specified in Section 01 78 39

.16 Take-over procedures, acceptance, and warranties and repair of deficiencies as specified in Section 01 78 39

.17 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, and holdbacks

.18 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms as specified in Section 01 40 00

.19 Owner’s requirements and partial occupancy

.20 Work Restrictions

.21 Parking availability



.22 Dust control

.23 Progress cleaning as specified in Section 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste Management.

.24 Permits

.25 Maintenance manuals and training

.26 Obligations of the Contractor under the OHSA

1.8 Construction Progress Meetings

.1 During course of Work schedule progress meetings bi-weekly.

.2 Attendees: Contractor, major subcontractors involved in Work, Owner’s Representative, Consultant, suppliers and utility representatives as necessary, project superintendent.

.3 Agenda to include following:

.1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting

.2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting

.3 Planned progress to the next meeting, including sequence of operations

.4 Field observations, problems, conflicts and decisions

.5 Requests for interpretation and requests for proposal

.6 Change orders and directions

.7 Review proposed changes for effect on construction schedule and on completion date

.8 Claims for extras and disputes

.9 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules

.10 Problems which impede construction schedule

.11 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule

.12 Revision to construction schedule

.13 Review submittal schedules and status: expedite as required

.14 Maintenance of quality standards

.15 Status of correction of deficient items

.16 Review site safety and security issues

.17 Access, work hours, cleanliness, temporary facilities and controls

.18 Other business

.4 Contractor to revise construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with minutes.

1.9 Pre-Installation Meetings

.1 Conduct a pre-installation meeting on site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction and when required in individual specification Sections.

.2 Attendees: Installer and representatives of the manufacturers and fabricators direction affecting or affected by work on the specific Section, Consultant and the Owner’s Representative as required.

.3 Review conditions of installation, preparation of installation procedures and coordination of related work.



1.10 Pre-Maintenance Walkthrough

.1 Ensure the site is cleaned as specified in Section 01 74 00 Cleaning and Waste management prior to the meeting.

.2 Attendees: Contractor, Consultant, Owner’s Representative, major subcontractors, utility representatives (as required) and inspectors.

.3 Review warranty requirements and manufacturer’s installation instructions.

.4 Walk the entire site to identify all deficiencies, their priority and timeliness for repair.

.5 Project Administrator and Consultant to establish communication procedures for:

.1 Notification of construction warranty defects

.2 Determining priorities for type of defects

.3 Determining reasonable response times

.4 Approving repair methods

1.11 Submittals

.1 Refer to Division 1 section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures

1.12 Coordination Drawings

.1 Provide information required by Consultant for preparation of coordination Drawings.

.2 Review and approve revised Drawings for submittal to Consultant.

1.13 Closeout Procedures

.1 Refer to Section 01 78 00 for Close out Submittals

.2 Notify Consultant when Work is considered ready for Substantial Performance.

.3 Accompany Consultant on preliminary inspection to determine items listed for completion or correction.

.4 Comply with Consultant's instructions for correction of items of Work listed in executed certificate of Substantial Performance and for access to Owner-occupied areas.

.5 Notify Consultant of instructions for completion of items of Work determined in Consultant's final inspection.


Photographic Documentation Section 01 32 33 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary

.1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

.1 Preconstruction digital photographs or video capable of single frame printing of images.

.2 Periodic construction digital photographs.

.3 Final Completion construction digital photographs.

.4 Demonstration and training videotapes.


.1 Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting construction photographs.

.2 Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic digital files as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Construction Photographs: Submit digital electronic data files of each photographic view within 7 days of taking photographs.

.1 Digital Images: Submit 1 complete set of digital image electronic files as a Project Record Document on CD-ROM. Identify electronic media with date photographs were taken. Submit images that have the same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped.

1.4 Coordination

.1 Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting.

.2 Coordinate with and accommodate Owner's photographer during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Photographic Media

.1 Digital Images: Provide images in JPEG format, with minimum sensor size of 3.2 megapixels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Photographs, General

.1 Photographer: Project Superintendent or assigned personnel.

.2 Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

.1 Date and Time: Include date and time in filename for each image.

.2 Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images in electronic file in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images same as for those submitted to Consultant.

Photographic Documentation Section 01 32 33 Page 2 of 2


3.2 Construction Photographs

.1 Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take color images of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Consultant.

.1 Take images to show existing conditions adjacent to the property before starting the Work.

.2 Take images of existing buildings either on or adjoining the property to accurately record the physical conditions at the start of construction.

.2 Periodic Construction Photographs: Take images on an ongoing to record construction activity and significant events and conditions. Select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since the last photographs were taken.

.3 Take images of key construction issues which affect code compliance, water tightness, and typical installation process for each trade and any components which cannot be clearly reviewed once items are covered up.


Submittal Procedures Section 01 33 00 Page 1 of 9


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Summary

.1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals, both electronically and physically. Intent is for as much of the submittal process as possible be handled electronically.


.1 Division 01 29 00 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment.

.2 Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting Coordination Drawings.

.3 Division 1 Section "Photographic Documentation" for submitting periodic construction photographs.

.4 Division 01 40 00 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and Delegated-Design Submittals and for erecting mock-ups.

.5 Division 01 77 00 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

.6 Division 01 78 39 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

1.3 Definitions

.1 Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Consultant's and Contractor's responsive action.

.2 Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Consultant's and Contractor's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

.3 Master Project Scope Document: Written and graphic information summarizing all Subcontractor packages and including descriptions of the scope of work in each Subcontractor package and the division of work between Subcontractors.

1.4 Submittal Procedures

.1 Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

.1 Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

.2 Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

.1 Consultant reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

.2 Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Consultant's receipt of submittal.

.1 Initial Review: Allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent



submittals. Consultant will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

.2 Concurrent Review: Where concurrent review of submittals by Consultant's consultants, Owner, or other parties is required, allow 15 calendar days for initial review of each submittal.

.3 Direct Transmittal to Consultant: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be transmitted directly to Consultant's consultants, provide duplicate copy of transmittal to Consultant. Submittal will be returned to Consultant before being returned to Contractor.

.4 If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

.5 Allow 15 calendar days for processing each resubmittal.

.6 No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing. Calendar days shall begin to be counted from the date received by the Consultant.

.3 Identification: For submittals submitted electronically, follow and complete procedures established for submittals on electronic Project management site. For submittals submitted physically, place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

.1 Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.

.2 Provide separate title sheet for each submittal, or provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on label or beside title block of each submittal to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Consultant and Contractor.

.3 Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

.1 Project name.

.2 Date.

.3 Name and address of Consultant.

.4 Name and address of Contractor.

.5 Name and address of subcontractor.

.6 Name and address of supplier.

.7 Name of manufacturer.

.8 Identifying number or code, including revision number, coordinated with attached Submittal Transmittal Form.

.9 Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

.10 Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

.11 Other necessary identification.

.4 Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

.5 Additional Copies: Unless Consultant observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

.1 Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to Consultant.

.6 Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Consultant will return submittals, without review, received from sources other than Contractor.



.1 On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Consultant on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include the same label information as the related submittal.

.2 Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents.

.3 Transmittal Form: Use attached sample Submittal Transmittal Form, or Contractor's standard form, as approved by Consultant and Owner.

.7 Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, Subcontractors, Suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

.8 Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Consultant in connection with construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Action Submittals

.1 General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

.1 Submit electronic submittals directly to Contractor's extranet specifically established for Project.

.2 Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

.1 If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

.2 Mark each copy of each submittal to show which Products and options are applicable.

.3 Include the following information, as applicable:

.1 Manufacturer's written recommendations.

.2 Manufacturer's Product specifications.

.3 Manufacturer's installation instructions.

.4 Standard color charts.

.5 Manufacturer's catalog cuts.

.6 Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.

.7 Printed performance curves.

.8 Operational range diagrams.

.9 Mill reports.

.10 Standard Product operating and maintenance manuals.

.11 Compliance with recognized trade association standards.

.12 Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.

.13 Application of testing agency labels and seals.

.14 Notation of coordination requirements.



.3 Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base shop drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

.1 Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable:

.1 Dimensions.

.2 Identification of Products.

.3 Fabrication and installation drawings.

.4 Roughing-in and setting diagrams.

.5 Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring.

.6 Shop work manufacturing instructions.

.7 Templates and patterns.

.8 Schedules.

.9 Design calculations.

.10 Compliance with specified standards.

.11 Notation of coordination requirements.

.12 Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.

.2 Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

.3 Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit shop drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 36 by 42 inches.

.4 Number of Copies: Submit all shop drawings electronically via the Consultant’s designated website.

.4 Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or Products, including the following:

.1 Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for mockups.

.2 Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

.1 Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the Product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

.3 Preparation: Mount, display, or package samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare samples to match Consultant's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side that includes the following:

.1 Generic description of sample.

.2 Product name or name of manufacturer.

.3 Sample source.

.4 Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, provide the following:



.1 Size limitations.

.2 Compliance with recognized standards.

.3 Availability.

.4 Delivery time.

.5 Submit samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

.1 If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in the Product represented by a sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of the variations.

.2 Refer to individual specification Sections for requirements for samples that illustrate workmanship, fabrication techniques, and details of assembly, connections, operation, and similar construction characteristics.

.6 Number of samples for Initial Selection: Submit 1 one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Consultant will return submittal other than samples with options selected.

.7 Number of samples for Verification: Submit 3 sets of Samples. Consultant will retain 1 sample set; remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain 1 returned sample set as a Project Record Sample.

.1 Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated.

.8 Disposition: Maintain sets of approved samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

.1 Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. Such samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.

.2 Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor.

.5 Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of Products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form:

.1 Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.

.2 Number and name of room or space.

.3 Location within room or space.

.6 Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for Construction Manager's action.

.7 Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section " Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

.8 Application for Payment: Comply with requirements in Division 01 29 00 Section "Payment Procedures."

.9 Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements in Division 01 29 00 Section "Payment Procedures."



.10 Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

.1 Name, address, e-mail address and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying Products.

.2 Number and title of related specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

.3 Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by Subcontract.

2.2 Informational Submittals

.1 General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other specification Sections.

.1 Number of Copies: Submit 1 copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Consultant will not necessarily return copies.

.2 Certificates and Certifications: Provide a Commissionaire of Oaths statement that includes signature of Contractor, testing agency, or design professional responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.

.3 Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

.2 Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements.

.3 Field Test Reports: When not provided as an Owner provided field test report, prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests required by individual specification sections performed either during installation of Product or after Product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.

.4 Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of Products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 01 78 00 "Closeout Submittals."

.5 Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

.6 Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a Product or equipment. Include name of Product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:

.1 Preparation of substrates.

.2 Required substrate tolerances.

.3 Sequence of installation or erection.

.4 Required installation tolerances.

.5 Required adjustments.

.6 Recommendations for cleaning and protection.



.7 Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

.1 Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.

.2 Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of Product.

.3 Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.

.4 Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.

.5 Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements.

.6 Statement whether conditions, Products, and installation will affect warranty.

.7 Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

.8 Provide warranties fully executed and notarized.

.8 Engineered submittals:

.1 Submittals for items required to be sealed by professional engineer (engineered) shall be duly prepared, sealed, and signed under the direct control and supervision of a qualified professional engineer registered in the Place of the Work, having in force, commercial general liability insurance and professional liability insurance with minimum coverage limit of $2,000,000 per claim and annual aggregate. Insurance coverage shall be maintained during the term of the Contract, and for three (3) years thereafter, and until the expiration of the applicable statute.

.2 Include with engineered submittal, proof of insurance identifying insurer, policy number, policy term, and limit of liability, on duly signed letterhead and / or certificates of insurance.

.3 Design includes building life safety, sizing of supports, anchors, framing, connections, spans, and as additionally required to meet or exceed requirements of applicable codes, standards, regulations, authorities having jurisdiction, and design requirements of the Contract Documents.

.4 Engineered submittals shall include design calculations, complete with references to codes and standards used in such calculations, supporting the proposed design represented by the submittal. Prepare calculations in a clear and comprehensive manner so that they can be properly reviewed.

.5 Professional engineer responsible for the preparation of engineered submittals shall undertake periodic field review, including review of associated mock-ups where applicable, at locations wherever the work as described by the engineered submittal is in progress, during fabrication and installation of such work, and shall submit a field review report after each visit. Field review reports shall be submitted to the Consultant, to authorities having jurisdiction as required, and in accordance with the building code.

.6 Field reviews shall be at intervals as necessary and appropriate to the progress of the work described by the submittal to allow the engineer to be familiar with the progress and quality of such work and to determine if the work is proceeding in general conformity with the Contract Documents, including reviewed shop drawings and design calculations.

.7 The professional engineer responsible for the preparation of the engineered submittal and for undertaking the periodic field reviews described above, shall prepare and submit to the Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction, as required, letters of commitment and compliance for those parts of the Work, certifying that they have



been Provided in accordance with the requirements both of the Contract Documents and of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Place of the Work.

.8 Upon completion of the parts of the Work covered by the engineered submittal, the professional engineer responsible for the preparation of the engineered submittal and for undertaking the periodic field reviews described above, shall prepare and submit to the Consultant and authorities having jurisdiction, as required, a letter of general conformity for those parts of the Work, certifying that they have been Provided in accordance with the requirements both of the Contract Documents and of the authorities having jurisdiction over the Place of the Work.

.9 Costs for such field reviews and field review reports and letters of general conformity letters of general conformity are included in the Contract Price.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Contractor's Review

.1 Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Consultant.

.2 Review Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, review stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and complies with the Contract Documents.

3.2 Consultant's Action

.1 General: Consultant will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action.

.2 Action Submittals: Consultant will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Consultant will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken:

.1 No Exception Taken: Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies with the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance.

.2 Make Corrections Noted: Work covered by the submittal may proceed provided it complies both with the Consultant's notations and corrections on the submittal and the Contract Documents. Final acceptance will depend on that compliance. Submit corrected document for record purposes.

.3 Revise and Resubmit: In the Consultant's opinion, submittal does not comply with the Contract Requirements. Proceed with Work covered by the submittal, including purchasing, fabrication, delivery, or other activity for the products submitted wholly at the Contractor's risk. Revise or prepare a new submittal according to the Consultant's notations and corrections.

.4 Rejected: In the Consultant's opinion, the Work covered by the submittal does not comply with the Contract Requirements. Prepare a new submittal for a product that complies with the Contract Documents.

.5 Submit Specified Items: In the Consultant's opinion, submittal does not comply with the Contract Requirements. Prepare additional information requested, or required by the Contract Documents, that indicates compliance with requirements.

.6 Not Reviewed: Submittal was not reviewed and is returned with no action taken.

.3 Informational Submittals: Consultant will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Consultant will forward each submittal to appropriate party.



.4 Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded.


Quality Requirements Section 01 40 00 Page 1 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Summary

.1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

.2 Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. The testing agency will be paid for by the Owner but assigned to the Contractor. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

.1 Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard Products.

.2 Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

.3 Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Consultant, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.


.1 Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections.

.2 Division 1 Section "Project Managing and Coordination" for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.

.3 Divisions 2 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.3 Definitions

.1 Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements.

.2 Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Consultant.

.3 Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies as required in individual specification Sections to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

.4 Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

1.4 Delegated Design

.1 Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide Products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.



.1 If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Consultant. Failure to request interpretation of existing criteria or to request additional criteria or clarification shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligation to provide complete, functional systems that meet the design intent, performance criteria and acceptance of the Consultant.

.2 Where referred to in the specifications as design-build, or where engineering services and certification are specifically required, all the costs of the systems that meet the design intent and respond to the performance requirements shall be included in the base bid. The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional sums for the design, approval, fabrication, shipping and installation of such systems. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, who's signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop drawings and other submittals prepared by said professional. The Owner and Consultant shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications or approvals performed by such design professionals. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor along with said professional design services to design the designated systems or portions of the Work in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and rulings as well as in conformance with performance and design criteria indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.5 Regulatory Requirements

.1 Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need:

.1 Provincial and local building codes or other regulatory agencies.

.2 Occupational Health and Safety Regulations.

1.6 Submittals

.1 Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

.2 Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:

.1 Specification Section number and title.

.2 Description of test and inspection.

.3 Identification of applicable standards.

.4 Identification of test and inspection methods.

.5 Number of tests and inspections required.

.6 Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.

.7 Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.

.8 Requirements for obtaining samples.

.9 Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

.3 Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

.1 Date of issue.

.2 Project title and number.

.3 Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.

.4 Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.

.5 Names of individuals making tests and inspections.



.6 Description of the Work and test and inspection method.

.7 Identification of Product and specification Section.

.8 Complete test or inspection data.

.9 Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

.10 Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.

.11 Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements.

.12 Name and signature of laboratory inspector.

.13 Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

.4 Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


.1 Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing Products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

.2 Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's Products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

.3 Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

.1 For work requiring special warranty, a firm or individual licensed by or trained and approved by manufacturer, or manufacturer's own forces.

.4 Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing Products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance.

.5 Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or Product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Design includes life safety, sizing of supports, anchors, framing, connections, spans, and as additionally required to meet or exceed requirements of applicable codes, standards, regulations, authorities having jurisdiction, and design requirements of the Contract Documents. Provide design calculations if required by Consultant.

.6 Specialists: Certain sections of the specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

.1 Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.



.7 Preconstruction Testing: Testing agency shall perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods.

.1 Contractor responsibilities include the following:

.1 Provide test specimens and assemblies representative of proposed materials and construction. Provide sizes and configurations of assemblies to adequately demonstrate capability of Product to comply with performance requirements.

.2 Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

.3 Fabricate and install test assemblies using installers who will perform the same tasks for Project.

.4 When testing is complete, remove assemblies; do not reuse materials on Project.

.2 Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Consultant, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

.8 Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups as required in individual specification Sections, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

.1 Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Consultant.

.2 Notify Consultant 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

.3 Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.

.4 Obtain Consultant's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.

.5 Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

.6 Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

1.8 Quality Control

.1 Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

.1 Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

.2 Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Price will be adjusted by Change Order.

.2 Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner.

.1 Testing agency will notify Consultant and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

.2 Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Consultant with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.



.3 Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Performance of the Work, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

.4 Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

.5 Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work.

.3 Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction.

.1 Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

.1 Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

.2 Notify testing agencies at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

.3 Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

.4 Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

.5 Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

.4 Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing.

.5 Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents.

.6 Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Consultant and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

.1 Notify Consultant and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

.2 Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

.3 Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through the Contractor.

.4 Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

.5 Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

.7 Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

.1 Access to the Project site.

.2 Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.



.3 Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.

.4 Security and protection for samples at Project site.

.8 Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

.1 Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

.9 Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services required by individual specification sections of the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.

.1 Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Consultant, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Repair And Protection

.1 General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

.1 Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

.2 Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

.3 Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services unless damages are caused by Owner's inspection and testing company.


Temporary Facilities and Controls Section 01 50 00 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 0 and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary

.1 This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.


.1 Division 0 Section "General Conditions”

.2 Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.

.3 Divisions 2 through 49 for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity requirements for products in those Sections.

1.3 Definitions

.1 Temporary Enclosure: Temporary enclosure is defined as when permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are complete, insulated and weathertight with permanent or substantial temporary construction; and all openings are closed and weathertight with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for construction personnel.

1.5 Project Conditions

.1 Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Permanent facilities will not be used for construction purposes unless approved by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Temporary Construction Materials

.1 General: Provide new materials. Undamaged, previously used materials in serviceable condition may be used if approved by Consultant. Provide materials suitable for use intended.

.2 Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails. Other alternatives shall be approved by the Owner and Architect.

.3 Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."

.4 Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36.

.5 Interior Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively.

.6 Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 9 Section "Painting."

.7 Water: Potable.



.8 Storage of Materials: The contractor will be responsible for providing any and all storage containers to protect construction materials.

2.2 Equipment

.1 General: Provide equipment suitable for use intended.

.2 Field Offices: Prefabricated Mobile units with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; heated and air conditioned; on foundations adequate for normal loading.

.3 Heating Equipment: For areas of new construction, provide self-contained heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation, General

.1 Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required.

.2 Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 Temporary Utility Installation

.1 Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation of new construction required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction and existing spaces from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment from that specified that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.

.2 Lighting: Provide temporary lighting at areas of new construction with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions.

.3 Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service with wireless internet access, in common-use facilities. Use of Owner's existing service will not be permitted.

3.3 Support Facilities Installation

.1 General: Comply with the following:

.1 Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Performance of the Work. Remove before Substantial Performance of the Work. Personnel remaining after Substantial Performance of the Work will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

.2 Traffic Controls: Provide temporary traffic controls at junction of temporary roads with public roads. Include warning signs for public traffic and "STOP" signs for entrance onto public roads. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 01 Sections for temporary drainage and dewatering facilities and operations not directly associated with construction activities included in individual Sections. Where feasible, use same facilities. Maintain Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

.1 Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining property nor endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.

.2 Before connection and operation of permanent drainage piping system, provide temporary drainage where roofing or similar waterproof deck construction is completed.



.3 Remove snow and ice in construction areas as required to minimize accumulations.

.4 Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in as instructed by the Owner. Install signs where instructed to inform public and persons seeking entrance to Project. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs.

.1 Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Comply with details indicated.

.2 Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors.

.3 Construct signs of exterior-type Grade B-B high-density concrete form overlay plywood in sizes and thicknesses indicated. Support on posts or framing of preservative-treated wood or steel.

.4 Paint sign panel and applied graphics with exterior-grade alkyd gloss enamel over exterior primer.

.5 Provide and erect, within fourteen (14) days of signing contract, a project sign in a location designated by consultant and owner. Indicate on sign, name of owner, consultant and contractor.

.5 Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of construction personnel. Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

.1 Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and bookcases.

.2 Room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 - 15 individuals. Provide electrical power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles. Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot x 8 foot white board.

.3 Drinking water.

.4 Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a reasonable uniform indoor temperature.

.5 Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.

.6 Provide toilet facilities for construction period.

.6 Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials and personnel. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

.7 Temporary Elevator Usage: Do not use new elevators for construction activity without spe-cific written permission of Owner.

.8 Temporary Use of New Stairs: Cover finished permanent stairs with protective covering of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.

3.4 Security and Protection Facilities Installation

.1 Environmental Protection: Provide protection of new construction, operate temporary facili-ties, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution.

.1 Comply with requirements of Owner/Contractor Agreement for protection measures for existing construction and spaces.

.2 Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.



.1 Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.

.3 Stormwater Control: Provide barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.

.4 Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

.5 Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, install chain-link enclosure fence with lockable entrance gates.

.1 Set fence posts in compacted mixture of gravel and earth.

.2 Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations.

.3 Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel. Provide Owner with 1 set of keys.

.6 Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.

.7 Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Where appropriate and needed, provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights.

.8 Covered Walkways: Erect a structurally adequate, protective, covered walkway for passage of persons along adjacent existing building where required. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

.1 Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.

.2 Provide wood-plank overhead decking, protective plywood enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safe passage.

.9 Temporary Enclosures: As required and approved by Owner, provide temporary enclosures for protection of new and existing construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

.1 Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects.

3.5 Operation, Termination, and Removal

.1 Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

.2 Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

.1 Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

.2 Prevent water-filled piping from freezing. Maintain markers for underground lines. Protect from damage during excavation operations.

.3 Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.



.4 Temporary Facility Changeover: Except for using permanent fire protection as soon as available, do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Performance of the Work.

.5 Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Performance of the Work. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

.1 Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

.2 At Substantial Performance of the Work, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."


Execution Section 01 73 00 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Summary

.1 This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

.1 Field engineering and surveying for construction layout and record purposes.

.2 General installation of Products.

.3 Coordination of Owner-installed Products.

.4 Progress cleaning.

.5 Starting and adjusting.

.6 Protection of installed construction.

.7 Correction of the Work.


.1 Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination" for procedures for coordinating field engineering with other construction activities.

.2 Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.

.3 Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work.

.4 Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Qualification Data: For land surveyor to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of consultants and owners, and other information specified.

.2 Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

.3 Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

.4 Certified Surveys: Submit 2 copies signed by land surveyor.

.5 Final Property Survey: Submit 3 paper copies and 1 electronic certified copy showing the Work performed and record survey data.


.1 Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Existing Conditions and Utilities: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of utilities, mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

.1 Before construction, have utility companies verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

.2 To as large of extent as practicable, visually locate existing mechanical and electrical system components in existing construction prior to demolition, cutting or other work.

.2 Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer or applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

.1 Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following:

.1 Description of the Work.

.2 List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.

.3 List of unacceptable installation tolerances.

.4 Recommended corrections.

.2 Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

.3 Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

.4 Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where Products and systems are to be installed.

.5 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

.2 Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each Product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

.3 Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

.4 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Consultant. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with any recommendations for changing the Contract Documents the Contractor may have.



3.3 Construction Layout

.1 Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Consultant promptly.

.2 General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

.1 Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

.2 Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

.3 Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.

.4 Notify Consultant when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.

.5 Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.

.3 Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

.4 Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from 2 or more locations.

.5 Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Consultant.

3.4 Field Engineering

.1 Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.

.1 Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Consultant. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Consultant before proceeding.

.2 Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

.2 Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of three permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

.1 Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

.2 Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.

.3 Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition.

.3 Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, caissons, grade beams, other structural elements, major site work improvements, and other work requiring field-



engineering lay-out services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and site work.

.4 Final Property Survey: At time of Substantial Performance of the Work, prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

.1 Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.

.2 Recording: At Substantial Performance of the Work, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 Installation

.1 General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

.1 Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Make curved or irregular work conform to location tolerances indicted.

.2 Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement.

.3 Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

.4 Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 8 feet in spaces without a suspended ceiling, unless indicated otherwise.

.2 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing Products in applications indicated.

.3 Install Products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for Product performance until Substantial Performance of the Work.

.4 Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

.5 Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produces harmful noise levels.

.6 Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

.1 Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Consultant.

.2 Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.

.7 Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

.8 Hazardous Materials: Use Products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.

3.6 Owner-Installed Products

.1 Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces.

.2 Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces.



.1 Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.

.2 Pre-installation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at pre-installation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend pre-installation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction.

.3 Contractor is not responsible for directing or supervising Owner's forces, or for work of Owner's forces. Owner shall be responsible for all damage to and repair of the Work, and any delay of Work caused by its own forces.

3.7 Starting and Adjusting

.1 Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

.2 Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

.3 Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

.4 Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 Protection of Installed Construction

.1 Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Performance of the Work.

.2 Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 Correction of The Work

.1 Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes.

.1 Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

.2 Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

.3 Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

.4 Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

.5 Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


Cleaning and Waste Management Section 01 74 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - 1 GENERAL


.1 Progressive Cleaning

.2 Final Cleaning

.3 Disposal of Wastes


.1 This section describes requirements applicable to all Sections within Divisions 02 to 49.

1.3 Measurement Procedures

.1 No separate payment will be made for cleaning. Unit rates and lump sum price bid shall include all labour, materials, tools, equipment, etc. as required by the Contractor to complete the cleaning of the project site.

1.4 General

.1 Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances, codes and regulations, fire and safety laws and anti-pollution laws.

.2 Dust control shall be exercised as required and to the satisfaction of the Owner. Contractors shall supply the necessary water truck(s) as required for dust control purposes.

.3 Maintain the site in a clean manner as described below until acceptance by the Owner.

.4 Provide dust control to existing facility as per Section 02 41 00


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROGRESSIVE CLEANING

.1 Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by Owner or other Contractors.

.2 Remove waste materials and debris from site at daily regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by the Owner.

.3 Clear snow and ice from access to building, bank or pile snow in designated areas only.

.4 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.5 Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and debris at Contractor’s expense.

.6 Provide and use marked separate bins for recycling.

.7 Dispose of waste materials and debris off site at Contractor’s expense.

.8 Clean interior areas prior to start of finishing work, and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations.

.9 Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day.

.10 Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.

.11 Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer.



.12 Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.

.13 The Contractor must demonstrate that he has sufficient equipment (pressure sprayers, vacuums, brushes, sweepers, trucks) and manpower to clean the asphalt and concrete and debris and slurry during saw cutting operations. The Contractor must also contain the slurry from flowing out of the specific site area during work operations.

.14 Prevent materials and rubbish from blowing onto adjacent properties.

3.2 Daily Cleanup of Municipal Roadways

.1 Mud tracked into the traveled roadway (including adjacent municipal rights-of-way) shall be removed immediately.

.2 Remove all materials, earth or debris which falls out of trucks or vehicles belonging to the Contractor, sub-contractors or suppliers onto roadways, sidewalks and bridges used as a route between sources of material and the site as well as between the site and disposal areas.

.3 Employ workers sufficient in number to keep such streets, sidewalks and bridges in clean condition, free from materials, earth, debris and damage.

3.3 Final Cleaning

.1 When Work is Substantially Performed remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work.

.2 Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy.

.3 Prior to final review remove temporary facilities and surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment.

.4 Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by the Owner. Do not burn waste materials on site.

.5 Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris.

.6 Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass.

.7 Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, floors.

.8 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.

.9 Vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens.

.10 Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer.

.11 Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation.

.12 Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds.

.13 Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces.

.14 Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, and sunken wells.

.15 Sweep and wash clean paved areas.

.16 Clean equipment and fixtures to sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment.



.17 Clean roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems.

.18 Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and other accessible concealed spaces.

.19 Remove snow and ice from access to building.

.20 Remove erosion and sediment control features, including silt fencing, straw bale check dams and filter cloths in catch basins and restore any landscaping as required.

.21 Underground drainage structures

.1 All underground pipes shall be flushed with water in the presence of the Engineer to remove any construction debris from the pipes.

.22 Manholes, Catch basins and Electrical Vaults.

.1 All debris and water shall be removed from the underground structure with a hydrovac unit at the completion of the project.

.23 Pavement Surfaces

.1 All pavements shall be cleaned of mud, cement slurry or other deleterious materials prior to final inspection.

.24 Landscaped Surfaces

.1 Rake surface to remove debris except in newly planted areas where debris shall be handpicked.

.25 Electrical Equipment.

.1 Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.

.2 Clean inside of all pull pits.

3.4 Disposal of Wastes

.1 Do not bury rubbish or waste materials.

.2 Do not dispose of waste into waterways, storm, or sanitary sewers

.3 Do not burn waste materials on site.

.4 All waste materials must be brought to an Essex-Windsor Solid Waste Facility.


Closeout Procedures Section 01 77 00 Page 1 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 Summary

.1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

.1 Inspection procedures.

.2 Project Record Documents.

.3 Operation and maintenance manuals.

.4 Warranties.

.5 Instruction of Owner's personnel.

.6 Final cleaning.


.1 Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

.2 Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning of Project site.

.3 Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

.4 Divisions 2 through26 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for products of those Sections.

1.3 Substantial Performance of The Work

.1 Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Performance of the Work, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

.1 Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

.2 Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

.3 Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

.4 Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

.5 Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

.6 Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

.7 Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

.8 Complete startup testing of systems.

.9 Submit test/adjust/balance records.



.10 Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

.11 Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.

.12 Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.

.13 Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.

.14 Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

.2 Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Performance of the Work. On receipt of request, Consultant will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Consultant will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Consultant, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

.1 Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

.2 Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Performance of the Work.

1.4 Final Completion

.1 Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Performance of the Work, complete the following:

.1 Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

.2 Submit certified copy of Consultant's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Consultant. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

.3 Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements.

.4 Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.

.2 Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Consultant and Construction Manager will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Consultant will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

.1 Re-inspection: Request re-inspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.

1.5 List Of Incomplete Items (Punch List)

.1 Preparation: Submit 3 copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

.1 Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.



.2 Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

.3 Include the following information at the top of each page:

.1 Project name.

.2 Date.


.4 Name of Contractor.

.5 Page number.

1.6 Operation And Maintenance Manuals

.1 Assemble three complete hardcopies and one electronic copy of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual specification Sections and as follows:

.1 Operation Data:

.1 Emergency instructions and procedures.

.2 Final approved shop drawings for each item of Product data in O & M manuals.

.3 System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions, including operating standards.

.4 Operating procedures, including startup, shutdown, seasonal, and weekend operations.

.5 Description of controls and sequence of operations.

.6 Piping diagrams.

.2 Maintenance Data:

.1 Manufacturer's information, including list of spare parts.

.2 Name, address, and telephone number of installer or Supplier.

.3 Maintenance procedures.

.4 Maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance.

.5 Maintenance record forms.

.6 Sources of spare parts and maintenance materials.

.7 Copies of maintenance service agreements.

.8 Copies of warranties and bonds.

.3 Material & Finishes:

.1 Quantity of all materials used to be turned over to the Owner as per specified sections.

.2 List of all finish materials to include product numbers and colours such as flooring, walls, etc.

.3 Sheet with colour swatches of all paint finishes

.2 Organize operation and maintenance manuals into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind and index data in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, with pocket inside the covers to receive folded oversized sheets. Identify each binder on front and spine with the printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents.



1.7 Warranties

.1 Submittal Time: Submit 3 copies written warranties for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Performance of the Work is indicated.

.2 Partial Occupancy: Submit 3 copies of properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor, for major general occupancy and MEP elements and systems.

.3 Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

.1 Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

.2 Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the Product or installation. Provide a typed description of the Product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

.3 Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

.4 Provide copies of each warranty for inclusion in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Demonstration And Training

.1 Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.

.1 Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures.

.2 Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season.

.3 Schedule training with Owner, through Consultant, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

.4 Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content.

.2 Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. Include instruction for the following:

.1 System design and operational philosophy.

.2 Review of documentation.

.3 Operations.

.4 Adjustments.



.5 Troubleshooting.

.6 Maintenance.

.7 Repair.

3.2 Final Cleaning

.1 General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

.2 Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

.1 Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Performance of the Work for entire Project or for a portion of Project:

.1 Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

.2 Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

.3 Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

.4 Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

.5 Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.

.6 Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

.7 Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

.8 Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.

.9 Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.

.10 Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

.11 Remove labels that are not permanent.

.12 Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

.1 Do not paint over "ULC" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.



.13 Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

.14 Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.

.15 Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure.

.16 Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.

.17 Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction.

.18 Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapour fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

.19 Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

.3 Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.


Closeout Submittals Section 01 78 00 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Administrative Requirements


.1 Section 01 31 00 – Project Management and Coordination

.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures

.3 Section 01 40 00 – Quality Control

.4 This section describes requirements applicable to all Sections within Divisions 02 to 49

1.3 Administrative Requirements

.1 Pre-warranty Meeting:

.1 Convene meeting one (1) week prior to Substantial Performance dates to:

.1 Verify Project requirements

.2 Review warranty requirements and manufacturer's installation instructions

.2 Owner and the Consultant to establish communication procedures for:

.1 Notifying construction warranty defects

.2 Determining priorities for type of defects

.3 Determining reasonable response time

.3 Contact information for bonded and licensed company for warranty work action: provide name, telephone number and address of company authorized for construction warranty work action.

.4 Ensure contact is located within local service area of warranted construction, is continuously available, and is responsive to inquiries for warranty work action.

1.4 Action and Informational Submittals

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit four (4) final hard copies and pdf (AutoCAD and Word if applicable) of operating and maintenance manuals separated by system and equipment in English.

.3 Provide spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work.

.4 Provide evidence, if requested, for type, source and quality of products supplied.

1.5 Format

.1 Organize data as instructional manual.

.2 Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf (219 x 279) mm with spine and face pockets.

.3 When multiple binders are used correlate data into related consistent groupings.

.4 Identify contents of each binder on spine.

.5 Cover: identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents.

.6 Arrange content by systems and equipment, under section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents.



.7 Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment.

.8 Text: manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data.

.9 Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab.

.10 Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages.

.11 Provide 1:1 scaled AutoCAD files in dwg and pdf format on CD or DVD.

.12 For all equipment and systems, provide the following information in electronic format (Excel):

.1 Contract number

.2 Type of product/material

.3 Identifier/tag

.4 Manufacturer/make

.5 Model number

.6 Serial number

.7 Location within facility

.8 Warranty period

.1 Component warranties differ from system warranty must be noted separately

.9 Preventative maintenance program details

1.6 Contents - Project Record Documents

.1 Table of contents for each volume, provide:

.1 Title of project

.2 Date of submission

.3 Names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Consultant and Contractor with name of responsible parties

.4 Schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume.

.2 For each product or system:

.1 List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts

.3 Product Data: mark each sheet to identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information.

.4 Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams.

.5 Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data.

.6 Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions

1.7 As -Built Documents And Samples

.1 Refer to Section 01 78 39



1.8 Recording Information on Project Record Documents

.1 Record information on set of black line opaque drawings, and in copy of Specifications.

.2 Use felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording information.

.3 Record information concurrently with construction progress.

.4 Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded.

.5 Contract Drawings and shop drawings: mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum

.2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements

.3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction

.4 Field changes of dimension and detail

.5 Changes made by change order

.6 Details not on original Contract Drawing

.7 References to related shop drawings and modifications

.6 Specifications: mark each item to record actual construction, including:

.1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items

.2 Changes made by Addenda and change orders

.7 Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, required by individual specifications sections.

.8 Provide digital photos, if requested, for site records.

1.9 Final Survey

.1 Submit final site survey certificate, certifying that elevations and locations of completed Work are in conformance, or non-conformance with Contract Documents.

1.10 Equipment and Systems

.1 For each item of equipment and each system include description of unit or system, and component parts.

.1 Give function, normal operation characteristics and limiting conditions.

.2 Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts.

.2 Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications.

.3 Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams.

.4 Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences.

.1 Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions.

.2 Include summer, winter, and any special operating instructions.



.5 Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions.

.6 Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required.

.7 Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions.

.8 Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer.

.9 Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance.

.10 Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer.

.11 Provide Contractor’s co-ordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams.

.12 Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams.

.13 Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage.

.14 Additional requirements: as specified in individual specification sections.

1.11 Materials and Finishes

.1 Building products, applied materials, and finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations.

.1 Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

.2 Provide instructions for:

.1 Cleaning agents and methods

.2 Precautions against detrimental agents and methods

.3 Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance

.3 Moisture-protection and weather-exposed products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

.4 Additional requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.

1.12 Maintenance Materials

.1 Spare Parts:

.1 Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.

.3 Deliver to site, place and store.

.4 Receive and catalogue items.

.1 Submit inventory listing to the Consultant

.2 Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual

.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

.2 Extra Stock Materials:

.1 Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

.2 Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work.



.3 Deliver to site, place and store.

.4 Receive and catalogue items.



.5 Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.

.3 Special Tools:

.1 Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section

.2 Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment

.3 Deliver to site; place and store

.4 Receive and catalogue items



1.13 Delivery, Storage and Handling

.1 Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration.

.2 Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact.

.3 Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures.

.4 Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room.

.5 Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and for review by the Consultant.

1.14 Warranties and Bonds

.1 Warranty Management Plan:

.1 Develop warranty management plan to contain information relevant to warranties.

.2 Submit warranty management plan, 30 days before planned pre-warranty conference, to the Consultant for approval.

.3 Warranty management plan to include required actions and documents to assure that the Owner receives warranties to which it is entitled.

.4 Provide plan in narrative form and contain sufficient detail to make it suitable for use by future maintenance and repair personnel.

.2 Submit, warranty information made available during construction phase, to the Consultant for approval prior to each monthly pay estimate.

.3 Assemble approved information in binder and pdf, submit upon acceptance of work and organize binder as follows:

.1 Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing.

.2 List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

.3 Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten (10) days after completion of applicable item of work.

.4 Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

.5 Co-execute submittals when required.



.6 Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

.4 Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until Date Substantial Performance is determined.

.5 Include information contained in warranty management plan as follows:

.1 Roles and responsibilities of personnel associated with warranty process, including points of contact and telephone numbers within the organizations of Contractors, subcontractors, manufacturers or suppliers involved.

.2 Listing and status of delivery of Certificates of Warranty for extended warranty items, to include roofs, HVAC balancing, pumps, motors, transformers, commissioned systems, fire protection, alarm systems, sprinkler systems.

.3 Provide list for each warranted equipment, item, feature of construction or system indicating:

.1 Name of item

.2 Model and serial numbers

.3 Location where installed

.4 Name and phone numbers of manufacturers or suppliers

.5 Names, addresses and telephone numbers of sources of spare parts

.6 Warranties and terms of warranty: include one-year overall warranty of construction. Indicate items that have extended warranties and show separate warranty expiration dates.

.7 Cross-reference to warranty certificates as applicable

.8 Starting point and duration of warranty period

.9 Summary of maintenance procedures required to continue warranty in force

.10 Cross-Reference to specific pertinent Operation and Maintenance manuals

.11 Organization, names and phone numbers of persons to call for warranty service

.12 Typical response time and repair time expected for various warranted equipment.

.4 Contractor's plans for attendance at four (4) and nine (9) month post-construction warranty inspections.

.5 Procedure and status of tagging of equipment covered by extended warranties.

.6 Post copies of instructions near selected pieces of equipment where operation is critical for warranty and/or safety reasons.

.7 Respond in timely manner to oral or written notification of required construction warranty repair work.

.8 Written verification to follow oral instructions.

.9 Failure to respond will be cause for the Owner to proceed with action against Contractor.

1.15 Warranty Tags

.1 Tag at time of installation, each warranted item. Provide durable, oil and water resistant tag approved by the Consultant.

.2 Attach tags with copper wire and spray with waterproof silicone coating.

.3 Leave date of acceptance until project is accepted for occupancy.



.4 Indicate following information on tag:

.1 Type of product/material

.2 Model number

.3 Serial number

.4 Contract number

.5 Warranty period

.6 Inspector's signature

.7 Construction Contractor


Project Asbuilts Documents Section 01 78 39 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 Summary

.1 This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project AsBuilt Documents, including the following:

.1 AsBuilt Drawings including shop drawings.

.2 Record Electronic Data Files.

.3 Record Specifications.

.4 Record Product Data.


.1 Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures and maintenance manual requirements.

.2 Divisions 2 through 26 Sections for specific requirements for Project AsBuilt Documents of products in those Sections.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Electronic Files: Submit 2 copies of electronic files of asbuilts in AutoCad format.

.2 AsBuilt Drawings: Comply with the following:

.1 Number of Copies: Submit 1 set of marked-up Record Prints, and 2 hard copies of marked up shop drawings.

.3 Record Specifications: Submit 1 copy of Project's specifications, including Addenda and Contract modifications.

.4 Record Product Data: Submit 1 copy of each Product data submittal.

.1 Where Record Product data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit marked-up Product data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as record Product data.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AsBuilt Drawings

.1 Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and shop drawings.

.1 Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

.1 Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

.2 Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.

.3 Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

.2 Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:



.1 Dimensional changes to Drawings.

.2 Revisions to details shown on Drawings.

.3 Depths of foundations below first floor.

.4 Locations and depths of underground utilities.

.5 Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.

.6 Revisions to electrical circuitry.

.7 Actual equipment locations.

.8 Duct size and routing.

.9 Locations of concealed internal utilities.

.10 Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive.

.11 Changes made following Consultant's written orders.

.12 Details not on the original Contract Drawings.

.13 Field records for variable and concealed conditions.

.14 Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

.3 Mark the Contract Drawings or shop drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If shop drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

.4 Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at the same location.

.5 Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.

.6 Note Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

.2 Final Record Prints: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Performance of the Work, review marked-up Record Prints with Consultant. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected prints of the Contract Drawings and shop drawings.

.1 Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints. Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.

.2 Refer instances of uncertainty to Consultant for resolution.

.3 Print the Contract Drawings and shop drawings for use as AsBuilt Drawings. Consultant will make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.

.3 Newly Prepared AsBuilt Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing AsBuilt Drawings where Consultant determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor shop drawings are suitable to show actual installation.

.1 New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification.

.2 Consult with Consultant for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared AsBuilt Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.

.4 Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.



.1 Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared AsBuilt Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

.2 Identification: As follows:

.1 Project name.

.2 Date.

.3 Designation "PROJECT ASBUILT DRAWINGS."


.5 Name of Contractor.

2.2 Record Specifications

.1 Preparation: Mark specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in specifications, Addenda, and Contract modifications.

.1 Give particular attention to information on concealed Products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

.2 Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of Products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Indicate color, texture or other actual selections of Products used.

.3 Record the name of the manufacturer, Supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

.4 For each principal Product, indicate whether record Product data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product data.

.5 Note related Change Orders, AsBuilt Drawings, and Product data where applicable.

2.3 Record Product Data

.1 Preparation: Mark Product data to indicate the actual Product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product data submittal.

.1 Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

.2 Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

.3 Note related Change Orders, AsBuilt Drawings, and Product data where applicable.

2.4 Miscellaneous Record Submittals

.1 Assemble miscellaneous records required by other specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Recording And Maintenance

.1 Recording: Maintain 1 copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

.2 Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide



access to Project Record Documents for Consultant's reference during normal working hours.


Concrete Section 03 00 00 Page 1 of 10


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 The work under this section of the specifications shall include all labour, equipment and materials in the forming, handling, furnishing, placement and protection of all concrete work as indicated in the contract documents including but not limited to the following:

.1 All plain and reinforced concrete footings, column footings, piers, walls, floor slabs, suspended slabs, thickened floor slabs, etc.

.2 Formwork for concrete

.3 Coloured concrete interior slab

.4 All reinforcing steel, wire mesh, including ties, stairs, supports, spacers, stirrups and all required accessories.

.5 Installation of anchor bolts and steel bearing plates complete with grout.

.6 Expansion strips, premoulded expansion joints, PVC water stops, saw cut control joints, slotted inserts, cast in place sleeves, etc.

.7 Installation of Vapour barrier (below slabs on grade) as per Specification Section 07 26 16

.8 Curing compound on exposed concrete floors.

.9 All thickened and depressed floor slabs.

.10 All concrete work called for on architectural, mechanical and electrical drawings unless noted by others.

.11 Finishing of all concrete surfaces.

.12 All equipment foundations, exterior ramps and stairs, pads and platforms, etc. shown on drawings.

.13 Concrete testing.

.14 Water stops

1.2 Work by Others

.1 Miscellaneous metal work and structural steel to be built into concrete.

.2 Supply of anchor bolts and steel bearing plates.

.3 Grout fill in block masonry walls and grouting of door frames in masonry.

.4 Vapour Barrier

.5 Under slab Insulation

1.3 Standard Specifications

.1 The latest edition of the Ontario Building Code, Latest Editions, shall govern all work except where otherwise specified herein.

.2 Materials and methods of construction shall conform to CAN3-A23.1-14/A23.2-14, and by-laws of the local municipality. Work shall be supervised at all times and shall be performed by skilled and experienced workers.

.3 Wherever in these specifications methods of tests or standards are not otherwise specified, the latest A.S.T.M. standards shall be used.



1.4 Cold Weather Requirements

.1 When air temperature is at or below 5 degrees Celsius or there is a probability of it falling to that limit during the placing or curing period, cold weather requirements shall be applicable and shall be governed by CAN3-A23.1.

.2 Provide heating equipment and enclosures to maintain humidified air within the enclosures to keep the concrete above freezing temperature for seven days. Heating equipment inducing carbon monoxide gas in the building is not acceptable. Also concrete shall be protected from alternately freezing and thawing for a period of 14 days after placement.

.3 When placed, concrete shall have a temperature of not less than 5 degrees C. and not more than 27 degrees C. Accelerators or so called anti-freeze Compounds shall not be permitted unless approved in writing by the Architect. All protective coverings shall be kept clear of the concrete and form surfaces to permit free circulation of air and shall be maintained intact for at least 24 hours after artificial heat is discontinued.

.4 Forms must be clean of ice and snow. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

1.5 Hot Weather Requirements

.1 Hot weather protection shall meet the requirements of CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14.

.2 When the air temperature exceeds 27 degrees C. hot weather requirements shall be applicable. The time of initial mixing to complete discharge shall not exceed one hour and fifteen minutes. Temperature of concrete as placed shall not exceed 27 degrees C.

.3 Concrete forming surfaces and reinforcing steel shall be sprinkled with cool water just prior to placing concrete but no standing water or puddles will be allowed.

.4 Slabs shall be kept damp continuously for 24 hours followed by normal curing procedures.

.5 Slabs may be cured by the application of a clear pigmented curing compound applied immediately after finishing of slab but before evaporation of surface moisture. The use of water reducing agents must be approved by the Consultant when hot weather conditions prevail.

1.6 Form Work Design and Code Requirements

.1 Design all formwork including shores, bracing, falsework, etc. for all loads and lateral pressures as recommended in the Ontario Building, 2012, CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14 and CSA-S269.2-16. Falsework to CSA Standard S269.1-1975 for supported work.

.2 The design and erection of formwork and related supporting works shall comply with the Construction Safety legislation and regulations. The Contractor must assume full responsibility for the design and adequacy of all formwork and false work.

1.7 Mixing and Delivery

.1 Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical batch mixer or a type approved by the Architect and meeting the requirements of CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14.

.2 Mixing time shall conform to CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14. Mixers shall be rotated at the rate recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment.

.3 Concrete from the mechanical batch mixer shall be transported to the project site in agitating or non-agitating equipment conforming to CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14.



.4 Ready mixed or transit mixed concrete delivered to the project site shall be accompanied by duplicate delivery slips providing all information pertaining to each batch of concrete and/or as the Owner’s Representative may require.

1.8 Strength and Consistency

.1 Concrete materials shall be proportioned to provide a workable mix that can be handled, placed and worked into angles and corners of forms and around reinforcing steel and inserts. The mix proportion shall not be such that the concrete will easily segregate or cause excessive water to collect on the surface.

.2 The strength of concrete shall be considered to be its required strength at 28 days.

1.9 Inserts for Other Work

.1 Install inserts, hangers, metal ties, plates, anchors, bolts, dowels, slots, nailing strips, blocking or other fastening devices required for the attachment of other work. Properly locate in cooperation with other trades and secure in position before concrete is poured.

1.10 Inspection and Testing

.1 The Owner will appoint an independent testing agency to test average concrete of each days pouring. The independent testing agency shall perform the following:

.1 Supply cylinder moulds, sample the concrete, make and cure test cylinders and perform compressive strength tests in accordance with CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14 Standards.

.2 Make slump tests and air content tests as required in accordance with current CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14 Standards.

.3 A concrete test shall consist of four (4) cylinders properly labelled showing mix, location and date of pouring. Cylinders shall be cured under laboratory conditions. Contractor shall make provisions for initial curing of all cylinders a minimum of 24 hours.

.2 Provide facilities for storing specimens at the required temperature and in a location free from vibration or injury.

.3 Test one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two (2) cylinders at twenty-eight (28) days. Should the 7 or 28 day test fail to meet the design strength, test the fourth (4th) cylinder at ninety (90) days to verify results. Send two (2) certified copies of all test results directly to the Consultants with additional copies to the Contractor as directed.

1.11 Submittals

.1 Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

.2 Concrete Mix Designs.

.3 Shop Drawings: Reinforcing Steel and Formwork.

.1 Prepare, check and submit for review checked shop drawings including bar lists, bending and erection diagrams of all reinforced steel.

1.12 Delivery and Storage

.1 Reinforcing steel, welded wire, fabric accessories and other materials shall be delivered, handled and stored in such a manner which prevents contamination from bond reducing or foreign matter and damage to its fabricated form.

1.13 Unit Prices

.1 Provide unit prices as called for on Tender Form including all material and labour for the cost per cubic meter for 25 MPa, concrete in place including all formwork, placement and finishing.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Form Materials

.1 Form materials for concrete surfaces, which will be exposed to view or which required smooth and uniform surfaces for applied finishes or other purposes shall consist of square edged smooth panels of plywood, metal or plastic. The panels shall be square and made in a true, plain, clean, and free of holes, surface markings and defects. The quality and strength of formwork materials shall comply with the requirements set forth in this specification and CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14 and CSA-S269.2-14.

2.2 Reinforcing Steel

.1 Fabricate reinforcing of CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14. Reinforcing steel unless otherwise noted on drawings shall be deformed bars of hard grade new billet steel (Fy = 400 MPa), conforming to the current CSA Standard Series G30.18-09(R2014). Bars welded to structural members shall be new hard grade billet steel in accordance with CSA Standard G30.18-09(R2014) (Fy = 400 MPa).

.2 Fabrication and detailing of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of ACI 315-99 and to “Reinforcing Steel Manual for Standard Practice” by Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada, latest edition, unless otherwise detailed.

.3 All hard grade reinforcing bars shall be bent cold reinforcing bars.

.4 Reinforcing bars shall not be re-straightened or re-bent.

.5 The wires shall be 9 gauge or heavier annealed wire or a patented system approved by the Consultant.

.6 Reinforcing steel supports shall conform to CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14 unless otherwise approved by the Consultant.

.7 Chairs, bolsters, bar supports; spacers shall be adequate for strength and support of reinforcing construction conditions.

.8 Obtain Consultants approval for location of reinforcement splices other than shown on steel placing drawings.

.9 Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar list.

.10 Supply all concrete reinforcing bars for masonry block unless otherwise noted on the drawings.

2.3 Welded Wire Fabric

.1 Welded wire fabric shall conform to the current CSA Standard G30.5M-1983 (R1998). For slabs on grade use 152 x 152 – MW13.3XMW13.3 (Flat sheets only), as indicated on drawings.

2.4 Vapour Barrier (as per Specification Section 07 26 16)

2.5 Expansion Joint Strips

.1 Expansion joint strips shall be fibre expansion joint filler to ASTM D994. Size to match those indicated on drawings.

2.6 Waterstop

.1 Waterstop to be Type: PVC Ribbed with Centre bulb, Style No: 732 by Greenstreak Plastic Products Co. or approved equal. (Location: New construction joints and cut edge of existing slab)

2.7 Cement



.1 Cement shall conform to CSA Standards A5/A8/A369.1-M90 (R2001), A3000-13Type 10 as scheduled under Strength of Concrete unless otherwise noted.

2.8 Aggregates

.1 Aggregate shall conform to CSA-A23.1-14.

2.9 Water

.1 Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or other deleterious material.

2.10 Admixtures

.1 Admixtures shall not be used unless prior written approval is obtained from the Consultants. Air entraining admixtures and chemical admixtures shall conform to the requirements of the latest issue of CSA-A23.1-14/A23.2-14.

.2 For floor slabs on grade, mid-range water reducing admixture, conforming to the requirements of CSA-A23.1-14.

.3 For suspended slabs to be pumped, water reducing admixture (super plasticizer) conforming to the latest issue of CSA-A23.1-14.

2.11 Curing Compounds

.1 Curing compounds shall conform to the requirements of the latest issue of A.S.T.M. Standard C-309-11, type 1, class A.

.2 For exterior concrete slab work curing compound shall be W.R. Meadows Sealtite liquid membrane curing compound white pigmented W-60 or Architect’s approved equal. Concrete curing treatment must be applied in strict accordance to manufacturer’s labelled instructions.

2.12 Curing and Sealing For Concrete Floors

.1 Curing and sealing for all interior concrete floors shall conform to A.S.T.M. C309, type 1, class B, “Intex” by W.R. Meadows of Canada Ltd., Conchem Promulsion 100 or Sternson Florseal W.B. Clear. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer’s labelled instructions.

2.13 Strength of Concrete

.1 Proportion normal density concrete to CSA-A23.1-14.

.2 Unless otherwise noted ON STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall be as follows:

.1 Mud mats 15 MPa

.2 Fill concrete for masonry walls 20 MPa

.3 Footing 25 MPa

.4 Piers and Foundation walls 25 MPa. Foundation walls for Shear walls shall be 30 MPa.

.5 Interior slabs on grade and suspended floor slabs 25 MPa

.6 Exterior slab on grade 32 MPa

.7 Above grade concrete walls, Shear walls and Concrete columns 35 MPa.

.8 All exterior concrete shall have 5% to 8% air entrainment including foundation walls and piers.



.9 Poured concrete column covers encasing exterior steel columns shall be a self-consolidating concrete mix (SCC) – 25 MPa

.10 All concrete shall develop 75% of ultimate strength at seven (7) days

.11 Concrete with maximum water/cementing materials ratio of 0.45 for floor slabs-on-grade and suspended floor slabs. Maximum water/cementing materials ratio of 0.55 for all other concrete. See also ALL Structural Notes on drawings.

.3 Slump for concrete 80mm before the addition of any water reducing admixtures or concrete specified without admixtures. Slump tolerance is +/- 30mm.

2.14 Concrete Admixtures

.1 For all exterior exposed concrete an air entraining admixture Master Builders Company Limited or approved equal shall be placed in the concrete mix in quantity required to produce an air content of 6% (more or less 1%) by volume as measured with an air meter.

.2 Water reducing admixture (super plasticizer) conforming to the requirements of CAN 266.6 M85 and ASTM-6494, type and containing less than 0.1 percent chloride Ions.

.3 No admixture shall be used without the written permission of the Architect.

.4 Colour Additive: Davis colours type: Sequoia Sand, Sandstone Smooth, Cliffside Smooth, Western Gold, San Diego Buff or approved equal. Final olour selection by Architect.

2.15 Grout

.1 Grout for base plates, bearing plates and other structural members requiring grouting shall be a non-shrink, non-metalic grout. Acceptable products are W.R. Meadows V-3 Construction Grout, Sikagrout 212 by Sika Canada or “Masterflow 713” by Chemrex. Grout shall be used in all cases where grouting is shown on drawings or otherwise schedule. The material shall be used in the amounts specified by the manufacturer and explicitly in compliance with all directions for surface preparation, batching, mixing, placing and curing.

2.16 Saw Cut Filler

.1 Saw cut filler for all interior saw cut control joints shall be sealant bondflex load bearing saw cut filler or Engineers approved equal applied in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

2.17 Water Stop – (Location: Cut edge of all existing slabs) see details.

.1 Leakmaster LV-1 by Greenstreak or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Erection of Forms

.1 Construction formwork, shoring and bracing to produce finished concrete conforming to the shape, dimensions, locations and levels shown on the drawings and within the tolerances required by CSA-A23.1-14.

.2 Form chases, slots, openings, drips, recesses and control joints as detailed.

.3 Formwork shall be so arranged and so assembled as to permit easy dismantling and stripping so that the concrete will not be damaged during its removal. Make form joints tight in order to prevent leakage of mortar. Clean all edges and contact surfaces before erection.

.4 Verify lines, levels and column centres before proceeding with formwork and ensure dimensions agree with drawings.

.5 Use 1” chamfer strips on external corners of exposed formed concrete.

3.2 Stripping Of Forms



.1 Remove forms only in accordance with requirements of CSA-A23.2-14 and the Ontario Building Code not sooner than concrete will safely bear its own and intended superimposed loads. Forms shall not be removed without notifying the Consultants intent to remove forms. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for safe removal of the forms.

3.3 Embedded Parts and Openings

.1 Provide formed openings where required for pipes, conduit, sleeves and other work to be embedded in and passing through concrete members.

.2 Accurately locate and set in place items which are to be cast directly into the concrete.

.3 Coordinate the work of other sections and cooperate with the trade involved in the forming and setting of openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors and other inserts.

3.4 Placement of Reinforcement

.1 Reinforcement of the size and shapes shown on the drawings shall be accurately placed in accordance with the approved placement drawings, the structural drawings and the requirements of CSA-A23.2-14.

.2 Reinforcement including wire mesh shall be adequately supported by metal chairs, spacers or hangers and secured against displacement within the tolerances permitted and in accordance with the latest A.C.I. Standard 315.

.3 Mechanical splices subject to the approval of the Consultant.

.4 Obtain Consultant’s approval of reinforcing steel and placing before placing concrete.

3.5 Inserts

.1 Set sleeves, ties, anchor bolts, pipe hangers, plates and other inserts, openings and sleeves in concrete floors as required by other trades.

.2 Do not eliminate or displace reinforcement to accommodate hardware. If inserts cannot be located as specified, obtain approval of all modifications from Consultant before placing of concrete.

.3 Place anchor bolts t layout and under supervision of trade supplying anchors prior to placing concrete.

3.6 Placement of Concrete

.1 Place concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.2-14. Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement.

.2 Notify the Consultant and the independent testing agency at least twenty four (24) hours before any concreting operation is to proceed.

.3 Note: Pour footings immediately following excavation or provide mud mats of 2” lean concrete.

.4 Before beginning a run of concrete, hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner surface of the conveying equipment.

.5 Before depositing concrete, debris shall be removed from the space to be occupied by the concrete, reinforcing steel and forms accurately placed and secured in position. Clean reinforcing before placing concrete.

.6 When pouring concrete against previously poured work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened removing all latency and scum and coated with a paste of neat cement and water not more than 15 minutes in advance of depositing the new concrete.

.7 Concrete shall be conveyed to the place of final deposit by methods that will prevent segregation or loss of material keeping concrete sufficiently plastic to ensure proper bonding of successive layers or panels. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 900 mm.



.8 During placement, concrete shall be consolidated thoroughly and uniformly by means of tamping, hand tools, vibrators or finishing machines to secure dense, homogeneous structure, close bond with reinforcement and smooth formed surfaces. Extreme care shall be taken to ensure that internal type vibrators do not disturb the reinforcing steel or the forms.

.9 Maintain accurate records of concrete pours to indicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken.

3.7 Trowelling

.1 Concrete floor slabs requiring a concrete finish shall be screeded to the proper shape and elevation, machine floated and finished by skilled mechanics to produce a smooth, dense surface, free from ridges, voids or machine marks. The flatness of the finished surfaces shall not exceed 3mm deviation in 3m.

.2 Pitch slabs as noted on drawings or to floor drains.

.3 Sprinkling of dry cement or dry cement and sand mixture over concrete surfaces is not acceptable.

.4 Float surface with wood or metal floats or with power finishing machine and bring surface to true grade.

.5 Steel trowel to smooth and even surface concrete slabs to be left exposed or to receive resilient flooring or carpeting.

3.8 Curing And Protection

.1 Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the effects of direct sunshine, drying winds, cold, excessive heat and running water by the use of clear resin based curing compound or adequate tarpaulins or other suitable material until the end of the curing period.

.2 All exposed non-formed surfaces shall be kept continuously moist for a minimum of seven (7) consecutive days after placement of the concrete. Water shall be clean and free of any material that will cause staining or discoloration.

.3 Apply curing and sealing compound to all interior concrete floors (except for the 8” thick floor) in strict accordance with manufacturer’s labelled instructions where it will not jeopardize the bonding of future floor finishes. Coordinate with flooring divisions for compatibility.

3.9 Construction Joints

.1 The location and detail of all construction joints not detailed on drawings shall be approved by the Architect. Where fresh concrete is to be placed against concrete which has set or partially set concrete shall be roughened, cleaned of all latency and thoroughly soaked with water prior to the placement of fresh concrete.

.2 In general, the construction joints in floor systems shall be located as indicated on drawings. Proper key and dowels or extensions of reinforcing shall be provided at all construction joints.

.3 Note: Saw cut crack-control joints to CSA-A23.2-14 as indicated on drawings. Fill all saw cut joints with sealtight bond flex saw cut filler.

.4 Any exposed construction joints in exposed concrete such as columns are to be designed in consistent locations. Review with Consultants.

3.10 Defective Concrete

.1 Concrete not meeting the requirements of the specifications and the drawings will be considered defective concrete and shall be modified or replaced at the Contractors’ expense and to the satisfaction of the Consultants.



.2 Excessive honeycombing or other defects in critical areas of stress shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Consultants. Concrete of insufficient strength or improper consistency shall be as required by the Consultant subject to one or more of the following, all at the Contractor’s expense and at no extra cost to the Owner.

.1 Changes in mix proportion for the remainder of the work.

.2 Cores drilled and tested from the areas in question as directed by the Engineer and in accordance with CSA-A23.2-14 test method A23.2-14C. The test results shall be indicative of the strength of the in-place concrete.

.3 Load testing of the structural elements in accordance with CSA-123.3-M84.

.3 Concrete failing to meet the strength requirements of this specification shall be strengthened or replaced at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Consultants.

3.11 Footings

.1 Install all concrete footings as indicated on drawings of all sizes, forms, and thickness indicated and reinforced as noted on drawings and schedules. Finish tops of footings true and level at heights indicated providing all necessary keyways.

.1 Where pipes or sleeves pass through or under footings, consult the Engineer for direction.

.2 The excavation for the footings shall be clean and free of water and kept so until the concrete has set.

.3 All footings shall be placed on previously poured 2” lean concrete mud mats or poured immediately and/or a combination of both.

.4 Step footings in accordance with Building Code requirements and required by construction.

3.12 Reinforced Slabs

.1 Make all floor slabs of thickness noted on drawings.

.2 Set all reinforcing steel as shown or directed. Pitch slabs as noted on drawings.

.3 Building in all anchors, sleeves, inserts, floors drains and other items furnished by this Contractor or others.

.4 Floor slabs on grade shall be poured over a continuous vapour barrier specified previously. Care must be taken not to puncture vapour barrier. Damaged portions of vapour barrier must be replaced before concrete is poured.

.1 Thickened and depressed floor slabs as indicated on drawings.

.2 Pitch slab to floor drains as required.

3.13 Vapour Barrier/Waterproofing Membrane (as per Specification Section 07 26 16)

3.14 Curing and Sealing Interior Floors

.1 Apply curing and sealing compound to all interior exposed concrete floors in strict accordance with manufacturer’s labelled instructions.

3.15 Pre-moulded Expansion Strips



.1 Provide pre-moulded expansion strips as specified under concrete materials in the following locations:

.1 between edges of all concrete floor slabs and all vertical surfaces, except as detailed otherwise

.2 between edges of sidewalks and vertical surfaces

.3 between edges of concrete platforms and concrete or masonry vertical surfaces

.2 Expansion strips shall be ½” thick and shall extend from bottom of slab to within ½” of top of slabs and platforms then insert raw oakum or polytape bond breaker and fill joint with polysulphide sealant as manufactured by Sternson “Load Flex” or approved equal where exposed.

3.16 Anchor Bolts

.1 This Contractor shall accurately set all anchor bolts furnished to him by other contractors.

3.17 Miscellaneous Concrete

.1 This Contractor to install the following miscellaneous reinforced concrete work:

.1 Grout under base plates and wall bearing steel members as indicated on drawings and required.

.2 Installation of saw cut joints, expansion joints, etc. in concrete floor slab.

.3 Thickened floor slabs.

.2 Fencing, flag pole, etc.

3.18 Concrete Finish Schedule

.1 The following finishes shall be applied to concrete surfaces.

.1 Interior concrete slabs for carpet or resilient flooring. Float and steel power trowel finish.

.2 Interior exposed concrete floors. Float and steel power trowel finish.

.3 Exterior Columns: Smooth form finish.

3.19 Cleaning

.1 Contractor shall be responsible for good housekeeping during the work of this Section.

.2 Remove all debris and inflammable rubbish from the site daily.

.3 Do not bury any waste concrete on the project site.


Metals-Structural Section 05 12 00 Page 1 of 10


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 ALL STEEL MEMBERS SHOWN ON ARCHITECTURAL AND STRUCTURAL DRAWINGS ARE BY THIS CONTRACTOR UNLESS SPECIFIED AND NOTED ON DRAWINGS BY JOIST OR METAL DECK MANUFACTURER.

.2 The work under this section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labour, materials, tools, equipment and services to perform all operations in connection with Structural Steel & Miscellaneous Metal to the full intent of the drawings and specifications (see General Notes). The principal items of work are as follows:

.3 All beams, hollow structural sections, channels, plates, loose angles, clip angles, bent and stiffener plates, gusset plates, bearing plates, anchor bolts and accessory steel members attached to steel joists, beams and columns.

.4 All columns including hollow structural sections, stub columns, base plates, bearing plates, cap plates, side plates, anchor bolts, specialty anchors, etc. as shown on the drawings.

.5 All angles, plates, clip angles, stiffener plates, hangers, shelf angles and accessory steel members attached to beams, columns, metal deck and steel joists.

.6 All seat angles throughout, all complete with bolts, etc.

.7 Masonry anchors welded to columns and beams.

.8 Angles and anchors for metal deck and miscellaneous steel as required.

.9 Shop painting. Grey in colour.

.10 Angle framing between structural steel framing and joists as noted on structural drawings for exhaust fans, roof hatch, rooftop units, etc. required for mechanical, electrical and architectural items.

.11 Anchors to masonry and concrete walls.

.12 All plate and angle lintels inclusive of miscellaneous mechanical openings in masonry wall construction shown on drawings and/or referred to in structural steel and masonry notes. Refer to mechanical drawings for extent of mechanical openings.

.13 Accessory fasteners required in the proper installation and securement of work.

1.2 Work Not Included

.1 The following work will be performed by other trades:

.1 Setting anchor bolts for columns, beams and bearing plates in masonry & concrete.

.2 Section 03 00 00 – Reinforcing steel and wire mesh.

.3 Section 04 00 00 – Setting loose lintels built into masonry.

.4 Section 05 20 00 – Steel joists.

.5 Section 05 31 00 – Metal roof deck.

1.3 Design Standard

.1 All referenced standards shall be the current edition or edition referenced by the Ontario Building Code in force at the time of the building permit application and noted on general notes of structural drawings including the following:

.1 CSA-S16-14 –Design of Steel Structures.

.2 CSA-S136-12 – North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.



.3 CSA W47.1-09 (R2014)- Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures.

.4 CSA W59-13 – Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding)

.2 Where there are differences between the specifications and the drawings and the standards, codes or acts, the most stringent shall govern.

1.4 Tolerances

.1 Conform to erection tolerances specified in CAN3-S16-14.

.2 Interfacing tolerances so that the various elements come together properly.

1.5 General

.1 All materials, articles and accessories incorporated in the work shall be of type and quality specified herein and subject to the approval of the Owner’s Representative. Methods of preparation, construction and installation of such materials, articles and accessories shall be in accordance with the accepted standard and as directed by the Consultant.

.2 Structural Steel Contractor shall provide anchor bolt layout to General Contractor and shall check anchor bolt location, elevation and trueness of top of concrete piers. General Contractor shall make corrections as required by Structural Steel Contractor.

.3 Testing

.1 The Contractor will appoint, and all costs will be paid from allowance in contract for an independent testing laboratory to test 30% of all bolted and welded connections of all erected structural steel, (to CSA W59 procedures) deck and joists. 100% of moment connections shall also be tested.

.2 The test results shall be submitted as a written report to the Consultant before acceptance of the erection of the structural steel.

.3 Non-destructive testing shall be used for testing of welds. Should any of the connections prove defective, the Consultant may order the testing of 100% of the connections with all costs beyond the 30% also being borne by this Contractor.

.4

1.6 Mill Tests

.1 Provide copies all mill test reports properly corrected to materials in order to verify quality of manufacture. All materials hall conform to requirements of specifications of the Canadian Standards Association or the American Society for Testing Materials for the particular designated grade.

1.7 Qualifications

.1 Proposed fabricators and erectors, if required by Consultant, shall show shop facilities, erection equipment and proposed methods of doing work to a satisfactory completion before they will be accepted as eligible to carry out this portion of the work.

.2 The Fabricator and Erector assuming full responsibility for welded construction shall be certified by the Canadian Welding Bureau to the requirements of CSA Standard W47.1, for Division 1 or Division 2.1 or CSA Standard W55.3, or both as applicable.

.3 For fusion welded structures, part of the work may be sublet to a Division 3 Fabricator or Erector; however, full responsibility shall remain with the Division 1 or Division 2.1 Fabricator or Erector.



.4 Design details and connections in accordance with requirements of CSA-S16 and CSA Standard W59 to resist forces, moments and shears indicated.

1.8 Submittals

.1 Submit under the provisions of Section 01 33 00.

.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 The Consultant shall be given a minimum of 15 working days to review shop drawings. Shop drawings received after noon will be date-stamped as received the following working day.

.2 The structural steel contractor shall engage a Professional Engineer to be responsible for the design, detailing and installation of all connections related to structural steelwork. Prior to the first shop drawing submittal, a document sealed by that Engineer stating the engagement to undertake the responsibility for the above. Also submit a copy of that Engineer’s Certificate of Authorization, and proof of his liability insurance. All connections shall be designed and certified by a licenced Professional Engineer of the Province of Ontario. Each drawing submitted shall bear the original signature and stamp of a qualified Professional Engineer registered in Ontario. Upon request, submit calculations signed and sealed by that Engineer. On completion of erection, submit a letter signed and sealed by that Engineer to certify that Work has been completed in accordance with all shop drawings reviewed by the Consultant and the Structural Engineer.

.3 It is advisable to submit erection diagrams for review before preparing shop details, including details of special conditions and sections of typical connections. Shop drawings shall indicate material specifications, section splices, types of shop and field connections including complete weld information. In addition to beam designation marks, show all beam sizes on erection drawings. Show precautions which will be taken to exclude threads from shear planes of bearing type bolted. Do not splice sections without the prior acceptance of the Consultant.

.4 Indicate shop and erection details including cuts, copes, connections, holes, threaded fasteners, rivets and welds. Indicate welds by AWS Standard A2.4 Symbols for Welding.

.5 The shop drawings for fabricated steel trusses shall indicate all member sizes, joint details, splices, connections and indicate the specified loadings shown on the Aleo Associates Inc set. The truss details shall be sealed and signed by the Professional Engineer responsible for the trusses.

.6 The steel contractor shall not release column shop details for fabrication before establishing on site the final the tops of pier elevation and anchor bolts locations to support the columns. Any baseplate or column revisions noted due to discrepancies are at the contractor’s expense.

.7 Make corrections required by previous review before resubmitting drawings. Clearly indicate all changes and additions to previous submission. Do not add new details to drawings which have been stamped as reviewed or noted.

.8 Structural Steel contractor shall prepare his own erection plans and details. The use of the structural framing plans as erection plans shall not be permitted. See Shop Drawing Section in General Conditions for information about shop drawings.

.9 All steel stair shop drawings shall be detailed in accordance with to NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual. The drawings shall clearly indicate construction details, sizes of steel sections and thickness of steel sheet to be designed by a licenced engineer. The design metal of stair components and landing construction and connections shall meet the NBC vertical and horizontal live load requirements. The shop drawing bearing stamp of a qualified professional engineer registered in Province of Ontario.



.10 The miscellaneous metal fabrications work including metal work which is not specified elsewhere shall be detailed and submitted as shop drawings in accordance with the architectural concept and submitted for verification by the project consultant team. The construction and connections for the assembly, including anchorage to material by others, shall meet the Ontario Building Code specified loadings for the application and any other loads noted. The shop drawing bearing stamp of a qualified professional engineer registered in Province of Ontario.

.11 Keep on site at all times a set of reviewed shop drawings and use only these drawings and the Structural Drawings to erect structural steel. Neatly mark on the Structural Drawings changes issued during the course of construction.

1.9 Product Handling

.1 Handle and store steel materials at the job site in such a manner as to cause no damage to other materials or existing building, to property or new structure. Handle structural steel so as to avoid permanent distortion.

.2 An area for receiving and storage of fabricated steel on the site will be allotted by the General Contractor.

.3 Steel materials shall be stored on site in such a manner as to prevent any permanent distortion (loss of precamber, warpage, etc.).

1.10 Job Conditions

.1 Verify all dimensions, conditions and obtain all necessary measurements at the job. Before commencing work, examine all spaces and surfaces in which and/or to which miscellaneous iron work will be attached. Report any necessary corrections immediately to the Consultant. Do not proceed until corrections (if any required) have been made. Commencing work implies this Contractor’s acceptance of all said spaces, surfaces and job conditions.

1.11 Substitutions

.1 The substitutions of structural steel sections of equal or greater strength for those shown on drawings can only be done with written approval by the Consultant and shall be at this Contractor’s expense.

.2 Substitution of structural steel members are subject to the following characteristics:

.1 Flange width.

.2 Depth.

.3 Cross sectional area, section modules, moment of inertia and lateral support conditions.

.3 Should this Contractor elect to fabricate some of the structural steel members, written approval must be obtained from Consultant. All such members must be certified by a Professional Engineer and all details and analytical calculations submitted to the Consultant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 All material shall be rolled from new billets and no materials shall be rolled from rejected new billets nor from material previously rolled. All steel unless otherwise noted shall be made by the open hearth process and shall conform wit the standard Specifications for Structural Steel for Building of the American Society for Testing and Materials.

.2 Steel materials generally shall conform to the requirements of the latest edition of Canadian Standards Association Specification S-16.1 Steel Structures for Buildings.

2.2 Structural Steel



.1 Structural steel for this project shall conform to latest C.S.A. CAN3-G40.21 Grade 350W for W and H.S.S. sections and grade 300W for the balance. “General Purpose Structural Steel.” A.S.T.M. A572 Grade 50 may be substituted. All structural sections shall be straight and uniform in cross sectional dimensions, free from flaws, blow holes or other imperfections.

2.3 Welding

.1 Welding shall be done by manual shielded metal arc processes and shall be carried out in strict accordance with the following C.S.A. Specifications:

.1 No. W47 - latest edition for Qualifications of Welders.

.2 No. W48 - latest edition for Electrodes (only coated rods allowed).

.3 No. W59 - 03 General Specifications for Welding of Steel Structures (Metal Arc Welding).

2.4 Connections

.1 Design connections to conform to CAN/CSA S16. Conform also to the CISC Handbook of Steel Construction, except as otherwise required by the specifications. Ensure connection design includes consideration of pass-through forces that may be required. These pass through forces may include tension, compression, moment or shears. The connection design will not only encompass a member to member design, but also the design of the total assembly to ensure all pass through forces at a joint assembly are considered. Provide local reinforcement as required to any connection or joint locations.

.2 Retain a Professional Engineer experienced in the design of structural steel connections to be responsible for the design of all connections. This engineer is to be licensed in the Province of Ontario.

.3 In general make shop and field connections with high strength bolts or by welding.

.4 Design non-composite beam connections for an end reaction equal to 60% of the total uniformly distributed load capacity of the member unless a greater reaction is noted on the drawings.

.5 Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, design composite beam connections for an end reaction due to one and a half times the uniformly distributed load capacity of the member acting non-compositely.

.6 Install web and flange stiffener plates at moment connections as required by the connection design. If the shear generated in a column web exceeds its shear capacity, reinforce the web.

.7 Provide at least one stiffener plate each side of web on beams continuous over columns unless another type of stiffener is shown on the drawings.

2.5 High Strength Steel Bolts

.1 Bolts, nuts and washers to ASTM A325-04. Hi tensile steel bolts shall be 19mm diameter for all joints (slip resistant) unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

2.6 Standard Threaded Fasteners

.1 Standard bolts shall be 19mm or 25mm diameter in accordance to ASTM A307-00 Grade ‘A’ where noted on drawings.

2.7 Anchor Bolts



.1 Anchor bolts shall be sized as indicated on the drawings and meet ASTM F1554 Grade 300W.

2.8 H.S.S. Sections

.1 All H.S.S. structural steel to conform with the requirements of ASTM A 1085, Grade 350W.Class H;) Other type Class C or grade ASTM A 500 Grade C Round HSS Fy 46 ksi (317 MPa) Square and rectangular HSS 50 ksi (345 MPa) can be used up on consultant approval.

2.9 Pipe

.1 All pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM Standard A53. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe. Grade 300W Steel (Fy = 36 k.s.i.)

2.10 Sheet Steel

.1 All sheet steel shall be hot rolled structural sheets standard finish and in accordance to ASTM Specification A-570, Grade B (Fy = 30 k.s.i.) gauges as indicated.

2.11 Finishes

.1 Shop paint is standard for all members unless noted otherwise. Shop paint for shop coat and touch-up shall conform to CAN/CGSB-1.40-M97 Structural Steel Grey Primer or CISC-CPMA Standard 2-75 or I-73a. Do not paint steel that is to receive spray applied fireproofing unless approved for bond. Degrease all steel to receive fireproofing.

.2 Hot dipped galvanized members shall be installed with a zinc coating 600 g/m2 to CAN/CSA-G164. The installed coat of shop primer shall be in accordance with to CAN/CGSB-1.40. The zinc rich, ready mix primer shall meet CAN/CGSB-1.181.

2.12 Fabrication

.1 All steel fabrication shall be continuously inspected by the fabricator before shipment to ensure compliance of material and workmanship with the requirements of these specifications.

2.13 Accessories

.1 Provide all accessories necessary to complete the work. Accessories include but are not limited to screws, bolts, nuts, rods, hangers, connection clip angles, washers, anchors and similar items whether specifically mentioned herein or not.

2.14 Fasteners

.1 Anchorage devices are selected on typical application requirements for fastening miscellaneous devices to masonry and concrete walls and floors. In all cases, follow the manufacturer’s recommendations for standard embedment/ edge distance at a minimum.

.2 Products specified are Hilti. By Hilti Canada

.3 Types of anchors:

.1 For connection of steel to masonry, Hilti HLC Sleeve Anchors, size as requied, hex head, carbon steel, zinc plated.

.2 For steel to concrete, Hilti Kwik Bolt 3, size as required, carbon steel, zinc plated.

2.15 Anchors for Masonry

.1 Provide anchors welded to structural steel columns and channel frames for masonry tile. Anchors to be as detailed on drawings and MSSA anchor as manufactured by Dur-O-Wal Limited or approved Equal.



PART 3 - FABRICATION & ERECTION

3.1 Connections, Fittings and Details

.1 Fabricate structural steel as indicated in accordance with CSA-S16 and in accordance with shop drawings. All details and connections shall be carefully made and fitted with special care taken so that the finished work presents a neat and workmanlike appearance without the use of unnecessary fills. Connection and design shall be certified by a professional engineer registered in the Province of Ontario.

.2 Standard connections as detailed in the latest edition of the Handbook of Steel Construction published by C.I.S.C. shall be used where possible. Where detail does not permit the use of standard connections, the detail connection shall develop the full strength of the member.

.3 Details shall be designed so that field high strength bolting can be done properly. All connections shall be friction type connections.

.4 Hi tensile bolts shall have two hardened steel washers per bolt. Bold in finished work shall be not project more than 1/8” beyond nut without the use of unnecessary washers.

.5 Welding shall be solid, smooth and regular, free from pits or incorporated slag or scale. Welds shall be made in such a manner as to avoid distortion or damage to members.

.6 Eccentric beam to column connections shall be fabricated as indicated on the drawings.

.7 Shop connections shall be welded in accordance with this specification and accepted standard practices. All moment connections shall be shop welded.

.8 Field connections shall be made by either high strength bolts and/or welding.

.9 All finishes required on column ends shall be brought to true and normal surface by milling with a milling machine. Grinding will not be allowed. Splicing will not be allowed other than shown on the design drawings without the approval of the Consultant at the shop drawing stage.

.10 Provide holes for attachment of other work. Where necessary, holes shall be slotted. Mark all “Miscellaneous Metal” items with paint and identify with identifications on setting diagram.

.11 Reinforce openings to maintain required design strength.

3.2 Workmanship

.1 All workmanship must be first class in all respects and any members not presenting a finished and workmanlike appearance will be rejected. All finished members shall be free from twists, bends or open joints.

.2 All members shall be true to length so that assembling may be done without fillers, except where same are required as detailed.

.3 Joints in exposed interior work shall be concealed as far as possible and where not possible are to be hairline.

3.3 Finishes

.1 Unless otherwise noted, all structural steel shall be given one shop coat of paint. Steel to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted. All surfaces to be painted shall be thoroughly cleaned of all rust, scale, grease or oil and be dry immediately before paint is applied.

.2 Repaint where surfaces are damaged during erection or where necessary to scrape off the shop coat. Also paint bolts after erection.

.3 Do not prime structural steel to receive spray applied fireproofing unless approved for bond. The only areas which require the application of spray fireproofing to structural steel are members supporting the floor slab or walls.



.4 Apply hot dipped galvanized system zinc primer plus topcoat system to all structural steel located beyond the vapour barrier or as noted on the drawings.

.1 Surface preparation using “Commercial Blast Cleaning”.

.2 Approved Coating systems:

.1 Amercoat Canada Tel: 905-847-1500

.2 Zinc Primer: Amercoat 68HS (2 to 4 mils DFT) Topcoat: Amercoat 400 (5 to 8 mils DFT)

.3 International Paints Tel: 905-790-3300

.4 Zinc Primer: Interzinc 52 (2 to 3 mils DFT) Topcoat: Interseal 385 (5 to 8 mils DFT)

.5 When welding after galvanizing is in place, grind away galvanizing at areas to be welded. Touch up with two coats of zinc-rich paint. Clean surfaces down to bare metal and apply two coats of zinc-rich touch-up paint to any galvanized surface, which has been damaged, or field welded, and which is accepted by the Consultant as being capable of repair without galvanizing.

3.4 Markings

.1 Mark materials in accordance with CSA-G40.20-04. Do not use die stamping. If steel is to be left in unpainted condition, place marking at locations not visible from exterior after erection.

.2 Match marking: shop mark for fit and match.

3.5 Erection

.1 All erection of structural steel shall be performed in a safe manner and in accordance with CSA-S16, the Construction Safety Act and Canadian Construction Safety Code (latest editions).

.2 All steel shall be set accurately to the lines and elevations shown on the drawings.

.3 All members shall be connected temporarily with sufficient bolts to ensure the safety of the structure until permanent connections are made.

.4 Columns shall be erected on concrete piers and foundations constructed by other trades to the elevations required. This surface shall be coated with neat cement grout by other trades, just prior to setting column. The columns shall be securely braced and guyed, held plumb and in line until bolting has been completed.

.5 The Steel Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the correct plumbing and alignment and for setting of all members. He shall set all guys, braces, etc. necessary to maintain the structure during erection until such time as the work of other trades is in place.

.6 Drifting of unfair holes will not be permitted in field erection of structural members. The Structural Steel Contractor shall be solely responsible for accuracy and fit of all structural steel members. If members do not fir properly in the field, repairs and replacements must be made by suitable methods to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.7 Welding shall not be done until structure has been properly aligned.

.8 There shall be no burning of holes in members in the shop or the field without permission of the Architect.

3.6 Anchor Bolts



.1 Structural Steel Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the project site, all anchor bolts complete with washers and bolts required for anchoring columns and beam wall bearing plates. Structural Steel Contractor shall check anchor bolt location, elevation and trueness of top of concrete pier; General Contractor shall make corrections as required by Structural Steel Contractor.

.2 Refer to drawings for column footing schedule and base plate details.

3.7 Columns And Base Plates

.1 All columns shall have their ends milled and welded to the base plates. Holes in the base plates shall be of size to allow for slight adjustment in the field to bring columns in alignment. Provide seat angles, clip angles, angle connections and holes are required.

.2 Provide masonry column anchors to columns on face where tying to masonry walls.

3.8 Beams

.1 Beams shall be rolled sections and welded wide flange shapes, straight and without camber or more than 6mm for each 3 meters of span unless noted otherwise on drawings. Beam connections in general shall have standard double angle clips which in all cases must be sufficient to develop full strength of the member. Supply masonry anchors and welded bearing plates on ends of beam to sizes as shown on drawings and of sufficient size for bearing on masonry or concrete.

.2 Provide the indicated camber to beams in such a manner as to provide a uniform parabolic profile. Ensure that the method used to provide camber does not reduce the safe load carrying capacity of the members.

3.9 Miscellaneous Structural Framing

.1 Provide and install all miscellaneous structural framing, loose angles and plates complete with bolts, strap anchors, etc. for attachment to structural steel, concrete, masonry, walls, etc. as indicated on drawings and required for complete job.

3.10 Loose Angle Lintels

.1 Furnish to Mason for setting all angle lintels required throughout the work as shown on drawings. Lintels shall have a bearing of not less than 200mm each side of opening for angles. Refer to Drawings for size and location of lintels.

3.11 Miscellaneous Framing

.1 Provide and install all miscellaneous structural framing (beams, channels, angles, tube, plates, etc.) complete with bolts or strap anchors for attachment to concrete, masonry, structural framing, etc. as indicated on drawings and required for complete job. Connections to joists must receive joists manufacturer’s approval and comply with their recommendations for attachments and/or reinforcing of joists to receive framing by this trade.

.2 Angle framing for exhaust fans, roof mounted mechanical equipment and ducts through roof in steel framed roof areas.

.3 Beam, angles and plate lintels noted on drawings. Refer also to architectural details.

.4 Lintels for ducts passing through masonry walls are not shown on Lintel Schedule.

3.12 Relation To Other Trades

.1 This Contractor shall cooperate with the metal deck supplier, steel joist supplier, concrete contractor and all other contractors and sub-trades for coordinator of common works.

3.13 Inspection



.1 The fabricator shall allow the work to be inspected by the Consultants or other duly appointed agent at any stage of fabrication.

.2 Acceptance of any material or finished member in the shop shall not prevent their subsequent rejection if found defective in the field.

3.14 Clean Up

.1 This Contractor shall clean up and remove from the site all rubbish and surplus materials resulting from work under this section promptly as the work proceeds and upon completion.


Rough and Finish Carpentry Section 06 10 00 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 The work required under this section of the specifications shall include all labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete all Carpentry Work as indicated on drawings and specified herein, including the following briefly described:

.1 All nailers, blocking, bucks, studs, furring, grounds, strapping, shims, etc.

.2 Installation of doors, frames and hardware supplied under other sections of the specifications.

.3 All plywood exclusive of formwork.

.4 All nailers, fasteners, bolts, washers, nuts and rough hardware accessories.

.5 Wood backing at all accessory items.

.6 Wood backing at all wall mounted door stops.

.7 Wood backing at all wall mounted monitors and upper furniture cabinets. Confirm height required prior to installation.

.8 Battens for siding

.9 Wood window jamb extensions.

.10 Wood handrails

.11 Pre-engineered floor joists at Mezzanine

.12 Roof Carpentry

.13 Installation of Peel & Stick Air barrier in miscellaneous areas not covered by other trades.

.14 Note: All exposed Carpentry work to be installed by qualified Finish Carpenters with a minimum of 5 years’ experience.

1.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

.1 Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

.2 Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware

.3 Section 06 40 00 – Architectural Woodwork

.4 Section 06 12 00 – Structural Insulated Panels

.5 Section 07 21 00 – Thermal insulation

.6 Section 07 – Roofing

.7 Section 07 ?? ?? - ???Siding

.8 Section 08 – Aluminum Curtain wall

.9 Section 08 54 13 – Fiber Glass Fixed Windows

.10 Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications

1.3 Installation By This Trade

.1 This Contractor to familiarize himself with other sections of this specification to ascertain materials supplied by another section but installed by the Carpenter including the following items:

.1 Section 08 11 13 – Hollow metal doors and frames



.2 Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware

.3 Section 10 28 00 – Misc. Accessories

1.4 Co-operation

.1 Do all rough carpentry work and wood framing required by other trades. Refer to other sections of the specifications and to the drawings for pertinent information regarding such requirements.

1.5 Delivery, Storage and Protection

.1 Protect materials from weather while in transit to the job site. Store materials on site in such a way as to prevent deterioration or loss of impairment of their structural and other essential properties.

1.6 Measurements

.1 Obtain measurements at the building for all items which are to be fabricated as required so that all parts of the work will fit together and will meet the conditions at the building.

1.7 Protection

.1 This Contractor shall provide all temporary protection for workers and pedestrian traffic.

1.8 Submittals


.2 Shop Drawings

.1 Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details.

.2 Indicate all materials, thicknesses, finished and hardware.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Lumber Grades and Quality

.1 All lumber shall be the grades specified in accordance with the standard grading rules of the National Lumber Grades Authority and C.S.A. Standard 0141 Softwood. Lumber shall be grade stamped by a grading organization or agency certified by the Canadian Lumber Standards Administrative Board.

.2 All lumber shall be sound, thoroughly seasoned and free from warp that cannot be corrected in the process of bridging or nailing. Woodwork exposed to view shall be dressed four sides. Moisture content shall not exceed percentages allowed by the National Lumber Grades Authority.

.3 All framing lumber studs, plates, nailers, bucks, fascias, copings, blocking, curbs, etc. shall be exterior grade to CSA-0121-M78 or CSA-0151-M78. Sizes and spacing as shown on drawings.

.2 Rough Hardware and Nail

.1 This Contractor shall supply all rough hardware where required. Nails, spikes, screws, bolts, etc. shall be of sufficient size and type to rigidly secure all members in place. Where indicated on the drawings provide size and spacing shown.

.2 Rough hardware and nails shall be in accordance with C.S.A. Specification BIII-1974 and the National Building Code of Canada.

.3 Galvanizing to CSA G164-M1981. Use galvanized fasteners for exterior work and in all interior highly humid areas.



.3 Plywood

.1 All interior, non-painted plywood shall be G.1.S., Grade B fir plywood in accordance with CSA 0121-M78, to thickness as detailed on drawings.

.2 Interior painted poplar plywood G.1.S., Grade A in accordance with CSA-0153-M1980.

.3 Interior stained Window Jamb Extensions: Clear Pine stain grade.

.4 Exterior battens for siding to be pressure treated.

.5 Plywood for exterior use on roof area. Exterior grade to CSA-0121-M78 or CSA-0151-M78, 1/2” & 3/4” thick, good one side.

.4 Fasteners

.1 As noted on drawings or as follows:

.2 For anchorage of plywood and framing members to block masonry or concrete surfaces, Gripcon mechanical fasteners, 1” longer than fixture to be fastened.

.3 Bolts 1/2” diameter unless indicated otherwise, complete with nuts and washers.

.4 Toggle bolts, expansion shields and lag bolts, screw and lead or inorganic fibre plugs recommended for purpose by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Workmanship

.1 All work in this section shall be done by skilled and experienced workers in accordance with drawing details and manufactures recommendations.

.2 This trade shall examine the work and materials installed by others insofar as it applies to this section and report to the Consultant any work improperly done or arranged to receive the work of this trade. Erection of materials to be carried out in a substantial manner to ensure a rigid, straight, square, plumb and horizontal line level.

3.2 Installation Wood Framing

.1 Comply with requirements of OBC, supplement by the following paragraphs.

.2 Install furring and blocking as required to space-out and support casework, cabinets, wall and ceiling finishes, facing, fascia, soffit, siding and other work as required.

.3 Align and plumb faces of furring and blocking to tolerance of 1:600.

.4 Install rough bucks, nailers and linings to rough openings as required to provide backing for frames and other work.

.5 Install wood cants, fascia backing, nailers, curbs and other wood supports as required and secure using galvanized steel fasteners.

.6 Install wood backing, dressed, tapered and recessed slightly below top surface of roof insulation for roof hopper.

.7 Install sleepers as indicated.

.8 Use screws, nails, staples and other similar driven fasteners suitable to material to be joined and to conditions under which they ate installed and used. Ensure that in finished work encountered without damage to, or weakening of elements secured together, and that fastenings will not corrode or cause staining of exposed surfaces.

3.3 Doors



.1 Doors shall be installed in locations indicated on the drawings, complete with hardware listed in the Hardware Specification.

.2 Doors shall be prepared for glazing by the supplier. Hollow metal doors will be prepared to receive hardware.

.3 Bevel stiles 1/8”. Allow 1/8” clearance at jambs and head of frame. A clearance of 3/4” shall be allowed between the bottom of the door and the finished floor. (Exclusive for floor covering.)

3.4 Hardware

.1 Install all hardware as listed in the Hardware Specifications – Section 08 71 00. This Contractor shall include in his costs for adjusting, fitting of all hardware listed.

3.5 Finish Work

.1 Do finish work to quality standards of the Architectural Woodwork Manufacturer Association of Canada. (AWMAC)

.2 Scribe and cut as required to fit abutting walls, and surfaces to fit properly into recesses and to accommodate fixtures, outlets, and other projecting, intersecting or penetrating objects.

.3 Form joints to conceal shrinkage.

.4 Position items of finished carpentry work accurately, level, plumb, true and fasten or anchor securely.

.5 Design and select fasteners to suit size and nature of components being joined. Use proprietary devices as recommended by the manufacturer. (Tapcon masonry anchors to block walls). Counter sink & plug with solid birch.

.6 Replace items of finish carpentry with damage to wood surfaces including hammer and other bruises.

.7 Butt and cope internal joints of baseboards to make snug, tight joint. Cut right angle joint of trim with metered joints. Fasten with Tapcon screws & plug & sand ready for finish.

.8 Fit backs of finished trim members snugly to wall surfaces to eliminate cracks at junction of walls.

3.6 Fabrication and Installation of Wood Curbs

.1 Wood curb fabrication and depth sizes are noted on the working drawings.

3.7 Wood Framing Work

.1 Install all roof carpentry items of wood framing, plywood, curb extensions, deck blockings, etc. as detailed on the drawings. All wood members to be anchored to masonry, steel and concrete construction with required nails, gripcons, bolts, washers, etc. of sufficient size and quantity to securely fasten all items permanently in place.

.2 Any additional wood framing or blockings required by the membrane manufacturer to be used by the Roofing Contractor and not specifically detailed shall be provided as part of the work.

.3 Supply appropriate fastenings, anchors, accessories and adhesives required for fabrication and erection of Work.

.4 Use metal flashings of same material as metal component being fastened, or of metal which will not set electrolytic action and cause damage to fastening or metal component under



moist conditions. In general use non-corrosive or hot dip galvanized steel anchors occurring on or in exterior locations.

.5 Fastening devices or adhesives shall be of appropriate type used in sufficient quantity and in such manner to provide positive, permanent fastening which will not shift, work loose or fail due to vibration or other causes resulting from normal use of building. Install anchors or spacing to provide required load/stress carrying capacity. Do not use wood plugs.

.6 Lay out neatly to keep exposed fastenings to minimum, evenly spaced and aligned.

.7 Do not use fastening which will cause spalling, cracking or deformation or deterioration of material being fastened by or to.

.8 Do not use powder actuated fastening devices which are stressed in withdrawal without approval. Take stringent safety precautions when using power actuated fastenings. Use only low velocity plunger-type devices.

.9 Use screws, nails, staples and other similar driven fasteners suitable to materials to be jointed and to conditions under which they are installed and used. Ensure that in finished work fasteners are sized to take durable hold under stress to be encountered without damage to or weakening of elements secured together, and those fastenings will not corrode or cause staining of exposed surfaces.

3.8 Clean Up

.1 Remove all debris and excess material not required by the contractor promptly from the site.

.2 The General Contractor will be responsible for removal of all sticker identification labels and final cleaning of all glass to the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

.3 The General Contractor will be responsible for removal of all construction dirt from doors and frames. Wherever paint chips exist, caused from construction, such will be made good to the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

.4 If and where paint is located on the finished hardware, such will be removed to the approval of the Owner’s Representative.


Structural Insulated Panels Section 06 12 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Requirements

.1 The General Conditions of CCDC 2-(Latest Version) as supplemented in Section 00810, and the General Requirements of Division 1, form part of this section, and must be read in conjunction with the requirements of this section, and all related sections.

.2 The work of this section and related work specified in other sections shall comply with all requirements of Division 1 – General Requirements.


.1 Provisions of all labour, materials, equipment and services necessary to provide all structural insulated panels.


.1 Rough Carpentry 06 10 00

.2 Prefabricated Wood Trusses 06 17 56

.3 Gypsum Board 09 25 00

.4 Joint Sealants 07 90 00

1.4 References

.1 CSA B111-1974 or ANSI/ASME B11.1; Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples

.2 ASTM A15; Hot Dip Galvanized Fasteners

.3 ASTM A653; Hot Dip Galvanized Connectors

.4 NLGA No 2; Softwood Lumber.

.5 CSA O325; Construction Sheathing

.6 ICC-AC233; SIP Screws

.7 AAMA 812-04; low expansion foam

.8 CAN/CGSB-37-2, ASTM C 920; Caulking compound

.9 CAN/CGSB 19.13, ASTM D 4397; Polyethylene Sheeting

.10 .CSA 086-09 Engineering Design in Wood


.1 Lumber identification: by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board.

.2 OSB or plywood identification by grade mark in accordance with applicable CSA standards or equivalent. If markings or stamps cannot be identified, a letter from the manufacturer certifying the material is in accordance with applicable CSA standards or equivalent.

.3 Installer Qualifications

.1 Installer subcontractor shall have adequate equipment for, and be experienced in SIP installation.



.2 Work shall be performed by subcontractor having a minimum of two (2) years documented experience in the installation of structural wood panel or structural wood frame systems. Submit proof of experience to Consultant.

.4 Pre-installation Meeting

.1 Convene a pre-installation meeting for the Products specified in this section. Attendees must include, as a minimum, representatives of the following:

.1 Contractor (Site Superintendent & Project Manager)

.2 Installation Subcontractor (Site Foreman & Project Manager)

.3 Product Manufacturer and/or Distributor (Technical Representatives)

.4 Related Subcontractors.

.5 Installation

.1 Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer’s shop drawings, installation and reference manuals and in accordance with all warranty requirements.

1.6 Design Criteria

.1 Design panels in accordance with Division B, 4.1.1.4.(2).(a) for building locality as ascertained by NBC or provincial Code.

1.7 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01300.

.2 Each shop drawing submission shall bear signature and stamp of Professional Engineer licensed to practice in the provincial jurisdiction.

.3 Furnish detailed fabrication and erection drawings for all panel systems, indicating the thickness, profile, facing materials, joint details, panel sizes and openings required. Indicate allowable load and stress increase.

.4 Indicate arrangements of webs, blocking, or other members to accommodate ducts, conduit, or other services.

.5 Showing lifting points for storage, handling, and erection.

1.8 Samples

.1 Submit two 300x300mm samples of panel prior to fabrication of mock-up, in accordance with Section 01300.


.1 Store panels on job site on level surface in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Provide bearing supports and bracings. Prevent bending or warping of panels

1.10 Extended Warranty

.1 The panel fabricator shall provide a warranty covering defects in materials and workmanship for a period of ten years from Date of Substantial Performance.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acceptable Manufacturers

.1 Thermapan Structural Insulated Panels, Fort Erie, ON.



.2 Thermal Foams, Buffalo, NY.

2.2 Materials

.1 Framing Lumber: SPF softwood, NLGA No. 2 Grade or better

.2 OSB: CSA O325; Plywood: CSA O121 or O141

.3 Insulation Board: expanded polystyrene (EPS), Type 1 to CAN/ULC- S701

2.3 ACCESSORIES

.1 CSA B111-1974 or ANSI/ASME B11.1; Wire Nails, Spikes and Staples

.2 ASTM A15; Hot Dip Galvanized Fasteners

.3 ASTM A653; Hot Dip Galvanized Connectors

.4 CSA O325; Construction Sheathing

.5 ICC-AC233; SIP Screws

.6 AAMA 812-04; Low expansion foam

.7 CAN/CGSB-37-2, ASTM C 920; Caulking compound

.8 CAN/CGSB 19.13, ASTM D 4397; Polyethylene Sheeting

2.4 Prefabricated Panels

.1 Total Assembly: The panels shall be 260 mm minimum in total thickness, in widths not exceeding 1220mm, and lengths not exceeding 4876 mm. Panel lengths will be coordinated to align with truss locations. All panel joints shall be fabricated to accommodate spline unless otherwise noted. Joint fabrication will permit the use of expanding foam to provide a continuous thermal break at all spline connections.

.2 Exterior Face Materials: 11mm thick CSA O325 oriented strand board (OSB), square edges unless other face material specified

.3 Interior Face Materials: 11mm thick CSA O325 oriented strand board (OSB), square edges unless other face material specified

.4 Insulation: expanded polystyrene (EPS), 19.2 kg/m3 density, Class 1, continuously laminated to the exterior and interior face materials.

2.5 Performance Features and Tests

.1 Structural Tests

.1 Foam properties shall include the minimum compressive strength of 163 kPa (ASTM-297), flexural modulus of 5240 kPa (ASTM C-393) and shear modulus of 5171 kPa (ASTM C-273).

.2 Thermal and Moisture Properties

.1 The panel shall provide a minimum RSI 2.81 for the total panel. Water vapor permeability shall be less than 1 perm, and water absorption less than 2.4% (ASTM C-209).

.3 Fire Safety Characteristics

.1 The foam core of all panels shall have a Class 1 rating, Smoke Developed 300 (ASTM E-84).

.4 Dimensional Tolerances



.1 Thickness of panels shall not vary in excess of +/- 1.5mm from those specified. Panel lengths shall not exceed +/- 6mm of those specified, and width shall not exceed +/- 3mm of those specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection

.1 The contractor shall examine the alignment of structural frames prior to panel erection, and shall not proceed with installation if structural frames are not aligned in conformance with the tolerances established by the contract documents.

3.2 Erection

.1 The Contractor shall provide a complete panel installation, including all splines, plates, foam, sealants and fasteners indicated on the approved contract documents. All work shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommended procedures, installation manuals and layout drawings for each specific product type.


Plate Connected Wood Trusses Section 06 17 56 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Shop fabricated wood trusses for roof framing.

.2 Bridging, bracing, and anchorage.


.1 Section 06 10 00 – Rough and Finish carpentry .

.2 Section 06 12 00 – Structural Insulated Panels

1.3 References

.1 ASTM A123/A123M-13 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products.

.2 ASTM A153/A153M-09 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware.

.3 ASTM A167-99(2009) - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.

.4 [ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.]

.5 CSA-O86-09 (Consolidation) - Engineering design in wood.

.6 CSA-O121-08 (R2013) - Douglas Fir Plywood.

.7 CSA-O141-05 (R2009) - Softwood Lumber.

.8 CSA-O151-09 - Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.9 CSA-O325-07 (R2012) - Construction Sheathing.

.10 CSA-O437 Series-93 (R2011) - Standards on OSB and Waferboard.

.11 NPA A208.1-2009 - Particleboard.

.12 CANPLY (Canadian Plywood Association) - Canadian Plywood Handbook.

.13 NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2010 edition.

.14 TPIC (Truss Plate Institute of Canada), TPIC-2011 - Truss Design Procedures and Specifications for Light Metal Plate Cconnected Wood Trusses, Limit States Design.

1.4 Performance Requirements

.1 Design Roof Dead Load: __0.8kPaLive Load: 1.0 kPa with deflection limited to 1/240 of span .

1.5 Submittals for Review

.1 Section 01 33 00: Submission procedures.

.2 Product Data: Provide truss configurations, bearing and anchor details, bridging and bracing.

.3 Shop Drawings: Indicate sizes and spacing of trusses and associated components, web and chord sizes, plate sizes, fastener descriptions and spacings, loads and truss cambers, framed openings. Submit design calculations.

1.6 Submittals for Information




1.7 Closeout Submittals



.1 Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies:

.1 Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by NLGA.

.2 Plywood Grading Agency: Certified by CANPLY.

.2 Truss Design, Fabrication, and Installation: CSA-O86 & TPIC. Maintain one (1) copy of document on site.

.3 Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three (10) years experience.

.4 Pressure Preservative Treated Wood: Marked with certification mark authorized by the Canadian Wood Preservers Bureau (CWPB) indicating producer, preservative type, retention and Use Category (UC).

.5 Design trusses under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the place where the Project is located.


.1 Conform to applicable code for loads, seismic zoning, other governing load criteria, and fire retardant requirements.

1.10 Delivery, Storage, And Protection

.1 Section 01 61 00: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

.2 Store truss depth in vertical position resting on intermittent bearing pads.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Dimension Lumber: CSA-O141, softwood lumber unless indicated otherwise, graded to NLGA Standard Grading Rules for Lumber. Materials used in the design shall be documented on shop drawings.

.2 Plates: CSA-O121CSA-O151, graded and certified to CANPLY, meeting the requirements of CSA-O325. Additional type of plates like particle board plates, OSB plates used in design shall be indicated on shop drawings.

.3 Truss Bridging: Design by truss manufacturer].

2.2 Accessories

.1 Fasteners and Anchors:

.1 Fasteners and Anchors: Fasteners and Anchors used in design shall be indicated on shop drawings. Information should include the type, grade and size f fasteners and anchors.

.2 Connectors and Plates: Connectors and plates used in the design shall be provided on shop drawings. Material grade, size and type shall be indicated on shop drawings.

2.3 Fabrication

.1 Fabricate trusses to achieve structural requirements specified.

.2 Brace wood trusses for support to [TPIC].

.3 Provide [bottom] [top] chord extensions as indicated.



.4 Fabricate to achieve minimum end bearing of:

.1 100 mm on steel.

.2 200mm on masonry.

.5 Frame special sized openings in web framing as detailed.

2.4 Wood Treatment

.1 Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): CAN/CSA-O80 Series, and in accordance with Table 2 - Use Categories for Specific Products, Uses, and Exposures of CSA-O80.1.

.2 Wood Preservative (Surface Application): CSA-O80.3, copper naphthenate.

.3 Fire Retardant (FRT): CAN/CSA-O80 Series, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread/smoke development rating of CAN/ULC-S102

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Section 01 70 00: Verify existing conditions before starting work.

.2 Verify that supports and openings are ready to receive trusses.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Coordinate placement of support and bearing items.

3.3 Installation

.1 Install trusses to manufacturer's written instructions and TPIC.

.2 Set members level and plumb, in correct position.

.3 Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

.4 Do not field cut or alter structural members without approval of Consultant.

.5 Place headers and supports to frame openings.

.6 Frame openings between trusses with lumber in accordance with Section 06 11 0006 10 53.

.7 Coordinate placement of sheathing with work of this section.

.8 After erection, touch-up damaged surfaces with primer consistent with shop coat.

3.4 Site Applied Wood Treatment

.1 Apply preservative treatment to manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Brush apply two (2) coats of preservative treatment on wood requiring cutting or drilling after treatment, and on wood in contact with cementitious materials.

.3 Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members.

3.5 Erection Tolerances

.1 Section 01 73 00: Tolerances.

.2 Framing Members: 6 mmmaximum, from true position.

3.6 Schedules



SHOP DRAWINGS SHALL INCLUDE A SCHEDULE OF TRUSSES USED IN DESIGN. END OF SECTION 06 17 56

Architectural Woodwork Section 06 40 00 Page 1 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope

.1 The work required under this section of the specifications shall include supply and installation including all labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete all millwork as detailed on the drawings and as specified herein including the following briefly described:

.1 All nailers, blocking, bucks, furring, grounds, strapping, shims as required to install millwork.

.2 All nails, gripcon, fasteners, bolts, washers, nuts and rough hardware accessories.

.3 All cupboards, storage cabinets, counters, shelving units and all other cabinets and cabinet hardware.

.4 Finishing of all prefabricated millwork.

.5 Supply and install plastic grommets in work surface.

.6 Supply and installation of misc. specialty cabinet accessories.

.7 Supply and Installation of all wood panels.

.2 Schedule delivery and installation with the General Contractor. Insure completion of finish work occurring in relation to the millwork has been completed and areas to receive new millwork are ready and that the environmental conditions of the job site are conducive to the installation of the finished millwork. Any millwork delivered stored on site shall be properly protected from any damage.

.3 Obtain measurements at the building for all items which are to be fabricated so that all parts of the work will fit together and will meet the conditions at the building. The millwork fabricator will be responsible for providing assembly cuts to all millwork in order for access into the building for site installation.


.1 Section 06 10 00 – Rough & Finish Carpentry

.2 Section 08 81 00 - Glass and Glazing: Glass for casework.

.3 Division 26 – Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring.


.1 Supply and installation of mechanical items built into the work of this Section.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes.

.3 Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit two (2), 300mm x 300mm size samples, illustrating cabinet finish.

.2 Submit two (2), 300 mm x 300mm size samples, illustrating countertop finish.

.3 Submit two (2) samples of drawer pulls, hinges, etc illustrating hardware finish.




.1 Refer to Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals

1.6 Standards

.1 Do all millwork to millwork standards of Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC) Premium Grade.


.1 All millwork shall be fabricated and finished where specified at the millwork fabricator’s shop. The manufacturer must have at least five continuous years experience in the fabrication of this type of casework.

1.8 Workmanship

.1 All millwork shall be of the highest quality of cabinetwork to conform to design and details shown on the drawings. Fabrication of all components shall be accomplished using competent labour, proper materials and equipment, and the workmanship shall conform to established standard practices, conditions, procedures and recommendations.

.2 The temperature of panels and the area in which the actual fabrication is to take place should not be less than 65F, with a relative humidity of not less than 39% and not more than 80%.

.3 All panels shall be clearly cut, sharply defined and mitres accurately made. All work shall be clean and free of adhesive, tool marks, scratches and surface blemishes.

.4 Set all frames, doors, drawers, etc. level, plumb and true.

.5 All backing, dividers and gables and drawers shall be dado construction. All framing to be plined, or mortise and tenon construction. Refer to drawings for detail work.

.6 This millwork fabricator shall use hardwood only for nailers behind cabinet backing for securement of cabinets to walls.

.7 Set all frames and interior wood finish of every kind plumb, level, straight and true with proper grounds and attached firmly to same.

.8 Do not install any interior wood finish of any kind until all walls are thoroughly dry.

.9 Set all interior wood finish if every description though-out the job. Fit work carefully against all plaster, drywall or masonry surfaces and scribe to same as conditions require and/or as directed. Major deviations should be reported to the Owner’s Representative.

.10 Exposed hardwood shall be finished by this Contractor.

1.9 Mock-Up

.1 Section 01 40 00: Requirements for mock-up.

.2 Provide mock-up of full size cabinet and Wall Panels which includes plumbing accessories and fitments.

.3 Locate where directed by Consultant.

.4 Approved mock-up may remain as part of the Work.

1.10 Delivery, Storage, and Protection

.1 Section 01 50 00: Temporary facilities and Control

.2 Protect units from moisture damage as specified in AWMAC.

1.11 Site Conditions

.1 Ambient Conditions:



.1 During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy.

.2 During storage and installation: Obtain and comply with Architectural Woodwork Standard’s for optimum temperature and relative humidity conditions for woodwork during its storage and installation. Do not install woodwork until these conditions have been attained. Woodwork shall be acclimatized for a minimum of 72 hours prior to commencing woodwork installation.

.3 During service life of woodwork: Obtain and comply with woodwork manufacturer's advice for optimum temperature and humidity conditions. Note that building humidity control is not in operation 24 hours per day or 365 days per year and system is intermittent during winter and summer months. As a result, fabrication of wood components should anticipate major changes in humidity levels.

1.12 Guarantee

.1 This millwork fabricator shall guarantee his work for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the work and shall replace all defective work or equipment at no expense to the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Material

.1 All lumber shall be the grades specified in accordance with the standard grading rules of the National Lumber Grades Authority and CSA Standard 0141 Softwood. Lumber shall be grade stamped by a grading organization or agency certified by the Canadian Lumber Standards Administrative Board.

.2 Melamine Panels: Thermally fused melamine on particleboard to ANSI/A208.2-1994 and on particleboard to ANSI/A208.1-1999 for drawers only. Panels in 3/4" and 1/2" thickness.

.1 Mel-1: Hardrock maple or equivalent. .

2.2 Lumber Materials

.1 Lumber: To the requirements of AWMAC grade specified.

.2 Hardwood Lumber: Indicated on drawings as Solid wood, maximum moisture content of 6%; of quality suitable for transparent finish. Provide stain finish to match millwork.

2.3 Sheet Materials

.1 Sheet Materials: To the requirements AWMAC grade specified.

2.4 Millwork

.1 All poplar plywood for paint finish and substrate for plastic laminate counter tops shall be poplar faced fir Grade ‘A’ G.2S for cabinet construction and Grade ‘B’ for countertop substrate.

.2 This millwork fabricator shall supply all rough hardware where required. Nailer, spikes, screws, bolts, etc. shall be of sufficient size and type to rigidly secure all members in place.

.3 Rough hardwood and nails should be in accordance with C.S.A. Specification Bill and the National Building Code of Canada.

.4 All wood frames, nailers, sleepers, coping, blocking and the wood members in exterior walls or in contact with masonry or concrete shall be thoroughly brush-coated with Pentox or other approved wood preservative before installation by Subtrade Contractor.

.5 All pressure treated lumber to be in accordance with CSA Standards 080-M1983 and 080.1 M 1983. Pressure treated lumber may be installed in lieu of on-site application of wood preservative.



.6 Typical cabinet construction to consist of 19mm thick melamine faced particleboard. All new interior shelves will be constructed of 19mm thick melamine faced particleboard with 3mm thick PVC colour matched (rounded) edging on all four sides. Interior gables and dividers to consist of 19mm thick melamine faced particleboard and the cabinet backs of 12mm thick melamine. Toe kicks are to be constructed with 19mm Fir plywood. In cases of kicks larger than 100mm, they are to be finished with Plastic Laminate.

.7 Drawer Fronts that are detailed on the drawings shall be 19mm thick melamine faced particleboard with 3mm thick PVC colour matched (rounded) edging on all four sides. Bottom, sides and back are to be of 12.7mm thick melamine.

.8 Doors that are detailed on the drawings shall be 19mm thick melamine faced particleboard with 3mm thick PVC colour matched (rounded) edging on all four sides. All cabinet doors will have three (3) hinges installed per leaf (600 – 900mm), unless the following conditions occur: a door under the height of 600mm will have two (2) hinges installed per leaf, and a door that exceeds the height of 900mm will have four (4) hinges installed per leaf.

.9 Miscellaneous storage shelf units that are detailed on the drawings shall be constructed of 19mm thick melamine faced particleboard with 3mm thick PVC colour matched (rounded) edging on all four sides.

.10 Plastic Laminate: shall be as manufactured only by Arborite, Formica, Nevamar, Pionite, Octopus, Tafisa and Wilsonart Products. Material shall equal or exceed performance standards set by National Electrical Manufacturer’s association (NEMA LD3-1980). Colour: match melamine where required.

.1 Colour:

.1 P. Lam-1 To be determined

.2 P. Lam-2: To be determined

.11 Laminate will be minimum of .040” thickness General Purpose Grade. Finish: Velour (VL). Refer to the millwork drawings for location of plastic laminate. Category: GP or H-5 or No. 107 (General Purpose).

.12 Equivalent manufacturers will be accepted if texture, quality, and finish are determined by the architect to be equal or better than the above specified manufacturers. Colour is to be of an exact match, if not, then the Architect will select an equivalent colour to the specified.

.13 Countertops are to be postform with 180 degree wrap edges and integral back splash. Countertop core substrates are to be Fir plywood. An approved alternate will be “Medex” moisture resistant MDF board manufactured by “Medite” or approved equal. Provide balance sheet at all open counter areas, and end splashes at all wall surfaces and adjacent millwork.

.14 Adhesive shall be Dural 0 6 - 1875 (Industrial Grade) for laminate application. Technical Data Sheets may be requested to be supplied and turn over to the Architect. Cabinet joint adhesive shall be in accordance with standard practice for the type of joint and location to obtain maximum strength of components.

.15 All miscellaneous and cabinet hardware specified is to be supplied and installed by millwork fabricator and included within their tender price.

.1 Shelf supports and standards: Institutional grade, heavy duty dual-pin polycarbonate shelf supports – 250# rated complete with anti-tip safety lock.

.2 Bumpers: for all 19mm doors & drawers - P.V.C. self-sticking.

.3 Joint Fasteners: Knape & Vogt 516.

.4 Unit Leveler: Supply and install the following:

.1 Richelieu #BP720130



.5 Wood Filler: Plastic wood

.6 Locks: Dominion Lock Thrifty Serier Cam Locks; polished nickel finish; Model number 31303 complete with wood washer, 35mm long flat cam; 22mm deep cylinder body. Location: Right hand side of doors.

.7 E-Z Flex Catch: Cat. No. 3675 (No. 14 Nickel Plated) as manufactured by Amerock Inc. or approved equivalent. Location: Left hand side of doors.

.8 Scribe Mould: Plastic laminate to match colour where used.

.9 Fully concealed hinges for 19mm (3/4") doors: Full overlay doors:

.1 Blum #75M558clip-on metal hinge, zinc die cast, self-closing, 125° opening with die cast #173L810 stamped steel mounting plates. Screws for hinge and mounting plates. Blum System Screws No. 661.130 - 2G.

.10 Drawer Slides: Full extension, Model #KA5632 full extension as manufactured by Hettich or architect approved equal.

.11 Pull Handles: 30mm finger clearance req.;

.1 Size: 100mm centre (8mm dia.); Stainless steel; #CBH 220 as manufactured by Canadian Builders Hardware Mfg. Inc. or equivalent.

.12 Grommets: 63mm diameter black plastic. Richelieu # 76090. Located at each computer station coordinate final location with owner.

.13 Wall stops for all doors that open against a wall or other millwork: GSH250, by Gallery Specialty Hardware, finish C32D.

.14 Sliding Glass Door Hardware: For glass display case doors, Richelieu Series 150 complete with top and bottom track, shoe track and roller assembly, clear anodized aluminum finish. Richelieu BP16872-140 ratchet type sliding glass door lock. Glass by this Contractor. Doors – 6mm tempered, shelves 12mm tempered clear glass with polished edges.

.15 Display Cabinet Tackboard: Fabric covered ½” Homosote board, submit samples for approval. Verify interior size of display case.

.16 Display Cabinet Shelf Standard: Richelieu Heavy Duty Bracket #182 with matching standard in chrome.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 This millwork fabricator shall inspect the site to assure that their work will interface with the work of other trades.

.2 This millwork fabricator shall take all necessary measurements or spaces and conditions at the site to which his work must conform. Measurements shall be taken prior to the fabrication of his work to avoid delays in the project completion. Orders for materials shall be placed with sufficient lead time so that material will be delivered to the fabricator within ample time to avoid delay of manufacturing of case work. Major deviations should be reported to the Architect.

.3 Set and secure materials and components in place, rigid, plumb and square.

.4 Provide heavy duty butterfly type anchorage for wall mounted and suspended cabinet work.

.5 All securement fasteners shall have grommet plates to conceal and trim holes drilled for cabinet anchors.

.6 Make allowance around perimeter where fixed objects pass through or project into casework to permit normal movement without restriction.



.7 Provide cut outs for appliances, outlet boxes, piping and other penetrations.

.8 Site applied plastic laminate have joints offset from joints in core material. Adhere over entire surface and install with hairline joints. Bevel all arises.

.9 After installation, fit and adjust all hardware. All hardware to function smoothly without binding.

.10 The General Contractor will be responsible that all millwork and furniture is properly protected from work of other subtrades if installation has taken place before all work has been completed.

.11 Supply plastic grommets as per drawings but install on site, coordinate with owner exact location.

.12 Site applied plastic laminate shall have joints offset from joints in core material. Adhere laminate over entire surface and install with hairline joints. Bevel all arises.

.13 All blocking exposed to view through grille assemblies installed in millwork to be painted matt black.

3.2 Fabrication

.1 Fabricate casework at AWMAC construction premium grade.

.2 Where practical, work shall be finished and assembled at shop. All millwork and trim shall be finished smooth and free form machine or tool marks that will show through the finish. All nail and screw heads shall be countersunk receive putty and plastic laminate.

.3 Cabinet shall be fabricated plumb, level and square. Screws for securing cabinets shall be countersunk and covered with plastic laminate to conceal holes drilled for cabinet anchors on masonry wall.

3.3 Clean Up

.1 Remove all debris and excess material not required by contract promptly from the site.

.2 The millwork fabricator will remove all fingerprint marks, dirt, etc. from all millwork surfaces on the day before final inspection has been scheduled by the Owner’s Representative.


Thermal Insulation Section 07 21 00 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Supply & install labour, equipment & material necessary to complete all building insulation as indicated on drawings and as specified in this section.

.2 All other miscellaneous insulation shown on drawings. e.g. parapets, void spaces etc.

1.2 Related Work

.1 Section 04 00 00 – Masonry

.2 Section 09 22 16.13 – Non-Structural Metal Stud Framing

.3 Section 09 29 00 – Gypsum Board

.4 Section 03 00 00 – Concrete

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Insulation

.1 Extruded polystyrene; to CAN/ULC S701 Type 4 and CAN/ULC S701 Type 4, thickness as indicated, ship lapped edges.

.1 Acceptable Material: Dow STYROFOAM SM Type 4. – Application: perimeter foundation insulation, under slab, (requiring high density application). Or approved equal

.2 Acceptable Material: Dow CLADMATE CM Type 3 – Application: above grade (not requiring high density application). Or approved equal.

.2 Fiberglass Friction Fit Batt Insulation: R-value as required & complying with CAN/ULC-S702.

.3 Mineral or Stone Wool Friction Fit Batt Insulation: R-value as required & complying with CAN/ULC-S702.

.4 Acoustical & Fire Batt Insulation:

.1 Fiberglass or Mineral Wool Batts: Thickness as indicated to fill stud cavity, to ASTM C665, ASTM C423, CAN/ULC-S702, CAN/ULC-S102 and CAN/ULC-S114.

.2 Plain, unfaced, mineral wool batts for void fill between underside of metal deck and top of wall. Flame Spread: 5-15; Smoke Developed: 0; To ASTM C665, ASTM C423, CAN/ULC-S702, CAN/ULC-S102 and CAN/ULC-S114.

2.2 Adhesive

.1 Adhesive (for Polystyrene): to CGSB 71-GP-24, Type 230-31, by Bakor or equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Workmanship

.1 Install insulation after building substrate materials are dry.

.2 Install insulation to maintain continuity of thermal protection to building elements and spaces.

.3 Fit insulation tight around electrical boxes, plumbing and heating pipes and ducts, around exterior doors and windows and other protrusions.

.4 Keep insulation minimum 75 mm from heat emitting devices such as recessed light fixtures, and minimum 50 mm from sidewalls of CAN4-S604 type A chimneys and CAN/CGA-B149.1 and CAN/CGA-A149.2 type B and L vents.

Thermal Insulation Section 07 21 00 Page 2 of 2


.5 Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Butt joints tightly, offset vertical joints. Use only insulation boards free from chipped or broken edges. Use largest possible dimensions to reduce number of joints.

.6 Offset both vertical and horizontal joints in multiple layer applications.

.7 Do not enclose insulation until it has been inspected and approved by Architect.

3.2 Examination

.1 Examine substrates and immediately inform Engineer Consultant in writing of defects.

.2 Prior to commencement of work ensure:

.1 Substrates are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost and clean of dust and debris.

3.3 Installation – Interior

.1 Install insulation to manufacturer's written instructions.

.2 Install in walls, ceiling or roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.

.3 Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.

.4 Fit insulation tight in spaces and tight to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of insulation.


Underslab Vapour Retarders Section 07 26 16 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Surface preparation.

.2 Application of an underslab vapour retarder.


.1 Section 03 00 00 – Concrete.

1.3 References

.1 ASTM D1709 - 09 Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method.

.2 ASTM E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.

.3 ASTM E154 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs.

.4 ASTM E1643 - Standard Practice for Installation of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

.5 ASTM E1745 - Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs.

.6 ASTM F1249-01 Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Manufacturer’s Data Sheets:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s current product data sheets for materials and prefabrication devices, providing descriptions that are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer’s printed instructions for installation.


.1 Use an experienced installer and adequate number of skilled personnel who are thoroughly trained and experienced in the application of the vapour retarder.

.2 Obtain vapour retarder materials from a single manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing the product.

.3 Provide products which comply with all state and local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs).

1.6 Preconstruction Meeting

.1 Pre-Construction Meeting: Convene one week prior to installation of underslab vapour retarder. Attendees to be as follows: - Architect, Engineer, General Contractor, Vapour Retarder Installer, and Vapour Retarder Manufacturer to discuss the application in detail.

1.7 Delivery, Storage, and Handling

.1 Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying product name and manufacturer.

.2 Store materials in a clean, dry area in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.



.4 Ensure membrane is stamped with manufacturer’s name, product name, and membrane thickness at intervals of no more than 220cm (85”).

1.8 Environmental Requirements

.1 Product not intended for uses subject to abuse or permanent exposure to the elements.

.2 Do not apply on frozen ground.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturer

.1 W. R. MEADOWS OF CANADA, 70 Hannant Court, Milton, Ontario

.2 Approved Alternate: Stego Industries ‘Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier’

2.2 Materials

.1 Plastic Vapour Retarder

.1 PERMINATOR 10 mil by W. R. MEADOWS (or approved equal.: Vapour retarder membrane shall be manufactured from virgin polyolefin resins, and when tested according to all requirements of ASTM E1745, shall meet the following minimum performance requirements:

.1 Maximum Water Vapour Permeance (ASTM E154 Sections 7, 8, 11, 12, 13, by ASTM E96, Method B or ASTM F1249).

.2 As received: 0.0183 perms.

.3 After Wetting and Drying: 0.0210 perms.

.4 Resistance to Plastic Flow and Temperature: 0.0197 perms.

.5 Effect Low Temperature and Flexibility: 0.0212 perms.

.6 Resistance to Deterioration from Organisms and Substances in Contacting Soil: 0.0198 perms.

.2 Puncture Resistance (ASTM D1709): 4,394 grams.

.3 Tensile Strength ASTM E154, Section 9: 52 Lb. Force/Inch.

2.3 Accessories

.1 Seam Tape

.1 High Density Polyethylene Tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Minimum width 4” (100 mm).

.1 Perminator Tape by W.R. Meadows.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Surface Preparation

.1 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Level, tamp, or roll earth or granular material beneath the slab base.

3.2 Examination

.1 Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not begin surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected



3.3 Application

.1 Install the vapour retarder membrane in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM E 1643–98.

.2 Unroll vapour retarder with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the pour.

.3 Lap vapour retarder over footings and seal to foundation walls.

.4 Overlap joints 152mm (6”) and seal with manufacturer’s tape.

.5 Seal all penetrations (including pipes) with manufacturer’s pipe boot.

.6 No penetration of the vapour retarder is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities.

.7 Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapour barrier, overlapping damaged area152mm (6”) and taping all four sides with tape.


Asphalt Shingles Section 07 31 13 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work

.1 Metal Flashing and Trim Section 07620

1.2 References

.1 CSA A123.1 – (M1979) Asphalt Shingles surfaced with Mineral Granules.

.2 CSA A123.3 – (M1979) Asphalt or Tar Saturated Roofing.

.3 CAN 3-A123.51-(M85) Asphalt Shingle Application on roof slopes 1:3 and steeper.

1.3 Samples

.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 34 00 - Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups.

.2 Submit duplicate samples of full size specified shingles.


.1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with section 01 73 10 – Maintenance Materials, Special Tools and Spare Parts.

1.5 Storage and Handling

.1 Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage.

.2 Remove only in quantities required for same day use.

1.6 Unused Materials

.1 All unused shingles remain property of owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Asphalt shingles: to CSA.1 A123.1

.1 IK0 Cambridge colour: By Architect.

.2 25 Year shingles to ASTM D3018, ASTM D3462, ASTM E108 Class A

.1 length = 1 038 mm x 349 mm (40 7/8" x 13 3/4")

.2 Exposure = 149 mm (5 7/8")

.3 Coverage per bundle = 3.1 m² (33.3 sq. ft.)

.2 Roofing felt: to CSA A 123.3 (organic felt No. 15)

.3 Aluminum drip edge: Pre-finished aluminum to match fascia.

.4 Nails: to CSA B111, of (galvanized steel) sufficient length to penetrate 19mm into deck.

.5 Underlayment: IKO Stormtite® synthetic underlayment is engineered to be used under asphalt shingles. And it has qualified as an IKO’s PRO4 Roofing Component. It is a cost-effective alternative to traditional #15 asphalt saturated felt, and is covered by a limited 15-year material warranty¹.

.6 Ice and water protector: IKO Armour guard ice and water protector.

.1 .5.2 Roll weight (approx.) 75 lb.



.2 Roll size 36” x 65’

.3 Roll contents 195 Sq. Ft.

.4 Nominal Thickness 50-60 mil

.5 Coating Compound Polymer Modified Bitumen

.6 Reinforcement Glass fiber mat

.7 Static Roof Vents: Master Flow # SSB96DA-10” round with 18” x 20 ½” base dimension. Colour to match shingle (submit sample)

.8 Roof vent flashing: prefabricated rubber boots to suit pipe size and slope of roof. Supply complete with all fasteners and sealant.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Application

.1 Do asphalt shingle work in accordance with CAN3-A123.51, CAN3-A123.52, NBC, CRCA specification.

.2 Install drip edge along eaves, overhanging 12mm, with minimum 50mm flange extending onto roof decking. Nail to deck at 400mm o.c.

.3 Install bottom step flashing (soaker base flashing) interleafed between shingles at vertical junctions.

.4 Install asphalt shingles on roof slopes 1:3 and steeper in accordance with CAN3-A123.51

.5 Eaves Protection

.1 Application

.1 For ice dam protection install an eave flashing to cover the roof deck from the eave to at least 24” beyond the inside wall line, or at least 36” from the eave whichever is greater. For superior protection use (a) ArmourGard Ice and Water Protector applied with 3” headlap and 6” end laps, Two (2) layers (or 6’-0” eave protection required).

.2 Installation

.1 Cut the membrane into 3m to 4.5m (10ft. to 15ft. lengths.

.2 Unroll and align with to lower edge of roof. Tack top edge with four equally-spaced temporary fasteners.

.3 Lift the lower half and remove the lower release film, exposing the adhesive surface.

.4 Carefully reposition the membrane down onto the deck and press firmly in place. Avoid wrinkles. Remove temporary fasteners.

.5 Fold top half down and remove release film.

.6 Carefully reposition the membrane up onto the deck and press firmly in place. Avoid wrinkles.

.1 If two courses are required, the top course should overlap the selvage tape on the lower course.

.2 End laps must be at least 15cm (6”) and rolled to ensure adhesion and should be located at least 51 cm (24”) from those in previous course.

.3 Apply each course carefully.



.4 Best suited for low sloped roof areas. Cover entire area with ArmourGard Ice and Water Protector, lapped as outlined above, and then shingle as per normal shingle exposures.

.3 Underlayment

.1 The roof deck must be swept clean and be smooth and dry before installation starts.

.2 2. IKO synthetic underlayments should be unrolled and laid flat to the roof deck, horizontally (parallel to eave), starting at the bottom of the roof (overlapping the eave protection by at least 4”) with the printed side up.

.3 3. There should be minimum, 4 inch side laps and 6 inch end laps.

.4 4. IKO synthetic underlayments are attached to the roof with roofing nails or staples having 1 inch diameter plastic/metal caps. Fasten with enough fasteners to safely hold the underlayment in place until shingle application. Additional fastening should be considered if shingle application will not take place soon thereafter. Typically fasteners should be spaced at approximately 8 inch on center on both side and end laps in normal wind zones. In high wind zones or coastal areas, fastening spacing may need to be doubled to 4 inches on center; check local building codes.

.5 5. In all cases, fasten at approximately 24 inches on center down the middle of the roll in the field of the roof.

.6 Install roof vents in locations as outlined on drawings. Flash and caulk as per manufacturer’s specifications.


Wood Siding Section 07 46 23 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Sheathing paper.

.2 Flat board Resin surfaced siding for walls.

.3 Solid Cedar Siding on interior walls.

.4 Related trim, flashings, accessories, and fastenings.


.1 Section 06 11 00 - Wood Framing: Sheathing paper.

.2 Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry: Exterior wood trim at windows.

.3 Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Sealant at perimeter, openings and dissimilar materials.

.4 Section 07 62 00 – Metal Siding, Flashing and Trim

1.3 References

.1 NPA A208.1-2009 - Particleboard.

.2 [ASTM D226/D226M-09 - Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing.]

.3 [CSA-A123.3-05 (R2010) - Asphalt Saturated Organic Roofing Felt.]

.4 [CAN/CSA-O80 Series-08 (R2012) - Wood Preservation.]

.5 [CANPLY (Canadian Plywood Association) - Canadian Plywood Handbook.]

.6 [APA (The Engineered Wood Association).]

.7 [NLGA (National Lumber Grades Authority) - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, 2010 edition.]

.8 [RIS (Redwood Inspection Service) - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber.]

.9 [WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Standard 17 - Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber - 2004.]

.10 [WWPA - Western Wood Products Association.]

1.4 Submittals for Review


.2 Product Data: Provide data indicating materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details, sizes, surface texture, finishes and accessories.

.3 Samples: Submit two (2) samples, <300 x 300 mm><<12 x 12 inch>> in size illustrating surface texture.

1.5 Submittals for Information


.2 Installation Data: Manufacturer's special installation requirements.




.1 Grade materials in accordance with the following:



.1 Lumber Grading: Certified by [NLGA] [WCLIB] [WWPA] [RIS].

.2 Plywood Grading: Certified by [CANPLY] [APA].

.3 Maintain one (1) copy of document on site.

1.8 Delivery, Storage, And Protection

.1 Section 01 61 00: Transport, handle, store, and protect products.

.2 Store in ventilated areas with constant minimum temperature of <16 degrees C><<60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55%.

1.9 Warranty

.1 Section 01 78 10: Warranties.

.2 Provide a [five (5)] year warranty to include coverage for failure to meet specified requirements.

.3 Warranty: Include degradation of colour or deterioration of finish

25-year limited warranty against peeling, separating and chipping • 15-year limited warranty on the finish • 5-year, 100% labour and replacement warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

.1 CanExel; Product: Ridgewood D-5 Dutch Lap Siding. Or approved equal

.2 Solid Clear Cedar (Interior application): 19mm thick x 127mm with Dutch lap

2.2 Materials

.1 Cedar Lumber: Western Red Clear Cedar, to [WCLIB] Standard Grading Rules.

2.3 Accessories

.1 Nails: Aluminum type; non-staining, of size and strength to securely and rigidly retain the work prefinished to match siding finish.

.2 Building Paper: Spun bonded polyolefin sheeting

.3 Flashing: Glavanized steel, 0.4 mm thick><<28 gauge thick.

.4 Prime Paint: [Latex] base primer enamel.

2.4 Fabrication - Board Siding

.1 Board Size (Canexel): 11 mm thick, 300 mm high nominal board

.2 Board Profile: Dutch Lap

.3 Surface Texture: Prefinished.

2.5 Fabrication - Board Siding

.1 Board Size (Clear cedar): 19 mm thick, 150 mm high nominal board

.2 Board Profile: Dutch Lap

.3 Surface Texture: Sanded Natural.

2.6 Finishes

.1 Pre-finish Colour: Type, colour to be selected.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination



.1 Section 01 70 00: Verify existing conditions before starting work.

.2 Verify that framing, substrate surfaces and wall openings are ready to receive work.

3.2 Installation - Siding

.1 Install siding and batten strips to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.3 Installation - Board Siding

.1 Install board siding using single course method.

.2 Nail at 300 mm (12 inches) on centre. Fasten siding in place level and plumb. Blind nail except trim. Nail to aligned pattern.

.3 Mitre horizontal joints tight at 45 degrees. Mitre external and cope internal corners.

.4 Install siding for natural shed of water.

.5 Position cut ends over bearing surfaces. Sand cut edges smooth and clean.

.6 Install corner strips, closures, trim.

.7 Install metal flashings at internal and external corners, sills and head of wall openings.

.8 Touch-up prefinished paint surfaces that are disfigured. Unsightly touch-up will require removal and replacement of affected siding.

3.4 Erection Tolerances

.1 Section 01 73 00: Tolerances.

.2 Maximum Variation From Level: 6 mm in 3 m.

.3 Maximum Offset From Joint Alignment: 1.6 mm.

3.5 Preparation For Site Finishing

.1 Sand work smooth and set exposed nails [and screws].

.2 Site Finishing: Specified in Section 09 91 10.

3.6 Schedules

.1 South Wall Sheet, Ship lapped: Site Painted Edges.

.2 South Entry (Accent) Sheet, Striated: Site Painted.

.3 Other Walls Board, Ship lapped: Pre-finished, White.


TPO Membrane Roofing Section 07 54 00 Page 1 of 9


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work

.1 Section 00 72 13 – General Conditions

.2 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedure

.3 Section 01 40 00 – Quality Requirements

.4 Section 06 10 00 – Rough and Finish Carpentry

.5 Section 07 92 00 – Sealants

1.2 Reference Standards

.1 Referenced Standards: These standards form part of this specification only to the extent they are referenced as specification requirements.

.2 ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2004.

.3 ASTM C 1549 - Standard Test Method for Determination of Solar Reflectance Near Ambient Temperature Using a Portable Solar Reflectometer; 2004.

.4 ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics; 2003.

.5 ASTM D 1004 - Standard Test Method for Initial Tear Resistance of Plastic Film and Sheeting; 2003.

.6 ASTM D 1079 - Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing, and Bituminous Materials; 2005a.

.7 ASTM D 6878 - Standard Specification for Thermoplastic Polyolefin Based Sheet Roofing; 2003.

.8 CAN-ULC-S770 - Standard Test Method Determination of L-Term Thermal Resistance Of Closed-Cell Thermal Insulating Foams; 2003.

.9 PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; 1995.

.10 PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2005.

1.3 Summary

.1 Furnish and install elastomeric sheet roofing system on canopies, including:

.1 Roofing manufacturer's requirements for the specified warranty.

.2 Preparation of roofing substrates.

.3 Wood nailers for roofing attachment.

.4 Insulation.

.5 Vapor retarder / air barrier.

.6 Supply, forming and installation of metal coping, metal roof edging and base flashings, and downspouts.

.7 Flashings.

.8 Other roofing-related items specified or indicated on the drawings or otherwise necessary to provide a complete weatherproof roofing system.

.9 New roof drains, sumps and storm drainage, roof specialty flashings etc.

.10 Sealants



.2 Disposal of demolition debris and construction waste is the responsibility of Contractor. Perform disposal in manner complying with all applicable provincial, and local regulations.

.3 Comply with the published recommendations and instructions of the roofing membrane manufacturer, at http://manual.fsbp.ca.

.4 Commencement of work by the Contractor shall constitute acknowledgement by the Contractor that this specification can be satisfactorily executed, under the project conditions and with all necessary prerequisites for warranty acceptance by roofing membrane manufacturer. No modification of the Contract Sum will be made for failure to adequately examine the Contract Documents or the project conditions.

1.4 Definitions

.1 Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definition of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in the section.

.2 LTTR: Long Term Thermal Resistance, as defined by CAN-ULC S770.

1.5 Submittals


.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Shop drawings shall be approved and assigned a number by the membrane manufacturer.

.2 Shop drawings shall include: Outline of roof and roof size, location and type of all penetrations, perimeter and penetration details, special details, location of fastening bars and a Bill of Materials and any other data required by the manufacturer.


.1 Provide membrane manufacturer's printed data sufficient to show that all components of roofing system, including insulation and fasteners, comply with the specified requirements and with the membrane manufacturer's requirements and recommendations for the system type specified; include data for each product used in conjunction with roofing membrane.

.1 Technical data sheet for roof membrane.

.2 Technical data sheet for each insulation type.

.2 Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturer's instructions to installer, marked up to show exactly how all components will be installed; where instructions allow installation options, clearly indicate which option will be used.

.4 Samples: Submit samples of each product to be used.

.1 Sample of roof membrane.

.5 Installer Qualifications:

.1 Letter from manufacturer attesting that the roofing installer meets the specified qualifications.


.1 Roofing Contractor must be certified and approved by system manufacturer, and able to provide warranty as specified.



.2 All related products and materials shall be tested and approved for warranty by the Manufacturer, including but not limited to: bonding adhesive, splicing cement, membrane cleaner, lap sealant, primer, adhesives, Securtape, cured flashing, pressure sensitive flashing, RUSS, fasteners and plates.

.3 All work shall be carried out in accordance with Manufacturer’s Recommendations, and contract specifications. Work that exceeds Manufacturer’s Recommendations shall be carried out as detailed in these specifications.

1.7 Manufacturer's Representative

.1 The roofing product manufacturer can delegate a representative to visit the work site at the start of roofing installation.

.2 The contractor must at all times enable and facilitate access to the work site by said representative.

1.8 Pre-Installation Meeting

.1 Hold a pre-installation meeting prior to start of waterproofing works, with the roofing contractor's representative, the manufacturer and the owner. The purpose of this meeting is to review particular installation conditions to each project. Prepare a report after this meeting.

1.9 Storage and Delivery

.1 Co-ordinate delivery of materials with approved construction schedules using locations as approved by Owner’s Representative and facility staff.

.2 Store materials in an upright position, off the ground, and protected from the weather using tarps.

.3 Do not overload any areas of the existing roof structure beyond their design limits.

.4 Materials shall be fenced off or secured; the Owner shall not be held liable for any theft or vandalism to materials stored on the site.

.5 Roof replacement may not begin until all roof components, membrane and accessories are on site.

1.10 Warranty

.1 Comply with all warranty procedures required by manufacturer, including notifications, scheduling, and inspections.

.2 The contractor will provide a warranty for this project, valid for a period of two (2) years covering labour, materials and workmanship for entire area of roofing project.

.3 Membrane Manufacturer Warranty: 20 year Warranty covering membrane, roof insulation, and membrane accessories.

.1 Limit of Liability: No dollar limitation.

.2 Scope of Coverage: Repair leaks in the roofing system caused by

.1 Ordinary wear and tear of the elements.

.2 Manufacturing defect

.3 Defective workmanship used to install these materials.

.4 Damage due to winds up to 55 mph (88 km/h).

.3 Not Covered:

.1 Damage due to winds in excess of 55 mph (88 km/h).

.2 Damage due to hurricanes or tornadoes.



.3 Hail.

.4 Intentional damage.

.5 Unintentional damage due to normal rooftop inspections, maintenance, or service.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactures

.1 Acceptable Manufacturer - Roofing System: Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.1 Roofing systems manufactured by others are acceptable provided the roofing system is completely equivalent in materials and warranty conditions and the manufacturer meets the following qualifications:

.1 Specializing in manufacturing the roofing system to be provided.

.2 Minimum ten years of experience manufacturing the roofing system to be provided.

.3 ISO 9002 certified.

.4 CCMC13274L

.2 Manufacturer of Insulation and Cover Boards: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.

.3 Manufacturer of Metal Roof Edging: Same manufacturer as roof membrane.

.1 Field- or shop-fabricated metal roof edgings are acceptable same as roofing manufacturer.

2.2 Roofing System Description

.1 Roofing System:

.1 Membrane: Thermoplastic olefin (TPO).

.2 Thickness: As specified elsewhere.

.3 Comply with applicable local building code requirements.

.4 Provide assembly having Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Class A Fire Hazard Classification.

.2 Vapor Retarder Under Base Layer of Insulation:

.1 One Layer: Carlisle TR 725 Self Adhering Air and Vapour Barrier.

.2 Carlisle CCW 702 primer or CAV-GRIP primer per Manufacturer’s recommendation.

.3 Insulation:

.1 Total RSI value: Typical roofing assemblies to maintain R10. .

.2 Maximum Board Thickness: 1 inches (25 mm);

.3 Base Layer: Polyisocyanurate foam board, non-composite.

.1 Attachment: Loose laid, no attachment.

.4 Top Layer: ½” fiberboard

.4 Crickets: Tapered insulation of same type as specified for top layer; slope as indicated.

2.3 TPO Membrane Material



.1 Membrane: Flexible, heat weldable sheet composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber; complying with ASTM D 6878, with polyester weft inserted reinforcement and the following additional characteristics:

.1 Thickness: 0.045 inch (1.15 mm) plus/minus 10 percent, with coating thickness over reinforcement of 0.024 inch (0.61 mm) plus/minus 10 percent.

.2 Puncture Resistance: 265 lbf (1174 N), minimum, when tested in accordance FTM 101C Method 2031.

.3 Solar Reflectance: 0.79, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1549.

.4 Color: Grey.

.5 Acceptable Product: Sure-Weld by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.2 Membrane Fasteners: Type and size as required by roof membrane manufacturer for roofing system and warranty to be provided; use only fasteners furnished by roof membrane manufacturer.

.3 Curb and Parapet Flashing: Same material as membrane, with encapsulated edge which eliminates need for seam sealing the flashing-to-roof splice; precut to 18 inches (457 mm) wide.

.4 Formable Flashing: Non-reinforced, flexible, heat weldable sheet, composed of thermoplastic polyolefin polymer and ethylene propylene rubber.

.1 Thickness: 0.060 inch (1.52 mm) plus/minus 10 percent.

.2 Tensile Strength: 1550 psi (10.7 MPa), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638 after heat aging.

.3 Elongation at Break: 650 percent, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 638 after heat aging.

.4 Tearing Strength: 12 lbf (53 N), minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1004 after heat aging.

.5 Color: Grey.

.6 Acceptable Product: Flashing by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.5 Tape Flashing: 5-1/2 inch (140 mm) nominal wide TPO membrane laminated to cured rubber polymer seaming tape, overall thickness 0.065 inch (1.6 mm) nominal; TPO Flashing by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.6 Bonding Adhesive: Neoprene and SBR rubber blend, formulated for compatibility with the membrane other substrate materials, including masonry, wood, and insulation facings; Bonding Adhesive by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.7 Pourable Sealer: Two-part polyurethane, two-color for reliable mixing; Pourable Sealer by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.8 Seam Plates: Steel with barbs and Galvalume coating; corrosion-resistance complying with FM 4470.

.9 Termination Bars: Aluminum bars with integral caulk ledge; 1.3 inches (33 mm) wide by 0.10 inch (2.5 mm) thick; by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.10 Cut Edge Sealant: Synthetic rubber-based, for use where membrane reinforcement is exposed; by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.11 General Purpose Sealant: EPDM-based, one part, white general purpose sealant; by Carlisle or architect approved equal.



.12 Coated Metal Flashing and Edgings: Galvanized steel with roofing manufacturer's bonded TPO coating; by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

.13 Molded Flashing Accessories: Unreinforced TPO membrane pre-molded to suit a variety of flashing details, including pipe boots, inside corners, outside corners, etc.; by Carlisle or architect approved equal.

2.4 Vapor Retarder Materials

.1 Self Adhering Air and Vapour Barrier approved by the membrane manufacturer.

.2 Adhesive: As recommended by roofing membrane manufacturer.

2.5 Metal Accessories

.1 Parapet Copings: Formed metal coping with galvanized steel anchor/support cleats for capping any parapet wall; watertight, maintenance free, without exposed fasteners; butt type joints with concealed splice plates; mechanically fastened as indicated.

.1 Material and Finish: 24 gage, 0.024 inch (0.06 mm) thick galvanized steel with Kynar 500 finish in colour to match specified steel flashing in section 07 46 19. Provide matching concealed joint splice plates and factory-installed protective plastic film.

.2 Dimensions:

.1 Wall Width: As indicated on the drawings.

.2 Piece Length: Minimum 144 inches (3650 mm)

2.6 Drains and Accessory Materials

.1 Wood Nailers: PS 20 dimension lumber, Structural Grade No. 2 or better Southern Pine, Douglas Fir; or PS 1, APA Exterior Grade plywood; pressure preservative treated.

.1 Width: 3-1/2 inches (90 mm), nominal minimum, or as wide as the nailing flange of the roof accessory to be attached to it.

.2 Thickness: Same as thickness of roof insulation.

.2 Roof drains or scuppers supplied and installed by roofing contractor shall consist of Platinum Cast Aluminum Flip Top Dome, with recessed flange. Outlet size shall be verified on site. Drain connections to be made with MJ connections on the underside of deck where possible, and super-seal where deck is not accessible. Provide drains for new roof and for existing roof to replace existing drains.

2.7 MEP Penetrations

.1 Roofing trade is responsible to coordinate with mechanical and electrical drawings for quantity and location of misc. penetrations.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 Surface Examination and Preparation

.1 Examine job conditions before commencement of work. Commencement of work will denote acceptance of existing conditions unless the owner has been notified in writing of unacceptable conditions prior to commencement.

.2 Upon removal of the entire roof system, examine existing metal deck and wood blocking. Any deficiencies in the decking or wood blocking are to be reported to the owner immediately. No work is to proceed until these deficiencies have been resolved.



.3 All redundant openings shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner, using 18 gauge flat steel with a minimum 6” overlap onto existing decking, and secured.

.4 Areas of the metal deck with corrosion shall be brushed, primed and painted with a rust inhibitor paint prior to application of roofing system, to the satisfaction of the Owner, including all shrouds at projections.

.5 Immediately before roofing materials are applied, clean decks of roughness, rubbish, dust, dirt, oil, grease, snow and ice.

3.2 Equipment For Work Execution

.1 Maintain all roofing equipment and tools in good working order.

.2 Use only torches recommended by membrane manufacturer where applicable.

3.3 Installation of Vapour Retarder

.1 Ensure substrate is clean, dry and free of contaminants prior to unrolling vapour retarder.

.2 Apply primer to clean and dry substrate prior to adhering one ply self-adhering vapor barrier, parallel with metal deck flutes as specified, using metal strips at end laps to prevent vapor barrier falling into deck flutes.

.3 Beginning at the bottom of the slope, without adhering the membrane, unroll onto the substrate for alignment. Do not immediately remove the silicone release sheet.

.4 Align the roll parallel to the corrugations of the steel deck. Make sure the membrane overlaps are supported along their entire length.

.5 Peel back one end of the silicone release sheet and adhere this part of the membrane to the substrate. Peel back the remaining release sheet at a 45º angle to avoid wrinkles in the membrane.

.6 If the membrane is not properly aligned, do not try to adjust it. Instead, cut the roll and start again, making sure that it is properly aligned and that it overlaps the end of the misaligned piece by 150 mm.

.7 Overlap adjacent membranes by 75 mm. Overlap end laps by 150 mm. Stagger end laps by at least 300 mm.

.8 Ensure adequate adhesion is achieved, with side and end laps as required. Carry self-adhering membrane up vertical surfaces to top of insulation at perimeter and all vertical projections.

3.4 Insulation Installation

.1 Install insulation in configuration and with attachment method(s) specified in PART 2, under Roofing System.

.2 Install insulation in a manner that will not compromise the vapor retarder integrity.

.3 Install only as much insulation as can be covered with the completed roofing system before the end of the day's work or before the onset of inclement weather.

.4 Lay roof insulation in courses parallel to roof edges.

.5 Neatly and tightly fit insulation to all penetrations, projections, and nailers, with gaps not greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm). Fill gaps greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm) with acceptable insulation. Do not leave the roofing membrane unsupported over a space greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.5 Elastomeric Membrane Installation



.1 Beginning at low point of roof, place membrane without stretching over substrate and allow to relax at least 30 minutes before attachment or splicing; in colder weather allow for longer relax time.

.2 Lay out the membrane pieces so that field and flashing splices are installed to shed water.

.3 Install membrane without wrinkles and without gaps or fishmouths in seams; bond and test seams and laps in accordance with membrane manufacturer's instructions and details.

.4 Install membrane mechanically attached to the substrate using plates and screws in the seams with supplemental adhesive at perimeter areas and edge securement as specified.

.5 Plates in Seam: Install HD Plates and screws continuously within the side seams, covered by membrane lap

.1 Lay out fasteners as recommended by membrane manufacturer.

.6 Edge Securement: Secure membrane at all locations where membrane terminates or goes through an angle change greater than 2 in 12 inches (1:6 ) using mechanically fastened reinforced perimeter fastening strips, plates, or metal edging as indicated or as recommended by roofing manufacturer.

.1 Exceptions: Round pipe penetrations less than 18 inches (460 mm) in diameter and square penetrations less than 4 inches (200 mm) square.

.2 Metal edging is not merely decorative; ensure anchorage of membrane as intended by roofing manufacturer.

3.6 Sheet Metal

.1 After the installation of the roof membrane and membrane flashings, new perimeter metal cap and counter flashings shall be installed. Cap flashing shall be secured using a continuous hook strip.

.2 Metal flashings and hook strips shall be fabricated from 8000 series 24 gauge prefinished steel, using maximum 10ft lengths.

.3 Where metal seams are caulked, the color is to match the metal to which it is being applied. All neoprene fasteners shall match the color of the metal flashing. Fasteners shall be applied to inside face of parapet wall only.

.4 Cap and counter flashings shall have a double S locked joint.

.5 Provide mock up sample for owner’s approval prior to installation of metal flashing.

3.7 Plumbing and Drainage

.1 Contractor is responsible for verifying that all drains are clear of debris and free flowing. Any blockages are to be reported prior to the start of work. Once work has begun, the Contractor assumes responsibility for free flowing drains and cost associated with clearing.

.2 Prior to the installation of new insulation and membrane, the contractor is to ensure that all drains are located at a height where the roof is able to clear the majority of roof top water caused by rainfall within a 72 hour period.

.3 All plumbing to be executed in accordance with relevant Provincial Building Codes and Local Building Codes.

.4 Wood blocking shall be secured thru deck, prime drain flange, apply target patch, water cut-off mastic, 6” taped seams and lap sealant as required.

.5 Drain connections to rain water leader shall be made with MJ connections where possible, and super-seal where deck is not accessible from the underside.

3.8 Miscellaneous



.1 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify that all existing conditions and roof system components are accurately reported in these specifications.

.2 If hazardous materials are encountered during the roofing work that require special handling and incur additional cost, it shall be an addition to the contract cost.

.3 All details specified by this Scope of Work constitute acceptable installations. Any deviation from these specifications must first be approved by the Owner’s Representative, prior to any installation.

.4 All reasonable precautionary measures will be undertaken. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure minimal dust and debris contamination of the interior and exterior of the work site.

.5 At the end of each day’s work, remove all loose debris from the work areas and dispose of accordingly. Drag a magnetic bar across the grounds to ensure the removal of all discarded fasteners and sharp metal debris.

.6 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to disconnect, lift and reconnect all ventilation, mechanical and rooftop units.

.7 If the removal of any exhaust vents or equipment results with an opening in the deck that cannot be permanently sealed that day, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing overnight security to the building by a company approved by the Owner.

.8 It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that no attachments (wiring, lighting, etc.) are attached to the underside of any deck that is to be removed. The contractor shall notify a representative of the Owner, who will then disconnect any such services, if necessary.

.9 All existing gas lines are to be painted yellow, with new gas line supports installed at a maximum spacing of 10ft.

.10 Install new concrete pavers over top 1” extruded polystyrene at roof hatch and create pathway to all HVAC units as indicated on drawing. Leave space between pavers for drainage.

.11 Security fencing shall be provided at all times for equipment and material stored at ground level.

.12 Cover all roof materials properly with suitable tarps to prevent exposure to moisture and sunlight. Manufacturer’s packaging does not constitute adequate tarping and protection. All roof materials are to be stored off the ground on suitable wood pallets.


Metal Siding, Flashing and Trim Section 07 62 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Eave Fascia

.2 Eave trough

.3 Rain water leaders and splash pads

.4 All miscellaneous flashing as indicated on drawings

.5 Steel siding and soffit wall cladding profiles

.6 Scupper at Canopies.

1.2 Related Work

.1 Masonry, Cavity Wall Insulation and Air Barrier Section 04 00 00

.2 Asphalt Shingles Section 07 31 13

.3 Painting and Finishing Section 09 91 00

1.3 References

.1 CSA B111-1974 Wire Nails, Spikes and staples

.2 CAN/CGSB-93.1 (M85) Sheet, Aluminum Alloy, pre-finished, residential

.3 Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes – 1980

.4 Aluminum Association Aluminum Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction-1971

1.4 Samples

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with section 01 33 00, shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups.

.2 Submit duplicate (50 x 50mm) samples of each type of sheet metal material, colour and finish.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Prefinished Aluminum Sheet

.1 Finish: factory applied coating to CAN/CGSB-93.1 supplemented and amended as follows:

.1 Thickness – eaves trough = .023, fascia = .019, rainwater leader = .019, misc. trim=.019

.2 Colour – Selected by Architect

.3 Submit all colour samples for approval. Colour to match existing.

2.2 Accessories

.1 Plastic cement: to CGSB 37-GP-5Ma.

.2 Underlay for metal flashing: dry sheathing to CAN/CGSB-51.32, asphalt laminated 3.6 to 4.5 kg kraft paper, No. 15 perforated asphalt felt to CSA A123.3.

.3 Fasteners: of same material as sheet metal, to CSA B111, nails of length and thickness suitable for metal flashing application.

.4 Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packing.

.5 Touch up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer.



2.3 Fabrication

.1 Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work (in accordance with applicable CRCA ‘FL’ series details as indicated.

.2 Fabricate aluminum flashings and other sheet aluminum work in accordance with Aluminum Association Sheet Metal Work in Building Construction.

.3 Form pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. Make allowance for expansion at joints.

.4 Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm. Mitre and seal corners with sealant.

.5 Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.

.6 Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.

2.4 Metal Flashings

.1 Form flashings, copings and fascias to profiles indicated of .019” thick prefinished aluminum.

2.5 Eaves Troughs

.1 Form eaves troughs from prefinished aluminum sheet - .023 thickness.

.2 Size and profile: standard 5”

.3 Provide goosenecks, outlets, strainer baskets and necessary fastenings.

2.6 Downspouts

.1 Form downspouts from prefinished aluminum sheet .019.

.2 Sizes and profile standard 3” x 3”.

.3 Provide necessary fastenings.

.4 Provide deflector at base of downspout onto splash pad.

2.7 Splash Pad

.1 Standard concrete splash pad.

2.8 Scupper at Entrance Canopy

.1 Form to connect to roof drains.

.2 Prefinished aluminum sheet .023 thickness minimum.

2.9 Steel Cladding

.1 Fabricated from ASTM A653M structural quality Grade 230 galvanized steel, with Z275 zinc coating as designated by ASTM A643M:

.1 MS – 1- Acceptable product: VIC WEST Tradition 100 Standing Seam Siding

.1 Location: Vertical Wall Application.

.2 Thickness: 24 Ga.

.3 Colour: To be selected by architect.

.2 MS – 2- Acceptable product: Buchner Tripple 3 soffit vented and solid

.1 Location: Soffits.

.2 Thickness: 0.018 guage.

.3 Panel size: 16” (400mm)

.4 Colour: To be selected by architect



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation.

.2 Lock end joints and caulk with sealant.

.3 Install pans, where shown around items projecting through roof membrane.

3.2 Eaves Troughs and Downpipe

.1 Install eaves troughs and secure to building at 32 o.c. with eaves trough hangers. Slope eaves troughs to downpipes as indicated. Seal joints watertight.

.2 Install downpipes and provide goosenecks back to wall. Secure downpipes to wall with straps at 6’-0” oc; minimum two straps per downpipe.

.3 Install splash pads as indicated.


Firestopping Section 07 84 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Related Work

.1 Fire stopping and smoke seals within mechanical assemblies (i.e. inside ducts, dampers) and electrical assemblies (i.e. inside cable trays) are specified in Division 22 and 26 respectively.

.2


.4 Section 07 92 00 – Sealants

.5 Section 06 10 00 – Rough and Finish carpentry

1.2 References

.1 CAN/ULC-S115-2018, Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.

1.3 Submittals



.1 Submit manufacturer’s current product data sheets for materials and prefabrication devices, providing descriptions that are sufficient for identification at job site. Include manufacturer’s printed instructions for installation.

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 Materials

.1 Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-2018.

.1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN/ULC-S115-2018 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended and conforming to special requirements specified in 3.5.

.2 Firestop system rating: equal to assembly location. Refer to code compliance plan for required fire resistance rating.

.2 Service penetration assemblies: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-2018 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.

.3 Service penetration firestop components: certified by ULC in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115-2018 and listed in ULC Guide No. 40 U19.13 and ULC Guide No. 40 U19.15 under the Label Service of ULC.

.4 Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping equal to assembly location.

.5 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings intended for ease of re-entry such as cables: elastomeric seal.

.6 Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal.

.7 Fire stopping and seal at top of all walls to metal deck including exterior wall conditions.

.8 Primers: to manufacturer’s recommendation for specific material, substrate and end use.

.9 Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances.



.10 Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer’s recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

.11 Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.

2.2 Acceptable Materials

.1 Firebarrier distributed by Double A/D Distributors Ltd.

.2 Fire-Bloc by M.W. McGill Associates Ltd.

.3 Dow Corning Corporation, Fire Stop Foam, Fire Stop Sealant, Silicone RTV Foam.

.4 Tremco Fire and Smoke Containment Systems.

.5 Thermal Ceramics, Fire Master Systems.

.6 Top of wall to metal deck: Hilti CP 672 Fire Stop Joint Spray with CP767 speed insulation strips.

.7 Or Approved Alternate

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Preparation

.1 Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free.

.2 Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer’s instructions.

.3 Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption to vapour barrier.

.4 Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.

3.2 Installation

.1 Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC certification and manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained.

.3 Provide temporary forming as required and removed forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing.

.4 Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to a neat finish.

.5 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

3.3 Inspection

.1 Notify Architect when ready for inspection and prior to concealing or enclosing firestopping materials and service penetration assemblies.

3.4 Schedule

.1 Firestop and smoke seal at

.1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.2 Edge of floor slabs at curtain wall and metal stud framing.



.3 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.4 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions.

.5 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls.

.6 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs.

.7 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations.

.8 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations. Coordinate with Mechanical and Electrical trades

.9 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm: fire stopping to consist of bead of fire stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.

.10 Void space between flutes of metal deck where a fire rated partition butts it.

3.5 Clean Up

.1 Remove excess material and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application.

.2 Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.


Sealants Section 07 92 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 The work under this section of the Specifications shall include all labour, equipment and materials to complete all caulking indicated on the drawings and specified herein including but not limited to the following briefly described:

.1 Caulking includes, but is not limited to certain work as follows:

.1 Interior and exterior door frames - both sides.

.2 Around window and louvre openings - both sides.

.3 Other locations as noted on drawings or required to provide watertight installation.

.4 Masonry control joints.

.5 Along top of ceramic tile wall base.


.1 The following work will be performed under other sections:

.1 Sealants work in conjunction with prefinished metal flashing and exterior cladding work.

.2 Sealants work in connection with mechanical trades. Refer to Division 22.

1.3 Submittals


.2 Samples:

.1 Submit duplicate samples of each type of material and colour.


.1 Deliver and store material in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer’s seals and labels, intact. Protect from freezing, moisture, water and contact with ground or floor.

1.5 Environmental and Safety Requirements

.1 Conform to manufacturer’s recommended temperatures, relative humidity, and substrate moisture content for application and curing of sealants including special conditions governing use.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Sealants

.1 General:

.1 Colours: Sealant colours shall match colours of adjacent materials, as selected and approved by Consultant.

.1 Colours shall be custom colour.

.2 Comply with ASTM C920-18 and other requirements indicated for each liquid- applied chemically curing sealant, including those referencing ASTM C920-18 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses.

.3 Provide joint sealants, primer(s) and backings that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by joint sealant manufacturer based on proven test results and field experience



.4 For sealants to be applied to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM D1248-16 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Work.

.5 Sealant supplied shall not exude any material(s) which travels into adjacent materials, or travels onto surfaces of adjacent materials; causing damage, or attracting soiling, which becomes apparent during the service life of the building.

.2 Exterior sealants; joints in vertical surfaces:

.1 Sealant single-component, non-sag, neutral cure, medium modulus low dirt pick-up and non-bleed, 100% inorganic silicone sealant, in accordance with the following:

.1 Comply with:

.1 ASTM C920-18, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50.

.2 SWR Institute Sealant Validation Program.

.2 Acceptable Products:

.1 Dow Corning '756 SMS'.

.2 Momentive Silpruf NB SCS9000

.3 Interior Sealants:

.1 Interior sealant: at joints with painted gypsum board; non-movement joints: one-component paintable acrylic or polyurethane sealant in accordance with the following:

.1 Comply with:

.1 ASTM C834-17.

.2 CGSB 9-GP-5M 1984.

.2 Acceptable Products.

.1 BASF Building Systems ‘Sonolac'

.2 Sika 'Sikaflex 1A

.3 Tremco, Inc. ‘Trernflex 834'

.2 Interior sealant; at movement joints in vertical surfaces: one component organic sealant in accordance with the following:

.1 Comply with:

.1 ASTM C920-05, Type M or S, Grade NS, Class 25


.1 BASF Building Systems "Sonolastic NP 1"

.2 Sika "Sikaflex 15LM"

.3 Tremco, Inc "Dymonic"

.3 Interior sealant, mildew resistant one part silicone sealant in accordance with the following: Required at all showers and interior wet conditions.

.1 Comply with:

.1 STM C920-05, Type S, Grade NT, Class 25

.2 CAN/CGSB 19.22-M89.




.1 Momentive "Sanitary SCS1700 Sealant"

.2 Dow Corning "786"

.3 Tremco, Inc. "Tremsil 200"

2.2 Joint Cleaner

.1 Non-corrosive and non staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealants recommended by sealants manufacturer.

.2 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer.

2.3 Warranty

.1 For silicone sealants applied to porous substrates, provide Product non-stain sealant warranty for period of 20 years, against migrating, bleeding into, or staining abutting materials.

.2 For exterior exposed silicone sealants, provide 20 year Product material warranty.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Protection

.1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination.

3.2 Preparation of Joint Surfaces

.1 Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants.

.2 Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter which may impair work.

.3 Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coating unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.

.4 Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free.

.5 Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer’s directions.

3.3 Priming

.1 Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking.

.2 Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealants manufacturer’s instructions immediately prior to caulking.

3.4 Backup Material

.1 Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape, with approximately 30% compression.

3.5 Mixing

.1 Mix materials on strict accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions

3.6 Application

.1 Sealant

.1 Field Quality Control: Provide a field-adhesion testing in accordance with manufacturer's standard specifications.

.2 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.



.3 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat joint

.4 Apply sealant in continuous beads.

.5 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.

.6 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid.

.7 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities.

.8 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape.

.9 Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.

.2 Curing

.1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions

.2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place.

3.7 Cleanup

.1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately and leave work neat and clean.

.2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses.

.3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.


Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 11 13 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Conform to Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements as part of this Section.

1.2 Scope of Work:

.1 Supply all material, labour and equipment necessary for the installation of all steel doors and steel frames as indicated on the drawings and specified herein including the following briefly described:

.1 Hollow metal doors including temperature rise rated doors as indicated on door schedules.

.2 Pressed metal door, sidelight, and window frames.

.3 Coordination with installation of Hardware and Electrical Items.

1.3 Work Not Included:

.1 The following work will be performed by the applicable divisions.

.1 Glass and glazing: refer to Section 08 81 00 - Glazing.

.2 The supply of finish hardware: Refer to Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

.3 Installation of hollow metal doors and frames: refer to Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry and Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Board.

.4 Painting of doors and frames: refer to Section 09 91 00 - Painting.

1.4 References:

.1 ASTM A653/A653M-13 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.2 ASTM E90-09 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

.3 ASTM E413-10 - Classification for Rating of Sound Insulation.

.4 CAN/ULC-S104-10 - Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

.5 CAN/ULC-S105-09 - Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN/ULC-S104.

.6 CSA-W59-13 - Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).

.7 CSDMA (Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association)

.8 Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames, 2000.

.9 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Doors and Frame Products, 2009.

.10 NFPA 80 - Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives, 2013 Edition

.11 ULC-FR-14 - Fire Resistance Directory (2014 Edition).

.12 UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

1.5 Delivery, Storage & Protection:

.1 When site is ready for installation of doors and frames deliver material to site and provide storage facilities and protection against damage during and after installation.

1.6 Submittals




.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 This contractor shall prepare and submit five (5) copies of checked shop drawings of doors and frames to the Architect for review.

.2 Indicate each type of door, material, steel core thicknesses, mortises, reinforcements, location of exposed fasteners, openings (glazed, louvered, etc.), arrangement of hardware and fire rating.

.3 Indicate each type of frame, material, core thickness, mortises, and reinforcements, glazing stops, location of anchors and exposed fastenings and finishes.

1.7 Guarantee:

.1 All doors specified shall be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of three (3) years.

1.8 Examination:

.1 Examine work performed by preceding trades and notify the Architect in writing of any condition which may affect the work of this section. Commencement of work implies this Contractor's acceptance of all job conditions.

1.9 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

.1 Fire Rated Door and Frame Construction: Labelled and listed to CAN/ULC-S104.

.2 Fire Rated Door Construction: Rate of rise of 250 C degrees (450 F degrees) across door thickness.

.3 Installed Door and Frame Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated and OBC 3.1.8.17.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Pressed Metal Frames:

.1 All pressed metal door frames as shown on Door Schedule and detailed on drawings shall be manufactured to the Canadian Steel Door Manufacturer’s Association, (CSDMA) Canadian Manufacturing Specifications for Steel Doors and Frames, latest edition; except where specified otherwise.

.2 Manufacturers accepted by the Owner are S.W.Fleming Limited, Artek, Daybar Industries Limited and Baron Metal Industries.

.3 All frames shall be 16 ga; fully welded frames with throat openings to suit wall condition detailed, shipped set up and welded. Fabricate frames from wipe coat galvanized steel with minimum zinc coating of 0.25 ounces per square foot. A spreader bar shall be welded to bottom of each frame.

.4 Grind welded corners and joints to flat plane, fill with metallic paste filler and sand to a uniform smooth finish.

.5 Frames shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for all hardware. Strike and hinge reinforcing shall be protected by metal guard boxes. Door frames for all doors to receive mortise hinges to have extra strength or high frequency hinge reinforcement.

.6 NOTE: All door frames are to arrive on site with top hinge reinforcing being fully welded; spot welded top reinforcement is not acceptable, this will also apply to doors receiving mortise hinges. Template information will be sent to frame manufacturer by Hardware Supplier.

.7 Door frames shall have three rubber silencers for single doors, two per head of double doors, and be provided with jamb anchors of type for each condition detailed, three per jamb on welded frame installation to 2134mm (7'-0"), and one additional anchor per jamb for



doors up to 2438mm (8'-0") in height. For masonry walls, provide three anchors per jamb for doors up to 2134mm (7'-0") and one additional anchor per jamb for doors over 2134mm (7'-0") in height and 1016mm (3'-4") in width. In addition, each jamb shall be provided with a welded in base anchor for securing frames to floor slabs. Provide frames with throat openings to suit drywall/block and block partition thicknesses as detailed on the drawings.

.8 Frames to be provided with U.L.C. or Warnock Hersey labels to the fire ratings as listed in the Door Schedules. Labels to match only those as listed. Construct fire rated frames in accordance with CAN4-S105-1985 (R1992).

.9 Frame anchors shall be in accordance with fire tests for each rating as indicated in the Door Schedule.

.10 Where zinc coating has been removed due to welding or grinding, frames shall have those areas painted with shop applied zinc rich primer.

.11 Sidelight combination frames and borrowed light frames complete with glazing stops as detailed on the Drawings. Provide anchors for fixing at floor, where frames are indicated to extend to floor.

.12 Provide mortar boxes at all locations of recessed items such as strikes, card readers etc.

2.2 Hollow Metal Doors:

.1 Hollow metal doors as shown on the Door Schedule and detailed on the drawings shall be manufactured to the Canadian Steel Door Manufacturer's Association, (CSDMA) Canadian Manufacturing Specifications for Steel Doors and Frames, latest edition; except where specified otherwise.

.2 Doors shall be fabricated of wipe coat galvanized steel with a minimum zinc coating of 0.25 ounces per square foot. All exterior hollow metal doors, are to be 16 gauge reinforced with vertical steel, 20 gauge stiffening ribs at 150mm (6") centres with intermediate spaces filled with semi-rigid fibreglass insulation. Remaining doors to be 18 gauge with honeycomb core bonded to face sheets.

.3 Steel stiffened doors shall consist of stiffeners being welded to the face of the door skin being flush with no face seams and have fully welded edge seams ground smooth. Honeycomb core doors to have mechanically locked edge seams.

.4 Doors shall have a 3mm (1/8") bevel in 50mm {2") on hinge and lock side. Doors shall be of sizes as listed in the Door Schedule.

.5 All doors shall be reinforced, mortised, drilled and tapped for all hardware. Template information will be sent to the Door Manufacturer by Hardware Supplier.

.6 Doors shall be reinforced for surface mounted closers or holders where applicable.

.7 Doors for exterior openings shall be provided with galvanized steel top weather cap closures.

.8 Doors to be prepared with glass light configurations as detailed on the drawings. Reinforcement will be required around the entire perimeter of all door cutouts. Refer to Section 08 81 00 - Glazing, for glazing types and thicknesses.

.9 Where zinc coating has been removed due to welding or grinding, doors shall have those areas touched up with shop applied zinc rich primer.

.10 Doors to be provided with U.L.C. or Warnock Hersey labels to the fire ratings as listed in the Door Schedule. Labels to match only those as listed.

.11 Construct fire rated doors in accordance with CAN4-S104-1980 (R1985). (Refer to Door Schedule.)



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Hollow Metal Frames:

.1 Door frames shall be installed plumb in accordance with NAAMM-HMMA 840-07 , rigid and in true alignment. Securely brace all frames until built into walls.

.2 Secure base anchors on door and sidelight frames in metal assemblies with a minimum of two (2) powder actuated drive pins at each vertical jamb or frame member to concrete floor slabs.

.3 Prime Painting: All frames shall be degreased and all welds and bare carbon steel shop sprayed with metal primer paint.

.4 Hollow metal frames for doors and sidelights in fire rated assemblies shall be installed in strict accordance with NFPA 80 and with manufacturer's printed instructions, including the installation of all hardware. Underwriter's label to be installed on all fire resistive rated frames.

3.2 Doors:

.1 Doors shall be installed in accordance with NAAMM-HMMA 840-07in locations indicated on drawings complete with hardware. (Hardware - see Section 08 71 00 - Finish Hardware).

.2 Bevel stiles 3mm (1/8"). Allow 3mm (1/8") clearance at jambs and head of frame. A clearance of 19mm (3/4") shall be allowed between the bottom of the door and the finished floor. (Exclusive for floor covering). Fire rated doors shall have clearances in accordance with NFPA 80 – Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows.

.3 All doors will consist of 44mm (1 3/4") thickness unless otherwise detailed on the drawings.

.4 Prime Painting: All metal doors shall be degreased and all welds and bare carbon steel shop sprayed with metal primer paint.

.5 Fire doors shall be installed strictly in accordance with NFPA 80 and manufacturer's printed instructions including the installation of all hardware. Underwriters' label must be fastened to all fire doors.

3.3 Clean Up:

.1 The General Contractor will be responsible for removal of all sticker identification labels (except fire rating labels) and final cleaning of all glass to the approval of the Architect.

.2 The General Contractor will be responsible for removal of all construction dirt from doors and frames. Wherever paint chips exist, caused from construction, such will be made good to the approval of the Architect.

.3 If and where paint is located on the finish hardware, such will be removed to the approval of the Architect.


Aluminum Storefront and Doors Section 08 43 13 Page 1 of 10


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary of Work

.1 This Section specifies glazed, thermally broken, non-thermally broken aluminum-framed storefronts and doors and accessories.

1.2 Related Requirements

.1 Section 07 46 19 – Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashings.

.2 Section 07 84 00 – Firestopping: Firestopping insulation.

.3 Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealing.

.4 Section 08 54 13 – Fiberglass Fixed Windows.

.5 Section 08 81 00 – Glazing: .


.1 Aluminum Association (AA)

.1 DAF 45 2003, Designation System For Aluminum Finishes.

.2 American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA).

.1 AAMA-501-2005, Methods of Test for Exterior Walls.

.2 AAMA-2603-2002, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

.3 AAMA-2604-2005, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels

.4 AAMA-2605-2005, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels.

.5 AAMA CW-10-2004, Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site.

.6 AAMA CW-11-1985, Design Windloads for Buildings and Boundary Layer Wind Tunnel Testing.

.7 AAMA-TIR A1-2004, Sound Control for Fenestration Products.

.3 ASTM International (ASTM).

.1 ASTM A653 / A653M – 09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.2 ASTM B209-07, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.

.3 ASTM B221-08, Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

.4 ASTM C612 – 09, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

.5 ASTM E283-04, Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

.6 ASTM E331-00, Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.7 ASTM E413 – 04, Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.



.8 ASTM E1105 – 00(2008), Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

.9 ASTM D2240 – 05, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer Hardness.

.4 CSA International (CSA)

.1 CAN/CSA-S157-2005, Strength Design in Aluminum.

.2 CAN/CSA-S136–2007, North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members.

.3 CAN/CSA W59.2-M1991(R2003), Welded Aluminum Construction.

.5 Environmental Choice Program (ECP)

.1 CCD-45-1995, Sealants and Caulking Compounds.

.6 Underwriter’s Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S710.1 2005, Standard for Thermal Insulation – Bead-Applied One Component Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Materials Standard for Thermal Insulation - Bead - Applied One Component Polyurethane Air Sealant Foam, Part 1: Materials.


.1 Co-ordination: Co-ordinate work of this Section with work of other trades for proper time and sequence to avoid construction delays.

.2 Pre-installation Meeting: Convene pre-installation meeting after Award of Contract and one week prior to commencing work of this Section to verify project requirements, substrate conditions and coordination with other building sub-trades, and to review manufacturers written installation instructions.

.1 Comply with Section 01 31 00 - Project Meetings and co-ordinate with other similar pre-installation meetings.

.2 Notify attendees 2 weeks prior to meeting and ensure meeting attendees include as minimum:

.1 Owner;

.1 Consultant;

.3 Glazing subcontractor;

.3 Manufacturer’s Technical Representative.

.1 Ensure meeting agenda includes review of methods and procedures related to glazed aluminum-framed storefront installation including co-ordination with related work.

.2 Record meeting proceedings including corrective measures and other actions required to ensure successful completion of work and distribute to each attendee within 1 week of meeting.

1.5 Submittals

.1 Submit under the provisions of Section 01 33 00

.2 Manufacturers Data Sheets:

.1 Submit product data including manufacturer’s literature for glazed aluminum aluminum-framed storefront extruded members, panels, components and



accessories, indicating compliance with specified requirements and material characteristics.

.1 Submit list on aluminum-framed storefront manufacturer’s letterhead of materials, components and accessories to be incorporated into Work.

.2 Include product names, types and series numbers.

.3 Include contact information for manufacturer and their representative for this Project.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by Professional Engineer registered or licensed in the province of Ontario. Include on shop drawings:

.1 Aluminum-framed storefront panel and component dimensions framed opening requirements and tolerances, adjacent construction, anchor details anticipated deflection under load, affected related Work, weep drainage network, expansion and contraction joint location and details, and field welding required.

.2 Include details of fasteners between interior and exterior extrusions ensuring no penetration of thermal break or thermal bridging.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inches) sample sections showing prefinished aluminum surface, finish, colour and texture, and including section of infill panel.

.2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm (12 x 12 inches) sample sections of insulating glass unit showing glazing materials and edge and corner details.

.5 Thermal Performance:

.1 Submit verification that Insulating Glass Units used meet U and SHGC values as specified.

.6 Test Reports:

.1 Submit test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties including air infiltration, water infiltration and structural performance.

.7 Field Reports:

.1 Submit manufacturer’s field reports within 3 days of manufacturer representatives site visit and inspection.

.8 Installer Qualifications:

.1 Submit letter verifying installer’s experience with work similar to work of this Section.


.1 Operation and Maintenance Data: Supply maintenance data for aluminum-framed storefront for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Record Documentation: In accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.1 List materials used in aluminum-framed storefront work

.2 Warranty: Submit warranty documents specified.

1.7 Delivery Storage and Handling

.1 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:



.1 Deliver aluminum windows in manufacturers’ original packaging with identification labels intact and in sizes to suit project.

.2 Brace frames to maintain squareness and rigidity during shipment.

.2 Material Handling: To AAMA CW-10.

.3 Storage and Handling Requirements: Store materials off ground and protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer.

.1 Material storage: To AAMA CW-10.

1.8 Warranty

.1 Project Warranty: Refer to Contract Conditions for project warranty provisions.

.2 Manufacturer’s warranty: Submit, for Owner’s acceptance, manufacturer’s standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Manufacturer’s warranty is in addition to and not intended to limit other rights Owner may have under Contract Conditions.

.3 Warranty period: 5 years commencing on Date of Substantial Performance of Work.

.1 Insulating glass units: 10 years, on Date of Substantial Performance of Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturer

.1 Manufacturer:

.1 Alumicor Limited (basis of design), or products by the manufacturers below provided they fully comply with the design and performance requirements of the basis of design.

.2 Kawneer Company of Canada

.3 Oldcastle Building Envelope

2.2 Description

.1 Thermally broken (exterior) aluminum-framed glazed storefront constructed from prefinished aluminum extrusions and including swing type doors.

.1 Framing: Flush glazed framing 114.3 mm (4.5 inches) deep x 50.8 mm (2 inches) wide profile.

.2 Non-thermally broken, (interior) aluminum-framed glazed storefront constructed from prefinished aluminum extrusions and including swing type doors.

.1 Framing: Flush glazed framing 114.3 mm (4.5 inches) deep x 44.5 mm (1.75 inches) wide profile.

2.3 Design Criteria

.1 Design aluminum-framed storefront to AAMA CW-DG-1.

.2 Design aluminum components to CAN/CSA S157.

.3 Design and size aluminum-framed storefront to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind, acting normal to plane of wall using design pressure of 0.95 kPa (20 psf) to AAMA CW 11 and, ASTM E330.

.1 Design aluminum-framed storefront system for expansion and contraction caused by cycling temperature range of 95 degrees C (171 degrees F) over 12 hour period without causing detrimental effect to system components.



.2 Thermal expansion: Ensure aluminum-framed storefront system can withstand temperature differential of 85 degrees C (153 degrees F) and is able to accommodate interior and exterior system expansion and contraction without damage to components or deterioration of seals.

.3 Design vertical expansion joints with baffled overlaps and compressed resilient air seal laid between mullion ends.

.4 Ensure system is designed to accommodate:

.1 Movement within aluminum-framed storefront assembly.

.2 Movement between system and perimeter framing components.

.3 Dynamic loading and release of loads.

.4 Deflection of structural support framing.

.5 Shortening of building concrete structural columns.

.6 Creep of concrete structural members.

.5 Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials.

.6 Sound attenuation through wall system (exterior to interior): STC 33 to AAMA T1R - A1, and ASTM E413.

.7 Glass dimensions: Size glass units to CAN/CGSB-12.20.

.8 Flatness criteria: 6 mm (0.25 inches) maximum in 6 m (20 feet) for each panel.

.9 Air infiltration: 0.3 L/s/m2 (0.63 cfm) maximum of wall area to AAMA 501, ASTM E283 at differential pressure across assembly of 300 Pa (0.044 psi).

.10 Water infiltration: None to AAMA 501, ASTM E331, and ASTM E1105 at differential pressure across assembly of 720 Pa (0.104 psi).

.11 Ensure interior surfaces have no condensation before exposed edges of sealed units reach dew point temperatures during testing to AAMA 501.

.12 Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout building envelope and aluminum-framed storefront assembly.

.13 Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur.

.14 Reinforce aluminum-framed storefront system where necessary.

.4 Conformance with OBC 2012 – SB-10.

.1 Assembly Max. U: U-0.38

.2 Assembly Max SHGC: 0.40

2.4 Materials

.1 Store Front System and Components

.1 Main Frame: Extruded aluminum: To ASTM B221, 6063 alloy with T5 or T6 temper.

.1 Interior walls: colour No. 1: AA DAF-45-M12C22A31, Architectural Class II, blackanodized (0.0004 inches) minimum thickness. As indicated on drawings.

.2 Exterior walls: colour No. 1: AA DAF-45-M12C22A31, Architectural Class II, black anodized (0.0004 inches) minimum thickness. As indicated on drawings.

.3 Exterior walls: colour No. 2: AA DAF-45-M12C22A31 Architectural Class black anodized (0.0007 inches) minimum thickness. As indicated on drawings.



.2 Sill Track: Extruded aluminum: To ASTM B221, 6063 alloy with T5 or T6 temper.

.1 Finish to match Main Frame.

.3 Sheet aluminum: To ASTM B209, utility grade for unexposed surfaces.

.4 Fasteners, screws and bolts: Tamperproof, cadmium plated stainless steel 300 or 400 series to meet storefront wall requirements and as recommended by manufacturer.

.5 Anchors: Ensure anchors have three-way adjustment.

.2 Insulating glass units: To CAN/CGSB-12.8, Tempered double glazed, hermetically sealed, argon filled insulating glass units with low conductance stainless steel warm edge spacer. As per Section 08 81 00.

.3 Exterior Sills: Extruded aluminum, of type and size as detailed; minimum 3 mm thick, complete with joint covers, jamb drip deflectors, chairs, anchors and anchoring devices.

.4 Thermal Break: Glass fibre reinforced polyamide porthole extrusion.

.5 Doors: Aluminum-framed swing door with glass insert suitable for inclusion in aluminum-framed storefront system, constructed and finished to match storefront.

2.5 Thermally Broken Aluminum-Framed Storefront

.1 Acceptable Material: Alumicor Ltd., FlushGlaze BF 3400 Series Storefront.

.2 Or Architect approved equal by Kawneer or Oldcastle.

2.6 Non-Thermally Broken Aluminum-Framed Storefront (Interior vestibule as applicable)

.1 Acceptable Material: Alumicor Ltd., Non-Thermally Broken FlushGlaze TL 1800 series

.2 Or Architect approved equal by Kawneer or Oldcastle.

2.7 Thermally Broken Aluminum Doors

.1 Acceptable material: Alumicor Ltd., 7700 Thermaporte.

.2 Or Architect approved equal By Kawneer Standard or Oldcastle Standard. “Insulated” Doors are NOT acceptable.

2.8 Non-Insulated Aluminum Doors (interior)

.1 Acceptable material: Alumicor Ltd., Canadiana.

.2 Or Architect approved equal By Kawneer Standard or Oldcastle Standard.

2.9 Aluminum-Framed Storefront System Fabrication

.1 Do aluminum welding to CAN/CSA W59.2.

.2 Fabricate aluminum assemblies of extruded sections to sizes and profiles indicated.

.1 Ensure verticals and horizontals are extrusions designed for shear block or screw spline corner construction.

.3 Construct units square, plumb and free from distortion, waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to performance or appearance.

.4 Fabricate aluminum-framed storefront with minimum clearances and shim spacing around panel perimeter and ensure installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal is enabled.

.5 Accurately fit and secure joints and corners.

.1 Ensure joints are flush, hairline, [and weatherproof].

.6 Prepare aluminum-framed storefront to receive anchor devices.



.7 Use only stainless steel or zinc plated concealed fasteners

.1 Ensure fasteners do not penetrate thermal break.

.2 Where fasteners cannot be concealed, countersunk screws finished to match adjacent material may be used upon receipt of written approval from Consultant.

.8 Prepare components to receive doors and openings as indicated.

.9 Reinforce framing members for exterior imposed loads where required.

.10 Visible manufacturer’s labels are not permitted.

2.10 Door Fabrication


.2 Fabricate aluminum assemblies of extruded sections to sizes and profiles indicated.

.1 Ensure stiles and rails are tubular extrusions designed for mechanical shear block fastening in combination with SIGMA deep penetration plug welds and fillet welds at all stile/rail connections.

.3 Door Thickness: 44 mm (1.75 inches).

.4 Construct doors square, plumb and free from distortion, waves, twists, buckles or other defects detrimental to performance or appearance.

.5 Fabricate infill panels of aluminum sheet laminated to marine grade plywood.

.1 Aluminum sheet minimum thickness 3mm (0.125 inches).

.2 Marine grade plywood thickness 19mm (0.750 inches).

.6 Accurately fit and secure joints and corners.

.1 Ensure joints are flush and hairline

.7 Use only concealed or semi-concealed fasteners

.1 Where fasteners cannot be concealed, countersunk screws finished to match adjacent material may be used.

.8 Install door hardware.

.9 Locate manufacturer’s labels on exterior side of door bottom rail.

.10 Aluminum door construction: Refer to door schedule and elevations on drawings.

2.11 Finishes

.1 Interior curtain walls: colour No. 1: AA DAF-45-M12C22A31, Architectural Class II, black anodized (0.0004 inches) minimum thickness. As indicated on drawings.

.2 Exterior curtain walls: colour No. 1: AA DAF-45-M12C22A31, Architectural Class II, blackanodized (0.0004 inches) minimum thickness. As indicated on drawings.

2.12 Hardware

.1 Hardware: In accordance with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.

.1 Ensure hardware is supplied and factory-installed by door manufacturer.

2.13 Accessories

.1 Gasketing: To CCD-45 Extruded EPDM gaskets.

.2 Setting Blocks: To CCD-45 and ASTM D2240, EPDM, 80 - 90 Shore A Durometer hardness.

.3 Spacers: To CCD-45 and ASTM D2240, EPDM, 50 - 60 Shore A Durometer hardness.



.4 Sealant: To CAN/CGSB-19.13, Class 40, one-component, cold-applied, non-sagging silicone.

.1 Acceptable material: Dow Corning 795.

.5 Sealant Bond Breaker: Open cell foam backer rod sized to suit project requirements.

.6 Flashings: 3 mm (0.125 inches) thick aluminum flashing to profiles indicated.

.7 Liquid Foam Insulation: Single component, moisture cure, low expansion rate spray-in-place polyurethane liquid foam insulation to ULC-S710.1 and in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.

.8 Miscellaneous Components: Covers, copings, special flashings, filler pieces, termination pieces, cap closures, expansion joint covers, and metal bellows to match curtain wall system as indicated.

.9 Air Barrier transition membrane: Tremco Proglaze ETA at all transitions to window frame.

2.14 Product Substitutions

.1 Substitutions will not be accepted unless approved by architect.

.2 Ensure components come from one manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installers

.1 Use only installers with a minimum of 5 years continuous experience in fabrication, manufacturing, and installation of components specified in this document.

3.2 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: Verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for aluminum-framed storefront installation in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

.1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Consultant.

.2 Inform Consultant of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.

.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Consultant.

3.3 Installation

.1 Install thermally broken aluminum-framed storefront in accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.


.3 Attach thermally broken aluminum-framed storefront assemblies to structure plumb and level, free from warp, and allow for sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities.

.1 Maintain dimensional tolerances and align with adjacent work.

.2 Use alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten elements to building structure.

.3 Clean welded surfaces and apply protective primer to field welds and adjacent surfaces.

.4 Install thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

.5 Install sill flashings.



.6 Install smoke sealing where indicated.

.7 Co-ordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air barrier.

.8 Co-ordinate attachment and seal of perimeter vapour retarder.

.9 Install liquid foam insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain continuity of thermal barrier.

.10 Install insulating glass units in accordance with this specification, Section 08 80 50 - Glazing and to manufacturer’s written instructions.

.11 Install perimeter sealant to method required to achieve performance criteria, backing materials, and installation criteria in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.

3.4 Sill Installation

.1 Install aluminum sills with uniform wash to exterior, level in length, straight in alignment with plumb upstands and faces.

.2 Cut sills to fit opening.

.3 Secure sills in place with anchoring devices located at ends and joints of continuous sills and evenly spaced 600 mm (24 inches) on center in between.

.4 Fasten expansion joint cover plates and drip deflectors with tamperproof, self-tapping cadmium plated stainless steel screws.

.5 Maintain 6 to 9 mm (0.25 to 0.375 inches) space between butt ends of continuous sills. For sills over 1200 mm in length, maintain 3 to 6 mm space at each end.

.6 All sills shall maintain a minimum of 5 degrees positive slope.

3.5 Field Quality Control

.1 Field Inspection: Coordinate field inspection in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

.2 Site Installation Tolerances:

.1 Variation from plumb: 12 mm per 30 m (0.5 inches per 100 feet) maximum.

.2 Misalignment of two adjacent panels or members: 0.8 mm (0.03 inches) maximum.

.3 Sealant space between aluminum-framed storefront and adjacent construction: 13 mm (0.5 inches) maximum.

.3 Manufacturer’s Services:

.1 Coordinate manufacturer’s services with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements.

.4 Submit to Consultant a written agreement from the manufacturer to perform the manufacturer’s services.

.5 Schedule manufacturer’s review of work procedures at stages listed:

.1 Product Application: 1 off site review.

.2 Fabrication and Handling: 1 review at authorized installers fabrication facilities.

.1 Installation: 3 site reviews at commencement of Work, 50% completion of Work and Upon completion of Work.

.3 Submit manufacturer’s written reports to Consultant describing:

.1 The scope of work requested.

.2 Date, time and location.

.3 Procedures performed.



.4 Observed or detected non-compliances or inconsistencies with manufacturers’ recommended instructions.

.5 Limitations or disclaimers regarding the procedures performed.

.6 Obtain reports within seven days of review and submit immediately to Consultant.

3.6 Cleaning

.1 Progress Cleaning: Perform cleanup as work progresses.

.1 Remove sealant and caulking drippings as work progresses.

.2 Leave work area clean end of each day.

.2 Final Cleaning: Upon completion, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools, and equipment.

.1 Final cleaning of glass and aluminum framing to remove site soiling shall be the responsibility of this contractor.

.3 Waste Management:

.1 Collect recyclable waste and dispose of or recycle field generated construction waste created during construction or final cleaning related to work of this Section.

.2 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.

3.7 Adjusting

.1 Adjust operable parts for correct function.

.2 Ensure doors do not bind while opening and closing.

3.8 Protection

.1 Protect installed products and components from damage during construction.

.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by aluminum-framed storefront installation.


Fiber Glass Fixed Window Unit Section 08 54 13 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Essential® Casement/Awning window complete with hardware, glazing, mulling options including PTAC, weather strip, insect screen, grilles-between-the-glass, jamb extension, sheet rock return, j-channel, and standard or specified anchors, trim and attachments


.1 Section 01 33 00 – Submittal Procedures: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples

.2 Section 06 40 00 – Architectural woodwork

.3 Section 06 10 00 – Finish Carpentry

.4 Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants: Sill sealant and perimeter caulking

.5 Section 09 90 00 – Paints and Coatings: Paint and stain other than factory-applied finish

1.3 References

.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

.1 C1036: Standard Specification for Flat Glass.

.2 E90-09: Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

.3 E 283: Standard Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors.

.4 E 330: Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Door by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

.5 E 547: Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential.

.6 E 2190: Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance Evaluation.

.7 F 2090-10: Standard Specification for Window Fall Prevention Devices with Emergency Escape (Egress) Release Mechanisms.

.2 Insulating Glass Manufacturer’s Alliance/Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGMA/IGCC).

.3 American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association/Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association/Canadian Standards Association (AAMA/WDMA/CSA): (use appropriate specifications depending on certification for each product type).

.4 AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-11: North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights.

.1 AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440-17: North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for windows, doors, and skylights.

.2 AAMA 450-10: Voluntary Performance Rating Method for Mulled Fenestration Assemblies

.5 Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA): Hallmark Certification Program.

.6 American Architectural Manufacturer’s Association (AAMA): 624-10: Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Organic Coatings on Fiber Reinforced Thermoset Profiles.

.7 National Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC): 101: Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product Thermal Properties.



1.4 System Description

.1 Design and Performance Requirements:

Product Air Tested

to psf Water Tested

to psf

Design Pressure

(DP)

Certification Rating

Max Overall Width

Max Overall Height

in mm in mm

Essential Casement 1.57 6 40 LC-PG40-C 27 (686) 71 (1803)




Essential Awning 1.57 6 40 LC-PG40-AP 48 (1219) 35 (889)

Essential Casement Picture

1.57 6 40 LC-PG40-FW 71 (1803) 71 (1803)

1.5 Submittals

.1 Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings under provision of Section 01 33 23.

.2 Product Data: Submit catalog data under provision of Section 01 33 23.

.3 Samples:

.1 Submit corner section under provision of section 01 33 23.

.2 Specified performance and design requirements under provisions of Section 01 33 23.

.4 Quality Control Submittals: Certificates: submit manufacturer’s certification indicating compliance with specified performance and design requirement under provision of section 01 33 23.


.1 Requirements: consult local code for IBC [International Building Code] and IRC [International Residential Code] adoption year and pertinent revisions for information on:

1. Egress, emergency escape and rescue requirements.

2. Basement window requirements.

3. Windows fall prevention and/or window opening control device requirements. 1.7 Delivery

.1 Comply with provisions of Section 01 65 00.

.2 Deliver in original packaging and protect from weather.




.1 Store window units in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area above ground to protect from weather under provision of Section 01 66 00.

1.9 Warranty

.1 Clear insulating glass with stainless steel spacers is warranted against seal failure caused by manufacturing defects and resulting in visible obstruction through the glass for twenty (20) years from the original date of purchase. Glass is warranted against stress cracks caused by manufacturing defects from ten (10) years from the original date of purchase.

PART 2 - HARDWARE AND OTHER NON-GLASS COMPONENTS ARE WARRANTED TO BE FREE FROM MANUFACTURING DEFECTS FOR TEN (10) YEARS FROM THE ORIGINAL DATE OF PURCHASE.PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufactured Units

.1 Description: Essential® Casement/Awning and related stationary or picture units as manufactured by Marvin Windows and Doors, Roanoke, Virginia.

2.2 Frame Description

.1 Interior:

.1 Pultruded reinforced fiberglass (Ultrex®), 0.075”-0.077” (2mm) thick wall.

.2 Frame depth: 3 3/32” (79mm).

.3 Jamb Depth: 2” (51mm)

.4 Frame Expander accessory is an insert kit shipped as ready-to-install.

.1 Insert kit includes four fabricated frame expander components, including head-jamb, sill and both jamb components.

.2 Included in both 1” and 3” frame expander options.

2.3 Sash Description

.1 Pultruded reinforced fiberglass (Ultrex®), 0.075”-0.077” (2mm) thick wall.

.2 Composite sash thickness: 15/16” (24mm)

2.4 Glazing

.1 Select quality complying with ASTM C 1036. Insulating glass SIGMA/IGCC when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2190. STC/OITC ratings are tested to the stated performance level in accordance with ASTM E 90-09.

.1 Glazing Method: 11/16” (17mm) insulating glass.

.2 Glass Type: Low E1, E2, E3, or E3/ERS with air or Argon Gas.

.3 Glass Type Options: Obscure Glass or California Fire Glass (Annealed exterior and tempered interior glazing configuration), Rain Glass, Glue Chip, Narrow Reed, Reed, Frost, Bronze Tint, Gray Tint, Green Tint.

.4 Glazing Seal: Silicone bead at exterior; interior has glazing boot inserted.

.5 Perimeter Spacer: Default color is mill finish (stainless). An optional black perimeter spacer color is available for all interior color selections.

.6 Glazing Option: STC/OITC upgrade.

2.5 Mulling

.1 Standard Mulling



.2 Directional mull limits: 6 wide by 1 unit high; Rough Opening not to exceed 114” x 78” (2896mm x 1981mm).

.1 Directional mull limits: 5 units wide by 5 units high: Rough Opening not to exceed 96” x 96” (2438mm x 2438mm).

.3 Reinforced Mulling

.4 Directional mull limits: 6 wide by 1 unit high; Rough Opening not to exceed 114” x 78” (2896mm x 1981mm).

.1 Directional mull limits: 5 units wide by 5 units high: Rough Opening not to exceed 96” x 96” (2438mm x 2438mm).

2.6 Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner (PTAC) Mulling

.1 Essential Casement frame profile for use with PTAC; Factory-mulled below an Essential Casement Picture Unit.

.2 Mull configuration: 1 wide by 2 high; maximum Rough Opening 72” x 96” (1829mm x 2438mm).

.3 Essential Casement Picture sizes to be standard sizes only.

.1 Width Call Number: 40, 50, and 60.

.2 Height Call Number: 40, 46, 50, 56, and 60.

.4 PTAC and mulled assembly currently non-rated; non-certified for air, water and structure.

.5 Height of PTAC window frame will accommodate all PTAC sizes.

.1 Standard PTAC height: 19 1/4”; standard PTAC width to match upper unit width.

.6 Color

.1 Exterior: Stone White, Cashmere, Pebble Gray, Bronze, Evergreen, or Ebony.

.2 Interior: Stone White, Bronze or Ebony (split finishes not available on Bronze and Ebony interior options)

.7 PTAC grill/louver not ordered, stocked or installed by Marvin Windows and Doors.

.1 Reliable Products Inc. is recommended as manufacturer – color match, fit, form, and functionality.

.8 Maintain all current product attribute options except the following:

.1 Interior accessories: sheetrock return, ¾” receiver, jamb extension (all depths), and frame filler not available factory installed.

.2 Exterior accessories: Flush fin not available.

2.7 Finish

.1 Exterior: Pultruded fiberglass

.1 Factory baked on acrylic urethane.

.2 Meets AAMA 624-10 requirements.

.2 Interior: Pultruded fiberglass

.1 Factory baked on acrylic urethane.

.3 Color: Ebony exterior with Ebony interior.

2.8 Hardware (Not Applicable)



.1 Lock: Multipoint locking mechanism is actuated from a single point of operation. The lock mechanism is concealed with only the actuator handle and escutcheon being visible to the interior.

.2 Hinges: Concealed stainless steel track and injection molded shoe.

.3 Handle: Die cast detachable folding handle.

.4 Roto-gear Operator: E-Gard™ coated hinge arm and housing mechanism.

.5 Snubber: Pulls the sash tight to the frame and provides engagement to keep the sash in place under structural loads.

.6 Color: Applies to handle and locking hardware:

.1 Standard Color: Stone White on Stone White Interior, Oil Rubbed Bronze on Bronze interior, Matte Black on Ebony Interior.

.2 Optional Colors: Stone White, Almond Frost, Oil Rubbed Bronze, Satin Nickel, Bright Brass, Matte Black

2.9 Optional Hardware (Not Applicable)

.1 Coastal hardware is available.

.2 Casement Window Opening Control Device – Factory applied.

.1 Minimum frame OSM: 18 9/16” x 23 ½” (471mm x 597mm); Maximum frame OSM: 35 ½” x 71 ½” (902mm x 1816mm).

.3 WOCD locking assembly: Die cast. Color: White, Almond Frost, Oil Rubbed Bronze, Matte Black.

.4 WOCD tether assembly: glass filled nylon. Color: E-Guard™ color match.

.5 Awning Limiter Device: Factory or Field applied.

.1 Limiter Clip: Tumbled stainless steel.

2.10 Weather Strip

.1 Primary weather strip is an extruded TPE foam filled bulb attached to all four sides of the frame by a kerf and provides seal between sash and frame.

.2 Secondary weather strip is an extruded TPE hollow bulb that attaches to a kerf in the sash and provides seal between sash and frame.

.3 Standard weather strip color: black.

2.11 Jamb Extension

.1 Not Required, supplied and installed by Section 06 10 00

2.12 Accessories and Trim

.1 Installation Accessories:

.1 Factory-installed vinyl nailing fin/drip cap at head, sill and side jambs.

.2 Installation brackets: Brackets for 4 9/16” (116mm); 6 9/16” (167mm) jambs.

.3 Mullion kit: standard mullion kit for filed assembly of related units available in horizontal, vertical and 2-wide and/or 2-high configurations. Kit includes: Instruction, interior and exterior mull covers, mull plugs and brackets.

.4 Sheet rock return

.5 Available colors: Stone White, Bronze or Ebony. Default color will match unit interior selection. Stone White is available for all interior color selections.



.6 J-channel

.7 Available colors: Stone White, Pebble Gray, Cashmere, Evergreen, Bronze or Ebony

.8 Flush fin

.9 Available colors: Stone White, Pebble Gray, Cashmere, Evergreen, Bronze or Ebony

.10 3/4” (19mm) receiver

.11 Available colors: Ebony.

.12 Frame expander (1 inch or 3 inch options available)

.1 Available colors: Ebony.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Condition: Before installation, verify openings are plumb, square and of proper dimensions as required in Section 01 71 00. Report frame defects or unsuitable conditions to the General Contractor before proceeding,

.2 Acceptance of Condition: Beginning installation confirms acceptance of existing conditions.

3.2 Installation

.1 Comply with Section 01 73 00.

.1 Assemble and install window/door unit(s) according to manufacturer’s instruction and reviewed shop drawing.

.2 Install sealant and related backing materials at perimeter of unit or assembly in accordance with Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. Do not use expansive foam sealant.

.3 Install accessory items as required.

.4 Use finish nails to apply wood trim and mouldings.


.1 Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturers’ instruction

.1 Unless otherwise specified, air leakage resistance tests shall be conducted at a uniform static pressure of 75 Pa (~1.57 psf). The maximum allowable rate of air leakage shall not exceed 2.3 L/sm2 (~0.45 cfm/ft2).

.2 Unless otherwise specified, water penetration resistance testing shall be conducted per AAMA 502 and ASTM E1105 at 2/3 of the fenestration products design pressure (DP) rating using “Procedure B” – cyclic static air pressure difference. Water penetration shall be defined in accordance with the test method(s) applied.

3.4 Cleaning

.1 Remove visible labels and adhesive residue according to manufacturer’s instruction.

.2 Leave windows and glass in a clean condition. Final cleaning as required in Section 01 74 00.

3.5 Protecting Installed Construction

.1 Comply with Section 07 76 00.

.2 Protecting windows from damage by chemicals, solvents, paint or other construction operations that may cause damage.

Glass & Glazing Section 08 81 00 Page 1 of 11


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Instructions

.1 Read and be governed by conditions of the Contract and sections of Division 1.

1.2 References

.1 Definitions:

.1 Deterioration of coated glass: Defects developing from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated class contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

.2 Deterioration of insulating glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer’s written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture or film on interior surfaces of glass.

.3 Deterioration of laminated glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices of maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delaminating material obstructing vision through glass and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated glass standards.

.4 lnterspace or airspace: The space between lites of any insulating glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

.5 Manufacturer: A firm that produces primary glass or fabricated glass products as defined in referenced glazing publications.


.1 Qualifications of installers: Provide the work of this section executed by specialist Subcontractor who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in skills required, be completely familiar with referenced standards and requirements of the work of this section, and personally direct installation performed under this section.

.1 Foreperson experience: Minimum 10 years’ experience as glazing mechanic.

.2 Typical glazing mechanic experience: Minimum 3 years’ experience as glazers.

.3 Structural sealant glazing mechanic experience: Minimum 5 years relevant experience.

.4 Mirror installations: Installation only by applicator trained and approved by adhesive manufacturer for application of its products.

.2 Mock-ups

.1 Provide mock-up of mirror installation, including minimum of 1 full size mirrors. Locate mirror mock-up where approved by Consultant.

.2 Manufacturers: Fabrication processes, including low emissivity and reflective coatings, insulating, laminated, silk-screening and tempering shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten (10) years of fabrication experience and meet ANSI/ ASQC 9002 1994 for Section 08800 Glass and Glazing.

.3 Conduct quality control in accordance with Section 01 40 00



.4 Single source responsibility: Provide materials from a single manufacturer or fabricator for each kind and condition of glass indicated and composed of primary glass obtained from a single source and manufacturing plant for each type and class required.

.5 Publications: Comply with recommendations in the publications below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section.

.1 GANA Glazing Manual

.2 GANA Engineering Standards Manual

.3 GANA Laminated Glazing Reference Manual

.4 Glazing Contractors Association of Ontario 'Glazing System Specification Manual’.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit under the provisions of Section 01 33 00

.2 Manufacturer’s Product Data Sheets:

.1 Submit manufacturer's Product data sheets for products proposed for use in the work of this section.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Show details of each type of glazing system in conjunction with the framing system indicating type of glass, sizes, shapes, glazing material and quantity. Show details indicating glazing material, glazing thickness, bite on the glass and glass edge clearance.

.2 For glass scheduled or indicated as engineered and glass to serve as guards in accordance with building code, shop drawings to be engineered shop drawings.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit 305 mm square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 305 mm long samples of each color required, except black, for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view.

.1 Submit 3 control samples for each glass type showing maximum range of visible difference between units for the Project.

.5 Other Items:

.1 Letters of assurance:

.1 Submit professional letters of assurance for the work of this section.

.2 Submit test and evaluation reports:

.1 Obtain compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealant as well as other glazing materials including insulating units.

.3 Manufacturer reports:

.1 Submit glass fabricator’s product information and structural calculations indicating compliance with glazing standards established by the Glass Association of North America (GANA). Submittal to include thermal stress and structural load analysis of the proposed glass types, configuration and sizes.

.4 Submit sample glazing warranty.



.5 Submit copy of letter from IGMAC or a test report prepared by independent testing company confirming insulating glass units of the types required have been successfully tested in accordance with CAN/CGSB 2 -Q7 and will withstand design loads specified in the Contract Documents.

1.5 Closeout Documents

.1 Submit closeout submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00.

.2 Submit maintenance and cleaning instructions for glass and glazing for incorporation into the operating and maintenance manuals.

1.6 Performance / Design Criteria

.1 Glass strength:

.1 Provide glass products in the thickness and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria based on project loads and in- service conditions.

.1 Analysis shall comply with CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89.

.2 Minimum thickness of annealed or heal-treated glass products to be selected so the worst case probability of failure does not exceed the following

.1 8 breaks per 1000 for glass installed vertically less than 15 degrees from the vertical plane and under wind action.

.2 1 break per 1000 for glass installed 15 degrees or more from the vertical plane and under action of wind and/or snow.

.3 Maximum lateral deflection; insulating glass units: For insulating glass units supported on four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short side length or 19 mm (3/4”) maximum.

.2 Design glass and glazing located less than 1070 mm above finished floor, to requirements of the building code. Glass at guards, balustrades, and where glass is likely to be subjected to human impact shall comply with safety glass requirements of CAN/CGSB 12.20-M89 and CAN/CGSB 12.1-lvI90.

.3 Provide annealed, heat strengthened, and tempered lights where required by the building code, and where required for the various solar exposures on the building.

.4 Glass thicknesses and glass types specified, indicated, or scheduled in the Contract Documents are minimums required. Glass designer/engineer to modify as required to satisfy design and building code requirements, and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, and any such modifications shall be clearly indicated on shop drawings.

1.7 Description

.1 Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movements, wind loads and impact loads, without failure, including loss due to defective manufacture, fabrication and installation; deterioration of glazing materials; and other defects in construction.

.2 Provide glass Products of uniform appearance and colour when viewed from distance of 3m to 30 m perpendicular to the glass or from 45 degree angle to the glass.


.1 Protect glass from edge damage during handling. For insulating units exposed to substantial altitude changes, comply with insulating glass manufacturers written recommendations for venting and sealing to avoid hermetic seal ruptures



.2 Protect glazing materials according to manufacturers written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun or other causes.

1.9 Site Conditions

.1 Ambient Conditions: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by the glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation or other causes.

.2 Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 4°C.

1.10 Warranty

.1 Warrant work of this section for a period of 2 years minimum unless otherwise indicated.

.2 The glazing systems shall perform properly to the extent that the design and Contract Documents permit such performance for the duration of the warranty period.

.3 Manufacturer’s special warranty for coated-glass products:

.1 Provide written 10 year warranty from date of manufacture for sputter coated glass. Warranty shall cover deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer's published instructions. Warranty shall be manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated glass units.

.4 Manufacturer’s special warranty for laminated glass products:

.1 Provide written 5 year warranty from date of manufacture for laminated glass. Warranty shall cover deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer's published instructions. Warranty shall be manufacturer's standard form in which laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units.

.5 Manufacturers special warranty for ceramic frit coat glass products

.1 Provide written 5 year warranty from date of manufacture for ceramic frit coated glass. Warranty shall cover deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer's published instructions. Warranty shall be manufacturer's standard form in which ceramic frit coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace ceramic frit coated-glass units.

.6 Manufacturer's special warranty for insulating glass unit products:

.1 Provide a written warranty from date of manufacture for sealed insulating glass units. Warranty shall cover the following:

.2 Deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, protecting and maintaining practices contrary to the glass manufacturer's published instructions.

.1 Replacement of sealed insulating glass units.

.2 No dollar limit.

.3 Non-prorated.

.4 10-year warranty duration

.7 Manufacturer’s special warranty for mirror glass products:



.1 Provide a written warranty from date of manufacture for mirror silvering. Warranty shall cover the following:

.1 Replacement of mirror glass units

.2 10 year warranty duration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Glass Materials

.1 Insulating glass units:

.1 Hermetically sealed, CAN/CGSB 12.8-97, minimum 12 mm (1/2") air space, air space filled with 90% Argon gas, double sealed edges (primary to be polyisobutylene, secondary to be polysulphide/polyurethane, silicone in the structural silicone glazed units), desiccant filled warm edge stainless steel spacer bar.

.1 The minimum thickness of the secondary seal shall be 1.59 mm (1/16").

.2 The target width of the primary seal shall be 3.97 mm (5/32").

.3 There shall be no voids or skips in the primary seal.

.4 Gaps or skips between primary and secondary sealant are permitted to a maximum width of 1.59 mm (1/16") by maximum length of 50 mm (2") with gaps separated by at least 450 mm (18"). Continuous contact between the primary seal and the secondary seal is desired.

.5 Both primary and secondary sealant adhesion shall exhibit continuous, tenacious adhesion to both glass and spacer contact areas.

.6 Units shall be IGMAC Certified

.2 Low ’E' coating;

.1 Low 'E’ coating on No. 3 surface unless otherwise indicated:


.1 Energy Select 40 (E-60).

.2 PPG Solorban 60 (E-60)

.3 Acceptable alternate low ‘E' coating manufacturers:

.1 Guardian Industries Corp is an approved low ‘E’ coating manufacturer provided that low ‘E’ coating product(s) proposed meet performance requirements listed in this section and sample of glass is reviewed and approved by Consultant.

.4 Performance requirements; for clear glass units; based on above description:

.1 Visible light transmittance (VLT): 70

.2 Winter night-time Metric U-value (Imperial): 1.6 (0.29)

.3 Shading coefficient (SC): 0.45

.4 Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC): 0.39

.5 Location/Glass Configuration: See drawings for glazing noted as:

.1 Double Glazing with tempered glass on both interior and exterior side Colour: Tinted Light Grey



.3 Fire Rated Glass: As required

.1 Fire rated impact safety resistant heat barrier glass Saint Gobain "ContraFlam" or Technical Glass Products 'Pilkington Pyrostop" or approved equal.

.4 Flat Glass:

.1 Clear tempered glass to CAN/CGSB 12.1-M-90, 10mm (3/8) thick min. for any dimension greater than 1m (3’-0”) and 6mm (1/4”) for all other locations. Location: all interior glass on non-rated doors, windows, and service counter.

.5 Glazing Materials

.1 Glazing materials; general: Select glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and additional glazing materials of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience.

.2 Glazing gaskets: Moulded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from the following:

.1 Preformed silicone to ASTIVI C1115-06.

.3 Setting blocks: Silicone material with Shore, Type ‘A’ durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

.4 Spacers: Silicone blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

.5 Edge blocks: Silicone material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

.6 Cleaners, Primers and Seaters: Type recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

.7 Polyurethane foam glazing tape:

.1 High density, closed-cell, flexible, non-extruding tape, adhesive backed one side only; recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications with nominal pressure in glazing channel.

.2 Acceptable manufacturer: Norton Company or approved equal.

.3 Acceptable products: As recommended by manufacturer suitable for conditions of application and use.

.8 Structural glazing adhesive:

.1 One-part or two-part, neutral-cure elastomeric silicone sealant.

.2 ASTIVI C920-08 Type M or S, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, 25, 50.

.3 ASTM C1184-05.

.4 SWRI Validation.

.5 Colour: as selected by Const/Want from manufacturer’s full colour range.

.6 Silicone glazing (Weatherseal) sealant:

.1 Medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone sealant; complying with ASTM C920-08, Type M or S, Grade NS, Class 25.



.2 Acceptable products:

.1 Dow Corning ‘790' or ‘795'.

.2 Pecora ‘864’ or '890.

.3 Tremco Spectrum 2.

2.2 Fabrication

.1 Factory sealed insulating glass units:

.1 Fabricate units to requirements of CAN/CGSB 12.8-97.

.2 Spacer core shall be straight and evenly set into glass units.

.3 Insulating glass units shall be manufactured to conform to IGMAC recommendations (Insulated Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada) and the manufacturer shall be a member of IGIVIAC. Sealed units shall bear IGMAC certification markings.

.2 Grind, chamber, and polish exposed glass edges, unless otherwise indicated.

.3 Glazing Schedule

.1 Refer to drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with glazing installer present, for compliance with the following:

.1 Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size squareness, and offsets at corners

.2 Inspect butt and mitre joints in framing. Seal joints found to be open with a compatible sealant prior to glazing,

.3 Glazing pockets and surfaces are free of dust, construction debris, and contaminants.

.4 Presence and functioning of weep systems.

.5 Minimum required face and edge clearances.

.6 Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

.2 Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected

3.2 Preparation

.1 Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

.2 Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

.3 Clean contact surfaces with solvent and apply primers to surfaces to receive tapes and sealants in accordance with the manufacturer‘s instructions. Ensure surfaces are free of moisture and frost.

3.3 Glazing - General

.1 Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.



.2 Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

.3 Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

.4 Clean glazing rebate surfaces of traces of dirt, dust, or other contaminants.

.5 Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

.6 Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

.7 Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

.8 Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is greater than 1270 mm (50").

.1 Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

.2 Provide 3.2 mm (1/8") minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width.

.9 Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel.

.10 Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

.11 Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

.12 Hollow metal doors and frames: Specified under work of Section 08 11 13. Install 6 mm (1/4") fire rated glass unless indicated otherwise fixed stop bedding, glazing tape, removable slops, glazing tape.

3.4 Tape Glazing

.1 Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

.2 Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

.3 Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

.4 Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths bolted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

.5 Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

.6 Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

.7 Centre glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

.8 Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 Gasket Glazing (Dry)



.1 Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

.2 Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

.3 Installation with drive-in wedge gaskets: Centre glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weather tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

.4 Installation with pressure-glazing stops: center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weather tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

.5 Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 Sealant Glazing (Wet)

.1 Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

.2 Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

.3 Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 Structural Silicone Glazing

.1 Factory install glass panels in accordance with Section 08 44 13.

.2 Prepare substrates and apply silicone sealant in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and reviewed shop drawings.

.3 Structural silicone joint design: Install sealant to meet these general requirements. Any variations shall be approved by sealant manufacturer.

.1 Glueline thickness: 6.4 mm (1/4") minimum.

.2 Structural bite: 6.4 mm (1/4") minimum and equal to or greater than glueline thickness

.3 Bite-to-glueline ratio: Between 1:1 and 3.

.4 Joint shall be designed to be filled with standard sealant application procedures

.5 Avoid three sided sealant adhesion by use of backer rod or bond breaker tape.

.4 Inspect substrates to receive silicone sealant. Ensure:

.1 Framing surfaces to receive glazing are flat and smooth without slots, serrations, and other irregularities.

.1 Verify aluminum framing has alodine, anodized, fluorocarbon paint, or polyester powder coat finish. Mill-finish aluminum is not an acceptable substrate for structural silicone sealant.

.2 Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of frost, dust, dirt, grease, oil, mildew, and other contaminants that might affect adhesion.



.5 Clean nonporous substrates with two-cloth solvent wipe in accordance with ASTM C1193-09

.1 Pour cleaning solvent onto a clean cloth. Wipe vigorously to remove contaminants

.2 Immediately wipe cleaned area with a separate cloth before solvent has evaporated.

.6 Primer: Apply primer to substrates determined by adhesion test

.1 Pour primer into small, clean container. Use within 10 minutes to avoid contamination.

.2 Dip cloth into primer and wipe a thin film onto substrate. Use brush for inaccessible areas. Do not over-apply.

.3 Allow primer to dry. Apply sealant the same day surfaces are primed.

.4 Do not apply primer to sealant joint backing.

.7 Masking: Apply masking tape as required to protect adjacent surfaces, to ensure straight bead line, and facilitate cleaning.

.8 Application:

.1 Spacers and setting blocks: Install as indicated on drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Ensure joint openings and recesses are accurately sized.

.2 Sealant backing: Install without gaps, twisting, stretching, or puncturing backing material. Use gauge to ensure uniform depth to achieve correct profile, coverage, and performance.

.3 Bond breaker: Install on backside of joint where backing is not feasible.

.4 Mixing: Mix two-component sealants in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommended proportions. Use clean, airless mixing equipment. Do not hand or mechanically mix in open container that is subject entraining air in sealant.

.5 Temporary glass support: Use temporary fasteners, clips, two-sided adhesive, and other means to retain glass panels while sealant is applied and allowed to cure.

.6 Sealant:

.1 Use sealant-dispensing equipment to push sealant bead into opening. Fill joint opening to full and proper configuration. Apply in continuous operation. Ensure sealant fills entire joint and firmly contacts all surfaces.

.2 Tooling: Before skinning or curing begins, tool sealant with metal spatula.

.3 Provide concave, smooth, uniform, sealant finish. Eliminate air pockets and ensure complete contact on both sides of joint opening.

.4 Tool joints with one continuous stroke.

.5 Do not use water, soap, or alcohol to facilitate tooling.

.7 Complete horizontal joints prior to vertical joints. Lap vertical sealant over horizontal joints.

.8 Cleaning: Remove masking tape and excess sealant.

.1 Uncured sealant: Within 10 minutes of application, remove uncured sealant with solvent-dampened cloth, wearing solvent-resistant gloves.

.2 Completely cured sealant: Carefully cut or scrape away.

.9 Allow sealant to fully cure before adhesive is stressed. Use test specimens formed at time of sealant application to verify curing time. When cured, remove temporary glass supports.



.10 Ensure installed sealant is not painted as part of other construction operations.

.9 Field Quality Control

.1 Perform adhesion tests in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and ASTM C11Q3-0Q, Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Mand-Pull Tab.

.1 Perform 5 tests for 300 in (984 If) of applied silicone sealant and 1 test for each 300 m (984 ft) seal thereafter or perform 1 test p=r floor per building elevation minimum.

.2 For sealant applied between similar materials, test both sides of joint.

.10 Sealants failing adhesion test shall be removed, substrates cleaned, sealants re- installed, and re-testing performed.

.11 Maintain test log and submit report to Const/last indicating tests, locations, dates, results, and remedial actions.

3.8 Finishing

.1 Immediately remove sealant and compound droppings from finished surfaces. Remove labels after work is completed.

.2 Final cleaning of glass in accordance with Section 01 77 00.


Gypsum Board Section 09 29 00 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Gypsum board for exterior and interior walls, shaft walls, ceilings and bulkheads as indicated on drawings.

.2 Moisture and impact resistant board

.3 Wall tile backer sheathing.

.4 Metal Access doors

.5 Construct fire rated assemblies to meet required fire rating using listed assemblies.

.6 Coordinate lighting in bulkheads with electrical trade.




.3 Section 09 22 16.13 – Non Structural Metal Stud Framing

.4 Section 08 11 13 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

.5 Section 07 21 00 – Insulation

.6 Section 09 30 00 – Tiling


.1 Maintain temperature minimum 10 deg. C, maximum 21 deg. C for 48 hours prior to and during application of gypsum boards and joints treatment, and for at least 48 hours after completion of joint treatment.

1.4 Protection

.1 Protect work of this section against damage by others.

.2 Protect work of other sections against damage resulting from work of this section. Special care shall be taken to avoid spattering of surfaces adjacent to plastered areas, particularly aluminum and glass. All plaster droppings shall be promptly removed. Where machines are used, adjacent surfaces should be masked. Repair and make good damage to other sections caused by this work.

1.5 Job Conditions

.1 Verify all conditions and dimensions at the building.

.2 Ensure that surrounding areas are maintained within the recommended temperature range and have proper ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture.

.3 Report any unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Owner’s Representative. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Commencement of work shall imply acceptance of conditions.

1.6 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

.1 No outside storage is permitted. Do not remove wrappings until ready for use.

.2 Stack wallboard flat on clean, level and dry surface without overhanging boards. Protect bagged and boxed products from excessive moisture or wetting.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Gypsum Materials

.1 All gypsum panels shall conform to CSA A82.27-M91

.2 Acceptable manufacturers include:

.1 CertainTeed

.2 CGC

.3 Georgia Pacific

.4 Or approved equal.

.3 Interior Gypsum Board:

.1 Standard gypsum board: Refer to drawings for locations and thickness.

.2 Type ‘X’ (fire rated) gypsum board: 5/8” thick, refer to drawings for locations.

.1 Fire rated applications to meet ASTM E119, ASTM C1658 & CAN/ULC - S101 & CAN/ULC - S102.

.3 Abuse resistant gypsum board: Refer to drawings for thickness.

.1 All gypsum board located below 8’-0” A.F.F. to be abuse resistant to meet ASTM C1629.

.4 Mold resistant gypsum board: Refer to drawings for thickness.

.1 All gypsum board located in Washrooms & Janitor/Custodian rooms to be mold resistant to meet ASTM D3273.

.5 Wall Tile backer board:

.1 Glass scrim fibre faced water resistant gypsum board with moisture resistant core and fibreglass face mats and heat cured water resistant face coating to ASTM C1178/C1178M-04. Refer to drawings for thickness


.1 CertainTeed Diamondback Tile Backer.

.2 Or approved equal.

.4 Exterior sheathing board:

.1 Service grade: Exterior grade.

.2 Exposure to weather: Comply with manufacturer’s printed instructions. Provide protection prior to exposure for periods greater than manufacturer’s recommendations and warranty.

.3 Fibreglass mat faced on front and back sides and long edges, silicone-treated water-resistant core, to ASTM C1177/C1177M-04e1, fire rated where indicated.


.1 CertainTeed ‘GlasRoc Sheathing’.

.2 CGC ‘Securock Glass-Mat Sheathing’.

.3 Georgia-Pacific ‘Dens-Glass Gold’.

.4 Lafrage; Weather Defense Platinum Sheathing’.

.5 Fasteners



.1 Screws to be self-drilled, self-tapping, case hardened of length as recommend by manufacturer for each application.

.2 Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces.

.3 Ensure proper ventilation to eliminate excessive moisture.

.4 Screws for exterior application to be epoxy coated.

2.2 Materials

.1 Metal furring runners, hangers, tie wires, inserts, anchors: to CSA A82.30, galvanized.

.2 Furring channels: 58 ga core thickness galvanized steel channels for screw attachment of gypsum board. (Size as indicated on drawings)

.3 Screws: to CAN/CSA-A82.31.

.4 Laminating compound; as recommended by manufacturer, asbestos-free.

.5 Casing beads and transition beads, corner beads fill type: 0.5 mm base thickness commercial grade sheet steel with ZF075 zinc finish to ASTM A525, perforated flanges; one piece length per location.

.6 Sealant: to section 07 92 00.

.7 Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture, resistant, 3 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip, 12 mm (1/2”) wide, with self-sticking permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.

.8 Gypsum board suspension system: Donn Canada Limited, Rigid ‘X’ direct hung drywall suspension system. System components to consist of RMX-12 main beams, Rcx-4 cross channels and RAX-12 angle mould. All components hot dipped galvanized.

.9 Seals at all exposed screws on exterior gypsum panels: Bakor “Air Block 21” or a compatible caulking approved by gypsum manufacturer.

.10 Metal Access Doors: By respective trades.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Erection

.1 Comply with ASTM C840-07, GA-216, GA-600, and manufacturer's instructions, except as otherwise indicated. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system. Frame both sides of joints with furring and other supports as indicated.

.2 Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance with CAN/CSA-A82.31 except where specified otherwise.

.3 Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm (6”) of each corner and at maximum 600 mm (24”) around perimeter of fixture.

.4 Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200.

.5 Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, vents, etc.

.6 Install 19 x 64 mm furring channels parallel to and at exact locations of steel stud partition header track.

.7 Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings.

.8 Furr above suspended ceiling for gypsum board fire and sound stops and to form plenum areas as indicated.

.9 Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finished in accordance with CAN/CSA-A82.31, except where specified otherwise.



.10 Furr openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers.

.11 Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated.

.12 Install fire rated access panel. Coordinate with mechanical for exact location for proper clearances.

3.2 Application

.1 Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work is approved.

.2 Apply gypsum board to metal furring or framing, layers as indicated on drawings, using screw fasteners. Maximum spacing of screws 12” O.C.

.3 For acoustically rated walls, apply 12 mm (1/2”) diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cutouts around electrical boxes, ducts, and miscellaneous thru floor piping, in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustic sealant.

3.3 Installation

.1 Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm (6”) using contact adhesive of full length.

.2 Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings.

.3 Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant.

.4 Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break.

.5 Construct control joints of two back-to-back casing beads in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint.

.6 Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.

.7 Locate control joints where indicated, at changes in substrate construction, at approximate 30 feet spacing on long corridor runs and at approximate 45 feet spacing on ceilings.

.8 Install control joints straight and true.

.9 Construct expansion joints as detailed, at building expansion and construction joints. Provide continuous dust barrier.

.10 Install expansion joint straight and true.

.11 Splice corners and intersections together and secure to each member with 3 screws.

.12 Supply & install access doors for electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections and as indicated on drawings.

.1 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems.

.13 Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer’s directions and feathered out onto panel faces.

.14 Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces.



.15 Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is competed.

.16 Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface to board.

.17 Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for surface finish.

.18 Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth.

3.4 Control Joints

.1 Provide control joints set in board facing. Support control joints with studs or furring channels on both sides of joint.

.2 Provide control joints in required locations; including interior gypsum board, and exterior sheathing board with exterior finish system specified in Section 07 21 00 coordinate with Section 05 41 00.

.3 Review control joint locations with Consultant prior to installation.

.4 Install control joints where a partition, wall, or ceiling traverses a construction joint (expansion, seismic or building control element) in the building structure.

.5 Install control joints where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane exceeding 9100 mm (30 linear feet).

.6 Install control joints in interior ceilings:

.1 With perimeter relief:

.1 Linear dimensions between control joints shall not exceed 15000 mm (50 ft) and total area between control joints shall not exceed 230 m² (2500 ft²).

.2 Without perimeter relief:

.1 Linear dimensions between control joints shall not exceed 9100 mm (30 ft) and total area between control joints shall not exceed 84 m² (900 ft²).

.7 Install control joints in exterior ceilings and soffits so that linear dimensions between control joints shall not exceed 4000 mm to 5000 mm (13’-1” to 16’-4”) to, with no one dimension exceeding 2 x the other, and total area between control joints shall not exceed 20 m² (215 ft²).

.8 Install control joints where ceiling framing members change direction.

.9 Where a control joint occurs in an acoustical or fire-rated system, blocking shall be provided behind the control joint by using a backing material such as 16 mm (5/8") type X gypsum panel products, mineral fibre, or other tested equivalent. Construct through-wall control joints at fire-rated assemblies in accordance with assembly listing requirements.

.10 Line up control joints with joints in other construction or with center lines of mullions, columns, piers, or similar building elements, where accepted by Consultant.

.11 Install control joints straight and true.

.12 Ceiling height door frames may be used as control joints. Less than ceiling height frames shall have control joints extending to the ceiling from both corners. If control joints are not used, additional reinforcement is required at corners to distribute concentrated stresses.

.13 Board joints shall be located so that no joint will align with the edge of an opening unless control joints are to be installed at these locations.


Tiling Section 09 30 00 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Supply and install all floor and wall tile including base and aluminum trim as required as indicated on architectural drawings. Review all architectural drawings for extent of scope of work.

.2 Preparation of concrete and waterproofing to receive new floor tile.

.3 Preparation of masonry and gypsum walls (including waterproofing and levelling) to receive new wall tile.

.4 All grouting and adhesive materials.

.5 Marble window sills

.6 Control joints at all porcelain tile.

1.2 Related Work


.2 Section 09 65 19 – Resilient Tile Flooring Rubber Base




.1 Complete tile work in accordance with Installation Manual 200-2014, “Ceramic Tile,” produced by Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada (TTMAC), except where specified otherwise.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Samples:

.1 Submit duplicate 12” x 12” sample panels of each colour, texture, size and pattern of tile.

.3 Product Literature:

.1 Submit product literature for all materials including tiles, grouts, adhesives etc.

1.5 Environmental Conditions

.1 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at ceramic tile installation area above 12 deg. C for 48 hours before, during and 48 hours after installation.

1.6 Product Delivery, Storage and Handling

.1 Products shall be delivered, stored and handled in a manner to prevent damage. All quarry tile shall be stored at the work site in a manner which will prevent deterioration or contamination by foreign matter.

.2 Any material which has deteriorated or has been contaminated shall not be used for bonding or grouting quarry tile work and shall be removed from site.

.3 Provide 10% extra materials of floor tiles, walls tiles, and grout.

.4 Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials.

1.7 Job Conditions

.1 Take all required measurements at the building before commencing work.



.2 Examine the areas in which the work of this section is to be applied and determine the limitations, criteria and co-ordination required to relate to the physical and environmental conditions which will be existing at the time the work is scheduled.

.3 Immediately prior to proceeding with the application, examine the conditions including temperature of structural base and general are of work affecting the proper installation of the work in this division. Improper conditions shall be reported to the authority having jurisdiction and work shall not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. Installation of this Contractor’s work shall constitute acceptance of the base surface.

.4 Protect the work of this section and the work of others during installation and curing period and until such time as traffic will not affect the installation. Walls, dados and trim shall especially be covered during operations to minimize final cleaning. Any stained or damaged work shall be removed and replaced or made good to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

.5 Co-ordinate the work with the schedules prepared for the project and co-operate with other trades working on the project.

.6 This Contractor shall examine all drawings and specifications for all trades throughout the building for information affecting the work of this division.

.7 Notify all other trades when materials to be supplied by them to be set in the work of this trade will be required, also notify all other trades when and where the exact locations of openings, chases, etc. to be located by them will be necessary.

.8 Supply to other trades any articles that will be required to be built in to receive the work of this trade including bolts and anchors and notify all other trades of any preparations required to be made by them for properly attaching, securing and executing with work of this division.

.9 In the event of his failure to furnish correct and prompt information, openings or anchors etc. this Contractor shall complete all cutting or patching required at his own expense and make good to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative.

.10 All holes for piping and similar projections through tile and ceramic tile shall be executed by drilling to ensure neat fitting without resorting to small cut pieces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Material

.1 Porcelain Tile

.1 Porcelain tile for floor, walls and bases as outlined in drawings to CGSB CAN2-75.1-M77, Type IV, Class MR2. Bases to be 100mm x length of tile and have RE top cove and bottom edges of base tile to be straight.

.1 FF1: Floor Tile: Olympia Tile, Omnia Series, Size: 12” x 12”. Colour to be selected by architect. Or approved equal.

.2 WF1: Wall Tile: Olympia Tile, Colour & Dimension Series, Bright Finish, Size: 4”x16”. Colour to be selected by architect from Colour Group #3 or lesser. Or approved equal.

.3 Tile Base: Provide 100mm x length of tile, porcelain tile base at perimeter of all new porcelain tile applications along walls and permanent millwork. Provide pre-finished aluminum tile molding along top edge of all tile base.

.2 Floor and Wall tile to be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and to Specification Study and installation details No. 09300 of the Terrazzo, Tile and Marble Association of Canada as outlined in Part 3 of this specification.

2.2 Bond Coats & Grouts



.1 Bond coat for ceramic tile:

.1 Fast-set adhesive for large format products required as recommended by flooring manufacturer or Architects approved equal.

.2 Grouts for floor tile:

.1 Flextile 600 Polymer Modified Sanded Grout or architects approved equal.

.3 Grout for ceramic wall tile:

.1 Flextile 500 Polymer Modified Unsanded Grout or architects approved equal.

.4 Grout colours:

.1 Grout-1: Flextile 600 Polymer Modified Sanded Floor Grout, Colour to be selected by architect from standard colour chart, use with FF1

.2 Grout-2: Flextile 500 Polymer Modified Unsanded Wall Grout, Colour to be selected by architect from standard colour chart, use with WF1

2.3 Marble Sills

.1 Supply and install 15mm (3/4”), White Carrera chamfered marble window sills at all windows as indicated on drawings.

2.4 Transition/Expansion strips

.1 Supply and install Schluter Dilex AKWS expansion strips at max. 6.0m on center. Placement to be reviewed w/ Architect in field.

.2 Supply and install Schluter Deco AE 80 D transition strips 8 mm h. Location: Tile to Carpet.

.3 Supply and install Schluter Dilex HKS expansion strips at floor corners.

2.5 Tile expansion Joints

.1 Supply and Install Schulter-DILEX-KSN expansion joints at max. 6.0m on center. Depth as required.

2.6 Crack Isolation and Waterproofing

.1 Supply and Install Flextile Waterproofing Membrane in all wet areas.

.1 Meet ANSI A118.10 Specifications for Waterproofing

.2 Crack isolation membrane: Flextile, Roll-On Crack isolation Membrane or Architects approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Ceramic Tile

.1 Installation shall be according to manuals prepared by the Terrazzo, Tile & Marble Association of Canada.

.2 Apply tile or backing coats to clean and sound surfaces.

.3 Fit tile around corners, fitments, fixtures, drains and other built-in objects. Maintain uniform joint appearance. Cut edges smooth and even.

.4 Maximum surface tolerance 1:800.

.5 Make joints between tile uniform and approximately 1.5 mm wide, plumb, straight, true, even and flush with adjacent tile. Ensure sheet layout not visible after installation. Align patterns.

.6 Lay out tiles so perimeter tiles are minimum 1/2 size.



.7 Sound tile after setting and replace hollow-sounding units to obtain full bond.

.8 Make internal angles square, external angles bullnosed.

.9 Install divider strips at junction of tile flooring and dissimilar materials.

.10 Allow minimum 24 hours after installation of tiles, before grouting.

.11 Clean installed tile surfaces after installation and grouting cured.

.12 Make control joints where indicated. Make joint width same as tile joints. Fill control joints with sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00 - Sealants. Keep building expansion joints free of mortar and grout.

.13 Spread the mixed Triple Flex membrane directly over the entire substrate leaving a continuous membrane of at least 45 mil or 1/20” thick.

.1 As a waterproof membrane, spread the mixed Triple Flex membrane directly over the entire substrate leaving a continuous membrane of at least (45 mil or 1/20”) thick. To control the thickness of the membrane, comb Planicrete W with the notched Trowel and smooth over uniformly with the flat edge of the trowel.

.2 Waterproofing integrity requires a continuous (45 mil) membrane. Fill all voids, air bubbles or pinholes with a second coat of Triple Flex.

.14 Apply crack isolation membrane according to manufacturer's recommendations at all saw-cut joints in concrete floor where hard tile installations are noted in drawings.

3.2 Floor Tile

.1 Surface Preparation

.1 Concrete sub-floors must be properly cured for a minimum of 28 days or dried to a maximum moisture content of 16%. A minimum floor temperature of 50 degrees F. is to be maintained throughout the installation cycle.

.2 The sub-floor must be free of dirt, oil, soap, grease, membrane curing agents, etc. A caustic wash for the removal of such foreign matter followed by a thorough rinse to be used to remove any of the above.

.3 Steel-troweled floors should be acid-etched, using commercial muriatic acid (28%), diluted 2 parts water to 1 part acid. A bubbling action will be evident on the floor, and once this action has ceased, the acid will be neutralized by a reaction with the concrete. The entire area should then be rinsed thoroughly using clean water. Following the rinsing, all surface water should be removed. It is not necessary for the floor to be completely dry prior to the application of epoxy matrix, however, no free water should be left on the surface.

.2 Tile Floors and Base

.1 Inspect all tiles and base before placing on bond coat. All tile and base shall be free from imperfections in colour and shape which will impair the aesthetic quality and service of the installation.

.2 All tile and base shall be installed using thin-set method of application and in accordance to the manufacturer’s written specifications.

.3 Before commencing tile installation obtain from the Owner’s Representative pattern for laying the tiles and base and the colour selection of the grout.

.4 Prepare new floor slab where required. Fill low spots with mortar thin-set before preparing to install tile.

.5 Fit units around corners, fitments and other built-in items to maintain joint appearance. All edges to be smooth, even and free from chipping.



.6 Make joints 4 mm wide (Confirm with Consultant), uniform in size, straight and even with adjacent units.

.7 Layout so perimeter tiles are a minimum half size.

.8 Tile meeting adjacent flooring material shall have zinc alloy angle strip bonded to structural slab in accordance with details provided in this specification.

.9 Set tiles and base into bed and pound with rubber mallet to ensure full contact. Provide back buttering for all large format tiles.

.10 Allow minimum 24 hours after installation of tiles and base before grouting.

.11 Clean installed tile and base after grouting has cured.

.3 Clean Up

.1 Before final acceptance of the work all damaged work of this Section shall be made good, joints re-pointed as required, protection removed, and the entire work cleaned and in an approved manner so that it shall be turned over in perfect condition in all respects.

.2 Remove all debris and excess material not required by the contract promptly from site.

3.3 Wall Tile

.1 Prepare masonry wall surface as required to provide suitable even surface for placement of tile.

.2 Inspect all tiles and base before placing on bond coat. All tile and base shall be free from imperfections in colour and shape which will impair the aesthetic quality and service of the installation.

.3 All tile and base shall be installed using thin-set method of application and in accordance to the manufacturer’s written specifications. Before commencing tile installation obtain from the Owners Representative pattern for laying the tiles and base and the colour selection of the grout.

.4 Fit units around corners, fitments and other built-in items to maintain joint appearance. All edges to be smooth, even and free from chipping.

.5 Make joints 4 mm wide, uniform in size, straight and even with adjacent units.

.6 Layout so perimeter tiles are a minimum half size.

.7 Boundary of wall tile to receive Schluter finishing strips.

.8 Set tiles and base into bed and pound with rubber mallet to ensure full contact.

.9 Clean installed tile and base after grouting has cured.


Tectrum Section 09 51 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary

.1 Section Includes: Cementitious wood fiber plank acoustical ceiling system and suspension system.

1.2 References

.1 ASTM International:

.1 ASTM C635 Standard Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.

.2 ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.3 3. ASTM E1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.

.2 Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association (CISCA):

.1 CISCA Code of Practices.


Performance Requirements:

.1 Provide acoustical ceiling assembly designed and tested to provide surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) as follows:

.1 Flamespread: 0.

.2 Smoke Developed: 0.

.2 Provide acoustical ceiling system which has been manufactured, fabricated and installed to provide Noise Reduction

.3 Coefficient (NRC) rating as follows:

.1 1.0.

1.4 Submittals

.1 General: Submit listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedures Section

.2 Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data and installation instructions.

.3 Samples: Submit selection and verification samples: 6 inch × 6 inch (152 × 152 mm) sample for each wood fiber ceiling unit required, showing full range of exposed texture to be expected in completed work.

.4 Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following:

.1 Certificates: Submit manufacturer’s certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements


.1 Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity.

.2 Regulatory Requirements and Approvals: [Comply with requirements below.] [Specify applicable requirements of regulatory agencies.

.1 New York City Board of Standards and Appeals:

.1 Calendar No. L391-52-SM.



.2 Corps of Engineers Guide Specification:

.1 CE-219.01.

.3 International Code Council (ICC):

.1 ICC-ES Evaluation Report ESR-1112.

.4 City of Los Angeles Research Report:

.1 Report RR25165.

.5 State of California:

.1 DSA Number PA-008.

.6 Underwriters’ Laboratories of Canada (ULC) label.

.1 Structural Cement-Fiber Unit-535X

.3 Certifications: [Specify requirement for certifications.].

.4 Pre-installation Meetings: [Specify requirements for meeting.].

.5 Coordinate article below with Division 1 Product Requirements Section.

1.6 Delivery, Storage & Handling

.1 General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section.

.2 Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer’s original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

.3 Provide labels indicating brand name, style, size and thickness.

.4 Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer.

.1 Prevent soiling, physical damage or wetting.

.2 Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature

1.7 Project/Site Conditions

.1 Environmental Requirements:

.1 Do not install ceiling panels until building is closed in and HVAC system is operational.

.2 Locate materials onsite at least 24 hours before beginning installation to allow materials to reach temperature and moisture content equilibrium.

.3 Maintain the following conditions in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during and after installation:

.1 Relative Humidity: 65 - 75%.

.2 Uniform Temperature: 55 - 70 degrees F (13 - 21 degrees C).

1.8 Maintenance

.1 Extra Materials: Provide [A recommended percentage of] [Specify percentage.] additional material for use by owner in building maintenance and repair.

.2 Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with appropriate labels.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Acoustical Ceiling System

.1 Manufacturer: Tectum Inc.

.1 Contact: 105 South Sixth Street, Newark, OH 43055; Telephone: (888) 977-9691, (740) 345-9691; Fax: (800) 832-8869; E-mail: [email protected]; website: www.tectum.com.

.2 Proprietary Systems. Acoustical ceiling systems, including the following:

.1 Tectum Acousti-Tough Ceiling System:

.1 Material: Aspen wood fibers bonded with inorganic hydraulic cement.

.2 Thickness: 1 inch (25.4 mm) Provide with ½” (12mm) chamfer on long edge.

.3 Length: To suit clear span between trusses (ranging between 2400 and 3000mm).

.4 Width: 23 ¾ inches (603 mm).

.5 Color: Natural.

.6 Mounting Style: [“E-400”].

.3 Project Requirements Product Substitutions Procedures Section.

2.2 Product Substitutions

.1 Substitutions: No substitutions permitted.

2.3 Accessories

.1 Provide accessories as follows:

.2 Acousti-Tough Keep Clips:

.1 Material: Steel.

.2 Manufacturer Designation: ATC-100 for 1 inch (25.4 mm) panels

.3 Tectum Touch-Up Paint:

.1 Color: Natural.

.4 Panel mounting system:

.1 Direct fasten to underside of SIP panels.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Manufacturer’s Instruction

.1 Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the ceiling system manufacturer.

.2 Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements and industry standards applicable to work.

.3 Comply with CISCA Code of Practices.

3.2 Examination

.1 Site Verification of Conditions:

http://www.tectum.com/



.1 Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness, irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work.

.2 Do not proceed with installation of ceiling system until unacceptable conditions are corrected.

3.3 Installation

.1 General: Do not begin installation until materials sufficient to complete an entire room are received and prepared for installation.

.2 Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders.

.3 Symmetrically locate grid layout in each space. Coordinate work with other trades so that lighting fixtures, grilles and other ceiling fixtures work with grid layout.

.4 Do not use universal splices or other splices that would obstruct passage of recessed lighting fixtures through grid openings or limit fixture relocation upon flanges of ceiling grids.

.5 Support acoustic system from existing structure above.

.6 Space hangers not more than 6 inches (152 mm) from ends and not more than 4 feet (1219 mm) on centers.

.7 Field paint cut edges to match surface color and sheen.

Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units, if any, in manner shown on reflected ceiling plans.

3.4 Cleaning

.1 Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical ceilings, trim, edge moldings and suspension members to comply with manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

.2 Touch up any minor finish damage.

.3 Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

3.5 Protection

.1 Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner.


Acoustical Tile Ceilings Section 09 51 23 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Metal suspension of acoustic tile.

.2 Acoustic tile ceiling and accessories as indicated on drawings.




.3 Division 26 00 00 – Electrical Fixtures


.1 Fire-resistance rated floor/ceiling and roof/ceiling assembly: certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.


.1 Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation.

.2 Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15 deg. C and humidity of 20 - 40% before and during installation.

.3 Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation.


.1 Provide acoustical units amounting to 2% of gross ceiling area for each pattern and type required for project, free of any chips or cracks.


.3 Clearly identify each type of acoustic unit, including colour and texture.

.4 Deliver to Owner, upon completion of the work of this section.

.5 Store where directed by Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Ceiling tile shall conform to CAN2 - 92.1 - M77, acoustical units, prefabricated with white texture face.

.1 Tile: 24” x 48” & 24” x 24” ceiling tile shall be 5/8” thick, class A, Type: CGC “Radar”, Armstrong “Fine Fissured”, or approved equal.

.1 Properties:

.1 Noise Reduction coefficient .50 or better

.2 Flame Spread Rating 25 or under

.3 Smoke Developed 50 or under

.4 Fuel Contributed 25 or under

.5 Colour White

.2 Ceiling Tile Suspension System

.1 Mechanical suspension system for acoustic tile ceiling shall be Donn Products DXL Fast-Loc fire-rated, Bailey Metal Products B.E.F. fire- rated or Universal Sections Limited fire-rated suspension exposed tee system with main tee runners, heavy duty



type, spaced maximum 48’ O.C. with cross tee splines spaced maximum 24” O.C. All members to be white baked enamel finish.

.2 Systems shall be suspended to depths as indicated on drawings and be complete with all accessories required to install system.

.3 Wire hangers shall be No. 12 S.W.G. galvanized wire.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Do not install acoustical panels and tiles until work above ceiling has been inspected by respective Consultants.

3.2 Installation

.1 Install acoustical panels and tiles in ceiling suspension system.

.2 Installation: in accordance with ASTM C636 except where specified otherwise.

.3 Install suspension system to manufacturer’s instructions and Certification Organizations tested design requirements.

.4 Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected by Consultants.

.5 Secure hangers to overhead structure using attachment methods as indicated acceptable to Consultants.

.6 Install hangers spaced at maximum 1200 mm (48”) centers and within 150 mm (6”) from ends of main tees.

.7 Lay out center line of ceiling both ways, to provide balanced borders at room perimeter, and according to reflected ceiling plan.

.8 Ensure suspension system is coordinated with location of related components.

.9 Install wall moulding to provide correct ceiling height.

.10 Completed suspension system to support super-imposed loads, such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles and speakers.

.11 Support at light fixtures, and diffusers with additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm (6”) of each corner and a maximum 600 mm (24”) around perimeter of fixture.

.12 Frame at openings for light fixtures, air diffusers, speakers and at changes in ceiling heights.

.13 Finish ceiling system to be square with adjoining walls and within 1:1000.

3.3 Application

.1 Install screwed acoustic units to clean, dry and firm substrates.

.2 Install acoustical units parallel to building lines with edge unit not less than 50% of unit width with directional pattern running in same direction. Refer to reflected ceiling plan.

.3 Scribe acoustic units to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tight, terminate edged with moulding.

3.4 Interface with Other Work

.1 Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.

3.5 Cleaning

.1 Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces.

Resilient Tile Flooring Rubber Base Section 09 65 19 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Labour, equipment and materials necessary to complete tile flooring, base and rubber stair treads.

.2 Primers and adhesive cement.

.3 Installation of all Rubber bases see other Sections in Division 09.

.4 Reducer strips

.5 Metal edge strips

.6 Sealing and waxing of floor tile.

.7 Moisture testing of concrete slab.


.1 Concrete Work Section 03 00 00

.2 Carpet Tile Section 09 68 13

.3 Wood Flooring Section 09 64 26

1.3 Samples

.1 Submit duplicate of 12” x 12” tiles for approval.

1.4 Close-out Submittals

.1 Provide maintenance data for resilient tile flooring for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 77 00


.1 Provide 5% extra materials of resilient tile flooring, 2% base and adhesives


.3 Clearly identify each container of floor tile and each container of adhesive.

.4 Deliver to Owner, upon completion of work of this section.

1.6 Job Conditions

.1 Prior to commencing work, examine all surfaces on which resilient flooring will be installed. Report any necessary corrections to the Architect in writing immediately. Commencement of work prior to these corrections Implies the Contractor accepts the surfaces and job conditions.


.1 Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation area above 20 degrees C for a minimum of 7 days before, during and for 7 days after installation. The flooring material should be conditioned in the same manner for at least 48 hours prior to the installation. Contractor is to provide test results of moisture tests for concrete at a rate of one per 1,000 sq. ft. of area over 5,000 sq. ft. and one per 500 sq. ft. of area under 5,000 sq. ft.

1.8 Warranty

.1 Contractor is to provide a two-year unconditional warranty against any defects, be it material or labour. Contractor will cover complete replacement at no cost to Owner for any deficient areas at the discretion of the Owner.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Resilient tile : shall be 305mm x 305mm (12” x 12”) x 2mm thick conforming to CSA A126.1 in standard colours from manufacturer’s contract tile line. Vinyl composition tile shall be Tarkett Inc, Vinyl Composition Tile. Designated on drawings.

.1 Colours: VCT-1: Tarkett VCT, Size 12” x 12”, Colour to be selected by architect from manufacturer’s standard colour chart. Or approved equal.

.2 Reducer strips shall be 1 1/4” wide x 1/8” rubber and shall be used between resilient and concrete floors. Reducer strips shall be as manufactured by the Flooring Accessories Division of the Johnson Rubber Company and distributed by Albion Industrial Products, Toronto, Ontario or Architect’s approved equal. Colour to be selected by Architect.

.3 Rubber base conforming to CSA 126.5 Type-1 vulcanized 4” high, 1/8” thick, top set coved rubber base including pre-moulded external corners, shall be Johnsonite, Roppe or Architect’s approved equal. Location: Provide rubber base at perimeter of all new sheet flooring, vinyl tile, sealed concrete, and epoxy flooring applications, along walls and permanent millwork.

.1 Colours: RB-1: Colour to be selected by architect.

.4 Flooring adhesive shall be selected as per manufacturers instructions

.5 Sub floor filler shall be white premix latex requiring water only to produce cementious paste

.6 Metal edge strips - aluminum extruded smooth mill finish with lip extended under floor finish, shoulder flush with top of adjacent floor finish.

.7 Finish: Cleaning, sealing and waxing as per manufacturer’s instructions.

.8 Rubber Stair Nosing, Tread and riser shall be Roppe, solid colour rubber stair tread with contrasting colour grit tape insert for the visually impaired, #50 Light Duty Square Nose Tread – tread colour and grit tape to be determined by architect.

.1 Location: Each tread in Stair No. 1

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection

.1 Ensure concrete floors are dry, by using test methods recommended by tile manufacturer

.2 Ensure floor surfaces are smooth & level to + 1/8” in 10 feet.

.3 Commission agency to provide moisture testing of concrete slab to ensure manufacturer’s requirements.

3.2 Sub-Floor Treatment

.1 Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and other defects with sub-floor filler.

.2 Clean floor and apply filer; trowel and float to leave smooth, flat hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler cured and dry.

.3 All transitions from resilient tile flooring to Porcelain tile be feathered subfloor filler to achieve a flush condition.



.4 Seal and wax with three coats

3.3 Tile Application

.1 Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring manufacturer’s instructions. Do not spread more adhesive than can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.

.2 Lay flooring to patterns as outlined in drawings.

.3 Install flooring to square grid pattern with all joints aligned parallel to length and width of room, press with 100 lb roller to ensure full adhesion.

.4 Cut tile and fit neatly around fixed objects.

.5 Install feature strips and floor markings where indicated. Fit joints tightly.

.6 Continue flooring through areas to receive cabinets without interrupting floor pattern.

.7 Terminate flooring at centerline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar.

.8 Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.

.9 Quarter turn tiles.

3.4 Base Application

.1 Lay out base to keep number of joints at minimum. Base joints at maximum length available or at internal or premoulded corners.

.2 Clean substrate and prime with one coat of adhesive.

.3 Apply adhesive to back of base.

.4 Set base against wall and floor surfaces tightly by using 10 lb hand roller.

.5 Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000.

.6 Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. Use premoulded end pieces at flush door frames.

.7 Cope internal corners. Use formed straight base material for external corners.

.8 Built in cabinets in all rooms to have rubber base by this Contractor.

.9 Colours for base as selected by the Architect.

.10 Built in cabinet work in all rooms shall be installed with new rubber base and installation will be completed by this contractor. Colours will be selected by the Architect.

3.5 Protection of Finished Work

.1 Protect new floors until final inspection.

.2 Prohibit traffic of floor for 48 hours after installation.


Carpet Section 09 68 13 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Section 09 65 19 – Resilient Tile Flooring Rubber Base


1.2 References

.1 Contract Carpet Manual, Canadian Carpet Institute, Phone: (613) 232-7183.

.2 Floor Covering Specification Manual (1988), National Floor Covering Association, c/o Floor Covering Institute of Ontario, 25 Clairville Drive, Rexdale, Ontario, M9W 5Z7, Phone: (416) 675-4332.

.3 Standard for Installation of Commercial Textile Floorcovering Materials (1992), The Carpet and Rug Institute and The Canadian Carpet Institute, Phone: (613) 232-7183.

.4 Static Generation of Carpet, AATCC #134-1991, AATCC, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, 27709, U.S.A.

.5 Fadeometer, AATCC #16-1990, AATCC, P.O. Box 12215, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina, 27709, U.S.A.

.6 ASTM D418-92, Methods of Testing Pile Yarn Floor Covering Construction.

.7 ASTM D1055-90, Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Latex Foam.

.8 ASTM D1335-67(1972), Test Method for Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Coverings.

.9 ASTM D1423-92, Test Method for Twist in Yarns by the Direct-Counting Method.

.10 ASTM D3936-80, Test Method for Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing of Pile Floor coverings.

.11 ASTM E84-95, Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

.12 CAN/CGSB-4.2-5.2-M87, Linear density of Yarns (Cont'd) in SI Units.

.13 CAN/CGSB-4.2-18.3-M90/ISO 105-B02:1988, Textiles - Tests for Colourfastness - Part B02: Colourfastness to Artificial Light: Xenon Arc Fading Lamp Test.

.14 CAN/CGSB-4.2-27.6-M91, Flame Resistance - Methenamine Tablet Test for Textile Floor Coverings.

.15 CAN/CGSB-4.161-M87, Carpet for Residential Use.

.16 CAN/CGSB-25.20-95, Surface Sealer Floors.

.17 CAN/CGSB-4.129-93, Carpet for Commercial Use.

.18 CGSB 20-GP-23M-78, Cushion, Carpet, Flexible Polymeric Material.

.19 CAN/ULC-S102-03, Surface Burning Characteristics of Materials.

1.1 Submittals



.1 Submit product data sheet for each carpet, carpet tile, adhesive, concrete floor sealer and Ecologo products.

.2 Indicate recycled/reclaimed content of each component of carpet, carpet tile, undercushion.



.3 Indicate which recycling program (supplying mill or fibre producer) the carpet is eligible for and provide program parameters.

.4 For adhesives, indicate VOC in g/L during application and curing.

.5 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets acceptable to Labour Canada and Health Canada for carpet adhesive and seam cement. Indicate VOC content.

.3 Samples:

.1 Provide samples, min size 12” x 12” of each type and colour options specified herein.

1.2 Maintenance

.1 Provide maintenance data for carpet tile for Data incorporation into Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 78 00 – Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include information on recycling of carpet or carpet tile including manufacturer's reprocessing terms and which portions of materials are recyclable.

1.3 Maintenance Material

.1 Deliver 10% of each type, pattern and colour of carpet tile required for this project for maintenance use. Store where directed.

.2 Maintenance materials to be full size piece of same production run as installed materials.

1.4 Environmental

.1 Provide adhesive products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Choice Program Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Program Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-44 for Adhesives.

1.1 Qualifications

.1 Applied by installer trained and certified by carpet tile manufacturer for application of its products.

.2 Manufacturer's representative:

.1 Inspect substrate prior to commencement of work, during application of materials and upon completion of work.

.2 Provide technical assistance to the installer and assist where required in correct installation of carpet tile.

1.2 Guarantee

.1 Provide a manufacturer's written material guarantee stating that the carpet tile will remain free of manufacturing defects and deterioration for a period of fifteen years. Non-pro-rated guarantee.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Carpet: to CAN/CGSB – 4.129, except as noted.

.1 FF5: Carpet shall be Tarkett Commercial – Powerbond RS Carpet, Geoknit Collection. Size: 6’ wide. Colour to be selected by architect. Or architects approved equal.

.2 Carpet adhesive: Acrylic release type: low VOC, recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

.3 Sub-floor filler: premixed latex mixed with water to produce cementitious paste for concrete slabs.



.4 Rooms: Refer to architectural drawings.

.5 Metal edge strips – Aluminum extruded smooth mill finish with lip, extended under carpet tile, shoulder flush with top of carpet tile. Location: At edge of carpet tile abutting aluminum curtain wall windows at finish floor level.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Sub-floor Treatment

.1 Remove ridges and bumps. Apply sub-floor filler to low spots and cracks to achieve floor level to a tolerance of 1:500; allow to cure.

.2 Seal porous and powdery surfaces with concrete floor sealer.

.3 Remove dust, dirt, from existing surfaces.

3.2 Installation

.1 Cut and fit around projections through floor.

.2 Finish installation to present smooth wearing surface free from burring or embedded foreign matter.

.3 Vacuum finished area with commercial grade vacuum with a beater bar head.

.4 Ensure colour, pattern and texture match within any one area.

.5 Install binder bars at doorways and at exposed edges of carpet tile.

.6 Fit carpet tile tight to abutting vertical surfaces.

3.3 Carpet Tile

.1 Apply adhesive and install carpet tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with acrylic release type adhesive.

.2 Lay tiles with seams within manufacturer's tolerances.

.3 Installation Method: As approved by Consultant.

3.4 Clean up

.1 Remove all waste materials and completely vacuum finished installation.

.2 Follow up with a second damp wiping if necessary to remove all traces of dust generated from installation of carpet tile.


Painting Section 09 91 00 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 The work in this division consists of furnishing all materials, accessories, equipment, tools, transportation and performing all services and labour required to complete the Painting and Finishing Work for this job, all as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

.2 Refer to the drawings and specifications for information as to locations, extent, kinds and types of surfaces and materials required to be painted and/or otherwise finished. A complete job (in every respect) of Painting and Finishing is required regardless of whether every item is specifically mentioned herein or not. The number of coats of paint or other finish specified herein are in addition to any shop or prime coat specified under other divisions and are the minimum requirements for a complete job.

.1 Exterior

.1 All exposed metals including door frames, exposed lintels, roof ladders, Roof hatch railing, exposed piping, steel columns, etc.

.2 Interior

.1 All new drywall work and existing drywall within areas of work.

.2 All new and existing metal door frames, sidelight frames, metal window units.

.3 Exposed mechanical ductwork, convector covers, wall fin enclosure covers, grilles and registers.

.4 Exposed electrical conduits, electrical heating units, wall mounted electrical panel units and electrical panel covers.

.5 Finishing of all wood doors, either painted or stained as applicable.

1.2 Contractor Qualifications

.1 Work of this trade shall be executed by a company with a minimum of five (5) years proved experience in this field, having skilled personnel to expediently complete the work in an efficient and workmanlike manner.

1.3 Plant and Scaffolding

.1 This Contractor shall provide all plant and scaffolding necessary for the proper and efficient performance of the work.

.2 Construct and maintain scaffolding in a rigid, secure and safe manner.

.3 Erect scaffolding independent of walls. Remove promptly when no longer required. Design and construct scaffolding in accordance with CSA S29.2-M1980 including all updated revisions.

1.4 Preparation

.1 Remove dust, grease, rust and extraneous matter from all surfaces and proceed with work only when surfaces and conditions are satisfactory for production of a first class job.

.2 Touch up knots, pitch streaks and sappy spot with recommended sealer before priming.

.3 Fill nail and screw holes, holes, cracks, and other defects prior to the first coat, with non-shrinking filler, colour to match the finish. Bring filler flush with the adjoining surface.

.4 Clean galvanized metal thoroughly and apply recommended primer.

.5 Sand wood work smooth. Clean surface before proceeding with the application of the first coat.



.6 Protect all door hardware, marble sills, floor, existing millwork units, existing woodwork and ceiling areas (if not specified for refinishing), furniture, glass, etc., prior to the start of the painting application.

.7 Do not paint or finish in unclean or improperly ventilated areas. Do not paint in temperatures lower than 10oC or varnish in temperatures lower than 20oC.

.8 Do not proceed until all corrections (if required) have been made. Commencing work implies this Contractor’s acceptance to said surfaces, spaces and items.


.1 Number of coats specifies for all work hereafter shall not relieve the Contractor from installing additional coats at his expense over any work deemed unacceptable for finished surfaces to various materials to be painted.

.2 ALL ACCESS DOORS, GRILLES, CONVECTORS, ELECTRICAL LIGHT PANELS, EXPOSED PIPING (BE IT MECHANICAL OR ELECTRICAL) GENERALLY WILL BE PAINTED SAME COLOUR AND TEXTURE AS ADJACENT WALLS.

.3 Materials shall conform to CGSB 1-GP Standards as applicable.

.4 Do not apply paint or stain or varnish finish in areas where dust is being generated.

1.6 Delivery, Storage and Protection

.1 Upon delivery of material to site, the Contractor will be responsible for providing storage facilities in which all material must be placed in, for protection against damage, vandalism, theft, etc., such storage facilities will be provided for the complete duration of the project. A CO2 fire extinguisher of minimum 20 lbs. Capacity shall be kept in this area at all times.

.2 Keep stored materials covered at all times and take all necessary precautions against fire. All oil, rags and waste shall be remove from the building every night, take precautions to avoid danger of fire.

.3 ALL MATERIALS ON SITE WILL BE IN THE ORIGINAL CONTAINERS WITH LABELS INTACT.

.4 Provide metal pans or adequate tarpaulin to protect floors in areas for mixing of paints along with protecting all areas which do not require painting, from paint spotting and other soiling during the painting process.

.5 Protect the work at all times and assume full responsibility for defective work damaged by others and make good any such defects at no additional cost the Owner. Protect by covering other parts of the building during painting or staining or varnishing operations. Upon completion of the work, remove all paint, stain, and varnish spots from floors, glass and other surfaces to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representatives.

1.7 Colour Schedules

.1 Refer to drawings for colour location.

.2 Colours to be as listed below or approved equal.

.1 PT-1: Dulux, Colour to be selected by architect. Location: Main field

.2 PT-2: Dulux, Colour to be selected by architect. Location: Ceiling/Bulkhead

.3 PT-3: Dulux, Colour to be selected by architect. Location: H.M. Doors & Frames

.4 PT-4: Dulux, Colour to be selected by architect. Location: Accent

.5 ST-1: Dulux Wood Stain & Varnish, Colour to be selected by architect. Location: Pine wood as indicated on drawings



.3 Commencing work before obtaining an approved colour schedule is at the Contractor’s risk and any correction work will be at his expense.

1.8 Colour Accents

.1 Some rooms will have one wall painted an accent colour. Refer to the drawings for location and clarification.

1.9 Submittals

.1 Samples:

.1 Submit 12” x 12” samples of each of each paint colour, finish and spotting coat on hardboard for approval. Use plywood of matching species for sample of stain or varnish finish. Samples will be submitted at the request of the Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials General

.1 The manufacturer and paint number specified within Part 2 – Product is of ICI Glidden. The architect shall select all colours. Plan for minimum colour scheme.

.1 All paints, oils, thinners, shellacs, etc. shall be of best quality Premium Collection produced by manufacturer approved by the Owner’s Representative and their use and application shall be in strict accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. Each container shall bear an identifying label.

.2 Undercoats shall be of the same manufacturer as the finish coat.

.3 Linseed oil shall be pure linseed oil conforming to CSA specifications.

.4 Turpentine shall be pure, clear, gun spirits or turpentine conforming to CSA specifications.

.5 Putty shall be pure linseed oil putty made of three parts of dry whiting, one part lead and sufficient linseed oil and drier for proper working consistency and setting quality.

.6 Use products compatible with each other.

2.2 Flame Spread Rating and Smoke Developed Classification

.1 The flame Spread rating and smoke developed classification of finishing materials to comply with CAN4-S102, “Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies”. Provide products that meet or exceed the classification rating of:

.2 Glazed Wall Finishes:

.1 Flames Spread 5 or less, Smoke Developed 5 or less, Fuel Contributed 5 or less.

2.3 Materials Exterior

.1 Exterior metal materials shall receive three (3) coats, consisting of:

.1 One coat PPG Multiprime 4360 universal primer or approved equal.

.2 Two coats of Dulux Weatherguard Semi-Gloss or approved equal.

.2 All exposed ferrous metals except as specified following shall receive three (3) coats, consisting of:

.1 One coat PPG Multiprime 4360 universal primer or approved equal.

.2 Two coats of Dulux Weatherguard Semi-Gloss or approved equal

.3 All exposed galvanized metals shall receive 3 coats consisting of:



.1 One coat PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 or approved equal

.2 2 coats PPG HPC Alkyd Industrial Enamel 4336H semi-gloss series or approved equal

2.4 Materials Interior

.1 Metal Surfaces

.1 This Contractor shall paint all exposed ferrous metal work throughout including hollow metal door and frames, lintels, etc.

.2 Generally, the above work will have been given a prime coat under either sub-division of the contract but where this has not been done, the Contractor shall give the work one (1) coat of Primer. If the prime coat by other trades is found to be damaged, this Contractor shall make good such portions of touching-up with identical prime coat specified above.

.3 Hollow Metal Doors, door and window frames, stairs and railings including lintels shall receive three (3) coats consisting of:


.2 Two coats Glidden Ultra 94800 or approved equal

.4 Exposed mechanical ductwork, convector covers, wall fin enclosure covers, grilles and registers, electrical conduits, etc. shall receive three (3) coats consisting of:


.2 Two Coats Spraymaster 10112 or approved equal

.5 Exposed steel joists and metal deck, access ladders including miscellaneous metals and fire hose cabinets shall receive three (3) coats consisting of:

.1 One coat International PPG Pitt-Tech Plus 4020 or approved equal

.2 Two Coats Spraymaster 10112 or approved equal

.2 Drywall and Plaster Surfaces

.1 Drywall and plaster surfaces shall receive three (3) coats consisting of:

.1 One coat Dulux Lifemaster Primer # 59113 or approved equal

.2 Two coats Dulux Lifemaster Acrylic Pearl # 59425 or approved equal

.3 Masonry Surfaces

.1 Block masonry shall receive three (3) coats, consisting of:

.1 One coat Dulux X-pert Blockfiller # 36250 or approved equal

.2 Two coats Dulux Lifemaster Acrylic Semi-Gloss # 59211 or approved equal

.2 Concrete Surfaces

.1 One coat Dulux Lifemaster Primer # 59211 or approved equal.

.2 Two coats Dulux Lifemaster Acrylic Semi-Gloss # 59211 or approved equal

.4 Existing oil painted walls (where applicable)

.1 One coat Dulux Gripper 60000A or approved equal

.2 Two coats Glidden Ultra 94910 or approved equal

.5 Stain Grade Wood Veneer Doors (where applicable)



.1 One coat Dulux Professional Wood Finishes Interior Fast Dry Woodstain # PWF150 or approved equal

.2 Three coats Dulux Professional Wood Finishes Interior Polyurethane Oil Based Varnish # PWF110 or approved equal

.6 Painted Hardboard Wood Doors (where applicable)

.1 One Coat Dulux X-pert Aquacrylic Gripper Primer 60000A or approved equal

.2 Two Coats Dulux Lifemaster Acrylic Semi-Gloss #59211 Series or approved equal

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Inspection

.1 Examine the work of others prior to the application of any paint or finishing material. If any surface to be finished cannot be put in proper condition for finishing by customary cleaning, sanding and puttying operations, notify the Contractor immediately in writing.

.2 Do not proceed with finishing until surface is acceptable. Application of paint or finish to the surface constitutes acceptance of the surface.

3.2 Workmanship General

.1 The Contractor shall protect his work at all times and shall protect all adjacent work and materials by suitable covering or other method during progress of his work. Upon completion of the work he shall remove all paint and varnish spots from floors, glass and other surfaces. He shall remove from the premises all rubbish and accumulated materials of whatever nature not caused by others and shall leave his part of the work in clean, orderly and acceptable condition.

.2 Remove and protect hardware, accessories, device plates, lighting fixtures, factory finished work and similar items or provide ample in-place protection. Upon completion of each space, carefully replace all removed items.

.3 All materials shall be applied under adequate illumination, evenly spread and flowed-on smoothly to avoid runs, sags, brush marks, air bubbles and excessive roller stipple.

.4 Coverage and hide shall be complete. When colour, stain dirt or undercoats show through final coat of paint, the surface shall be covered by additional coats until the paint film is of uniform finish, colour, appearance and coverage, at no additional cost to the Board.

.5 All coats shall be dry to manufacturer’s recommendations before applying succeeding coats.

.6 All suction spots or “hot spots” in plaster and/or cement after the application of the first coat shall be touched up before applying the second coat.

.7 Apply all finished in accordance with CGSB 85-GP standards as applicable.

3.3 Preparation of Surfaces

.1 General

.1 Surfaces shall be clean, dry and adequately protected from dampness.

.2 Surfaces shall be free of any foreign materials which will adversely affect adhesion or appearance of applied coating.

.3 Mildew shall be removed, and the surface neutralized per the coating manufacturer’s recommendations.

.4 Efflorescence on any area will be corrected before painting.

.5 Remove doors, if necessary, to finish top and bottom edges.



.6 Do all necessary puttying of nail holes and cracks after first coat.

.7 Clean all mortar from surfaces of block masonry.

.2 Wood Surfaces

.1 Sand smooth wood surfaces to be painted or varnished or stained. Clean surfaces from all sanding dust before applying first coat, sand and clean between succeeding coats.

.2 Apply wood paste filler to nail holes and fishers. Tint filler to match stain for stained woodwork.

.3 Drywall and Plaster

.1 Remove dust, wax and grease prior to painting.

.2 Fill all minor irregularities with spackling paste and sand to a smooth, level surface. Exercise care to avoid raising nap of paper on gypsum board. Ensure all joint treatment has thoroughly cured.

.3 Prepare wallboard surfaces to CGSB 85-33M.

.4 Ferrous Metal Surfaces

.1 Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits and wipe dry with clean cloths.

.2 Remove rust, mill scale and defective paint down to sound surfaces or bare metal using scraper, sandpaper or wire brush as necessary. Grind, disc sand, etc., if necessary, to remove shoulders at edge of sound paint to prevent them from photographing through finish coats.

.3 Touch up all bare metal and damaged shop coats with specified shop coat primer.

.4 For ferrous surfaces with shop coats touch up, as above required, the first coat as listed in the following schedule will be applied to the dry nil film thickness specified.

.5 Galvanized Metal Surfaces

.1 Remove dirt and grease with mineral spirits and wipe dry with clean clothes.

.2 Painting shall conform to CGSB 85 GP 1M.

.6 Concrete and Masonry

.1 Patch large openings and holes and finish flush with adjacent surface. After priming, fill any remaining small holes with prepared patching material.

.2 Remove oil from poured-in-place concrete by washing concrete with xylol or exempt-type form oil solvent, or as required for complete removal.

.3 Concrete floors to be prepared with 10% muriatic acid etch and allowed to dry thoroughly.

3.4 Workmanship for Exterior Painting

.1 Exterior painting shall not be done when the surface temperature is below 50oF, while the surface is damp, or during cold, rainy or frosty weather. The substrate temperature must be 5oF or more above the dew point temperature while painting and during the coatings cure. Avoid painting surface while they are exposed to hot sun.

.2 Paint top, edges and bottoms of doors the same as exterior faces.

3.5 Workmanship for Interior Painting

.1 Enamel finish applied to metal shall be sanded with fine sandpaper and then cleaned between coats to produce an even surface.



.2 Interior doors shall have tops, bottoms and edges finished.

3.6 Painting Application

.1 Painting and finishing material shall be mixed and applied in strict accordance with the manufacturer’s directions for the particular materials and coats to be applied. Reducing when required shall also be done in strict accordance with the recommendation of the manufacturer for the particular materials.

.2 Employ skilled mechanics to ensure the very best workmanship. Materials to be applied by craftsmen experienced in the use of the specified product involved.

.3 Apply all material under adequate illumination. Spread evenly and flow on smoothly without runs or sags.

.4 All coats must be thoroughly dry before applying succeeding coats.

.5 Cover surfaces to be stained with a uniform coat and wipe off, if required.

.6 Between coats, sand enamel and varnish finish applied to wood or metal with fine sandpaper and clean to produce an even, smooth finish.

.7 Apply filler sealer and finish coats with roller to wall surfaces.

.8 Where existing work is to be cut, patched or added to, all surfaces shall be painted or touched-up to match present work as closely as possible. Existing work to be repainted shall be put into condition to provide proper adhesion to receive new paint coats.

3.7 Clean Up

.1 Upon completion of the work, the painter will be responsible for removal of all paint and varnish spots from floors, glass, furniture and all other surfaces to the approval of the Owner’s Representative.

.2 The painter will also at such time remove all tarpaulins, scaffolds, ladders, paint brushes, trays and all empty paint cans including cleaning solvents completely off the site premises.


Visual Display Surfaces Section 10 11 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Supply and install all tackboards & whiteboards as indicated on drawings.

1.2 Related Work



1.3 References

.1 Aluminum Association Designation System for Aluminum Finishes - 1980.

.2 CAN/CGSB-11.3- M87 Hardboard.

.3 CGSB 41-GP-30M- 82 Wall coverings, Vinyl-Coated Fabrics.

.4 CAN/CSA-A247- M86 Insulating Fibreboard.

.5 CSA 0121-M1978 Douglas Fir Plywood.

.6 CSA 0151-M1978 Canadian Softwood Plywood.

.7 CAN3-0811.1- M78 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit five (5) sets shop drawings for approval from the Architect.

.3 Samples

.1 Submit samples of finish for approval.


.1 Surface burning characteristics of materials: listed and labelled by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Equivalents

.1 The following specifications are based on Architectural School Products Ltd., Mississauga, Ontario or approved equal.

2.2 Materials

.1 Tackboards

.1 Tackboards shall be A.S.P. natural coloured cork factory prelaminate consisting of 1/4” thick composite cork laminated to 1/4” particleboard or masonite substrate under mechanical pressure. Bonding of materials by waterproof adhesive that will not delaminate or rupture at the contact surfaces. Colour to be natural cork.

.2 All tackboard shall meet the minimum requirements of the applicable Building Code and the Ontario Fire Marshall’s Office.

.3 Surface burning characteristics in accordance with CAN4-S102-M83, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies, as follows:

Cork Face Backing



.1 Flame Spread 55 135-150

.2 Smoke Developed 55 - 70 200

.3 Fuel Contributed 20 140

.2 Aluminum Trim

.1 Architectural School Products, the Architectural CLASSIC SERIES 200. Aluminum to be 6063T5 alloy with clear etched and anodized .002 stain finish from extruding draw marks and surface scratches.

.2 Perimeter - Architectural School Products No. 405 Trim for all tackboards and vertical jambs of whiteboards. 3/8” exposed face.

.3 Divider Bar - Architectural School Products No. 407 trim to separate tackboards and whiteboards as indicated on drawings. 3/8” exposed face.

.4 Chalktray - Architectural School Products No. 464 section for all writing/marker board elevations only.

.3 Writing/Marker Boards (whiteboards)

.1 Architectural School Products Model No. 3003. Board to constructed of porcelain enamel on steel, specifically created to accept marker pens and with surface that provides instant dustless erasing. The board will be supplied with a continuous clear anodized aluminum perimeter trim, including chalktray as specified above.

.2 Back up balancing sheet – 0.39 mm (28 gauge) zinc coated stretcher levelled steel in one unjointed section. Overall thickness of chalkboard lamination shall be one-half inch.

.3 Whiteboard to be jointed together by use of a 1.98 x 25 mm (14 gauge x 1”) wide steel spline and an extruded polyvinyl slotted insert to ensure a flush butt joint with a hairline appearance.

.4 Refer to working drawings and details for size and quantity.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Prior to commencement of erection, all surfaces to be checked for irregularities, trueness and rigidity and projections and defects to be reported immediately to the General Contractor for correction.

.2 On completion of the installation all materials and workmanship to be inspected for proper operation, rigidity and appearance, and defective material to be replaced with new materials prior to final inspection.

.3 The General Contractor to be responsible for providing a dry, warm storage area capable of being locked for the storage of all materials. The General Contractor shall unload all materials at the site and place in aforementioned storage room.

.4 During installation utmost care to be taken by workers to ensure the protection of the work from damage by other trades until the building is ready for occupation and handed over to the Owner.

.5 Protection of all materials during the painting operation shall be carried out by the use of polyethylene covering which shall be the responsibility of the painting contractor.

.6 Install tackboards and whiteboards in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions, parallel to floor with uniform vertical surface, plumb and level to provide rigid, secure surface.



.7 Install trim around tackboard and whiteboard panels. Make miters and joints to hair-line fit, free of rough edges. Use concealed brackets to reinforce and hold joints tight and flush. No exposed fasteners permitted. Overlap trim 1/4” onto panels.

.8 Mechanical Attachment:

.1 To concrete or solid masonry use lag screw and expansion bolts or screws and fibre plugs as appropriate for stresses involved.

.2 To hollow masonry use toggle bolts or equivalent.

.9 Adhesive Attachment

.1 Use recommended adhesive applied using spot method with daubs 2” diameter x 1” high at 8” o.c each way to adhere tackboard and whiteboard to wall. Press firmly into adhesive to ensure adhesion.

3.2 Cleaning

.1 Clean surfaces after installation using manufacturer’s recommended cleaning procedures.


Metal Toilet Partitions Section 10 21 14 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Supply and install new toilet partitions in rooms as indicated on drawings.


.1 Section 10 28 00 – Misc. Accessories.

1.3 References

.1 ASTM A 65 3/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process

.2 ASTM A 24 0/A 240M - Standard Specification for Chromium and Chromium-Nickel Stainless Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip for Pressure Vessels and for General Applications

1.4 Submittals


.2 Manufacturer's data sheets:

.1 Preparation instructions and recommendations.

.2 Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.

.3 Installation methods.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings to Architect showing layout, door swings, clearance to fixtures, hardware, and methods of anchoring.

.4 Samples:

.1 For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns.

.5 Operations and Maintenance Data:

.1 At completion of the project, furnish to the Owner two (2) copies of an Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manual.


.1 Mock-Up: Provide a mock-up for evaluation of surface preparation techniques and application workmanship.

.1 Finish areas designated by Architect.

.2 Do not proceed with remaining work until workmanship, color, and sheen are approved by Architect.

.3 Refinish mock-up area as required to produce acceptable work.

1.6 Delivery, Storage, And Handling

.1 Mark packaging with numbering or nomenclature used on shop drawings.

.2 Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Do not remove until immediately prior to final inspection.

1.7 Project Conditions

.1 Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. The Manual shall consist



of a hard cover three ring binder with the project name in the front. Include in the manual the following information: Maintenance instructions, Catalogue pages for each product, Name/Address and phone number of the Manufacturer and their Sales Agent, Copy of the final shop drawings.

1.8 Warranty

.1 The toilet partition manufacturer shall guarantee all powder coated toilet partitions by written certification, for a period of 1 year against defects in material and workmanship. Warranty does not include installation errors, improper usage or vandalism.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers

.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Hadrian Inc.; Shanahan’s; Global; General Storage Systems (GSS) London; or Architect’s approved equal.

.2 Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600; include the following with request for substitution:

.1 Product Data and finish sample submittals as described under Submittals.

.2 Full-size sample of partition, which will be returned to manufacturer.

2.2 Metal Compartments And Screens

.1 Toilet Compartments: Headrail braced.

.1 Compartment Depth and Width: As indicated on drawings.

.2 Door Width: 23 inches (610 mm), minimum; at wheelchair accessible compartments, 36 inches (915 mm), minimum.

.3 Door and Panel Type:

.1 Style: Standard (58 inch / 1473 mm high doors and panels).

.4 Doors and Panels:

.1 Top at 69.5 inches (1765 mm) above finished floor.

.2 Bottom at 12 inches (305 mm) above finished floor.

.5 Pilaster Width: As required to fit space; minimum 3 inches (76 mm).

.6 Pilaster Height: 81.5 inches (2070 mm).

.2 Urinal Screens: Wall Mounted (Where applicable)

.1 Depth: 18 inches (457 mm).

.2 Height: Top at 54 inches (1372 mm) and bottom at 12 inches (305 mm) above finished floor.

.3 Mounting: Stirrup brackets.

2.3 Metal Materials

.1 Powder Coated Steel Panels, Pilasters, and Doors: Hollow steel sheet construction with formed edges welded and ground smooth.

.1 Steel Face Sheet: Panel flatness zinc coated galvanneal steel, ASTM A 65 3/A 653M Grade 33

.2 Edges: Interlocked under tension, welded, with roll-formed oval crown locking bar; corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.



.3 Core: Honeycomb with maximum cell size of 1 inch (25 mm), laminated under pressure to face sheets.

.4 Doors: 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with 22 gauge (0.8 mm) thick face sheets.

.5 Panels: 1 inch (25 mm) thick, with 22 gauge (0.8 mm) thick face sheets.

.6 Headrail Braced Pilasters: shall be 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) thick, with 20 gauge (0.9 mm) thick face sheets. Top of headrail braced pilasters to be reinforced with 20 gauge (0.9mm) channel for strength and rigidity.

.7 Finish: High performance powder coating, electrostatically applied and oven cured to smooth uniform finish; preparation by cleaning and phosphatizing.

.8 Color:

.1 PART-1: Hadrian Inc., Colour: Selected by Architect from standard colour chartMale Washrooms

.2 PART-2: Hadrian Inc., Colour: Selected by Architect from standard colour chart Female Washrooms

.2 Masonite Reinforcing.

.1 Doors to be reinforced with 1/8 inch (6mm) thick Peg-Board Masonite.

.3 Attachments:

.1 Stirrup and U-Type Brackets:

.1 For panel-to-wall and pilaster-to-wall connections provide a minimum of 2- stirrup brackets per panel, 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) deep screwed to panels and walls.

.2 For panel-to-pilaster connections provide U-type brackets: 1-3/8 inch (35mm) deep.

.3 Material: Stamped stainless steel, No.4 brushed finish.

.4 Fasteners: Stainless steel Torx Screws.

.4 Headrail: Extruded aluminum, double-ridge anti-grip design, anodized finish, 1 by 1-5/8 inches (25 by 41 mm) with 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) wall thickness; attached to wall and pilasters with manufacturer's standard fittings; joints must occur at pilaster.

.5 Pilaster Shoes: Type 304 stainless steel, 4 inches (102 mm) high, one-piece welded design.

.1 Finish: No. 4 brushed.

.6 Door Hinges:

.1 Continuous Hinges:

.1 Stainless Steel: 16-gauge (1.5 mm), full-height continuous piano hinge, No. 4 brushed stainless steel finish, with a stainless steel hinge pin.

.7 Stop and Keepers:

.1 Continuous stop and keeper: extruded aluminum, full length of door, with 1/4 inch (6 mm) wide continuous rubber bumper locked into place. Finish to match door and pilaster finish.

.8 Door Latches: Concealed, mortised turn latch with face plate flush with edge face of door; exterior turn slot for emergency access.

.1 On wheelchair access doors provide turn lever that does not require fingertip grip.



.2 Material: Cast stainless steel, No.4 brushed finish.

.9 Door Pulls for Outswinging Doors: Pulls mounted on outside.

.1 Material: Cast stainless steel, No.4 brushed finish.

.10 Door Stops – Dome style Stainless steel door stop. Must not protrude.

.1 Fasteners: Provide fasteners of type appropriate to members being fastened and substrate to which they are being fastened. All fasteners must be Stainless Steel Torx head.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.

.2 If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

.2 Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.

3.3 Installation

.1 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in locations indicated on drawings.

.2 Adjust hardware for proper operation of doors.

3.4 Protection

.1 Protect installed products until completion of project.

.2 Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION 10 21 14.

Misc Accessories Section 10 28 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Supply and install all accessories as listed in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. All products must be from same manufacturer unless particular product cannot be supplied by manufacturer. Alternates are listed.

.2 Confirm all questions and locations with Architect prior to installation.

.3 Exterior items such as Bollards and bike racks.

.4 Contractor to install washroom accessories provided by the owner.


.1 Section 06 10 00 – Rough and Finish carpentry

.2 Division 26 00 00 – Electrical

1.3 Submittals


.2 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit five (5) sets of shop drawings to Architect for review.

.2 Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough-in-frame, building-in details of anchors for grab bars.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Washroom Accessories

.1 Fixed Mirror

.1 Supply and Install over each lavatory, mirrors of one of the following manufacturer’s models: Location: One every lavatory unless specified to have a fixed tilted mirror.

.1 Watrous (ASI) Model No. 0620-1830

.2 Bobrick Model No. B-165 1830

.3 Bradley Model No. 781-1830

.4 Frost Model No. 941-1830

.2 Fixed Tilted Mirror

.1 Supply and install over each lavatory, mirrors of one of the following manufacturer’s models. Location: One every lavatory in room 110.

.1 Watrous (ASI) Model No. 0535-1830

.2 Bobrick Model No. B-293 1830



.3 Paper Towel Dispensers

.1 Supplied by owner – installed by contractor.

.4 Toilet Tissue Dispensers

.1 Supplied by Owner – installed by contractor.



.5 Soap Dispensers

.1 Supplied by Owner – Installed by contractor.

.6 Stainless steel shelf

.1 Supply and install stainless steel shelves, at a rate of one unit for each single toilet washroom, of one of the following manufacturer’s models: Room 110.

.1 Bobrick Model No. B-295x18



.7 Coat Hook

.1 Supply and install one (1) coat hook in Universal Washroom. Located in accordance with Ontario Building Code 3.8.3.8. of one of the following manufacturer’s models:

.1 Watrous Model No. 123

.2 Bobrick Model No. B-983

.3 Bradley Model No. SA36

.4 Frost Model No. 1150

.8 Sanitary Disposal

.1 Frost Napkin Disposal Unit Stainless Steel 641

.9 Sharps Disposal

.1 Surface mounted sharps disposal

.1 Bobrick Model No. B-350169

2.2 Materials

.1 Sheet steel: commercial quality to ASTM A526M with ZF001 designation zinc coating.

.2 Stainless steel sheet metal: to ASTM, Type, with finish.

.3 Stainless steel tubing: Type, commercial grade, seamless welded, 1.2 mm wall thickness.

.4 Fasteners: concealed screws and bolts hot dip galvanized, exposed fasteners to match face of unit. Expansion shields fibre, lead or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and its intended use.

2.3 Fabrication

.1 Weld and grind joints of fabricated components flush and smooth. Use mechanical fasteners only where approved.

.2 Wherever possible form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.

.3 Brake from sheet metal work with 1.5 mm radius bends.

.4 Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents.

.5 Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings.

.6 Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site at appropriate time for building-in. Provide templates, details and instructions for building in anchors and inserts.

.7 Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building framing.

2.4 Finishes



.1 Chrome and nickel plating: to ASTM B456, stain polished finish.

.2 Manufacturer’s or brand names on face of units not acceptable.

2.5 Grab Bars

.1 Supply and install the following grab bars.

.1 All Barrier Free Toilet stalls or Washrooms

.1 600mm long 36mm dia. stainless steel finish with knurled grip and concealed fasteners from one of the following manufactures.

.1 Frost 1001 - 24

.2 Bobrick 5806 - 24

.3 Watrous (ASI) 3100 - 24

.2 750mm x 750mm ‘L’ Bar – 36mm dia. stainless steel finish with knurled grip and concealed fasteners from one of the following manufactures.

.1 Frost 1003 – 30 x 30

.2 Bobrick 5806 – 30 x 30

.3 Watrous (ASI) 3100 – 30 x 30

.3 Flip up folding grab bars: Shoppers Home Health Care type: Model L12603.070 Hinged arm support, L12608.000 Console and L12617-000 toilet roll holder. Finish: coated stainless steel. Located in new washroom W5.

.4 24” long 1 1/2" dia. stainless steel finish with knurled grip and concealed fasteners from one of the following manufactures.

.1 Frost 1001 – 24

.2 Bobrick 5806 x 24

.3 Watrous (ASI) 3100 x 24

2.6 Exterior Items:

.1 Supply and install the following exterior items

.1 Bike Racks

.1 Maglin MBR 201G series galvanized H.S. Steel tube direct buried as per site plan.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install and secure accessories rigidly in place as follows:

.1 Stud walls: install steel back-plate to stud prior to plaster or drywall finish. Provide plate with treaded studs or plugs.

.2 Hollow masonry units or existing plaster/drywall: use toggle bolts drilled into cell/wall cavity.

.3 Solid masonry, marble, stone or concrete: use bolt with lead expansion sleeve set into drilled hole.

.4 Toilet/shower compartments: use male/female through bolts.

.2 Use tamper proof screws/bolts for fasteners.



.3 Fill units with necessary supplies shortly before final acceptance of building.

.4 Install exterior items as per manufacturer’s recommendation. Cast Bollards in concrete as per manufacturer’s recommendations.

PART 4 - END OF SECTION 10 28 00

Entrance Mats & Grids Section 12 48 40 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Conform to Contract Requirements and Division 1 - General Requirements as part of this Section.

1.2 Summary:

.1 This section includes the following types of entrance flooring systems:

.1 Floor Grids & Frame Assemblies

1.3 Related Work:

.1 Section 03 00 00 - Concrete

.2 Section 09 30 00 - Tiling

1.4 References:

.1 ASTM B221-02: Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes.

.2 ASTM D2047-96: Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Floor Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine.

.3 ASTM E648-03: Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.

1.5 Submittals:



.1 Catalog cuts, material safety data sheets (MSDS), brochures, specifications; preparation and installation instructions and recommendations; storage, handling requirements and recommendations.

.3 Samples:

.1 Submit samples of each type of color for exposed floor grid, frame and accessories required.

.4 Operations and Maintenance data:

.1 In the form of manufacturer's printed instructions for cleaning and maintaining floor grids.

1.6 Warranty:

.1 Installation of all materials shall be warranted for a period of two (2) years from date of substantial completion of the project, and shall include all labour and material for repair or replacement of any defective material or workmanship.


.1 Flammability in accordance with ASTM E648, Class 1, Critical Radiant Flux, minimum 0.45 watts/m2.

.2 Slip resistance in accordance with ASTM D-2047-96, Coefficient of Friction, minimum 0.60 for accessible routes.

.3 Standard rolling load performance is 136 kg (300 lb.) / wheel with larger loading requirements as specified (load applied to a solid 125mm x 50mm (5" x 2") wide polyurethane wheel, 1000 passes without damage).

.4 Single Source Responsibility: Obtain floor grids and frames from one source of a single manufacturer.



.5 Utilize superior structural aluminum alloys 6105-T5 & 6016-T6 for rail components.

1.8 Delivery, Storage and Handling:

.1 Deliver materials to the project site ready for use and fabricated in as large sections and assemblies as practical, in unopened original factory packaging clearly labelled to identify manufacturer.

1.9 Project Conditions:

.1 Field measurements: Check actual openings for grids by accurate field measurements before fabrication. Record actual measurements on final shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work.

.2 Coordinate frame installation with concrete construction to ensure recess and frame anchorage are accurate and that the base is level and flat. Defer frame installation until building enclosure is complete and related interior finish work is in progress.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturers:

.1 Drawings and specifications are based on manufacturer's literature from Construction Specialties, Inc. unless otherwise indicated. Other manufacturers must comply with the minimum levels of material and detailing indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

2.2 Materials:

.1 Type: Pedigrid G1RR – Recycled Rubber insert colour 1214 Take One. Size as per drawings

2.3 Floor Grids:

.1 G1RR Pedigrid rails to be extruded aluminum with depth of minimum 1 ½”. Rail finish in clear anodized. Provide level base frame and drain pan.

2.4 Lock Down Measures:

.1 Surface lock down shall be a solid, surface mounted device to secure the matt to the concrete surface, made from Type 304 stainless steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination:

.1 Verification of conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

.2 Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 Preparation:

.1 Manufacturer shall offer assistance and guidance to provide a template of irregular shaped grid assemblies to ensure a proper installation.

.2 Coordinate with General Contractor to ensure proper sizing of floor recesses and frame installation.

3.3 Installation:

.1 Install the work of this section in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 Set grid at height recommended by manufacturer for most effective cleaning action.

.3 Coordinate top of grid surfaces with bottom of doors that swing across to provide ample clearance between door and grid.



.4 Surfaces in contact with concrete shall be protected from contact with a coat of bituminous paint to protect from galvanic or corrosive action.

3.4 Cleaning:

.1 It is important to the life cycle of the entrance mat that a maintenance schedule be developed which includes regular vacuuming and extraction that correctly matches the amount of traffic the mat incurs.

3.5 Protection:

.1 After completing required frame installation and concrete work, provide temporary filler of plywood or fiberboard in recess, and cover frames with plywood protective flooring. Maintain protection until construction traffic has ended and project is near time of substantial completion.

.2 Defer installation of floor grids until time of substantial completion of project.




PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Conform to the General Provisions of Section 21 05 01.


.1 Thermal and Moisture Protection Division 07

.2 Basic Materials and Methods Section 23 05 01


.1 Conform to the 2012 Ontario Building Code (OBC) Compendium containing the Building Code Act, and including all amendments.

.2 Conform to CAN/ULC-S115-11 "Standard Method of Fire Tests of Firestop Systems".

1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 23 01 00, paragraph 1.04 for the following items:

.1 Firestopping materials.

.2 Manufacturer’s literature and installation instructions.

.3 Manufacturers Letter of Certification that project meets or exceeds specified requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Fire Stop Material for Service Penetrations

.1 Provide materials and systems capable of maintaining effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases.

.2 Comply with the requirements of CAN/ULC-S115-11, and do not exceed opening sized for which they have been tested.

.3 Systems to have an F rating not less than the fire protection rating required for closures in a fire separation.

.4 The fire stopping materials are not to shrink, slump or sag and to be free of asbestos, halogens and volatile solvents.

.5 Firestopping materials are to consist of a component sealant applied with a conventional caulking gun and trowel.

.6 Fire stop materials are to be capable of receiving finish materials in those areas which are exposed and scheduled to receive finishes.

.7 Acceptable Manufacturers:

.1 Hilti

.2 AD Fire Protection Systems

.3 3M Fire Protection Systems

.4 Rectorseal Corporation (Metacaulk)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Confirm location and extent of fire separations from architectural drawings.



.2 Inspect surface to be firestopped. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Consultant in writing prior to commencement. Initiation of work to be deemed as acceptance of conditions and surfaces.

.3 Store all materials in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations as to acceptable ambient temperatures. Damaged or deteriorated materials are not to be used and are to be removed from the site.

.4 Install firestopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with ULC listing and manufacturer’s instructions in all piping, tubing, chimney and duct etc. penetrations in new or existing fire separation to provide temperature, flame and smoke rated seals not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly, or separation.

.5 Seal all holes made by through-penetrations and unpenetrated openings to ensure continuity and integrating of fire separation, including where existing component or device has been removed.

.6 Notify Consultant and/or Authority having jurisdiction for inspection prior to concealing or enclosing fire stopping materials and service penetrations.

.7 Remove excess material and debris and clean adjacent surfaces immediately after application. Leave in a tidy condition.


Fire Extinguishers Section 21 24 16 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Install and test all Work in accordance with the requirements of the OBC, National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 14), latest issues, the Ontario Fire Code and the local authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Arrange for and have inspected all Work by the local authority having jurisdiction.

.3 All materials - CSA, ULC and HEPC of Ontario approved for the intended applications.

1.3 List of Shop Drawings

.1 Do not start Work under this Section until Shop Drawings have been reviewed.

.2 Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with paragraph 1.04. Section 23 01 00 for the following:

.1 Fire extinguishers and cabinets.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

.1 Extinguishers:

.1 Provide Williams Brothers model WBDL-ABC5, 5 lb. (2.27 kg) extinguishers with a rating of 3A-10BC complete with a wall bracket for exposed installations.

.2 Provide Williams Brothers model WBDL-ABC10, 10 lb. (4.54 kg) extinguishers with a rating of 6A-80BC complete with a wall bracket for exposed installations.


.1 Flag Fire Equipment Ltd.

.2 Chubb Fire Security.

.3 National Fire Equipment Ltd.

.4 Wilson and Cousins.

.2 Cabinets:

.1 Provide National Fire Equipment model 102R recessed (4" (100mm) wall) fire extinguisher cabinets for installation of a 5 lb. (2.2 kg.) fire extinguisher. Fixture Reference FEC.


.1 Canadian Fire Hose Corp.

.2 Impaction Fire Equipment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Fire Extinguishers and Cabinets

.1 Extinguishers:

.1 Install units fully charged and free of any defects.

.2 Install the extinguishers immediately prior to substantial performance inspection and be responsible for their security until the building has been accepted.

Fire Extinguishers Section 21 24 16 Page 2 of 2


.2 Cabinets:

.1 Turn over cabinets to the block layer for installation within block walls, fasten to framing provided by others in metal stud partitions. Mount flush with wall.

.2 Mount cabinets 5'-0" (1500mm) A.F.F. to top of cabinet.

.3 Wall Hangers:

.1 Mount hangers securely to wall so that top of extinguisher is 5'-0" (1500mm) A.F.F.

.4 General:

.1 Comply with the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 10), the Ontario Building Code (OBC) and the Ontario Fire Code.


Common Work Results For Plumbing Section 22 05 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in ON, Canada.

.2 Indicate on drawings:

.1 Mounting arrangements.

.2 Operating and maintenance clearances.

.3 Shop drawings and product data accompanied by:

.1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.

.2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.

.3 Points of operation on performance curves.

.4 Manufacturer to certify current model production.

.5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes.

.4 In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: use MCAC Shop Drawing Submittal Title Sheet. Identify section and paragraph number.

.4 Recycled Content:

.1 Submit listing of recycled content products used, including details of required percentages or recycled content materials and products, showing their costs and percentages of [post-consumer] [post-industrial] content, and total cost of materials for project.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual.

.1 Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with Consultant before final inspection.

.2 Operation data to include:

.1 Control schematics for systems including environmental controls.

.2 Description of systems and their controls.

.3 Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances.

.4 Operation instruction for systems and component.

.5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.



.6 Valves schedule and flow diagram.

.7 Colour coding chart.

.3 Maintenance data to include:

.1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment.

.2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.

.4 Performance data to include:

.1 Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete.

.2 Equipment performance verification test results.

.3 Special performance data as specified.

.4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.5 Approvals:

.1 Submit 1 copy and USB of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Consultant for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless directed by Consultant.

.2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Consultant.

.6 Additional data:

.1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions.

.7 Site records:

.1 Consultant will provide 1 set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring.

.2 Transfer information weekly to reproducible, revising reproducible to show work as actually installed.

.3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.

.4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection.

.8 As-built drawings:

.1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize production of as-built drawings.

.2 Identify each drawing in lower right-hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED (Signature of Contractor) (Date).

.3 Submit to Consultant for approval and make corrections as directed.

.4 Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built drawings.

.5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

.9 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.



1.3 Maintenance Material Submittals


.2 Furnish spare parts as follows:

.1 One set of packing for each pump.

.2 One casing joint gasket for each size pump.

.3 One glass for each gauge glass.

.3 Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers.

.4 Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section [01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements] [with manufacturer's written instructions].

.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address.

.3 Storage and Handling Requirements:

.1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.

.3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Not Used

.1 Not used.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.



.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of approval to proceed from Consultant.

3.2 Painting Repairs and Restoration

.1 Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting.

.2 Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.

.3 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.

3.3 System Cleaning

.1 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units.




.1 Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section [01 45 00 - Quality Control] and submit report as described in PART 1 -ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Services:

.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

.2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.5 Demonstration

.1 Consultant will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.

.2 Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.

.3 Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio-visual aids as part of instruction materials.

.4 Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.

.5 [Consultant] will record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.

3.6 Cleaning

.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section [01 74 00 - Cleaning].

.1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.

.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning.


3.7 Protection

.1 Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system.


Plumbing Section 22 05 01 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 General Provisions


.2 Provide work under this Section as shown or specified and in accordance with the requirements of the Contract documents.


.1 Membrane Roofing Section 07 50 00

.2 Plumbing Insulation Section 22 07 00

.3 Plumbing Piping Section 22 10 00

.4 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim Section 22 40 00


.6 Insulation Section 23 07 00


.1 Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

.2 Comply with local bylaws and standards.

.3 Comply with regulations under the Ontario Electrical Safety Code (latest edition).


.5 Conform to National Plumbing Code of Canada current edition.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with paragraph 1.04 Section 23 01 00 for the following equipment items:

.1 Plumbing Specialties

.2 Floor Drains

.3 Cleanouts

.4 Fixture Carriers

.5 Roof Vent Caps

.6 Thermostatic Mixing Valves

.2 Submit inspection certificates obtained from local inspection authorities.

.3 Submit certificates indicating that all required testing has been completed.

1.5 Approval

.1 Additional manufacturers wishing to bid products other than the product specified herein, are to submit to the Consultant prior to Tender close a list of three past installations of products similar to those listed. Complete catalogue data along with deviations from the product specified are to be noted in the submittal to the Consultant. The manufacturer guarantees the proposed substitute product to comply with the product specified and as detailed on the Drawings, unless the deviations are so noted in the submittal for approval.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Floor and Hub Drains



.1 Floor drains to be Watts/Ancon FD-200-L, Smith SQ4-1753-D-B5HD, or Zurn in 3" (75 mm) outlet size. Drain to be complete with trap and 1/2" (13mm) thick, 5" (125mm) x 5" (125mm), polished nickel bronze adjustable strainer. Where shown as FFD, provide Watts Ancon FD-100-G, Smith SQ4-1753-D-3591, or Zurn fitted with 9"(225mm) x 4"(100mm) oval funnels. Drains in showers and similar wet areas to have "C" membrane clamp.

.2 Floor drains in utility, service, storage, etc. areas shall be Watts/Ancon FD-100, Smith 2005-A5HD, or Zurn, 3" (75 mm) outlet size, 1/2" (13mm) thick nickel bronze strainer.

.3 Hub drains shall be Watts/Ancon FD-200-DD, Smith 2005-2645, or Zurn in 3" (75 mm) outlet, with satin bronze hub.

2.2 Roof and Canopy Drains

.1 All new roof and canopy drains to be provided by Division 7. This Division is to connect piping to drains.

2.3 Cleanouts

.1 All cleanouts to be made with standard TY branch of Y branch and bend using Watts/Ancon CO-200-S, Smith 4040, or Zurn floor type cleanouts with square nickel bronze tops.

.2 Cleanouts in finished walls to be concealed with Watts/Ancon, Smith 4420, or Zurn square, ssecured nickel bronze access covers with frames. Size of frame to suit cleanout and block module.

.3 In floor with terrazzo finish, use Watts/Ancon CO-200-US, Smith 4200, or Zurn inlay type cleanout with square recessed nickel bronze access cover and frame.

.4 In floors with waterproof membrane, use Watts/Ancon CO-100-C-S-1, Smith 4020-FC, or Zurn floor level cleanout with anchoring flange and membrane clamp, satin nickel bronze top.

.5 In carpet floors, use Watts/Ancon CO-100-CF, Smith 4020Y, or Zurn with carpet clamping flanges.

.6 Cleanouts to be placed where shown, but whether shown or not, there is to be a cleanout at the base of every soil stack Watts/Ancon CO-460(H), Smith 4510, or Zurn. Installcleanout on main building drain just before it leaves the building.

.7 In walls for urinals, use Watts/Ancon CO-590-B-RD, Smith SQ4-1819, or Zurn wall cleanout with round polished steel access cover.

2.4 Trap Seal Primer

.1 Trap seal primer to be Watts/Ancon MS-810, with bronze body, renewable bronze valve seat and internal vacuum breaker. All trap seal primers shall be (depending on location) either fully exposed or easily accessible through a suitable sized access door. Acceptable manufacturers: Smith 2699, Zurn.

2.5 Hose Bib

.1 Drawing reference HB. Hose bib to be Crane Model C-5046 Citadel, faucet with hose end spout, indexed 5-rib metal handle, 1/2" (13 mm) male inlet and adjustable screw flange. Provide Watts NF8 non-removable hose connection vacuum breaker. Acceptable manufacturers: Acorn 8121CP, Delta.

2.6 Wall Hydrants

.1 Drawing reference FPWH. Outdoor wall hydrants are to be Watts Ancon HY-420 VB non- freeze exposed type. Wall hydrant to be completed with chrome plated bronze head and valve, bronze seat casting, bronze internal working parts, renewable bronze seat, and self-draining integral vacuum breaker. Acceptable manufacturers: Smith 5509QT-CP, Zurn.



.2 Drawing reference WH. Indoor wall hydrants are to be Watts Ancon HY-330-2 self- draining encased type. Wall hydrant to be completed with bronze head and valve, bronze seat casting and internal working parts, renewable bronze seat, and self-draining integral vacuum breaker. Indoor wall hydrant to have satin bronze box with hinged access cover. Acceptable manufacturers: Smith 5509QTSAPN8, Zurn.

2.7 Shock Absorbers

.1 Shock absorbers shall be Watts Ancon Shock-Gard series, all stainless-steel construction with nesting bellows pre-charged with air. Acceptable manufacturers: Smith, Zurn.

2.8 Fixture Carriers

.1 Provide Watts/Ancon CA-101-(L or R for single water closet, D for back to back) Water Closet Carrier for systems where horizontal waste lines are installed above floor. Carrier shall be epoxy coated cast iron horizontal adjustable fittings, face plate and foot supports invertible for siphon jet or blow-out water closets. Carrier shall be complete with ABS extension with integral test cap, plated hardware and neoprene gaskets.

.2 Provide Watts/Ancon Model CA-321 Urinal Carrier with heavy gage steel uprights with integral welded feet, universal steel hanger support plate and bottom bearing plate, and plated hardware.

.3 Provide Watts/Ancon Model CA-411/421/421-HFH (as appropriate) Lavatory Carrier with epoxy coated cast iron foot support, heavy duty rectangular steel uprights, epoxy coated cast iron support arms with integral locking device and levelling screws for lavatories mounted on stud partition walls.

.4 Acceptable Manufacturers: Smith, Zurn.

2.9 Roof Vent Caps

.1 Pre-insulated aluminum stack-jack flashing with vandal proof cap.

.2 All new roof vent caps to be provided with insulated vent stacks supplied by Division 15 and installed by Division 7. This Division to connect new vents to stacks.

.3 Acceptable Product:

.1 Thaler Metal Industries Inc., Model SJ-26 EPDM (or PVC) with SJ-33 stainless steel vandal proof cap.

.2 Lexcor Flash-Tile, Vandal proof Model VSC-V.

2.10 Dielectric Unions

.1 Provide wherever pipes of dissimilar metals are joined.

.2 Provide insulating unions for pipe sizes 2" (50mm) and under and flanges for pipe sizes 2 1/2" (65mm) and over.

.3 Cast brass adapters may be used where approved by the Consultant.

.4 Provide an isolating separation wherever piping may touch dissimilar metal studs, joists, concrete, etc.

2.11 Thermostatic Mixing Valves

.1 Fixture reference TV – thermostatic mixing valve to include the following standard equipment:

.2 Combination tempering valve shall be ASSE 1016 Type T/P listed and CSA B125 certified.

.3 All internal components shall be from corrosion resistant material.

.4 The valve must control each performance standard down to 0.5 GPM (2 LPM).



.5 Capacity of the valve must be 4 GPM (15 LPM) @ 45 PSIG differential, and be constructed of solid brass.

.6 Control temperature must be adjustable between 80 and 120 °F (32-43 °C), with a locking nut to prevent unauthorized or accidental adjustment.

.7 The valve shall contain integral checks to prevent crossflow and inlet screens to filter debris.

.8 Manufacturers: Powers: Model e480 series, Bradley or Leonard equivalent

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Plumbing Specialties

.1 Cleanouts:

.1 Cleanouts to be the same size as pipe up to 4" (100 mm) and not less than 4" (100 mm) for larger pipes.

.2 Provide cleanouts at the end of mains and branches, at changes in directions, in long straight runs, at the base of all soil stacks and rainwater leaders and where required by code.

.3 Use extended cleanouts for piping installed below grade and in furred ceiling spaces.

.4 Co-ordinate final cleanout elevation and configuration with floor finishes.

.2 Floor & Hub Drains:

.1 Reference shall be made to the Architectural Drawings for slopes of floors and locations of floor drains with regard to furniture, benches, etc. and on specific placing.

.2 Provide drains, complete with traps, where shown on drawings.

.3 Provide trap seal primers and supply lines to each drain. All trap seal primers shall be accessible, provide suitable access doors where necessary.

.4 Co-ordinate final drain elevation and configuration with floor finishes.

.3 Roof/Canopy Drains:

.1 All roof and canopy drain to be supplied and installed by Division 7. Refer to architectural drawings for details.

.2 Responsibility for making the drain water tight shall rest with Division 7.

.3 Underdeck clamps to drain bases and connection of storm piping to drains and overflows to be installed at all drains by the Division 15 Contractor.

.4 Water Hammer Arrestors:

.1 Provide 24" (610 mm) air chambers fabricated from Type L, copper tubing, with capped end, or water hammer arrestors, at each plumbing fixture or fixture group, and wherever else necessary to prevent water hammer.

.5 Fixture Carriers:

.1 Fasten carriers securely to the building structure with 1/2" (13mm) bolts and necessary anchors.

.2 Verify fixture mounting heights, refer to Section 22 40 00.

.6 Roof Vent Cap:

.1 Plumbing Contractor shall determine the required number and size of roof vent caps required to provide proper venting of the plumbing systems.



Plumbing Contractor shall provide all roof cap vents and hand them over to Roofing Contractor for installation. Locations to be coordinated with Roofing Contractor. Install all sanitary roof vents a minimum of 11’-6” (3.5 m) from any mechanical intake to rooftop equipment, louvres, penthouse etc.; if the 11’-6” (3.5m) clearance cannot be obtained then the contractor shall extend the vent piping to minimum 4’-0” (1220 mm) above roof.


Plumbing Specialties and Accessories Section 22 05 15 Page 1 of 8


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 ASTM International (ASTM)

.1 ASTM A126-04 2009, Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges and Pipe Fittings.

.2 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.

.2 American Water Works Association (AWWA)

.1 ANSI/AWWA C700-09, Standard for Cold Water Meters-Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case.

.2 ANSI/AWWA C701-12, Standard for Cold Water Meters-Turbine Type for Customer Service.

.3 ANSI/AWWA C702-10m Standard for Cold Water Meters-Compound Type.

.3 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CSA-B64 Series-11, Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers.

.2 CSA B79-08, Commercial and Residential Drains and Cleanouts.

.3 CAN/CSA-B356-10, Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems.

.4 Efficiency Valuation Organization (EVO)

.1 International Performance Measurement and Verification Protocol (IPMVP).

.1 IPMVP 2007 Version.

.5 National Research Council Canada (NRC)

.1 National Plumbing Code of Canada 2015 (NPC).

.6 Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI)

.1 PDI-G101-[R2010], Testing and Rating Procedure for Grease Interceptors with Appendix of Installation and Maintenance.

.2 PDI-WH201-[R2010], Water Hammer Arresters Standard.


.1 Pre-installation Meetings:

.2 Convene pre-installation meeting 1 week prior to beginning on-site installationwith Consultant to:

.3 Verify project requirements.

.4 Review installation and substrate conditions.

.5 Co-ordination with other building construction subtrades.

.6 Review manufacturer's written installation instructions and warranty requirements.



.2 Product Data:



.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for plumbing products and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.2 Submit 2 copies of WHMIS SDS.

.3 Shop Drawings:


.2 Indicate on drawings: materials, dimensions, construction and assembly detail, finishes, number of anchors, method of anchorage, and accessories.

.4 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.5 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.

.6 Manufacturers' Field Reports: manufacturers' field reports specified.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for [plumbing specialties and accessories] for incorporation into manual.

.1 Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type, model, year and capacity.

.2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance.

.3 Recommended spare parts list.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




.2 Store and protect plumbing materials from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Floor Drains

.1 Floor Drains and Trench Drains: to CSA B79.

.2 Type 1: general duty; cast iron body adjustable head, nickel bronze strainer, integral seepage pan, and clamping collar.

.3 Type 2: heavy duty; cast iron body, heavy duty non-tilting or hinged lacquered cast iron grate, integral seepage pan and clamping collar.

.4 Type 3: combination funnel floor drain; cast iron body with integral seepage pan, clamping collar, nickel-bronze adjustable head strainer with integral funnel.

.5 Type 4: planters; cast-iron body with integral seepage pan, clamping collar, nickel-bronze adjustable head strainer, vandal-proof dome and standpipe, stainless steel screen.



.6 Type 5: waste oil; heavy duty cast iron, body with sediment bucket, vent connection, checkered plate and bronze plug.

.7 Type 6: epoxy coated; trench drain with galvanized iron grate, inside domed strainer, anchor flanges, membrane clamps.

2.2 Roof Drains

.1 Type 1: cast iron body, under deck clamp and sump receiver to suit roof construction, flashing clamp ring with integral gravel stop, bearing pan, flow control weir assembly, cast iron dome.

.2 Type 2: standard roof drain with cast iron body with cast iron dome, under-deck clamp to suit roof construction, flashing clamp ring with integral gravel stop.

.3 Type 3: cornice, sill or canopy drain; cast iron body with cast iron, dome or strainer and flashing clamp ring.

.4 Type 4: parapet or scupper drain; cast iron body with bronze strainer/grate and flashing clamp.

.5 Type 5: inverted roofing system; cast iron body with cast iron dome, under-deck clamp and sump receiver to suit roof construction, with integral gravel stop and stainless-steel drainage grid.

2.3 Cleanouts

.1 Cleanout Plugs: heavy cast iron male ferrule with brass screws and threaded brass or bronze plug. Sealing-caulked lead seat or neoprene gasket.

.2 Access Covers:

.1 Wall Access: face or wall type, round polished nickel bronze cover with flush head securing screws, bevelled edge frame completes with anchoring lugs.

.2 Floor Access: cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured nickel bronze top and:

.1 Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket.

.2 Cover for Unfinished Concrete Floors: cast iron, vandal-proof screws.

.3 Cover for Terrazzo Finish: polished nickel bronze with recessed cover for filling with terrazzo, vandal-proof locking screws.

.4 Cover for Tile and Linoleum Floors: polished nickel bronze with recessed cover for linoleum or tile infill, complete with vandal-proof locking screws.

.5 Cover for Carpeted Floors: polished nickel bronze with deep flange cover for carpet infill, complete with carpet retainer vandal-proof locking screws.

2.4 Non-Freeze Wall Hydrants

.1 Recessed type with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 3/4 hose outlet, removable operating key. Polished bronze finish.

2.5 Non-Freeze Ground Hydrant

.1 Deck type with polished bronze box with hinged cover, removable operating key, bronze casing for 2150 mm ground over, all-bronze valve body and working parts, membrane clamp, anchor flange.

2.6 Water Hammer Arrestors

.1 Copper construction, piston type: to PDI-WH201.

2.7 Back Flow Preventers



.1 Preventers: to CSA-B64 Series, application [double check valve assembly] [reduced pressure principle type] [as indicated,] [back flow preventer with intermediate atmospheric vent or vacuum breaker.

2.8 Vacuum Breakers

.1 Breakers: to CSA-B64 Series, vacuum breaker, hose connection.

2.9 Pressure Regulators

.1 Capacity:

.1 Inlet pressure: 1034 kPa.

.2 Outlet pressure: 413 kPa.

.2 Up to NPS 1-1/2 bronze bodies, screwed: to ASTM B62.

.3 NPS 2 and over, semi-steel bodies, Class 125, flanged: to ASTM A126, Class B.

.4 Semi-steel spring chambers with bronze trim.

2.10 Backwater Valves

.1 Coated extra heavy cast iron, body with bronze seat, revolving bronze flapper and threaded cover.

.2 Access:

.1 Surface access.

.2 Access pipe with cover: maximum [300] mm depth.

.3 Steel housing with gasketted steel cover.

.4 Concrete access pit with cover, as indicated.

2.11 Hose Bibbs and Sediment Faucets

.1 Bronze construction complete with integral back flow preventer, hose thread spout, replaceable composition disc, and chrome plated in finished areas.

2.12 Water Make-Up Assembly

.1 Complete with [backflow preventer] pressure gauge on [inlet and] outlet, pressure reducing valve to CAN/CSA-B356, pressure relief valve on low pressure side and gate valves on inlet and outlet.

2.13 Trap Seal Primers

.1 Brass, with integral vacuum breaker, NPS 1/2 solder ends, NPS 1/2 drip line connection.

2.14 Strainers

.1 860 kPa, Y type with 20 mesh, bronze or stainless-steel removable screen.

.2 NPS 2 and under, bronze body, screwed ends, with brass cap.

.3 NPS 2 1/2 and over, cast iron body, flanged ends, with bolted cap.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for plumbing specialties and accessories installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.






3.2 Manufacturer's Instructions

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.

3.3 Installation

.1 Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC).

.2 Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.

3.4 Cleanouts

.1 Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders, at locations required code, and as indicated.

.2 Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor.

.3 Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS 4.

3.5 Non-Freeze Wall Hydrants

.1 Install 600 mm above finished grade.

3.6 Non-Freeze Ground Hydrant

.1 Install with top of box flush with ground and with drainage connection to discharge as indicated.

3.7 Water Hammer Arrestors

.1 Install on branch supplies to fixtures or group of fixtures [where indicated].

3.8 Back Flow Preventers

.1 Install in accordance with CSA-B64 Series, where indicated and elsewhere as required by code.

.1 Drains.

.2 Backwater Valves.

.3 Water Make-up Assembly.

.4 Grease Interceptors.

.2 Pipe discharge to terminate over nearest drain service sink.

3.9 Backwater Valves

.1 Install in main sewer lines and at weeping tile connection in pit provided at building cleanout.

3.10 Hose Bibbs and Sediment Faucets

.1 Install at bottom of risers, at low points to drain systems, and as indicated.

3.11 Trap Seal Primers

.1 Install for floor drains and elsewhere, as indicated.

.2 Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed space, to approval of Consultant.

.3 Install soft copper tubing to floor drain.



3.12 Strainers

.1 Install with sufficient room to remove basket for maintenance.

3.13 Grease Interceptors

.1 Install with sufficient space, as indicated, for maintenance.

3.14 Start-Up

.1 Timing: start-up only after:

.1 Pressure tests have been completed.

.2 Disinfection procedures have been completed.

.3 Certificate of static completion has been issued.

.4 Water treatment systems operational.

.2 Provide continuous supervision during start-up.

3.15 Testing and Adjusting

.1 Timing:

.1 After start-up deficiencies rectified.

.2 After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Application tolerances:

.1 Pressure at fixtures: +/- 70 kPa.

.2 Flow rate at fixtures: +/- 20%.

.3 Adjustments:

.1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design criteria.

.2 Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is 1 maximum and 2 25% of maximum and while pressure is 1 maximum and 2 minimums.

.4 Floor drains:

.1 Verify operation of trap seal primer.

.2 Prime, using trap primer. Adjust flow rate to suit site conditions.

.3 Check operations of flushing features.

.4 Check security, accessibility, removability of strainer.

.5 Clean out baskets.

.5 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers, backwater valves:

.1 Test tightness, accessibility for O M of cover and of valve.

.2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of vacuum breakers, backflow preventers.

.3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports.

.6 Roof drains:

.1 Check location at low points in roof.

.2 Check security, removability of dome.

.3 Adjust weirs to suit actual roof slopes, meet requirements of design.

.4 Clean out sumps.



.5 Verify provisions for movement of roof systems.

.7 Access doors:

.1 Verify size and location relative to items to be accessed.

.8 Cleanouts:

.1 Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readily removable.

.9 Water hammer arrestors:

.1 Verify proper installation of correct type of water hammer arrester.

.10 Wall, ground hydrants:

.1 Verify complete drainage, freeze protection.

.2 Verify operation of vacuum breakers.

.11 Pressure regulators, PRV assemblies:

.1 Adjust settings to suit locations, flow rates, pressure conditions.

.12 Strainers:

.1 Clean out repeatedly until clear.

.2 Verify accessibility of cleanout plug and basket.

.3 Verify that cleanout plug does not leak.

.13 Grease interceptors:

.1 Activate, using manufacturer's recommended procedures and materials.

.14 Hose bibs, sediment faucets:

.1 Verify that flow and pressure meet design criteria.

.2 Check for leaks, replace compression washer if required.

.15 Hydronic system water Make-up Assembly:

.1 Verify flow, pressure, and connection.

.16 Water meters:

.1 Verify location and accessibility.

.2 Test metre reading accuracy.

.17 Soap Dispensing Systems:

.1 Verify location and reach.

.2 Check for leaks.

3.16 Closeout Activities

.1 Commissioning Reports: reports.

.2 Training: provide training of O M Personnel.

3.17 Cleaning

.1 Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning.





3.18 Protection


.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by plumbing specialties and accessories installation.


Plumbing Insulation Section 22 07 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Sections of Division 01, as applicable.




.1 Plumbing Section 22 05 00

.2 Plumbing Piping Section 22 10 00


1.3 Clarification

.1 Insulation may extend through fire rated separations when used in conjunction with firestopping material specifically tested for this purpose.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 Insulating materials by Johns Manville. Manson Insulation, Knauf Insulation and Owens Corning are considered equal.

.2 For adhesives and mastics for applications noted equal products of the following manufacturers will be accepted: Foster; 3M and Ductmate.

.3 All insulation and covering materials are to be non-combustible, and asbestos free. Vapour barrier jacket, and adhesive to be fire retardant to approved standards of fire hazard classification for building materials. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and smoke rating not to exceed 50.

2.2 Materials

.1 Domestic Cold Water:

.1 Piping Insulation – Johns Manville Micro-Lok preformed rigid, glass fibre pipe insulation, complying to ASTM C547 with a white factory applied all service vapour barrier jacket of Kraft paper reinforced with a glass fibre yarn and bonded to an aluminum foil, with self-sealing longitudinal closure laps and butt strips. Insulation conductivity shall be in the range of 0.22 – 0.28 BTU in/ (h.ft3.oF) with mean temperature of 100oF.

.2 Exposed Insulation – Finish with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC white 20 mil (0.5 mm) “Cut & Curled” factory-cut jacketing.

.3 Fittings and valves – All fittings, valves, tees, flanges, connections etc. to be insulated with factory pre-cut Johns Manville Hi-Low Temp insulation inserts of a thickness equal to that of the pipe insulation and covered with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 white PVC fitting covers.

.4 Insulation to be of thickness as follows:

.1 Pipe Size Insulation Thickness

.2 All o/ pipe 1” (25 mm)

.5 Domestic Hot Water, Domestic Hot Water Recirculation and Tempered Water Piping:



.1 Piping Insulation – Johns Manville Micro-Lok preformed rigid, glass fibre pipe insulation, complying to ASTM C547 with a white factory applied all service vapour barrier jacket of Kraft paper reinforced with a glass fiber yarn and bonded to an aluminum foil, with self-sealing longitudinal closure laps and butt strips. Insulation conductivity shall be in the range of 0.22 – 0.28 BTU in/(h.ft3.oF) with mean temperature of 100oF.

.2 Exposed Insulation – Finish with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC white 20 mil (0.5mm) “Cut & Curled” factory-cut jacketing.

.3 Fittings and valves – All fittings, valves, tees, flanges, connections etc. to be insulated with factory pre-cut Johns Manville Hi-Low Temp insulation inserts of a thickness equal to that of the pipe insulation and covered with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 white PVC fitting covers.



.2 1/2" (13 mm) – 1 ¼” (32 mm) o/pipe 1” (25 mm)

.3 1 ½” (38 mm) – 4” (100 mm) o/ pipe 1½” (38 mm)

.6 Horizontal Storm Piping, Cold Condensate Piping:

.1 Piping Insulation – Johns Manville Micro-Lok preformed rigid, glass fibre pipe insulation, complying to ASTM C547 with a white factory applied all service vapour barrier jacket of Kraft paper reinforced with a glass fiber yarn and bonded to an aluminum foil, with self-sealing longitudinal closure laps and butt strips. Insulation conductivity shall be in the range of 0.22 – 0.28 BTU in/(h.ft3.oF) with mean temperature of 100oF.

.2 Exposed Insulation – Finish with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 PVC white 20 mil (0.5 mm) “Cut & Curled” factory-cut jacketing.

.3 Fittings– Base of roof hoppers and all fittings to be insulated with factory pre-cut Johns Manville Hi-Low Temp insulation inserts of a thickness equal to that of the pipe insulation and covered with Johns Manville Zeston 2000 white PVC fitting covers.



.2 All o/ pipe 1” (25 mm)

.7 Hot Water and Drain Piping at Handicapped Fixtures:

.1 Armacell AP Armaflex self-seal pipe insulation, closed cell elastomeric and flexible, 1/2" (13 mm) thickness. Secure joints with 3M #471 tape.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General

.1 Do not apply insulating materials until piping to be insulated has been properly cleaned, dried and tested to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.2 Apply all insulation, wrapping, vapour barrier, adhesives, coatings, and cement in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 Do not apply any insulation or finishing when the ambient temperature in the space is less than 50oF (10oC).

3.2 Installation Application



.1 Apply all covering in a neat and workmanlike manner to present a clean appearance upon completion of the job.

.2 Apply all insulation in a manner to facilitate replacing and/or servicing of equipment.

.3 Make good and refinish cracks, undulations or any other deficiencies occurring in the insulation or vapour barrier.

.4 On all piping, terminate the insulation neatly around all openings and items requiring periodic access. Insulate separately with removable 16-gauge galvanized sheet steel panels lined with rigid slab insulating materials providing equivalent insulation to that on the adjoining surface.

.5 Provide the following insulation work:

.1 Domestic hot water, domestic hot water recirculation and cold-water piping, including accessories, etc.

.2 All above grade horizontal storm piping and roof hoppers.

.3 All cold condensate, including pumps and accessories etc.

.4 Exposed domestic hot water and drain at each handicapped fixture 1/2" (13mm) pipe insulation.

.5 Repair or replace any existing insulation damaged as a result of the work, where new connection to existing systems or where indicated to be re-insulated. Match existing for thickness and finish, unless exposed, then finish to match new.

.6 On all piping having vapour barrier jacket, the adjoining section of insulation is to be butted firmly together and the longitudinal seams of the vapour jacket to be sealed with vapour barrier adhesive. End joints are to be sealed with 4" (100 mm) factory furnished vapour barrier strips.

.7 Apply insulation over clean dry surfaces butting and adjoining sections firmly together and sealing or taping smoothly over joints.

.8 Where the pipe hanger is around the insulation, provide a 6" (152 mm) length at equal thickness of moulded thermo - 12 insulation, protected with a saddle, within the pipe support. Coordinate with Contractor installing hangers.

.9 Extend pipe insulation and covering through sleeves, walls, floors, ceilings, and structural beams, unless indicated otherwise on drawings, or other sections of this specification.

.10 Refer to electrical drawings for piping to be electrically traced prior to installation of insulation.


Plumbing Piping Section 22 10 00 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Painting Section 09 90 00

.2 Firestopping Section 21 07 20


.4 Plumbing Insulation Section 22 07 00


1.3 Quality of Assurance


.1 Conform to local and district by-laws, regulations and published engineering standards.


.3 Conform to National Plumbing Code of Canada, Current Edition.

.4 Conform to Regulations for Construction Projects, Ontario Regulation 213 under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Current Edition.

.5 Conform to regulations of Natural Gas Installation Code CAN1-B149.1, Current Edition.

.6 All plumbing supply fittings shall conform to latest edition of ASME A112.18/CAN/CSA-B125.1.

.7 All plumbing fittings shall conform to latest edition of CAN/CSA-B125.3.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Pipe and Pipe Fittings

.1 Sanitary Drain, Storm and Vents:

.1 Soil and waste pipe 3" (75 mm) and over to be medium weight cast iron type MJ, unless indicated otherwise; 2 1/2" (65 mm) and under copper DWV pipe and fittings when above floor and Type L copper when buried.

.2 Vent pipe 3" (75 mm) and up is to be medium weight cast iron type MJ; 2 1/2" (65 mm) and under galvanized steel pipe with cast iron drainage fittings or copper type DWV.

.3 Below grade piping only:

.1 ABS piping in accordance with CAN/CSA-B181.1-02 for 4" (100 mm) pipe sizes and smaller.

.2 P.V.C. gravity sewer piping SDR28 for 6" (150 mm) pipe sizes and smaller to CAN/CSA-B182.1-02.

.3 P.V.C. gravity sewer piping SDR35 for 8" (200 mm) pipe sizes and above to CAN/CSA-B182.2-02.

.2 Domestic Water Piping and Cold Condensate Piping:



.1 Domestic water lines (cold, hot and re-circulating) above grade shall be type L. Copper to ASTM B88-03.

.2 Exposed piping in finished areas shall be chrome plated unless noted otherwise.

.3 Air conditioning condensate lines above grade to be Type M copper to ASTM B88

2.2 Hangers & Supports

.1 Hangers shall be carbon steel with copper or plastic coating for direct support of copper tubing, and shall be carbon steel with black corrosion resistant finish for all other piping.

.2 Use Grinnell FIG 65, 70, 97, CT-99, 101, 260, or 269 hangers for individual support of all horizontal piping.

.3 Provide Grinnell fig. 168 pipe covering protection saddles at each hanger where pipes are insulated.

.4 Provide Grinnell fig. 171 single pipe rollers complete with fig. 160 protection saddles on all heating mains where identified.

.5 Use 100 mm x 40 mm minimum steel channel for joint support of horizontal piping.

.6 Use welded beam attachments or beam clamps for support of horizontal pipe from steelwork.

.7 Perforated pipe hangers are not acceptable.

.8 Determine spacing between pipe rack supports using smallest pipe size.

.9 Provide Grinnell fig. 262 pipe saddles on each pipe where trapeze hangers are used.

.10 Hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Myatt or Economec.

.11 Roof support blocks:

.1 Roof top support blocks for gas piping, plumbing, HVAC, conduit, cable tray, and mechanical equipment shall be Roof Top Blox (RTB-01). The support blocks must be designed to eliminate roof penetrations, flashings or damage to roofing membrane.

.2 Support body shall be made of recycled UV-resistant Polypropylene Copolymer. Base platform material shall be 1” thick, 25psi, type 4 closed cell structural foam to distribute and evenly cushion loads.

.3 Support top surface shall have molded in pipe organizing saddles and strut mounting cradle. The top surface shall also have screw guide indents and engineered internal screw thread gripping feature.

.4 Block must accept 3/8” and 1/2” threaded rod (ROD-03) using side entry nut slots to allow fast top side assembly and piping height adjustments. Aluminum rollers (ROL-05 or ROL-06) shall be installed on long piping runs. Securing brackets (SBC-07) and adhesive (ADH-12) recommended for permanently securing Blox into its final installed position, anchoring against wind, rain and snow loads.

2.3 Valves and Accessories

.1 Domestic Water:

.1 General

.1 Use the following valves for all piping systems provided by this Section, unless specified otherwise. Use rising stem where space permits. Use flanged, screwed or solder ends to suit pipe lines, and non-heating malleable iron handles.

.2 Use only industrial class valves meeting ANSI, ASTM, ASME and applicable MSS standards. Specification MSS-SP-80, MSS-SP-110, MSS-SP-70, 85, 71, MSS-SP-72, MSS-SP-67.



.2 Domestic Water Systems (Hot and Cold) Up to 1400 kPa (200 PSIG)

.1 Check Valves – Back Flow Prevention

.1 For sizes 50 mm (2”) and under, use 860 kPa (125 psig) / 200 W.O.G. bronze body to ASTM C89530 (Lead Free Bronze), Screwed Cap C49300 (Lead Free Brass), Integral Seat, PTFE Disk.

.1 Swing “Y” Pattern

.1 Screwed Ends - Kitz 822T

.2 Jomar T-511G Solder Ends- Kitz 823T

.3 Jomar S-511G

.2 Spring Loaded

.1 Screwed Ends – Mueller Steam Specialty Model 303HT 316 SS Body and 316 SS Trim

.2 For sizes 65 mm (2-1/2”) and over, use Class 150 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M Body, Trim #10, Bolted Cover, PTFE Gasket, Flanged.

.1 Swing Check Flanged - Kitz 150 UOAM

.2 Wafer Checks

.3 Single Flapper – Moygro W15A-666

.1 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M Body, Class 150, 316 SS Trim

.4 Double Door – Mueller Steam Specialty Model 72HHHTH

.1 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M Body, Class 150, 316 SS Trim

.5 Silent Check – Spring Loaded

.1 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M Body, Class 150, 316 SS Trim, Center Guided

.2 Mueller 101MHT

.3 Mueller 105MHT (Globe Style)

.3 Note: Check valves minimum installation 8-10 pipe diameters downstream of pumps is recommended.

.3 Ball Valves - For Isolation and Balancing Service

.1 For sizes 50 mm (2”) and under, use 1034 kPa (150 psig) / 600 W.O.G., Brass Body to ASTM C49300 (Lead Free Brass), Full Port, PTFE Seats, Double “O” Ring or Teflon packing, TEA Plated Forged Brass C49300 Vented Solid Ball, Blowout Proof Stem, Lever Handle.

.1 Screwed Ends - Kitz 858, Jomar T-100C

.2 Solder Ends- Kitz 859, Jomar S-100C

.2 For sizes 65 mm (2-1/2”) and over, Use Class 150 Stainless Steel A351 CF8M Body, SS Ball & Stem, PTFE packing, Hypatite or PTFE seats, locking lever operated (Use gear operated for 8” & 10”)

.1 Kitz 150UTBZM (Full Port)

.2 Kitz 150UTAM (Reduced Port) MAS F-150-SS-F-N (Full Port)

.3 MAS F-150-SS-R-N (Reduced Port)

.4 Hose Bibbs/Drain Hose Connections c/w Cap & Chain



.1 For sizes 20 mm (3/4”) and 13 mm (1/2”) use 1034 kPa (150 psig) / 600 W.O.G. Brass Body to ASTM C49300 (Lead Free Brass), Full Port, PTFE Seats, Double “O” Ring or Teflon packing, TEA Plated Forged Brass C49300 Vented Solid Ball, Blowout Proof Stem, Lever Handle.

.2 Hose bib Brass fitting to ASTM C49300 (Lead Free Brass) and Cap & Chain.

.1 Screwed Ends - Kitz 858, Jomar T-100HFG

.2 Solder Ends- Kitz 859, Jomar S-100HSG

.5 Escutcheons:

.1 Supply and install chromium plated escutcheon plates on all piping passing through finished walls, floors and ceilings. Where sleeves project above the floor in potentially wet areas, provide chromium plated Grinnell Fig.400 escutcheon.

.2 Escutcheon plates shall be installed over the insulation and shall have set screws or clamping devices to keep the escutcheon plate in place.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Piping Installation

.1 Sanitary, Storm and Vent Piping:

.1 Install sanitary drains and connect to fixtures where shown. Connect up all drains to drain, open hub or other approved locations. Connect to drainage system all drains from equipment supplied under other Sections.

.2 Horizontal sanitary drains shall have the following minimum slopes:

.1 Fixture waste or drains1/4" per ft. (2 cm per meter)

.2 Drains up to and including 3" (75 mm)1/4" per ft. (2 cm per meter)

.3 Drains over 3" (75 mm)1/8" per ft. (1 cm per meter)

.3 Connect storm drains to all roof hoppers, specialty gutter outlets, etc. Carry main drain to a point as shown on drawings.

.4 All fixtures are to be vented in accordance with Local and Provincial Regulations. Vents are to be run as directly as possible and to be properly graded so as to drain back to fixture connection. Vents are to be concealed in walls, and ceilings; vent stacks are to be built into pipe chases, concealed areas, and walls, with particular attention paid to building frame construction.

.5 Vent stacks are to be connected to the vent extensions provided by Division 7 and installed by the General Contractor. The only exposed vent pipe or vent stack allowed will be in the areas provided in pipe spaces, mechanical room, etc. Maintain a minimum of 10 ft. (3m) from outside air intakes to location of vent stack.

.2 Domestic Water Piping:

.1 Connect cold water to all fixtures, hose bibs, as required and as shown. This is to include all connections to equipment and units supplied under other Sections.

.2 All equipment is to have unions or flanged connection for equipment removal, and where possible piping is to run concealed in all walls and ceiling, but may run exposed in mechanical rooms and warehouse.

.3 Install shock absorbers ahead of all solenoid valves, flush valves or other quick closing valves and where shown. Vacuum breakers are to be installed on all fixtures where required by the Ontario Plumbing Code, or Local Plumbing Inspector.

.4 Connect condensate piping to all drain pans and run to nearest drain.



.3 Equipment Connection:

.1 Install unions and/or flanges to connect piping to all pieces of equipment. All equipment is to have isolating valves for equipment removal.

.4 Flashing:

.1 All vent stacks and soil stacks are to connect to insulated stack vents. Stack vents are supplied and installed through the roof by Division 7. All holes through roof are to be properly flashed and made weatherproof by roofer as required under Division 7.

3.2 Piping Joints

.1 Solder Joints:

.1 Pipe is to be cut at right angles, reamed, deburred and sized.

.2 End of pipe and inside of fittings to be cleaned with steel wool to a bright metallic finish.

.3 Flux to be applied to outside of pipe and inside of fittings; fitting to be revolved on pipe to ensure proper distribution of flux.

.4 Using solder wire, heat assembly with torch until solder has flowed completely around fittings. Wipe off excess solder. Solder used on potable water systems to consist of 0% maximum lead composition or alternatively use 90/5/5 tin/ silver/antimony. Larger size pipe joints are to be completely tinned before assembly.

.2 Cast Iron Joints:

.1 Mechanical joint cast iron piping and fittings will be assembled in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.3 P.V.C., Polypropylene and A.B.S. Piping Joints:

.1 Install P.V.C., Polypropylene and A.B.S. joints as per manufacturer’s recommendations, using approved joining methods, compounds and materials.

3.3 Flanged Joints

.1 Flanges and other attachments shall be square with the indicated axis and shall not deviate from this position measured across any diameter by more than 3/64" per foot (4mm per m.) of diameter. Maximum allowable dishing of a flange facing shall be 1/64" (0.4mm).

.2 Bolt holes shall be aligned within a tolerance of ±1/16" (2mm) of the required position.

.3 Flanges shall be installed with the bolt holes straddling the vertical and horizontal centre lines or as required for proper valve position. Use box wrenches to pull up flanges.

.4 Unless otherwise specified, lengths of studs shall be 1/4" (6mm) longer than specified in ANSI B16.5.

3.4 Hangers and Supports

.1 Horizontal piping is to be supported as close as practical to the connected equipment and intermediate hangers are to be spaced as follows:



Pipe Size

Single Rod Dia. Double Rod Dia.

Maximum Copper

Spacing Steel

Up to 3/4"

Up to 19 mm

3/8"

10 mm

3/8"

10 mm

5 ft.

1.5 m

6 ft.

1.8 m

1" - 1 1/4"

25 mm to 32 mm

3/8"

10 mm

3/8"

10 mm

5 ft.

1.5 m

8 ft.

2.4 m

1 1/2" - 2"

38 mm & 50 mm

3/8"

10 mm

3/8"

10 mm

10 ft.

3 m

10 ft

3 m.

2 1/2" & 3"

65 mm & 75 mm

1/2"

13 mm

1/2"

13 mm

10 ft

3 m

12 ft.

3.7 m

4"

100 mm

5/8"

16 mm

5/8"

16 mm

- 15 ft.

4.6 m

6"

150mm

3/4"

19mm

5/8"

16mm

- 17 ft.

5.2m

.2 Cast Iron Piping is to be supported at intervals not exceeding 5 ft. (1.5 m) with clevis hanger securely anchored to building.

.3 Cast Iron Fittings are to be supported at intervals not exceeding 3 ft. (900 mm).

.4 Cast iron pipes are to be supported at every floor.

.5 No support or hanger securing device is to penetrate waterproofing roof membrane above steel deck.

.6 Provide roller supports, floor stands, wall brackets, etc. for all lines running near the floor or near the walls, which can be properly supported by the floors or walls.

.7 All pipe support arrangements are to be adjustable for proper support and grading.

.8 Suspend piping using malleable iron or wrought steel hangers suspended from hanger rods threaded each end not more than 1 1/2" (38 mm). Continuous threaded hanger rod is to be used in concealed locations only.

.9 Hanger rods are to be attached to concrete inserts, beam clamps, welded brackets or similar device. Co-ordinate location and method of pipe support in building with Structural Engineer.

.10 0Provide hangers for cold water piping with the hanger around the insulation.


.1 Use valves of line size unless noted otherwise or being used for balancing purposes.

.2 Provide isolating valves in each branch from the main line and where shown. On renovation and retrofit projects add isolations valves at all new tie-in locations where connecting new piping into existing mains and branch lines etc. Note: Valves are not necessarily shown on the drawings.

.3 Provide isolating valves for all fixtures, appliances etc. including the following:

.4 On each branch serving more than three fixtures.

.5 At the base of each main riser.



.6 Note: Valves are not necessarily shown on the drawings.

.7 Unless indicated otherwise provide radiation regulating valves at each terminal unit and in locations where valve is to be used for regulating purposes. Ball valves are not acceptable for balancing purposes.

.8 Provide 1/2" (13 mm) ball valve with cap and chain at any low point of the system not drainable through the main supply piping.

.9 All valves are to be tagged and a chart showing location and equipment controlled to be turned over to the Owner upon completion of the job.

.10 Escutcheon plates are to be installed at all walls and floors where pipes are exposed to view

.11 Install auto air vents at all high points in system.

.12 Install drain cup at each backflow preventer vent and drain opening and pipe to nearest floor drain.


.1 Make tests that are required, by any authority having jurisdiction, in the presence of the Authority's Authorized Inspector. Tests are to be certified by him.

.2 Test all piping at the completion of roughing-in before connecting to new systems, and prior to concealment, insulation or covering of piping.

.3 Notify the Consultant in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do so may require test to be re-done.

.4 Final test all drain waste and vents to Part 7 of the Ontario Building Code.

.5 All new drainage and vent piping is to be tested using water test method before connection of fixtures and maintain the required water level for 24 hours. Pressure test science room and prep room piping in accordance with Manufacturer’s instructions.

.6 Do not pressure test with compressed air or gas.

.7 Perform tests before application of pipe covering. Test buried and concealed piping before backfilling or concealing in structure. Protect equipment and parts not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests.

.8 Any leaks found are to be properly repaired and test reapplied until results satisfactory to the Consultant are obtained.

3.7 Placing in Operation

.1 Upon completion of the work and before turning over the job, the Contractor is to make a complete test of the various systems.

.2 Flush and sterilize domestic water mains in accordance with the procedures established by AWWA Specification C601.

.3 Flush all other domestic water piping in accordance with Local and Provincial Codes.

3.8 Roof Flashings

.1 Turn over flashings to the roofer for installation, provide flashings for each roof penetration.


Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping - Cast Iron and Copper Section 22 13 16.13 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

.1 Section [_____].

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS


.1 ASTM B32-[08], Standard Specification for Solder Metal.

.2 ASTM B306-[02], Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

.3 ASTM C564-[03a], Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

.2 Canada Green Building Council (CaGBC)

.1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-[2004], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Package For New Construction and Major Renovations (including Addendum [2007]).

.2 LEED Canada-CI Version 1.0-[2007], LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System Reference Guide For Commercial Interiors.

.3 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CSA B67-[1972 (R1996)], Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, Bends and Accessories.

.2 CAN/CSA-B70-[06], Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining.

.3 CAN/CSA-B125.3-[05], Plumbing Fittings.

.4 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES)

.1 Standard GS-36-[00], Commercial Adhesives.


.1 National Plumbing Code of Canada [2015] (NPC).

.6 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State

.1 SCAQMD Rule 1168-[A2005], Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

1.3 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].

.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and

.3 Sustainable Design Submittals:

.1 LEED Submittals: in accordance with [Section 01 35 21 - LEED Requirements].

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section [01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements].

.2 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.



.3 Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse [by manufacturer] [and return] of [crates] [packaging materials] [pallets] [padding] in accordance with Section [01 74 19 - Waste Management and Disposal].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSTAINABLE MATERIAL

.1 Sustainable Requirements: materials and products in accordance with Section [01 47 15Sustainable Requirements: Construction].

.2 Adhesives and Sealants: [_____] in accordance with Section [07 92 00 - Joint Sealants].

.1 Maximum VOC limit [250] [30] [70] g/L [GSES GS-36] [to SCAQMD Rule 1168] and in accordance with Section[01 35 21 - LEED Requirements].

2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

.1 Above ground [sanitary] [storm] and [vent] Type [DWV] to: ASTM B306.

.1 Fittings.

.1 Cast brass: to CAN/CSA-B125.3.

.2 Wrought copper: to CAN/CSA-B125.3.

.2 Solder: [tin-lead, 50:50, type 50A] [lead free, tin- [_____][] 95:5, type TA [_____]

2.3 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS

.1 Buried [sanitary] [storm] and [vent] minimum NPS [3], to: CAN/CSA-B70, with one layer of protective coating of [_____].

.1 Joints:

.1 Mechanical joints:

.1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets: to CAN/CSA-B70.ASTM C564 or

.2 Stainless steel clamps.

.2 Hub and spigot:

.1 Caulking lead: to CSA B67.

.2 Cold caulking compounds.

.2 Above ground [storm] [sanitary] and [vent]: to CAN/CSA-B70.

.1 Joints:

.1 Hub and spigot:

.1 Caulking lead: to CSA B67.

.2 Mechanical joints:

.1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel clamps.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

.1 Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 INSTALLATION



.1 In accordance with Section [23 05 15 - Common installation requirements for HVAC pipework].

.2 Install in accordance with [National Plumbing Code] [local authority having jurisdiction] [except [_____][] [Provincial Plumbing Code]

3.3 TESTING

.1 Pressure test buried systems before backfilling.

.2 Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom from obstructions.

3.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION

.1 Cleanouts:

.1 Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located.

.2 Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal.

.3 Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.

.2 Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.

.3 Storm water drainage:

.1 Verify domes are secure.

.2 Ensure weirs are correctly sized and installed correctly.

.3 Verify provisions for movement of roof system.

.4 Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented.

.5 Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc.) c/w directional arrows every floor or 4.5 m (whichever is less).

3.5 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section [01 74 00 - Cleaning].

.2 Waste Management: separate waste materials for [recycling] [reuse] in accordance with Section [01 35 21 - LEED Requirements] [01 74 19 - Waste Management and Disposal].

END OF SECTION 22 13 16.13

Plumbing Fixtures and Trim v3 Section 22 40 00 Page 1 of 8


PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Miscellaneous Specialties Division 10


.3 Basic Materials & Methods Section 23 05 01

.4 Duct Insulation Section 23 07 13

.5 Electrical Division 26



.1 Comply with local bylaws and standards.

.2 Comply with regulations under the Ontario Hydro Electrical Safety Code (latest edition).

.3 Conform to the 2006 Ontario Building Code (OBC) Compendium containing the Building code Act, and Ontario Regulation 350/06 including all amendments.

.4 Conform to ACNBC Canadian Plumbing Code current edition.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings for the following equipment items:

.1 Plumbing Fixtures and Trim

.2 Submit inspection certificates obtained from local inspection authorities.

.3 Submit certificates indicating that all required testing has been completed.

1.5 Approval

.1 Additional manufacturers wishing to bid products other than the products specified are to submit to the Consultant prior to Tender close a list of three past installations of products similar to those listed. The manufacturer guarantees the proposed substitute product to comply with the product specified and as detailed on the Drawings, unless the deviations are so noted in the submittals for approval. Complete catalogue data along with deviations from the product specified are to be noted in the submittals to the Consultant.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Plumbing Fixtures

.1 Plumbing fixtures shall be as indicated and specified with all required supports, accessories, drainage, vent and water connections to make the fixture complete.

.2 The flow rates of fittings that supply water to a fixture shall not exceed the maximum flow rates listed in Part 7 of the O.B.C. under the water efficiency section.

.3 Fixtures shall be American Standard, Zurn, or Kohler. Fixtures shall be white unless noted otherwise.

.4 Fittings and trim shall be Zurn, Sloan, Delta Commercial, Crane or American Standard equivalent to the trim specified. All exposed flush valves, fittings, escutcheons, etc. at each fixture shall be polished chrome plated brass unless specified otherwise.



.5 All tanks of water closets shall be internally lined with anti-sweat insulation.

.6 Carriers shall be furnished for all wall-hung urinals, and lavatories. Carriers shall be as specified in Section 22 40 00 of the specification.

.7 Fixture Reference WC-1 (Standard Toilet): Water closet, vitreous china, free standing closed coupled combination, 1.3 Imp. Gal. (6 lt.) flush, elongated siphon jet bowl with fully glazed trapway, insulated tank, round bolt caps, floor flange, gasket, flange bolts and nuts. Supply: 3/8” (10mm) diameter chrome plated heavy pattern rigid supply with loose key angle stop, escutcheon and flexible riser. Seat: elongated heavy-duty solid plastic, open front seat less cover, check hinge. Colour white.


.1 Water Closet:

.1 American Standard ‘Cadet 3’ 2383.500

.2 Kohler ‘Wellworth’ K-3422-U

.3 Zurn Z5530-IN

.2 Supply:

.1 Zurn Z-8820CR-LK/16-5

.2 McGuire H166LKN3

.3 Delta 47T1316SD

.3 Seat:

.1 Olsonite 10C

.2 Centoco 500STSCC

.3 Beneke 523CH

.4 Zurn Z5955SS-EL

.8 Fixture Reference WC-2 (Barrier Free): Water closet, vitreous china, free standing closed coupled combination, 1.3 Imp. Gal. (6 lt.) flush, elongated siphon jet ‘High’ bowl with fully glazed trapway, insulated tank, round bolt caps, floor flange, gasket, flange bolts and nuts. Supply: 3/8” (10mm) diameter chrome plated heavy pattern rigid supply with loose key angle stop, escutcheon and flexible riser. Seat: elongated heavy-duty solid plastic, open front seat with cover and reinforced hinge. Colour white.


.1 Water Closet:

.1 American Standard ‘Cadet 3’ 2386.500

.2 Kohler ‘Wellworth’ K-3481-U

.3 Zurn Z5550-IN

.2 Supply:

.1 Zurn Z-8820CR-LK/16-5

.2 McGuire H166LKN3

.3 Delta 47T1316SD

.3 Seat:

.1 Olsonite 46

.2 Centoco 820STS



.3 Beneke 721

.4 Zurn Z5957SS-EL

.9 Fixture Reference LAV-2 (Wall Mount Barrier Free): Lavatory vitreous china, 8” (203mm) centres, low back, wall-hung, rear overflow, drilled for concealed arm carrier. Trim Fitting: 8”(203mm) under deck mount faucet with gooseneck spout and 1.84 IGPM (8.35 l/m) vandal resistant aerator, ceramic disc cartridges, 4” (102mm) blade handles, 1 ¼” (32mm) offset waste assembly with open grid strainer, 3/8” (10mm) diameter chrome plated heavy pattern short rigid brass horizontal supplies with escutcheons and lock shield or loose key angle stops and stainless steel flexible risers, 1 ¼” (32mm) chrome plated tubular ‘P’ trap with cleanout. Provide protective lavatory pipe and waste covers as per O.B.C. Provide lavatory carrier.


.1 Lavatory:

.1 American Standard ‘Murro’ 0958.000

.2 Kohler Zurn Z5328

.3 Mansfield 2040

.2 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-831B4-ICT-2F

.2 Delta 23C634-R4

.3 Moen 8248-S2611.1

.4 Chicago Faucet 404-V-317-XK

.3 Waste:

.1 Zurn Z-8746

.2 Delta 33T290

.3 Moen M9957BL

.4 McGuire 155A

.4 Supplies:

.1 Zurn Z-8820LBR-LK/16-3

.2 Delta 47T2312SD

.3 McGuire H165LKN3RB

.5 Trap:

.1 Zurn Z-8700-D

.6 Pipe Insulation:

.1 Zurn ‘Insul-Guard’

.7 Carrier:

.1 Refer to Section 15400

.10 Fixture Reference UR (Urinal): Urinal, vitreous china, wall-hung, wash down flush action with integral trap, strainer, extended shields, 3/4" (19mm) top spud, 2" (50mm) outlet connecting flange with gasket and bolts. Flush Valve: Exposed, quiet diaphragm-type, chrome plated .125 GPF flushometer valve with a polished exterior. Complete with dual seal diaphragm with a clog resistant, filtered by-pass. The valve is ADA compliant with a



non-hold open and no leak handle feature, high back pressure vacuum breaker, one-piece hex coupling nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for top spud connection. Control stop has internal siphon-guard protection, vandal resistant stop cap, sweat solder kit, and a cast wall flange with set screw. Internal seals are made of chloramines resistant materials. Provide urinal carrier and urinal cleanout

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Urinal:

.1 American Standard ‘Washbrook’ 6590.525

.2 Kohler ‘Bardon’ KC4904CET

.3 Zurn EcoVantage Z5798

.4 Mansfield 410CHE

2. Flush Valve:

.1 Zurn ZC6003AVCULF

.2 Sloan Royal 186C0.13

.3 Delta 81T231C05

3. Carrier: Refer to Section 22 05 00

4. Urinal Cleanout: Refer to Section 22 05 00

.11 Fixture Reference LAV-1 (Countertop Sink): Rondo oval wash basin. Round inset vanity basin, can be mounted from top or underneath, stainless steel, material thickness 1 mm, with overflow and tap ledge, incl. 35 mm tap hole drilling, inclusive 5/4" overflow kit without waste, stainless steel lugs for underneath mounting are included. Surface high-polished. Dimensions 529 x 159 x 454 mm (W x H x D). Bowl Dimensions 450 x 159 x 330 mm (W x H x D). Outcut diameter for mounting from top 511 x 436 mm. Outcut diameter for mounting from underneath 440 x 320 mm.

Trim Fitting: Fitting: brass faucet with polished chrome exterior, sensor faucet with in-line hydro power generator that creates electrical energy and stores in a rechargeable cell, integral 4” cover plate, infrared proximity sensor, chrome plated cast brass spout, in-line filter, 0.5 GPM (1.9 lpm)vandal resistant aerator, ½” inlet connection.

1 ¼” (32mm) offset waste assembly with open grid strainer.


.1 SS countertop sink:

.1 Franke RNDH451-O

.2 Drain:

.1 Delta 33T260

.2 McGuire 155ACLOCX

.3 Zurn ZC8743

.3 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-6915-GEN



.4 Supplies:

.1 Delta 47T2312SD

.2 McGuire H165LKN5

.5 Trap:

.1 Delta 33T311

.2 American Standard GHC7000

.3 McGuire 8872C

.12 Fixture Reference S-1 (Kitchen Sink): Sink, counter mounted, 16” x 14” x 6” (406mm x 356mm x 152mm) deep with ledge back, grade 18-8, type 304 stainless steel, single compartment, self-rimming sink with centre rear crumb cup strainer, hold down clamps, tailpiece and sound deadening. Trim Fitting: hard wired sensor faucet with mixing valve, brass faucet with polished chrome exterior, gooseneck spout with 1.5 gpm vandal-resistant aerator, connecting wire to power converter. Connect with flexible tubes and ½” (13mm) rough stops on supply piping, 1 ½” (38mm) ‘P’ trap with cleanout.


.1 Sink:

.1 Franke ALBS6406-1/1

.2 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-6915CWB-A-AL-BOX

.2 Delta 591T0256

.3 Sloan Optima ETF-600-LT-VPB & EL-154 Transformer

.4 Moen 8301-104424-116711

.13 Fixture Reference S-1 (Kitchen Sink alternate): Sink, counter mounted, 16” x 14” x 6” (406mm x 356mm x 152mm) deep with ledge back, grade 18-8, type 304 stainless steel, single compartment, self-rimming sink with centre rear crumb cup strainer, hold down clamps, tailpiece and sound deadening. Trim Fitting: 8” (203mm) polished chrome plated brass, deck mount faucet with quarter turn ceramic disc cartridges, 8” (203mm) cast brass swing spout with 1.84 IGPM (8.35 l/m) vandal-resistant aerator, cast metal 4” (102mm) blade handles. Connect with flexible tubes and ½” (13mm) rough stops on supply piping, 1 ½” (38mm) ‘P’ trap with cleanout.


.1 Sink:


.2 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-871G4-2F

.2 Delta 26C3132

.3 Moen 8285-S0070

.4 Chicago Faucet 1100-V-L9-317-XK

.14 Fixture Reference S-1 (Kitchen Sink alternate): Sink, counter mounted, 16” x 18” x 8” (406mm x 457mm x 203mm) deep with ledge back, grade 18-8, type 302 stainless steel, single compartment, self-rimming sink with crumb cup strainer, hold down clamps, tailpiece and sound deadening. Trim Fitting: 8” (203mm) polished chrome plated brass, deck mount faucet with quarter turn ceramic disc cartridges, gooseneck spout with 1.84 GPM (8.35 l/m)



vandal-resistant aerator, cast metal lever handles. Connect with flexible tubes and ½” (13mm) rough stops on supply piping, 1 ½” (38mm) ‘P’ trap with cleanout.


.1 Sink: Franke LBS6808-1/3

.2 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-871B3-2F

.2 Delta 26C3933

.3 Moen 8287-52611

.4 Chicago Faucet 1100-V-GN2A-XK

.15 Fixture Reference S-1 (Kitchen Sink alternate): Sink, counter mounted, 18” x 20” x 14” (460mm x 510mm x 360mm) deep with ledge back, grade 18-8, type 304 stainless steel, single compartment, self-rimming sink with crumb cup strainer, hold down clamps, tailpiece and sound deadening. Trim Fitting: 8” (203mm) polished chrome plated brass, deck mount faucet with quarter turn ceramic disc cartridges, gooseneck spout with 1.84 IGPM (8.35 l/m) vandal-resistant aerator, cast metal 4” (102mm) blade handles. Connect with flexible tubes and ½” (13mm) rough stops on supply piping. Sink shall be complete with bottom access in-line solids interceptor in lieu of ‘P’ trap.


.1 Sink:

.1 Kindred LBS 8014-1/3

.2 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-871B4-2F

.2 Delta 26C3934 blade or 26C3932 hooked blade

.3 Crane

.16 Fixture Reference S-1 (Kitchen Sink alternate): Sink, counter mounted, 16” x 14” x 6” (406mm x 356mm x 152mm) deep with ledge back, grade 18-8, type 304 stainless steel, single compartment, self-rimming sink with centre rear crumb cup strainer, hold down clamps, tailpiece and sound deadening. Trim Fitting: hard wired sensor faucet with mixing valve, brass faucet with polished chrome exterior, gooseneck spout with 1.5 gpm vandal-resistant aerator, connecting wire to power converter. Connect with flexible tubes and ½” (13mm) rough stops on supply piping, 1 ¼” (32mm) offset waste assembly with open grid strainer, 1 ½” (38mm) ‘P’ trap with cleanout.


.1 Sink:


.2 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-6915CWB-A-AL-BOX

.2 Delta 591T0256

.3 Sloan Optima ETF-600-LT-VPB & EL-154 Transformer

.4 Moen 8301-104424-116711

.17 Fixture Reference S-1 (Kitchen Sink alternate): Sink to be a single bowl ledge back sink manufactured from 18-gauge, 18-10 stainless steel, bright mirror finished rim and satin finished bowl. Sink is fully undercoated. Basket strainer waste fitting (3 1/2",89 mm),



overflow assembly, and installation kit are included. Sink bowl has 60 liters (16 U.S. gallon) capacity to overflow port.


.1 Sink:

.1 Kindred LBS7312P-2/3

.2 Trim Fitting:

.1 Zurn Z-871G4-2F

.2 Delta 26C3134 blade or 26C3132 hooked blade

.3 Moen 8280-S0070

.4 Chicago Faucet 1100-V-L9-317-XK

.18 Fixture Reference MOP – Mop sink to be fiberglass molded mop service basin with 10" (254 mm) high walls. Drain body to be cast brass with removable stainless-steel dome strainer complete with cast brass locknut and two neoprene gaskets. Stainless steel rim and wall guards to be included. The drain body to provide for a lead-caulked joint to a 3" (75 mm) I.P.S. Supply fitting to be wall type sink supply fitting with vacuum breaker on spout, hose outlet, hose and holder, mop hanger, and silicone sealant.


.1 Sink:

.1 Swan MS3624

.2 Stern Williams MTB-3624 Fiat MSB-3624

.2 Trim:

.1 Zurn Z842M4

.2 Cambridge 28T911

.3 Fiat 830-AA c/w 832 AA.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Plumbing Fixtures

.1 For precise location and mounting heights of the fixtures and trim, Refer to the Architectural Drawings. Mount play sinks PS-1 in Toddler Rooms @ 450 mm to top of rim. in Pre-School Rooms @ 550 mm to top of rim. JK and SK rooms @ 610 mm to top of rim.

.2 Co-ordinate the work of this Division with that of other Divisions with regard to all work.

.3 Conform with detailed Architectural and Electrical Drawings countertop installation with regard to sink size and location in countertop to ensure clearance with counter structural components and possible interference with countertop electrical outlets.

.4 Fixtures are to be carefully stored until ready for placing. After placing, they are to be protected by pasting on paper, or other methods, from danger. When job is ready for service all fixtures and fittings are to be properly cleaned. Any scraped, chipped or permanently stained fixtures are to be replaced by the Contractor.

.5 All fixtures are to be white unless otherwise noted.

.6 All manufacturers' labels are to be left on fixtures until after Final Inspection and then removed.

.7 Each fixture to have compression type shut-off valves at the fixture in addition to the faucets on each fixture. These valves are to be adjusted to prevent excessive flow.



.8 Where fixtures connections pass into walls, floors, ceilings or through millwork they are to be fitted with proper escutcheons.

.9 All visible parts of trim of the fixtures including faucets, escutcheons, wastes, strainers, traps, supplies stop, etc., are to be chrome plated.

.10 When installing chrome plated trim and accessories, proper care is to be taken. Any wrench or other tool marks on the plating is to be sufficient cause for rejection.

.11 All exposed pipe and fittings and fixtures are to be rigidly supported. All fastenings to walls and partitions are to be firmly made without damage to wall finish.

.12 Connect all services to plumbing fixtures.

.13 Install all plumbing fixtures supplied by other Divisions and connect all services to plumbing fixtures.

.14 Mount handicapped lavatories to maintain a clearance of 28" (710 mm) beneath the fixture to point 10 1/4" (260 mm) from the front. Waste outlet and hot water supply pipes are to be insulated.

.15 Mechanical contractor shall provide and install the transformers for all electronic valves and wash fountains, control wiring from transformers to valves shall be by this Division. Line voltage to the transformers shall be by Division 26. Refer to electrical drawings for coordination as to the required number of transformers.

.16 Refer to Architectural drawings for mounting heights of all drinking fountains.


Drinking Fountains and Water Coolers Section 22 47 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI)

.1 ARI 1010-02, Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.

.2 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CAN/CSA-B45 Series-02 (R2013), CSA Standards on Plumbing Fixtures.

.2 CAN/CSA-B125.3-18, Plumbing Fittings.

.3 CAN/CSA-B651-18, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.


.1 National Building Code of Canada 2015 (NBC).



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fountains and coolers, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:


.2 Indicate, for all fixtures:

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Include:

.1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity.

.2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance.

.3 List of recommended spare parts.


.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

.1 Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series.

.2 Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.3.

.3 Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.

.4 Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.



.5 Drinking fountains:

.1 DF-1: recessed stainless steel with elevated bubbler base, integral strainer, wall screws with washers and cap nuts. N/A

.1 Trim: angle stream anti-squirt bubbler with automatic stream regulator, self-closing valve, screwdriver stop, waste tailpiece, trap.

.2 DF-2: semi-recessed stainless steel with elevated base, integral strainer, wall screws. N/A

.1 Trim: angle stream anti-squirt bubbler with automatic stream regulator, self-closing valve, screwdriver stop, waste tailpiece, trap.

.3 DF-3: wall hung, stainless steel with elevated bubbler base, high back, integral strainer, wall hanger. See WF water refilling station schedule on mechanical drawings.

.1 Trim: angle stream anti-squirt bubbler with automatic stream regulator, self-closing valve, screwdriver stop, waste tailpiece, trap and access cover.

.4 DF-4: handicapped. N/A

.6 Refrigerated water coolers: N/A

.1 RWC-1: fully recessed.

.1 Refrigeration system: packaged hermetic R22 unit with pre-cooler, insulated double wall chiller, storage tank, air-cooled condenser, thermostatically controlled.

.2 Capacity: 30 L/h from 27 degrees C to 10 degrees C, with 32 degrees C ambient air. In accordance with ARI 1010.

.3 Cabinet: type 302 stainless steel, satin finish, integral back, strainer, access panel and grille, elevated bubbler base.

.4 Bubbler: pushbutton operated, self-regulating, angle stream, squirt-proof, with nozzle and guard.

.5 Push button type glass filler.

.6 Electrical: grounded electrical cord with plug: 120 V, 60 Hz. CSA certified.

.2 RWC-2: semi-recessed.

.1 Refrigeration system: packaged hermetic R22 unit with pre-cooler, insulated double wall chiller, storage tank, air-cooled condenser, thermostatically controlled.

.2 Capacity: 30 L/h from 27 degrees C to 10 degrees C, with 32 degrees C ambient air. In accordance with ARI 1010.

.3 Cabinet: type 302 stainless steel, satin finish, integral back, strainer, access panel and grille, elevated bubbler base, bonderized steel apron, baked enamel finish. Color selected by Consultant.

.4 Bubbler: push-button operated, self-regulating, angle stream, squirt-proof, with nozzle and guard.

.5 Push button type glass filler.

.6 Electrical: grounded electrical cord with plug: 120 V, 60 Hz. CSA certified.

.3 RWC-3: handicapped.

.7 Fixture piping:



.1 Hot and cold water supplies to each fixture:

.1 Chrome plated, flexible, rigid, supply pipes each with screwdriver, handwheel stop, reducers, escutcheon.

.2 Waste:

.1 Brass P trap with cleanout on each fixture not having integral trap.

.2 Chrome plated in all exposed places.

.3 Chair carriers:

.1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for all wall-mounted fixtures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION


3.2 INSTALLATION

.1 Mounting heights:

.1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified.

.2 Wall-hung fixtures: as indicated, measured from finished floor.

.3 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBC or CAN/CSA B651.

.2 Drinking fountains and water coolers :

.1 In accordance with ARI 1010.

3.3 ADJUSTING

.1 Conform to water conservation requirements specified this Section.

.2 Adjustments:

.1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates.

.2 Adjust water cooler, drinking fountain flow stream to ensure no spillage.

.3 Checks:

.1 Refrigerated water coolers: operation, temperature settings.

.4 Thermostatic controls:

.1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.

3.4 CLEANING

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning.

.1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.


Mechanical General Provisions Section 23 00 00.1 Page 1 of 12


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 The specifications of Section 21 05 01 apply to and govern all work of Divisions 21, 22 and 23.

.2 Comply with the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions of the Contract Documents and all amendments and supplements thereto, and with Division 1.

.3 Include Harmonized Sales Tax (HST) as outlined in General Conditions and Tendering Instructions.

.4 Whenever the word "Consultant" is indicated in all Sections under Divisions 21, 22 and 23 this to be defined as the "Mechanical Engineer" unless specifically indicated otherwise.

1.2 Scope of Specifications

.1 The listing hereinafter of any article, material, operation or method requires that this Division is to provide each item listed of the quality and subject to the qualifications noted, and this Division is to perform each operation prescribed according to the condition stated, providing therefore, all necessary labour, equipment and incidentals.

1.3 Scope of Work

.1 Related Work Specified Elsewhere

.1 ElectricalDivision 26

.2 This Division is to include the supply of all labour, tools, equipment and materials for the installing, testing and putting into proper operation the complete system as herein specified, as shown on the drawings, or as is reasonably inferable from either or both.

.3 Equipment items that are supplied as packaged units under this Division are to include all internal wiring, relays, contactors, switches, transformers, motor starters, controls and ancillaries as required for the intended operation, and to be complete with all necessary terminals suitable for connection to power source, and external devices at a single location.

1.4 Intent of Specifications and Drawings

.1 Any specific item or work omitted from one and which is mentioned or reasonably implied in the other is to be considered as properly and sufficiently specified and must be provided by this Division.

.2 Should any discrepancy or conflict appear between these specifications and the drawings which leave this Division in doubt as to the true meaning and intent of the drawings and specifications, a ruling is to be obtained from the Consultant before submitting the tender. If clarification is not sought prior to the closing of tender, the Consultant's decisions are final, conclusive and binding on this Division.

1.5 Regulation and Permits

.1 All work to be carried out in accordance with the latest editions of all relevant authorities, codes, or regulations including but not limited to Ontario Building Code (OBC), including Part 7, Plumbing; Canadian Regulations for the Construction and Inspection of Pressure Vessels; Ontario Fire Code (OFC); Ministry of Labour Guidelines; Occupational Health and Safety Act; Ontario Electrical Safety Code; Gas Utilization Code; Canadian Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Code; National Fire Protection Association (NFPA); Canadian Standards Association (CSA); and American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) Standards.

.2



.3 .All authorized code inspections required by above mentioned laws, rules and regulations, inclusive of any fees, obtaining of permits, issuance of notices are to be arranged and paid for by this Division.

.4 Furnish all necessary certificates as evidence that work installed complied with aforementioned laws and regulations of all governing authorities, prior to acceptance of the work and before the final certificate of payment is issued.

.5 Any deviations from the plans or specifications requested by an official representing one or any of the authorities having jurisdiction over that portion of the work must be brought to the attention of the Consultant prior to proceeding with the change. Any additional costs incurred for extra work performed without instruction from the Consultant will not be considered.

1.6 Examination of Site and Documents

.1 This Division and related sub-trades, before tendering, are to examine the site and all drawings and specifications of other trades and familiarize himself with local conditions, building construction and finishes affecting the work under this section. No allowances are to be made for any extra expense incurred by him through his failure to do so.

1.7 Contract Drawings

.1 The Contract drawings are not intended to be shop or working drawings and all measurements are to be taken from the Architectural dimensioned drawings or in the field. This Division shall make, without any extra expense or credit to the Owner, any necessary changes or additions to the work to accommodate the Architectural or Structural conditions.

.2 Where shop or working drawings are required, this Division shall provide them and submit them to the Consultant for review.

.3 The Contract drawings show the minimum standard acceptable regardless of any lesser standards set by any codes or regulations having jurisdiction.

.4 The Architectural, Structural and Electrical contract drawings are to be examined to ensure that the work of this Division may be satisfactorily completed.

.5 Notify the Consultant upon discovery of any conditions, which adversely affect the work of this Division. No allowances are to be made after awarding Contract for any expenses incurred through failure to do so.

1.8 Storage of Materials

.1 Proper facilities for storage and protection of material and equipment are to be provided at the job site by this Division.

.2 All pipe to be used on the job to be carefully stacked off the floor with ends capped or suitably plugged to prevent the entry of dirt, etc. until such times as when the piping is being installed. Similarly all openings in pressure vessels, tanks, etc., to be kept closed until ready for use. Any piping not suitably protected to be removed from the site and replaced with new.

.3 Equipment located on site, must also be suitably protected to prevent damage from abuse or misuse. Equipment and/or materials damaged after delivery to site is to be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.4 Make known, any hazardous or flammable materials to be used and method of application before using. This Division shall be responsible for proper storage and all necessary safety requirements in the storage and use of all hazardous and flammable materials used in the execution of their work.

1.9 Co-Operation of Trades



.1 Read specifications and drawings of other trades and conform with their requirements before proceeding with any work specified in Divisions 21, 22 and 23, related to the other trades.

.2 Co-operate with all other trades on the job, so that all equipment can be satisfactorily installed, and so that no delay is caused to any other trade.

.3 Any reworking of installed equipment, piping or ducting to accommodate the installation of other trades work shall be performed at no extra cost.

1.10 Co-Operation of Trades – Life Safety and Fire Protection Systems

.1 All life safety systems and fire protection systems and their components shall be verified to ensure that they are functioning according to the intent of their design.

.2 The life safety systems and fire protection systems and their components shall include but not be limited to; fire alarm systems, sprinkler system, standpipe systems, smoke control, ventilation, pressurization, door hold-open devices, elevator recalls, smoke and fire shutters and dampers, emergency power, emergency lighting, etc.

.3 Where life safety and fire protection systems are installed, the commissioning of these integrated systems shall also be performed as a whole to ensure proper operation and inter-relationship between the systems. The commissioning of these integrated systems as a whole shall be the responsibility of Division 26.

.4 Each trade shall carry out their work with care and shall cooperate with Division 26.

1.11 Warranty

.1 This Division to warranty products and execution of work under this Division against defects of material and workmanship for one full year after date of Substantial Performance.

.2 Repair defects that are discovered or develop during this period and make good any resulting damage to equipment or building. Repairs to be carried out at no cost to Owner.

.3 Provide extended warranties where indicated in other sections of this Division. Extended warranties to commence on termination of the standard one-year warranty and to be an extension of these same provisions.

1.12 Changes in The Work

.1 Submit prices for additional work, or work to be deleted, requested by the Consultants with a complete breakdown as follows:

.1 Quantities of all items of equipment and material and unit costs.

.2 Total net cost of material.

.3 Total man hours.

.4 Total labour cost.

.5 Overhead and profit as specified in the Supplementary General Conditions.

.6 All applicable taxes.

.7 Changes to scheduled completion.

1.13 Local Utilities

.1 The Contractor before tendering to contact all utilities to determine the local procedures and policies concerning services, and portions of that service which would be supplied or available through the utilities and incur any cost. The Contractor to ensure no delays in construction or service connections.

1.14 Existing Services



.1 Where work involves breaking into or connecting existing services, carry out work at times directed by governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to the premises and its operation.

.2 Before commencing work, establish location and extent of service lines in area of work and notify Consultant of finding.

.3 Where unknown services are encountered, immediately advise Consultant and confirm findings in writing.

.4 Remove abandoned service lines. Cap or otherwise seal lines at cut-off points, in manner approved by authorities having jurisdiction over service.

.5 Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned service lines. The subcontractors concerned shall provide this Division with all necessary dimensions required to accurately locate those services.

.6 Where the location of any of these utilities has been shown on the plans, such information is not guaranteed. It is the responsibility of this Division to verify locations, elevations, etc., immediately after they move on the site. If for any reason the information obtained necessitates changes in procedures or design, they must advise the Consultant at once. If this verification of existing conditions is not done at the outset and any problems arise, the responsibility for same is entirely this Division’s.

.7 Where it is necessary to temporarily shut down equipment or services serving essential areas, this Division shall include premium costs to ensure the work force is scheduled for “round the clock” operation in order to minimize disruption and equipment downtime.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Materials and equipment are specifically named and described in this specification to establish a standard that this Division is to adhere to.

.2 The terms "approved alternate”, “alternate manufacturer” are used to indicate a product or manufacturer which, in the Consultant's opinion, meets the basic performance and quality of the specified product or manufacturer, subject to all the requirements so specified being met. Dimensions, weights, electrical requirements, etc., are not always equal to the specified item. Except where a product or manufacturer is "base bid" when an approved alternate product(s) or manufacturer(s) is named, this Division may provide and install the alternate but must be prepared to bear any and all costs incurred by its use.

.3 The term "base bid" indicates a product or manufacturer the tender amount must be based on. This Division may list on the tender form an "alternative product or manufacturer" with cost savings (if any) and the Owner shall have the option of accepting or rejecting the alternative.

.4 Whenever an alternate product is not listed in the specifications and is proposed for approval prior to tender close, this Division to guarantee that such proposed alternates are not to adversely affect the space requirements allocated on the drawings for the material, item, plant or equipment specified. This Division agrees to bear any additional expense incurred by the Owner, the General Contractor and other Divisions due to the use of proposed alternates, particularly in connection with any required changes in the work and any additional material and installation costs by any other part of the project. When proposing an alternative product, this Division to make the Consultants aware of any structural, architectural, mechanical or electrical design changes necessary to accommodate the alternative product.

.5



.6 Equipment manufacturers and sub-contractors submitting alternates for this contract, upon written request of the Consultant, are to qualify themselves to have the experience in the successful manufacturer and/or installation of the type of work and quality of materials specified and shown.

.7 Requests for approval to be accompanied with complete specifications for the equipment, showing dimensions, ratings, etc. Approval or rejection of an alternate shall be issued in writing to the applicant.

.8 Any equipment installed without the Consultant's written approval, is to be removed and the correct equipment installed at this Division's expense. No consideration is to be allowed for claims of delay of schedule in this case.

.9 In the event the approved alternate equipment is not available for any reason, the specified equipment is to be installed, any and all costs incurred are the responsibility of this Division.

.10 The Consultant reserves the right to accept or reject an alternative without explanation.

2.2 Access Doors

.1 The Contractor to supply access doors of adequate size and with appropriate clearances, wherever any equipment, cleanouts, valves, dampers, fire dampers, etc., which require service, maintenance or removal and are built in or concealed behind walls, or ceiling.

.2 Doors to be installed by the General Contractor. Coloured thumb tacks are to be used in acoustic tile ceilings.

.3 Access doors to be 14 U.S.S. gauge steel with concealed hinges, anchor straps, screwdriver operated lock, rounded safety corners and dust tight doors that open 180 deg. Doors are to be adequately sized to suit equipment which is to be accessed, but in no case smaller than 8" x 8" (200mm x 200mm).

.4 .

.5 In acoustic tile ceiling, where access cannot be achieved through tile, install access doors to suit tile. Markers are to be approved colour-coded markers to indicate type of valve or equipment concealed.

.6 Where access doors are to be installed in a fire rated assembly, the access door must have a fire rating equal to or greater than the assembly fire rating. Fire rated access doors to be ULC rated and in accordance with NFPA-80.

.7 Acceptable manufacturers: Acudor, Le Hage, Mi-Fab.

2.3 Supports

.1 This Division shall furnish and install all special structural work required for the installation of mechanical equipment and motors, etc. All details to meet the approval of the Consultant and drawings are to be submitted for all major steel supports.

.2 Where on the drawings or specifications special isolation bases are noted, these shall be the responsibility of this Division.

.3 All equipment shall be properly aligned on bases before being bolted down.

.4 All floor mounted equipment to be set at least 4" (100mm) above the floor on concrete bases, and anchored securely with anchor bolts unless indicated otherwise. Installation of bases and all associated work to be by Division 3, identified accurately by this Division as to location and dimensions.

2.4 Electric Motors and Wiring

.1 Refer to drawing schedules for voltage requirements of all motors.



.2 All starters and line voltage wiring shall be supplied by Division 26 unless specified otherwise.

.3 All motors required for this Contract shall be supplied by this Division.

.4 All fractional horsepower motors to have internal overload protection.

.5 Supply electrical disconnect switches where indicated in schedules.

.6 Provide motors of adequate size and type for intended service. Unless stated otherwise, all motors 1 HP (746W) and above to be high efficiency conforming to ASHRAE Standard

.7 90.1 Table 5-1 latest supplement. Unless stated otherwise, use ambient temperature of 104oF (40oC).

2.5 Special Tools and Spare Parts

.1 Furnish spare parts as follows:

.1 One set of V-belts for each piece of machinery (matched for multiple belt drives).

.2 One set of filters for each filter bank, to be installed after substantial completion and prior to balancing.

.2 Identify spare parts containers as to contents and replacement parts number.

.3 Provide one set of special tools where required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers.

.4 Furnish one grease gun and adaptors to suit different types of grease and fittings.

.5 Provide list of spare parts provided in operating and maintenance instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Each piece of equipment or material to be checked against the specification and reviewed shop drawing before installation, all clearances and installation instructions are to be strictly adhered to. Failure to comply with the instructions shall result in removal and proper reinstallation of the equipment at no cost to the Owner.

.2

.3 Where mechanical equipment is installed in a fire rated assembly provide fire dampers, drywall enclosure or other as required to maintain the assembly fire rating to the approval of this Division. Include all costs.

3.2 Excavation and Backfilling

.1 All excavation to be carried out in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Requirements, bylaws and authorities having jurisdiction over installation of this work.

.2 Pipe trenches are to be cut to comply with the grades shown on the drawings. Any cutting of the trench below the required grade is to be backfilled to the proper elevation with thoroughly compacted sand.

.3 Bottoms of trenches are to be excavated so that piping, conduits, ducts, etc. are supported on a solid bed of undisturbed earth with additional excavation under joints to permit joint to be properly made up. Provide a concrete pad, brick or concrete piers properly reinforced under all piping, etc. below grade when a solid undisturbed earth is not obtainable. Approval for any alternate procedure is at the discretion of the Consultant.

.4 Bed beneath pipe is to be laid of an approved sand supplied and consolidated to provide a continuous solid bearing for the pipe. Do all necessary pumping required to maintain any excavation free of water.



.5 Inform the Consultant immediately if the excavation reveals unexpected sub-surface conditions such as heavy seepage or springs, etc.

.6 Obtain the Consultant's approval prior to commencement of backfilling of the pipe trenches. Backfill the trenches carefully to prevent injury to the work and subsequent settlement and execute the backfilling generally as follows:

.1 Backfill the lower 24" (610mm) depth of all pipe trenches with sand or pit run gravel, hand tamped in layers of 6" (152mm) thickness.

.2 Backfill and consolidate the remainder of the trench in 12" (305mm) layers with Granular ‘B’ material conforming to O.P.S.S. Form 1010 below areas to receive floor slabs or under paved areas and native fine sand with a 12" (300mm) native silty clay cap below surrounding ground in grassed areas.

.3 Compact each layer thoroughly at optimum moisture content with approved hand or mechanical tampers to a density equal to that of the adjacent original undisturbed sub-soil or to 95% Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density.

.7 Obtain geotechnical inspection of compaction of trench backfill materials and pipe bedding materials. Costs for inspection by independent testing agency to be paid from cash allowance as outlined in accordance with Section 01001, General Requirements.

.8 Do not puddle or flood with water for consolidating the backfill. Add water during the compaction to the optimum moisture of the backfilling material.

.9 Protect the bottom of the excavation against flooding or freezing. Use pumping or other method to keep bottom dry. Trenching to be excavated and backfilled no more than weather will permit.

.10 Ensure special precautions at all pipe penetrations in foundation wall.

.11 Prior to backfilling of underfloor plumbing service trenches, the installation must be inspected and tested by an authorized representative. Provide minimum 48 hours’ notice. If tested and inspected by local authority submit written certification.

3.3 Sleeves, Holes and Patching

.1 All cutting and patching to be as specified under the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions bearing in mind that the integrity of the fire separations are to be maintained at all times.

.2 All holes, pipe chases, etc., through walls and floors that are not fire separation are to be large enough to accommodate the thickness of insulation specified.

.3 All cutting and patching, sleeves, grouting, painting and drywall required by this Division is to be performed by fully qualified craftsmen of that respective trade. All cutting and patching required by this Division to be provided by this Division, unless indicated otherwise.

.4 All holes, pipe chases etc, through walls and floors that are fire separations are to be 1/2" (13mm) larger in diameter than the pipe and the void will be properly firestopped as specified.

.5 Holes through masonry walls are to be sleeved with schedule 40 steel pipe, all other holes to be sleeved with light gauge metal sleeves, unless indicated otherwise.

.6 Holes through exterior walls and roof are to be properly flashed and made weatherproof.

.7 Refer to Architectural drawings for details.

.8 Holes through structural steel are to be reinforced with steel plates welded each side as detailed in the Structural Engineer's drawings and specifications or to meet their approval.



.9 Sleeves for uninsulated pipes are to be sized to allow 1/2" (13mm) clearance between the pipe and the sleeve. The space between the pipe and sleeve to be sealed with rockwool insulation to avoid smoke, sound and dust transmission and firestopped.

.10 Pipes are not to be in direct contact with plaster, concrete or any other finishing material.

.11 Sleeves for all piping penetrating mechanical room floor to extend 2" (50mm) above the finished floor and sealed at the floor.

.12 Sleeves in potentially wet floor areas to extend at least 1" (25mm) above the finished floor.

.13 Ensure no contact between copper tube or pipe and ferrous sleeve.

.14 This Division to provide detailed dimensioned drawings prior to pouring floors, erecting masonry, or installing roof deck. Drawings to indicate size and location of all openings to ensure correct bridging installed as indicated under Division 5.

.15 This Division is responsible to install sleeves for piping and ducts and frames for openings for grilles, louvres etc., as the construction progresses. If these sleeves and frames are not installed by This Division during construction the cost of cutting openings, chases and installing the sleeves and frames is to be at This Division’s expense by the respective trade involved.

.16 Provide sleeves for all ducting penetrating floors and masonry or concrete walls

.17 Ducts penetrating fire separations to have any voids between the duct sleeve and fire separation properly firestopped as specified. Ducts penetrating non fire separations to have any voids between the duct sleeve and separation filled with rockwool insulation to avoid smoke, sound and dust transmission.

.18 Supply and set all necessary sleeves for this work prior to pouring of concrete.

.19 Approval of the location, size and proposed method of cutting through structural components must be received before proceeding.

3.4 Workmanship

.1 Employ an experienced, responsible tradesperson to supervise the work and retain this supervisor on the job throughout the construction period until completion of work, and all mechanical systems are fully operational and have been commissioned and demonstrated to the Owners unless otherwise approved or directed by the Consultant.

.2 Employ only skilled licensed pipe fitters, etc. for execution of work. Workmanship to be first class not only as regards durability, efficiency and safety, but also as regards to neatness of detail.

.3 Set equipment accurately, plumb and level and align hanger rods and steel supporting structures.

.4 Products and installations in the opinion of the Consultant found to be defective; not in accordance with specifications; damaged or defaced; or of poor workmanship to be rejected.

.5 Rejected work is to be repaired or replaced at no cost to the Owner.

3.5 Use of Fans

.1 While construction is still in progress the use of or running of system ventilation fans for the purposes of ventilation, drying of plaster, etc., will not be permitted.

3.6 Belt Drives, Sheaves and Guards

.1 Provide all belt driven equipment with V-belt drive, designed for at least 150 percent of motor nameplate horsepower rating and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of service intended. Belt drives to be at least 95 percent efficient.



Balance and properly align all drives. Provide matched sets of belts for multiple belt assemblies. Select belts to suit starting torque of driver. Use single belt drives only for motors 2 hp (1492 watt) and smaller.

.2 Provide motor sheaves for one and two belt drives of variable pitch type, with Dodge key adjustments. Supply one set of fixed drive sheaves for drives with two or more belts.

.3 Install fixed motor sheaves to obtain the originally specified rpm. After initial test and preliminary adjustment, supply and install a second set of fixed sheaves if necessary, to provide the design flow quantities as established on the job. Obtain correct total flow rate for fans through speed changes and not by throttling.

.4 All equipment that is belt driven must be a complete installation including a sturdy, firmly supported, removable belt guard to give full protection and safety from any rotating part.

3.7 Piping

.1 All piping for this Division is to be run concealed where possible and grouped so that valves, etc., are accessible through as few access panels or doors as possible, while still maintaining adequate working space.

.2 Piping that does not present a neat workmanlike appearance, in the opinion of the Consultant, is to be reworked according to his instructions without extra cost to the Owner. Arrange piping within pipe chases that have been designed for access of personnel to ensure that access is not impeded.

.3 In specifically designated unfinished areas such as mechanical rooms or existing areas, run pipes neatly parallel or in banks and group valves. Piping may run exposed in these designated areas. The crossing over of pipes must be kept to a minimum.

.4 The piping shown on the drawings is located diagrammatically in the space in which it is intended to run. Co-operate and co-ordinate with the work of other Divisions, also installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., within the same area. No extras are to be paid for any relocation of piping to suit the work of other Divisions.

.5 Separation by approved dielectric unions is to be applied to all ferrous and non-ferrous domestic water piping. Separation of ferrous and non-ferrous piping on closed loop systems to be accomplished with the use of brass or bronze fittings and/or valves. All connecting or touching metals that could give rise to electrolytic action to be separated by insulation.

.6 All piping is to be installed with adequate change of direction, expansion joints and anchors, so that the piping and equipment will in no way be strained or distorted by expansion and contraction.

.7 If on the job circumstances require additional change of direction and expansion loops, furnish and install same at no extra cost.

.8 All take-offs from the mains shall be made using swing joints wherever possible.

.9 Hydronic branches serving down feed risers are to be taken from lower sides or bottom of mains and grade down slightly to risers. Branches which serve units above the mains are to be taken from the top or sides of mains.

.10 Anchors are to be provided where necessary to protect equipment and to generally be made from 1/2" (13mm) M.S. plate with structural steel angle and channel sections.

.11 Suitable anchors and guides are to be provided where shown or where necessary for all vibration devices.

.12 Expansion loops are to be located midway between anchors except where shown otherwise. All expansion loops to be cold sprung 50% in accordance with the latest edition of the ASHRAE Guide.



.13 Install all water piping so that lines can be drained. Provide drip tee with 3/4" (19mm) ball valve with cap and chain.

.14 All exposed plumbing piping in finished area to be chrome plated unless indicated otherwise.

3.8 Identification of Piping

.1 Identify all visible piping whether fully exposed or in accessible spaces such as above acoustic tile ceilings.

.2 Identify all concealed piping mains in concealed areas such as drywall ceilings and pipe trenches etc. prior to these areas being enclosed.

.3 Identify the medium in the piping with Brimar System #1 or Smillie McAdams Summerlin Ltd. wrap-around pipe markers (or equal) including direction-of-flow arrows.

Medium In Background Lettering

Pipe Colour Colour

Cold Condensate Green White

Domestic Cold Water Green White

Domestic Hot Water Yellow Black

Domestic Hot Water Return Yellow Black

Tempered Water Yellow Black

Sanitary Drain Green White

Storm Drain Green White

Plumbing Vent Green White

Heating Water Supply Yellow Black

Heating Water Return Yellow Black

Sprinkler Water Red White

.4 All piping identification to be done on clean surfaces.

.5 Size all wrap-around labels for the pipe being labelled.

.6 Location:

.1 Locate markers and classifying colour on piping systems so they can be seen from floor or platform.

.2 Identify piping runs at least once in each room.

.3 Do not exceed 30 ft. (10 m) between identifications in open areas and above T bar ceilings.

.4 Identify both sides where piping penetrates walls, partitions and floors.

.5 Where piping is concealed in pipe chase or other confined space, identify at point of entry and leaving, and at each access opening.

.6 Identify piping at starting and ending points of runs and at each piece of equipment.

.7 Identify piping at major manual and automatic valves immediately upstream of valves. Where this is not possible, place identification as close to valve as possible.

.8 Identify branch, equipment or building served after such valve.



.9 Identify piping in concealed spaces prior to spaces being enclosed.

3.9 Valve Tags

.1 All valves installed under this Division to have securely affixed to them an approved valve tag bearing an engraved number which shall be used to identify the valve on an indexed valve list prepared and mounted in a glazed frame in the mechanical or boiler room.

.2 Beside each number on the list of valves to be listed, identify the function normal position, and location of valve so tagged.

.3 Valve tags shall be either engraved lamacoid or plastic valve tags (Brimar B11101-39) with ¼” tall lettering of a colour to contrast with the label colour.

.4 Valve tags shall be colour coded as follows:

.1 System Tag Colour Lettering Colour

.2 Domestic piping systems Green White

.3 Heating water piping systems Yellow Black

.4 Fire Protection piping systems Red White

3.10 Identification of Ductwork

.1 Stencil over final finish only.

.2 Use 2" (50mm) high black stenciled letters, e.g. "Supply", "Return", "Toilet Exhaust", General Exhaust" with directional flow arrows.

.3 Maintain 30' (10m) maximum distance between markings with at least one identification per run.

.4 Identify ducts each side of dividing walls or partitions and beside each access door.

3.11 Identification of Equipment

.1 Provide laminated plastic plates with black face and white centre of minimum size

.2 3 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/16" (90 x 38 x 2 mm) nominal thickness, engraved with 1/4" (6mm) high lettering. Use 1" (25mm) lettering for major equipment.

.3 Include Electrical circuit designation on the label.

.4 Mechanically fasten nameplates securely in conspicuous place. Where nameplates cannot be mounted on cool surface, provide standoffs or hang from equipment on short metal chain.

.5 Identify equipment type, number and service or areas or zone of building served.

.6 Submit the wording for the labels for approval prior to engraving and installation

3.12 Painting

.1 All field priming and finishing to be performed by Division 9.

.2 Provide field surface preparation, priming and finishing of the work of this Division including exposed bare (or insulated) pipework, fittings, ductwork, miscellaneous metals, supports, and equipment, in accordance with Division 9.

3.13 Placing In Operation

.1 Prior to acceptance and on completion of work make a complete operational test of systems and work carried out under Division 21, 22, 23.

.2 At all fixtures, adjustments for correct water flow to be made, this is to include hot and cold-water systems and flush valves.



.3 At all drains, covers and gratings are to be removed and cleaned, traps cleaned out and drains thoroughly flushed.

.4 All strainers are to be cleaned out after two weeks normal operation.

.5 All filters in fan cabinets are to be removed, thoroughly cleaned and stored for future use, install new filters in units. Bird and insect screens on all louvres to be cleaned. All coils to be combed out where necessary and vacuumed out.

.6 Balancing will be carried out and systems set to designed values, and a report of final actual performance of all equipment and balancing for final space conditions on cooling and heating to be carried out when relative climatic conditions exist. Refer to

.7 Section 23 05 93 for more details.

3.14 Clean-Up

.1 Avoid accumulation of scrap and debris resulting from the operations of this Division and at all times help maintain the working site in a neat and clean condition. On completion of the contract, remove all scrap and debris resulting from the work of this Division and clean all equipment installed by this Division.

3.15 Start-Up Service

.1 Provide services of a qualified technician responsible for assisting the Owner's staff in becoming familiar with operating of systems, coordinating work of control manufacturer, acting on any complaints from the Owners, or Consultant regarding operation of any of the systems, installed under this Division.

.2 Provide start-up of major pieces of mechanical equipment or systems, by representative of equipment manufacturer or person qualified and recognized by the equipment manufacturer.

.3 Submit start-up reports on all mechanical equipment and systems verifying correct installation and operating parameters in all modes of operation. Include service reports in operating and maintenance manuals

.4 Notify Consultant prior to start-up on any piece of mechanical equipment or system.

.5 Demonstrate operation of all or any mechanical system or equipment as directed by the Consultant in his presence.

3.16 Testing

.1 Notification of Tests: Consultant must be given at least 48 hours’ notice of date and time of which any and all tests are to be carried out. Under no circumstances must a test be assumed conclusive unless it has been witnessed by the Consultant or his designated representative.

.2 Test all piping systems for leaks, providing gauges, materials and labour as required. Equipment furnished as part of the permanent installation shall not be used for testing purposes. Before testing, remove all equipment which is not designed to withstand the test pressures. All piping is to be tested before covering is applied.

.3 Before final payment, test the operation of each system and all equipment installed, make all necessary adjustments and replacements and demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Consultant that all equipment is operating as intended and without undue noise and vibration.


Common Work Results for HVAC Section 23 05 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Submittals

.1 Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Shop drawings; submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.

.3 Shop drawings to show:

.1 Mounting arrangements.

.2 Operating and maintenance clearances.

.4 Shop drawings and product data accompanied by:

.1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts.

.2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable.

.3 Points of operation on performance curves.

.4 Manufacturer to certify current model production.

.5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes.

.5 In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: use MCAC "Shop Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number.

.6 Closeout Submittals:

.1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.2 Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with, Departmental Representative before final inspection.

.3 Operation data to include:

.1 Control schematics for systems including environmental controls.

.2 Description of systems and their controls.

.3 Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances.

.4 Operation instruction for systems and component.

.5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.

.6 Valves schedule and flow diagram.

.7 Colour coding chart.

.4 Maintenance data to include:

.1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment.

.2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.

.5 Performance data to include:

.1 Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete

.2 Equipment performance verification test results.

.3 Special performance data as specified.



.4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 94 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.

.6 Approvals:

.1 Submit one (1) copy of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Architecttura Inc. for approval and one (1) USB. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless directed by Architecttura Inc.

.2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Architecttura Inc.

.7 Additional data:

.1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions.

.8 Site records:

.1 Architecttura Inc. will provide one (1) set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring.

.2 Transfer information weekly to reproducible, revising reproducible to show work as actually installed.

.3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.

.4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection.

.9 As-built drawings:

.1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize production of as-built drawings.

.2 Identify each drawing in lower right-hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date).

.3 Submit to Architecttura Inc. for approval and make corrections as directed.

.4 Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built drawings.

.5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals.

.10 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.


.1 Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

1.3 Maintenance

.1 Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Submittals as follows:

.1 One set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to final operating set.

.2 Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers and in accordance with Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Submittals.

.3 Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Not applicable.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Painting Repairs and Restoration

.1 Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 00 - Interior Painting.

.2 Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.

.3 Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.

3.2 Cleaning

.1 Vacuum interior of all supply ductwork.


.1 Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and submit report as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.


.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS


.3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.

3.4 Demonstration

.1 Departmental Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.

.2 Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.

.3 Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio-visual aids as part of instruction materials.

.4 Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.

3.5 Protection

.1 Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system.


Basic Materials and Methods Section 23 05 01 Page 1 of 14


PART 1 - GENERAL




.1 Painting Section 09 90 00


.3 HVAC Division 23


1.3 Quality of Assurance




.3 Conform to National Plumbing Code of Canada, Current Edition.

.4 Conform to Regulations for Construction Project, Ontario Regulation 213 under the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Current Edition.

.5 Conform to regulations of Natural Gas Installation Code CAN/CSA-B149.1, Current Edition.

1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 23 01 00, paragraph 1.04 for all the following equipment items:

.1 Valves and Suction Guides

.2 Strainers and Air Eliminators

.3 Pressure and Temperature Gauges

.4 Backflow Preventers, and Flow Switches

.5 Expansion Joints, Expansion Compensators and Flexible Connections

.6 Low Water Cut-off

.7 Circulating pumps

.8 Roof Flashing

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Pipe and Pipe Fittings

.1 Heating Water Piping:

.1 Steel pipe 2" (50 mm) and smaller - Schedule 40, electric weld or seamless A.S.T.M. specification A-53.

.2 Steel pipe 2 1/2" (65 mm) and larger - schedule 40, electric weld or seamless A.S.T.M. specification A-53 with butt welding ends.

.3 Copper pipe 3/4" (19 mm) and smaller - Type "L" hard drawn copper with wrought copper solder type fittings to ASTM B88-03.



.4 Dielectric unions to be used between copper and steel pipe.

.5 Steel pipe fittings up to and including 2" (50mm) are to be threaded joints malleable iron type.

.6 Steel pipe fittings 2 1/2" (65mm) and larger are to be forged steel butt welding type with all joints welded.

.7 Grooved end fittings are equally acceptable for chilled water and chilled glycol lines only, for sizes 4” (100 mm) and larger.

.1 Fittings shall be ductile iron to ASTM A536; wrought steel to ASTM A234; or factory-fabricated from ASTM A53 steel pipe.

.2 Grooved joint couplings shall consist of two ductile iron housing segments, pressure responsive elastomer gasket, and ASTM A449 zinc- electroplated steel bolts and nuts.

.1 Rigid: Coupling housings with offsetting, angle-pattern bolt pads shall be used to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and B31.9. Installation-Ready, for direct stab installation without field disassembly, with grade EHP gasket suitable for water temperatures to 250 ° F (120 ° C).

.2 AGS series two-segment couplings with lead-in chamfer on housing key and wide-width Flush Seal gasket.

.8 All elbows are to be long radius type.

.9 Copper pipe fittings to be cast copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings to ANSI B16.18-2001 or wrought copper and copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings to ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001.

2.2 Hangers & Supports

.1 Hangers shall be carbon steel with copper or plastic coating for direct support of copper tubing, and shall be carbon steel with black corrosion resistant finish for all other piping.

.2 Use Grinnell FIG 65, 70, 97, CT-99, 101, 260, or 269 hangers for individual support of all horizontal piping.

.3 Provide Grinnell fig. 168 pipe covering protection saddles at each hanger where pipes are insulated.

.4 Provide Grinnell fig. 171 single pipe rollers complete with fig. 160 protection saddles on all heating mains where identified.

.5 Use 100 mm x 40 mm minimum steel channel for joint support of horizontal piping.

.6 Use welded beam attachments or beam clamps for support of horizontal pipe from steelwork.

.7 Perforated pipe hangers are not acceptable.

.8 Determine spacing between pipe rack supports using smallest pipe size.

.9 Provide Grinnell fig. 262 pipe saddles on each pipe where trapeze hangers are used.

.10 Hangers and supports shall be as manufactured by Grinnell, Myatt or Economec.

.11 Roof support blocks:

.1 Roof top support blocks for gas piping, plumbing, conduit, cable tray, and mechanical equipment shall be Roof Top Blox (RTB-01). The support blocks must be designed to eliminate roof penetrations, flashings or damage to roofing membrane.



.2 Support body shall be made of recycled UV-resistant Polypropylene Copolymer. Base platform material shall be 1” thick, 25psi, type 4 closed cell structural foam to distribute and evenly cushion loads.

.3 Support top surface shall have molded in pipe organizing saddles and strut mounting cradle. The top surface shall also have screw guide indents and engineered internal screw thread gripping feature.

.4 Block must accept 3/8” and 1/2” threaded rod (ROD-03) using side entry nut slots to allow fast top side assembly and piping height adjustments. Aluminum rollers (ROL-05 or ROL-06) shall be installed on long piping runs. Securing brackets (SBC-07) and adhesive (ADH-12) recommended for permanently securing Blox into its final installed position, anchoring against wind, rain and snow loads.

2.3 Valves

.1 Heating:

.1 Gate Valves:

.1 Up to 2" (50 mm):

.1 Crane 428

.2 Jenkins 810J

.3 Newman Hattersley S/B608

.4 Milwaukee 149

.5 Nibco T-111

.6 Kitz 24

.7 Toyo 293

.2 2 ½” (65 mm) and over:

.1 Crane 465-1/2

.2 Jenkins 454J

.3 Newman Hattersley 504

.4 Milwaukee F-2885M-13

.5 Nibco F-617-0

.6 Kitz 72

.7 Toyo 421A

.2 Globe Valves:

.1 Up to 2" (50 mm):

.1 Crane 7

.2 Milwaukee 590 T


.4 Jenkins 106BJ

.5 Nibco T-235-Y

.6 Kitz 09

.7 Toyo 221

.2 2 ½” (65 mm) and over:



.1 Crane 351


.3 Jenkins 2342J

.4 Milwaukee F-2981M

.5 Nibco F-718-B

.6 Kitz 76

.7 Toyo 400A

.3 Butterfly Valves:

.1 2 ½” (65 mm) and over, lever operated with lever lock:

.1 Crane 44-BXZ-L

.2 Newman Hattersley Series 25-315521

.3 Jenkins 2232ELJ

.4 Nibco LD-3010-2

.5 Milwaukee CL223E

.6 Kitz 6122EL

.7 Victaulic Vic-300 Master Seal (2” to 8”)

.8 Toyo 918 BESL

.9 Apollo 143

.10 Demco NE Series (285 PSIG 2-12)

.2 Note: Grooved valves shall be used in grooved piping systems.

.3 6” (150 mm) and over, gear operated:

.1 Crane 44-BXZ-G

.2 Newman Hattersley Series 25-315522

.3 Jenkins 2232EGJ

.4 Nibco LD-3010-5

.5 Milwaukee CL323E

.6 Kitz 6122EG

.7 Victaulic Vic-300 Master Seal and AGS-Vic300 (8” to over)

.8 Toyo 918 BESG

.9 Apollo 143

.10 Demco NE Series

.4 Note: Provide stem extensions where valves are located in insulated pipes. Grooved valves shall be used in grooved piping systems.

.4 Check Valves:

.1 Up to 2" (50 mm):

.1 Crane 37




.3 Jenkins 4092J

.4 Milwaukee 509

.5 Nibco T-413

.6 Kitz 22

.7 Toyo 236

.2 2 ½” (65 mm) and over:

.1 Crane 373


.3 Jenkins 587J

.4 Milwaukee F2974M

.5 Nibco F918

.6 Kitz 78

.7 Victaulic Series 716 and AGS W715

.8 Toyo 435A

.3 or; alternative 2 ½” (65 mm) and larger, wafer, double disc:

.1 Mueller #71

.5 Ball Valves:

.1 Up to 2" (50 mm):

.1 Crane F9202

.2 Newman Hattersley 1969-100

.3 Nibco/NCI T-FP-600

.4 Milwaukee BA-200

.5 Jenkins 201J

.6 Kitz 58

.7 Toyo 5044A

.8 MAS B-3

.9 Apollo 70-100

.2 Note: provide stem extensions where valves are located in insulated pipes.

2.4 Accessories

.1 Heating:

.1 Flow Balancing Valves (Complete with insulation covers):

.1 Armstrong CBV

.2 Bell & Gosset CB

.3 Tour & Anderson STA

.4 Newman Hattersley 1700 series

.5 Oventrop

.6 Victaulic



.2 Radiation Valves:

.1 3/4" (19mm) Supply:

.1 DAHL 11041, 11042

.2 3/4" (19mm) Return:

.1 DAHL 13000 Series with MV-2 (0.40-1.75USGPM) or MV-6 (1.75-6.0 USGPM) Venturion

.3 Coil Kits:

.1 Victaulic Koil-Kits may be used at coil connections at the Contractor’s option. The kit shall include a Series 786/787/78K circuit balancing valve, Series 78Y Strainer-Ball or Series 78T Union-Ball valve combination, Series 78U Union-Port fitting, and coil hoses. Layout shall match specification details.

.2 Triple Duty Valves:

.1 Armstrong FTV Series

.2 Bell & Gosset 3D

.3 Victaulic Tri-Service Assembly

.4 Mueller #721

.3 Suction Guides:

.1 Armstrong

.2 Bell & Gosset

.3 Victaulic 731 / W731 Series

.4 Mueller #1011

.4 Strainers:

.1 Furnish and install strainers where shown on the drawings. Strainer baskets shall be of stainless steel or Monel selected for the service for which they are installed. Strainers 2" (50 mm) I.P.S. and smaller shall be screwed; 2 1/2" (65 mm) I.P.S. and larger shall be flanged or grooved ends flanged strainers shall be provided with a blow-off ball valve, full size of blow-off tapping, with a short nipple on discharge side. Smaller strainers shall have nipple and cap affixed. Strainers to be Colton, Sarco, Armstrong, Mueller, Victaulic or Watts.

.2 Strainer bodies for mechanical systems shall be cast iron or brass. Mueller #11 (C.I.), 351m (bronze) and 758 (C.I. Flanged).

.3 Strainer bodies for plumbing systems shall be brass.

.5 Air Eliminators:

.1 Air eliminators on hydronic chilled water and heating mains to be Sarco AWN- 150, Hoffman 792, Colton AUDT – #150, Bell & Gossett #107A.

.2 Air eliminators are to be connected to air collecting chambers with 1/2" (13 mm) I.P.S. nipple and isolating gate valve. Air collecting chambers shall consist of a full-size tee.

.6 Pressure Gauges:

.1 To be 4 1/2" (115mm) black cast aluminum case, black figures on white dial face, phosphor bronze tube, brass rotary movement, ranges to suit pressure of medium being measured, c/w needle valve. Provide pressure snubbers on pump suction and discharge.



.2 Trerice series 600C, with type FFG - No 740 needle valves and No 872 snubbers.Winter, Weiss or Baker.

.7 Temperature Gauges:

.1 To be 3 ½” diameter, aluminum case, Bi-0metal thermometer, with scale calibrated in both deg. F & deg.C to suit range of medium being measured, black markings on white background. All thermometers to include separable well.

.2 Acceptable Products: Winters HVAC BI-METAL THERMOMETERS T160/161/165 or equals Trerice, Baker, or Weiss.

.8 Expansion Joints:

.1 For steel pipe to be self-equalizing type with two-ply stainless steel bellows, carbon steel shrouds and internal positive anti-torque device.

.1 Flexonics Model H or H3, or Hydro-Flex.

.2 For copper pipe to be self-equalizing type with two-ply bronze bellows, all bronze construction and internal positive anti-torque device.

.3 Flexonics model HB or HB3 or Hydro-Flex.

.9 Flexible Connections:

.1 Provide flexible connectors with inner core or annularly corrugated stainless steel with an outer casing of two layers of braided high tensile steel. Hose to be complete with couplings and fittings of steel with threaded or flanged connections, depending on pipe size. Flexonics or Hydro-Flex.

.10 Escutcheons:

.1 Supply and install chromium plated escutcheon plates on all piping passing through finished walls, floors and ceilings. Where sleeves project above the floor in potentially wet areas, provide chromium plated Grinnell Fig.400 escutcheon.

.2 Escutcheon plates shall be installed over the insulation and shall have set screws or clamping devices to keep the escutcheon plate in place.

.11 Flow Switches:

.1 To be single pole, double throw paddle type, stainless steel bearings, Monel bellows, paddle, corrosion resistant with screw adjustment.

.2 Acceptable Product: McDonnell Miller FS4-3.

2.5 Circulating Pumps

.1 Pumps are to be Armstrong, Bell & Gossett or Grundfos type designed for water temperature and working pressure scheduled.

.2 Provide ¼” tapping on each side of pump, for connection of pressure gauges.

.3 Refer to drawing for schedule of pumps.

.4 The complete pumping unit is to be suitable for the service shown in the pump schedule and the pump manufacturer is to conduct running tests to verify the conditions of head and capacity specified.

.5 Pump body to be cast iron, bronze fitted unless indicated otherwise, oil lubricated.

.6 All pump motors 1 HP (746W) and above to have high efficiency motors in accordance with ASHRAE 90.1.

.7 Refer to Section 23 09 23 Direct Digital Control Systems for VFD associated with circulation pumps.



2.6 Roof Flashings

.1 Roof flashings for conduit and refrigeration piping serving the air-cooled condensing units shall be copper,18" high, pre-insulated with E.P.D.M. grommets for multiple penetrations, compatible with E.P.D.M. roof membrane, as manufactured by Thaler Metal Industries, Model No. MEF-AG4 or MEF-AG6.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Piping Installation

.1 HW Heating Piping:

.1 Make all piping connections to boiler, chiller, pumps, radiation, coils, fan coil units, humidifiers, etc. Unions and valves to be located so that removal of units and equipment is possible without disconnecting more than a minimum of pipe work, and without shutting down any other pieces of equipment.

.2 Where branch pipes are welded into mains without the use of "T" connections, torch cut openings must be cut true, beveled and filed smooth. Branch pipes must not be allowed to project inside of main pipe. Openings must not be cut large enough to permit entry of welding metal and slag within the pipe.

.3 Grade horizontal water distribution piping 1" per 30 ft. (2.78 mm per meter) rising in direction of flow, wherever possible. Provide ball valves with cap and chain for draining at all low points and vent valves at high points of systems.

.4 Provide adequate space around piping to facilitate application of insulation.

.5 All reductions in pipe size to be made with eccentric fittings. Minimum size of run out shall be 3/4" (19 mm).

.2 Equipment Connection:

.1 Install unions and/or flanges to connect piping to all pieces of equipment. All equipment is to have isolating valves for equipment removal.

.3 Flashing:

.1 All vent stacks and soil stacks are to connect to insulated stack vents. Stack vents are supplied and installed through the roof by Division 07. All holes through roof are to be properly flashed and made weatherproof by roofer as required under Division 07.

.4 Thermal Expansion and Contraction of Piping:

.1 The Contractor to be responsible for expansion and contraction of all pipework. Erect all pipe in such a manner that the strain and weight does not come upon pipe connections of apparatus. Provide bends, or swing joints except where corrugated bellows type expansion joints are shown or required.

.5 Air Elimination and Drainage:

.1 All low points to be installed with a ball valve with a screwed connection suitable for connecting a hose. Install air vents at all high points in system

3.2 Piping Joints

.1 Threaded Joints:

.1 Pipe is to be cut at right angles and reamed to full bore.

.2 Threads are to be carefully cut with sharp dies and proper cutting oil.

.3 All chips and other foreign matter are to be removed from the pipe before installation into system.



.4 Proper joint compound is to be used on male threads only. A good grade of hemp fibre is to be used on threads.

.5 Connections to be made with proper wrench to suit pipe size, additional leverage not to be allowed.

.6 If threaded joints leak after assembly by normal methods, they are to be disconnected and corrected if possible, or replaced. Over tightening or caulking is not considered a proper correction.

.2 Solder Joints:

.1 Pipe is to be cut at right angles, reamed, deburred and sized.

.2 End of pipe and inside of fittings to be cleaned with steel wool to a bright metallic finish.

.3 Flux to be applied to outside of pipe and inside of fittings; fitting to be revolved on pipe to ensure proper distribution of flux.

.4 Using solder wire, heat assembly with torch until solder has flowed completely around fittings. Wipe off excess solder. Solder used on potable water systems to consist of 0.2% maximum lead composition or alternatively use 90/5/5 tin/ silver/antimony. Larger size pipe joints are to be completely tinned before assembly.

.3 Grooved Joints:

.1 Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s latest published installation instructions.

.2 Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to (and including) groove.

.3 Gasket shall be manufactured by the coupling manufacturer and verified as suitable for the intended service.

.4 A factory trained representative (direct employee) of the coupling manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation. The representative shall periodically visit the job site and review installation to ensure best practices in grooved joint installation are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

3.3 Welded Joints

.1 Where the location of butt-welded piping joints is left to the discretion of this Division, such joints shall be minimum three feet (914mm) from other welded piping joints.

.2 Joint areas shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove all slag, oil, grease, rust, scale and moisture prior to commencement of welding. Slag and spatter shall be removed completely from each welding pass before the next pass is deposited.

3.4 Butt Welding

.1 Unless otherwise specified, all 2-1/2" (65mm) size and larger piping shall be prepared for butt welding. Unless otherwise specified, butt welding and preparation shall be in accordance with figure 1(a) of ANSI Standard B16.25, for piping with wall thickness of 3/16" to 3/4" (5mm to 19mm) inclusive. V-bevel end profiles for all alloy steel piping shall be made by machining only. This Division shall ensure that the end preparation is truly circular and concentric with the pipe axis and within the tolerances allowed by applicable standards.

.2 V-bevel end profiles for carbon steel piping shall be made by machining or flame cutting. This Division shall ensure that the end preparation is truly circular and concentric with the pipe axis and within the tolerances allowed by applicable standards.



.3 Where the flame cutting is employed on end preparation, the cut shall by thoroughly dressed afterwards to eliminate all scale, profile irregularities and to give clean, shiny surfaces.

3.5 Welding of Pressure Piping

.1 General:

.1 Pressure welding shall conform to ANSI B.31.1, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and the MCCR Boilers and Pressure Vessels Act.

.2 Welding Process:

.1 Welding shall be done using either shielded metal-arc welding process and/or inert gas tungsten-arc welding process.

.3 Welding Procedures:

.1 Welding procedures are to be submitted, registered and approved to requirements of MCCR Boiler and Pressure Vessels Act prior to submission to the Consultant for approval. The following limitations shall be observed in these procedures,

.2 Welders shall be tested and approved in accordance with Section IX of the ASME Boilers and Pressure Vessel Code and the requirements of the MCCR.

.3 No welding shall be performed when the ambient is less than 32°F (0°C). If the ambient is less than 32°F (0°C), a heated enclosure shall be required. When the base metal temperature is less than 50°F (10°C), the base metal shall be preheated to at least 70°F (21°C) and maintained at this temperature during welding and thereafter as required.

.4 The use of backing rings and strips shall not be permitted unless received prior approval of the Consultant. If their use is approved, they shall be made from materials of weldable quality compatible with the base metal and shall be removed after welding unless the Consultant specifically approves their remaining in the joint.

.5 Where covered electrodes are used, they shall be of the low hydrogen type and shall be properly conditioned prior to their use. Storage and handling practices shall be in accordance with the electrode manufacturer's specifications. Details of storage and handling practices shall be submitted by this Division when submitting welding procedures. Unless otherwise incorporated in the welding procedure, peening shall not be permitted.

.4 Performance of Welders:

.1 No welding shall be undertaken prior to this Division supplying the Consultant valid certificates for this Division’s personnel and procedures.

.2 Welds suspected to be defective shall be radiographed at no expense to the Owner.

.3 Weld defects shall be removed by grinding until the base metal is reached. Repairs shall be done using the same welding procedure as required for the original welds. Repaired welds shall be proven by radiograph at no expense to the Owner.

.4 If any three welds performed by the same welder require repair, the welder shall be disqualified from further welding.

.5 Welds shall be stamped with the welder's identification number.

3.6 Flanged Joints

.1 Flanges and other attachments shall be square with the indicated axis and shall not deviate from this position measured across any diameter by more than 3/64" per foot (4mm per m.) of diameter. Maximum allowable dishing of a flange facing shall be 1/64" (0.4mm).



.2 Bolt holes shall be aligned within a tolerance of ±1/16" (2mm) of the required position.

.3 Flanges shall be installed with the bolt holes straddling the vertical and horizontal centre lines or as required for proper valve position. Use box wrenches to pull up flanges.

.4 Unless otherwise specified, lengths of studs shall be 1/4" (6mm) longer than specified in ANSI B16.5


.1 Horizontal piping is to be supported as close as practical to the connected equipment and intermediate hangers are to be spaced as follows:

Pipe Size

Single Rod Dia. Double Rod Dia.

Maximum Copper

Spacing Steel

Up to 3/4" 3/8" 3/8" 5 ft. 6 ft.

(Up to 19 mm 10 mm 10 mm 1.5 m 1.8 m)

1" - 1 1/4" 3/8" 3/8" 5 ft. 8 ft.

(25 mm to 32 mm 10 mm 10 mm 1.5 m 2.4 m)

1 1/2" - 2" 3/8" 3/8" 10 ft. 10 ft.

(38 mm & 50 mm 10 mm 10 mm 3 m 3 m)

2 1/2" & 3" 1/2" 1/2" 10 ft 12 ft.

(65 mm & 75 mm 13 mm 13 mm 3 m 3.7 m)

4" 5/8" 5/8" - 15 ft.

(100 mm 16 mm 16 mm - 4.6 m)

6" 3/4" 5/8" - 17 ft.

(150mm 19mm 16mm - 5.2m)

.2 No support or hanger securing device is to penetrate waterproofing roof membrane above steel deck.

.3 Provide roller supports, floor stands, wall brackets, etc. for all lines running near the floor or near the walls, which can be properly supported by the floors or walls.

.4 All pipe support arrangements are to be adjustable for proper support and grading.

.5 Suspend piping using malleable iron or wrought steel hangers suspended from hanger rods threaded each end not more than 1 1/2" (38 mm). Continuous threaded hanger rod is to be used in concealed locations only.

.6 Hanger rods are to be attached to concrete inserts, beam clamps, welded brackets or similar device. Co-ordinate location and method of pipe support in building with Structural Engineer.


.1 Use valves of line size unless noted otherwise or being used for balancing purposes.

.2 Provide isolating valves in each branch from the main line and where shown. On renovation and retrofit projects add isolations valves at all new tie-n locations where connecting new piping into existing mains, branch lines etc. Note: Valves are not necessarily shown on the drawings

.3 Provide isolating valves for all appliances, heating terminal units etc.



.1 Note: Valves are not necessarily shown on the drawings

.4 Unless indicated otherwise provide radiation regulating valves at each terminal unit and in locations where valve is to be used for regulating purposes. Ball valves are not acceptable for balancing purposes.

.5 Provide 1/2" (13 mm) ball valve with cap and chain at any low point of the system not drainable through the main supply piping.

.6 All valves are to be tagged and a chart showing location and equipment controlled to be turned over to the Owner upon completion of the job.

.7 Escutcheon plates are to be installed at all walls and floors where pipes are exposed to view.

.8 Install auto air vents at all high points in system.

.9 Install drain cup at each backflow preventer vent and drain opening and pipe to nearest floor drain.

3.9 Temperature Gauges

.1 Install temperature gauges in all locations noted.

.2 Check range of temperature expected at each location and supply thermometer with range to suit.

.3 All temperature gauges to be installed in separable wells.

3.10 Pressure Gauges

.1 Install pressure gauges in all locations noted and before and after each circulating pump.

.2 Check range of pressures expected at each location and supply pressure gauge with range to suit.

3.11 Centrifugal Pumps

.1 Provide centrifugal pumps where and as indicated and install the pumps in accordance with Manufacturer's installation instruction.

.2 Ensure pumps are adequately supported and suitable vibration devices installed.

.3 Division 16 to provide power wiring and all necessary electrical power connections.

.4 Make all necessary piping connections to pump.

.5 Make all necessary requirements to allow removal of pump for servicing.

.6 Grout bases of all base-mounted circulating pumps.


.1 Make tests that are required, by any authority having jurisdiction, in the presence of the Authority's Authorized Inspector. Tests are to be certified by him.

.2 Test all piping at the completion of roughing-in before connecting to new systems, and prior to concealment, insulation or covering of piping.

.3 Notify the Consultant in writing at least forty-eight (48) hours prior to start of tests. Failure to do so may require test to be re-done.

.4 Heating water piping to be tested by filling the system with water and applying a hydrostatic pressure of 125 psig (860 kPa) which is to be maintained for at least 24 hours. If a freezing hazard exists the Consultant may permit a compressed air test to be substituted.



.5 Perform tests before application of pipe covering. Test buried and concealed piping before backfilling or concealing in structure. Protect equipment and parts not capable of withstanding test pressure during tests.

.6 Any leaks found are to be properly repaired and test reapplied until results satisfactory to the Consultant are obtained.

3.13 Placing in Operation

.1 Upon completion of the work and before turning over the job, the Contractor is to make a complete test of the various systems.

3.14 Heating Water Piping Cleaning & Flushing

.1 All equipment and new piping to be thoroughly cleaned of iron cuttings and other foreign matter as they are installed. Particular attention to be given to:

.1 Pump packing glands or mechanical seals.

.2 Valve seats and glands.

.3 Flange or union faces or seats.

.4 Strainers, orifices, etc.

.2 Automatic flow control valves, and all similar devices in which foreign matter could become lodged, are not to be installed until cleaning and flushing is completed.

.3 Systems are to be filled at municipal water make-up connection, with all air vents open. After filling, vents are to be closed.

.4 The Contractor is to start main circulator with pressure reducing valve make-up set. Vents are to be checked in sequence to bleed off any trapped air in order to ensure circulation through all components of system.

.1 Note: Be sure pumps are properly aligned and bolted down before start-up to prevent damage to seals or couplings.

.5 Circulate loop water for at least twenty-four hours and then drain completely to flush out foreign matter.

.6 Check and clean all strainers. If indications are found of excessive dirt, repeat the above flushing, until results are acceptable to chemical supplier and Consultant.

.7 Automatic flow control valves may now be installed. All shut off valves are to be left wide open.

.8 Refill the system with ethylene glycol (where applicable) and corrosion prevention chemical in sufficient quantity as per manufacturers recommendations. Refer to Liquid Heat Transfer Section 23 80 00.

.9 Apply heat to the system slowly, with pumps operating to produce 122oF (50oC) system water temperature. Recheck all vent points during this heating and remove all air.

.10 The entire system to be thoroughly checked for leaks by pressure testing at 100 psig (690 kPa) for 24 hours with water. The contractor is not to add at any time, any leak-stop compound to the system.

.11 After the system has been completely cleaned and tested, as specified herein, it is to be tested by litmus paper or other dependable method and left on slightly alkaline side (ph. 7.5 to 8.5). If system is still on acid side (ph. 7.0 or lower) water conditioner is to be added as required.

.12 Consultant to be given 24 hours’ notice of this cleaning operation and may be present to observe the cleaning operation, and if the Consultant or his representative deems it necessary, the cleaning operation is to be repeated.



.13 Two weeks after putting the various systems in operation the Contractor shall return to the building and clean out all strainers and scale pockets.

3.15 Roof Flashings

.1 Turn over flashings to the roofer for installation, provide flashings for each roof penetration.

.2 Ensure that the flashing grommets are not cut or otherwise damaged during installation. Cut or damaged grommets must be replaced, caulking of the flashings to repair leaks will not be accepted.


Common Installation Requirements for HVAC Pipework Section 23 05 15 Page 1 of 8


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.

.2 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CAN/CSA B139-04, Installation Code for Oil Burning Equipment.

.3 Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES)

.1 Standard GS-11-2008, 2nd Edition], Environmental Standard for Paints and Coatings.


.1 National Fire Code of Canada 2015 (NFC).

.5 South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State, Regulation XI. Source Specific Standards

.1 SCAQMD Rule 1113-A2007, Architectural Coatings.

.2 SCAQMD Rule 1168-A2005, Adhesive and Sealant Applications.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets for piping and equipment and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.



.2 Delivery and Acceptance Requirements:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Material

.1 Paint: zinc-rich to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

.1 Primers, Coating, Paints: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for surface conditions.

.2 Primer: maximum VOC limit 250 g/L to SCAQMD Rule 1113

.3 Paints: maximum VOC limit 150 g/L [o Standard GS-11

.4 Sealants: maximum VOC limit to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

.2 Adhesives: maximum VOC limit to SCAQMD Rule 1168.

.3 Fire Stopping: in accordance with Section 07 84 00 - Fire Stopping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Application




3.2 Connections to Equipment

.1 In accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated.

.2 Use valves and either unions or flanges for isolation and ease of maintenance and assembly.

.3 Use double swing joints when equipment mounted on vibration isolation and when piping subject to movement.

3.3 Clearances

.1 Provide clearance around systems, equipment and components for observation of operation, inspection, servicing, maintenance and as recommended by manufacturer and CAN/CSA B139, National Fire Code of Canada.

.2 Provide space for disassembly, removal of equipment and components as recommended by manufacturer without interrupting operation of other system, equipment, components.

3.4 Drains

.1 Install piping with grade in direction of flow except as indicated.

.2 Install drain valve at low points in piping systems, at equipment and at section isolating valves.

.3 Pipe each drain valve discharge separately to above floor drain.

.1 Discharge to be visible.

.4 Drain valves: NPS 3/4 gate or globe valves unless indicated otherwise, with hose end male thread, cap and chain.

3.5 Air Vents

.1 Install manual air vents to piping systems at high points CAN/CSA B139.

.2 Install isolating valve at each automatic air valve.

.3 Install drain piping to approved location and terminate where discharge is visible.

3.6 Dielectric Couplings

.1 General: compatible with system, to suit pressure rating of system.

.2 Locations: where dissimilar metals are joined.

.3 NPS 2 and under: isolating unions or bronze valves.

.4 Over NPS 2: isolating flanges.

3.7 Pipework Installation

.1 Install pipework to CAN/CSA B139.

.2 Screwed fittings jointed with Teflon tape.

.3 Protect openings against entry of foreign material.

.4 Install to isolate equipment and allow removal without interrupting operation of other equipment or systems.

.5 Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.

.6 Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains if branch line is no larger than half size of main.



.1 Hole saw or drill and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line prior to welding saddle.

.7 Install exposed piping, equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

.8 Install concealed pipework to minimize furring space, maximize headroom, conserve space.

.9 Slope piping, except where indicated, in direction of flow for positive drainage and venting.

.10 Install, except where indicated, to permit separate thermal insulation of each pipe.

.11 Group piping wherever possible.

.12 Ream pipes, remove scale and other foreign material before assembly.

.13 Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes to ensure positive drainage and venting.

.14 Provide for thermal expansion as indicated.

.15 Valves:

.1 Install in accessible locations.

.2 Remove interior parts before soldering.

.3 Install with stems above horizontal position unless indicated.

.4 Valves accessible for maintenance without removing adjacent piping.

.5 Install globe valves in bypass around control valves.

.6 Use butterfly, gate, ball valves at branch take-offs for isolating purposes except where specified.

.7 Install butterfly valves between weld neck flanges to ensure full compression of liner.

.8 Install plug cocks, ball valves for glycol service.

3.8 Victaulic Products (or approved equal) for Hot Water Heating, Chilled Water and Domestic Hot and Cold Potable Water Systems

.1 Hot Water heating and chilled water systems sizes 2”-12”

.1 Style 107N Quick-Vic Coupling with “EHP” gasket for rigid connections

.2 Style 177N Quick-Vic Coupling with “EHP” gasket for flexible connections. May be used for flex connection elimination as per Victaulic recommended installation instructions and or used for thermal expansion and sound and vibration attenuation. Thermal expansion calculations must be approved by project engineering firm.

.3 Fittings shall be Victaulic cast painted standard grooved fittings

.4 Vic-Flange adapter Style 741

.5 Vic-300MS Butterfly valve with “E” seat and 10 position handle with standard nickel coated ductile iron disc

.6 Vic-Check Valve Series 716

.7 Triple Service (Duty) Assemblies, COMBO Butterfly/Check (Vic300MS/716)

.8 Suction Diffuser Series 731-D

.9 Vic-Strainer Wye Type Series 732

.10 Style 870 for steam and or condensate piping rated up to 366f and 150 psi

.11 Style 920 Mechanical-T outlet with “E” gasket

.12 Style 155 expansion joint in lieu of expansion loop



.13 Riser piping design to be designed by Victaulic indicating expansion compensation with coupling and or expansion joint suggestions with anchors and guide locations.

.14 Series 380,381,382,383 Vibration Isolation pump Drops for pump connections.

.2 Domestic Hot and Cold Water Systems Sizes 1/2”-8”

.1 Style 607 Quick-Vic Rigid Coupling with “EHP” gasket

.2 Style 641 Vic-Flange Adapter for Copper

.3 Fittings for Copper must be Victaulic grooved end fittings designed for and installed with Style 607 rigid couplings or Style 641 Vic-Flange adapter

.4 Dielectric Waterway Fittings must be Style 647 Victaulic adapters

.5 Series 608N butterfly valve for copper sizes 2 ½”-6”

.6 Style 622/422 Mechanical-T Bolted Branch outlet with “E” gasket may be used in lieu of T fittings

.7 Series 461 Butterfly Valve

.8 Vic-Press For Schedule 10S Stainless Steel Type 304 and or Type 316 for sizes ½”-2”

.3 Victaulic Tooling

.1 Tools shall be manufactured and supplied by Victaulic. Use roll sets or cut groovers compatible with the pipe material and wall thickness per Victaulic installation instructions (I-100).

.4 Installation

.1 Pipe ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove for proper gasket sealing.

.2 The gasket style and elastomeric material (grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service as specified.

.3 Install the Victaulic AGS piping system in accordance with the latest Victaulic installation instructions.

.4 AGS products shall not be installed with standard grooved end pipe or components. (Installing AGS products in combination with standard grooved end products could result in joint separation and/or leakage.)

.5 Use Victaulic grooving tools with AGS roll sets to groove the pipe. Follow Victaulic guidelines for tool selection and operation.

.6 Couplings installation shall be complete when visual metal-to-metal contact is reached.

.7 See the latest copy of Victaulic’s Field Assembly and Installation Instruction Pocket Handbook (I-100).

.5 Training:

.1 A Victaulic factory trained representative (direct employee) shall provide on-site training for contractor’s field personnel in the use of grooving tools, application of groove, and product installation.

.6 Application:

.1 A Victaulic representative shall periodically visit the job site and review installation. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products.

.2 Victaulic grooved mechanical pipe couplings, fittings, valves and other grooved components may be used as an option to welding, threading or flanged methods.



.3 All grooved components shall conform to local code approval and/or as listed by ANSI-B-31.1, B-31.3, B-31.9, ASME, UL/ULC, FM, IAPMO or BOCA.

.4 Grooved end product manufacturer to be ISO-9001 certified

3.9 Victaulic QuickVic SD (or approved equal) Installation-Ready System for Carbon Steel Pipe

.1 Installation-Ready™ fittings for Schedule 10 through Schedule 80 plain end carbon steel piping in HVAC and mechanical applications sizes NPS ½” thru 2” (DN15 thru DN50). System rated for a working pressure of 300 psi (2065 kPa). Fittings shall consist of a ductile iron housing conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12, with Installation-Ready™ ends [orange enamel coated] [or] [zinc coated]. Fittings complete with gasket liner, zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts as per the mechanical properties of ASTM A449, and 300 series stainless steel retainer.

.1 QuickVic™ SD Installation-Ready™ Fittings for Carbon Steel Pipe shall be Victaulic Style/Number P07, P08, P10, P11, P20, P25, P27, P50, P60, designed for installation onto plain end pipe without prior disassembly of the fitting.

.2 Fittings require metal-to-metal contact across the entire bolt pad section for correct assembly.

.3 Inspection window provides visual post-installation verification of retainer engagement.

.4 Patented “Leak-if-Not-Tightened” feature provides immediate feedback as the system is being filled.

.5 Continuous Gasket Lining: Pressure-responsive, synthetic rubber for use with the non-wetted interior housing surfaces.

.2 Valves: DZR brass body, [chrome-plated brass] [stainless-steel] ball and stem, full port, blow-out-proof stem with doCuble EPDM O-ring, PTFE seats, zinc-plated carbon steel handle with orange vinyl grip, and plain ends for use with the Victaulic QuickVic™ SD Installation-Ready system in sizes ½” through 2” (DN15 through DN50). Rated for services to 300 psi (2065 kPa). Victaulic Series P89.

.3 Dielectric Fittings: Fittings shall be a copper-silicon casting conforming to UNS C87850. Fittings shall have plain ends. Victaulic Style P47 and P97.

.4 Tools: Cut and mark tool, designed to cut and mark the insertion depth of the pipe simultaneously to ensure proper coupling and fittings installation. Victaulic PC3110.

.5 Complete balancing specifications

3.10 Manual Balancing Valves

.1 General: Valves capable of positive shutoff, circuit drain connection, precision flow balancing with lockable memory and precise flow measurement.

.2 Provide as indicated on drawings and schematics

.3 2” (DN50) and Smaller Sizes:

.1 300 psi (2065 kPa), Y-pattern, globe type with soldered or threaded ends, non-ferrous Ametal® brass copper alloy body, EPDM o-ring seals. 4-turn digital readout handwheel for balancing, hidden memory feature with locking tamper-proof setting, and connections for portable differential meter. All valves shall be of one manufacturer.

.2 Balancing valves shall be sized to flow and selected for 2 ft. pressure drop across the valve in the fully open position in accordance with manufactures recommendation.



Mechanical Contractor shall consult with balancing valve manufacturer to ensure correct valve selection.

.3 Provide preformed rigid polyurethane insulation jackets for insulation against heat loss or condensation.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic / IMI TA Series 786 STAS or 787 STAD.

.4 2-1/2”(DN65) and Larger Sizes:

.1 300 psi (2065 kPa), Y-pattern, globe type with flanged or grooved ends, ASTM A536 ductile iron body, all other metal parts of Ametal® brass copper alloy, EPDM O-ring seals. 8, 12 or 16-turn digital readout handwheel for balancing, hidden memory feature with locking tamper-proof setting, and connections for portable differential meter. Victaulic / IMI TA Series 788 STAF or 789 STAG.

.2 Balancing valves shall be sized to flow and selected for 2 ft. pressure drop across the valve in the fully open position in accordance with manufactures recommendation. Mechanical contractor shall consult with balancing valve manufacturer to ensure correct valve selection.

.3 Provide preformed rigid polyurethane insulation jackets for insulation against heat loss or condensation for valve up to and including 6” (DN150). 8” (DN200) and larger insulation must allow for valve isolation, valve access and flow measurement.

.4 Standard of Acceptance: Victaulic / IMI TA Series 788 STAF or 789 STAG.

3.11 Terminal Unit Coil Connection Kits

.1 At Contractor’s option and as detailed in schematics, terminal unit coil kits may be used in lieu of traditional coil installation. Victaulic Series 799/ 79V Koil-Kit Coil Pack shall include the following components: 78Y strainer/ ball valve combination (or 78T where strainer is not required), two optional coil hoses, Series 78U union port and a balancing valve (Victaulic Series 78K/786/787 or 76 (where automatic balancing valve required)) sized to flow. Koil Kit Component Specifications:

.2 Series 78Y Strainer/ Ball Valve Combination ½” through 2”: 400psi CWP. DZR brass body consisting of a full port ball valve, strainer, P/T measuring port, union connection and blowdown valve with drain hose connection. Ball valve shall be complete with double o-ring seal, plated ball, blow-out proof stem, and steel handle with vinyl grip. Stainer shall be Y-pattern with 20 mesh stainless steel screen and blowdown port. Suitable for operating temperatures up to 230°F. Series 78Y provided by Victaulic.

.3 Series 78T Ball Valve Combination ½” through 2”: 400psi CWP. DZR brass body consisting of a full port ball valve, P/T measuring port, union connection and drain valve with hose connection. Ball valve shall be complete with double o-ring seal, plated ball, blow-out proof stem, and steel handle with vinyl grip. Suitable for operating temperatures up to 230°F. Series 78T provided by Victaulic.

.4 Series 78U Union Port Fitting ½” through 2”: 400 psi maximum CWP. DZR brass body union fitting with manual air vent port and pressure/ temperature port with EPDM seals. Suitable for operating temperatures up to 230°F. Series 78U provided by Victaulic.

.5 Coil Hoses ½” through 2”: 375 psi maximum CWP (varies by size), stainless steel braided hose and EPDM core with stainless ferrules. Available as male by male swivel or male by female swivel and in three lengths: 12”, 24” or 36”. Suitable for temeratures up to 230°F. The coil hoses shall be provided by Victaulic.

3.12 Pressure Independent Balancing and Control Valves (PIBCV)

.1 Designed for simple and accurate measurements for balancing, differential pressure control, trouble shooting and power measurement in heating and cooling systems. True flow measurement verification must be possible with a balancing instrument. Flow deviation max



±10% at fully open. Valve shall allow for adjustable flow settings, with valve and actuators supplied together ensuring optimum control performance.

.2 ½” – 3” : 230 psi/1600kPa, NPT threaded ends, non-ferrous Ametal® DZR brass copper alloy body, PPS (polyphenylsulfide) plug, EPDM o-ring seat and spindle seal, stainless steel return spring, Nedox® coated Ametal® spindle, HNBR membrane, and 10-position setting dial. Valve shall stabilize differential pressure to a max. of 58psi. The valve shall be designed for modulating of terminal units in glycol, hot water, and cooling systems, suitable for control, pre-setting (of flow), and differential pressure control, measuring and shut-off. Suitable for working temperatures to +194°F (+90°C). Modulating or on/off actuators shall be available factory installed. Standard of acceptance IMI TA Modulator or Victaulic Series 7MP

3.13 Victaulic Series TC Terminal Balancing Valve (TA TBV-C):

.1 ½” through 1”, 230 psi [16-bar] [1600 kPa], NPT female threaded ends, non-ferrous Ametal® DZR brass copper alloy body, PPS (polyphenylsulfide) plug, EPDM o-ring seat and spindle seal, stainless steel return spring, Nedox® coated Ametal® spindle, and 10-position setting dial. The valve shall be designed to ensure accurate hydronic control in terminal units for glycol, hot water, and cooling systems, suitable for control, balancing, pre-setting, measuring, and shut-off. Suitable for working temperatures to +250°F (+120°C). Normally open and normally closed actuators shall be available factory installed. Standard of acceptance IMI TA TBV-C/Victaulic Series TC

3.14 Sleeves

.1 General: install where pipes pass through masonry, concrete structures, fire rated assemblies, and as indicated.

.2 Material: schedule 40 black steel pipe.

.3 Construction: use annular fins continuously welded at mid-point at foundation walls and where sleeves extend above finished floors.

.4 Sizes: [6] mm minimum clearance between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation.

.5 Installation:

.1 Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade: terminate flush with finished surface.

.2 Other floors: terminate 25 mm above finished floor.

.3 Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces with heavy application of zinc-rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181.

.6 Sealing:

.1 Foundation walls and below grade floors: fire retardant, waterproof non-hardening mastic.

.2 Elsewhere:

.1 Provide space for fire stopping.

.2 Maintain the fire-resistance rating integrity of the fire separation.

.3 Sleeves installed for future use: fill with lime plaster or other easily removable filler.

.4 Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.

3.15 Escutcheons

.1 Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in finished areas.



.2 Construction: one-piece type with set screws.

.1 Chrome or nickel-plated brass or type 302 stainless steel.

.3 Sizes: outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve.

.1 Inside diameter to fit around pipe or outside of insulation if so provided.

3.16 Preparation for Fire Stopping

.1 Coordinate the installation of fire stopping around pipes, insulation and adjacent fire separation in accordance with Section [07 84 00 - Fire Stopping].

.2 Pipes subject to movement: conform to fire stop system design listing to ensure pipe movement without damaging fire stopping material or installation.

.3 Insulated pipes: ensure integrity of insulation and vapour barriers.

3.17 Flushing Out of Piping Systems

.1 Flush system in accordance with Section 23 08 16 - Cleaning and Start-Up of HVAC Piping Systems.

.2 Before start-up, clean interior of piping systems in accordance with requirements of Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning.

.3 Preparatory to acceptance, clean and refurbish equipment and leave in operating condition, including replacement of filters in piping systems.

3.18 Pressure Testing o Equipment and Pipework

.1 Advise Consultant 48 hours minimum prior to performance of pressure tests.

.2 Pipework: test as specified in relevant sections of heating, ventilating and air conditioning work.

.3 Maintain specified test pressure without loss for 4 hours minimum unless specified for longer period of time in relevant mechanical sections.

.4 Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressure or media.

.5 Conduct tests in presence of Consultant.

.6 Pay costs for repairs or replacement, retesting, and making good. Consultant to determine whether repair or replacement is appropriate.

.7 Insulate or conceal work only after approval and certification of tests by Consultant.

3.19 Existing Systems

.1 Connect into existing piping systems at times approved by Consultant.

.2 Request written approval by Consultant 10 days minimum, prior to commencement of work.

.3 Be responsible for damage to existing plant by this work.

3.20 Cleaning

.1 Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning.

.2 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.


Meters and Gauges for HVAC Piping Section 23 05 19 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

.1 Section Includes:

.1 Materials and components for metering steam and chilled/hot water including installation.

.2 Sustainable requirements for construction and verification.

.1 [_____].

.3 Related Requirements

.1 Section [_____].


.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

.1 ASME Fluid Meter's Handbook: Their Theory and Application, Sixth Edition [1971].

.2 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

.1 Safety Data Sheets (SDS).


.1 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures]. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.

.1 Submit [two] copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Safety Data Sheets (SDS) in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].

.2 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].

.1 Shop drawings: Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in [Territory] [Province], Canada.

.3 Submittals to include:

.1 Piping configuration and sizing - straight pipe upstream and downstream, distances to first weld, protrusion, thermowell, pressure tap.

.2 Service conditions.

.3 Full details of primary element - standard of design and construction, materials, type serial number, flow rate, differential pressure, irrecoverable head loss (IHL), calculation sheets.

.4 Accuracy statements for each component at specified flow rates and other conditions.

.5 Flow and temperature ranges.

.6 Signal processor calibration data.

.7 Minimum turndown ratio.

.4 Samples:

.1 Submit sample in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].

.2 Samples to include:



.1 Full size samples of recorder charts, integrator readings.

.2 [_____].

.5 Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].



.1 [Consultant] [Departmental Representative] [DCC Representative] will make available [1] copy of systems supplier's installation instructions.

.6 Closeout Submittals:

.1 Submit maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in Section [01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals].

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 Health and Safety:

.1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section [01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements].

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

.1 Packing, shipping, handling and unloading:

.1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section [01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements].

.2 Waste Management and Disposal:

.1 Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for [reuse] [recycling] in accordance with Section [01 74 19 - Waste Management and Disposal].

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Materials and products in accordance with Section [01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction].

.1 [_____].

2.2 ACCURACY

.1 Calculate overall accuracy of each installation using following expression: Overall accuracy = (E (accuracy of individual components of system)2)1/2.

.2 Components to include:

.1 Primary flow measuring elements.

.2 Transmitters: flow, differential pressure, pressure, temperature, temperature difference.

.3 RTD's.

.4 Signal processors, recorders.

.5 Calibration of signal processors: assume 0.20% per processor.

.6 Installation tolerances: assume 1% for concentricity of pipe, difference in height of transmitter piping.



.3 Show in proposal overall accuracy at 100%, 70%, 10%, minimum specified design flow rate.

.4 Indicate minimum measurable flow rate.

2.3 STEAM METERING

.1 Type of metering:

.1 [Volumetric] [Wide range] [Mass] Flow-[temperature] [pressure] compensated.

.2 Design data:

.1 100% Design flow rate: [kg/h] [_____] at [_____] kPa, [_____] degrees C.

.2 Normal design flow rate: [70] % of 100% design flow rate.

.3 Minimum flow rate: [_____] % of maximum.

.4 Design differential pressure at normal design flow rate: [25] kPa.

.3 [State in proposal:]

.1 Point of change-over.

.2 [How change-over will be achieved].

.4 Maximum accuracy of complete metre installation at 70% design flow rate: plus or minus [_____] %.

.1 Primary flow measuring element[s] :

.1 [Type [_____][] stainless steel square edged thin plate orifice plate mounted between 2000 kPa raised face slip-on orifice flanges having differential NPS3/4 pressure taps.

.2 [Type [_____][] stainless steel venturi.

.3 [Type [_____][] stainless steel nozzle.

.4 [Insertion type] Vortex shedder.

.5 [Insertion type] Turbine.

.5 Standard of design for [orifice plate] [venturi] [nozzle] primary flow measuring elements: [ASME Fluid Meter Handbook].

.6 Provide restricting orifice to limit flow to maximum allowable be manufacturer through turbine meter.

.7 State in proposal maximum irrecoverable head loss (IHL).

.8 Available lengths of straight pipe to first fitting, and intrusion: [as indicated].

.9 State in proposal minimum lengths of straight pipe required upstream and downstream of primary element to meet specified accuracy requirements.

.10 Diameter of main for installation of primary element: [NPS [_____][] ; low flow range: NPS

.11 [If metre to be smaller than main size, state in proposal size of pipe required].

.12 Acceptable types of transmitters, [signal conditioners], [computing devices] :

.1 Transmitters: [_____].

.2 Signal conditioners: [_____].

.3 Computing devices: [_____].

.13 Acceptable types of readout instruments:

.1 Integrators: 6-digits, [8] mm high lettering, non-reset: [_____].



.2 Recorders: [[30 day roll] [19] [100] [3] [Z-fold] -pen strip] [[250] mm diameter circular] chart.

.1 Pen #1: [steam flow rate].

.2 Pen #2: [steam pressure].

.3 Pen #3: [steam temperature].

.3 Read-out instrument display:

.1 Steam flow rate: 0 -[_____] kg/h.

.2 Total steam production: 0 -[999999] kg.

.3 Steam pressure: 0 -[_____] kPa.

.4 Steam temperature: 0 -[_____] degrees C.

.4 Ambient conditions at transmitters: temperature: [_____] degrees C; RH: [_____] %.

.5 Signal transmission between primary measuring element and signal conditioners:

.1 Power: 24VDC.

.2 Signal: [4-20 mA] [0-10 VDC].

.3 Cable: colour coded, twisted and shielded pair with grounding wire.

.6 Locations:




.4 Readout instruments: [_____].

.7 Installation mountings:





.8 Connection to Building Automation System (BAS):

.1 [_____].

2.4 CHILLED/HOT WATER METERING

.1 Type of metering:

.1 [Wide range] Thermal power (i.e. demand), thermal energy consumption, [return] [supply] temperature, [compensated for specific gravity].

.2 Design data:

.1 Flow rates:

.1 100% Design: [_____] [kg/h].

.2 Normal design flow rate: [70] % of 100% design flow rate.

.3 Minimum flow rate: [_____] % of maximum.

.2 Pressure: [_____] kPa.

.1 Supply temperature: [_____] degrees C.



.2 Return temperature: [_____] degrees C.

.3 State in proposal:

.1 Point of change-over.

.2 How change-over will be achieved.

.3 Design differential pressure at normal design flow rate: [25] kPa.

.4 Maximum accuracy of complete metre installation at normal design flow and design temperatures to be plus or minus [_____] %.

.5 Primary flow measuring elements:

.1 [Type [_____][] stainless steel square edged thin plate orifice plate mounted between 2000 kPa raised face slop-on orifice flanges having differential NPS 3/4 pressure taps.

.2 [Type [_____][] stainless steel venturi.

.3 [Type [_____][] stainless steel nozzle.

.4 Averaging velocity pressure type pitot tube (Annubar).

.5 Magnetic.

.6 [Full bore] [Vortex shedding] [turbine] [Insertion type].

.7 Flow transmitters may form an integral part of primary flow measuring element.

.8 Standard of design for [orifice plate,] [nozzle,] [venturi,] primary flow measuring elements: ASME Fluid Meter Handbook.

.9 State in proposal maximum irrecoverable head loss (IHL).

.10 Available lengths of straight pipe to first fitting, and intrusion: [as indicated].

.11 State in proposal minimum lengths of straight pipe required upstream and downstream of primary element to meet specified accuracy requirements.

.12 Diameter of main for installation of primary element: [NPS [_____][] ; low flow range: NPS

.13 [If metre to be smaller than main size, state in proposal size of pipe required].

.14 Temperature sensors:

.1 100 ohm RTD.

.2 Thermowells to NPS 3/4 stainless steel thermowell filled with conductive paste with following insertion lengths:

.1 Up to NPS 6: 75 mm.

.2 NPS 8 and over: 150 mm.

.15 Sensors for temperature difference measurements to be matched pairs.

.16 Acceptable types of transmitters, [computing devices] [signal conditioners] :




.17 Acceptable types of readout instruments:

.1 Integrators: 6-digit, [8] mm high lettering, non-reset: [_____].



.2 Recorders: [[100] [Z-fold] [19] [3] [30 day roll] -pen strip] [[250] mm diameter circular] chart.

.1 Pen #1: [thermal power].

.2 Pen #2: [water flow rate].

.3 Pen #3: [temperature difference].

.18 Read-out instrument display:

.1 Thermal power: 0 -[_____] [kW] [kJ/s].

.2 Thermal energy consumption: 0 -[MJ] [999999].

.3 Water flow rate: 0 -[_____] L/s.

.4 Temperature [difference]: 0 -[_____] degrees C.

.19 Ambient conditions at transmitters: temperature: [_____] degrees C; RH: [_____] %.

.20 Signal transmission between primary measuring element and signal conditioners:

.1 Power: 24 VDC.

.2 Signal: [0-10 VDC] [4-20 mA].

.3 Cable: colour coded, twisted and shielded pair with grounding wire.

.21 Locations:





.22 Connection to Building Automation System (BAS):

.1 [_____].

.23 Installation mountings:





2.5 CONDENSATE METERS

.1 [_____].

2.6 GAS METERS

.1 [_____].

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.

3.2 PREPARATION



.1 Before final calculations for orifice diameter, and before purchase of [venturi,] [nozzle,] [orifice plate,] measure:

.1 Internal diameter of main at the primary element to +/-0.01 mm accuracy.

.2 For concentricity of pipe.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRIMARY ELEMENT

.1 Follow manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE TAPS AND PIPING

.1 Differential pressure taps horizontal and level with each other to within +/- 1.5 mm.

.2 Tubing: straight, supported throughout its length, sloped 5%-10% upward to main for drainage and venting, without air pockets, with blowdown valves at bottom.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF TRANSMITTERS NOT FORMING INTEGRAL PART OF PRIMARY ELEMENT

.1 Mount on [pipe stand] installed and located to ensure no damage by passing traffic.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF SIGNAL TRANSMISSION CABLE

.1 Ground shielding at one point only.

.2 Protect against RF interference.

.3 Cross electrical cables, conduits at 90 degrees leaving at least 150 mm space between.

3.7 START-UP

.1 Follow manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 [_____].

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Verification requirements in accordance with Section [01 33 29 - Sustainable Design Reporting], include:

.1 Materials and resources.

.2 Storage and collection of recyclables.

.3 Construction waste management.

.4 Resource reuse.

.5 Recycled content.

.6 Local/regional materials.

.7 Certified wood.

.8 Low-emitting materials.

3.9 CLEANING

.1 Proceed in accordance with Section [01 74 00 - Cleaning].

.2 Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.


Base Hangers and Supports Section 23 05 29 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 References

.1 American National Standards Institute/ American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ANSI/ASME)

.1 ANSI/ASME B31.1-1989, Power Piping, (SI Edition).

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

.1 ASTM A 125-81(1988), Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated.

.2 ASTM A 307-94, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength.

.3 ASTM A 563-94, Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

.3 Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS)

.1 MSS SP-58-1988, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture.

.2 MSS SP-69-1983, Pipe Hangers and Supports - Erection and Application.

1.2 Design Requirements

.1 Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular production components, parts and assemblies.

.2 Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS SP-58.

.3 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of heat to building structure.

.4 Design hangers and supports to support systems under all conditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipework or connected equipment.

.5 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning. Amount of adjustment to be in accordance with MSS SP-58.

1.3 Shop Drawings and Product Data

.1 Submit shop drawings and product data for following items:

.1 All bases, hangers and supports.

.2 Connections to equipment and structure.

.3 Structural assemblies.

1.4 Maintenance Data

.1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual (Operation and Maintenance Manual).

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS- SP-58.

.2 Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection purposes.

2.2 Pipe Hangers



.1 Finishes:

.1 Pipe hangers and supports: galvanized painted with zinc-rich paint after manufacture.

.2 Use electro-plating galvanizing process or hot dipped galvanizing process.

.3 Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are copper plated.

.2 Upper attachment structural: Suspension from lower flange of I-Beam.

.1 Cold piping HPS 2 maximum: Ductile iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip.

.1 Rod: 9 mm UL listed.

.2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, all hot piping: Malleable iron beam clamp, eye rod, jaws and extension with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers, UL listed and FM approved to MSS-SP-58 and MSS-SP-69.

.3 Upper attachment structural: Suspension from upper flange of I-Beam.

.1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: Ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip, UL listed and FM approved to MSS-SP-69.

.2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, all hot piping: Malleable iron top-of-beam jaw- clamp with hooked rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut UL listed and FM approved.

.4 Upper attachment to concrete.

.1 Ceiling: Carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevis pin and cotters with weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye 6 mm minimum greater than rod diameter.

.2 Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate UL listed and FM approved to MSS-SP-69.

.5 Shop and field-fabricated assemblies.

.1 Trapeze hanger assemblies

.2 Steel brackets

.6 Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP-58.

.1 Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only.

.2 Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipework is anticipated.

.3 Do not use 22 mm or 28 mm rod.

.7 Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP-58.

.1 Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel galvanized.

.2 Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel.

.3 Use insulation shields for hot pipework.

.4 Oversize pipe hangers and supports to accommodate thermal insulation and to avoid piercing vapour retarder.

.8 Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP-69 UL listed and FM approved, clevis bolt with nipple spacer and vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis.

.1 Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for riveting to insulation shields.

.9 Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP-69.

.10 U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP-69 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A 563.



.1 Finishes for steel pipework: black.

.2 Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipework: galvanized, with formed portion plastic coated.

.11 Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP-69.

2.3 Riser Clamps

.1 Steel or cast-iron pipe: black carbon steel to MSS-SP-58, type 42, UL listed and FM approved.

.2 Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS-SP-58, type 42.

.3 Bolts: to ASTM A 307.

.4 Nuts: to ASTM A 563.

2.4 Insulation Protection Shields

.1 Insulated cold piping:

.1 64 kg/m3 density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP-69, galvanized sheet carbon steel. Length designed for maximum 3 m span.

.2 Insulated hot piping:

.1 Curved plate 300 mm long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe sizes NPS 12 and over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP-69.

2.5 Constant Support Spring Hangers

.1 Springs: alloy steel to ASTM A 125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/- 5% spring rate tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with CMTR.

.2 Load adjustability: 10% minimum adjustability each side of calibrated load. Adjustment without special tools. Adjustments not to affect travel capabilities.

.3 Provide upper and lower factory set travel stops.

.4 Provide load adjustment scale for field adjustments.

.5 Total travel to be actual travel + 20%. Difference between total travel and actual travel 25 mm minimum.

.6 Individually calibrated scales on each side of support calibrated prior to shipment, complete with calibration record.

2.6 Equipment Supports

.1 Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipment manufacturer from structural grade steel. Submit calculations with shop drawings.

2.7 Equipment Anchor Bolts and Templates

.1 Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts.

2.8 Other Equipment Supports

.1 From structural grade steel

.2 Submit structural calculations with shop drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install in accordance with:



.1 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

.2 Vibration Control Devices:

.1 Install on piping systems at pumps, boilers, chillers, cooling towers, elsewhere as indicated.

.3 Clamps on riser piping:

.1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser.

.2 Bolt-tightening torques to be to industry standards.

.3 Steel pipes: Install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe.

.4 Cast iron pipes: Install below joint.

.4 Clevis plates:

.1 Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts at each corner.

.5 Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings to not exist or where concrete inserts are not in correct locations.

.6 Use approved constant support type hangers where:

.1 Vertical movement of pipework is 13 mm or more,

.2 Transfer of load to adjacent hangers or connected equipment is not permitted.

.7 Use variable support spring hangers where:

.1 Transfer of load to adjacent piping or to connected equipment is not critical.

.2 Variation in supporting effect does not exceed 25% of total load.

3.2 Hanger Spacing

.1 Plumbing piping: most stringent requirements of Canadian Plumbing Code, Provincial Code, or authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Fire protection: to applicable fire code.

.3 Gas and fuel oil piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.8 m.

.4 Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.5 m.

.5 Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below, but not less than one hanger at joints.

.6 Within 300 mm of each elbow.

Maximum Pipe Size: NPS Maximum Spacing Steel Maximum Spacing Copper

up to 1-1/4 2.4 m 1.8 m

1-1/2 3.0 m 2.4 m

2 3.0 m 2.4 m

2-1/2 3.7 m 3.0 m

3 3.7 m 3.0 m

3-1/2 3.7 m 3.3 m

4 3.7 m 3.6 m

5 4.3 m



6 4.3 m

8 4.3 m

10 4.9 m

12 4.9 m

.7 Pipework greater than NPS 12: to MSS SP-69.


Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems Section 23 05 94 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary


.1 Materials and methods for pressure testing ducts over 5m in length, forming part of a supply, return or exhaust ductwork system directly or indirectly connected to air handling equipment.

.2 Related Sections:

.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.3 Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Procedures.

1.2 References

.1 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS)

.1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).

.2 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA)

.1 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Include pressure test information and results as follows:

.1 Submit proposed report form and test report format to Architecttura Inc. for approval at least one month before proposed date of first series of tests. Do not start tests until approval received in writing from Facility.

.2 Prepare report of results and submit to Architecttura Inc. within 24 hours of completion of tests. Include:

.1 Schematic of entire system.

.2 Schematic of section under test showing test site.

.3 Required and achieved static pressures.

.4 Orifice differential pressure at test sites.

.5 Permissible and actual leakage flow rate (gpm) for test sites.

.6 Witnessed certification of results.

.3 Include test reports in final TAB report.



.6 Manufacturer's field reports specified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Test Instruments

.1 Test apparatus to include:



.1 Fan capable of producing required static pressure.

.2 Duct section with calibrated orifice plate mounted and accurately located pressure taps.

.3 Flow measuring instrument compatible with the orifice plate.

.4 Calibration curves for orifice plates used.

.5 Flexible duct for connecting to ductwork under test.

.6 Smoke bombs for visual inspections.

.2 Test apparatus: accurate to within +/- 3 % of flow rate and pressure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 Test Procedures

.1 Maximum lengths of ducts to be tested consistent with capacity of test equipment.

.2 Section of duct to be tested to include:

.1 Fittings, branch ducts, tap-ins.

.3 Repeat tests until specified pressures are attained. Bear costs for repairs and repetition to tests.

.4 Base partial system leakage calculations on SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

.5 Seal leaks that can be heard or felt, regardless of their contribution to total leakage.

3.3 Site Tolerances

.1 System leakage tolerances specified are stated as percentage of total flow rate handled by system. Pro-rate specified system leakage tolerances. Leakage for sections of duct systems: not to exceed total allowable leakage.

.2 Leakage tests on following systems not to exceed specified leakage rates.

.1 Small duct systems up to 250 Pa: leakage 2%.

.2 Large low-pressure duct systems up to 500 Pa: leakage 2%.

.3 Evaluation of test results to use surface area of duct and pressure in duct as basic parameters.

3.4 Testing

.1 Test ducts before installation of insulation or other forms of concealment.

.2 Test after seals have cured.

.3 Test when ambient temperature will not affect effectiveness of seals, and gaskets.

.4 Flexible connections to VAV boxes, if applicable.


.1 Manufacturer's Field Services.

.1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its products and



submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of Work with Contract.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Services: provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed:

.1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but before installation begins.

.2 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out.

3.6 Cleaning



Duct Insulation Section 23 07 13 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures

.2 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment

1.2 References

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning (ASHRAE)

.1 ANSI/ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1-Latest Edition, SI; Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low- Rise Residential Buildings.

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM)

.1 ASTM B209M-Latest Edition, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric).

.2 ASTM C335-Latest Edition, Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.

.3 ASTM C411-Latest Edition, Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High- Temperature Thermal Insulation.

.4 ASTM C449/C449M-Latest Edition, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic- Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement.

.5 ASTM C547-Latest Edition, Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation.

.6 ASTM C553-Latest Edition, Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.

.7 ASTM C612-Latest Edition, Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.

.8 ASTM C795-Latest Edition, Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use with Austenitic Stainless Steel.

.9 ASTM C921-Latest Edition, Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel.

.3 Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB)

.1 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-Latest Edition, Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation.

.4 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards (R1999).

.5 Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC)

.1 CAN/ULC-S102-Latest Edition, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.

.2 CAN/ULC-S701-Latest Edition, Thermal Insulation Polyotrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.



1.3 Definitions

.1 For purposes of this section:

.1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces.

.2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.

.3 Insulation systems - insulation material, fasteners, jackets, and other accessories.

.2 TIAC Codes:

.1 CRD: Code Round Ductwork,

.2 CRF: Code Rectangular Finish.

1.4 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for duct jointing recommendations.



.2 Protect from weather and construction traffic.

.3 Protect against damage from any source.

.4 Store at temperatures and conditions recommended by manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Fire and Smoke Rating

.1 In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102:

.2 Maximum flame spread rating: 25.

.3 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.

2.2 Insulation

.1 Mineral fibre: as specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool.

.2 Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24oC mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.

.3 TIAC Code C-1: Rigid mineral fibre board to ASTM C612, without factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma, as scheduled in PART 3 of this Section.



.4 TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket to ASTM C553 faced [with] [without] factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section).

.1 Mineral fibre: to ASTM C553.

.2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma.

.3 Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C553.

2.3 Jackets

.1 Canvas:

.1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire-retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921.

.2 Lagging adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

.3 Aluminum:

.1 To ASTM B209 with moisture barrier as scheduled in PART 3 of this section.

.2 Thickness: 0.50 mm sheet.

.3 Finish: Smooth.

.4 Jacket banding and mechanical seals: 12mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.

.4 Stainless steel:

.1 Type: 304

.2 Thickness: 0.25 mm sheet.

.3 Finish: Smooth.

.4 Jacket banding and mechanical seals: 12 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.

2.4 Accessories

.1 Vapour retarder lap adhesive:

.1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.

.2 Indoor Vapour Retarder Finish:

.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.

.3 Insulating Cement: hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449.

.4 ULC Listed Canvas Jacket:

.1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire-retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921.

.5 Outdoor Vapour Retarder Mastic:

.1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.

.2 Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m2.

.6 Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, plain 75 mm wide minimum.

.7 Contact adhesive: quick-setting

.8 Canvas adhesive: washable.

.9 Tie wire: 1.5mm stainless steel.

.10 Banding: 19mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.

.11 Facing: 25 mm stainless steel hexagonal wire mesh stitched on one face of insulation.



.12 Fasteners: 4 mm diameter pins with 35 mm diameter clips, length to suit thickness of insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Pre-Installation Requirements

.1 Pressure testing of ductwork systems complete, witnessed and certified.

.2 Surfaces clean, dry, free from foreign material.

3.2 Installation

.1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.

.2 Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and as indicated.

.3 Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal thickness exceeds 75 mm.

.4 Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes.

.1 Hangers, supports to be outside vapour retarder jacket.

.5 Supports, Hangers in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

.1 Apply high compressive strength insulation where insulation may be compressed by weight of ductwork.

.6 Fasteners: At 300 mm oc in horizontal and vertical directions, minimum two rows each side.

3.3 Ductwork Insulation Schedule

.1 Insulation types and thicknesses: Conform to following table:

TIAC Code Vapour Retarder Thickness (mm)

Rectangular cold and C-1 yes 50

dual temperature

supply air ducts

Round cold and dual C-2 yes 50

temperature supply air

ducts

Rectangular warm air C-1 no 25

ducts

Round warm air ducts C-1 no 25

TIAC Code Vapour Retarder Thickness (mm)

Supply, return and none

exhaust ducts exposed



in space being served

Outside air ducts to C-1 yes 25

mixing plenum

Mixing plenums C-1 yes 25

Exhaust duct between C-1 no 25

dampers and louvres

Rectangular ducts C-1 special 50

outside

Round ducts outside C-1 special 50

Acoustically lined none

ducts

.2 HERE Exposed round ducts 600 mm and larger, smaller sizes where subject to abuse:

.1 Use TIAC code C-1 insulation, scored to suit diameter of duct.

.1 Finishes: Conform to following table:

TIAC Code

Rectangular Round

Indoor, concealed none none

Indoor, exposed within CRF/1 CRD/2

mechanical room

Indoor, exposed elsewhere CRF/2 CRD/3

Outdoor, exposed to CRF/3 CRD/4

precipitation

Outdoor, elsewhere CRF/4 CRD/5


Air Distribution Section 23 30 00 Page 1 of 11


PART 1 - GENERAL







.3 Conform to SMACNA Standards.

.4 Conform to ASHRAE Recommendations (1988 Handbook).

.5 Conform to ASHRAE 90.1.


.1 Painting Colour Coding Division 09

.2 HVAC Division 23


1.4 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings for the following equipment:

.1 Fire Dampers and Access Doors

.2 Grilles and Diffusers

.3 Variable Air Volume Boxes

.4 Fans.

.5 Motorized Dampers

.6 Manual Balancing Dampers

.2 Submit certificates indicating that all required testing has been successfully completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Rectangular Low-Pressure Duct Materials

.1 For the purpose of this specification low pressure ductwork is to be ducted for systems below 1" (249 pa) static pressure. This includes all ductwork indicated on the drawings with the exception of that indicated in other parts of this section.

.2 Ductwork shall be constructed to withstand 1 1/2 times the working static pressure with a leakage rate of 5% maximum and designed to operate at 1 1/2" w.g. (373 pa) maximum pressure.

.3 Fabricate ducts from smooth finish prime grade, new, open hearth, soft steel sheet, galvanized, conforming to manufacturer's standard thickness as specified herein.

.4 All sides of ducts over 10" (254mm) in either dimension, to have all sides cross-broken or beaded at 12" (305mm) spacing, except area of the duct where outlets are to be installed.

.5 Thickness and Reinforcing of Sheet Metal Ductwork Material and Thickness



Largest Duct Dimension

Steel Thickness Guage (mm)

Recommended Construction Transverse Joints

Up to: Duct: Slip:

12” (305mm) 26 (0.551) 26 (0.551) Flat drive cleats on side, flat S cleat on top and bottom. Joints on 96" (2438mm) centers max.

13" to 20" (330mm to 508mm)

26 (0.551) 26 (0.551) Flat drive cleats on side, 1" (25mm) standing S cleat on top and bottom. Joints on 72" (1819mm) centers max.

21" to 30" 24 (0.701) 26 (0.551) Flat drive cleats on sides up to 20" (508mm), and 1" (25mm) standing drive slip over 20" (508mm). Top and bottom 1" (25mm) standing S cleat. Joints on 48" (1219mm) centers maximum.

31" to 48" (787mm to 1219mm)

24 (0.701) 24 (0.701) Flat drive cleats on sides up to 20" (508mm), and 1" (25mm) standing drive slip up to 30" (762mm), and 1" gasketed and bolted formed flange over 30". Top and bottom 1" (25mm) standing S cleat. Joints on 48" (1219mm) centers maximum. *(* Stays if required.)

49" to 60" (1245mm to 1529mm)

22 (0.853) 22 (0.853) Flat drive cleats on sides up to 20" (508mm), and 1" (25mm) standing drive slip up to 30" (762mm), and 1" gasketed and bolted formed flange over 30". Top and bottom 1 1/2" (38mm) gasketed and bolted formed flange. Joints on 48" (1219mm) centers maximum.

.6 The Contractor at his own discretion may also use flange duct joints; Ductmate or Nexxus.

.7 Acoustical Liner:

.1 Ducts are to be increased in size by thickness of insulation added to maintain inside dimensions as per indicated duct sizes and to ensure no increase in duct design velocity.

2.2 Circular Duct and Fittings, Singlewall

.1 .All circular spiral ductwork to be galvanized unless indicated otherwise on the drawings.

.1 Circular Spiral Ductwork

.1 Material:

.1 Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM standard A653 and A924.

.2 Stainless steel type 304L conforming to ASTM standard A240

.3 Stainless Steel type 316L conforming to ASTM standard A240

.4 Aluminum T3003.

.2 Surface Finish.



.1 Galvanized steel (galvanized in accordance with latest SMACNA Standards)

.2 Stainless steel type 304L – 2B Mill Finish

.3 Stainless steel type 316L = 2B Mill Finish

.2 Thickness

.1 Material thickness constructed from galvanized steel in accordance with latest SMACNA’s HVAC Duct Construction Standard for +10” water gauge pressure.

.3 Construction:

.1 Duct is of spiral lock seam construction with a mechanically formed seam locking indentation evenly spaced along the spiral seam. All spiral duct 8” diameter and larger shall incorporate multiple corrugations between spiral seams.

.2 Fittings shall be manufactured using one or more of the following construction methods:

.1 Overlapped edges stitch welded along the entire length of fitting

.2 Standing seam gore locked and internally sealed

.3 Button punched and internally sealed

.4 Elbows 3” through 12” diameter will be die stamped and continuously stitch welded.

.4 Connections

.1 Fitting ends shall be sized to slip-fit into spiral duct of the same nominal size. Fitting to fitting connections shall be made by use of duct size “MF” couplings. Duct to duct connections require fitting size “NP” couplings.

.5 Joint Sealing

.1 All joints must be sealed by the installer during the installation process. The type of sealant used as well as the method and level of application should be as directed by the specification and accordance with the sealant manufacturer’s published installation instructions.

.6 Acceptable manufacturers: Alpha Sheet Metal, Flexmaster, EHG Air Distribution Solutions.

2.3 Fan Duct Connections

.1 Regular Low-Pressure Duct.

.1 Provide flexible duct connectors Duro-Dyne "Durolon" woven glass fibre 24 oz. per sq. yd. (814 gm per sq.m), tensile strength of not less than 450 x 400 lb., coated both sides with Du Pont Hypalon, with 3" (76mm) metal to 6" (152mm) Durolon to 6" (152mm) metal "Grip-Lok" duct connections.

2.4 Splitters and Balancing Dampers

.1 Splitters to be made of at least the same thickness metal as the duct (minimum thickness 20 ga. (1.006mm). They are to be securely hinged at the air leaving edge, and made of two thicknesses so the entering edge presents a rounded surface to air flow. Minimum length of splitter is 12" (305mm). Splitter length is 1 1/2 times the width of the smaller duct when duct width is from 8" to 24" (203mm to 610mm). Splitter length for duct widths greater than 24"(610mm) is 1 1/4 times the width of the smaller duct.



.2 Splitters to be anchored at the air entering edge by a SRP-40 Duro Dyne fitting and a 1/8" (3mm) adjustable rod that passes thru a Duro Dyne SRP-14 ball joint damper casting, on the outside of the duct.

.3 Balancing dampers for round duct shall be butterfly style, constructed of 22 U.S. gauge (1.613mm) thick steel, trimmed for a proper fit within the duct and securely mounted in the duct. Manufactured components such as Nailor 1890 series are considered equal.

.4 Balancing dampers for square duct shall be multi-blade opposed blade balancing dampers, Nailor 1810 series or equal; 16 gauges galvanized steel blades mounted on ½” Celcon bearings in a 16-gauge galvanized frame

.5 All balancing dampers to be controlled manually and able to lock in place with damper quadrant or other suitable device. Damper rod end to be marked indicating blade position.

2.5 Fire Dampers

.1 Fire dampers to be shall be manufacturered, tested and labelled in accordance with CAN/ULC-S112, and to be ULC listed and labelled for 1 1/2-hour fire rating. Fire dampers are to meet all requirements of NFPA 90, NBC and OBC.

.2 Fire dampers to be galvanized steel channel frame curtain type galvanized steel interlocking blades, minimum 22 gauge (0.853mm) galvanized steel enclosure, and 165oF (70oC) fusible link standard. Fusible links for 135oF (57oC), 212oF (100oC), or 284oF (140oC) shall be provided if indicated on drawing as such.

.3 Fire dampers for horizontal installation in vertical ductwork to be operated by a stainless-steel closure spring and latch.

.4 Fire damper configuration to be low resistance type B with blades located outside of the air stream (unless detailed otherwise) for rectangular ductwork, and type C for round or oval ductwork.

.5 All fire dampers are to be DYNAMIC rated.

.6 Approved manufacturers: Ruskin, Controlled Air, Nailor, Kerr Hunt and Ventex.

2.6 Access Panels

.1 Ductwork to be fabricated from 20 gauge (1.006mm) galvanized steel, hinged to 20 gauge (1.006mm) galvanized mounting frame complete with fastening devices and felt gasket.

.2 Doors in insulated ducts to be double panel construction with 1/2" (13mm) rigid insulation between metal. Acceptable manufacturers: Nailor-Hart, Controlled Air,

.3 Finished walls and ceilings to be steel as manufactured by Le Hage, and to be as recommended by the manufacturer for each particular installation.

.4 Access panels in walls, shafts or ceilings having a fire rating or forming part of a fire rated assembly or fire separation to have ULC 1-1/2-hour B label equal to Le Hage L-1010 with cylinder lock and interior latch release.

.5 Acceptable manufacturers: Acudor Acorn Ltd, MiFab

2.7 Turning Vanes

.1 Turning vanes in rectangular duct elbows to be double walled vanes equal to Duro-Dyne "Duro Vane Rail" or Hart & Cooley "Ducturn".

2.8 Diffusers, Grilles and Registers

.1 Provide all diffusers, grilles and registers complete with accessories as scheduled on the drawings and indicated in the details.

.2 For T-Bar lay-in ceilings the grilles, registers, and diffusers are to lay into T-Bar system and no flange to extend beyond flange of T-Bar.



.3 For manufacturer and model refer to schedule on drawings.

.4 Titus, Metal*Aire, Krueger, E.H. Price, Carnes and Nailor Hart are equal products.

2.9 Exhaust Air Fans

.1 Provide (supply and install) fans at locations indicated on drawings and of sizes and models complete with all accessories as indicated in schedule on drawings.

.2 Loren Cook, Greenheck, Carnes, Twin City, JenAir, or Penn Barry are equal products.

2.10 Vibration Isolation

.1 Fans to have spring vibration isolators to give a minimum efficiency of 95%.

2.11 Motorized Control Dampers

.1 Motorized Control Dampers shall be Tamco Series 9000.

.1 Damper frame construction shall be 4 deep, .080” thick extruded aluminum insulated with rigid Styrofoam on four sides and flanged for flange mount to duct.

.2 Blades shall be extruded aluminum (6063T5) insulated with expanded polyurethane foam and shall be thermally broken. Complete blade shall have an insulating factor of R-2.29.

.3 Blade gaskets shall be extruded EPDM. Frame seals shall be of extruded TPE.

.4 Blade bearings are to be composed of a Celcon inner bearing fixed to a 7/16” aluminum hexagon blade pin, rotating within a polycarbonate outer bearing inserted in the frame.

.5 Linkage hardware shall be installed in the frame side and be constructed of aluminum and corrosion resistant, zinc plated steel, complete with cup-point trunnion screws for slip-proof grip.

.6 Minimum leakage on a 48” x 48” damper at 4” W.G. shall be less than 4.12 CFM per sq. ft. Damper shall meet AMCA Standard 500 performance criteria.

.7 Pressure drop of a fully open 48” x 48” damper shall not exceed .03” w.g. AT 1000fpm.

.8 Dampers shall be available in opposed blade or parallel blade action.

.2 Dampers shall be parallel blade action for two position operation and opposed blade action for modulating face and bypass operation, and sized to suit opening they will be installed in without blanking off free area.

.3 Approved Alternate Manufacturers: Nailor, Ruskin and NCA meeting this specification.

.4 Actuators shall be provided under Section 23 09 23 – Direct Digital Control Systems.

2.12 Variable Air Volume Boxes

.1 Furnish and install single duct variable volume air distribution assembly’s series of size and capacities as scheduled on the drawings.

.2 The assemblies shall be pressure independent and shall reset to any flow between zero and the maximum catalogued air volume.

.3 At an inlet velocity of 2000 FPM, the differential static pressure for any unit with attenuator section sizes 4 to 16 shall not exceed 0.11” w.g.

.4 The air flow sensor shall be of a cross configuration located at the inlet of the assembly. The sensor shall have twelve total pressure sensing ports and a center averaging chamber designed to accurately average the flow across the inlet of the assembly. Sensor shall



provide accuracy with 5% with a 90º sheet metal elbow directly at the inlet of the assembly. The air flow sensor shall amplify the sensed air flow signal.

.5 The assembly casing shall be constructed of 22-gauge zinc coated steel, internally lined with ½” thick, dual density fiberglass insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Any cut edges of fiberglass exposed to the air stream shall be coated with NFPA- 90A approved sealant.

.6 The primary air valve damper shall be heavy gauge metal, with peripheral gasket and solid steel shaft, pivoted in self-lubricating bearings. In the full closed position, air leakage past closed damper not to exceed 2% of nominal rating at 3” w.g. inlet static pressure, when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 130.

.7 Digital Controls shall be provided by the Section 23 09 23 and supplied to the manufacturer for installation in the factory.

.8 All boxes shall be complete with 36” (914 mm) discharge sound attenuator, sound attenuator section to be shipped loose for field attachment, c/w slip and drive connections, supplied as standard with same liner as basic unit.

.9 Acceptable manufacturers: Nailor, E.H. Price, Metal*Aire, Titus

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Duct Installation - General

.1 The Contractor to furnish all labour and incidental materials and perform all the operations for the installation as specified.

.2 All ducts to be located in co-operation with the other trades to clear lights, pipes, plumbing, etc. In cases where cross beams, pipes, etc., to pass through ducts, air foils to be installed.

.3 In general, all ducts to be constructed that they may be dismantled and cleaned. All visible internal portions of duct outlets behind grilles and registers to be painted dull black.

3.2 Ductwork Construction and Installation - General

.1 Ducts up to 24" (610mm) in either dimension to have reinforcing ribs, spaced not more than 8 ft. (2440mm) apart.

.2 Ducts over 24" (610mm) in either dimension to have reinforcing ribs, spaced not more than 4 ft. (1220mm) apart. Ducts shall have supplemental stiffening as required to prevent drumming and provide a structurally sound assembly.

3.3 Change in Shape or Dimension

.1 Slope requirements for transformations that either increase or decrease duct area to a minimum of 1:7.

.2 The angle of transformation at connections to heaters or other equipment is not to exceed 30 degrees from a line parallel to the airflow on the approaching side of the equipment, and 45 degrees on the leaving side of the equipment. The angle of approach may be increased to meet space conditions when the transformation section is provided with vanes.

3.4 Changes in Direction

.1 Changes in direction and shape shall be kept to the minimum, permitted by distribution requirements and building conditions. Turns to be made with these elbows as required in the following order of preference on all supply, return and exhaust ductwork. Unvented elbow, throat radius 3/4 width of duct and full heel radius.

.2 Elbows with inside radius less than 3/4 width of duct but not less than 3" (75mm) and full heel radius and single thickness turning vanes



.3 Square elbow with double thickness turning vanes spaced at 1 1/2" (38mm) centres up to 24" (610mm) duct and 3" (75mm) centres over 24" (610mm).

3.5 Balancing Dampers

.1 Splitter or opposed blade dampers for adjustment of air distribution to respective branches to be located as indicated on drawings, or as described in other parts of this specification.

3.6 Seams

.1 Sections to be assembled with Pittsburgh lock or grooved longitudinal seams, fully closed for tightness and appearance.

3.7 Joints and Reinforcement

.1 Duct sections to be joined by flat "S" or Standing "S" cleats which conform to following general requirements:

.1 Ducts up to 18" (457mm) in width to have flat "S" cleats on top and bottom and drive cleats on sides.

.2 Ducts over 18" (457mm) width to have standing "S" cleat on top and bottom and drive cleat on sides.

.3 Where length of drive cleat exceeds 24" (610mm), a standing "S" or standing "T" cleat to be used and corners taped for tightness.

3.8 Supporting of Ducts

.1 All ducts to be adequately supported. For ducts up to 18" (457mm) in width, hangers to be placed on not more than 8 ft. (1440mm) centres; ducts 19" (483mm) and above in width on not more than 48" (1220mm) centres. Hangers to be placed plumb and present a neat appearance.

.2 Hangers on ducts up to 36" (914mm) in width to be constructed from galvanized band iron 1” x 16 gauge (25mm x 1.6mm). On ducts 37" (940mm) and above in width, hangers to be constructed from galvanized iron angles not less than 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/8" (38mm x 38mm x 3mm). Hangers to extend down the sides of the ducts to bottom of duct with angle bent around bottom for support. Fasten to duct with sheet metal screws on sides and bottom. Hangers on ducts to be of same material as ductwork.

.3 Hanger’s bands to extend the full depth of duct with bottom of hanger being toed in under duct. Hangers to be attached to the duct using not less than three rivets or metal screws.

.4 On reinforced concrete, all hangers for ductwork to be fastened to the concrete by Ram- Set studs or expansion shields and lag bolts.

.5 Ducts cannot in any location, be supported from the furring, ceiling construction, piping, conduit or other ducts.

.6 The use of perforated band iron for supporting of ducts is not permitted.

.7 In Mechanical Rooms, at approved locations where ducts are supported from the floor, install galvanized angle irons with base plates anchored to floor slab. Supports to be placed so as not to interfere with access to or around equipment and be attached to the floor slab.

3.9 Reinforcing of Sheet Metal - General

.1 All ductwork 12" (305mm) and over in either dimension to be cross broken except those to which internal rigid board insulation is applied. Where drive cleat is used, top and bottom corners to be caulked before cleat is turned over to make duct air tight.

.2 All other joints to be caulked at all corners before and after joint is made to make duct completely air tight.

.3 All standing "S" cleats referred to are to be machine made for purposes of extra reinforcing.



.4 All longitudinal seams are to be Pittsburgh lock seam hammered over and made air tight.

.5 Where a duct falls into certain maximum duct size classification the entire duct, sides top and bottom, is to be of the gauge specified.

.6 Sheet metal screws to be used on sides of ducts where standing "S" cleat is used or reinforcing angle on 12" (305mm) centres or minimum 2 screws per side.

3.10 Sheet Metal Installation

.1 During installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering. The Contractor to install this work in accordance with the overall approved progress schedule and in co-operation with all other Contractors so there is no delay to other trades

.2 All necessary allowances and provisions to be made in the installation of the ducts for the structural conditions of the building and other trades, and ducts to be transformed or divided as may be required. Ductwork to be altered or modified so as to give an effective sectional area equal to that originally shown without exceeding an aspect ratio of 4:1. All of these changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at the site, or as approved on shop or erection drawings, and at no additional cost.

.3 All exposed spiral ducting to be installed in a neat manner with each section overlapping the next and all exposed edges sealed.

.4 All exposed ducting to be supported from a single hanger rod with support plate on inside of duct.

3.11 Special Bracket

.1 Where the method of support specified above is not applicable, vertical risers and other duct runs, in general, to be supported by substantial angle brackets designed to meet field conditions.

3.12 Ducts at Masonry

.1 Where ducts are shown connecting to or terminating at masonry openings, and/or along the edges of all plenums at floors, walls, ceilings, etc. provide a continuous 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1/8" (38mm x 38mm x 3mm) galvanized angle iron bolted to the construction and made air tight to same by applying approved caulking compound on the angle before they are drawn down tight. The sheet metal at these locations to be bolted to the continuous angle iron.

3.13 Location of Outlets

.1 The position of all outlets shown on the drawings are approximate only and this Contractor is to check the location of all outlets with the Consultant and make such adjustments in position as are necessary to conform with architectural features, acoustic tile pattern, etc. and the outlets required by other trades without extra charge. Ceiling outlets and their assemblies to be constructed so that they fit the spacing and manufacture of the removable acoustic ceiling.

3.14 Outside Openings

.1 Unless specifically noted otherwise, openings in the outside walls, roof, etc. to be left for this Contractor, where shown and required for fresh air intakes and exhausts.

.2 Louvres bird screens, etc. for these intakes and exhausts, to be supplied and installed by this Division. Supply and install all necessary ductwork and plenums for intakes and exhausts and patch around same to make a weather tight job. Co-operate with all other trades on exact location of these openings, ducts, and louvres, serving the air systems. Supply and install 14 ga. insulated louvre blank-offs where shown for blanking off unused portion of louvres.

3.15 Duct Access Doors



.1 Install access doors to fire or other dampers, for service, inspection, any other normal maintenance requirements, and for cleanouts where required on specialty systems. Ensure that such access doors are of a size that equipment to be attended is accessible.

.2 Install an access door on the upstream side of each duct mounted heating coil.

3.16 Turning Vanes

.1 Install small arc air foil vanes in ducts at elbows where centre-line radius is less than 1 1/4 times turning dimension of duct.

.2 Square elbows with turning vanes equal to Hart and Cooley double thickness vanes spaced at 1 1/2" (38mm) centres up to 24" (610mm) duct and 3" (75mm) centres over 24" (610mm). Rovane duct turning vanes are acceptable.

3.17 Fire Dampers

.1 Fire dampers are to be installed in all locations shown or where required by the Fire Marshal and to be labelled by Underwriter's Laboratories, Canada.

.2 Generally, where any duct or any outlet passes through any required fire wall, fire separation with a fire resistance rating, or fire rated ceiling the duct to be provided with the Fire Marshal's approved automatic fire dampers built into the wall. Dampers to be supported from the structure and not from the ducts or grilles, to allow duct drop off under fire conditions.

.3 In addition, install in all systems where ducts service two or more stories, at each floor level Fire Marshal approved dampers, leaf dampers, fitted with fusible links of a Fire Marshal approved temperature rating to close air tight on linkage failure. Provide access to dampers for linkage replacement.

.4 The complete fire damper installation to be in strict accordance with manufacturers recommendations, NFPA-90A and meet the approval of all authorities having jurisdiction. Install fire dampers supplied as accessories under other sections of specifications. Refer to Section 15850. All smoke and fire damper locations to be shown on "As Built Drawings".

3.18 Fan-Duct Connections

.1 Install (Duro Dyne Grip-Lock Durolon) duct connectors unless specified otherwise to suit system pressure between ductwork and all fan equipment on both sides to isolate where indicated and on all fan equipment.

3.19 Diffusers, Grilles and Registers

.1 Install all diffusers, grilles and registers complete with accessories as detailed on the drawings and in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.

.2 This Division is cautioned that before ordering of any units details should be checked for verification of size of unit and flanging arrangement required.

.3 Co-operation to be exercised so that registers and diffusers do not conflict with structural steel, lights, tile and grids, etc. It is the responsibility of this Division to bring it to the attention of the Consultant of any such confliction of equipment prior to the installation of any registers and diffusers.

3.20 Watertight Duct

.1 Provide watertight ductwork for:

.1 Fresh air intakes.

.2 Exhaust air outlets.

.2 Form bottom of duct without longitudinal seams. Solder or weld joints of bottom sheets and sides. Solder or weld transverse joints and caulk.



.3 Slope duct back to exterior louvre outlet and provide weep holes for drainage.

3.21 Exhaust Fans

.1 Supply, install and connect all exhaust air fans of capacities and sizes as specified in the schedule and at the location indicated on the Drawings.

.2 All connections to fans to be made utilizing canvas connections as specified under this Section.

.3 All fan systems are to be equipped with all accessories indicated in schedule.

.4 Refer to Section 23 09 23 Controls and Instrumentation and Section 26 05 05 Wiring for Division 23, and co-ordinate work.

3.22 Curbs

.1 All roof curbs are to be provide by manufacturer of equipment being supported unless otherwise indicated. All curbs to be minimum 18” (457 mm) high.All curbs flashed by Roofing Contractor. Refer to details on Drawings.

3.23 Motorized Dampers

.1 Install all motorized dampers supplied by Section 15900 in all locations indicated on the drawings and described in this specification, except those dampers supplied as part of a packaged unit.

3.24 Sealing of Ducts

.1 Seal all seams and joints in all duct systems for an air-tight installation.

.2 Duct sealer shall be high pressure, high velocity water-based duct sealer. Apply sealer with either brush or caulking tube.

.3 On exposed duct scheduled for painting, seal only with product from caulking tube taking care to maintain a neat finished appearance to the duct.

.4 Duct sealer shall be Duro Dyne DSW or equal.

3.25 Acoustic Duct Liner

.1 Install acoustic duct liner in all ducts shown cross-hatched, or otherwise specified with duct liner.

.2 Apply adhesive to the interior of the duct and supplement the adhesive with welding pins and clips, the pins shall be spaced no further than 12" apart, no more than 4" in from a corner or edge of the duct. Duct 8" wide and smaller does not require adhesive supplement.

.3 Trim all pieces of liner such that all corners and joints fit tight, without bulges.

.4 Apply liner adhesive to all joints, seams, and exposed edges, including all traverse joints as the duct is assembled.

.5 At the upstream leading edge of exposed liner, provide a step collar or insulation stop to cover the entire edge of the exposed liner.

.6 Interrupt the duct liner installation at fire dampers.

.7 Where dampers (motorized or manual), turning vane, or other interior duct device is to be mounted, provide a metal hat section or other build out to secure the damper or device. Fire dampers may not be mounted to a hat section, oversize fire dampers to the outside duct dimensions or provide step collars on either side of the fire damper.

3.26 Variable Air Volume Boxes

.1 Contractor to install VAV boxes in accordance with manufacturers recommended installation and operation instructions.



.2 Each terminal unit be independently supported, especially when accessory modules, such as coils, attenuators, silencers or multiple outlets are present. Hanger straps may be used and screwed directly into the sides or bottom of the unit casing (refer to drawings). Alternately, a trapeze setup. Use the support method prescribed for the rectangular duct in the job specifications.

.3 Slip each inlet duct over the inlet collar of the terminal. Fasten and seal the connection as described in the job specification. The diameter of the inlet duct for round inlets (unit size 4 through 10) must be equal to the listed size of the terminal. The inlet collar of the terminal is made 1/8" (3) smaller than listed size in order to fit inside the duct. Unit size 12 through 16 utilize flat oval inlet collars.

.4 Provide hard duct inlet connections to all boxes. For hard inlet duct connections to flat oval inlets, refer to submittal drawing for dimensional data.

.5 On discharge of units the duct should mate to the terminal using slip and drive connections.

.6 All field wiring must comply with NEC and local codes. Electrical, control, and piping diagrams can be found on labels affixed to the exterior/interior of the control enclosure box.

.7 Contractor to obtain detailed information about start-up and operating procedures for manufacturer’s digital controls. Co-ordinate with control contractor.

.8 Note: Digital controllers may use specific communication addresses based on Building Management Systems Architecture and original engineering drawings. Installing the terminal in a location other than that noted on the label may result in excessive start-up labor.


Metal Ducts Low Pressure 500 PA Section 23 31 13.01 Page 1 of 6


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary


.1 Materials and installation of low-pressure metallic ductwork, joints and accessories.



.2 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

.3 Section 23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems.

1.2 References

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineering (ASHRAE).

.2 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM).

.1 ASTM A480/A480M-03c, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip.

.2 ASTM A635/A635M-02, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Heavy-Thickness Coils, Carbon, Hot Rolled.

.3 ASTM A653/A653M-03, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.3 Department of Justice Canada (Jus).

.1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.

.4 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS).


.5 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

.1 NFPA 90A-02, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

.2 NFPA 90B-02, Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems.

.3 NFPA 96-01, Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations.

.6 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).

.1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 2nd Edition [1995] and Addendum No. 1, 1997.

.2 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, 1985, 1st Edition.

.3 IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction 1995, 1st Edition.

.7 Transport Canada (TC).

.1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act (TDGA), 1992, c. 34.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.




.1 Certification of Ratings:

.1 Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.


.1 Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Seal Classification

.1 Classification as follows:

Maximum Pressure Pa SMACNA Seal Class

500 C

250 C

125 C

125 Unsealed

.2 Seal classification:

.1 Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, duct wall penetrations and connections made airtight with sealant and tape.

.2 Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with sealant and tape.

.3 Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with gaskets, sealant, and tape. Longitudinal seams unsealed.

.4 Unsealed seams and joints.

2.2 Sealant

.1 Sealant: oil resistant, water borne, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30 degrees C to plus 93 degrees C.

2.3 Tape

.1 Tape: polyvinyl treated, open weave fiberglass tape, 50 mm wide.

2.4 Duct Leakage

.1 In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.

2.5 Fittings

.1 Fabrication: to SMACNA.

.2 Radiused elbows.

.1 Rectangular: standard radius. Centreline radius: 1.5 times width of duct.

.2 Round: smooth radius five piece. Centreline radius: 1.5 times diameter.

.3 Mitred elbows, rectangular:

.1 To 400 mm: with single thickness turning vanes.

.2 Over 400 mm: with double thickness turning vanes.

.3 Note: turning vanes are not acceptable within grease exhaust ductwork



.4 Branches:

.1 Rectangular main and branch: with radius on branch 1.5 times width of duct and 45 degrees entry on branch.

.2 Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees with conical connection.

.3 Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct.

.4 Main duct branches: with splitter damper.

.5 Transitions:

.1 Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle.

.2 Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle.

.6 Offsets:

.1 Full radiused elbows.

.7 Obstruction deflectors: maintain full cross-sectional area.

.1 Maximum included angles: as for transitions.

2.6 Fire Stopping

.1 Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.

2.7 Galvanized Steel

.1 Lock forming quality: to ASTM A653/A653M, Z90 zinc coating.

.2 Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA.

.3 Joints: to SMACNA proprietary manufactured duct joint. Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint to be considered to be a class A seal.

2.8 Aluminum

.1 To SMACNA. Aluminum type: 3003-H-14.

.2 Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA.

.3 Joints: to SMACNA.

2.9 Kitchen Exhaust Systems

.1 Prefabricated companion flanged duct sections providing a two-hour fire resistance with a zero-clearance fire resistance rating in accordance with ASTM E 2336.

.2 The kitchen exhaust duct shall be of the double-wall, factory-fabricated type for use with Type I or Type II kitchen hoods, as described in NFPA 96, for the transportation of air and grease laden vapors from commercial cooking operations.

.3 Factory-fabricated companion flanged duct sections of not less than16 gauge steel inner liner and 24-gauge galvanized steel outer casing.

.1 18-gauge stainless steel liner if noted on contract documents.

.2 24-gauge stainless steel outer shell if noted on contract documents.

.4 All internal kitchen exhaust duct longitudinal seams and fittings branches shall be fully welded and listed in accordance with NFPA 96.

.5 Each duct section shall bear the manufacturer’s logo and Intertek/cETLus mark.

.6 System shall be designed to provide access for inspection and cleaning of each change of duct direction and permit drainage of grease residue through a duct section.



.1 Provide zero clearance, ASTM E 2336 and UL 1978 or CAN/ULC S662listed access doors for cleanout to maintain 2-hour fire rating and install in accordance with local requirements.

.2 Access Doors shall be labeled “ACCESS PANEL – DO NOT OBSTRUCT”.

.7 Kitchen exhaust shall slope upward in the direction of the airflow in accordance with local code requirements.

.8 The kitchen exhaust duct assembly shall not exceed a flame spread rating of 0.

.9 The kitchen exhaust duct assembly shall not exceed a smoke development index of 0.

.10 The factory-fabricated grease duct assembly shall not require additional wraps or enclosures to achieve the required fire resistance rating.

.11 Sound transmission loss shall be as follows:

.1 125Hz – 27dB / 250Hz – 40dB / 500Hz – 50dB / 1000Hz – 55dB / 2000Hz – 63dB / 4000Hz – 60dB

.12 Through-penetration firestopping materials:

.1 When the duct passes through a fire-resistant floor or wall assembly, the through openings shall be firestopped in accordance with the manufacturer’s listings.

.13 Acceptable manufacturers:

.1 DuraSystems (www.durasystems.com), 199 Courtland Avenue, Vaughan, Ontario, Canada L4K 4T2. Contact Gerry Saieva or Fred Woo at 1-905-660- 4455.

.2 Approved Equivalent

.14 Acceptable model:

.1 DuraSystems “DuraDuct KEX”


.1 Hangers and Supports: [in accordance with Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

.1 Strap hangers: of same material as duct but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct.

.1 Maximum size duct supported by strap hanger: 500.

.2 Hanger configuration: to SMACNA.

.3 Hangers: galvanized steel angle with galvanized steel rods to SMACNA following table:

Duct Size Angle Size Rod Size

(mm) (mm) (mm)

up to 750 25 x 25 x 3 6

751 to 1050 40 x 40 x 3 6

1051 to 1500 40 x 40 x 3 10

1501 to 2100 50 x 50 x 3 10

2101 to 2400 50 x 50 x 5 10

2401 and over 50 x 50 x 6 10



.4 Upper hanger attachments:

.1 For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts.

.2 For steel joist: manufactured joist clamp.

.3 For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps:

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General

.1 Do work in accordance with NFPA 90 and SMACNA as indicated.

.2 Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods.

.1 Insulate strap hangers 100 mm beyond insulated duct. Ensure diffuser is fully seated.

.3 Support risers in accordance with SMACNA as indicated.

.4 Install breakaway joints in ductwork on sides of fire separation.

.5 Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.

3.2 Hangers

.1 Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.

.2 Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.

.3 Hanger spacing: in accordance with SMACNA as follows:

Duct Size Spacing

(mm) (mm)

to 1500 3000

1501 and over 2500

3.3 Watertight Duct

.1 Provide watertight duct for:

.1 Dishwasher exhaust.

.2 Fresh air intake.

.3 Minimum 3000 mm from duct mounted humidifier in all directions.

.4 As indicated.

.2 Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams.

.1 weld joints of bottom and side sheets.

.2 Seal other joints with duct sealer.

.3 Slope horizontal branch ductwork down towards hoods and dishwasher served.

.1 Slope header ducts down toward risers.

3.4 Kitchen Exhaust Systems

.1 Install to NFPA 96 and as indicated.

3.5 Sealing and Taping

.1 Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.



.2 Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one coat of sealant to manufacturers recommendations.

3.6 Leakage Tests

.1 Refer to Section 23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems.

.2 In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual.

.3 Do leakage tests in sections.

.4 Make trial leakage tests as instructed to demonstrate workmanship.

.5 Do not install additional ductwork until trial test has been passed.

.6 Test section minimum of 30 m long with not less than three branch takeoffs and two 90 degrees elbows.

.7 Complete test before performance insulation or concealment Work.

END OF SECTION 23 31 13 01

Acoustical Air Plenums Section 23 32 48 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE)


.1 ASTM A653/A653M-11, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

.2 ASTM C423-09a, Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method.

.3 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

.4 ASTM E477-06a, Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers.


.1 National Building Code of Canada 2015 (NBC).

.4 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA)



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for acoustical air plenums and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:


.2 Submit [system shop drawings] [separate drawings for each piece of attenuation equipment] complete with product data.






.1 Store materials in dry location, indoors, off ground and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect acoustical air plenums from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

.1 Rating Data:



.1 Provide performance rating data, certified by professional engineer or accredited test laboratory and supported by calculations and verified by test results in accordance with reference standards as follows:

.1 Silencer: insertion loss, pressure drop at design conditions,

.2 Acoustic plenums: transmission loss and acoustical absorption.

.3 Acoustical performance measurements in accordance with ASTM E477, ASTM E90 and ASTM C423, except where specified otherwise.

2.2 ABSORPTION AND INSULATING MEDIA

.1 Acoustic quality, glass fibre, bacteria and fungus resistant; free of corrosion causing or accelerating agents; packed to density to meet performance requirements; and meet NBC fire requirements or requirements of authority having jurisdiction for duct lining.

2.3 SILENCERS

.1 Factory manufactured of prime coated or galvanized steel, compatible with ductwork specified elsewhere and to ASHRAE and SMACNA standards.

.2 Outer casing and galvanized steel inner casing with clean cut circular perforations to enclose acoustic media. Inner casing to have pods, half-splitters running full length of silencer where any cross-sectional dimension exceeds 450 mm. Protect media from erosion with Mylar, glass fibre cloth, Tedlar between media and perforated metal.

.3 Performance: as indicated.

2.4 ACOUSTIC PLENUMS

.1 Panels: tongue and groove connection type, designed for individual panel removal for equipment access without major dismantling of plenum.

.1 Outer sheet: 1.3 mm thick galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M, with coating designation Z90.

.2 Inner sheet: 0.085 mm thick galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M, with coating designation Z90 with 2 mm diameter clean cut perforations on 5 mm staggered centres.

.3 Fully framed with 1.3 mm thick galvanized steel channels.

.4 Horizontal stiffeners: 0.85 mm minimum galvanized steel on 800 mm centres to control media settlement.

.5 Access panels: sized for equipment removal; two handles per panel; screw at 100 mm maximum centres; perimeter neoprene sponge gasket; materials same as standard panel.

.2 Doors: access doors with minimum 510 mm opening.

.1 Construction same as standard panel except interiors solid.

.2 Two butt-type nylon bushed hinges, two cam-type latches with inside and outside handles.

.3 Neoprene gasket seal.

.4 Zinc plated hardware.

.5 Open against air pressure.

.3 Windows: inspection windows, 305 mm, double glazed with 6 mm wire reinforced glass mounted in neoprene U channels.

.4 Assembly: base sections and flashings 1.3 mm minimum galvanized steel.



.5 Panel and flashing joints externally sealed with 5 mm diameter bead of non sag, non hardening sealant. Floor channel to floor connection sealed with 3 x 13 mm mono elastomeric tape.

.6 Factory cut and frame openings where greatest dimension exceeds 300 mm. Smaller panel openings, site located and cut 50 mm larger in diameter, sleeved with 0.75 mm minimum galvanized steel.

.7 Fill space between pipe or conduit and sleeve with acoustic media, covered and mastic sealed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.8 Assembly RSI not less than 1.2 m2. degrees C)/W at 10 degrees C.

.9 Certified acoustical performance:

.1 Transmission loss to ASTM E90.

.2 Acoustical absorption to ASTM C423.

Octave bands, (Hz)

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000

Transmission loss, dB

21 28 39 50 53 56

Absorption coefficient

0.7 0.9 .99 .99 0.9 0.9

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for acoustical air plenum installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




3.2 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS


3.3 INSTALLATION

.1 Noise flanking: where indicated, install in wall sleeve with uniform clearance around to ensure no contact of silencer with wall sleeve. Pack with flexible, non hardening caulking on both sides of sleeves.

.2 Instrument test ports: install at inlet and outlet to permit measurement of insertion loss and pressure loss.

.3 Suspension: to manufacturer's instructions.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

.1 Testing:

.1 Experienced and competent sound and vibration testing professional engineer to take sound measurement after start up and testing, adjusting and balancing of systems to Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.



.2 Sound measurements taken:

.1 Upstream and downstream of each silencer and plenum.

.2 In areas adjacent to mechanical equipment rooms, duct and pipe shafts.

.3 At 1800 mm above floor adjacent to first air terminal.

.4 At critical locations.

.2 Provide Consultant with notice 24 hours in advance of commencement of tests.

.3 Establish adequacy of equipment isolation, acceptability of noise levels in occupied areas, other conditions affecting acoustics and, where appropriate, recommendation for remedial measures and costs.

.4 Submit complete report of test results, including sound curves.


.1 Arrange with manufacturer's representative to review work of this Section and submit written reports to verify compliance with Contract Documents.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Services: consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits to review installation, scheduled as follows:

.1 After delivery and storage of products.

.2 After preparatory work is complete but before installation commences.

.3 Twice during the installation, at 25 % and 60 % completion stages.

.4 Upon completion of installation.

.3 Submit manufacturer's reports to Consultant within 3 days of manufacturer representative's review.

3.5 ADJUSTING

.1 Make adjustments and corrections in accordance with written report.

.2 Provide Consultant with notice 24 hours in advance of visit.

3.6 CLEANING





Air Duct Accessories Section 23 33 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary


.1 Materials and installation for duct accessories including flexible connections, access doors, vanes and collars.

1.2 References



.2 Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).

.1 SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 95.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet. Indicate the following:

.1 Flexible connections.

.2 Duct access doors.

.3 Turning vanes.

.4 Instrument test ports.

.3 Test Reports: submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.

.1 Certification of ratings: catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.



.6 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.

.7 Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.


.1 Health and Safety:

.1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

2.2 Flexible Connections



.1 All connections to centrifugal fans, exhaust fans units shall be equipped with flexible connections.

.2 Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame 25 mm thick with fabric clenched by means of double locked seams.

.3 Material:

.1 Fire resistant, self-extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at minus 40 degrees C to plus 90 degrees C, density of 1.3 kg/m2.

2.3 Access Doors in Ducts

.1 Non-Insulated Ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame.

.2 Insulated Ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick rigid glass fibre insulation.

.3 Gaskets: neoprene or foam rubber.

.4 Hardware:

.1 Up to 300 x 300 mm: two sash locks complete with safety chain.

.2 301 to 450 mm: four sash locks complete with safety chain.

.3 451 to 1000 mm: piano hinge and minimum two sash locks.

.4 Doors over 1000 mm: piano hinge and two handles operable from both sides.

.5 Hold open devices.

.6 300 x 300 mm glass viewing panels.

2.4 Turning Vanes

.1 Factory or shop fabricated double thickness with trailing edge, to recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated.

2.5 Instrument Test

.1 1.6 mm thick steel zinc plated after manufacture.

.2 Cam lock handles with neoprene expansion plug and handle chain.

.3 28 mm minimum inside diameter. Length to suit insulation thickness.

.4 Neoprene mounting gasket.

2.6 Spin- in Collars

.1 Conical galvanized sheet metal spin-in collars with lockable butterfly damper.

.2 Sheet metal thickness to co-responding round duct standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.

3.2 Installation

.1 Flexible Connections:

.1 Install in following locations:



.1 Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans.

.2 Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans.

.3 As indicated.

.2 Length of connection: 100 mm.

.3 Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 75 mm.

.4 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.

.5 When fan is running:

.1 Ducting on sides of flexible connection to be in alignment.

.2 Ensure slack material in flexible connection.

.2 Access Doors and Viewing Panels:

.1 Size:

.1 1600 x 1150 mm for person size entry.

.2 1600 x 600 mm for servicing entry.

.3 300 x 300 mm for viewing.

.4 As indicated.

.2 Locations:

.1 Fire and smoke dampers.

.2 Control dampers.

.3 Devices requiring maintenance.

.4 Required by code.

.5 Elsewhere as indicated.

.3 Instrument Test Ports:

.1 General:

.1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2 Locate to permit easy manipulation of instruments.

.3 Install insulation port extensions as required.

.4 Locations:

.1 For traverse readings:

.1 Ducted inlets to roof and wall exhausters.

.2 Inlets and outlets of other fan systems.

.3 Main and sub-main ducts.

.4 And as indicated.

.2 For temperature readings:

.1 At outside air intakes.

.2 In mixed air applications in locations as approved by Architecttura Inc.

.3 At inlet and outlet of coils.



.4 Downstream of junctions of two converging air streams of different temperatures.

.5 And as indicated.

.4 Turning vanes:

.1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and as indicated.



.1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its product[s] and submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of Work with Contract.

.2 Manufacturer's Field Services: provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed:

.1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but before installation begins.

.2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete.

.3 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out.

.4 Obtain reports, within 3 days of review, and submit, immediately, to Architecttura Inc.

3.4 Cleaning

.1 Perform cleaning operations as specified in Section 01 74 11 and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.



Flexible Ducts Section 23 33 46 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Summary


.1 Materials and installation of flexible ductwork, joints and accessories.



1.2 References

.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineering (ASHRAE).

.2 Department of Justice Canada (Jus).

.1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA), 1999, c. 33.

.2 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA), c. 34.



.4 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).

.1 NFPA 90A-02, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.

.2 NFPA 90B-02, Standard for Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems.

.5 Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).

.1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 95 (Addendum No.1, November 1997).

.2 SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction, 1st Edition 1995.

.6 Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. (UL).

.1 UL 181-96, Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.

.7 Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC).

.1 CAN/ULC-S110-1986(R2001), Fire Tests for Air Ducts.

1.3 Submittals

.1 Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.2 Samples: submit samples with product data of different types of flexible duct being used in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.


.1 Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage.

1.5 Indoor Air Quality (Iaq) Management Plan

.1 During construction meet or exceed the requirements of SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 Factory fabricated to CAN/ULC-S110.

Flexible Ducts Section 23 33 46 Page 2 of 2


.2 Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00.

.3 Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50.

2.2 Non-Metallic - Insulated

.1 Type 4: non-collapsible, coated aluminum foil/mylar type mechanically bonded to, and helically supported by, external steel wire with factory applied, 37 mm thick flexible mineral fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and reinforced mylar/neoprene laminate jacket.

.2 Performance:

.1 Factory tested to 2.5 kPa without leakage.

.2 Maximum relative pressure drop coefficient: 3

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Duct Installation

.1 Install in accordance with: SMACNA.


Common Work Results for Electrical Section 26 05 00 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 CSA Group

.1 CSA C22.1-12, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (22nd Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations.

.2 CSA C22.2.

.3 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No.1-10, Overhead Systems.

.4 CAN3-C235-[83 (R2010)], Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to 50,000 V.

.2 Institute of Electrical and Electronics (IEEE)/National Electrical Safety Code Product Line (NESC)

.1 IEEE SP1122-[2000], The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms, 7th Edition.

1.2 Definitions

.1 Electrical and electronic terms: unless otherwise specified or indicated, terms used in these specifications, and on drawings, are those defined by IEEE SP1122.


.1 Submit in accordance with Section [01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures].

.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Submit for review single line electrical diagrams under plexiglass and locate as indicated.

.1 Electrical distribution system in main electrical room.

.2 Electrical power generation and distribution systems in power plant rooms.

.4 Submit for review fire alarm riser diagram, plan and zoning of building [under plexiglass] [in glazed frames] at fire alarm control panel and annunciator.

.5 Shop drawings:


.2 Submit wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location, layout and arrangement, control panels, accessories, piping, ductwork, and other items that must be shown to ensure co-ordinated installation.

.3 Identify on wiring diagrams circuit terminals and indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and interconnection between each item of equipment.

.4 Indicate of drawings clearances for operation, maintenance, and replacement of operating equipment devices.

.5 Submit 3 number of copies of 600 x 600 mm minimum size drawings and product data to authority having jurisdiction.

.6 If changes are required, notify Consultant of these changes before they are made.

.6 Certificates:

.1 Provide CSA certified material and equipment.



.2 Where CSA certified equipment or material is not available, submit such equipment or material to authority having jurisdiction for special approval before delivery to site.

.3 Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation.

.4 Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract.

.5 Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in PART 3 - LOAD BALANCE.

.6 Submit certificate of acceptance from authority having jurisdiction upon completion of Work to Consultant.

.7 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to Consultant manufacturer's written report, within 3 days of review, verifying compliance of Work and electrical system and instrumentation testing, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual.

.1 Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.

.2 Operating instructions to include following:

.1 Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment.

.2 Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures.

.3 Safety precautions.

.4 Procedures to be followed in event of equipment failure.

.5 Other items of instruction as recommended by manufacturer of each system or item of equipment.

.3 Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic.

.4 Post instructions where directed.

.5 For operating instructions exposed to weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures.

.6 Ensure operating instructions will not fade when exposed to sunlight and are secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section [01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements] [with manufacturer's written instructions].



.1 Store materials off ground in dry location indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect parts and equipment from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Design Requirements

.1 Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235.

.2 Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard.

.1 Equipment to operate in extreme operating conditions established in above standard without damage to equipment.

.3 Language operating requirements: provide identification nameplates, labels for control items in English and French.

2.2 Materials and Equipment

.1 Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

.2 Equipment and material to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified equipment or material is not available, obtain special approval from authority having jurisdiction prior delivery to site and submit such approval as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.

.3 Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies.

2.3 Electric Motors, Equipment and Controls

.1 Verify installation and co-ordination responsibilities related to motors, equipment and controls, as indicated.

.2 Control wiring and conduit: in accordance with Section 26 29 03 - Control Devices except for conduit, wiring and connections below 50 V which are related to control systems.

2.4 Warning Signs

.1 Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction.

.2

.3 Porcelain enamel signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.

2.5 Wiring Terminations

.1 Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.

2.6 Equipment Identification

.1 Identify electrical equipment with nameplates as follows:

.1 Nameplates: plastic laminate 3 mm face, white core, lettering accurately aligned and engraved into core.

.2 Sizes as follows:

NAMEPLATE SIZES

Size 1 10 x 50 mm 1 line 3 mm high letters


Size 3 12 x 70 mm 2 lines 3 mm high letters







.2 Labels: embossed plastic labels with 6 mm high letters unless specified otherwise.

.3 Wording on nameplates, labels to be approved by Consultant prior to manufacture.

.4 Allow for minimum of twenty-five 25 letters per label or nameplate.

.5 Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.

.6 Identify equipment with Size 3 labels engraved “ASSET INVENTORY NO. [_____] “as directed by Consultant.

.7 Disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage.

.8 Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage.

.9 Transformers: indicate capacity, primary and secondary voltages.

2.7 Wiring Identification

.1 Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, [numbered] [coloured plastic tapes], on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring.

.2 Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.

.3 Colour coding: to CSA C22.1.

.4 Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.

2.8 Conduit and Cable Identification

.1 Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables.

.2 Code with plastic tape or paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m intervals.

.3 Colours: 25 mm wide prime colour and 20 mm wide auxiliary colour.

Type Prime Auxiliary

up to 250 V Yellow

up to 600 V Yellow Green

up to 5 kV Yellow Blue

up to 15 kV Yellow Red

Telephone Green

Other Communication Systems Green Blue

Fire Alarm Red

Emergency Voice Red Blue

Other Security Systems Red Yellow

2.9 Finishes

.1 Shop finish metal enclosure surfaces by application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finish enamel.

.1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment “equipment green” finish.



.2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light gray.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




3.2 Installation

.1 Do complete installation in accordance with CSA C22.1 except where specified otherwise.

.2 Do overhead and underground systems in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.3 No.1 except where specified otherwise.

3.3 Nameplates and Labels

.1 Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible after equipment is installed.

3.4 Conduit and Cable Installation

.1 Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete.

.1 Sleeves through concrete: plastic, schedule 40 steel pipe, sheet metal, sized for free passage of conduit, and protruding 50 mm.

.2 If plastic sleeves are used in fire rated walls or floors, remove before conduit installation.

.3 Install cables, conduits and fittings embedded or plastered over, close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum.

3.5 Location of Outlets

.1 Locate outlets in accordance with Section 26 05 32 - Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

.2 Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes.

.3 Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm, and information is given before installation.

.4 Locate light switches on latch side of doors.

.1 Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch side of floor.

3.6 Mounting Heights

.1 Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise.

.2 If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.

.3 Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise.

.1 Local switches: 1400 mm.



.2 Wall receptacles:

.1 General: 300 mm.

.2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm.

.3 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175 mm.

.4 In mechanical rooms: 1400 mm.

.3 Panel boards: as required by Code or as indicated.

.4 Telephone and interphone outlets: 300 mm.

.5 Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets: 1500 mm.

.6 Fire alarm stations: 1500 mm.

.7 Fire alarm bells:2100 mm.

.8 Television outlets: 300 mm.

.9 Wall mounted speakers: 2100 mm.

.10 Clocks: 2100 mm.

.11 Door bell pushbuttons: 1500 mm.

3.7 Co-Ordination of Protective Devices

.1 Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and settings.


.1 Load Balance:

.1 Measure phase current to panel boards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes.

.2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment. Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS, phase and neutral currents on panel boards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

.2 Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.

.1 Power [distribution] [generation] system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing.

.2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels.

.3 Lighting and its control.

.4 Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable.

.5 Systems: fire alarm and communications.

.6 Insulation resistance testing:

.1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument.

.2 Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument.

.3 Check resistance to ground before energizing.



.3 Carry out tests in presence of Consultant.

.4 Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project.


.1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS.


3.9 System Startup

.1 Instruct operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems, system equipment and components.

.2 Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.

.3 Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with aspects of its care and operation.

3.10 Cleaning





General Electrical Provisions Section 26 05 01 Page 1 of 9


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 The specifications of Section 26 05 01 shall apply to and govern the work of Divisions 26, 27 and 28 and shall be read as an integral part of each Section.

.2 The Electrical Drawings and these Specifications are complementary to each other and each forms a part of this contract. In the event of discrepancies between Drawings and Specifications, the more restrictive conditions shall apply unless a written clarification is obtained from the Consultant.

.3 Misinterpretation of any requirement of the Drawings or Specifications will not relieve this Division of responsibility to complete the work. If in doubt, contact the Consultant for written clarification. If clarification is not sought the Consultant’s decision shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

.4 Related Work

.1 Submittals Section 26 05 02


.1 Supply all labour, tools, equipment, materials and transportation required for the installation and proper operation of the complete systems as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or as reasonably inferable from both.

.2 Work to be Supplied and Installed

.3 The work of this Division includes, but is not limited to supply and installation of the following systems:

.1 Secondary Distribution Emergency Lighting

.2 Wiring Devices Fire Alarm System

.3 Communication Systems Wiring for Other Trades

.4 Renovations and Removal of Existing Equipment

1.3 References

.1 The Specifications for the Divisions as listed below shall govern the work of all Sections of this Division.

.1 Existing Conditions Division 02 (EXISTING CONDITIONS)

.2 Mechanical Division 21 (FIRE SUPPRESSION)

.3 Mechanical Division 22 (PLUMBING)

.4 Mechanical Division 23 (HVAC)

1.4 Workmanship

.1 Only first-class workmanship by skilled electricians will be accepted, not only with regards to durability, and safety, but also with regard to its neatness of installation, and overall accessibility. Present a neat and clean installation on completion to the satisfaction of the Consultant. Any unsatisfactory workmanship shall be replaced at no extra cost.

.2 Employ a competent foreman to supervise the work.

.3 Employ qualified and experienced trades people employed to perform specific work such as installation or testing of specific systems including fire alarm systems, special systems, etc.

1.5 Drawings



.1 Drawings, which accompany these specifications, are diagrammatic and show the power distribution, number and general location of the electrical equipment, outlets and required circuiting. They do not show all structural and mechanical details, and are not intended to be shop or working drawings.

.2 Do not scale drawings but use only dimensions, which are shown. Where exact building dimensions and details are required, use only figured dimensions on the Architectural or Structural Drawings or job site dimensions.

.3 Make alterations to device and equipment locations as required; co-ordinate with other trades at no extra cost.

.4 No deviations from the Drawings or Specifications will be permitted without written authorization from the Consultant.

1.6 Record & Shop Drawings

.1 Provide record drawings and shop drawings in accordance with Section 26 05 03, Submittals.

1.7 Permits and Fees

.1 Obtain and pay for all permits and fees required for the execution and inspection of the electrical work and pay all charges incidental to such permits.

.2 The contract documents have been approved by ESA. The successful Electrical Contractor shall request the file number after being awarded the project, prior to submission for permit.

.3 Arrange and pay for any special inspection of equipment specified if and when required.

.4 On completion of the electrical work, obtain and submit to the Consultant the Electrical Safety Authority Final Unconditional Inspection certificate together with the maintenance manuals.

1.8 Rules and Regulations

.1 Provide all materials and installation in accordance with the latest editions of the Canadian Electrical Code, Ontario Electrical Safety Code, CSA Standards and Bulletins, the Electrical Safety Authority Department Special Inspection, The Ontario Fire Marshal and any other more restrictive requirements of all applicable Municipal and Provincial Codes and Regulations.

.2 The Contract Drawings show the minimum standard acceptable regardless of any lesser standards set by any Codes or Regulations having jurisdiction.

1.9 Co-Operation of Trades

.1 Read Specifications and Drawings of other trades and conform with their requirements before proceeding with any work specified in this Division related to the other trades.

.2 Co-operate with all other trades on the job, so that all equipment can be satisfactorily installed, and so that no delay is caused to any other trade.

1.10 Co-Operation of Trades – Life Safety and Fire Protection Systems

.1 All life safety systems and fire protection systems and their components shall be verified to ensure that they are functioning according to the intent of their design.

.2 The life safety systems and fire protection systems and their components shall include but not be limited to; fire alarm systems, sprinkler system, standpipe systems, smoke control, ventilation, pressurization, door hold-open devices, elevator recalls, smoke and fire shutters and dampers, emergency power, emergency lighting, etc.

.3 Where life safety and fire protection systems are installed, the commissioning of these integrated systems shall also be performed as a whole to ensure proper operation and



inter-relationship between the systems. The commissioning of these integrated systems as a whole shall be the responsibility of Division 26. Refer to Fire Alarm Systems Section 28 31 00.

1.11 Examinations

.1 Before submitting tenders, carefully examine the Architectural, Structural, Electrical and Mechanical Drawings and all Specifications having a bearing on the work of this Division. Visit the site of the building and thoroughly ascertain that the work of this Division can be carried out satisfactorily without any changes to the Drawings or Specifications. No extras will be allowed for anything, which would have been revealed in the course of such an examination.

.2 Examine the proposed locations of equipment and fixtures of other trades and report any defects or interference with the work of this Division in writing to the Consultant. Affected work shall not commence until any discrepancies adversely affecting the work of this Division are remedied.

.3 Fully understand the function of the systems described in this Division. Have no doubt as to the extent of the systems and/or materials and labour required. Contact the Consultant for clarification. No extras will be allowed to complete systems inadequately installed or not fully operational.

1.12 Abbreviations & Definitions

.1 Abbreviations used on Electrical Drawings and in this Division are generally listed below:

.1 OBC Ontario Building Code

.2 CSA Canadian Standards Association

.3 FHP Fractional Horse Power

.4 C Conduit

.5 E.C. Empty Conduit

.6 Trans. Transformer

.7 F @ Fused at

.8 SP (DP) Single Pole (Double Pole)

.9 3P Three Pole

.10 SNSolid Neutral

.11 Disc. Sw Disconnect Switch

.12 LP Lighting Panel

.13 PP Power Panel

.14 DP Distribution Panel

.15 WP Weatherproof

.16 MH Mounting Height

.17 OESC Ontario Electrical Safety Code

.18 NFPA National Fire Protection Association

.19 NFC National Fire Code

.20 EEMAC Electrical Equipment Manufacturer's Association of Canada

.21 ANSI American National Standards Institute



.22 ULC Underwriter Laboratories of Canada

.23 RT Rain Tight

.24 FA Fire Alarm

.25 EXP Explosion Proof

.2 Wherever the words "approved", "satisfactory", "directed", "permitted", "inspected", "instructed", "required", "submit", "order", or similar words or phrases are used in the specification, it shall be understood, unless the context implies otherwise, that the words "by (to) the Consultant" follows.

.3 Wherever the word "provide" is used in this specification or on the drawings, it shall be understood, unless the context implies otherwise, that it is equivalent to "supply and install".

1.13 Electrical Extras and Credits

.1 Changes to the contract requiring additions to or deletions from the work of this Division shall be carried out upon written request of the Consultant. Extras to the contract or credits shallbe submitted with a complete cost breakdown as follows:

.1 Materials, quantities and unit prices for all equipment required or deleted.

.2 Unit man hours.

.3 Total material cost.

.4 Total man hours.

.5 Hourly rate. (Refer to Supplementary Conditions and General Contract).

.6 Total overhead and profit. (Refer to Supplementary Conditions and General Contract).

.2 Equipment and material costs shall be accepted at net costs only.

.3 Invoices, time sheets, and other evidence of costs shall be provided upon request by the Consultant.

.4 Prices not submitted in this format will not be accepted.

1.14 Operating and Maintenance Manuals

.1 Submit operating and maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 26 05 02, Submittals.

1.15 Guarantee

.1 Upon completion of the work of this Division and prior to final payment, provide to the owner a written guarantee that for one year from the date of acceptance, any defect in workmanship or materials will be corrected at no cost to the Owner except where Owner misuse, neglect or abnormal conditions have caused the defect.

.2 This guarantee shall not supersede any longer Guarantee furnished by a manufacturer.

1.16 Inspection

.1 All work and materials covered by these Specifications shall be subject to inspection at any time, by the Consultant or the Owner's Representative.

.2 If the Consultant or Owner's representative finds that any material or workmanship does not conform with these specifications undertake to correct such workmanship within 5 days of notification by the Consultant.

1.17 Final Inspection



.1 Notify the Consultant when the final inspection of the work shall be performed. Defects or deficiencies found during this inspection shall be corrected to the satisfaction of the Consultant before final payment is made.

1.18 Damage to Other Work

.1 This Trade shall be responsible for all damages to his own work or the work of other trades caused by the execution of work by this Division.

.2 Provide protective covers on or around equipment and materials to prevent damage during construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials and Equipment

.1 All materials and equipment shall be new and conform to CSA Standards. All materials and equipment shall be approved for their intended use by the authority having jurisdiction.

.2 Material or equipment specified by technical description shall be provided with the best commercial qualities obtainable for the purposes described.

.3 Maintain uniformity of manufacturer, type, and style, within a particular group of equipment or class or type of fixture.

.4 Requests for extra money, time or equipment substitution due to late ordering of equipment will not receive any consideration.

.5 The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products. Any listed manufacturers must meet the specifications in their entirety.

2.2 Alternates and Substitutions

.1 Whenever a substitute or alternate product is proposed for use, this Contractor shall guarantee that such proposed substitutes or alternates will not adversely affect the requirements allocated on the drawings for the material or item or plant or equipment specified. He shall agree to bear any additional expense incurred due to the use of proposed substitutes or alternates, particularly in connection with any required changes in the work of any other division.

.2 Requests for approval shall be accompanied by complete specifications for the equipment, showing dimensions, ratings, photometrics, cost reductions, etc.

.3 No substitutions or alternates will be allowed after tender close.

.4 Any equipment installed, without the Consultant's written approval, shall be removed and the correct equipment installed at no extra cost.

.5 In the event the approved alternate equipment is not available for any reason the specified equipment shall be installed.

.6 When proposing an alternative product make all affected parties aware of any structural, architectural, mechanical, or electrical design changes necessary to accommodate the alternative product. The contractor is responsible for paying all costs incurred, which may result from the acceptance of the alternative. Any cost savings anticipated must include all additional costs incurred for any changes to the original design.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 The location of any panels, equipment, outlet, raceway and wiring may be changed by the Consultant if the new location is within a limit of 3 metres (10’) radius of the original location. Provide changes without extra cost if requested before installation.



.2 Do not install wall-mounted equipment at locations where built-in furniture or other equipment is to be installed. In cases of conflict, install equipment above the built-in furniture and clear the trim by approximately 150 mm (6") unless otherwise instructed by the Consultant.

.3 Arrange for openings in the walls and floors for transportation and installation of equipment. Extra charges for cutting and making good of walls or floors for the work will not be accepted.

.4 Adjust phase loading on all panels and switchgear so as not to exceed a 10% phase imbalance of current at operating load conditions.

.5 Megger test all feeders prior to energizing. Submit test results in maintenance manuals.

.6 Measure voltage at all feeder supply connectors and at the load connections. Tests to be conducted at normal operating conditions. Submit test results in maintenance manuals.

3.2 Storage of Materials

.1 Provide proper facilities for a workshop, tool shop, office space and protection of materials and equipment. Coordinate location with General Contractor.

.2 Store all material, equipment, panels, luminaires, etc. in a dry, clean place and cover as necessary to preserve factory finish.

3.3 Waste and Surplus Materials

.1 Keep the premises free of accumulation of waste and surplus materials.

.2 On completion of the contract, this Division shall remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus material, scrap and debris resulting from the work of this Division from the site.

.3 Clean all equipment such as panel boxes, luminaires, switches receptacles, etc., of all dirt, dust and paint at the time of final acceptance of the work.

3.4 Sleeves, Holes and Patching

.1 Supply and set all necessary sleeves for this contract prior to pouring of concrete. There will be no allowance for holes or sleeves missed during initial construction.

.2 Holes through concrete structural members shall be schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves. Holes through exterior walls and/or roof are to be properly flashed and made weatherproof. All holes through concrete or steel structural members shall be approved by the Structural Consultant.

.3 All cutting, patching, sleeves and grouting is to be done by fully qualified craftsmen of that respective trade. All costs for cutting and patching required by this Division are to be included in the tender.

.4 All cutting, patching, sleeving, etc. shall be carried out under the direct supervision of the General Contractor, and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

3.5 Grounding and Testing

.1 Provide a complete grounding system throughout All grounds are not shown on the drawings.

.2 Under this Section, test all equipment and wiring supplied and installed in this contract at any time requested by the Consultant. Provide all meters materials and labour to carry out these tests. All readings shall conform to the requirements of the Local and Provincial codes which apply to this Specification.

.3 Test May Include:



.1 Voltage reading on near full load at main service switch, distribution panel feeders, transformer feeders, and load connection points for Mechanical & Electrical equipment.

.2 Amperage readings of service and each panel feeder.

.3 Ground fault insulation resistance.

.4 Continuity of metal raceways.

.5 Operation of each piece of equipment and system for correct function.

.4 Written records of the tests performed indicating date of test, equipment name, purpose of test, device used for testing and measured results. Include test results in maintenance manuals.

3.6 Corrosion, Protection & Touch-Up

.1 Provide prime and paint finish on exterior ferrous metal.

.2 All priming shall be free of runs or drips. Scratches, chipped or rough items will not be accepted. Sand smooth and refinish.

.3 All shop painted equipment damaged in transit or during installation shall be touched-up to match existing finishes.

.4 Provide protection of installed materials from abuse and damage during construction. Provide all necessary protective coatings or shields to prevent damage to installed equipment until final acceptance by the Owner.


.1 Identify all equipment such as panels, cabinets, contactors, starters, disconnect switches, transformers, switchgear with labels as specified below.

.2 Labels shall be 3 mm (1/8") thick lamacoid plates, black with 6 mm (1/4") white lettering, mechanically fastened to the equipment.

.3 Mount nameplates on the top inside cover on all panels and on the front cover of equipment for the respective system.

.4 The wording on these plates shall conform generally with that used in these Specifications and on the Drawings. All fused disconnects to include size and type of fusing on equipment name plate. All panels to have mains voltage indicated. Panel nameplates to indicate from where and which distribution they are fed from.

.5 Mechanically fasten nameplates directly on the equipment. For small size equipment install nameplates on the wall above or under equipment.

.6 Colour code all conduits and metallic sheathed cables according to the following standards:

.1 Colour to be min. 25 mm (1") band of plastic tape or spray bomb.

.2 Colour code at entrance/exit to wall, ceiling, or floor and minimum 15 m (50') intervals.

.3 Systems colour code for conduits, metallic cables, and low voltage wiring sheath.

.1 Green – Lighting Controls Red - Fire Alarm

.2 Blue – Communications/Data

.3 Orange - Auxiliary Power.

.7 Colour code conductors as follows:

.1 Phase A - Red

.2 Phase B - Black



.3 Phase C - Blue

.4 Neutral - White

.5 Ground - Green

.8 The junction boxes of all power and lighting systems shall be labelled indicating circuits contained within.

.9 Circuit Identification:

.1 Provide p-touch labelling, 6mm (1/4”) tape, white with black lettering with receptacle circuit number. Place one on front of coverplate and one inside box.

3.8 Mounting and Mounting Heights

.1 Provide all supports and bases for the work of this trade. Every conduit run shall have at least one support. Only approved conduit supports shall be used.

.2 Support every outlet box, junction box, panel tub, etc. independent of conduits running to it.

.3 No piece of equipment shall be mounted on a wall or panel with the underside of the equipment less than 460 mm (18") above the floor except for equipment over 1650 mm (5'-6") high which shall be mounted with the top side of the equipment 2100 mm (7'-0") above the floor or as directed in the field.

.4 Panels for mounting of equipment shall consist of #10-gauge steel on an angle iron frame. The complete panel is to be thoroughly cleaned of all dirt, rust and loose material and be given two coats of grey enamel before mounting any equipment.

.5 In areas of combustible construction mount service box and panelboards on spacers to provide 50 mm (2") ventilated distance between back of the panel and the backboard.

.6 Install switches, receptacles, outlets, etc., on one common centre line, one above the other, when shown on the drawings in a grouping.

.7 Dimensions refer to the centre line of equipment above the finished floor unless otherwise shown or specified. Mounting heights in stairwells refer to the floor, landing or stair tread directly below the equipment.

.8 Install equipment at heights as directed on legend:

.1 Power and LightingStandard

.1 Circuit Breaker Panels72" (1830 MM) to top

.2 Individual Safety Switches60" (1520 MM) O/C

.3 Individual Motor Control60" (1520 MM) O/C

.4 Convenience Receptacles 18" (460 MM) O/C

.5 Above Counter Receptacles42" (1070 MM) O/C

.6 Above Desk Receptacles 36" (915 MM) O/C

.7 Light Switches39" (1000 MM) O/C

.8 Thermostat Outlets47" (1200 MM) O/C

.2 Fire Alarm System

.1 Manual Pull Stations47" (1200 MM) O/C

.2 Signal Devices90" (2280 MM) O/C

.3 End of Line Resistors60" (1520 MM) O/C

.3 Communication System



.1 Telephone Cord Set 18" (460 MM) O/C

.2 Telephone Wall Set63" (1600 MM) O/C


Submittals Section 26 05 02 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Shop drawings and product data

.2 Working/Interference drawings

.3 As-built drawings

.4 Operating and maintenance manuals including extended warranties.

.5 Related Work


.2 Fire Stopping Section 26 05 04

.3 Lighting Controls Section 26 09 43

.4 Distribution Transformers Section 26 12 16

.5 Switchboard and Distribution Panels Section 26 24 13

.6 Panelboards Section 26 24 16

.7 Surge Protection Device Section 26 43 00

.8 Lighting Section 26 51 00

.9 Emergency Lighting Section 26 52 00

.10 Exit Signs Section 26 53 00

.11 Telecommunications Cabling Section 27 15 00

.12 Public Address and Assistive Listening Section 27 51 16

.13 GPS Wireless Clock System Section 27 53 13

.14 Intrusion System Section 28 16 13

.15 Fire Alarm System Section 28 31 00

1.2 Administrative

.1 Submit to Consultant submittals listed for review. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as to not cause delay in the construction schedule. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default is allowed.

.2 Work affected by the submittal not to proceed until the review is complete unless an approval is obtained from the Consultant.

.3 Review submittals prior to submission to the Consultant. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, and that each submittal has been checked and coordinated with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

1.3 Shop Drawings

.1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with the General Requirements of Division 1 and as required in various sections of these specifications and on the drawings.

.2 Shop drawings to be submitted with a cover sheet(s) on the Contractor's letterhead listing the following information:

.1 Project:

.2 Owner/Client:



.3 Architect:

.4 Mechanical/Electrical Consultant:

.5 General Contractor:

.6 Electrical Contractor:

.7 Supplier

.8 Specification Section

.9 Materials or Equipment submitted

.10 Include space for review stamps by Consultant, General Contractor and Electrical Contractor.

.3 Prepare and submit for review, where specified, shown or considered necessary by the Consultant, shop drawings showing details of work as follows:

.1 Fabrication and erection dimension.

.2 Sections, arrangements and details which indicate complete construction as well as interconnections with other work.

.3 Location and type of anchors and fastenings.

.4 Materials including gauges, thickness, sizes and finishes.

.5 Descriptive names of equipment and mechanical and electrical characteristics when applicable.

.6 Data verifying that superimposed loads will not affect function, appearance, and safety of work shown on shop drawings as well as other work interconnected.

.4 Submit shop drawings, unless otherwise specified in form of electronic copies.

.5 Manufacturer's printed data sheets for standard items are acceptable providing pertinent characteristics are identified and relate to specified items. Submit eight (8) copies of data sheets except where specified otherwise.

.6 Check shop drawings and data sheets, before submission as follows:

.1 Against contract documents and other applicable shop drawings, to ensure that work adjacent to and affecting other work is accurately detailed.

.2 To ensure that work shown on shop drawings conforms to requirements of Contract Documents.

.3 Enclose notice in writing of any variations from requirements of Contract Documents.

.7 Indicate on shop drawings that they have been checked by applying stamp "checked and certified correct for construction", including date and Contractor's signature. Drawings and details submitted without such stamp or whenever it is evident that drawings have not been checked (despite approval stamp) will not be reviewed and will be returned to Contractor.

.8 The Consultant's review of shop drawings and data sheets pertain to general design only. Errors in dimensions, quantities or interference will be marked if noticed, but this will not in any way relieve Contractor from his responsibility to complete work as shown and specified.

.9 All shop drawings are to be submitted in Imperial dimensions.

.10 Shop drawings are to be returned with "Reviewed", "Revised as noted" or "Revise and Submit".

.1 "Reviewed" - Drawings conform with the general design concept.



.2 "Revised as noted" - Drawings conform with the general design concept subject to the corrections noted. Drawings to be corrected and resubmitted for final review and incorporation into maintenance manuals. Such submission is not to hold up manufacture.

.3 "Revise and Resubmit" - Drawings are rejected and manufacture of this equipment is not to proceed. Drawings are to be resubmitted with required corrections on equipment.

1.4 Working/Interference Drawings

.1 Before commencing any work, the Contractor is to prepare working/interference drawings, to ensure that all components, including any components of other divisions, are to be properly accommodated within the spaces provided, ensuring all clearances required by jurisdictional authorities and for proper maintenance are indicated and maintained.

.2 Prepare drawings to indicate co-ordination and method of installation of a system with other systems where their relationship is critical. Ensure all details of equipment, apparatus and connections are co-ordinated.

.3 As an alternative to preparing interference drawings, regularly scheduled meetings on site with all associated trades are to be conducted as necessary but not less than one per week.

.4 Failure to co-ordinate with all other trades could result in reworking of installed equipment, conduit or wiring at the discretion of the Consultant. Any reworking to accommodate the installation of other trades to be performed at no extra cost.

1.5 As-Built Drawings

.1 As-built drawings are to be maintained in accordance with the general requirements of Division 1.

.2 The Consultant is to provide this Division with an extra set of white prints on which to show clearly in red ink, as the job progresses, all changes and deviations from the plans, including all changes as part of change orders, site instructions or site conditions.

.3 Record location of concealed electrical services and components. Dimension and reference all concealed and buried electrical services from visible and accessible permanent features of structure.

.4 Maintain as-built drawings on site for periodic review by Consultant.

.5 In accordance with the Commissioning Schedule Plan, submit a complete set of record drawings, marked “as-built” and dated.

1.6 Maintenance Data and Operating Instructions

.1 Submit one (1) copy and one (1) CD or USB of Operation and Maintenance Manual individually bound in suitable sized hard backed three-ring binders.

.2 Front cover of each binder to be suitably lettered as follows:

.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR

.1 (Project Name)

.2 (Owners Name)

.3 (Date)

.3 Provide plastic tab indices for all sections of the manual, provide separate sections for each major piece of equipment and for groups of smaller products.

.4 Provide master index at the beginning of each binder indicating all items included in each section.



.5 Provide list of names, addresses and telephone numbers of equipment suppliers, Installing Contractors, General Contractors, Architect and Consulting Engineer.

.6 Provide final review shop drawings of each manufactured item in addition to the operating and maintenance instructions.

.7 Operating instructions to include:

.1 General description of each electrical system.

.2 Step by step procedure to follow in commissioning each piece of equipment.

.3 Schematic control diagrams for each separate system.

.4 Drawings of each control panel identifying all components on the panels and their function.

.5 All electrical equipment wiring diagrams.

.8 Maintenance instructions are to include:

.1 Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each item of electrical equipment installed under this Division. Instructions are to include installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, name of supplier and maintenance instructions.

.2 Summary list of each item of electrical equipment requiring maintenance, indicating the name of the equipment item, maintenance required and frequency of maintenance.

.3 Copies of all panel directories.

.9 Provide written warranty on the Contractor's letterhead addressed to the Owner, copied to the General Contractor.

1.7 Extended Warranties

.1 The contractor is to submit extended warranties for specific materials and/or work specified in their respective sections.

.2 Extended warranties are to be issued on the General Contractor's letterhead, under seal, and issued in the name of the owner.




PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Conform to General Electrical Provisions, Section 26 05 01 as applicable.

.3 Related Work


1.2 Scope of Work


.1 Raceways

.2 Conductors

.3 Armoured Cable

.4 Wire Connections and Devices

.5 Outlet Boxes

.6 Pull and Junction Boxes

.7 Cabinets

.8 Supporting Devices

.9 Backboards

.10 Access Panels

.11 Housekeeping Pads

.12 Wiring Devices and Cover plates

.13 Contactors

.14 Motor Starters

.15 Motor and Circuit Disconnects

.16 Fuses


.1 Install all equipment to the minimum of Ontario Electrical Safety Code standards, unless stricter standards are indicated on the drawings or in this specification. In all situations, the more restrictive standard of material and installation shall apply.

1.4 References

.1 CSA Standards

.1 C22.2 No. 62 Surface Raceways and Lighting Fixture Raceways and Fittings.

.2 C22.2 No. 83 Electrical Metallic Tubing.

.3 C22.2 No. 211.2 Rigid PVC Conduit.

.4 C22.2 No. 211.3 Rigid Fibreglass Reinforced Epoxy (RE) Conduit and Associated Fittings.

.5 CAN3-C21.2 Control Cable for Low Energy Circuits.



.6 C22.2 No. 35 Extra-Low-Voltage Control Circuit Cables, Low-Energy Control Cable, Extra-Low-Voltage Control Cables.

.7 C22.2 No. 38 Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables.

.8 C22.2 No. 48 Nonmetallic Sheathed Cable.

.9 C22.2 No. 51 Armored Cables.

.10 C22.2 No. 75 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables.

.11 C68.3 Power Cables with Thermoset Insulation.

.12 C22.2 No. 227.1 Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.

.13 C22.2 No. 227.2 Flexible Liquid-Tight Nonmetallic Conduit.

.14 C22.2 No. 227.3 Flexible Nonmetallic Tubing.

.15 C22.2 No. 56 Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Metal Conduit.

.16 C22.2 No. 45 Rigid Metal Conduit.

.17 C22.2 No. 85 Rigid PVC Boxes and Fittings.

.18 C22.2 No. 18 Outlet boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

.19 C22.2 No. 40 Cutout, Junction and Pull Boxes.

.20 C22.2 No. 65 Wire Connectors.

.21 C22.2 No. 4 Enclosed Switches

.22 C22.2 No. 111 General Use Switches

.23 C22.2 No. 55 Specialty Use Switches

.24 C22.2 No. 106 HRC Fuses

.25 C22.2 No. 248 Low-Voltage Fuses

1.5 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings for the following pieces of equipment:

.1 Fire Rated Access Panels

.2 Wiring Devices and Coverplates

.3 Contactors

.4 Time Switches

.5 Motor Starters

.6 Motor and Circuit Disconnects

.7 Fuses

.2 Submit to the Engineer, in writing, a schedule of proposed feeders to be used if different than those specified on the drawings or in this specification.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 General

.1 Where an alternate manufacturer is proposed for use, the proposed item must meet all qualifications of the specification.

.2 All materials/equipment of similar type shall be of one manufacturer.

2.2 Raceways



.1 Provide raceway type as detailed on drawings. Where type is not specified, raceways shall be provided in accordance with Section 12 of the Ontario Electrical Safety Code.

.2 Provide all empty raceways and raceway systems complete with outlet boxes, coverplates, nylon fish wire, bushings, caps, etc.

.3 Size all raceways to suit the number and type of conductors and of sufficient size to permit easy removal of conductors at any time. Where raceway sizes are shown on the drawings, these sizes are minimum and in no case shall they be reduced.

.4 Colour code surface and exposed parts of raceways and all conduits as specified in Section 26 05 01.

.5 Where conduits cross expansion joints of building, provide expansion joints for conduit c/w grounding straps.

.6 All raceways shall be installed parallel to building lines.

2.3 Conductors

.1 Use R-90, RW-90, or T90 copper conductor building wires rated at 600 Volt, X-Link insulation.

.2 Where a particular type of insulation is specified, or shown, that type of wire shall be used.

.3 Use minimum # 12 copper wire unless otherwise specified. Minimum wire size is #10 for runs greater than 25m (82').

.4 All conductors shall be colour coded consistent with the OESC, Section 4-038.

.5 Conductors up to and including # 10 shall be solid copper. Larger conductors shall be stranded.

.6 Size conductors for a maximum of 3% voltage drop from the supplying panel to the farthest outlet in the circuit.

.7 All joints must be approved solderless pressure connectors or insulated crimped connections terminated in boxes or fittings of adequate size.

.8 Conductors shall be copper.

2.4 Armoured Cable

.1 Armored cable when used for final drops to lighting fixtures shall not exceed 3m (10’) in length.

.2 AC-90 shall be allowed for branch circuit wiring in stud walls but shall not exceed 3m (10’) in length exposed in ceiling.

2.5 Wire Connections and Devices

.1 Install wire connectors as per Manufacturer and OESC requirements.

2.6 Outlet Boxes

.1 Use outlet boxes to suit device and OESC requirements.

.2 Multiple-gang boxes shall be of one-piece construction. Sectional boxes will not be permitted.

2.7 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes

.1 Size pull boxes and junction boxes for the dimensions and cubic inch capacity as required by the OESC. for the application or as shown on the drawings.

.2 Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be constructed of code gauge steel, primed and painted, complete with screw-on or hinged covers.



2.8 Cabinets - Equipment Enclosures

.1 Cabinets to be code gauge steel, prime coated, c/w locking door flush lock and latch assembly and concealed flush hinges.

2.9 Supporting Devices

.1 Every conduit or cable shall have at least one support. Only approved conduit supports will be accepted. Perforated pipe straps, tie wrap or wood support for conduits or outlet boxes etc., will not be accepted.

.2 Single conduit runs: Galvanized conduit straps, ring bolt type hangers or P.V.C. saddles.

.3 Horizontal multiple raceways run: Conduit rack with minimum 25 percent spare capacity. Trapeze style hanger on threaded rod.

.4 Vertical multiple raceway runs: Electrical strut fastened to structure.

2.10 Backboards

.1 All backboards to be 19 mm, good one side, fir plywood prime painted white and finish painted with two coats of ANSI #61 grey enamel paint.

.2 Size of backboard to be as indicated on drawings but in no case shall the backboard be less than 150 mm (6") larger in length and width than the piece of equipment which it supports.

2.11 Access Panels

.1 Sheet steel construction with factory applied prime coat of paint. Positive latch system.

.2 Minimum 18-gauge steel.

.3 Provide hinged doors for all access panels with a size of 450mm x 450mm (18" x 18") or larger.

.4 Where the access door is located in a fire rated assembly or a fire separation having a fire resistance rating, provide access doors which are ULC listed for the required fire resistance rating allowed by the Ontario Building Code.

2.12 Housekeeping Pads

.1 Provide 100mm (4") high concrete housekeeping pads under all floor mounted electrical equipment (switchgear, transformers, motor control centres, etc.).

2.13 Wiring Devices and Coverplates

.1 General

.1 Colour of devices and coverplates (other than stainless) to be confirmed by Architect.

.2 Manufacturers: Hubbell, Bryant, Pass & Seymour, Leviton.

.3 All devices to be of the same manufacturer throughout.

.2 Switches

.1 All switches shall be extra heavy-duty industrial grade, rated for 15A at 120/277 or 347V.

.2 Switches to be single pole, 3-way or 4-way, as indicated on the drawings.

.3 All switches to be of the same manufacturer throughout.

.3 Receptacles

.1 Duplex Receptacles

.1 Specification grade, rated 15A, 125VAC, U-ground type, parallel blade, CSA 5-15R configuration.



.2 Specification grade, rated 20A, 125VAC, U-ground type, parallel blade, CSA 5-20RA configuration.

.2 Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle

.1 Rated 15A, 125VAC, U-grounded type, Class A requirement, trip level 4- 6 mA, parallel blade, with test and reset switches, CSA 5-15R configuration.

.2 Rated 20A, 125VAC, U-grounded type, Class A requirement, trip level 4- 6 mA, parallel blade, with test and reset switches, CSA 5-20RA configuration.

.3 Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor Receptacle

.1 Rated 15A, 125V, U-ground type parallel blade, CSA 5-15R configuration with the following suppression characteristics:

.1 80 joules of energy absorption and 6500 Amps current handling capability in each of three modes

.2 Clamping voltage of 150V rms (212 peak)

.3 Less than 1 nanosecond response time,

.4 Potted electronic components, and RFI and EMI noise filters,

.5 Pass & Seymour #6262 series or equivalent.

.4 Colour of receptacles to be determined by Architect.

.4 Cover plates

.1 Cover plates to be:

.1 In service areas - pressed galvanized.

.2 In office (finished) areas - stainless steel.

.3 In wet locations - grey, hinged gasketed Lexan, while in use.

2.14 Contactors

.1 Manufacturers: Cutler Hammer, Allen Bradley, Asco Electric, Schneider Electric.

.2 Manual Contactors:

.1 c/w pilot light to indicate the on state.

.2 EEMAC rated enclosures for applicable mounting location.

.3 Rated 115/230 volts.

.4 Contacts rated as described on the drawings.

.5 Number of poles as required for load to be controlled.

.3 AC Magnetic Contactors for Automatic Control of Loads:

.1 Voltage of coil to match operating voltage described on the drawings.

.2 EEMAC rated enclosures for applicable mounting location.

.3 Rated 115/230 volts.

.4 Contacts rated as described on the drawings.

.5 Number of poles as required for load to be controlled.

.4 Enclosures shall be general purpose EEMAC type 1 surface mounted unless specified or shown otherwise on the drawings. Use EEMAC type 3R in weatherproof applications.

.5 All contactors shall be one manufacturer.



2.15 Motor Starters

.1 Manufacturers: Allen Bradley, Schneider Electric, Cutler Hammer, Siemens.

.2 All starters shall be EEMAC rated.

.3 Manual Starters: Single phase, single and two pole - c/w pilot light as required, thermal overloads, EEMAC rated enclosures where applicable. Rated 115/230 volts. Sized as required for motor load to be controlled.

.4 AC Magnetic Starters for Automatic Control of Single Phase and Three Phase Motor Loads:

.1 Operating voltage of coil to match voltage of operating system.

.2 Provide one set of auxiliary N/O and N/C contacts.

.3 Provide control transformer as required complete with primary fusing (HRC type).

.4 Provide H.O.A. switching as noted.

.5 Provide pilot light as indicated in motor schedule.

.6 Provide overload relays for each line voltage connection and heater elements to match nameplate FLA of motor controlled.

.5 AC Combination Magnetic Starters for Automatic Control of Single Phase and 3 Phase Loads:

.1 Fusible 3 pole, load break disconnects style switch c/w HRC time delay fuses.

.2 Operating switch c/w lock off facility and rotary action.

.3 Provide starter features as in paragraph .3.

.6 Enclosures shall be general purpose EEMAC type 1 surface mounted unless specified or shown otherwise on the drawings. Use EEMAC type 3R in weatherproof applications.

.7 All control wiring and raceways for control of equipment supplied by Division 23 unless noted otherwise on drawings.

2.16 Motor and Circuit Disconnects

.1 General Requirements

.1 Where more than one manufacturer is named for an item, proposed item must meet all qualifications of the specification.

.2 All materials of similar type shall be of one manufacturer.

.3 Acceptable Manufacturers: Arrow Hart, Bryant, Cutler Hammer, Schneider Electric, Siemens.

.2 Disconnect Switches

.1 This section governs local disconnect switches to be located adjacent to, or in close proximity to motorized equipment.

.2 Motor less than 1 H.P.: Fractional horse power motors less than 1/4 h.p. use rated general purpose switches; 1/4 h.p. or greater use h.p. rated, single throw, toggle, disconnect switches in rated enclosure.

.3 Motors 1 H.P. or larger: Provide h.p. rated disconnect switches to interrupt all the line voltage supply lines to the motor. Provide rated enclosures. Disconnect shall be single throw design, quick make, quick break, with reinforced fuse caps where required. Provide lock-off feature.

.3 Circuit Disconnects



.1 This section governs the use of disconnects for the purpose of local isolation switches for non-motorized electrical equipment and feeder circuits.

.2 Size disconnect switches for isolation and feeder protection as required by the connected load conditions or as indicated on the drawings. The more stringent of the two requirements shall govern in each situation.

.3 Provide fuse holders designed for the correct fuses as indicated on the drawings.

.4 Switch operation shall be quick make, quick break design with arc quenching facilities at the contacts.

.5 Provide sufficient size contact area for the ampere rating of the switch and the connected load to be interrupted.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General

.1 All equipment, devices and panels to be mounted plumbed-true.

.2 All equipment and panel labels to be mounted level.

.3 Provide a separate conductor and raceway system for each separate system.

3.2 Raceways

.1 All raceways to be installed in concrete between floor levels must be reviewed with and approved by the Structural Engineer prior to installation. Where, in the opinion of the Structural Engineer, it is not acceptable to install raceways in concrete between floor levels, raceways shall be installed concealed in walls, ceilings etc.

.2 Empty ducts shall be capped at both ends. Provide 10 mm (3/8") nylon fish wire in each duct.

.3 Locate raceways at least 150 mm (6") clear of steam pipe, flues and similar items and do not install in slab under boilers, or like equipment.

.4 All conduit and raceways to be concealed in all finished areas. Exposed raceways and conduit are permitted only in-service areas, utility rooms such as Mechanical and Electrical Rooms. Where exposed, they shall be neatly grouped and installed parallel to the building lines.

.5 Conduit must be plugged and kept clean and dry during installation and be free from kinks or foreign matter.

.6 Use flexible conduit (PVC jacketed in damp or wet locations) for final connections to all vibrating or moving equipment.

.7 Conduit installed in masonry to be coordinated with masonry trade.

.8 Flexible metal conduits shall be secured at intervals not exceeding 1.5m (5'-0") and within 300 mm (1’-0”) of outlet box or fittings except for lengths not over 900 mm (3’-0”) or terminals which require flexibility.

.9 Where the Consultant determines additional support is required, this shall be provided without cost to the Owner.

.10 Where conduits are proposed to pass through structural members, written approval must be obtained from the Structural Consultant.

.11 Provide pull boxes every 30 m (100') of conduit run to facilitate installation of conductors.

.12 Provide sleeves through floors for all conduits or cables passing through the floor. Sleeves shall extend 100 mm (4") above the finished floor. Caulk and make watertight on completion



of work. Sleeves penetrating fire separations shall be caulked with an approved material to maintain the integrity of the separation.

.13 Provide acceptable pull boxes in telephone or system raceways to facilitate installation of conductors. Co-ordinate with cable installer prior to commencing work.

3.3 Armoured Cable

.1 Provide acceptable insulating bushings between armour and conductors at all terminations.

.2 Provide acceptable cable straps within 300 mm (12") of any box or fitting and at 1.5 m (5') or less intervals throughout its length.

.3 Single conductor cables shall be installed as per manufacturer’s recommendations to achieve desired rating of conductors.

.4 Support individual conductors with non-ferrous straps and hangers.

.5 Where aluminum armour comes in contact with copper piping a permanent non-metallic sleeve shall be installed.

3.4 Conductors

.1 Conductor length for parallel feeders to be identical.

.2 Wire or cable used for feeders shall be free of splices.

.3 Systems of different voltages shall be installed in separate raceways.

3.5 Wire Connections and Devices

.1 All pressure connectors shall be tightened to the manufacturers stated pressures, for the wire size used.

3.6 Outlet Boxes

.1 See Section 26 05 01, Part 3 for mounting heights.

.2 Mount all boxes, plumbed-true on vertical installations. Mount level on horizontal installations.

.3 All boxes to be installed flush mounted except in service areas, utility rooms such as Mechanical and Electrical Rooms.

.4 All boxes to be supported independent of conduits or cables.

.5 Test all boxes for continuity of ground through the box where the conduit is the grounding means.

.6 Openings in all boxes shall be punched or cut, no burning of holes allowed.

.7 Fill all K.O. openings not used with proper filler plates.

.8 Keep access doors to a minimum by locating equipment in easily accessible locations.

.9 Door swings are to be determined from the Architectural drawings for switch locations.

.10 A variation of location of 3 m (10') shall be provided without cost to the Owner if requested before installation of equipment. Confirm location prior to installation.

3.7 Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes

.1 Install pull and junction boxes so they are supported independent of raceways.

.2 Install pull boxes after every 30 m (100') of continuous raceway.

.3 Locate pull boxes above accessible ceiling spaces in inconspicuous locations wherever possible.

.4 Colour code pull boxes to indicate system involved.



3.8 Equipment Enclosures

.1 Mount all surface mounted equipment enclosures on an approved fire rated backing, or unistrut channels.

.2 All recessed enclosures shall have trim for recessed mounting.

.3 Enclosures mounted in finished areas shall be finished to match.

.4 Terminate wiring in screw type terminal blocks or strips.

3.9 Supporting Devices

.1 Install supporting devices to maintain headroom and clearances as described for conduits and conductors. Maintain a neat appearance and follow building lines where possible.

3.10 Access Panels

.1 Provide access panels where required for electrical equipment concealed in walls, partitions or floors. Location and type of access panels shall be to the Consultant's approval.

.2 Paint access panels to match surrounding decor or as directed by the Consultant on site.

3.11 Housekeeping Pads

.1 Co-ordinate installation of concrete housekeeping pads with Division 3, Concrete.

3.12 Wiring Devices and Cover plates

.1 Mount all devices plumb and level against supporting wall.

.2 Do not mount devices back to back.

3.13 Contactors

.1 Provide steel channel supports for all contactors located on walls.

.2 Locate contactors in a convenient location for accessibility and service. Wherever possible, locate in service spaces such as janitors’ closets, mechanical rooms, etc. Provide a self-supporting mounting surface where required.

.3 Provide weatherproof connections and raceways to all equipment exposed to the weather.

.4 Label each contactor to indicate the device it controls.

3.14 Motor Starters

.1 Provide steel channel supports for all starters located on walls.

.2 Locate combination starters as close as practicable to the equipment they control. Provide a self-supporting mounting surface where required.

.3 Starters located in motor control centre shall possess features as defined in this section and the motor schedule or drawings.

.4 Provide weather tight connections and raceways to all equipment exposed to the weather.

.5 Label each starter to indicate the device it controls.

3.15 Motor And Circuit Disconnects

.1 General

.1 Provide proposed wording for all electrical equipment labels to the consultant for review and approval prior to installing the labels.

.2 Disconnect Switches

.1 Provide a separate self-supporting structure to support the disconnect device where the equipment or adjacent walls are not capable of supporting the device.



.2 Use weather tight connections to all EEMAC type 3R enclosures.

.3 Label each disconnect switch to indicate the device it controls.

.3 Circuit Disconnects

.1 Mount circuit disconnects securely to the structural elements of the building. Where the structure is not present or not of sufficient capacity to support the additional weight of the electrical equipment, provide sufficient reinforcing or construct additional facilities to support the load.

.2 Use weather tight connections to all EEMAC type 3R enclosures.

.3 Label each disconnect switch to indicate the device it controls.

.4 On all fused equipment, provide a label indicating fusing size and type on the outside of the fused equipment.


Wiring for Other Trades Section 26 05 05.01 Page 1 of 1


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Conform to Division 1, General Requirements and Section 26 05 01, General Electrical Provisions.

.2 Related Work

.1 Mechanical Work Division 23



1.2 Scope of Work


.1 Complete power supply wiring and control equipment (starters, disconnects, relays, etc.) for all mechanical equipment.

.2 Complete wiring for control of mechanical systems where noted on drawings.

.3 Complete empty conduit system for low voltage controls as indicated on the Drawings, or specified herein.

.4 Supply and installation of control transformers as indicated on the Drawings and specified elsewhere, within this Division.

.2 Work Installed and Furnished by Others

.1 Installation of all mechanical equipment as specified in Division 23.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Materials specified herein are as defined in the General Electrical Provisions, Section 26 05 01, Item 2.2.

2.2 Mechanical Equipment

.1 Generally, motors will be supplied with voltages as follows:

.1 Up to and including 1/2 H.P., 120 V single phase, 60 Hz.

.2 Above 1/2 H.P., 208V or 600V, 3 phases, 60HZ.

.3 Provide wiring and equipment, etc. as shown for the respective equipment. Refer to Equipment Schedule on drawings for complete requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General

.1 Empty conduits from the thermostat, or thermostat outlet box to be stubbed above to accessible ceiling spaces, unless noted otherwise.

.2 Provide 120/24 VAC control transformers for the control system where indicated on the Drawings; 24V connection by Division 23.


Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000 V) Section 26 05 20 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18-98 (R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings.

.2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.65-03 (R2008), Wire Connectors (Tri-National Standard with UL 486A-486B and NMX-J-543-ANCE-03).

.2 Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC)

.1 EEMAC 1Y-2-[1961], Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating).

.3 National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for [wire and box connectors] and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for [wire and box connectors] for incorporation into manual.





.1 Store materials [indoors] [in dry location] [off ground] and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect wire and box connectors from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Materials

.1 Pressure type wire connectors to: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.65, with current carrying parts of cooper or aluminum alloy sized to fit copper or aluminum conductors as required.

.2 Fixture type splicing connectors to: CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.65, with current carrying parts of copper sized to fit conductors 10 AWG or less.

.3 Bushing stud connectors: to NEMA to consist of:

.1 Connector body and stud clamp for aluminum / stranded / copper / barconductors / tube / round.

.2 Clamp for stranded / round copper conductors bar.

.3 Clamp for round aluminum bar ACSR, stranded aluminum conductors.

Wire and Box Connectors (0-1000 V) Section 26 05 20 Page 2 of 2


.4 Stud clamp bolts.

.5 Bolts for copper conductors.

.6 Bolts for aluminum conductors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for wire and box connectors installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.



.3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt approval to proceed from Consultant.

3.2 Installation

.1 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and cables and:

.1 Apply coat of zinc joint compound on aluminum conductors prior to installation of connectors.

.2 Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws [with appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer]. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.65.

.3 Install fixture type connectors and tighten to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.65. Replace insulating cap.

.4 Install bushing stud connectors in accordance with NEMA.

3.3 Cleaning






Hangers and Supports for Electrical Section 26 05 29 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for hangers and supports, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.






.2 Store and protect hangers and supports from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Support Channels

.1 U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for hangers and supports installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




3.2 Installation

.1 Secure equipment to solid masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors.

.2 Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts.

.3 Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.

.4 Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before installation.

.5 Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members.

.6 Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps.

.1 One-hole steel straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller.

.2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm.

Hangers and Supports for Electrical Section 26 05 29 Page 2 of 2


.3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work.

.7 Suspended support systems.

.1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm diameter threaded rods and spring clips.

.2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm diameter threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical.

.8 For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels on centre spacing.

.9 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs.

.10 Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support.

.11 Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables.

.12 Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Consultant.

.13 Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.

3.3 Cleaning






Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings Section 26 05 32 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CSA C22.1-06, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 20th Edition.




.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 - Common Product Requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Outlet and Conduit Boxes General

.1 Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1.

.2 102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required.

.3 Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.

.4 Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices.

.5 347 V outlet boxes for 347 V switching devices.

.6 Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.

2.2 Galvanized Steel Outlet Boxes

.1 One-piece electro-galvanized construction.

.2 Single and multi-gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size [76 x 50 x 38] mm or as indicated. [102] mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster rings as required.

.3 Utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size [102 x 54 x 48] mm.

.4 102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets.

.5 Extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished walls.

2.3 Masonry Boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls.

2.4 Concrete Boxes

.1 Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required.

2.5 Floor Boxes

.1 Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing rings to suit floor finish with brushed aluminum faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate short or long ear duplex receptacles. Minimum depth: 73 mm for receptacles and communication outlets.

.2 Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes with openings drilled and tapped for 16, 21 and 27-mm conduit. Minimum size: 73 mm deep.

2.6 Conduit Boxes

Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes and Fittings Section 26 05 32 Page 2 of 2


.1 Cast aluminum FD boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of devices.

2.7 Outlet Boxes for Non-Metallic Sheathed Cable

.1 Electro-galvanized, sectional, screw ganging steel boxes, minimum size 76 x 50 x 63 mm with two double clamps to take non-metallic sheathed cables.

2.8 Fittings - General

.1 Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.

.2 Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

.3 Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits.

.4 Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.

2.9 Service Fittings

.1 'High tension' receptacle fitting made of 2-piece die-cast aluminum with brushed aluminum housing finish for two duplex receptacles. Bottom plate with two knockouts for centered or offset installation. 12 x 102 mm extension piece as indicated.

.2 Pedestal type 'low tension' fitting made of 2 pieces die cast aluminum with brushed aluminum housing finish to accommodate two amphenol jack connectors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits.

.2 Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work.

.3 For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.

.4 Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Do not install reducing washers.

.5 Vacuum clean interior of outlet boxes before installation of wiring devices.

.6 Identify systems for outlet boxes as required.


Conduit Fastening Section 26 05 34 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18-98 (R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware, A National Standard of Canada.

.2 CSA C22.2 No. 45-M1981 (R2003), Rigid Metal Conduit.

.3 CSA C22.2 No. 56-04, Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit.

.4 CSA C22.2 No. 83-M1985 (R2003), Electrical Metallic Tubing.

.5 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-M1984 (R2003), Rigid PVC (Unplasticized) Conduit.

.6 CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 227.3-05, Non-metallic Mechanical Protection Tubing (NMPT), A National Standard of Canada (February 2006).



.2 Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets.

.1 Submit cable manufacturing data.

.3 Quality assurance submittals:

.1 Test reports: submit certified test reports.



1.3 Waste Management and Disposal

.1 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Cables and Reels

.1 Provide cables on reels or coils.

.1 Mark or tag each cable and outside of each reel or coil, to indicate cable length, voltage rating, conductor size, and manufacturer's lot number and reel number.

.2 Each coil or reel of cable to contain only one continuous cable without splices.

.3 Identify cables for exclusively dc applications.

.4 Reel and mark shielded cables rated 2,001 volts and above.

2.2 Conduits

.1 Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, galvanized steel threaded.

.2 Epoxy coated conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, with zinc coating and corrosion resistant epoxy finish inside and outside.

.3 Electrical metallic tubing (EMT): to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with expanded ends

.4 Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2.

.5 Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, aluminum.



.6 Flexible pvc conduit: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.3

2.3 Conduit Fastenings

.1 One hole [malleable iron] [steel] straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm and smaller.

.1 Two-hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm.

.2 Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.

.3 Channel type supports for two or more conduits on centre.

.4 Threaded rods, 6 mm diameter, to support suspended channels.

2.4 Conduit Fittings

.1 Fittings: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.

.2 Ensure factory “ells” where 90 degrees bends for 25 mm and larger conduits.

.3 Watertight connectors and couplings for EMT.

.1 Set-screws are not acceptable.

2.5 Expansion Fittings for Rigid Conduit

.1 Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 100 mm linear expansion.

.2 Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection.

.3 Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.

2.6 Fish Cord

.1 Polypropylene.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.

3.2 Installation

.1 Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass.

.2 Conceal conduits except [in unfinished areas] [in mechanical and electrical service rooms].

.3 Surface mount conduits.

.4 Use rigid aluminum threaded conduit except where specified otherwise.

.5 Use epoxy coated conduit in corrosive areas.

.6 Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) above 2.4 m not subject to mechanical injury, except in cast concrete.

.7 Use rigid pvc conduit underground or in corrosive areas.

.8 Use flexible metal conduit for connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures, connection to motors in dry areas, work in movable metal partitions, connection to recessed incandescent fixtures without prewired outlet box.



.9 Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp, wet or corrosive locations.

.10 Use explosion proof flexible connection for connection to explosion proof motors.

.11 Install conduit sealing fittings in hazardous areas.

.1 Fill with compound.

.12 Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: 19 mm / NPS 3/4.

.13 Install rigid metal conduit from branch circuit panel to outlet boxes located in sub floor.

.14 Install rigid metal conduit from branch circuit panel to junction box in sub-floor immediately below panel.

.1 Run flexible conduit from junction box to outlet boxes in sub-floor.

.15 Bend conduit cold:

.1 Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than 1/10th of its original diameter.

.16 Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19 mm diameter.

.17 Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.

.18 Install fish cord in empty conduits.

.19 Run 2-25 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space and 2-25 mm spare conduits down to ceiling space from each flush panel.

.1 Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab, terminate each conduit in surface type box.

.20 Remove and replace blocked conduit sections.

.1 Do not use liquids to clean out conduits.

.21 Dry conduits out before installing wire.

3.3 Surface Conduits

.1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

.2 Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance.

.3 Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel.

.4 Group conduits wherever possible on suspended channels.

.5 Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated.

.6 Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm at crossovers.

3.4 Concealed Conduits

.1 Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

.2 Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls.

.3 Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.

3.5 Conduits in Cast-In-Place Concrete

.1 Locate to suit reinforcing steel.

.1 Install in centre one third of slab.

.2 Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete.

.3 Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or wall.



.4 Provide oversized sleeve for conduits passing through waterproof membrane, before membrane is installed.

.1 Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.

.5 Conduits in slabs: minimum slab thickness 4 times conduit diameter.

.6 Encase conduits completely in concrete with minimum 25 mm concrete cover.

.7 Organize conduits in slab to minimize cross-overs.

3.6 Conduits in Cast-In-Place Slabs On Grade

.1 Run conduits 25 mm and larger below slab and encase in 75 mm concrete envelope.

.1 Provide 50 mm of sand over concrete envelope below floor slab.

3.7 Conduits Underground

.1 Slope conduits to provide drainage.

.2 Waterproof joints (pvc excepted) with heavy coat of bituminous paint.

3.8 Cleaning

.1 Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 00 - Cleaning.

.2 On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.


Distribution Transformers (Dry Type) Section 26 12 16 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Related Work




.1 Work to be Supplied and Installed by This Division

.1 Dry type distribution transformers.

1.3 References

.1 Regulatory Agencies

.1 CSA Standard C9-02

.2 CSA Standard C802.2


.1 Install equipment to the minimum of Ontario Electrical Safety Code Standards, unless stricter standards are indicated on the drawings or in this specification. In all situations, the more restrictive standard of material and installation shall apply.

1.5 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings for the following pieces of equipment:

.1 Dry-Type Distribution Transformers.

.2 Note: Shop drawings shall include manufacturers specified values for the following parameters: Rated no-load transformer loss (%), Rated full-load coil losses (kW), Transformer impedance (%) and Transformer X/R ratio.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Dry Type Transformers

.1 Dry-core, self-cooled, indoor rated in an NEMA-2 type ventilated, sprinkler proof enclosure, suitable for floor mounting.

.2 All coils shall be wound with electrolytic copper only.

.3 Transformer ratings as follows:

.1 KVA rating:as indicated on the drawings.

.2 Primary voltage:600V Delta connected for 3

.3 phase Secondary voltage:120/208V grounded wye for 3

.4 phase Insulation:Class H, 220°C

.5 Sound rating:60 dB or less.

.6 Temp. rise:80°C.

.7 'K' Factor13 (where noted on drawings)

Distribution Transformers (Dry Type) Section 26 12 16 Page 2 of 2


.4 The magnetizing current shall not exceed 2% of the rated primary full load.

.5 Provide copper ground bus and copper core grounding strap.

.6 All leads from coils shall be brazed to terminals.

.7 Provide vibration isolators between the transformer core and the enclosure.


.1 Standard dry type transformers:

.1 Schneider Electric, or

.2 Hammond, or

.3 Rex, or

.4 Delta, or

.5 Cutler Hammer, or

.6 Bemag.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install transformer floor mounted where shown on drawings.

.2 Locate transformer at least 6 inches from the walls to allow for free air flow.

.3 Provide 100mm (4") high concrete housekeeping pads under all floor mounted transformers.


Panelboards and Circuit Breakers Section 26 24 16 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Related Work




.1 Work to be Supplied and Installed:

.1 Panelboards.

.2 Circuit Breakers.

.2 Provide panelboards and circuit breakers as indicated in panelboard schedules on drawings.



.1 Schneider Group

.2 Eaton-Cutler Hammer

.3 Siemens

1.4 References

.1 Panelboards C.S.A. C22.2 No. 29

.2 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters CSA C22.2 No.144.

.3 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers CSA C22.2 No.5.

1.5 Submittals

.1 Submit shop drawings for the following:

.1 Panelboards.

.2 Circuit Breakers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Panelboards

.1 Code gauge steel construction, finished in baked grey enamel, with removable front cover and panel trim for surface or recessed mounting as applicable.

.2 Panel design to provide easy access to neutral bar.

.3 Provide locking front cover with 2 keys. Lock to be recessed in door for a flush appearance.

.4 Provide typed directory card behind plastic film in metal frame.

.5 Panel directories to be included in maintenance manuals as well as electronic copies.

.6 Minimum current rating - refer to panel schedule(s) on drawings.

.7 Minimum branch circuits - refer to panel schedule(s) on drawings.

Panelboards and Circuit Breakers Section 26 24 16 Page 2 of 2


.8 Panelboards shall be capable of withstanding a minimum short circuit rating of 10 kAIC, unless noted otherwise on the drawings.

.9 Bolt-on circuit breaker design.

.10 Mains material - tinned copper bus, rated 3 phase, 4 wire unless noted otherwise on drawings - refer to panel schedule(s) on drawings.

.11 Provide a NEMA 1 enclosure for all indoor installations.

2.2 Circuit Breakers

.1 Quick-make quick-break design, c/w arc quenching device, trip free handle, thermal overload protection and instantaneous magnetic trip, ambient temperature compensating type. Breaker frame size and mounting type to match required interrupting capacity and panel type.

.2 Two pole and three pole breakers are to have a common trip.

.3 Minimum interrupting capacity shall be 10 kAIC unless listed otherwise on the drawings - refer to panel schedule(s).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Panelboards

.1 All equipment to be mounted, plumbed true.

.2 Mounting heights to be as noted in Section 26 05 01 or as amended by the drawings.

.3 All recessed panels to be mounted with suitable flush trim.

.4 Provide spare 32 mm (1 1/4") EMT raceway into accessible ceiling space from each recessed panel. Provide nylon pull wires and cap open end.

.5 Provide drip proof shields on all panelboards installed in sprinklered areas.

.6 Provide lamacoid nameplates mechanically fastened to the electrical equipment to identify each panel. Letter size to be as described in Section 26 05 01.

.7 Provide electronic copies of panel directories to the owner upon completion of project.

3.2 Circuit Breakers

.1 All circuit breakers shall be identified as per Section 26 05 03.

.2 Install circuit breakers as required.

.3 Ensure all circuit breakers mounted in panelboard have the specified interrupting capacity required for that piece of equipment.


.1 Provide spot checks on all terminations as directed by the Consultant. Tighten all loose connections discovered.


Panelboards Breaker Type Section 26 24 16.01 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CSA C22.2 No.29-11, Panelboards and Enclosed Panelboards.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for panelboards and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.

.3 Shop Drawings:

.1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in [Province] [Territory], Canada.

.2 Include on drawings:

.1 Electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for panelboards for incorporation into manual.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section with manufacturer's written instructions.




.2 Store and protect panelboards from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Panelboards

.1 Panelboards: to CSA C22.2 No.29 and product of one manufacturer.

.1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.

.2 In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault current that panel including breakers has been built to withstand.

.2 250 V panelboards: bus and breakers rated for symmetrical interrupting capacity or as indicated.

.3 Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase.



.4 Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit breakers as indicated.

.5 Minimum of 2 flush locks for each panel board.

.6 Two keys for each panelboards and key panelboards alike.

.7 Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating of mains.

.8 Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers.

.9 Trim with concealed front bolts and hinges.

.10 Trim and door finish: baked enamel

.11 Isolated ground bus.

.12 Include grounding busbar with 3 of terminals for bonding conductor equal to breaker capacity of the panel board.

2.2 Breakers

.1 Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards except as indicated otherwise.

.2 Main breaker: separately mounted on top or bottom of panel to suit cable entry. When mounted vertically, down position should open breaker.

.3 Lock-on devices for 10 % of 15 to 30 A breakers installed as indicated. Turn over unused lock-on devices to Consultant.

.4 Lock-on devices for receptacles, fire alarm, clock outlet, emergency, door supervisory, intercom, stairway, exit and night light circuits.


.1 Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical.

.2 Nameplate for each panelboards size 4 engraved.

.3 Nameplate for each circuit in distribution panelboards size 2 engraved.

.4 Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each circuit, mounted in plastic envelope at inside of panel door.

.5 Circuits supplying Patient Care Areas must be entered in circuit directory with Bold Font.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for panelboards installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




3.2 Installation

.1 Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces.



.2 Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards in accordance with Section [06 10 53 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry]. Where practical, group panelboards on common backboard.

.3 Mount panelboards to height specified in Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results for Electrical or as indicated.

.4 Connect loads to circuits.

.5 Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus [with respective neutral identified].

.6 Where panels of different systems i.e. Standard and Vital Power, supply a common patient care area, ground busses in panels to be interconnect with a minimum #6 AWG ground conductor.

3.3 Cleaning





3.4 Protection


.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by panelboards installation.


Lighting Section 26 50 00 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Sections of Divisions 01 as applicable.


.3 Related Work




.1 Description of Work

.1 Provide and install lighting fixtures and all mounting hardware and trim required for the type of mounting and the architectural conditions.

1.3 References

.1 OESC Section 30.

1.4 Submittals


.1 Light fixtures

1.5 Fixture Catalogue References

.1 The fixture catalogue numbers listed do not include all required accessories to provide a complete installation of the fixtures as intended or as described. The description of each fixture should be carefully read prior to quoting and the tender price shall include all such necessary accessories and characteristics.

.2 No extras will be allowed for the failure to provide such accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Light Emitting Diode (Led) Light Fixtures

.1 Approved LED Lamp Manufacturers:

.1 Cooper Lighting

.2 Phillips Lumiled

.3 Cree

.4 Nichia

.5 Osram

.6 Samsung

.2 LED Lamps shall meet the following criteria:

.1 Colour Rendering Index: 80 minimums (unless noted otherwise)

.2 Colour Temperature: 4000K (unless noted otherwise)

.3 Rated Life: 50,000 hours (minimum) at 70% lumen maintenance.

.4 Tested according to IES LM-79 and LM-80 procedures

.5 Minimum 3-year limited warranty.



2.2 General Lighting Fixture Requirements

.1 Commercially Listed Fixtures: Lighting fixtures shall be of the types, sizes, ratings, etc. listed on Fixture Schedule on Drawings.

.2 Delivery: Assemble completely all fixtures at the Manufacturer’s plant and deliver to the project site in original cartons. Ensure that a dry and protected space is available for proper storage before delivery of production fixtures.

2.3 Hangers and Fittings

.1 General

.1 Support fixtures as shown on the drawings, level, plumb and true with the structure and other equipment, and in a horizontal or vertical position as intended.

.2 Wall or side bracket mounted fixture housings shall be rigidly installed and adjusted to give a neat flush fit to the surface on which it is mounted.

.3 All hangers, supports, fastenings or accessory fittings shall be protected against corrosion. Care shall be taken during the installation to assure that insulation and corrosion protection is not damaged.

.2 Supports

.1 Self-alignment ball joint hangers shall be used for rod suspended fixtures, and ceiling canopies shall be fitted tightly to the ceiling without restricting the alignment of the hanger.

.2 Support fixtures by hangers and mounting arrangements which will not cause the fixture frame, housing, sides or lens frame to be distorted, or prevent complete alignment of several fixtures in a row.

.3 Mounting methods for fixtures on or in suspended ceilings are to be as follows:

.1 Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted 'T' bar ceilings and independently support clips using jack chain to structure above.

.2 Where cross member supports are required above the ceiling to provide support points, these are to be steel channels or angles.

.3 Toggle bolts of the Snap-On or spring-in type are not to be used through drywall, tile or similar type ceilings.

.4 Lay-in or recessed luminaires (or luminaires mounted to the lower surface of suspended ceilings) shall be secured to the building structure. Each fixture shall be secured at opposite ends by a minimum of No. 12 AWG (2.70mm) galvanized soft annealed, mild steel wire (pencil rod) or fixture chain of adequate strength.

.3 Suspension Length

.1 The suspension length for all ceiling-mounted, suspended types of lighting fixtures, as listed in the Fixture Schedule, shall be the overall length from the ceiling to the lowest point of the fixture body, reflector, or glassware in its hanging position.

.2 The length of the stems or chain hangers of suspended fluorescent lighting fixtures shall be adjusted to hang all fixture bodies in the same room level and in the same horizontal plane, unless specifically required to be otherwise on the electrical drawings.

.4 Chain Hangers

.1 Where fixtures are specified to be chain hung, the chain used shall be No. 4 Tensile bright zinc coated with a strength of 181 kg. Attachments shall be made using No. 105



'S' hooks. Wires running down chain to fixture shall be run in flexible conduit and shall be attached to chain with cable clips.

2.4 Fixture Construction

.1 All interior fixtures shall comply with CSA Standard C22.2 No.9, latest edition, complete with accessories and components, complying with relevant CSA standards applicable to accessory or component.

.2 Fixture lens, where specified, shall be flat and in hinged metal frame unless otherwise specified, made from clear acrylic lenses and shall be 100% virgin acrylic minimum 3.2mm (.125") thick.

.3 Unless otherwise indicated, lighting fixture bodies shall be minimum 20 gauge, cold rolled prime steel of rigid construction with knockout, as required. Fixture rigidity shall permit any suspension method without sag. Fluorescent fixtures shall be suitable for either individual or continuous mounting. Fixture sockets shall apply continuous holding pressure on lamps. All metal edges are to be smoothly finished.

.4 Fixtures shall be finished in baked white enamel (or other colour if specified or requested by the Consultant), which shall resist chipping, corrosion and discoloration. Before finishing all metal shall be chemically degreased and neutralized.

.5 The finishing paint shall cover all metal edges. Reflecting surfaces shall be white with an average reflectance of not less than 85%.

.6 All fixtures shall be CSA approved and/or approved by the Electrical Safety Authority.

.7 All fixtures shall be provided as described in the light fixture schedule and electrical specifications. Both fixture description and model numbers of approved fixtures listed in the schedule make up the specified fixture type. Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring fixtures are provided and installed as described in both drawings and specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install fixtures complete with all mounting hardware and trims for a neat, finished appearance.

.2 Ensure that all fixtures installed in built-in enclosures can be serviced for lamp changing, ballast changing, etc.

.3 Install all fixtures plumbed true.

.4 Co-ordinate fixture locations with other trades on site prior to rough in.

.5 Supply the specified spare lamps in labelled cartons, identifying wattage, voltage and fixture reference.


Emergency Lighting Section 26 52 13.13 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 CSA Group (CSA)

.1 CSA C22.2 No.141, Emergency Lighting Equipment.



.2 Product Data:

.1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for emergency lighting and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.



.2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for emergency lighting for incorporation into manual.


.1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section with manufacturer's written instructions.



.1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area.

.2 Store and protect [emergency lighting] from [nicks, scratches, and blemishes].


1.5 Warranty

.1 For batteries in this Section 26 52 13.13 - Emergency Lighting, 12 months warranty period is extended to 120 months.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Equipment

.1 Emergency lighting equipment: to CSA C22.2 No.141.

.2 Supply voltage: 120 V, AC.

.3 Output voltage: 12 V DC.

.4 Operating time: minimum 30 minutes.

.5 Battery: sealed, maintenance free.

.6 Charger: solid state, multi-rate, voltage/current regulated, inverse temperature compensated, short circuit protected with regulated output of plus or minus 0.01 V for plus or minus 10% input variations.

.7 Solid state transfer circuit.

.8 Low voltage disconnect: solid state, modular, operates at 80% battery output voltage.

.9 Signal lights: solid state, for 'AC Power ON' and 'High Charge'.



.10 Lamp heads: integral on unit, 345 degrees horizontal and 180 degrees vertical adjustment. Lamp type: LED

.11 Cabinet: suitable for direct or shelf mounting to wall and c/w knockouts for conduit. Removable or hinged front panel for easy access to batteries.

.12 Auxiliary equipment:

.1 Ammeter.

.2 Voltmeter.

.3 Test switch.

.4 Time delay relay.

.5 Battery disconnect device.

.6 AC input and DC output terminal blocks inside cabinet.

.7 Shelf, Bracket.

.8 Cord and single twist-lock plug connection for AC.

.9 RFI suppressors.

2.2 Wiring of Remote Heads

.1 Conductors: sized as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrate previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for emergency lighting installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.




3.2 Installation

.1 Install unit equipment and remote mounted fixtures.

.2 Direct heads.

.3 Connect exit lights to unit equipment.

3.3 Cleaning



.2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 00 – Cleaning.


3.4 Protection


.2 Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by emergency lighting installation.

Exit Signs Section 26 52 13.16 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Sections of Division 01 as applicable.


.3 Related Work



.3 Emergency Lighting Section 26 52 00


.1 Provide exit signs complete with lamps and all mounting hardware and trim required for the type of mounting and the architectural conditions. Refer to drawings for sign requirements (single face/double face, arrow directions, etc.).

1.3 References

.1 Equipment shall be approved by CSA and carry appropriate labels.

.2 Equipment shall meet or exceed CAN / CSA-C860-01 requirements.

.3 Ontario Building Code.

1.4 Submittals


.1 Exit fixtures.


.1 Emergi-Lite

.2 Lumacell

.3 Dual Lite (Hubbell Lighting)

.4 Uniglo (Canlyte)

.5 Ready-Lite

.6 Stanpro

.7 Beghelli

.8 AimLite

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Fixtures

.1 Exit Fixtures

.1 Surface Mounted - Rigid aluminum frame with cast aluminum minimum #12-gauge face plates, single or double, maximum depth of 2 ½”, faceplate shall be extruded aluminum and shall incorporate a protective clear polycarbonate panel. Each faceplate shall come standard with two legend films for pictogram and direction selection.

.2 Suitable for ceiling, wall or end-mount.

.3 Self-powered shall use a nickel-cadmium battery of 2.4V nominal voltage and stay illuminated for 2 hours upon AC failure.

Exit Signs Section 26 52 13.16 Page 2 of 2


.4 Fixture is based on Lumacell LA Series.

.2 AC lamps to be LED bar type, 2 watts per single face and 4 watts per double face, with a rated life expectancy of 25 years. Lamps shall operate on normal AC voltage and on emergency DC voltage.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

.1 Install fixtures complete with all mounting hardware and trims for a neat, finished appearance.

.2 Install exit fixture wiring in a separate raceway system circuited to a separate breaker in the respective 120 VAC essential service panel. Provide lock on for breaker handles, paint red and identify as “EXIT LIGHTING CIRCUIT”.

.3 Install exit fixture DC wiring in a separate raceway system; connect to local Emergency Battery Unit as indicated on the drawings.

.4 AC and DC power supplied at voltages specified.


Telephone and Data System Raceways Section 27 05 28 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL




.3 Related Work



.3 Telecommunication System Cabling Section 27 13 00



.1 This document describes Cable Tray, Conduit, and electrical installation requirements to support the Data and Voice Cabling.

1.3 References

.1 Applicable Standards & Codes

.1 Ontario Electrical Safety Code

.2 CSA T-527-94: Grounding and Bonding for Communications in Commercial Buildings

.3 CSA T-528-93: Design Guidelines for Administration of Telecommunication and Infrastructure in Commercial Buildings

.4 CSA T-529-M95: Design Guidelines for Telecommunications Wiring System in Commercial Buildings

.5 CSA T-530-M99: Building Facilities, Design Guidelines for Telecommunication

.6 Ontario Building Code

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


.1 Fish wires - pull wires - minimum 3 mm (1/8") nylon braided cord.

2.2 Backboards

.1 Behind Equipment Cabinets, install ¾” (20mm) good one side, plywood on all walls. This plywood is to be painted with a minimum quantity of one (1) coat of primer and two (2) coats of a light-colored non-conductive fire-retardant paint. The plywood shall extend 8’- 0” (2440mm) above the floor, and be 4’-0” (1220mm) wide at a minimum.

2.3 Cabling J-Hooks

.1 Non-continuous cable supports shall provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to comply with required bend radii of high-performance cables; cUL Listed.

.2 Non-continuous cable supports shall have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables.

.3 Non-continuous cable shall have a cable retainer strap to provide containment of cables within the hanger. The cable retainer strap shall be removable and reusable and be suitable for use in air handling spaces.

.4 Non-continuous cable supports shall have an electro-galvanized or G60 finish and shall be rated for indoor use in non-corrosive environments.



.5 Non-continuous cable supports shall be ERICO CableCatTM J-hook series CAT64HP double hooks or approved equal. J-Hooks shall be of the screw on type, hammer on will not be accepted.

2.4 Pull Boxes

.1 A pull box shall be placed in conduit runs where:

.1 The length is over 100’ (30m), or

.2 There are more than two 90-degree bends.

.2 Pull boxes shall be constructed of code gauge steel and shall have a rust resistant finish.

.3 In all instances pull boxes shall be placed in straight sections of conduit run and shall NOT be used in lieu of a bend. Corresponding ends of the conduit are to be aligned with each other. Conduit fittings shall not be used in place of pull boxes and/or conduit bends.

.4 Pull boxes shall be placed in a readily accessible location.

.5 Pull box locations shall be identified on the As Built Drawings.

.6 Pull boxes shall be labelled on the exposed exterior.

.7 Pull box sizes shall be as follows:

Size of Conduit:

Size of Pull Box For each additional conduit increase width:

Width Length Depth

1” (25mm) 4” (100mm) 16” (406mm) 2” (50mm) 2” (50mm)

2” (50mm) 8” (200mm) 36” (915mm) 5” (127mm) 5” (127mm)

3” (75mm) 12” (300mm) 48” (1220mm) 6” (150mm) 6” (150mm)

4” (100mm) 15” (380mm) 60” (1500mm) 8” (200mm) 8” (200mm)

2.5 Conduit

.1 All conduits shall be thin wall EMT, reamed and bushed at both ends.

.2 Flexible metal conduit shall not be used for the installation of voice and data cabling.

.3 PVC conduit, unless poured in floor slab, shall not be used for the installation of voice and data cabling.

.4 Conduit runs shall be a maximum of 100’ (30m) in length with a maximum of two 90-degree bends between pull points, unless otherwise specified.

.5 The inside radius of a bend in a conduit shall not be less than:

.1 Six times the internal diameter when the conduit is less than 2” (50mm) in diameter, or

.2 Ten times the internal diameter when the conduit is larger than 2” (50mm) in diameter.

.6 A pull cord or fish tape shall be installed in all conduits. Conduits shall be identified and labelled at both ends; tags shall identify start and finish of conduit runs.

.7 Conduits shall be Columbia-MBF True Color, BLUE.

2.6 Fire Protection

.1 Fire-stop all wall and/or floor penetrations.

.2 Conduit penetrations will be returned to the integrity of the existing fire barrier.

.3 Provide STI EZ-Path Fire Rated raceway, as noted on the drawings.



.4 Provide manufacturers letter of certification that project meets or exceeds specified requirements (ULC).

2.7 Fire Rated Pathways

.1 Provide fire rated pathways as shown on the drawings and as specified hereinafter. Include all associated hardware required for a complete and professional installation to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

.2 All pathways shall be heavy-duty specification grade with an intumescent insert material allowing for 0 to 100-percent visual fill of conductors.

.3 The pathway shall include both internal and external firestopping.

.4 The pathway shall utilize a fire and smoke sealing system that automatically adjusts to the addition or removal of cables.

.5 The pathway shall require no maintenance under normal use and shall accommodate future cable changes without mechanical adjustments and/or removal or replacement of protective materials.

.6 Pathways to be provided with steel wall plates allowing for single or multiple devices to be ganged together.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Conduit Installation

.1 Where wall outlets are indicated for telephone and/or data cabling, provide ¾” (19mm) EMT conduit with 4” x 4” x 2½” (100mm x 100mm x 64mm) outlet boxes with single outlet reducer plates from accessible ceiling space to drop locations on floors as indicated on Drawings.

.2 Where wall outlets (for telephone and/or data cabling) are indicated in walls that do not protrude to the finished ceiling, utilize chase sections of wall for routing of conduits.

.3 Provide continuous raceways to outlets.

.4 Where telephone and/or data cabling outlets are indicated within systems furniture, utilize riser poles (supplied with furniture) for cabling drops to the furniture.

.5 Provide EMT conduits from Telecom riser closets to computer rooms and LAN rooms as indicated on Drawings for the installation of backbone cabling.

.6 Back to back outlet boxes shall be offset 12” (300mm) apart.

.7 All conduits entering a main computer room or LAN room (unless otherwise stipulated) will protrude into the area from 1 to 2” (25-50mm) without a bend.

.8 Where possible, conduit runs shall follow building grid lines.

.9 Outlet boxes shall be placed at the same height from finished floor level as adjacent electrical duplex receptacles.

.10 The cable distribution system conduits be bonded together at the main computer room and LAN rooms and bonded to the telecommunications bus bar within the rooms using a No. 6 awg green jacketed stranded copper ground wire.

3.2 Cable Hook Installation

.1 Follow manufacturer’s recommendations for allowable fill capacity for each size non- continuous cable support.

.2 Do not exceed load ratings specified by manufacturer.

.3 Provide mounting support (threaded rod, beam clamp, wall anchor, etc.) as required by location of installation. Clamps to be of screw-on type, hammer-on type will not be accepted.



.4 Maximum spacing shall not exceed 3’-0”

3.3 Telecommunications Bonding Backbone System

.1 The telecommunications bonding backbone (TBB) has been installed as part of the base building construction. The TBB is a system composed of green jacketed stranded copper conductors and insulated copper buss bars which extend vertically from the Building Grounding Electrode Conductor through the core area telecom closets. Provide extension of this system to the computer rooms and Lan rooms within the building. The following general requirements shall apply when extending the TBB system:

.1 An insulated pre-drilled copper busbar, minimum dimensions of ¼” (6mm) thick x 4” (100mm) wide x 18” (457mm) in length shall be installed on the wall by each data cabinet adjacent to the cable entrance conduits. These busbars shall be mounted on the adjacent wall closest to the wall on which the cable entrance ducts are mounted; 6” (150mm) from the corner of the LAN room and 6” (150mm) AFF.

.2 A #3 awg green jacketed stranded copper ground wire shall be installed from the copper busbars installed in the core area telecom closet to the busbars installed within the main computer rooms and the LAN rooms.

.3 All joints to the grounding wires shall be done using irreversible compression- type connectors, exothermic welding, or equivalent.

.2 The metallic components of the horizontal distribution supporting infrastructure (conduits, cable trays and ducts) shall be bonded to the telecommunications busbars of the main computer rooms or LAN rooms in which they originate using a #6 awg green jacketed stranded copper ground wire.

3.4 Fire Rated Pathways

.1 Pathways shall be installed in locations where indicated on the drawings, above the acoustic tile ceiling.

.2 Install pathways in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.

.3 Apply the factory supplied gasketing material prior to the installation of the wall plates.

.4 Secure wall plates to devices per the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

.5 Provide manufacturer’s Letter of Certification that the project (as installed) meets or exceeds the specified requirements for fire rating (ULC).

3.5 As Built Drawings

.1 As built drawings will be produced and delivered to the design authority on completion of installation. The as built drawings shall consist of marked up installation drawings.


Data Cabling Section 27 15 00 Page 1 of 14


PART 1 - GENERAL


.1 Conform to General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Sections of Division 01 as applicable.


.3 Related Work



.3 Telecommunication System Raceways Section 27 05 28


.1 Provide a complete horizontal cabling system for telephone and data systems. System shall include (but is not limited to) the following:

.1 Horizontal copper cabling for voice and data. Category 6, UTP (plenum rated).

.2 White cables for telephone system and blue cables for data system.

.3 Backbone cabling (copper) for voice.

.4 Telecom outlets and jacks.

.5 Patch Panels.

.6 Patch Cables.

.7 Equipment cabinets (2)

.8 Testing and Certification

.2 Provide Category 6 horizontal cables for data and voice. Each voice or data drop indicated on the drawings shall be terminated in a wall mounted outlet (or floor box), home run back to the Server Room and terminated on a Category 6 patch panel (to be installed in the equipment cabinet).

.3 Provide Category 6 patch cables for use at the IT Room patch panel. Provide the following quantities/lengths:

.1 100 data patch cables (blue),

.1 25 cables at 3’ (915mm) long,

.2 50 cables at 8’ (2440mm) long,

.3 25 cables at 12’ (3660mm) long.

.2 40 voice patch cables (white), all cables to be 3’ (915mm) long.

.3 Confirm quantities and lengths of cables with Owner.

.4 Telephone system interconnecting wiring between crossconnects and telephone switch and between telephone switch and patch panel shall be provided by telephone system contractor (not in contract).

1.3 References

.1 ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (and all published addenda), Part 1: General Requirements, 2001.

.2 ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard (and all published addenda), Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, 2001.



.3 ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling Components, Addendum 1: Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100 Ohm Category 6 Cabling, 2002.

.4 ANSI/EIA-310-D, Cabinets, Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment, 1992

.5 Ontario Electrical Safety Code

.6 Ontario Building Code.

1.4 Warranty

.1 Installed Category 6 cabling system shall be provided with a full link or channel warranty by Hubbell Premise Wiring. Installing Contractor shall comply with the following conditions stated below:

.1 Construction is performed by an installer that is certified by the Hubbell Mission

Critical warranty program.

.2 Contractors performing the certified installation are properly registered in the Hubbell

Mission Critical warranty program.

.3 The link or channel components are supplied entirely by Hubbell (including patch cords for channel).

.4 Cable used in the installation is qualified and recognized by Hubbell.

.5 Links or channels in the installation are properly documented and tested with a “PASS” result. (See “Field Quality Control – Testing” in PART 3 of this document for testing details).

.6 Required test results and project documentation is submitted to Hubbell by the registered contractor.

1.5 Submittals


.1 Category 6 horizontal cabling.

.2 Patch Panels

.3 Equipment Racks

.4 Jacks

.5 Faceplates


.1 Hubbell

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Category 6 100 Ohm Balanced Utp Cable – Nextspeed Plenum

.1 Design requirements

.1 Cable construction shall be four twisted pairs of 23 AWG insulated solid conductors, with a ripcord, surrounded by a tight outer jacket.

.2 Conductor diameters shall be 0.0224” .0003” solid copper.

.3 Conductor insulation diameter shall be 0.039” .0005” high performance fluoropolymer.

.4 Outer jacket diameter shall be 0.220” .008” low smoke PVC, with a nominal wall thickness of 0.015”.



.5 Ripcord shall be directly underneath the outer jacket.

.6 Cable shall be marked: “HUBBELL PREMISE WIRING NEXTSPEED CATEGORY 6 – PLENUM -- 4 PR 23 AWG C(UL)US CMp – (UL) VERIFIED TO TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 -- Z/YY (XXXX) – NNNN”.

.1 Frequency of marking shall be every 2.0 ft.

.2 ‘Z’ represents the month of manufacture.

.3 ’YY’ indicates the year of manufacture.

.4 ’NNNN’ indicates the sequential footage markers.

.5 ’XXXX’ indicates the job number.

.6 ’NNNN’ indicates the sequential footage markers.

.7 UL, ETL, or CSA agency certification or verification markings shall be marked on the cable jacket according to the certifying agency’s requirements.

.8 Color coding of the pairs shall be as follows:

.1 Pair 1: White/Blue; Blue

.2 Pair 2: White/Orange; Orange

.3 Pair 3: White/Green; Green

.4 Pair 4: White/Brown; Brown

.9 Cable shall be supplied in 1000ft spools or 1000ft Reelex boxes.

.2 Products Specified - Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Numbers

.1 The Hubbell products listed in the table below comply with all requirements specified in this document.

Category 6 - 100 OHM UTP Cable (Next Speed plenum)

description

Hubbell Catalog Number

(1000 ft lengths)

NextSpeed C6 Cable, Plenum, Blue, Reelex C6RPB

NextSpeed C6 Cable, Plenum, White, Reelex C6RPW

NextSpeed C6 Cable, Plenum, Blue, Spool C6SPB

NextSpeed C6 Cable, Plenum, White, Spool C6SPW

.2 Provide Category 6, plenum rated, blue cable for data cabling and Category 6, plenum rated, white cable for telephone cabling.

2.2 Category 6 Modular Jacks


.1 Jacks shall be standard 8-position, RJ-45 style, un-keyed, FCC compliant.



.2 Jacks shall be designed for 4-pair, 100-ohm balanced unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable.

.3 Each jack shall be single unit construction, with snap – fit to industry standard keystone opening (.760” x .580”).

.4 Jack housings shall be high impact UL 94 V-0 rated thermoplastic.

.5 Jacks shall have a temperature rating of -10 C (14F) to 70C (158 F).

.6 Jacks shall utilize a 2-layer printed circuit board to control NEXT.

.7 Jack housings shall fully encase and protect printed circuit boards and IDC fields.

.8 Housing shall be ultrasonically welded for tamper resistance.

.9 Modular jack contacts shall accept a minimum of 2000 mating cycles without degradation of electrical or mechanical performance.

.10 Jack contacts shall maintain a minimum deflection force of 100 grams while mated with an FCC-standard RJ-45 plug.

.11 Jack contacts shall be formed flat for increased surface contact with mated plugs.

.12 Jack contacts shall be arranged on the PC board in 2 staggered arrays, one array having 6 contacts and the other array having 2 contacts.

.13 Jack contacts shall be constructed of Beryllium copper for maximum spring force and durability.

.14 Contact plating shall be a minimum of 50 micro-inches of hard gold in the contact area over 50 micro-inches of nickel.

.15 Jack termination method shall follow the industry standard 110 IDC punch-down.

.16 IDC contact termination towers shall have tapered pair-splitting features to aid wire insertion and minimize pair un-twist.

.17 IDC contacts shall be arranged in staggered arrays of 4 sets of 2 contacts.

.18 Jacks shall have the Category 6 designation, visible from the front when installed.

.19 Bottom of jack shall have date code and an abbreviated catalog number.

.20 Jacks shall utilize a paired punch-down sequence to maximize electrical performance.

.21 IDC contacts shall be Phosphor Bronze with 100 micro-inch tin lead 60/40 plating over nickel.

.22 Jacks shall terminate 26-22 AWG solid or stranded conductors.

.23 Jacks shall terminate insulated conductors with outside diameters up to .050”.

.24 Jacks shall not require special cords, specialty tools or special installation requirements.

.25 Jacks shall be compatible with single conductor standard 110 impact termination tools.

.26 Jacks shall be compatible with a 4-pair single punch impact tool designed specifically for the purpose.

.27 Jacks shall include a translucent stuffer cap for wire retention and to permit visual inspection.

.28 Stuffer cap shall have retention snaps to assure conductor strain relief.

.29 Jacks shall accept FCC compliant 6 position plugs.

.30 Jacks shall accept optional hinged dust covers.



.31 Jacks shall be compatible with ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A color code labeling.

.32 Jacks shall accept Snap-On icons for specific identification.

.33 Jacks shall be available in various colors to meet specific customer applications.

.34 Jacks shall have attached wiring instruction labels to permit either T568A or T568B wiring configurations.

.35 Category 6 jacks shall be backward compatible with existing Category 3, 5, and 5e cabling systems for fit, form, and function.


.1 The Hubbell products listed in the table below comply with all requirements specified in this document. Provide white jacks for telephone outlets and blue jacks for data outlets (confirm colours with Consultant via shop drawing submission).

Category 6 Jacks Color

Hubbell Catalog NO.

(1 per bag)

hubbell Catalog No.

(bag of 25)

White HXJ6W HXJ6W25

Blue HXJ6B HXJ6B25

2.3 Modular Faceplates: Rear Loading


.1 Faceplates shall be constructed of high impact, UL94 V-0 rated thermoplastic.

.2 Faceplates shall be 2.75" W x 4.5" H (69.8 mm x 114.3 mm) for single gang and 4.5” X 4.5” (114.3 X 114.3 mm) for double gang.

.3 Port size in each faceplate shall be industry standard vertical keystone opening size (.760” x .580”).

.4 Faceplates shall accept Hubbell XJ-series jacks and HD Series jacks.

.5 Faceplates shall accept Snap-Fit fiber optic, audio, and video modules for multimedia applications.

.6 Faceplates shall provide for ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A compliant workstation outlet labeling.

.7 Faceplates shall be provided with clear plastic and color-matched label field covers.

.8 Color-matched blank Snap-Fit modules shall be available separately to fill unused ports and openings as required.

.9 Two #6-32 pan head Phillips/slotted mounting screws shall be included with each single gang faceplate.

.10 Four #6-32 pan head Phillips/slotted mounting screws shall be included with each double gang faceplate.

.11 Jacks and Snap-Fit modules shall snap firmly into rear of faceplate and position flush to outer plate surface.

.12 Faceplates shall be compatible with standard NEMA openings and boxes.



.13 Faceplates shall be compatible with raceway fittings, surface mount boxes, service fittings, service poles, flush mount boxes and drywall rings.

.2 Performance Requirements

.1 Faceplates shall be UL LISTED 1863 and CSA certified.


.1 The Hubbell Modular Rear-Loading Faceplates and associated Snap-Fit blank modules listed in the tables below comply with all requirements specified in this document.

Modular faceplates, rear- loading,

Hubbell Catalog No.

1-PORT

hubbell Catalog No.

2-PORT

hubbell Catalog No.

3-PORT

hubbell Catalog No.

4-PORT

Single-gang

Color (1 per bag) (1 PER BAG) (1 PER BAG) (1 PER BAG)

Black IFP11BK IFP12BK IFP13BK IFP14BK

Electrical Ivory IFP11EI IFP12EI IFP13EI IFP14EI

Gray IFP11GY IFP12GY IFP13GY IFP14GY

Office White IFP11OW IFP12OW IFP13OW IFP14OW

Telco Ivory IFP11TI IFP12TI IFP13TI IFP14TI

White IFP11W IFP12W IFP13W IFP14W

SNAP FITTINGS, BLANK

Color

Hubbell

Catalog No.

(10 per bag)

Black SFBB10

Electrical Ivory SFBE10

Gray SFBG10

Office White SFB10

Telco Ivory SFBI10

White SFBW10

2.4 Category 6 Patch Panels




.1 Category 6 patch panels shall be standard 8-position, RJ-45 style, un-keyed, FCC-compliant receptacle, in 24, or 48-port configurations.

.2 Panel frames shall be black powder coated 14-gage steel with rolled edges top and bottom for proper stiffness.

.3 Panels shall accommodate a minimum of 24 ports for each rack mount unit (1 RMU = 1.75 in.).

.4 Panels shall be designed for 4-pair, 100-ohm balanced unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable.

.5 Panels shall terminate 26-22 AWG solid conductors, with maximum insulation diameter of 0.050 in.

.6 Panels shall have attached wiring instruction labels to permit either T568A or T568B wiring configurations.

.7 Panels shall have individual port identification numbers on the front and rear of the panel.

.8 Panels shall utilize 8-port adapter modules, each secured with two screws. Adapter module housings shall be UL 94 V-0 rated thermoplastic.

.9 Panel adapter modules shall be 110-style termination with tin lead solder plated IDC contacts.

.10 Panels shall have a temperature rating of -10 C (14F) to 70C (158 F).

.11 Printed circuit boards shall be fully enclosed front and rear for physical protection.

.12 Panel contacts shall accept a minimum of 2000 mating cycles without degradation of electrical or mechanical performance.

.13 Panel contacts shall maintain a minimum deflection force of 100 grams while mated with an FCC-standard RJ-45 plug.

.14 Panel contacts shall be formed flat for increased surface contact with mated plugs.

.15 Panel contacts shall be arranged on the PC board in 2 staggered arrays, one array having 6 contacts and the other array having 2 contacts.

.16 Panel contacts shall be constructed of Beryllium copper for maximum spring force and durability.

.17 Contact plating shall be a minimum of 50 micro-inches of hard gold in the contact area over 50 micro-inches of nickel.

.18 Panel termination method shall follow the industry standard 110 IDC punch- down, using a standard 110 impact termination tool.

.19 Panels shall be compatible with a 4-pair multi-punch impact termination tool designed specifically for the purpose. Bending or other damage to the panel using a multi-pair punch tool shall not occur.

.20 IDC contact termination towers shall have tapered pair-splitting features to aid wire insertion and minimize pair un-twist.

.21 IDC contacts shall be arranged in staggered arrays of 4 sets of 2 contacts.

.22 Panels shall have the Category 6 designation, visible from the front when installed.

.23 Panels shall utilize a paired punch-down sequence to maximize electrical performance.

.24 IDC contacts shall be Phosphor Bronze with 100 micro-inch tin lead 60/40 plating over nickel.



.25 Panels shall not require special cords, specialty tools or special installation requirements.

.26 Panels adapter ports shall accept FCC compliant 6 position plugs.

.27 Panel adapter ports shall accept optional hinged dust covers.

.28 Panel adapter ports shall accept Snap-On icons for specific identification.

.29 Space above the adapter ports shall be available for additional labeling per ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A.

.30 Category 6 panels shall be backward compatible with existing Category 3, 5, and 5e cabling systems for fit, form, and function.

.31 Panels shall accept a clip-on rear cable management support bar to provide cable strain relief.

.32 Panels shall include self-adhesive, clear label holders and white designation labels for each row of 24 ports.


.1 The Hubbell products listed in the tables below comply with all requirements specified in this document.

Category 6 Patch panels

NO. of ports

Rack units


protected circuit board- Straight

hubbell Catalog Number

protected circuit board- angled

hubbell Catalog Number

un-protected circuit board

24 1 P6E24U P624AU P624U

48 2 P6E48U P648AU P648U

REAR CABLE MANAGEMENT BAR


CLIP TO PANEL PCBLMGT

SCREW TO RACK MCCSWB19

2.5 Category 6 Patch Cables


.1 Category 6 patch cords shall be constructed with a smoke-colored polycarbonate plug having vertically staggered, trifurcated contacts, each having 50 micro- inches of gold plating.

.2 Plug dimensions and function shall comply with FCC 47, Part 68.5.

.3 Patch cords shall have a snag-less feature, integral to the strain relief boot on each end. Strain relief boot shall be molded PVC, and color matched to the cable jacket.



.4 Patch cords shall be constructed with category 6 patch cable, with 24 AWG 7/32 tinned copper stranded conductors, each insulated with polyethylene, and overall jacket with UL flame-retardant PVC.

.5 Patch cords shall be manufactured using a T568B wiring format, and shall function suitably for either T568A or T568B wiring schemes.

.6 Patch cords shall be available in the following colors: black, blue, gray, yellow, orange, red, green, white, and purple. Custom lengths and colors shall be available with a delivery lead-time quotation.

.7 Standard patch cord lengths shall range from 3 ft. to 20 ft.

.8 Category 6 patch cords shall be backward compatible with existing Category 3, 5, and 5e cabling systems for fit, form, and function.

.2 Products Specified – Hubbell Premise Wiring Part Numbers

.1 The Hubbell products listed in the table below comply with all requirements specified in this document.

Category 6 Patch cords

Length (ft)

Hubbell

Catalog Number

Blue

hubbell

Catalog Number

White

3 PCX6B03 PCX6W03

6 PCX6B06 PCX6W06

8 PCX6B08 PCX6W08

10 PCX6B10 PCX6W010

12 PCX6B12 PCX6W12

16 PCX6B16 PCX6W16

20 PCX6B20 PCX6W20

2.6 Performance Requirements (Category 6)

.1 The following performance requirements shall be applicable to all components (cable, jacks, patch panels, patch cords) of the horizontal cabling system:

.1 All transmission performance parameters shall be independently verified by a UL or ETL third party testing organization.

.2 Cable shall exceed Category 6 transmission requirements specified in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1, and shall be tested to 500 MHz

.3 Worst-case cable performance shall be +1.0 dB headroom over current TIA/EIA and ISO standards limits for NEXT loss and PSNEXT loss.

.4 Worst-case cable performance shall be +3.0 dB over current TIA/EIA and ISO standards limits for ELFEXT and PSELFEXT loss.

.5 Worst case electrical performance characteristics shall be as follows:



.1 Characteristic Impedance: 100 ± 15Ω (1.0-100 MHz) - 100 ± 20Ω (101-250 MHz)

.2 Maximum Conductor Resistance: 9.38Ω /100 Meters @ 20°C

.3 Maximum Resistance Unbalance: 3%

.4 Maximum Mutual Capacitance: 5.6 nF/100 Meters @ 1 kHz

.5 Maximum Capacitance Unbalance: 330 pF/100 Meters

.6 Maximum Delay Skew: 45 ns/100 Meters

.6 The manufacturer shall provide Category 6 component compliance certificates from third party testing organization upon request.

.7 Cable shall be UL and C(UL) listed.

.8 Cable shall exceed IEEE 802.3af DTE Power specification to 4 times the rated current limits with no degradation of performance or materials.

.9 Cable shall be third party verified, error free Gigabit Ethernet performance to IEEE 802.3ab.

.10 Cable shall exceed the requirements of TIA/TSB-155: 10 Gb/s Ethernet Operation over 55 Meters Channel Length.

.11 Cable shall meet or exceed the 4-connector channel performance requirements of Category 6, per the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 standard.

.12 The 4-connector channel test configuration shall utilize Category 6 jacks and patch panels, with Category 6 patch cords, from the same manufacturer, with qualified Category 6 cable.

.13 The 4-connector channel performance margins in the table below shall be guaranteed, provided the configuration satisfies requirement No. 12 above.

Electrical Parameter (1 - 250MHz)

Guaranteed Margins to Category 6 / Class E Channel

Specifications

Insertion Loss 3 %

NEXT 4 dB

PSNEXT 5 dB

ELFEXT 4 dB

PSELFEXT 5 dB

Return Loss 2 dB

2.7 Equipment Cabinet

.1 Provide equipment cabinets (2) for installation of telecommunication cabling equipment. Cabinets shall be as manufactured by R.F. Mote or approved equivalent. Provide the following for each of two cabinets:

.1 R.F. Mote 30” (762mm) Universal Cabinet, 30”x30”x83”, 19” mounting, 44U space. RFM-303083-U-19

.2 Lockable smoke acrylic front door.

.3 Lockable louvered rear door.



.4 Lockable lift off side panels; note.

.5 Top complete with 6 fan openings. Provide two exhaust fans in each cabinet (71cfm per fan) with thermostatic control.

.6 4 mounting angles punched to EIA universal spacing, tapped #10-32.

.7 2 packages (24/package) #10-32 screws

.8 Adjustable levelling feet

.9 Horizontal mounted power bar (6 outlets, 20Amp rated, 5-20RA configuration)

.10 Cable management (vertical and horizontal)

.11 Fixed shelves (2 required per cabinet)

.12 Retractable LCD monitor keyboard shelf (one only, required in one of two cabinets). Equipped with keyboard c/w touchpad and 17” LCD monitor. RFM- RLMKS.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Cat 6 Cable

.1 Preparation

.1 Horizontal pathways (conduit, cable tray, raceway, etc.) shall be fully deployed from the Server Room (rack) to each wall plate location.

.2 Metallic horizontal cable pathways shall be bonded to an approved ground according to ANSI-J-STD-607.

.2 Installation

.1 Pull cable into conduits, or place into raceway or cable tray as specified. Do not exceed 25 Lb. pull force per cable. Use appropriate lubricants as required to reduce pulling friction.

.2 All exposed wiring shall be installed in surface raceway.

.3 All wiring above ceilings or below access floors shall be installed in cable tray or open-top cable hangers.

.4 Cable slack and service loops shall be stored properly above the ceiling or under the access floor. A “figure-eight” service loop is recommended for Category 6 cabling to reduce EMI coupling.

.5 Pathway fill ratio in conduit, tray, raceway, etc. shall not exceed 40% of pathway cross-sectional area.

.6 Installed cable bend radius shall be greater than 4X cable diameter. Avoid kinking or twisting the cable during installation.

.7 Do not over-tighten cable ties, and do not use staples or clamps to anchor cables. Velcro straps are recommended.

.8 Recommended spacing of cable supports above the ceiling shall be 48”.

.9 Maintain the following clearances from EMI sources:

.1 Power cable: 6 in.

.2 Florescent lights: 12 in.

.3 Transformers and electrical service enclosures: 36 in.

.10 Communications cabling that must cross power cables or conduit shall cross at a 90-degree angle, and shall not make physical contact.



.11 Length of each horizontal cable run from the Server Room (rack) to the wall outlet shall not exceed 90 meters.

.12 Leave sufficient slack for 90 degree sweeps at all vertical drops.

.13 Do not install cable in wet areas, or in proximity to hot water pipes or boilers.

.14 Cable ends for termination shall be clean and free from crush marks, cuts, or kinks left from pulling operations.

.15 Installed cable jackets shall have no abrasions with exposed conductor insulation or bare copper ‘shiners”. The installer is responsible to replace damaged cables.

.16 Horizontal cables extending from mounted jacks or panels shall maintain a minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter.

.17 Firestop all cable penetrations through fire-rated barriers.

3.2 Category 6 Modular Jacks

.1 Preparation

.1 Horizontal cabling of the proper category shall be fully deployed from the Server Room (rack) to each wall plate location.

.2 Cable slack, service loops, bend radii, and pathway fill ratio shall comply with applicable codes and standards.

.3 Cable ends for termination shall be clean and free from crush marks, cuts, or kinks left from pulling operations.

.2 Installation

.1 Terminate jacks according to manufacturer’s instructions.

.2 To maximize transmission performance, maintain wiring pair twists as close as possible to the point of termination.

.3 The length of wiring pair un-twist in each termination shall be less than 0.5 inches (13 mm).

.4 Jacks shall be properly mounted in plates, frames, or housings with stuffer cap fully installed over IDC contacts.

.5 Horizontal cables extending from mounted jacks shall maintain a minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter.

.6 Cable terminations shall have no tensile or bending strain on IDC contacts after assembly of faceplate or housing to the wall outlet.

3.3 Modular Faceplates: Rear Loading

.1 Installation

.1 Install jacks and connector snap-fittings into faceplate according to contract drawings.

.2 Mount loaded faceplate carefully to the outlet box or ring. Avoid kinking, crushing, or over-bending cables in the outlet when mounting faceplate.

.3 Horizontal cables extending from the mounted jacks in the outlet shall maintain a minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter.

.4 Cable terminations shall have no tensile or bending strain on IDC contacts after assembly of faceplate to the wall outlet.

.5 When using an outlet box, carefully coil and store cable slack behind the faceplate such that cable minimum bend radius is maintained per the following specifications:



.1 UTP cable: minimum bend radius of 4 times the cable diameter.

.6 When permitted in the construction documents, a box eliminator insert is recommended for faceplate mounting to avoid coiling of cable slack in the outlet box. This method is preferred to optimize cable transmission performance.

.7 Fasten the faceplate securely to the outlet using the #6-32 screws provided.

.8 Label each port on the faceplate according to ANSI/TIA/EIA-606-A standard.

.9 All unused ports or plate openings shall be filled with blank inserts.

.10 Install dust caps on exposed jacks or connectors where applicable.

3.4 Category 6 Patch Panels

.1 Installation

.1 Properly mount patch panels into the designated rack, cabinet, or bracket locations with the #12-24 screws provided.

.2 Terminate cables into the patch panel according to manufacturer’s instructions.

.3 To maximize transmission performance, maintain wiring pair twists as close as possible to the point of termination.

.4 The length of wiring pair un-twist in each termination shall be less than 0.5 inches (13 mm).

.5 Horizontal or backbone cables extending from the panel terminations shall maintain a minimum bend radius of at least 4 times the cable diameter.

.6 Cable terminations shall have no tensile or bending strain on panel IDC contacts in each installed location.

.7 For horizontal cabling, jacks shall be terminated with faceplates assembled complete and properly mounted.

.8 Consolidation point equipment, where applicable, shall also be fully installed and terminated prior to testing.

.9 Panels shall be properly labelled on front and back with the cable number and port connections for each port.

3.5 Category 6 Patch Cords

.1 Installation

.1 Remove patch cords from bags and apply channel or port identification labels per specification. Patch cord lengths should match the distance between connection points, with enough slack for cable management and bend radius control.

.2 For cross-connect panels in the Server Room, place the patch cords properly into the installed front cable organizer. Plug each end into the respective panel and equipment ports. Push the plug into the receptacle until the latch clicks into position. Installed patch cords should be neat, with no kinks, tangles, or tight bends.

.3 To connect workstation equipment to the Telecommunication Outlet, route the patch cord behind furniture and plug into the network port. Patch cords should not interfere with the operator space or electrical cords. (Note: workstation cords are normally installed after placement of office furniture).

3.6 Field Quality Control – Testing

.1 Cables are tested in the fully terminated condition, as part of the installed horizontal cabling system. Jacks in the wall outlet, and panels in the Server Room are to be terminated complete, with faceplates assembled complete and properly mounted.



.2 Jacks shall be tested as part of the installed horizontal cabling system, with faceplates assembled complete and properly mounted; refer to cable testing detailed above.

.3 Patch panels shall be tested as part of the installed horizontal or backbone cabling system.

.4 Each link or channel in the horizontal cabling system shall be identified and tested individually, using an industry standard level III tester with correct settings.

.5 Test cables in the horizontal channel or link for the parameters listed below.

Wire Map / Continuity Length Insertion Loss

NEXT PSNEXT ELFEXT

PSELFEXT Delay and Delay Skew Return Loss

.6 A “PASS” indication shall be obtained for each channel or link, using a level III tester. The installer is responsible to correct any test failures.

.7 Completed test reports shall be submitted with contract close out documents.


Earthwork Section 31 00 00 Page 1 of 4


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Excavation and grading shall include the furnishing of all labour, materials and equipment to perform the work as indicated on the drawings and briefly described as follows:

.1 Protection and maintenance of existing services and property adjacent to the site.

.2 Removal of existing fill, topsoil, softened or disturbed material sand, gravel, brick, concrete, etc., storing clean topsoil and regrading as required by the project. Reuse of top soil must be approved by Geotech consultant. Construction for Topsoil shall conform to OPSS 802. Any excess/unapproved material not required in final grading to be removed from the site and disposed of by this Section.

.3 All necessary excavation for foundations, footings, stepped footings, thickened slab, loading and disposal of material, as required by the project.

.4 Proof-rolling of exposed sub-grade for all building areas before granular sub-base or base is placed using non-vibratory steel wheel roller.

.5 Placing and compacting of granular fill for interior and exterior building areas.

.6 Placing and compacting fill of excavated areas around completed work to finish grades as indicated on drawings.

.7 Stripping, placing and compacting of granular fill to finish sub base grades for asphalt paving and base course that is specified under Section 2B.

.8 Placing and compacting of granular fill at exterior areas as specified and required under slabs on grade, walks, etc.

.9 Design and installation of shoring, sheeting and bracing of soil prior to excavation and removal after backfilling.

.2 Unless noted otherwise all OPSS standards referenced in this specification shall be municipal-oriented specifications (OPSS. MUNI). When there is not a corresponding municipal-oriented specification, there references shall be considered to be OPSS listed.

1.2 Protection

.1 The Contractor shall protect existing buildings and adjacent property from any damage caused by this operation.

1.3 Coordination

.1 Prior to the commencement of construction, the Site Contractor shall review all site plans from different disciplines of the project to coordinate all site elements.

1.4 Existing Utilities

.1 Prior to commencing any excavation work, the Contractor shall establish as near as possible the location and state of use of all buried utilities or services as shown on drawings or known to be in existence. The locations shall be clearly and unmistakably marked to prevent accidental disturbance during the work.

1.5 Soil Investigation

.1 A copy of a detailed geotechnical investigation report is included herein, titled as Geotechnical Investigation Report Proposed Library Addition Optimist Community Center Windsor, Ontario. Dated June 10, 2016.

.2 This information is made available solely as a guide and no responsibility is accepted by the Consultant or Owner for its correctness, nor shall its accuracy or otherwise affect the provisions of the contract



1.6 Shoring and Bracing

.1 Provide approved shoring and bracing as required to prevent settlement, caving of banks, protection of existing District Energy Services, protection of existing hydro duck banks, etc. Shoring and other temporary work shall be so placed so as to not interfere with permanent work remaining in place until backfilling is done and removed in sections.

.2 This Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from improper or inadequate protection, and all excavations must conform to all governing codes and regulations.

.3 Comply with: Construction Safety Act, Trench Excavator’s Section for Shoring Requirements and the Ontario Building Code.

1.7 Protection from Weathering

.1 Protect excavated banks, floors, etc. against freezing. In cases where bearing earth is allowed to freeze, it shall be removed and replaced with approved fill.

.2 Keep excavations free from water and frost by providing and operating pumps to remove water a sufficient distance away to keep excavations dry. Do not allow water to wash freshly laid concrete or masonry.

1.8 Cooperation

.1 This Contractor shall make himself familiar with the work of other Contractors working in conjunction with his work and shall assist in such work as must be done together.

1.9 Lines

.1 All lines and levels for the excavation will be furnished by the General Contractor.

1.10 Unit Prices

.1 Provide unit prices as per the Instructions to bidders.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Granular Fill Material

.1 Type “A” shall be granular “A” material that meets Ontario Specifications 1010 for granular “A” material.

.2 Type “B” shall be granular “B,” Type I or Type 2 as indicated on the drawings and shall meet Ontario Specifications 1010 for granular “B” material. Recycled material is not allowed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination of Site

.1 Contractor shall visit the site to ascertain special conditions, which affect his work.

3.2 Stripping

.1 Strip building site to remove the existing topsoil and fill materials down to adequate sub-grade, as indicated on the bore holes/drawings. Topsoil shall be removed carefully in the work areas and shall not be mixed with subsoil or other materials. Stripping of top soil shall be according to OPSS 206.

.2 Stockpile required quantity of reusable topsoil for redistribution and dispose of excess material. Stockpiling of top soil shall be according to OPSS 802. The reuse of top soil must be approved by a Geo technical Consultant.

.3 When the site has been stripped, the Contractor shall have the area inspected by the retained third party testing and inspection Consultant before proceeding with excavation for footings and foundations.



.4 In addition, the Contractor shall proof roll with non-vibratory steel wheel roller exposed subgrade below floor slabs under the direction of the third party testing and inspection Consultant.

3.3 Excavation

.1 Excavation shall be made to elevations indicated on drawings and all dimensions indicated or required by the work plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms, shoring and inspection of foundations.

.2 All lines and levels for excavations will be furnished by the General Contractor.

.1 Excavating shall be done in a manner that will prevent any settlement or movement of banks.

.2 Excavate for footings, foundations, etc., and as noted on drawings.

.3 Footings to be placed on stiff undisturbed approved earth. Excavations for all footings and foundations shall be carried to solid bottoms. If satisfactory load bearing solid is not reached at depths indicated, the excavations shall be extended deeper as directed by the Owner’s Representative and the additional work will be paid for in accordance with prices given in contract, but price per cubic yard must be agreed upon before the work is done.

3.4 Shoring and Sheeting

.1 Design, coordinate and submit shoring and sheeting drawings as required to prevent settlement, caving of banks, support and protection of existing District Energy Services, support and protection of existing hydro duct banks, etc. Be responsible for any damage resulting from improper, inadequate protection. The design shall include welded ties or other means necessary for the connection of formwork where necessary.

.2 The Contractor shall retain a professional engineer to design and prepare drawings complete with design loads and other design criteria for the design or shoring and sheeting required for the project where noted on the drawings. All materials and methods for installing the shoring and sheeting shall be indicated. Submit drawings stamped by a professional engineer licensed in the Province of Ontario for the design of the shoring and sheeting required for the project.

.3 Wales, struts, shoring, timers, steel and other items used in the construction of the shoring or sheeting where required to complete excavation work for this project shall be entirely satisfactory for the project and removed from the site at the completion of the work.

.4 The bracing and shoring strutting shall be as required by the job conditions and the requirements of the Ontario Building Code and Construction Safety Act. Trench Excavator’s Act Section for Shoring Requirements and other legislation governing work carried out in excavations and cofferdams.

.5 Shoring and other temporary work shall be so placed that it will not interfere with new permanent work.

.6 Leave shoring in place until backfilling of lean concrete, granular material, etc. is done and then remove it in sections in approved engineering principles.

.7 Make good any damaged resulting from failure of supports or lack of making necessary provisions to prevent settlement, caving or other damage. Any damage done to existing utilities shall be repaired at the contractor’s expense.

3.5 Removal of Obstructions

.1 The Contractor shall remove all existing obstructions as required for new construction and all other obstructions of whatever nature encountered, (e.g. existing roots, boulders, etc.) in the course of excavation.

3.6 Unauthorized Excavation



.1 Excavation to a greater than required depth shall be correct by the Contractor at his own expense by use of concrete or by other means as directed by the Consultants after an inspection of the conditions.

3.7 Placing and Compaction of Fill

.1 All exposed soil shall be compacted using heavy vibratory steel drum roller to the satisfaction of the retained testing and inspection consultant. The inspector shall conduct random Quality Assurance (QA) grade checks as per OPSS 206.

.2 All interior wall side backfill, under floor slabs, etc. to be backfilled with a sub-base of Granular ‘B’ Type 1 or Type 2 Material compacted to 98% of its Standard Proctor maximum dry density and a top layer of 10” minimum well compacted granular Type “A” material, all to O.P.S.S. 1010 compressed to 100% of its Standard Proctor maximum dry density.

.3 Exterior side foundation wall back fill under concrete walks, etc. other than paved areas to be backfilled with Granular “B” Type 1 compacted to 98% of its Standard Proctor maximum dry density and have top 6” below slabs backfilled with Granular “A” material, compacted to 100% Standard Proctor maximum density.

.4 Backfill under interior floor slab shall consist of:

.1 Granular ‘A’ material right under the floor slab, compacted to 100% of its SPMDD depth as indicated on drawings.

.2 Granular ‘B’ type 1 or type 2 from U/S of Granular ‘A’ down to bottom of excavation compacted to 98% of its SPMDD depth as indicated on drawings.

.5 All interior and exterior backfill of granular material shall be laid in 250mm layers compressed at 98% for sub-base and 100% for base fill of their Standard Proctor maximum dry density as indicated in (a) proceeding. Earth fill in landscaped areas to be 93% of optimum standard proctor density.

.6 Tamp all fillings in thin layers and take special care to tamp and puddle filling outside of enclosing walls and around edges of foundation mats and other foundations.

.7 Where any excavation is necessary (by this Contractor, Mechanical or Electrical), in close proximity to and below any footings, the Contractor shall backfill with 10 MPa concrete to the level of the top of the adjacent footing.


.1 A Proctor Test by an independent testing company approved by the Consultant shall be taken on all interior fill at the rate of one for every 50 square meters of floor area. Areas that fail shall be re-compacted and re-tested until a successful proctor test is achieved.

.2 Results of all tests must be forwarded to the Consultant for approval before construction can proceed in the compacted areas.

.3 All stripped areas for building areas to be inspected by a Testing and Inspection Consultant during the proof-rolling process.

.4 All footing excavations shall be inspected by the Testing and Inspection Consultant a prior to any placement of concrete in excavated areas.

.5 This Contractor shall make all arrangements with Owner appointed testing company for tests and inspections.

.6 The first retest (after the remedial work is completed) in any failed areas is covered under testing allowance. However, any subsequent retests (when the contractor failed to complete remedial work up to the satisfaction) shall be paid by the contractor


Excavation Backfill and Grading Section 31 23 00 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 Excavation, backfill and grading shall include the furnishing of all labour, materials and equipment to perform the work as indicated on the drawings and briefly described as follows:

.1 Protection and maintenance of existing services and property adjacent to the site.

.2 Stripping of asphalt paving, top soil, sub surface as required by the work.

.3 Excavating, loading, redistribution and/or disposal of all materials as required by the work.

.4 All necessary excavation for foundations, footings, etc., loading and disposal of material, as required by work.

.5 Proof-rolling of all exposed sub-grade for road before granular sub-base or base is placed using non-vibratory steel wheel roller.

.6 Removal of existing items and fill with Granular “A” (O.P.S.S. 1010) compacted to 98% of its Standard Proctor maximum dry density to the designed elevations.

.7 All necessary excavation for sewers, structures, utilities, etc., loading, and disposal of material, as required by work. Site preparation for sewer pipelines, utilities and associated structures shall be according to OPSS 490.

.8 Placing and compacting of granular fill. Compaction shall conform to OPSS 501.

.9 Placing and compacting fill of excavated areas around completed work to finish grades as indicated on drawings.

.10 Placing and compacting of granular fill at exterior areas as specified and required under sidewalks, curbs, new asphalt, etc.

.11 Exterior grading, as indicated on drawings, redistribution of clean earth fill and topsoil (new and existing) to new finish grades as indicated on drawings.

.12 Coordinate Inspection and testing with Owner appointed agency.

.13 Stripping, placing and compacting of all granular fill to finish grades for asphalt paving that is specified under Section 31 23 00.

.14 All rough grading to levels, profiles and contours for surface treatments and drainage.

.15 Sawcut existing asphalt paving for patching along all new to existing pavements.

.16 Storm sewer lines including connecting new catch basins, cleanouts, and accessories to connect to the existing storm sewer.

.17 Removal of existing obstructions (e.g. trees, stumps etc.).

.18 Installation of non-woven geotextile on sub-grade before the placement of granular material.

.2 Unless noted otherwise all OPSS standards referenced in this specification shall be municipal-oriented specifications (OPSS. MUNI). When a corresponding municipal-oriented specification is not available, there references shall be considered to be OPSS. PROV listed.

1.2 Related Work

.1 Section 02 41 00 – Selective Demolition

.2 Division 32 – Exterior Improvements



1.3 Protection

.1 The Contractor shall protect existing buildings and adjacent property from any damage caused by his operation.

1.4 Existing Utilities, Etc.

.1 Prior to commencing any excavation work, the Contractor shall establish as near as possible the location and state of use of all buried utilities or services as shown on drawings or know to be in existence. The locations shall be clearly and unmistakably marked to prevent accidental disturbance during the work.

1.5 Shoring and Bracing

.1 Provide approved shoring and bracing as required to prevent settlement, caving of banks, etc. Shoring and other temporary work shall be so placed so as to not interfere with new permanent work remaining in place until backfilling is done and removed in sections. This Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from improper or inadequate protection, and all excavations must conform to all governing codes and regulations. Refer to Section 31 00 00.

.2 Construction Safety Act, Trench Excavator’s Section for Shoring Requirements and the Ontario Building Code.

1.6 Protection from Weathering

.1 Protect excavated banks, floors, etc. against freezing. In cases where bearing earth is allowed to freeze, it shall be removed and replaced with approved fill.

.2 Keep excavations free from water providing and operating pumps to conduct water a sufficient distance away to keep excavations dry. Do not allow water to wash freshly laid concrete or masonry.

1.7 Co-Operation

.1 This Contractor shall make himself familiar with the work of other Contractors working in conjunction with his work and shall assist in such work as must be done together.

1.8 Lines

.1 The Construction Manager will engage the services of an Ontario Land Surveyor to provide and stake the property, building location and establish bench marks to the site for reference of the Site work Contractor.

.2 The Site Work Contractor shall then be responsible for all lines and levels relating to his scope of work.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Granular Fill Material

.1 Type ‘A’ shall be granular ‘A’ material that meets Ontario Specifications 1010 for granular ‘A’ material.

.2 Type ‘B’ shall be granular ‘B’ material that meets Ontario Specifications 1010 for granular ‘B’, Type 1 & Type 2 material as specified.

2.2 Non-Woven Geotextile

.1 Non-woven geotextile to be installed on the sub-grade of all asphalt paved area’s shall be by Terrafix Geosynthetics Inc. model 270R. Material Shall conform to OPSS 1860.

2.3 Sewer Pipes Non-Pressure Applications

.1 Sewer pipe to sizes indicated on drawings. Pipe Material shall conform to OPSS 1841.

.1 P.V.C. Sewer Pipe and fittings, meeting C.S.A. Standards B182.2 06, PSM TYPE. Pipe Diameters and SDR shall be as indicated in Civil notes and Civil Drawings.

.2 When Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) is used the PVC pipe shall be TerraBrute® CR Restrained Joint PVC pipe (CIOD) by IPEX.

.2 All pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with A.S.T.M. Standard Specifications.

2.4 Sewer Pipes Pressure Applications

.1 All Water Pipes between 4” [100 mm] to 12” [300 mm] dia to be PVC class 150 DR-18 (Pressure rated 235 Psi). Shall conform to CSA B137.3, AWWA C-900; capped at factory blue in color

.1 When Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) is used the PVC pipe shall be TerraBrute® CR Restrained Joint PVC pipe (CIOD) by IPEX.

.2 All water PVC bends, tees, reducers and crossers shall conform to PVC AWWA C-907 Class 150, CSA B137.2, UL listed and FM approved.

2.5 Drain Tile

.1 Shall be perforated, corrugated plastic sub-drains with geotextile cover, Big-O drain tile with filter sock or equivalent. Drain shall be to size indicated on drawings and shall be assembled complete with manufacturer's couplings and fittings including corners.

2.6 Catch Basins

.1 Catch basins shall be precast concrete catch basins with standard cast iron frame and cover and sub drains and all necessary drainage fittings.

.2 All catch basins to be provided with grade ring adjustment units.

.3 Catch basins shall conform to OPSS Standards (OPSS 1351, 1850).

2.7 Manholes

.1 Manholes shall be made of precast concrete manhole sections in accordance with OPSS 1351. Manhole to be complete with precast concrete base and standard cast iron cover and frame (OPSS 1850) and 19mm aluminum rung steps on inside face as detailed.

.2 Manholes to be provided with precast concrete grade adjustment units.

.3 The manufacturer producing precast reinforced concrete components for maintenance holes, catch basins shall possess a current prequalification Certificate issued under the Plant Prequalification program as outlined in the publication Prequalification requirements for precast concrete drainage products



PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Contractor shall visit the site to ascertain special conditions which affect his work.

3.2 Stripping

.1 Strip site to remove the existing asphalt concrete paving, gravel, clay with organics or silty clay as indicated. The entire site is to be stripped as required and all material removed from site.

.2 When the site has been stripped, the Contractor shall have the area inspected by Geotechnical Engineer before proceeding with excavation for footings and foundations.

.3 Proof-roll exposed sub-grade for all building and areas to be paved using a non-vibratory steel smooth drum roller in the presence of the Geotechnical Engineer. Give adequate notice to testing company prior to proof-rolling. Any softened areas encountered shall be removed under the direction of the Testing and Inspection Consultant and the Consultant shall be notified. Do additional work as extras to contract based on unit prices.

.4 The subgrade for paved areas to be sloped to the catch basin locations as indicated on drawings.

.5 In order to protect the integrity of the foundation soils, which are susceptible to disturbance and contact with water and if excavations are not completed as dry, the excavation shall be protected with a 50mm lean concrete mud mat.

3.3 Excavation

.1 Excavation shall be made to elevations and dimensions indicated or required by the work plus sufficient space to permit erection of forms, shoring and inspection of foundations, drains, pads, etc.

.2 All excavation shall be carried out with a smooth edge bucket.

.3 All lines and levels for excavations will be furnished by the General Contractor.

.4 Note:

.1 Proof-roll sub grade under areas with non-vibratory steel roller.

.2 Excavating shall be done in a manner that will prevent any settlement or movement of banks.

.3 Excavate for exterior sewers, catch basin, curbs, all concrete platforms, footings, foundations, etc. and as noted on drawings.

3.4 Removal of Obstructions

.1 The Contractor shall remove all existing obstructions as required for new construction and all other obstructions of whatever nature encountered (e.g.: trees, bush, existing roots, boulders, etc. in the course of excavation.

3.5 Unauthorized Excavation

.1 Excavation to a greater than required depth shall be corrected by the Contractor at his own expense by use of concrete or by other means as directed by the Engineer after an inspection of the conditions.

3.6 Notification of Authorities

.1 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer, Building Inspector and any other agency having jurisdiction that the excavation for foundations is ready for inspection. All approvals must be obtained before placing foundations.

.2 Notify local Utilities Commission in advance of watermain work.



3.7 Installation of Non-Woven Geotextile

.1 Install Terrafix Non-Woven Geotextile model 270R on the proof rolled and approved sub-grade of all asphalt paved areas. Material shall conform to OPSS 1860.

3.8 Placing and Compaction of Fill

.1 Exterior side foundation wall backfill under concrete walks, platforms, etc. other than paved areas to be backfilled with Granular ‘A’, compacted to 100% of its standard Proctor modified dry density.

.2 All exterior concrete pavement shall be placed on a granular ‘A’ meeting Ontario Provincial Specification 1010. The granular ‘A’ base for concrete paving shall be 300mm thick minimum.

.3 Backfilling under areas to be landscaped to be backfilled with clean earth fill, (after being stripped) and 150mm minimum top soil distributed over the areas to be seeded or sodded.

.4 All exterior backfill of granular material shall be laid in 250mm loose lifts and layers compressed to 100% of optimum standard proctor density, except earth fill in landscaped areas to be 93% of optimum standard proctor maximum dry density.

.5 After all stripping, excavation, proof-rolling, under areas to be paved, this Contractor shall backfill to the level of the underside of the finish asphalt paving with granular material to Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications 1010. All granular material to be compacted to 100% of its maximum Standard Proctor density.

.6 Tamp all fillings in thin layers and take special care to tamp and puddle filling outside of enclosing walls and around edges of foundations mats and other foundations.

.7 Excavating for trenches for electrical and other pipe lines will be done by the Contractor whose work requires it, but this Contractor shall supervise the work so that concrete slabs on the ground will have proper foundations.

3.9 Grading

.1 Elevations of floor and grade lines marked on the drawings indicate the heights in relation to data given on plans or at site. Finished grade elevations given are to top of finished gravel surfaces, landscaping or asphalt.

.2 If fill or granular material is required to bring existing grades to finish grades, this Contractor shall supply all additional fill required.

.3 Rough grade to levels, profiles and contours allowing for surface treatment indicated.


.1 A proctor test by an independent testing company approved by the owner shall be taken on all exterior fill areas under pavings at a rate of one test for every 100 square meters. Areas that fail shall be re-compacted and re-tested until a successful proctor test is achieved.

.2 Results of all tests must be forwarded to the Consultant and the Construction Manager for approval before construction can proceed on compacted areas.

.3 All stripped areas for building areas to be inspected by a Geotechnical Engineer during the proof-rolling process.

.4 All footing excavations shall be inspected by the project Engineer prior to any placement of concrete in excavated areas. Work in conjunction with the Construction Manager and the concrete contractor.

.5 This Contractor shall make all arrangements with testing company appointed by owner for tests and inspections.

3.11 Excess Material



.1 All excess topsoil material not required for backfilling or grading shall be removed from the property.

.2 Existing parking lot paving and roads, damaged by this operation shall be repaired and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, if required by local authority, shall be obtained by the Contractor.

3.12 Sewers

.1 Provide and install sewers to size as indicated on drawings. Construction shall generally conform to Division 4 of OPSS (OPSS 401, 402, 405, 410, 411, 490 and 492).

.2 Storm, Sanitary and Water tie-ins shall be provided at approximately 5’ [1.525 m] from the building for Mechanical Contractor to tie-in. Relocate catch basins, terminate and connect to existing sewer lines as indicated on drawings.

.3 All work to be done in accordance with the Construction Safety Act, Trench Excavator’s Section and municipal standards and regulations.

.4 Check existing elevations and invert of existing sewers before any new sewer work is installed. Any variance in actual existing locations and inverts are to be reported to Consultant for his approval before work can start.

.5 Installation for sewers shall be made in strict accordance with municipal regulations and this Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits before proceeding with the work and do all the required restoration work to municipal roads and property required due to construction.

.1 Note: When sewers are installed using Horizontal Directional Drilling (HDD) all the construction shall conform to OPSS 450. The Contractor shall submit design documents, as applicable per section 450.04 of OPSS 450, prior to construction. The documents submitted shall include but not limited to a work plan, drilling fluid management plan, safety plan.

.6 M.T.C. Form 406 shall apply and govern all supply and placement of sewer pipes to sizes and locations as indicated on drawings.

.7 All pipe shall be laid at a uniform grade on a compacted sand bed on solid bed of undisturbed earth or granular ‘A’ fill compacted to 98% modified proctor, dry density cutout at the couplings and fittings so that each piece is supported throughout its entire length. All sewers (sanitary and storm) under paving, walks, slabs, etc. to be backfilled with compacted granular ‘A’ and granular ‘B’ material to O.P.S.S. 1010.

.8 Construction of sewers shall conform to OPSS 410, 441. When the invert of a pipe sewer is raised or lowered by 150 MM or less shall not constitute a change in the work and no adjustment shall be made to the payment. Trenching, backfilling and Compacting shall conform to OPSS 401.

.9 All work to be done in accordance with the Construction Safety Act, Trench Excavator’s Section.

.10 Complete sewer installation must be approved by the Municipality and installed in accordance to its governing rules and regulations.

.11 Post installation all sewers shall be cleaned and flushed. The cleaning and flushing of pipe sewers, catch basins, maintenance holes and oil-grit separators shall conform to OPSS 411.

3.13 Catch Basins

.1 This Contractor shall install precast concrete catch basins and do all excavating, backfilling and connecting sub drains and sewers to catch basins and install approved cast iron frames and covers as indicated on drawings.



.2 Installation shall conform to OPSS 407.

3.14 Manhole

.1 Install precast concrete manholes as indicated on drawings including all excavations, backfilling, concrete base and connecting sub drains and sewers to manhole and install standard cast iron frame and cover.

.2 Manhole shall be constructed in accordance with OPSD-701.01 and OPSD-701.03.

3.15 Exterior Drains

.1 Provide and install all 150mm diameter sub-drains at catch basins as indicated on drawings.

.2 OPSS 405 shall apply and govern this work except as amended herein.

.3 Where shown on the drawing, the Contractor shall supply and install perforated corrugated plastic subdrains with geotextile cover and connect to catch basins as indicated on drawings. The subdrains will be bedded in 20mm clear stone.

.4 All work shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's recommended installation procedures using all necessary fittings and accessories.

3.16 Cleaning

.1 Contractor shall be responsible for good housekeeping during the work of this section. All refuse must be removed from the site at least on a monthly basis.

.2 At completion, the entire site shall be cleaned of rubbish and debris and all earth areas shall be raked clean to the Architect’s satisfaction.


Trenching Section 31 23 16.13 Page 1 of 2


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Work Included

.1 Excavate trenches for utilities from outside building to municipal utilities.

.2 Compacted bedding under and fill over utilities to subgrade elevations.

.3 Backfilling and compaction.

1.2 Related Work

.1 Section 01 40 00 – Quality control.

.2 Section 03 00 00 – Concrete.

.3 Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Backfill & Grading

1.3 References

.1 ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates.

.2 ASTM D698 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures, Using 5.5 lb (2.49 kg) Rammer and 12 inch (304.8 mm) Drop.

1.4 Submittals


.2 Samples:

.1 Submit 4.5 kg sample of each type of fill to testing laboratory, in air-tight containers.

1.5 Field Measurements

.1 Verify that survey bench mark and intended elevations for the Work are as shown on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Fill Materials

.1 Type A material as specified in Section 31 23 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Examination

.1 Verify fill materials to be reused, are acceptable.

3.2 Preparation

.1 Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum.

3.3 Excavation

.1 Excavate subsoil required for storm sewer, sanitary sewer, water and gas piping to municipal utilities.

.2 Cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection.

.3 Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundation.

.4 Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter.

.5 Remove lumped subsoil, boulders, and rock.

.6 Correct unauthorized excavation at no cost to Owner.

.7 Stockpile excavated material in area designated on site and remove excess material not being used, from site.

Trenching Section 31 23 16.13 Page 2 of 2


3.4 Bedding

.1 .1 Support pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill.

3.5 Backfilling

.1 Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials.

.2 Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy subgrade surfaces.

.3 Granular Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 150 mm (6”) compacted depth.

.4 Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation perimeter drainage, conduit and ducts in trench.

.5 Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density.

.6 Remove surplus backfill materials from site.

.7 Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free excess fill materials.

3.6 Tolerances

.1 Top Surface of Backfilling: Plus or minus 25 mm (1”) from required elevations.


.1 Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00.

.2 Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698 and with Section 01 40 00.

.3 Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ASTM D698 and with Section 01 40 00.

.4 If tests indicate Work does not meet specified requirements, remove Work, replace and retest at no cost to Owner.

3.8 Protection of Finished Work

.1 Protect finished Work.

.2 Re-compact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.

3.9 Schedule

.1 Trenches:

.2 Bedding Fill: Type A, 200 mm (8”) thick, compacted to 100%.

.3 Cover with Type A fill, in 200 mm (8”) lifts, compacted to 100%.

.4 In areas where heavy loading is anticipated, compact to 100 % Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density.


Concrete Paving & Sidewalks Section 32 13 13 Page 1 of 7


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 The work under this section of the specifications shall include all labour, equipment and materials in the forming, handling, furnishing, placement and protection of all concrete work as indicated on the drawings and briefly described as follows:

.1 All concrete pavement, colored concrete, sidewalks, etc indicated on drawings.

.2 Formwork for concrete.

.3 All reinforcing steel, wire mesh, including ties, chairs, supports, spacers, stirrups, rebar, deformed tie bars, smooth load transfer bars and all require accessories.

.4 Expansion strips, pre molded expansion joints, saw cut control joints, etc.

.5 Finishing of all concrete pavement.

.6 Tactile Walking Surface Indicators (TWSI)

.7 Carborundum strips for steps.

1.2 Related Work

.1 Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Backfill & Grading.

.2 Section 10 28 00 – Misc. Accessories.

1.3 Standard Specifications

.1 Materials and methods of construction shall conform to CSA A23.1-09/A23.2-09, and by-laws of the local municipality. Work shall be supervised at all times and shall be performed by skilled and experienced workers.

.2 Wherever in these specifications methods of tests or standards are inferred to or implied and not otherwise specified, the latest A.S.T.M. dealing with such subjects shall be used.

.3 All work to be performed in compliance with Occupational Health & Safety Act Ont. Reg. 213/91.

1.4 Cold Weather Requirements

.1 When air temperature is at or below 5 degrees C. or there is a probability of it falling to that limit during the placing or curing period, cold weather requirements shall be applicable and shall be governed by CSA A23.1-09.

.2 Provide heating equipment and enclosures to maintain humidified air within the enclosures to keep the concrete above freezing temperature for seven days. Heating equipment inducing carbon monoxide gas in the building is not acceptable. Also concrete shall be protected from alternately freezing and thawing for a period of 14 days after placement.

.3 When placed, concrete shall have a temperature of not less than 5 degrees C. and not more than 27 degrees C. Accelerators or so called anti-freeze compounds shall not be permitted unless approved in writing by the Architect. All protective coverings shall be kept clear of the concrete and form surfaces to permit free circulation of air and shall be maintained intact for at least 24 hours after artificial heat is discontinued.

.4 Form must be clean of ice and snow. Use compressed air or other means to remove foreign matter.

1.5 Hot Weather Requirements

.1 Hot weather protection shall meet the requirements of CSA A23.1-09.



.2 When the air temperature exceeds 27 degrees C. hot weather requirements shall be applicable. The time of initial mixing to complete discharge shall not exceed one hour and fifteen minutes. Temperature of concrete as placed shall not exceed 27 degrees C.

.3 Concrete forming surfaces and reinforcing steel shall be sprinkled with cool water just prior to placing concrete but no standing water or puddles will be allowed.

.4 Slabs shall be kept damp continuously for 24 hours followed by normal curing procedures.

.5 Slabs may be cured by the application of a clear pigmented curing compound applied immediately after finishing of slab but before evaporation of surface moisture. The use of water reducing agents must be approved by the Architect when hot weather conditions prevail.

1.6 Mixing and Delivery

.1 Concrete shall be mixed in a mechanical batch mixer or a type approved by the Consultant and meeting the requirements of CSA A23.1-09.

.2 Mixing time shall conform to CSA A23.1-09. Mixers shall be rotated at the rate recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment.

.3 Concrete from the mechanical batch mixer shall be transported to the project site in agitating or non-agitating equipment conforming to CSA A23.1-09.

.4 Ready mixed or transit mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported in accordance with CSA A23.1-09.

.5 Each load of ready mixed or transit mixed concrete delivered to the project site shall be accompanied by duplicate delivery slips providing all information pertaining to each batch of concrete and/or as the Owner’s Representative may require.

1.7 Strength and Consistency

.1 Concrete materials shall be proportioned to provide a workable mix that can be handled, placed and worked into angles and corners of forms and around reinforcing steel and inserts. The mix proportion shall not be such that the concrete will easily segregate or cause excessive water to collect on the surface.

.2 The strength of concrete shall be considered to be its strength at 28 days.

1.8 Submittals


.2 Concrete Mix Designs.

.3 Shop Drawings: Reinforcing Steel and Formwork.

.1 Prepare, check and submit for review checked shop drawings including bar lists, bending and erection diagrams of all reinforced steel.


.1 Concrete testing will be by a third part testing and inspection agency. The contractor is responsible to notify the Engineer of concrete pours 24 hours in advance so that testing can be coordinated. Concrete testing will consist of the following:

.1 Cylinder moulds, sample the concrete, make and cure test cylinders and perform compressive strength tests in accordance with current CSA-A23.2-09 Standards.

.2 Slump tests and air content tests as required in accordance with current CSA-A23.2-09.

.3 Measure and record concrete temperature.



.4 A concrete test shall consist of four (4) cylinders properly labeled showing mix, location and date of pouring. Cylinders shall be cured under laboratory conditions. Contractor shall make provisions for initial curing of all cylinders a minimum of 24 hours.

.1 Provide facilities for storing specimens at the required temperature and in a location free from vibration or injury.

.2 Test one (1) cylinder at seven (7) days and two cylinders at 28 days. Should the 7 or 28 day test fail to meet the design strength, test the fourth (4th) cylinder at 90 to verify results.

.5 See architectural drawings for additional information and requirements.


.1 Reinforcing steel, welded wire, fabric accessories and other materials shall be delivered, handled and stored in such a manner which prevents contamination from bond reducing or foreign matter and damage to its fabricated form.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Form Materials

.1 Form materials for concrete surfaces which will be exposed to view or which required smooth and uniform surfaces for applied finished or other purposes shall consist of square edged smooth panels of plywood, metal or plastic. The panels shall be square and made in a true, plain, clean, free of holes, surface markings and defects.

.2 The quality and strength of formwork materials shall comply with the requirements set forth in this specification and CAN/CSA A23.1-94 and CAN/CSA-S269.2-M92.

2.2 Reinforcing Steel

.1 Fabricate reinforcing to CSA A23.1-09. Reinforcing steel unless otherwise noted on drawings shall be deformed bars of hard grade new billet steel (Fy = 400 MPa), conforming to the CAN/CSA G30.18-92. Bars welded to structural members shall be new hard grade billet weldable steel in accordance with CAN/CSA G30.18-92 (FY = 400 MPa-W).

.2 Fabrication and detailing of reinforcing steel shall be in accordance with the requirements of the latest edition of ACI 315 and to “Reinforcing Steel Manual for Standard Practice” by Reinforcing Steel Institute of Canada, latest edition unless otherwise detailed.

.3 All hard grade reinforcing bars shall be bent cold reinforcing bars.

.4 Reinforcing bars shall not be re-straightened or re-bent.

.5 Tie wires shall be 152 x 152 MW 18.7 x MW 18.7 or heavier annealed wire or a patented system approved by the Consultant.

.6 Reinforcing steel supports shall conform to ACI Standard 315 unless otherwise approved by the Consultant.

.7 Chairs, bolsters, bar supports, spacers shall be adequate for strength and support of reinforcing construction conditions.

.8 Obtain Consultant’s approval for location of reinforcement splices other than shown on steel placing drawings.

.9 Ship bundles of bar reinforcement, clearly identified in accordance with bar list.

.10 Supply all reinforcing bars for grouted masonry block walls where shown and detailed on the drawings.



2.3 Welded Wire Fabric

.1 Welded wire fabric shall conform to the current CSA Standard G30.5M-1983 (R1991). For slabs on grade and suspended slabs 152 x 152 MW 18.7 x MW 18.7 (6” x 6” #6/6).

.2 Welded wire fabric in the floor slab-on-grade must be supported on chairs. Lifting of the welded wire fabric during the concrete pour is not permitted.

2.4 Expansion Joint Strips

.1 Expansion joint strips shall be 12.7 mm (½”) thick fibre expansion joint filler to ASTM D994.

2.5 Cement

.1 Cement shall conform to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-A5/A8/A369-93 Type 10 as scheduled under Strength of Concrete unless otherwise noted.

2.6 Pigment for Coloured Concrete (where applicable)

.1 Integral color pigment shall be by Davis Colors or approved Manufacturer. Dosing shall be in accordance with Manufacture’s recommendations.

2.7 Aggregates

.1 Aggregate shall conform to CSA A23.1-09.

2.8 Water


2.9 Admixtures

.1 Admixtures shall not be used unless prior written approval is obtained from the Consultant. All admixtures shall conform to the appropriate A.S.T.M. and CSA Standards. Air entraining admixtures and chemical admixtures shall conform to the requirements of the latest issue of CSA-A266.1-M78.

.2 For slabs on grade, mid-range water-reducing admixture, conforming to the requirements of the latest issue of CSA-266.6-M85 and ASTM-C494, Type A.

.1 Acceptable Product: Master Builders Technologies Limited, Polyheed at a mixing rate of 10 fl. oz./cwt. cement.

.3 No other admixture shall be used, without the permission of the consultant.

2.10 Curing Compounds

.1 Curing compounds shall conform to the requirements of the latest issue of A.S.T.M. Standard C-309-72, Type 11 1220.

.2 For exterior concrete slab work curing compound shall be W.R. Meadows Sealtite white pigmented curing compound Conchem Promulsion 200, CPD White Cure (Water Emulsion) or Consultant’s approved equal. Concrete curing treatment must be applied in strict accordance to manufacturer’s labeled instructions.

2.11 Strength of Concrete

.1 Proportion normal density concrete to CSA A23.1-09 except as specified otherwise.

.2 Unless otherwise noted compressive strength of concrete at 28 days shall be as follows:

.1 Concrete pavement & sidewalks, 32 MPa

.3 All exterior concrete shall have 5% to 8% air entrainment.

.4 Maximum Water/Cementing Materials Ratio:

.1 Exterior concrete 0.45.



.5 Exterior concrete with maximum water/cementing materials ratio 0.45, see General Notes on drawings.

.6 All concrete shall develop 75% of ultimate strength at 7 days.

.7 Slump for concrete 80 mm before the addition of any water reducing admixtures or concrete specified without admixture. Slump tolerance ± 30 mm.

2.12 Tactile Walking Surface Indicator (TWSI) – Cast in Place

.1 Kinesik Engineered Products. “Access Tile” Tactile System. Or approved equal.

.2 All locations indicated on Drawing A101. Note due to slope of concrete, configuration may need to be installed in multiple tiles. Colour: To be verified.

2.13 Carborundum Non Slip Strips (Location: all exterior steps)

.1 Aggregate: Aluminum oxide granules with epoxy binder, Colour: Dark Grey.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Construction shall generally conform to OPSS 351.

3.2 Samples for Coloured Concrete

.1 Samples of coloured concrete shall be cast in the field and approved by the consultants before proceeding. Samples shall be 48” x 48” and shall remain in place until the completion of the project. Samples shall be disposed when no longer required.

3.3 Placement of Reinforcement

.1 Reinforcement of the size and shapes shown on the drawings shall be accurately placed in accordance with the approved placement drawings, the structural drawings and the requirements of CSA A23.1-09.

.2 Reinforcement including wire mesh shall be adequately supported by metal chairs, spacers or hangers and secured against displacement within the tolerances permitted and in accordance with the latest A.C.I. Standard 315. Lifting of wire mesh during the pouring of the floor slab on grade is not permitted.

.3 Mechanical splices subject to the approval of the Consultant.

.4 Obtain Consultant’s approval of reinforcing steel and placing before placing concrete.

3.4 Placement of Concrete

.1 Place concrete in accordance with CSA A23.1-09. Ensure reinforcement and inserts are not disturbed during concrete placement.

.2 Notify the Consultant and the independent testing agency at least 24 hours before any concreting operation is to proceed.

.3 Before beginning a run of concrete, hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner surface of the conveying equipment.

.4 Before depositing concrete, debris shall be removed from the space to be occupied by the concrete, reinforcing steel and forms accurately placed and secured in position. Clean reinforcing before placing concrete.

.5 When pouring concrete against previously poured work, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and roughened removing all latency and scum and coated with a paste of neat cement and water not more than 15 minutes in advance of depositing the new concrete.



.6 Colored concrete bands shall be dowelled to adjacent concrete paving with 15M epoxy coated rebar x 600mm long spaced at 300mm o.c. at mid-depth of slab.

.7 Concrete shall be conveyed to the place of final deposit by methods that will prevent segregation or loss of material keeping concrete sufficiently plastic to ensure proper bonding of successive layers or panels. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 900 mm.

.8 During placement, concrete shall be consolidated thoroughly and uniformly by means of tamping, hand tools, vibrators or finishing machines to secure dense, homogeneous structure, close bond with reinforcement and smooth formed surfaces. Extreme care shall be taken to ensure that internal type vibrators do not disturb the reinforcing steel or the forms.

.9 Maintain accurate records of concrete pours to indicate date, location of pour, quality, air temperature and test samples taken.

.10 Footings to be poured within the same day as exposure or a 50mm lean concrete mud mat shall be provided.

3.5 Curing and Protection

.1 Freshly placed concrete shall be protected from the effects of direct sunshine, drying winds, cold excessive heat and running water by the use of clear resin-based curing compound or adequate tarpaulins or other suitable material until the end of the curing period.

.2 All exposed non-formed surfaces shall be kept continuously moist for a minimum of seven consecutive days after placement of the concrete. Water shall be clean and free of any material that will cause staining or discoloration.

.3 Apply curing and sealing compound to all exterior concrete floors in strict accordance with manufacturer’s labeled instructions.

3.6 Construction Joints

.1 The location and detail of all construction joints not detailed on drawings shall be approved by the Engineer. Where fresh concrete is to be placed against concrete which has set or partially set concrete shall be roughened, cleaned of all latency and thoroughly soaked with water prior to the placement of fresh concrete.

3.7 Defective Concrete

.1 Concrete not meeting the requirements of the specifications and the drawings will be considered defective concrete and shall be modified or replaced at the Contractor’s expense and to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.2 Excessive honeycombing or other defects in critical areas of stress shall be repaired or replaced at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

.3 Concrete of insufficient strength or improper consistency shall be as required by the Architect subject to one or more of the following, all at the Contractor’s expense and at no extra cost to the Owner.

.1 Changes in mix proportion for the remainder of the work.

.2 Cores drilled and tested from the areas in question as directed by the Consultant and in accordance with C.S.A. Standard CSA A23.1-09 test method A23.2-14C. The test results shall be indicative of the strength of the in-place concrete.

.3 Load testing of the structural elements in accordance with CSA-123.3-M84.

.4 Concrete failing to meet the strength requirements of this specification shall be strengthened or replaced at the Contractor’s expense to the satisfaction of the Consultant.

3.8 Reinforced Slabs



.1 Make all concrete slabs of thickness with reinforcing as noted on drawings.

.2 Set all reinforcing steel as shown or directed. Pitch slabs as noted on drawings.

.3 Build in all anchors, sleeves, inserts, floor drains and other items furnished by this Contractor or others.

3.9 Premoulded Expansion Strips

.1 Provide pre-moulded expansion strips as specified under concrete materials in the following locations:

.1 between edges of all concrete floor slabs and all vertical surfaces

.2 Expansion strips shall be 12.7 mm (½”) thick and shall extend from bottom of slab to within 12.7 mm of top of slabs and platforms then insert raw oakum or polytape bond breaker and fill joint with polysulphide sealant as manufactured by Sternson “Load Flex” or approved equal where exposed. Alternatively provide saw cut exterior slabs, except joint between curb and walks and walks and building shall have expansion joints installed.

3.10 Sidewalks and Platforms

.1 Provide sidewalks and platforms to thicknesses as shown on drawings reinforced with 152 x 152 MW 11.1 x MW 11.1 (6” x 6” #9/9) welded wire fabric for all sidewalks and platforms. Sidewalks and platforms shall be struck off and left with broom finish. Unless otherwise indicated, provide dummy joints as indicated on drawings. Paving’s shall be pitched uniformly away from the building or crowned as directed.

3.11 Concrete Finish Schedule

.1 The following finishes shall be applied to concrete surfaces.

.1 Exterior walks and platforms. Float and broom finish.

.2 Rub exposed sharp edges from concrete to product ⅛” radius edge.

3.12 Cleaning

.1 Contractor shall be responsible for good housekeeping during the work of this Section.

.2 Remove all debris and flammable rubbish from the site daily.

.3 Do not bury any waste concrete on the project site.


Asphalt Concrete Pavement for Building Sites Section 32 13 16 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 The work under this section of the specifications shall include all labour, equipment and material in the forming, handling, furnishing, placement and protection of all asphalt work as indicated on drawings and briefly described as follows:

.1 Patching and matching existing asphalt and new asphalt due to new work as shown on Drawings.

.2 Granular base for all paved areas.

.3 Fine grading of placed granular ‘A’ base for all paved areas.

.4 Painted lines, arrows, etc. as shown on drawings and specified

1.2 Work by Others

.1 Refer to Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Backfill and Grading for stripping, excavation, proof-roll sub-surfaces and sub-base for asphalt surfaces, catch basins, sewers and saw cutting of existing asphalt curbs.

.2 Refer to Section 03 00 00 – Concrete

.3 Refer to Section 32 13 13 – Concrete Paving and Sidewalks

.4 Refer to Section 10 28 00 – Misc. Accessories

1.3 Protection

.1 The Contractor shall protect adjacent property from any damage caused by his operations.

1.4 Asphalt Cement (Ac) Escalation/De-Escalation

.1 A credit or extra will apply for the difference in the price of asphalt cement, based on the monthly Ministry of Transportation AC Price Index, from the month prior to the projects tendered opening to the month of actual paving. If the AC index has not changed by more than 5% up or down, no credit or extra will apply. The credit or extra will be calculated based on the tendered hot mix quantity and its corresponding asphalt cement content required by the job mix formula except for mixes which contain reclaimed asphalt pavement. Calculation of the credit or extra shall also be based on the MTO document “Payment adjustment for changes in the ministry of transportation performance grade asphalt cement price index special provision No. 103S20”, dated May 2009.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Sub-Base Fill

.1 Sub-base fill to be supplied and installed under Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Backfill and Grading (to underside of asphalt paving base course) shall be granular ‘A’ material to Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications 1010. Sub-base fill is only necessary pending a specific site condition.

2.2 Granular Base for Asphalt

.1 Granular base material shall be granular ‘A’ material to Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications 1010 and 1003. The minimum thickness of granular base shall be 450mm.

2.3 Asphalt

.1 All asphalt shall be HL3 and HL4, mixed and applied according to latest M.T.C. SPECIFICATIONS and O.P.S.S. 1150. Refer to pavement legend on the Civil drawing for the specified asphalt thickness. Performance Graded Asphalt Cement shall conform to OPSS 1101.



2.4 Painting

.1 Painting of lines as indicated on plan to be one coat of water borne traffic paint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 General Requirements and Submissions

.1 Prior to commencement of construction the contractor shall submit Job Mix Formula design sheets for Asphalt. The design shall be stamped by a P. Eng. Licensed in the province of Ontario.

.2 The construction shall conform to OPSS 310. Testing by an independent testing agency shall be conducted for different items listed on C 100. All testing reports shall be stamped by a P. Eng. Licensed in the province of Ontario.

.3 The acceptance of Hot Mix Asphalt shall be according to OPSS 313. Payment Modification Factors may be invoked as required.



3.3 Backfill and Grading

.1 The General Contractor shall strip existing asphalt and concrete surfaces as required for new work and all subsurface material shall be removed from the areas to be paved.

.2 Sub-base backfill to be installed to a height below the finished surface of the asphalt paving to allow for the various pavement base course thickness specified below and graded to suit the drainage as outlined on the drawings. All sub-base material to be granular ‘B’ type 2 to O.P.S.S. 1010 Standards. Refer to Section 31 23 00 – Excavation and Grading.

3.4 Granular Base Course

.1 This Contractor shall fine grade sub-base and supply and install a base course of compacted granular ‘A’ material. All granular ‘A’ base material to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1010 and shall be compacted to 100% of its maximum standard proctor dry density.

3.5 Surfacing

.1 Asphalt surfacing shall consist of a base layer and a top layer and applied according to the latest M.T.C. specifications and O.P.S.S. 1150. Where applicable. Refer pavement legend.

.2 All asphalt shall be placed to finished thicknesses specified under 2.3 for all paved areas.

.3 No patented type or other pavement shall be accepted as an alternative.

.4 Maximum allowable surface tolerance shall be ¼” in 10 feet.

.5 Laying of asphalt pavement shall be in strict accordance with the Municipality and Ontario Provincial Standards. Equipment used such as spreading equipment and compaction equipment shall be in accordance with the relevant standards.

3.6 Drainage of Paving

.1 All paved areas shall be uniformly pitched towards new catch basins or to edge of new pavement as indicated on Drawings. Slopes shall be of such grade necessary so as not to allow any water to remain in pools on paved areas where the new paving meets the existing paving. This Contractor will be held responsible for the re-paving of any areas that retain water in pools on their surfaces.

3.7 Painting



.1 Layout parking areas and markings as shown on the drawings and paint with one coat of traffic paint as previously specified. Width of lines to be 4”.

3.8 Cleaning

.1 Contractor shall be responsible for good housekeeping during the work of this section.


Concrete Curbs Section 32 16 13 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of Work

.1 The work under this section of the specifications shall include all labour, equipment and material in the forming, handling, furnishing, placement and protection of all asphalt work as indicated on drawings and briefly described as follows:

.1 Concrete formed curbs.

1.2 Work by Others

.1 Refer to Section 31 23 00 – Excavation, Backfill and Grading for stripping, excavation, proof-roll sub-surfaces and sub-base for asphalt surfaces, catch basins, sewers and saw cutting of existing asphalt curbs.

.2 Refer to Section 03 00 00 – Cast in Place Concrete

.3 Refer to Section 32 13 13 Concrete Paving and Sidewalks

1.3 Protection

.1 The Contractor shall protect adjacent property from any damage caused by his operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Concrete Curbs

.1 Concrete Placement

.1 The concrete shall be placed either by an approved form/extrusion machine, by the formed method, or combination of these methods. The construction shall generally conform to OPSS 353.

.2 Curb profiles as indicated on drawings.

.3 Form handicap drop curbs in locations indicated.

.4 Concrete curbs shall be in accordance with Municipality Standards as applicable.

.2 Machine Placement

.1 The slipform/extrusion machine approved shall be so designed as to place, spread, consolidate, screed and finish the concrete in one complete pass in such a manner that a minimum of hand finishing will be necessary to provide a dense and homogeneous concrete section. The machine shall shape, vibrate and/or extrude the concrete section being placed. It shall be operated with as nearly a continuous forward movement as possible. All operations of mixing, delivery and spreading concrete shall be so coordinated as to provide uniform progress with stopping and starting of the machine held to a minimum.

.3 Form Materials

.1 Form materials for concrete surfaces which will be exposed to view or which require smooth and uniform surfaces for applied finishes or other purposes shall consist of square edged smooth panels of plywood, metal or plastic. The panels shall be square and made in a true plain, clean, free of holes, surface markings and defects.

.2 The quality and strength of formwork materials shall comply with the requirements set forth in this specification and C.S.A. Standard A23.1.

.4 Expansion Joint Strips & Saw Cuts

.1 Expansion joint strips shall be ½” thick fibre expansion joint filler as manufactured by Meadows or Engineer’s approved equal. Shall conform to OPSS 1308



.2 Refer to typical curb details for spacing of expansion joints.

.5 Cement

.1 Cement shall conform to C.S.A. Standard A-5 type as scheduled under “Strength of Concrete”.

.6 Aggregates

.1 Aggregates shall conform to C.S.A. Standard A23.1, Part 5.

.7 Water


.8 Admixtures

.1 Admixtures shall not be used unless prior written approval is obtained from the Architect. All admixtures shall conform to the appropriate A.S.T.M. and C.S.A. Standards. Air entraining admixtures shall conform to the requirements of the latest issue of A.S.T.M. Standard C260.

.9 Curing Compounds

.1 Curing compounds shall conform to the requirements of the latest issue of A.S.T.M. Standard C309.

.10 Strength of Concrete

.1 Unless otherwise noted all exterior concrete shall be Type 1 Portland Cement having a minimum compression strength of 32 MPa at 28 days and have a minimum 5% to 8% entrainment and maximum 0.45 water/cementing materials ratio. Concrete shall meet Municipality Standards for concrete curbs.

.11 Concrete Admixtures

.1 For all exterior exposed concrete an air entraining admixture, Master Builder’s Company Limited, W.R. Meadows Sealtight AEA, Sternson Construction Products N.V.R., or approved equal shall be place in the concrete mix in quantity required to produce an air content of 6% (more or less 1%) by volume as measured with an air meter.

.2 No other admixture shall be used without the written permission of the Architect.

.12 Concrete Curing and Sealers

.1 Concrete sealers shall be applied to all concrete.

.2 Exterior concrete curbs W.R. Meadows Sealtight 1215 White pigmented curing compound.

.3 Concrete curing and sealing treatments must be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer’s labeled instructions. Two coats must be applied.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.2 Concrete Curbs

.1 This contractor shall construct curbs around paved drives and parking areas as indicated and distributed on drawings by either an approved for/extrusion machine, by the form method or a combination of these methods.



3.3 Cleaning

.1 Contractor shall be responsible for good housekeeping during the work of this section.


Planting Section 32 90 00 Page 1 of 5


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Description

.1 Supply and plant all plant material shown and listed on the planting plan, Sheet LA 1 true to botanical name and legibly tagged. The work includes:

.1 Soil Preparation

.2 Planting Mixes

.3 Planting of Trees and Shrubs

.4 Mulch and Planting Accessories

.5 Maintenance of planting areas.

1.2 Related Work

.1 Section 32 92 19 - Seeding

.2 Section 32 92 23 - Sodding

1.3 Acceptance

.1 At the completion of the planting, request an inspection of all the work. Final inspection will be granted only if all of the plant material has been planted and is in good condition. Plant material shall be accepted by Landscape Architect 90 days after planting operations are complete, provided the plants are free of disease, insects and fungal organism etc.

1.4 Guarantee

.1 Guarantee all plant material for a period of one full year following the date of Final Acceptance.

.2 Extend the guarantee period on any replaced plant material for a period equal to the original guarantee period.

.3 Replace any plants not found to be thriving satisfactory or which have lost their natural shape due to die back during the guarantee as originally specified, except in the case of damage caused by neglect or vandalism on the part of others, of fires or acts of nature, as determined by the Project Manager. The Contractor will do such work at his own expense not later than thirty (30) days after written notice is issued.

.4 All work in this section must be done by a Contractor who is fully experienced in this type of work and can provide appropriate examples of similar work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Plants

.1 Plant material is to be planted in early spring (April- May) while dormant before buds have broken, or fall (October - November) unless container grown, balled and burlapped, tree spade material, or wire basket stock is available from holding area. All stock must be dug while dormant. Plants noted on the planting list for spring only must be moved while dormant. If project requirements require planting at other times, plants must be sprayed with anti-desiccant prior to planting operations.

.1 Use only plants nursery grown in Canada, or the North Eastern United States and that are hardy in the Canadian Plant Hardiness Zone 7A. PLANTS ILLEGALLY COLLECTED FROM WILD OR NATURAL SOURCES WILL NOT BE ACCEPTED.

.2 All plants must conform to the species and varieties named botanically on the drawings, and / or in the plant list. No substitutions will be accepted unless approved by the Project Manager in writing prior to tender close.



.3 All plant material must meet the minimum standards of Landscaping/Paysage Canada Guide Specification for Nursery Stock.

.4 All plants must be structurally sound. Trees should have straight single trunks (unless otherwise specified); with well branched and balanced heads typical of the species. All plants shall have strong, fibrous root systems and also be moist and show active green cambium when cut.

.5 All plants must be free of mechanical and biotic damage i.e. broken branches, abrasions to the crown, trunk, branches, and roots, and disease infection or insect infestation.

.6 Measurement: For standard shade trees, the relationship between the caliper, overall height, minimum number of branches in the head, and minimum root spread as indicated in Table 1. For each caliper size specified, the allowed variation in height is indicated in Table1 beside the caliper size. Caliper takes precedence over height. Caliper is not measured less then 15cm. above the ground, or bud union (graft) for trees up to 100mm. and 30cm. above ground level for trees larger than 100mm. in caliper. Trees and shrubs furnished shall meet of exceed the minimum size indicated on the plant list.

TABLE NO.1

Minimum Sizes for Standard Shade Trees

Specified

cal. (mm)

Overall

Height (m)

Min. No.

Branches

in Head

Min.

Branching

Height (m)

Min. Ball

Diameter

(cm)

Min. Ball

Depth (cm)

40 3.00-3.50 8 1.75 60 45

45 3.25-3.75 9 1.75 65 45

50 3.50-4.00 10 1.75 70 50

60 3.75-4.25 11 2.0 75 50

70 4.00-4.50 13 2.0 80 50

80 4.25-5.00 14 2.0 90 55

90 4.50-5.00 15 2.0 95 55

100 5.00-6.00 15 2.00 100 60

Root ball sizes must be increased if necessary in order that at least 75% of the fibrous root system can be contained within the root ball.

TABLE NO.2

Table of Minimum Sizes for Coniferous Evergreen Trees

Height (m) Min. Base Width (cm) Min. Root Ball Diameter (cm)

1.00-1.25 40 45

1.25-1.50 50 50

1.50-1.75 60 60

1.75-2.00 70 70



2.00-2.25 80 80

2.25-2.50 90 85

2.50-2.75 100 90

2.75-3.00 120 95

.7 Root Balls: Burlap all root balls less than 450mm. in diameter with 7 oz. Hessian or Jute burlap or approved equal. Double burlap balls from 450mm – 600mm in diameter. Drum lace root balls 600mm and up with 1/4" biodegradable rope at 200mm spacing.

.8 Inform the Project Manager of origin and holding areas for plant material. The Project Manager has the right to inspect the plant material at any time. The Contractor will assist in arranging inspections if the Project Manager so desires.

.9 Any plant material not meeting any of the above conditions is unacceptable.

2.2 Fertilizer

.1 Organic, phosphorus-free rooting fertilizer applied as per the manufacturer’s direction.

2.3 Mulch

.1 Canada Red Mulch or 1-3” ‘small’ beach stone as specified.

2.4 Accessories

.1 Stakes: 50mm (2x2) wood stakes, minimum height of 8'.

.2 Staking Hose: Use approved horticultural rubber webbing.

.3 Deciduous Tree Trunk Wrap: The tree wrap shall consist of perforated plastic spiral tree wrap or 2 layers of water-proofed, crepe, kraft paper, 2-1/2" in width, and weighing not less than 30 pounds per ream.

.4 Planting Soil: A well-blended mixture of 1/3 topsoil, 1/3 peat moss and soil excavated from planting pit.

.5 Rodent Guard: 150MM (6) corrugated plastic pipe 30” in length.

.6 Winter wrapping of Evergreens: Wrap coniferous evergreens for their first winter, with a double layer of burlap.

.7 Anti-desiccant: Wax-like emulsion to provide a film over plant surfaces reducing evaporation but permeable enough to permit transpiration.

.8 Water: Portable and free of minerals that may be detrimental to plant growth. Supply all water required.

.9 Bed Edging: 6" high heavy-duty commercial grade plastic bed edging with a “full round” top and preformed “hook” at the bottom.

2.5 Topsoil

.1 .1 A loose, friable loam, obtained from the top 8" of fertile soil, free of subsoil, refuse, and other harmful materials with not less than 4% nor more than 25% organic matter and have an acidity range (pH) of 6.0-7.5 . It must be free of clay lumps, stones, weeds, and roots or other material over 1" diameter and other extraneous matter.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Handling and Storage of Plants



.1 Transport plants with care taken to prevent shock or damage. Carefully tie branches in such a manner so as not to break or damage trunks. Pad points of contact with equipment. Cover plants transported in open vehicles with a protective covering to prevent windburn.

.2 Move plants specified B&B (ball and burlap), S.B. (string ball), and W.B. (wire basket) on the plant list with the root system as solid units and with root balls firmly wrapped with burlap. No plant will be accepted when the ball of earth surrounding its roots has been cracked or broken preparatory to or during planting. Keep the root system moist at all times prior to planting. Heel in plant material kept in storage longer than 48 using good loam soil. The Contractor is responsible for all necessary watering and maintenance to preserve the stock in good condition.

3.2 Planting

.1 The Contractor is responsible for verifying the locations of all utilities and for and damage to them, resulting from their own operation.

.2 Plant only under conditions that are conducive to the health and physical condition of all plants.

.3 Planting pits for deciduous and coniferous trees must be excavated to a depth of 40cm (16”) for a diameter of 200 cm (80”). And must be large enough to permit the placing of a minimum of a minimum of 6" of planting soil below and 12" around the plant roots. If any detrimental conditions are discovered during the digging of the planting pits, they should immediately be reported to the Project Manager for decision.

.4 Planting must follow as soon after hole digging as possible, preferably on the same day, so as to control the moisture content of the planting hole. Holes may be excavated earlier than on the day they are to be planted, provided they are immediately backfilled with planting soil.

.5 Loosen bottom of planting hole to a depth of 6"-8" prior to placing 6" minimum planting soil in the bottom of the planting pit and tamp to prevent settlement. Place plants vertically in the planting pit at the same relation to grade level as it was originally grown, and faced to give the best appearance. Bare root plants must be placed so that their roots lie in their natural position. Cut all broken or frayed roots before installing planting mixture. Fertilize with non-phosphorus natural fertilizer. Backfill with planting soil in 8" layers, firmly tamping each layer maintaining the tree in vertical position

3.3 Pruning

.1 Limit pruning at planting to the minimum necessary to remove minor dead or injured branches. Prune in such a manner as to preserve the natural character of the plants. Do not remove leaders. Use only clean, sharp tools. Make cuts that are clean and not through the branch bark ridge area (leave a small stub). Trace cuts, bruises or scars on the bark back to living tissue and remove dead tissue. Shape the affected areas so as not to retain water. Do not paint treated areas unless approved by the Project Manager.

3.4 Staking

.1 Stake or guy all deciduous and coniferous trees as specified using materials and methods shown in the Standard Planting Drawings.

3.5 Installing Tree Wrap

.1 Wrap the main stem of deciduous trees with tree wrap applied in an overlapping spiral manner, each time starting at grade level and extending up to just above the lower branches. It should be cemented together with asphalt, and secured in place with two wound spirally downward in opposite direction and secured in at least 5 places. Alternately, plastic tree guards may be used.

3.6 Installing Bark Mulch



.1 Install mulch inside root saucers to a depth of 3".

.2 Install mulch in planting beds to a depth of 3". Keep mulch 1/2" below adjacent surfaces.

3.7 Maintenance/ Training

.1 Instruct Board Staff and maintain all plant material in a healthy viable condition from the time each plant is planted until the end of the guarantee period. Maintenance consists of:

.1 Ensure adequate moisture.

.2 Biweekly watering any plants not covered by automatic system.

.3 .Removal of weeds and debris from planting beds.

.4 .Fertilizing all plants in the spring season following planting.

.5 Replacing any plants that fail or present a poor appearance.

3.8 Install Bed Edging

.1 Form a slit in the soil along the edge of all planting beds. Insert bed edging and secure with steel stakes (6 per 20 ft. length of edging).

.2 Backfill along both sides of edging.

.3 Ensure that edging is smoothly aligned both vertically and horizontally.

.4 Install bed edging in all areas where the planting beds meet turf.


Topsoil Section 32 91 19 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of work

.1 Protection of adjacent property and work of others.

.2 Topsoil testing analysis and necessary amendments to the topsoil.

.3 Supply of topsoil.

.4 Preparation of the site.

.5 Placement of the topsoil.

1.2 References

.1 This specification refers to the following standards, specifications, or publications:

.1 OPSS 802 Construction Specification for Topsoil

.2 OPSS.MUNI 206 Grading

1.3 Protection

.1 This Contractor shall protect adjacent property from damage caused by his operations and the work of others.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Topsoil

.1 Topsoil shall be a fertile loam screened and free from:

.1 Debris and stones over 25mm in size

.2 Roots, coarse vegetative material occupying more than 2% of soil volume, in size that cannot be covered by the depth of topsoil specified in the Contract Documents.

.3 Imported topsoil shall not have contaminants that adversely affect plant growth.

2.2 QUALITY CONTROL

.1 The Contractor is responsible for topsoil testing analysis and to identify requirements for amendments to topsoil as specified for sod/seed areas and planting areas within the contract documents. Owner shall review and approve the topsoil source and the soil test report from a qualified testing lab with recommendations for use on lawns or trees and shrubs prior to topsoil deliveries. This testing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

.2 Topsoil shall be tested as per the requirements listed in Table 1 and Table 2. Soil contaminated with calcium chloride, heavy metal contaminants, petroleum products and other toxic materials shall not be accepted as top soil and shall not be allowed to be transported on site.

Table 1: Topsoil Chemical Test Requirements

Criteria Requirement

pH Level 5.5 to 7.5

Organic matter, % * 4 to 15%

Phosphorus (Olsen P), ppm 10 to 60

Salts, (mmhos/cm) <1.5



*Note: To reach required percentage, organic amendment may be required. The Contractor shall be responsible for selecting industry acceptable organic matter sources which shall be free from any pathogen that have potential concerns to the public health & safety.

Table 2: Topsoil Heavy Metals Test Requirements

Criteria

Mean Metal Content in Uncontaminated Soil

(ppm)

Requirement – MOE Maximum Permissible Metal Content (ppm)

Arsenic (ppm) 7 14

Cadmium (ppm) 0.8 1.6

Chromium (ppm) 15 120

Cobalt (ppm) 5 20

Copper (ppm) 25 100

Lead (ppm) 15 60

Mercury (ppm) 0.1 0.5

Molybdenum (ppm) 2 4

Nickel (ppm) 16 32

Selenium (ppm) 0.4 1.6

Zinc (ppm) 55 220

.3 The results of the testing shall be presented in writing by the testing laboratory, clearly depicting the results of each defined tested category, along with a statement verifying its suitability for use or the remedial action required.

.4 The Owner reserves the right to test the material after delivery. If the material is determined to be out of specification as a result of this testing, the material shall be corrected or removed from the site at the Contractor's cost.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Stockpiling Topsoil

.1 Topsoil shall be removed, stockpiled, and managed according to the Contract Documents. If allowed to be piled on site, stockpiles shall be constructed neatly with uniform surfaces. When required, the top surface shall be dished. Shall conform to OPSS 802

3.2 Preparation for Topsoil

.1 Areas where topsoil is to be placed shall be fine graded to a uniform surface according to OPSS 206 and Contract Documents. The graded surface shall be free of all debris, roots, branches, and stones in excess of 25mm diameter and other deleterious materials. Any soil



contaminated with calcium chloride, toxic materials, petroleum products and other toxic materials shall be removed and disposed of legally off-site at sole costs of the Contractor.

.2 The surface shall be loosened to a depth of at least 50mm prior to placing the topsoil. Shall conform to OPSS 802.

3.3 Inspection

.1 Prior to placing the topsoil, the site shall be reviewed by the Owner, the General Contractor, and Landscaping Sub-contractor. The consequence of omitting the review step shall be fully borne by the Contractor.

3.4 Placement of Topsoil

.1 The topsoil shall be spread on unfrozen sub-grade, free of standing water, uniformly to a depth of 100mm or as per Contract Documents in the case of sodding or seeding. The imported topsoil may be feathered to meet existing grade. If the area of imported soil is used as beds for shrubs or perennial plants, the depth of placement shall be 500mm.

.2 Topsoil shall be rolled with a mechanical roller of a minimum weight of 220kg, minimum width of 760mm roller, to consolidate it in areas to be seeded or sodded, leaving the surface smooth, uniform, firm against deep foot printing, and to the satisfaction of the Owner. Shall conform to OPSS 802.

3.5 Cleaning

.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for good housekeeping during the work of this section.


Seeding Section 32 92 19 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of work


.2 Levelling, tilling or otherwise preparing of topsoil.

.3 Spreading of fertilizer.

.4 Apply seed by an acceptable method.

.5 Watering

.6 Maintenance for 60 days

.7 Unless otherwise specified, the prices quoted in the contract documents shall include the furnishing of all materials, supplies, equipment, and labour necessary to complete the work required under the contract documents.


.1 The spreading and grading of top soil. Refer to Section 32 90 00.

1.3 References


.1 Section 32 90 00 - Topsoil


.3 OPSS 804 Construction Specification for Seed


1.4 Protection


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Grass Seed

.1 As indicated on site plan.

.2 Grass Seed: Certified Canada No. 1 Grade to Government of Canada Seeds Regulations and having a minimum germination of 75% and minimum purity of 97%. Deliver seed in original container showing:

.1 Seed mix analysis

.2 Percentage of pure seed

.3 Year of production

.4 Weight

.5 Percentage of germination

.6 Name and address of producer and/or distributor

.7 SeedMixture:40% Kentucky Bluegrass, 40% Creeping Red Fescue, 20% Elf Perennial Ryegrass, or approved similar blend

2.2 Fertilizer

.1 Fertilizer shall be applied as per OPSS 804.



.2 Fertilizer: Organic, phosphorus free rooting fertilizer applied as per the manufacturer’s direction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Seeding shall not commence until the surface preparation has been approved in writing by the Owner. Seeding shall commence within 7 Days of surface preparation. The Contractor shall maintain the surface and control erosion until the seed is in place.

.2 Seed shall not be placed when in a frozen condition, under adverse field conditions such as high wind, frozen soil, or soil covered with snow, ice, or standing water.

.3 Contractor shall visit the site to ascertain special conditions which affect this work.


.1 The grading shall be carried out as per OPSS.MUNI 206 and in such a manner as to provide positive drainage for all walkways, sidewalks, and driveways. Steps shall be taken to ensure that all existing drainage patterns are maintained and improved if possible and that the right-of-way has positive drainage over roadside curbs or to an appropriate drainage inlet structure. Any correction required to obtain the above noted shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

.2 Areas to be seeded shall be fine graded to a uniform surface and cleared of all vegetation, debris and stones.

.3 Fertilizer shall be applied to all surfaces, which are to be seeded, and shall be incorporated into the surface by ranking, dicing or harrowing. Fertilizer shall be applied not more than 48 hours before seed is placed.

3.3 Establishment

.1 Water, on a continual basis to ensure germination and continued growth. Watering will be the responsibility of the contractor for a period of 60 days from substantial completion for all seeded areas. The Owner is to be notified when the Contractor or Subcontractor is watering on site.

.2 Water with fine spray, avoiding washing out of seed. Apply enough water to ensure minimum penetration of 2”.

.3 Re seed any areas that fail to establish.

.4 Cut the grass when it reaches a height of 60 mm down to a height of 40mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass as directed by the Owner.

.5 Fertilize seeded areas after the first cutting with an organic fertilizer such as Turf Revolution Green Acres 5-1-5 or approved equal.

.6 Maintain grass areas free of pests and diseases.

.7 Eliminate weeds by mechanical or organic chemical means.

3.4 Placing Seed

.1 The placement of the seed shall be as per OPSS 804.

.2 The finishing grade shall match existing grade exactly and uniformly, blending with the existing surfaces to make a seamless transition.

.3 Sow half of required amount of seed in one direction and the remainder at right angles.



3.5 Maintenance

.1 This Contractor shall instruct the Owner and be responsible for the care of all completed seeding for a period of 60 days. Water shall be applied in a manner that the newly seeded surfaces shall not be eroded or damaged in any way.

3.6 Quality Control

.1 The Owner shall take steps to record the acceptability of the seeded areas by the use of photos, videotaping or other means deemed necessary at the end of the 60 consecutive days of maintenance period. The Owner reserves the right of extending the maintenance period if the installed seed were not deemed acceptable.

3.7 Cleaning



Sodding Section 32 92 23 Page 1 of 3


PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Scope of work


.2 Levelling, tilling or otherwise preparing of topsoil.

.3 Spreading of fertilizer.

.4 Laying of sod.

.5 Watering

.6 Maintenance for 60 days

.7 Provide 3 cubical limestone boulders approximately 1000lbs each and small beach stone on weed control barrier as indicated on the site plan.

.8 Unless otherwise specified, the prices quoted in the contract documents shall include the furnishing of all materials, supplies, equipment, and labour necessary to complete the work required under the contract documents.


.1 The spreading and grading of top soil. Refer to Section 32 90 00.

1.3 References


.1 Section 32 90 00 - Topsoil


.3 OPSS 803 Construction Specification for Sodding


1.4 Protection


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 Nursery Sod

.1 As indicated on site plan.

.2 Sod shall be of such a size and condition that each may be lifted and handled without breaking or tearing and without loss of soil. Sod must not be allowed to dry out. Any sod permitted by the Contractor to dry out shall be rejected whenever in the judgment of the Owner, its survival after placing shall have been rendered doubtful.

2.2 Fertilizer

.1 Fertilizer shall be applied as per OPSS 803.

.2 Fertilizer: Organic, phosphorus free rooting fertilizer applied as per the manufacturer’s direction.



PART 3 - EXECUTION


.1 Sodding shall not commence until the surface preparation has been approved in writing by the Owner. Sodding shall commence within 7 Days of surface preparation. The Contractor shall maintain the surface and control erosion until the sod is in place.

.2 Sod shall not be placed when in a frozen condition, under adverse field conditions such as high wind, frozen soil, or soil covered with snow, ice, or standing water.

.3 Contractor shall visit the site to ascertain special conditions which affect this work.


.1 The grading shall be carried out as per OPSS.MUNI 206 and in such a manner as to provide positive drainage for all walkways, sidewalks, and driveways. Steps shall be taken to ensure that all existing drainage patterns are maintained and improved if possible and that the right-of-way has positive drainage over roadside curbs or to an appropriate drainage inlet structure. Any correction required to obtain the above noted shall be at the expense of the Contractor.

.2 Areas to be sodded shall be fine graded to a uniform surface and cleared of all vegetation, debris and stones.

.3 Fertilizer shall be applied to all surfaces, which are to be sodded, and shall be incorporated into the surface by ranking, dicing or harrowing. Fertilizer shall be applied not more than 48 hours before sod is placed.

3.3 Establishment

.1 Water, sod areas on a continual basis to ensure germination and continued growth of the turf. Watering will be the responsibility of the contractor for a period of 60 days from substantial completion for all sodded areas. The Owner is to be notified when the Contractor or Subcontractor is watering on site.

.2 Re sod any areas or single pieces of sod that fail to establish.

.3 Cut the grass when it reaches a height of 60 mm down to a height of 40 mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass as directed by the Owner.

3.4 Placing Sod

.1 The placement of the sod shall be as per OPSS 803.

.2 The existing areas shall be neatly trimmed by the use of a sod cutter. The finishing grade shall match existing grade exactly and uniformly, blending with the existing surfaces to make a seamless transition.

.3 Care shall be taken to place all sod slightly below all sidewalks, lead walks, and driveways to ensure water runoff.

.4 Sod shall be laid lengthwise with ends close together. Joints in adjacent rows shall be staggered. The entire work shall be done in a thorough, workmanlike manner so that the appearance on completion shall be as nearly as possible to that of a good natural growth in place.

3.5 Maintenance

.1 This Contractor shall instruct the Owner and be responsible for the care of all completed sodding for a period of 60 days. Water shall be applied in a manner that the newly sodded surfaces shall not be eroded or damaged in any way. During this period, any break due to slippage shall be repaired and any sod which is dead shall be replaced.

3.6 Quality Control



.1 The Owner shall take steps to record the acceptability of the sodded areas by the use of photos, videotaping or other means deemed necessary at the end of the 60 consecutive days of maintenance period. The Owner reserves the right of extending the maintenance period if the installed sod were not deemed acceptable.

3.7 Cleaning

